




<D. 






\ « 
^ Oo 




fm.\ f 

^ '“Vo ^ 

'\\W/V * 

: '^ov^ 

Ao ■ - 





^ O ‘i’ O j' ^>sisis^^ A > 



'■0''% <5?*"%^ 

/ “. 



V-V - 



o 

^ aO 

■b^,V ^4- ■^;>' 


•** C^ '^■5' 

d^ cO«o,,V^'- 

t cr »■f ^o 

, w ;.^a'. "c 

- 1 . '-Wt®#.” '^W' !? 

^"OKOO .0^ 




o \r ^ 






>50, 


** 

« '^..s»j OV ■« 

, * \ ^ \ » N OO * ^<^V 





VV 
<VA 


v^ 









A ■tr.S 







o <Ao^ ^ 

^f.” o„ ^o 

^-V '^cf' o 

?-^dV o 

* "^oS^ °'^TO-> '^c 

'■' ‘ S^ " V » " 

^ ■‘‘^ ^ ^ r^ -tl V> V 




N G^ 






V-<v^ 


°o 






° O >ail 

<f oJ-' '/- ^ ^ 

"” v^.-vv'X*"’ V '• •-* '•* *''> *°“°’ 
i'i^; X/ •• " 

% 




o 

O 

i ° 

n -Jf/ '■^ « » « l-'Sj.Xji ^ 

^ yf 'I 







o NO 

V' v^ 

^ (J\^ 

,, _ A, <r\. ^ 

* o.\^* ^ 



o> 

.•V’’ V'*”””’"-; 

r* 


^ ^ <1 






.. «rv'^x. 

^ sX '’ 

«» Jl\ i///l^ o ^#^c^^ 





XV 











t 


I. 


* 



A GRAMMAR OF THE LATIN 
LANGUAGE 


y 


FOR THE 


USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 


'V. c 


E. A. ANDREWS and S. STODDARD 


THREE HUNDRED AND SEVENTIETH THOUSAND 


REVISED, WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS, BY 



E. aAnDREWS, LL.D. 



BOSTON 

HOUGHTON, MIFFLIN AND COMPANY 
New York ; 11 East Seventeenth Street 
(Ct)e Cambriboe 



Copyright, 1857, 

Bt CROCKEll & BREWSTER. 

Copyright, 1885, 

Bt JULIA n. WILSON, ELLEN A. ANDREWS, ELIZABETH C. ORTIZ 
AND MARY ANDREWS. 


All rights reserved. 


% 


The Riverside Press, Cai/ihridi'e 
Printed by II. 0. Iloughtuu and Company. 


E-w, r, 


0 

I 

0 PREFACE. 

j 

_ 

c 

As more than twenty years have elapsed, since the first publication of this 
Grammar, it can scarcely be necessary, in ofiering to the public a revised 
edition of the work, to make more than a passing allusion to its original plan 
or to the circumstances to which it owed its origin. 

For some years previous to the date of its publication, tlie progress of classi¬ 
cal learning in Europe, and particularly in Germany, had been such, as plainly 
to indicate the necessity of a corresponding advance in the manuals of Latin 
grammar employed in the schools of this country. Their deficiencies had 
indeed become so apparent, that various attempts had already been made to 
furnish a remedy by means of translations of German grammars; but none of 
these, however excellent in many respects, had seemed to be fully adapted to 
the purpose for which they were intended. 

To unite the acknowledged excellencies of the older English manuals and of 
the more recent German grammars was the special aim of the authors of this 
work; and to this end their attention was directed, first to the preparation of 
more extended rules for the pronunciation of the language, secondly to a clearer 
exposition o^ its infiectional changes, thirdly to the proper basis of its syntax, 
and fourthly to greater precision in its rules and definitions. 

The system of rules for the division and accentuation of Latin words, pro 
pared in pm-suance of the plan which has just been specified, was accordingly 
more copious than any previously found in the Latin grammars in common 
use in this country. For the purpose also of preventing the formation of erro¬ 
neous habits of pronunciation in the early part of the student’s course, the pe¬ 
nultimate quantities of all Latin words occurring in the Grammar were care- 
'ully marked, unless determinable by some general rule, and the paradigms 
were divided and accented in such a manner as to indicate their true pro¬ 
nunciation. 

In their treatment of Latin etymology, the authors aimed to render its study 
^ess a mere exercise of memory, and in a greater degree an efficient aid in the 
general cultivation of the mental powers. The principal means adopted for this 
purpose consisted in the practical distmetion, every where made in treating 
bfiacted words, between the root, or ground-form, and the termination. 



4 


PREFACE. 


The third prominent peculiarity of the original work was its direct derivation 
of the rules of Syntax from the logical analysis of sentences, and its distinct 
specification of the particular use of each of the several words of which a sen¬ 
tence is composed. This method of treating syntax—a method previously un* 
known in the schools of this country—has, since that period, been extensively 
adopted, and in some instances greatly extended, particularly in a portion of 
the English grammars recently published in this country, and has probably 
contributed more to the advancement of grammatical science, than any other 
innovation of modem times. 

The errors noticed in the original work have been corrected, as successive 
editions have issued from the press, but no opportunity has occurred, until the 
present, of thoroughly revising it in every part. Two years of continuous^ 
labor have now been devoted to its revision, and to the purpose of rendering 
it conformable in all respects to the advanced position which it originally 
aspired to occupy. 

In all the modifications which have now been made, I have aimed to accom¬ 
plish these two purposes—to preserve, as far as possible, the identity of the 
work, and at the same time to bring it as near, as should be practicable, to the 
present state of philological science. Hence, while I have made no changes 
either in language or arrangement, but such as appeared to me quite neces¬ 
sary, I have omitted none which logical accuracy or requisite fulness of ex¬ 
planation seemed to demand. In doing even this it soon became evident, that 
the changes and additions must be more numerous, than would well consist 
with the convenient use of the old and the new editions in the same classes. 
Though not insensible of the trouble occasioned to the teacher by altera¬ 
tions in a familiar text-book, I could not but suppose, that such ipodifications 
as the progress of the last twenty years had rendered necessary, would still be 
welcomed by him, notwithstanding the personal inconvenience arising from 
the disturbance of his previous associations. To his pupils, who will have 
knoAvn no other form of the Grammar, than that in which it now appears, the 
I70rk, it is believed, will not only be as easy of comprehension in its new, as 
in its old form, but in its practical application far more satisfactory. 

Of the minor changes and additions occurring on almost every page, and 
.sven of the occasional rearrangement of small portions of the materials, it is 
unnecessary to speak particularly. The student familiar with fonner editions 
will at once detect these slight modifications, and note them in his memory 
or futxu'e use; and though ho may fail to find a rule, exception, or remark on 
the page where he has been wont to see it, he will still meet with it in the 
same relative position,—in the same section and subdivision of the section in 
which it formerly appeared. 

In the department of Orthoepy will now be found some account of the Con¬ 
tinental mode of pronouncing Latin; and, by means of the joint exhibition o' 


PREFACE. 


5 


i-his and of the English methods, the student will be able to use the Grammar 
with equal facility, whether choosing to adhere to the usual pronunciation of 
f English and American scholars, or preferring that of the continental schools. 

! In the EtjTnology of nouns, no other alteration need be specified, except the 
introduction, in the third declension, of “ Rules for forming the nominative 
singular from the root.” These are copied, in a modified form, from the edi¬ 
tor’s First Latin Book. In themselves they are of considerable utility in 
showing the mutual relations between the sounds of certain letters, and they 
are also closely connected with corresponding changes in some of the verbal 
roots. In the Etymology of adjectives, besides the minor modifications already 
alluded to, a few changes in arrangement have been made in those sections 
-which lelate to Comparison. To pronouns have been added some remarks on 
Pronominal Adjectives, which seemed to require a more particular notice, 
than they had heretofore received, both in their relation to each other and 
to the Adverbial Correlatives. The Etymology of particles has been treated 
somewhat more fully than in former editions—a fulness especially observable 
in relation to adverbs and conjunctions, and which was rendered necessary 
oy tne more extended treatment of those particles in the revised Syntax. 

In almost every section of the Syntax the student wUl meet with modifica¬ 
tions and especially with additions, which, as in other parts of the work, are 
introduced in such a manner as seldom to interfere with the references mado 
to former editions in the series based upon this Grammar. The principal ex¬ 
ception to the latter remark is to be found in sections 247—251, which relate 
to certain uses of the ablative. 

A comparison of the Prosody in the present and fonner editions will show, 
that it has been revised with minute care in every part. Similar attention has 
also been given to the Appendix, in which will be found some additions relat¬ 
ing to Roman Money, Weights and Measures. For the greater convenience of 
the student the Index in this edition has been much enlarged. 

In conclusion, I would briefly indicate the px'incipal sources from which 
liave been derived the various additions and corrections, to which allusion has 
been made. In preparing the original work, the earlier editions of Zumpt’s 
Grammar were consulted at almost every step, and while frequent use was 
made of the grammars of ScheUer, Grant, Adam, Ruddiman, Hickie and 
oth'^rs, the treatises of Zumpt were even then regarded as the most valuable 
embodiment of the principles of Latin philology. It was therefore natural 
ind almost unavtMdable, in revising a work which had in so many points re¬ 
ceived both its form and its substance from the earlier labors of that distin¬ 
guished gi-ammarian, to look to his maturer works for many of the materials 
by means of which our original sketch should be made more complete. 
Accordingly I have constantly consulted the last edition of his Grammar 
*Tanslnted by Dr. Schmitz, and have freely incorporated in this edition such 
1 * 


6 


PREFACE. 


of its materials, as were suited to my purpose. In mcist cases his ideas have 
been either expressed in my own language, or in language so moduled as to 
suit the general plan of my work. In the Et3m3ology, and not unfrequently in 
the Syntax also, the copious Grammar of Ramshom has furnished valuable 
materials; and the Grammars of Key and of Kohner, the latter translated by 
Prof. Champlin, have been consulted with profit and satisfaction. In the 
sections comprising conjunctions, and especially in those relating to gram¬ 
matical analysis, I am happy to acknowledge my indebtedness to Prof, S. S. 
Greene of Brown University. To the sources already specified I must add the 
Latin Lexicon of Dr. Freund, in editing a translation of which 1 had frequent 
occasion to note such matters as promised to be of utility in the revision of this 
Grammar. The additions in the Appendix relating to Roman money, etc., 
'are taken principally from Dr. Riddle’s translation of Dr. Freund’s School 
Dictionary. To these references I will only add, that such other notes re¬ 
lating to Latin philology, as I have made during the past twenty years, so 
far as they were adapted to mv purpose, have either been used in my former 
occasional corrections, or are incorporated in the present edition. 

In taking a final leave of the earliest of the elementary Latin works with 
which my name has been associated, and with w'hich, in my own mind, must 
ever be connected the pleasant memory of my early friend and associate. 
Prof. Stoddard, I trust I shall be pardoned in commending it once more to 
the kind indulgence of the teachers of this country, and in expressing the 
hope that, in its present form, it will be deemed not altogether unworthy of a 
continuance of the favor which it has so long received. I cannot indeed ven¬ 
ture to indulge the hope, that all the imperfections of the w'ork have even now 
been removed, or that, in my attempts to render it more perfect, I may not 
sometimes have fallen into new errors; but this I can truly say, that since its 
-first publication I have devoted much time to its revision, and have sought to 
manifest my sense of the kindness with which it has been received, by doing 
all in my power to render it less unworthy of public favor. 

E. A. ANDREWS. 


New Britain, Conn., Oct., 1857. 


CONTENTS 


ORTHOGEAPHY. 


Uittsfs. 9 

Di^Kiou of letters. 10 

Diphthyiigs. 10 

Punctuation. 10 


ORTHOEPY. 

Continental pronunciation. 11 

English pronunciation. 11 

Sounds of the letters. 11 

- of the vowels. 11 

- of the diphthongs. 12 

- of the consonants. 13 

Quantity of syllables. 14 

Accentuation. 15 

Latin accents. 15 

English accents. 16 

Division of words into syllables.... 16 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Nouns. 19 

Gender. 20 

Number. 22 

Cases. 23 

Declensions. 23 

First declension. 25 

Greek nouns. 26 

Second declension. 26 

Greek nouns. 29 

Third declension. 29 

Formation of nom. sing. 30 

Rules for the gender. 33 

-oblique cases.... 36 

Greek nouns. 45 

.Fourth declension. 45 

Fifth declension. 47 

Declension of compound nouns.. 47 

Irregular nouns. 48 

Variable nouns. 48 

Defective nouns. 49 

Redundant nouns. 54 

Derivation of nouns. 56 

Composition of nouns. 60 

Adjectives. 61 

Adjectives of the first and second 

declensions. 62 

Adiectives of the third declensiou 64 I 


Rules for the oblique cases.... 67 i 


Irregular adjectives. 69 

Defective adjective s.......... 69 

Redundant adjectives.. 69 

Numeral adjectives. 70 

Comparison of adjectives. 74 

Irregular comparison. 76 

Defective comparison. 70 

Derivation of adjectives. 78 

Composition of adjectives. 81 

Pronouns. 82 

Substantive pronouns. 82 

Adjective pronouns. 83 

Demonstrative pronouns. 83 

Intensive pronouns. 86 

Relative pronouns. 86 

Interrogative pronouns. 87 

Indefinite pronouns. 88 

Possessive pronouns. 89 

Patrial pronouns. 90 

Pronominal adjectives. 90 

Verbs. 91 

Voices.91 

Moods. 92 

Tenses. 93 

Numbers..' 95 

Persons. 95 

Participles, gerunds, and supines 95 

Conjugation. 96 

Table of terminations. 98 

Sum . 100 

Prosum, Possum, etc. 102 

First conjugation. 103 

Second conjugation.108 

Third conjugation. Ill 

Fourth conjugation. 116 

Deponent verbs. . 120 

Remarks on the conjugations... 121 

Periphrastic conjugations. 123 

General rules of conjugation ... 124 
Formation of second and third 

roots. 125 

First conjugation. 125 

Second conjugation. 129 

Third conjugation. 131 

Fourth conjugation. 139 

Irregular verbs. 140 

Defective verbs. 145 

Impersonal verbs . 147 

























































































6 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 


Redundant verbs. 150 

Derivation of verbs. 152 

Composition of verbs. 154 

Particles. 156 

Advekhs. 156 

Derivation of adverbs. 160 

Composition of adverbs. 162 

Comparison of adverbs. 163 

Prepositions. 163 

Prepositions in composition.... 167 

Conjunctions. 170 

Inteiuections. 176 

SYNTAX. 

Sentences and Propositions. 177 

Subject. 178 

Predicate. 181 

Apposition. 183 

Adjectives. 184 

Relatives. 189 

Demonstratives, etc. 193 

Reflexives. 198 

Nominative. 200 

Subject-nominative and verb... 200 

Predicate-nominative. 205 

Genitive. 206 

Genitive after nouns. 206 

-after partitives. 211 

-after adj ectives. 214 

-after verbs. 216 

-of place. 221 

-after particles.222 

Dative. 222 

Dative after adjectives. 222 

-after verbs. 225 

-after particles. 230 

Accusative. 231 

Accusative after verbs. 231 

-after prepositions... 237 


-of place. 240 

-after adjectives, ad¬ 
verbs and interjections.241 

Subject-accusative. 242 

Vocative. 243 

.Ablative. 243 

Ablative after prepositions. 243 

-after certain nouns, 

adjectives and verbs. 244 

-of cause, etc. 246 

-of price. 252 

--of time. 252 

-of place. 254 

-after comparatives. 255 

-absolute. 258 

Connection of tenses. 261 

Indicative mood. 263 

Subjunctive mood. 266 


Pag*i. 


Protasis and apodosis. 268 

Subjunctive after particles. 26£ 

-after <jui . 275 

- — in indirect questions 278 

-in inserted clauses.. 279 

Imperative mood. 281 

Infinitive mood. 282 

Participles. 293 

Gerunds and gerundives.296 

Supines. 299 

Adverbs. 30C 

Prepositions. 303 

Conjunctions. 301 

Interjections. 306 

Arrangement. 306 

Arrangement of words. 306 

-of clauses. 310 

Analysis. 312 

Parsing.313 

PROSODY. 

Quantity. 319 

General rules. 319 

Special rules. 322 

First and middle syllables.... 322 

Derivative words. 322 

Compound words. 324 

Increment of nouns. 325 

Increment of verbs. 329 

Penults and antepenults.... 331 

Final syllables. 336 

Versification. 341 

Feet. 341 

Metre. 342 

Verses.-842 

Figures of prosody. 343 

Arsis and thesis. 348 

CjEsura. 347 

Diflerent kinds of metre. 347 

Dactylic metre. 347 

Anapaestic metre. 350 

lambic metre.351 

Trochaic metre. 353 

Choriambic metre.354 

Ionic metre. 355 

Compound metres. 850 

Combination of verses. 356 

Horatian metres. 357 

Key to the odes of Horace. 359 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical figures. 361 

Tropes and figures of rhetoric.... 363 
Roman mode of reckoning time.. 367 

-money, weight, etc. 370 

Abbreviations. 374 

Different ages of Roman literature 374 
~ . 376 

. 378 


INDEX 
























































































































LATIN GRAMMAR 


§ 1 , The Latin language is the language spoken by the an¬ 
cient Romans. Latin Grammar teaches the principles of the 
Latin language. These relate, 

1. To its written characters; 

2. To its pronunciation ; 

8. To the classification and derivation of its words; 

4. To the construction of its sentences; 

5. To the quantity of its syllables, and its versification. 

The first part is called Orthography; the second, Orthoepy, the 
third, Etymology; the fourth, Syntax; and the fillh, Prosody. 


ORTHOGEAPm. 

§ Q, Orthography treats of the letters, and other characters 
of written language, and the proper mode of spelling woixls. 

1. The Latin alphabet consists of twenty-five letters. They have 
ihe same names as the corresponding characters in English. They 
are A, a ; B, b; C, c; D, d ; E, e ; F, f; G, g ; II, h ; I, i; J, j 
V, V ; L, 1; IM, m; N, n; O, o ; P, p; Q, q ; R, r; S, s; T, t; U, u; 
Iv, k ; X, X ; Y, y; Z, z. 

2. The Romans used only the capital letters. 

8. I and j were anciently but one character, as were likewise u and v. 

4 . IF is not found in Latin words, and k occurs only at the beginning of a 
few words before a, and even in these c is commonly used, except in their ab¬ 
breviated form; as, A or Kal. for Kalendte or the Calends. 

6. Y and z are found only in words derived from the Greek. 

6. JS, though called a lotter, only denotes a breathing, or aspiration. 




10 


DIPHTHONGS.—PUNCTUATION. 


§8--5 


DIVISION OF LETTERS. 

§ 3 . Letters are divided into vowels and consonants. 


1. The vowels are .. a. ij o y. 

'Liquijls,. I, m, n, r, 

( Labials,. p, b, /, v. 

The consonants are Mutes, -< Palatals,. c, gy J. 

divided into - (Linguals, . , , , t, d. 

Sibilant,. s. 

Double consonants,. . . . x, z. 

^ Aspirate,. h. 


2. X\b equivalent to cs or z to ts or ds; and, except in com¬ 
pound words, the double consonant is always written, instead of the 
letters which it represents. In some Greek words x is equivalent 
to chs. 


Diphthongs. 

§ 4:. Two vowels, in immediate succession, in the same syl¬ 
lable, are called a diphthong. 

The diphthongs are ae, ai, au, ct, eu, oe, oi, ua, ue, ui, uOy vu, and yi, 
Ae and oe are frequently written together, cb, oe. 

PUNCTUATION. 

§ The only mark of punctuation used by the ancients was a p>omt, 
which denoted pauses of different length, according as it was placed at the top, 
the middle, or the bottom of the line. The modems use the same marks of 
punctuation, in writing and printing Latin, as in their own languages, and as- 
sim to them the same power. 

Marks of quantity and of accent are sometimes found in Latin authors, espe¬ 
cially in elementary works:— 

1. There are three marks of quantity, viz. the first de¬ 

notes that the vowel over which it stands is short; the second, that it 
is long; the third, that it is doubtful, that is, sometimes long and 
Bometimes short 

2. There are also three wittten accents—the acute ( '), the grave 
( '), and the circumflex ("'). These were used by the old gramma¬ 
rians to denote the rising and sinking of the voice in the Roman mode 
of pronouncing words. (See §§14 and 15.) In modern elementary 
Latin works, the acute marks the emphatic syllable of a word, (§ 16), 
the grave distinguishes certain particles from other words spelled in 
the same manner; as, qubdy because; quody which ; and the circum¬ 
flex is placed over certain penultimate and final syllables that are 
formed by contraction. 

The diaeresis (*’) denotes that the vowel over which it stands does 
not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel; as, aer, the air. I 
■s used principally with ae, ai, and oe. 









6,7 


ORTHOEPY.—SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 


11 


ORTHOEPY. 


§ O. Orthoepy treats of the right pronunciation of words. 

The ancient pronunciation of the Latin language being in a great measiire 
tost, the learned, in modem times, have applied to it those principles which 
regulate the pronuuciatiou of their own languages; and hence has arisen, in 
different countries, a great diversity of practice. 

The various systems now prevalent in Europe, may, however, be reduced to 
two—the Continental and the English —the former mevailing, with only slight 
diversities, in most of the countries of continental Europe, and the latter in 
England. ^ Their principal difference is found in the pronunciation of the vowels 
atid diphthongs, since, in both methods, the consonants are pronounced in 
nearly the same manner. 


The Continental Method. 


[According to this system, each of the vowels, when standing at 
the end of a syllable, is considered as having but one sound, which, 
however, may be either short or long. Thus, 


Short a, as in hat. 
Long a, as in father. 
Short e, as in met. 
Long e, as in there. 
Short i, as in sit. 

Long i, as in machine. 
Short 6, as in not. 


Long o, as in no. 
Short u, as in tub. 
Long u, as in full. 

SB or oe, as e in there, 
au, as ou in our. 
eu, as in feudal, 
ei, as i in ice. 


Ri^Siark. These sounds are sometimes slightly modified when 
followed by a consonant in the same syllable.] 


The English Method. 

In the followingrules for dividing and pronouncing Latin words, regard has 
been had both to English analogy and to the laws of Latin accentuation. Soe 
§ 14 and 16. The basis of this system is that which is exhibited by Walker in 
liis “ Pionunciation of Greek and Latin Proper Names.” To pronounce cor¬ 
rectly, according to this method, a knowledge of the following particulars is 
’"cquisite:— 

1. Of the sounds of the letters in all their combinations. 

2. Of the quantities of the penultimate and final syllables. 

3. Of the place of the accent, both primary and so:>nndary. 

4. Of the mode of dividing words into syllables. 


OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 


1. Of the Vowels. 

§ 7 , A vowel, when ending an accented syllable, has al 
Ways its long English sound; as, 
jxP-ter, de'-dU, xi'-vns, W-tus, ttt^-ba, Ty'-nis; in which the accented vowels 
are pronounced as in fatal, metre, vital, total, tutor tyrant,. 


12 


SOUNDS OF THE DIPHTHONGS. 


§8,y 

1. at the end of an unaccented syllable, has nearly the sound 
of a in father or in ah^ but less distinct or prolonged ; as, mu-sa^ 
e-pis'-to-la, a-cer'-hus, Pal-a-me-des ; pronounced mu-zah, etc. 

2. E, o, and m, at the end of an unaccented syllable, have nearly 
the same sound as when accented, but shorter and less distinct; as, 
re'-te^ vo'-lo, u'-su-i. 

3. (a.) I final has always its long sound; as, qui^ au'-di, le-ga-ti. 

Buf. 1. The final i of tibi and sibi haa its short sound. 

(6.) /, at the end of an unaccented syllable not final, has an indis¬ 
tinct sound like short e; as, i^a'-6i-ws (Fa'-be-us), phi-los'-o~phus (phe- 
los'-o-phus). 

Exc. I has its long sound in the first syllable of a word the second of which 
is accented, when it either stands alone before a consonant, as in ot 

ends a syllable before a vowel, as in 

Rjem. 2. F Is always pronounced like t in the same situation. 

§ 8. A vowel has always its short English sound, when fol¬ 
lowed by a consonant in the same syllable ; as, 

maf-nus, ref-^ujn,fn'-go, Jioc^fus'-tis, cyg'ntis, in which the vowels are pro¬ 
nounced as in magnet, seldom, finish, copy, lustre, symbol. 

Exception 1. A, when it follows qu before dr and rt, has the 
sounds of a in quadrant and in quart; as, qua'-dro, quad-ra-gin-ta, 
quar'-tus. In other connections a before r has the sound of a in 
part; as, par-ti-ceps, ar-ma; except when followed by another r, as 
m par-ri-cl-da. 

Exc. 2. Es, at the end of a word, is pronounced like the English 
word ease; as, ig'-nes, au'-des. 

Exc. 3. Os, at the end of plural cases, is pronounced like ose in 
dose ; as, nos, il'-los, dom'-i-nos. 

Exc. 4. Post is pronounced like the same word in English; so 
also are its compounds ; as, post'-quam, post'-e-a ; but not its deriva¬ 
tives ; as, pos-tre-mus. 

Exc. 6. E, I and y before final r, or before r in a syllable not final, when 
followed in the next syllable by any other consonant, except r, have the sound 
of c and % in the English words her and fir; as, fer, fieri, fer'U-lis; hir, Ur'- 
otiS, mgr'-'iw. 


II. Op the Diphthongs. 

§0 Ae and oe are always diphthongs unless separated by dijB- 
CMS. They are pronounced as e would be in the same situation ; as, 
ie'-tas ces'-tas, poe'-na, as-trum. 

1. Ai, ei, oi, and yi, usually have the vowels pronounced separately 
WTen they are accented, and followed by another vov^el, the i ii 
pronounced like initial y, and the vowel before it has its long sound 
as, Maia, Pompeius, Troia, Harpyia; pronounced Ma'-ya, Pam-pe 
tju8, Tro'-ya, Har-py-ya 


§ 10, 11. 


SOtINDS OF THE CONSONANTS. 


18 


Remark 1. jES, when a diphthong and not followed by another vowel, is _ 
pronounced like i; as in hei, om'-neis. 

2. Au, when a diphthong, is pronounced like aw; as, lauSy au-rum 
pronounced laws, etc. 

Rem. 2. In the termination of Greek proper names, the letters au ar3 pro¬ 
nounced separately; as, Men-&-ld-us. 

o T- 1 . T 1 .1 • pronounced like long u ; as, heu, Or- 



Rem. 3. The letters eu are pronounced separately in the terminations e«s 
and eum of Latin nouns, and of all adjectives, whether Greek or Latin, except 
neuter; an, ur'-ce-us, me'-us, me'-um, e'-um. In other situations they form a 
diphthong; as, Eu-^^-pa, The'-seus, e'-heu. 

4. Ua, ue, xd, uo, uu, when diphthongs, are pronounced like wa, 
we, etc.; as, lin'-gua, que -ror, sua'-de-o, qud'-tus, e'-quus. They are 
always diphthongs after q, usually also after g, and often after s. 

6. Ui in cui and huic, when monosyllables, is pronoimced like wi, and by 
some like long i. *• 


in. Op the Consonants. 


§ 10 . The consonants have, in general, the same power in 
Latin as in English words. 

The following cases, however, require particular attention. 


c. 


C has the sound of s before e, i, and y, and the diphthongs ce, ce 
nd eu; as, ce'-do, ci'-bus, Cce-sar, cce'-lum, ceu, Cy'-rus. In other 
situations, it has the sound of k; as, Ca-to, cru'-dus, lac. 

1. Ch has always the sound of A:; as, char ta (kar'-tah.'), machlna 
(mak'-e-nah). 

Exc. C, following or ending an accented syllable, before i followed by a 
vowel, and also before eu and yo, has the sound of sh; as, soda (so'-she-ah) 
caduceus (ca-du'she-us), Sicyon (sish'-e-on). 

Rzmarx. In the pronunciation of the ancient Romans, the hard sound of c and g seems 
to have been retained in all their combinations. 


O. 


G has its soft sound, like j, before e, i, and y, and the diphthongs 
1 C and ce ; as ge-nus, ag'-i-lis, Gy'-ges, Gce-tu-lL In other situations, 
ft has its hard sound, as in bag, go. 

Lxc. WTien g comes before g soft, it coalesces with it in sound; as, agger 
I'j'-er), exc,ggcratic (ex-aj-e-ra'-she-o). 


s. 


§ It. .S'has generally its hissing sound, as in so, thus. 

Exc. 1. (o.) When si followed by a vowel is immediately preceded by a 
consonant in an accented syllable, the s has the sound of m; as, Per'si-a 
per'-ahe-a). 


14 QUANTITIES OP PENULTIMATE AND FINAL STLLABLES. 


(6.) But when si or id followed by a vowel is immediately preceded by an 
accented vowel, the f or 2 has the sound of zh; as, As-pa'-si-a (as-pa'-zhe-ah) 
Sa-ha'-zi-a (sa-ba'-zhe-ah). 

Note. In a few proper names, s preceded by a vowel in an accented syllable and follow 
ed by i before another vowel, has the sound, not of zA, but of sh ; as, A''-ii-a (a'-she-a); sc 
&osia, Theodosia, Lysias. 

Exc. 2. 5’, at the end of a word, after e, au, h, m, n, and r, has 
the sound of z; as, res, lau.s, tral.-i, hi'-ems, lens, Mars. 

English analogy has also occasioned the s in Cce'-sar, coe-su'-ra, mi'-ser, mu'- 
sa re-sid'-tir-ujn, cau'-sa, ro'-sa, and their derivatives, and ui some other words, 
to take the sound of 2 . Cces-a-re'-a, and the oblique cases of Ccesar, retain the 
hissing sound; so likewise the compounds of trans; as, trans'-e-o. 

T. 

§is. 1 . T, following or ending an accented syllable before i 
followed by a vowel, has the sound of sh ; as, ratio (ra'-she-o), Sulpi- 
tius (Sul-pish'-e-us). 

Exc. T, in such case, retains its hard sound (after «, t, or x; as, SaJ-lus'- 
ti-us, Brut'-ti-i, Sex'-ii-us: (b)'m proper names in tion and tpon; as, Eu-ryt'-i-on, 
Am-phic'-ty-on; and (c) in. old infinitives in er ; as, Jlec'-ti-er, for Aec'-ti. 

X. 

2. X, at the beginning of a syllable, has the sound of z; at the end, 
that of ks; as, Xenophon (Zen'-o-phon) ; axis (ak'-sis). 

Exc. 1. When ea; or «« is followed by a vowel in an accented syllable, x 
has the sound of gz; as, exeviplum (eg-zem'-plura), ux-e/-id-us {ug-zo'-re-ub), 
inexhaustus (in-eg-zaus'-tus). 

Exc. 2. X, ending an accented syllable before i followed by a vowel, and 
before u ending a syllable, has the power of ksh; as, noxius (nok'-she-us), 
pexui (pek'-shu-i). 

Rem.\kk. TA and pk. before tA, In the beginning of a word, are silent; as, Chthonia 
(tho'-ni-a). Phthia (thi'-a). Also in the following combinations of consonants, in the bo- 
ginning of words of Greek origin, the first letter Is not sounded:— mrie^non'-l-ca, gna'- 
vus, tme'-sis, Cce'-si-as, Ptol-e-tnce^-us, psal'-lo. 


OF THE QUANTITIES OF THE PENULTIMATE AND 
FINAL SYLLABLES. 

§ 1. The quantity of a syllable is the relative time oc¬ 

cupied in pronouncing it. 

2. A short syllable requires, in pronunciation, half the time of a 
long one. 

Rem. The pertvlthnnte syllable, or penult, is the last syllable but one. The antepenult 
is the last syllable but two. 

The quantity of a syllable is generally to be learned frcm the rules of prosody, §§282_ 

301; but for the convenience of the student, the following general rules are here in 
sorted:— 

8. A vowel before another vowel or h is short. 

4. Diphthongs, not beginning with m, are long. 


§ 14, 15 


ACCENTUATION. 


Id 


5. A voTvel before x, z, j, or any two consonant, except a mute 
followed by a liquid, is long by position^ as it is caLed. 

6. A vowel naturally short before a mute followed by a liquid u 
common, i. either long or short. 

In thin Grammar, when the quantity of a penult is determined by one of the preceding 
ruleSj it is not marked; in other cases, except in dissyllables, the proper mark is written 
OV''r Its vowel. 

To pronounce I.Katin words correctly, it is necessary to ascertain the quantities of theil 
last two syllable.s only; and the rules for the quantities of final syllables would, for this 
purpose, be unnecessary, but for the occasional addition of enclitics. As these are fea* 
erally monosyllables, and, for the purpose of accentuation, are considered as parte of th* 
words to which they are annexed, they cau.se the final syllable of the original word to 
become the penult of the compound. But as the enclitics begin with a consonant, the 
final vowels of all words ending with a consonant, if previously short, are, by the addb 
tion of an enclitic, made long by position. It is necessary, therefore, to learn the quau 
titles of those final syllables only which end with a vowel. 


OF ACCENTUATION. 

I. Of Latin Accents. 

§ 14 . 1. Accent, in Latin, signifies tbe rising and falling of the voice m 

pronouncing the syllables of a Latin word. It is a general rule of the Latin 
language, that every word has its accent. The enclitics, however, have no ac¬ 
cent of their own, but they modify the accent of the words to which they are 
annexed, and prepositions lose their accent, when they precede the cases which 
they govern. 

2. The Latin language has three accents, the acute ('), or rising tone, the 
grave ('), or falling tone, and the circumflex ("), composed of the acute and the 
grave, i. e. of the rising and the falling tone. 

3. A monosyllable, when short by nature, takes the acute, when long by nature, the 
circumflex accent; as, />iz, pars; dds, j&s, sp&s. 

4. In words of two syllables, the penult is always accented; 
as, pd'ter, md'-ter., pen'-na. 

Rem. 1. Words of two syllables have the circumflex accent, when the vowel of the pe¬ 
nult is naturally long and that of the last syllable short; as, K0-7n&,mit-sd^ Iti-cl, jii-rls 
if otherwise, they have the acute; as, hd^-tnd, dd'ds, K5'-md (abl.), and ar'-ti, in whico 
a is long only by position. 

5. In words of more than two syllables, if the penult is long^ 
it is accented ; but if it is short, the accent is on the antepenult; 
as, a-mV-cus, dom'-i-nus, 

Rem. 2. When the accent of a word of more than two syllables falls upon the penult, 
it may be either the circumflex or the acute according as the last syllable is shorter long. 
The antepenult can take no accent except the acute, and in no case can the accent be 
drawn fartbsr back than to the antepenult. 

Exc. Vocatives of the second declension in i, instead of re, from nominatives 
in IMS, and genitives in i, instead of are accented as they would be, if the re¬ 
jected letters were annexed, i. e. with the acute upon the penult, even when 
It is short; aS Vir-gil-i ; Va^U'-ri, in-ge'^i. So, also, the'compounds of jaci/a 
with words which are not prepositions; as, caUe-fd'-cit, tep-e-fd'-cit. 

§ If the penult is common, the accent, in prose, is upon 

the antepenult; a.s, vol'-U-cris, phar'-l-tra, ib’-l-que: but genitives 
in ius, in which i is common, accent their penult in pro&e; as, 


16 


DIVISION OF WORDS. 


§16-ia 


Rem. 3. All the syllables of a Latin word, except that on which the acute or circum¬ 
flex accent falls, are supposed to have th< grave accent, and were pronounced with the 
lower tone. 

1. The rules for the accentuation of compound and simple woids 
are the same; as, se-cum^ sub'-e-o. 

2. In accentuation, the enclitics ffue, ne, ve, and also those which, 
are annexed to pronouns,* are accounted constituent parts of the words 
to which they are subjoined; as, i'-ta, it'-d-que ; vi-rum^ vi-rum'-que. 

n. Of English Accents. 

§ 16 . Accent, in English, is a particular stress of voice upon 
certain syllables of words. Cf. § 5, 2. 

According to the English method of pronouncing Latin, a word may have 
two, tliree, or even four accents. That accent which is nearest to the tennina- 
tion of the word, and which always corresponds in position with the Latin ac¬ 
cent, is called the primary or pinncipal accent, and the secondary accent is that 
which next precedes the primary. The third and fourth accents, in like man¬ 
ner, precede the secondary, and are subject in all respects to the same rules; 
as, pa'-ter, ma'-ter, ser-rn^-nes, doin'-l-ms ; pe-ric'-u-lum, con"-jvr^a'-ti-o, of"- 
por-tu"-ni-td'-tes, ^c-er''''-ci-ta'''-ti-on''-i-bus'-que. 

1. If only two syllables precede the primary accent, the secondary 
accent is on the first; as, mod”-e-ra -tw, tol”-e-rah'A-lis. 

2. If three or four syllables stand before the primary accent, the 
secondary accent is placed, sometimes on the first, and sometimes on 
the second syllable; as, de-mon'-stra-han'-tur, ad'-o-les-cen -ti-a. 

3. Some words which have only four syllables before the primary 
accent, and all which have more than four, have three accents; as, 
mod'"-e-ra''-ti-d-nis, tol'''-e-ra-biL''-i-o-rem, ex-ef''~ci-ta”-ti-d-nis. 


DIVISION-OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 

, VOWELS. 

§ 1T. Every Latin word is to be divided into as many syllables, 
as it has separate vowels and diphthongs. 

Remark. In the following rules, the term vowel includes not only single 
vowels, but diphthongs; and when a particular vowel is mentioned, a diph¬ 
thong, also, ending with that vowel is intended. 

CONSONANTS. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

§ 1S. Remark. The following special rules, relating to particular lettei'S 
or to particular couibinations of letters, are in all cases to be regarded rather 
than the general rules, 19—23, when the latter are inconsistent with the 
former. 

1. II, when standing alone between two vowels, is always joined 
to the vowel that follows it. 

Thus, mi'-ht, tra'-M-i'€^ co'-kcrs, co"-hor-ta'-ti-o. 


* These are^« met, pte, ce cine, and dem; as, tute, egSmet, meapte, hicce, hicclne, idem 




§ 19-21. DIVISION OF WORDS.—SIMPLI5 WORDS. 


17 


2. Ch^ ph, and ih, in the division of words into syllables, are con¬ 
sidered, not as separate letters, but as single aspirated mutes, and 
lieiii e are never separated. 

Thus, A-chiVAdi"-^'Ur-di'-na, Neph'-e-le, Te'-tliys. 

S. GU tU and thl, when standing alone between any two vowels, 
unless the first be m, and hi after u are always separated. 

Thus, yE<j'-le, Ay-lau'^'tis^ At'-las, ath-kf 4-cus f—Pub'-lir-w, Pvb-licf-6-la^ rea 
puh -li-ca. 

4 In writing syllables, x, when standing alone between two vowels 
is united to the vowel before it, but, in pronouncing such syllables, 
its elementary sou mis are separated. 

Thus, sax' (siik'-surn); ax-il'-la (ak-sil'-lah); ex-em'-plum (eg-zszu'' plum) 
Ux-o-ri-us (ug-zo'-re-us). 


GENERAL RULES. 

I. Simple Words. 

§ 10. A.— A single Consonant between two Vowels. 

1. A single consonant, or a mute with I or r, between the last two 
votcels of a word, or between the vowels of any two unaccented syl¬ 
lables, must be joined to the latter vowel. 

Thus, t in pd'-ter and au'-tem; th in cb' -ther ; cl in Hi-eP-d-cles ; q in o'-qua , 
cr in a'-cns and vol'-u-cris ; ckr in a'-chms ; r in tol"-e-ra-bil'-i-us ; m in tf'-tj- 
nw-L)'-(ji-n ; lin am"-bu-ld-td'-ri-us; and in per"-e-yriraia'-ii-o. Respecting 
ch and th cf. § 18, 2. 

Exc. TiP-i and sib'-i are commonly excepted. 

§20. 2. A single consonant, or a mute with I or r, before the 

vowel of an accented syllable, must be joined to the accented vowel. 

Thus, < in i-nV-e-7’a, d in vt-de'-to; ih in re-the'-i'i-us; cl in Eu-cll'-dcs and 
UeP' o^cle'-n ; (ji in a-ares'-tis and a^gric'-d-la ; jwin cor-pre'-i-lus ; g in a-qua'- 
ri-us ; and/»/i7 in Evr-qmrd'Its. 

§21. 3. A single consonant after the vowel of any accented 

syllable, except a penult, must be joined to the accented vowel. 

Thus, m in dom'-i^us and dom"-l-na'-ti-o; t in pnt'-e-ra; th in Scyth -i-a , 
and q in af-ui-la (ak'-we-lah), and Aq"-ui-ta'-ni-a (ak"-we-ta'-ne-ah). 

4. When a mute with I or r follows the vowel of any accented 
syllable, except the penult, the mute is to be joined to the accented 
vowel. 

Thus, cr in ac'-ri-ter^ ac"-ri-mo'-ni-a ; ir in dct"-ri-men'-turn ; nr in cnjf-ri- 
peff, cnp"-ri-m*d'-gus, phi in Paph"-la-go'-ni-a; and jdir h: Aph"-ro-dU' i-a. 
Respecting phi and phr cf. § is, 2. 

Exceptions to the 3d and 4t-^ Rules 

Exc. 1. A single consonant, or a mute with I or r, after an accent¬ 
ed a, e, or o, and before two vowels the first of which is e, i, or ^ 
must be joined to the syllable following the accent. 

3 * 


18 


COMPOUND WORDS.-ETYMOLOGY. 


§ 22-24 


Thus, d in tce'-di-umj me'^-di-d'-im r in hce'-re^^ Cti''-ry-d'-tes, 

ch in bra'-chi-mn ; q in re'-qui-es, re"-qui-es'-co tr in pa'-tri-tis (E-mf-tri-a , 
and r and I in ce"-re-a'-li-a. 

Exc. 2. A sinjxle consonant or a mute with I or r, after an accent¬ 
ed M, must be joined to the vowel following it. 

11ms, r in lu'M-dus, au'-re-us; cr \n Eu'-cri-tus ; gl mjvf-giant; and pi in 
]Vau'-pli-us, du'-pU-co, and du"-pli-ca'-ti-o. Cf. ^ 18, 3. 

§ B. — Two Consonants between two Vowels. 

An}- two consonants, except a mute followed by Z or r in the cases 
before mentioned, when standing between two vowels, must be sepa¬ 
rated. 

Thus, rp in cor'-pus, rm in for'-ma and qer-md'nm; rv in cor-ter'-va; tc in 
ad-o les'-cens ; nn in an'^us ; phth in aph'-ijia ; cch in Ba(/-chti3 and Bac"-cha>- 
na'-li-a ; and thl in ath-le'-ta. 

C. — Three or four Consonants between two Vowels. 

1. Wlien three consonants stand between any two vowels, the last, 
or, if that be Z or r after a mute, the two last, are joined to the latter 
vowel. 

Thus, mpt in emp'-ior, ad-emp'-ti-o; sir in fcrnes^-tra; mpl in ex-em'-plum ; 
rthr in ar-4}iri'-tis. 

2. When four consonants stand between two vowels, two are joined 
to e^h vowel; as, nstr in trans-trum. 

n. Compound Words. 

§23. 1. In dividing a compound word into syllables the com¬ 
ponent parts are to be separated, if the former part ends with a con¬ 
sonant; as, ab-es'-se, in-ers, cir-cum-er'-ro, su'-per-est,siib’-i-tus^ pree- 
ier'-e-a^ trafis'-l-tur, suh'-stru-o. So, also, if a consonant is inserted to 
prevent hiatus, it is joined to the preceding vowel; as, jorocZ'-c-o, red'~ 
c-o, sed-W i-o. 

2. But if the fonner part either ends with a vowel, or has dropped 
ts termination, it is to be divided like a simple word; as, def '-e-ro^ 
diV-i-gens^ he-nev'-o-lus, prees'-to, eg-6-met; — po-tes^ po-tes'-th, an"-i-‘ 
mad-ver'-to, ve'-ne-o (from venum, eo), mag-nan -l-mus, am-bd'-geSj 
Ion-god -VV.S. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§ 24 . 1. EtvTuology treati^ of the different classe? cf words 

their derivation, and their vai-ious inflections. 

2. The classes, into which words are divided in reference to their significa¬ 
tion, are called Parts of Speech. 



§ 25, 26. 


NOUNS. 




3. Tlie parts of -speech m Latin are eight— Substantive or 

Adjective^ Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjwic- 
tion, and Interjection. 

4. The first four are injlected; the last four, which are sometimea 
called Pariicleii, are not injlected, except that some adverbs change 
tlieir termination to express comparison. 

Rem. Substantives, pronouns, and adjectives are often included by grammarians un¬ 
der the genera! term nouns; but, in this Grammar, the word noun is used as synony¬ 
mous with sucsUuitive only. 

§ 1. To verbs belong Participles, Gerunds, and Supines, 

which partake of the meaning of the verb, and the inllection of tbo 
noun. 

2. Injlection, in Latin grammar, signifies a change in the ter¬ 
mination of a word. It is of three kinds— declension, conjugal 
tion, and comparison. 

3. N 'iuns, adjectives, pronouns, participles, gerunds, and supines, 
are declined; verbs are conjugated, and adjectives and adverbs are 
compared. 


NOUNS. 

§ 20. 1 . A substantive or noun is the name of an object. 

2. A proper noun is the name of an individual object; as, 
Ccesar ; Roma, Rome ; Tiberis, the Tiber. 

3. A common or appellative noun is the name of a class of 
objects, to each of which it is alike applicable ; as, homo, man or 
a man ; avis, a bird; quercus, an oak; leo, a Hon; mendacium, 
a falsehood. 

4. A collective noun is one which, in the singular number, de¬ 
notes a collection of individuals ; as, exercitus, an army. 

Rem. 1. The following are examples of nouns used as collectives, via. exertUus, gens, 
juventiis, multitudo, nobitUas, pkbs, populus, turbo, vis, and vulgus. 

5. An abstract noun is the name of a quality, action, or other 
attribute; as, bonitas, goodness ; gaudium, joy; festinatio, haste. 

Rem. 2. A concrete, in distinction from an abstract noun, is one which denotes an ol> 
jeet that has an actual and iodependeut existence; as, Roma, hbmo, pojriilus, Jirrum. 

6. A material noun is the name of a substance considered in 
the gross ; as, lignum, wood ; ferrum, iron ; cihus, food. 

Rkm. 3. Proper, abstract, and material nouns become common, when em¬ 
ployed to denote one or more of a class of objects. A verb in tiie infinitive 
mood is often used as an abstract noun 

7. To nouns belong gender, number, and case. 

Rem. 4. Adjectives and participles have likewise different genders, num- 
oers, and cases, corresponding to those of nouns. 


20 


GSJfDER, 


§ 27-29 


GENDER. 

§ 1. Tlie gender of a noun is its distinction in rega..d to 

sex. 

2. Nouns have three genders—the masculine^ the feminine^ and 
the neuter. 

8. The gender of Latin nouns is either natural or grammatical. 

4. Those nouns are naturally maseuline or feminine, which are used to do* 
Blgnate tlie sexes; as, rtr, a man; 7uulier, a woman. 

6. Tliose are gi-ammatically masculine or feminine, which, though denoting 
objects that are neither male nor female, take adjectives of thn form appropriat¬ 
ed to nouns denoting the sexes. 

Thus, dorntnus, a lord, is naturally masculine, because it denotes a male ; but sermo 
Bpee<'h, is grammatically masculine, because, though not indicative of sex, it takes an 
adjective of that form which is appropriated to nouns denoting males. 

6. The grammatical gender of Latin nouns depends either on their significa¬ 
tion, or on their declension and termination. The following are the general rules 
of gender, m reference to signification. Many exceptions to them, on account 
of termination, occur: these will be specified "under the several declensions. 

§ 28. Masculines. 1. Names, proper and appellative, of 
all male beings are masculine; as, Homerus, Homer; pater, a 
father; consul, a consul; equus, a horse. 

As proper names usually follow the gender of the general name under which they are 
comprehended; hence, 

2. Names of rivers, winds, and months, are masculine, because 
fiuvius, ventus, and mensi^, are masculine; as, Tiberis, the Tiber; 
Aquilo, the north wind; Aprllis, April. 

Exc. Styx and some names of rivers in a and e are feminine. §§ 62, and 41,1 

3. Names of mountains are sometimes masculine, because nums is mascu 

line; as, a mountain of Thessaly; but they usually follow the gendei 

of their tennmatiou; as, hic^ Atlas, hose Ida, hoc Saracte. 

§ 29. F EMiNiNES. 1. Names, proper and appellative, of 
all female beings are feminine; as, Helena, Helen; mdter, a 
mother; juvenca, a heifer. 

2. Names of countries, towns, trees, plants, ships, islands, poems, 
and gems, are feminine; because terra, urhs, arbor, planta, navis, in¬ 
sula, fabula, and gemma, are feminine ; as, 

jEgyphis, Egv'pt; Ooi'inthns, Corinth; pirus, a pear-tree; nardus, spikenard; 
CenUurus, the ship Centaur; Smnos, the name of an island; Eunuchus, the 
Eunuch, a comedy of Terence; amethystus, an amethyst. 

Ezc. Names of countries and islands in wm, ?, and (plur.) a, Ontm, are neuter.—Names 
of towns in j, drum ; four in o, Onis, viz. Trusmo, Hijr/io, Enrbo, and Siilnio, with Tunes, 
TiroSj and Canopus, are nnisculine. Names of towns in mu or on, i, and (plur.) a, drum ; 
those in e and ur of the third declension, indeclinable nouns in i and ?/, and some barba¬ 
rous names, as Suthul, Hispid and Gnitir are neuter.—Names of trees and plants in er of 
the third declension, (§ 60), with 6nccarand rdburnre neuter. A few names :n i/s, i, 60> 
with oleaster, pinaster, Styrax and uneclo are masculine.—A few names of gems in us, i, 
are also ma.sculine. 


•■To distinguish the gender of Latin nouns, grammarians write hie before the masou 
line, fuse before the femiuiue, and Iwc before the neuter. 



§ 30 - 32 . 


COMMON AND DOUBTFUL GENDER. 


21 


§ 30 . Common and Doubtful Gender. Some words are 
either masculine or feminine. These, if they denote things animate, 
are said to be of the common gender; if things inanimate, of the 
doubtful gender. " 

Of the former are parens, a parent; bos, ai ox or cow: of the latter,an 
end 


The following nouns are of the common gender:— 


A flolescens, a youth. 
Affinis, a relative by mar¬ 
riage. 

Ales, a bird. 

Antistes, a chief priest. 
Auctor, an author. 

Augur, an augur. 

Bos, an ox or cow. 

Ciinis, a do^. 

Civis, a citizen. 

Comes, a companion. 
Conjux, a spouse. 

Consors, a consort. 
Conviva, a guest. 

Custos, a keeper. 

Dux, a leader. 


Exsul, an exile. 

Grus, a crane. 

Hospes, a guest, a host. 
Host is, an enemy. 

Index, an informer. 
Infans, an infant. 
Interpres, an interpreter. 
Judex, a judge. 

Juvenis, a y<nith. 

IMartyr, a martyr. 

Miles, a soldier. 
Municeps, a burgess. 
Mus, a mouse. 

Nemo, nobody. 

Obses, a hostage. 
Patruelis, a cousin. 


Palumbes, a wood-pigeon. 
Parens, a parent. 

Par, a mate. 

Praeses, a president. 
Praesul, a chief priest. 
Princeps, a prince or 
princess. 

Serpens, a serpent. 
Sacerdos, a priest or 
priestess. 

Satelles, a lifer-guard. 
Sus, a swine. 

Testis, a witness. 

Vates, a prophet. 

Verna, a slave. 

Vindex, an avenger. 


The following hexameters contain nearly all the above nouns:— 

Conjux, atque parens, princeps, patruelis, et infans, 

Alf inis, vindex, judex, dux, miles, et hostis, 

Augxir, et antistes, juvenis, conviva, sacerdos, 
Muul-(^«e-ceps, vates, adolescens, civis, et auctor, 

Custos, nemo, comes, testis, sus, hb?,-gue, canis-jMe, 

Pro consorte tdri par, piaesul, vema, satelles, 

Mus-^ue obses, consors, interpres, et exsul, et hospes. 


§ 31 . 1. When nouns of the common gender denote males, 

they take a mascuhne adjective; when they denote females, a fem¬ 
inine. 

2. The following are either masculine or feminine in sense, but 
masculine only in grammatical construction:— 

Artifex, an artist. Fur, a thief. Latro, a robber. 

Au'^psx, a soothsayer. Heres, an heir. Liberi, children. 

Eques, a horseman. Homo, a man or woman. Pedes, a footman. 

To these may be added personal appellatives of the first declen- 
si >n ; as, advejia, a stranger; and some gentile nouns; as, Persa, a 
Persian. 


§ 3tJ. 1. The following, though masculine or feminine in sense, 
are feminine only in construction:— 


Copiffi, troops. 
Custodiae, guards. 
Excubiae, sentinels. 


Operae, laborers. 
Proles, 


sSs. 


Vigilite, Watchmen. 


22 EPICENES.—NEUTERS.—NUMBER. § 33 - 35 


2. Some nouns, signifying persons, are neuter, be th in their termi¬ 
nation and construction; as. 


Acroama, a Maneniutn, ) ^ ^ 

Auxilia, auxiliaries. Servitium, ) 


Soortum, 

Prostibulum, 


a prosCxtvJUi, 


3. (a.) In some personal appellatives masculines and feminines 
are distinguished by different terminations affixed to the same root. 
The masculines end in ms, er, o, ^or, etc.; the feminines in a or trix 
as, cdquus, coqua ; magister, magistra ; leno^ lena; inventor., inverdrix, 
tihicen, tihicina ; dvus, avia ; rex, reglna; poeta, poetria. 

(b.) So also in some names of animals; as, equus, equa; gallus, 
galllna ; leo, lea and lecena. Sometimes the words are wholly differ¬ 
ent; as, taurus, vacca. 

4. Some names of animals are sometimes masculine and sometimes 
feminine without regard to difference of sex; as, anguis, serpens, da- 
ma, talpa, tigris, coluber and colubra, etc. 


§33. Epicenes. Names of animals which include both sexes, 
but admit of an adjective of one gender only, are called epicene. 
These commonly follow the gender of their terminations. 

Thus, passer, a sparrow, connis, a raven, are masculine; aqulla, an eagle, wtf- 
pes, a fox, are feminine; though each of them is used to denote both sexes. 

Note. Thi.« class includes the names of animals, in which the distinction of sex is 
seldom attended to. When it is necessary to mark the sex, mas or femlna is usually 
added. 


§ 34. Neuters. Nouns wdiich are neither masculine nor 
feminine, are said to be of the neuter gender ; such are, 

1. All indeclinable nouns; as, fas, nefas, nihil, gummi, pondo. 

2. Names of letters; as, o longum, long o. But these are some¬ 
times feminine, litera being understood. 

8. Words used merely as such, without reference to their meaning, 
as, pater est dissylldbum, pater is dissyllabic. 

4. All infinitives, imperatives, clauses of sentences, adverbs, and 
other particles, used substantively; as scire tuum, your knowledge; 
ultlnium vale, the last farewell; hoc diu, this (word) diu. 

Remark. 1. Words derived from the Greek retain the gender which they 
have in that language. 

Rem. 2. Some nouns have different genders in the singular and plural, ana 
are called heteivyenemis nouns. See § 92. 


NUAIBER. 

§ 35. 1. (a.) Number, in nouns, is the form by which they 

denote whether they represent one object or more than one. 

(b.) Latin nouns have two numbers,—the singu.ai and the plura. 
—which are distinguished by their terminations. The singular num 
ber denotes one olyect; the plural, more than one. 


I 36-39. 


PERSON.—CASES.—DECLENSIONS. 


28 


PERSON. 

2. The person of a noun or pronoun is the character sustained 
by the object which it represents, as being the speaker, the per¬ 
son addressed, or the person or thing spoken of. 

Hence there are three persons. The speaker is of the first person, 
the person adflressed is of the second person, and the person or thing 
spoken of is of the third person. ” 

CASES. 

§ SG. Many of the relations of objects, which, in English, are 
denoted by prepositions, are, in Latin, expressed by a change of ter¬ 
mination. 

Cases are those terminations of nouns, which denote their re¬ 
lations to other words. Latin nouns have six cases ; viz. Nomi- 
native^ Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, and Ablative, 

Remark. Though there are six cases in each number, no noun has in each 
number so many different terminations. 

§ 37. 1. The nominative denotes the relation of a subject to a 

finite verb ; as, ego scribo, I write. Caius dicit, Caius says. 

2. The genitive denotes origin, possession, and many other rela¬ 
tions, which, in English, are expressed by the prej)Osition of or by 
the possessive case; as, vita Ccesdris, the life of Casar, or Ccesar's 
life. 

3. The dative denotes that to or for which any thing is, or is done; 
as, ille mihi librum dedit, he gave the book to me. 

4. The accusative is either the object of an active verb, or of cer¬ 
tain prepositions, or the subject of an infinitive. 

5. The vocative is the form appropriated to the name of any ob¬ 
ject which is addressed. 

6. The ablative denotes privation, and many other relations, espe¬ 
cially those expressed in English by the prepositions with, from, in, 
or by. 

Remark. The nominative and vocative are sometimes called casua recti 
I. 6. the uninflected cases; and the others, casus obllqui; i. e. the oblique or in 
fleeted cases. 


DECLENSIONS. 

§ 38. The regular forming of the several cases in both numbero, 
by annexing Le appropriate terminations to the root, is called de¬ 
clension. 

The Latin language has five declensions or modes of declining 
nouns, distinguished by the termination of the genitive singular, 
which, in the first declension, ends in ce, in the second in i, m the 
third in is, in the fourth in us, and in the fifth in ei. 

§39. The following table exhibits a comparative view of the termina¬ 
tions or case-endings of the five declensions. 


24 


TERMINATIONS. 


§ 40 


Terminations. 


Singular. 



I. 


n. 


m. 


IV. 


V 



M. 


N. 

M. N. 

M. 


N. 


Nom. 

S, 

us, 

er, 

ilm. 

or, etc. e, etc. 

us. 


% 

es, 

Gen. 

ae. 


i, 


is. 


US, 


ei. 

Dit. 

», 


o, 



ui. 



ei. 

Acc. 

am 


iim. 


em,(im), e^etc. 

um. 



em, 

Voc. 

a, 

e, 

er. 

um, 

or, etc. e, etc. 

us. 




AM. 

a. 

o. 


e, (i.) 


u. 


e. 


Plural. 


Nom 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Acc 

Voc 

AM. 


1 

i, 


a, 

es. 

a, (ia). 

us. 

ua, 

arum. 


orum. 


um 

(ium), 

uum. 

iB, 


is, 



ibus, 

ibus. 

(ubus). 

as. 

5s, 



es. 

a, (ia). 

us. 

ua. 

SB, 

h 


a. 

es. 

■ a, (ia). 

us. 

ua. 

is. 


is. 



ibus. 

ibus. 

(ubus). 


es, 

eribn, 

ebus, 

es, 

es, 

ebus. 


Remarks. '■ 

§ 40. 1. The terminations of the nominative, in the third declension, 

^re very numerous. See 55, 58, 62, 66. 

2. The accusative singular of masculines and feminines, always 
ends in m. 

3. The vocative singular is like the nominative in all Latin nouns, 
except those in us of the second declension. 

4. The nominative and vocative plural always end alike. 

6. The genitive plural always ends in um. 

6. The dative and ablative plural always end alike;—in the 1st 
and 2d declensions, in is; in the 3d, 4th, and 5th, in bus. 

I. The accusative plural of masculines and feminines, always ends 
in s. 

8. Nouns of the neuter gender have the accusative and vocative 
like the nominative, in both numbers; and these cases, in the plural, 
always end in a. 

9. Tlie 1st and 5th declensions contain no nouns of the neuter gender, and 
tlie 4th and 5th contain no proper names. 

10. Every inflected word consists of two parts—a roof, and a ter¬ 
mination. The root or crude form., is the part which is not changed 
by inflection. The termination is the part annexed to the root. The 
root of a declined word may be found by removing the termination of 
any of its oblique cases. The case commonly selected for this pur* 
pose is the genitive singular. 

II. The preceding table exhibits terminations only. In the fifth declension, 
the e of the firal syllable, though unchanged, is considered as belonging to th? 
termination. 












§ 41-48. 


FIRST DECLENSION.— EXCEPTIONS. 


25 


FIRST DECLENSION. 


§ 41. Nouns of the first declension end in a, e, ds, es Those 
in a and e are feminine; those in as and es are masculine. 

Lsdn nouns of the fixst declension end only in a. They are thus declined:— 


Singular. 


Nbm. mu'-sa, 
Gen. mu'-sae, 
Dat. mu'-sse, 
Acc. mu'-sam, 
Vbc. mu'-sa, 
Abi. mu'-sa, 


a muse ; 
of a muse ; 
to a muse ; 
a muse ; 
0 muse ; 
with a muse. 


Plural. 

Norn, mu'-sae, 
Gen. mu-sa'-rum, 
Dat. mu'-sis, 
Acc. mu'-sas, 
Voc. mu'-sae, 

Abl. mu'-sis, 


muses; 
of muses; 
to muses; 

muses 
O muses; 
with muses. 


In like manner decline 

Au'-la, a hall. Lit'-e-ra, a letter. Sa-git'-ta, an arrow. 

Cu'-ra, care. Lus-cin'-i-a, a nightingale. Stel'-la, a star. 

Ga'-le-a, a helmet. Mach'-i-na, a machine. 'T6'-ga, o gown. 
In'-su-la, an island. Pen'-na, a feather^ a quill. Vi'-a, a way. 

Note. As the Latin language has no article, appellative nouns may be ren¬ 
dered either with or without the Enghsh articles a, aw, or the, according to their 
.connection. 


Exceptions in Gender. 

§ 4 1. Names proper and appellative of men, as, SuUa, Cinna; poeta, 

a poet; nnuta, a sailor; and names of rivers, though ending in a, are mascu- 
hne: ^ 28, 1 and 2. But the following names of rivers have been used as femi¬ 
nine : viz. Albuln, AlUa, Druentia, Garwnna, Himera, Mati-d^na. Mosella, Trebia. 
Lethe is always feminine. 

Ossa and (Pta, names of mountains, are masculine or feminine. 

2. Iladria, the Adriatic sea, dama in VirgU and Statius, and tedpa in Yirgil, 
are masculine. 

Exceptions in Declension. 

§ 43. Genitive singular. 1. The poets sometimes formed the 
genitive singular in di; as, aula, gen. aulai. 

2. Familia, after imter, mater, flius, or flia, usually forms its gen¬ 
itive in as ; as, mater-familias, the mistress of a family; gen. matris- 
familias; nom. plur. matres-familias or familidrum. Some other 
words anciently formed their genitive in the same manner. 

Genitive plural. The genitive plural of patronymics in es, of sev¬ 
eral compounds in cola and gena, and of some names of nations, is 
sometimes, especially in poetry, formed in um instead of drum; as, 
Aineddurn. Ccelicdlum, terrigenum, Lapithum. So amphorum, drachm 
mum, for amphordrum, drachmdrum. 

Dative and Ablative plural. The following nouns have sometimes 
dhus instead of is, in the dative and ablative plural, especially when 
it is necessary to distinguish them from the same cases of masculines 
in M 5 of the second declension havigg the same root; as, fliis et Jilid^ 
hus. tc sons and da’ighters. 

8 



26 


GBEEK NOUNS.-SECOiej) I>ECLENSION. § 44-46 


Dea, a godde$8. Equa, a mare. 

Filia, a daughter. Mdla, a she mule. 

The use of a similar termination in omima, astna, liberta^ nata, conserva^ and 
pome other words, rests on inferior authority. 


Greek Nouns. 


§ 44. Nouns of the first declension in e, as, and es, and somo 
also in d, are Greek. Greek nouns in a are declined like musa, ex¬ 
cept that they sometimes have an in the accusative singular; as, 
Ossa; acc. Ossam, or Ossan. 


and es, are thus declined in the singular number; 


Greek nouns in e, as, 

N. Pe-nel'-d-pe, 
G. Pe-neF-d-pes, 
D. Pe-nel'-6-pae, 
Ac. Pe-neP-6-pen, 
V. Pe-nel'-d-pe, 
Ab. Pe-nel'-o-pe. 


N. JE-ne'-as, 

G. ^-ne'-ae, 

D. ^-ne'-ae, 

Ac. .E-ne'-am or an, 
V. iE-ne'-a, 

Ab. 


N. An-chi'-ses, 

G. An-chP-sae, 

D. An-clii'-sae, 

Ac. An-chi'-sen, 

V. An-chi'-se or a, 
Ab. An-chi'-sa or e. 


§ 40. In like manner decline 
Al'-o-e, aloes. 

E-pit'-6-me, an abridgment. 
This'-be. 

Bo'-r6-as, ffie north wind. 
Mi'-das. 


Ti-a'-ras, a turban. 

Co-me'-tes, a comet. 
Dy-nas'-tes, a ruler. 
Pri-am'-I-des. a son of Priam. 
Py-ri'-tes, a Icind of stone. 


1. Most proper names in es, except patronymics, follow the third declension; 
but in the accusative they often have both em and en, and in the vocative both 
es and e. See ^ 80, iv, and 81. 

2. Greek nouns of the first declension, which admit of a plural, are declined 
In that number like the plural of musa.- 

8. The Latins frequently change the terminations of Greek nouns in es and 
3 into d; as, Atrides, Atrlm, a son of Atreus; Perses, Persa, a Persian; geo 
metres, geomHra, a geometrician; dree, Circa; epit&rne, epitSma ; grammaUce^ 
grammatica, grammar; rhetorics, rhetorica, oratory.—So also tiaras, tiara. 


SECOND DECLENSION. 


§ 46. Nouns of the second declension end in er, ir, us, um 
os, on. Those ending m um and on are neuter; the rest ar^ 
masculine. 


Nouns in er, us, and um, are thus declined:— 

SiNGUL ^R. 


A lord. A son-in-law. A field. 

S dom'-i-nus, ge'-ner, a'-ger, 

O. dom'-l-ni, gen'-e-ri, 

D. dom'-i-no, gen'-e-ro, a'-gr5, 

.4c. dom'-i-num, gen'-e-rum, a'-griim, 

V. dom'-i-ne, ge'-ner, a 

dif. dom -i-nd. gen'-erd. a'-grd. 


A hinydom 

reg'-num, 

reg'-ni, 

regmo, 

reg'-nusc, 

reg'-num 

reg'-no- 


6 47 - 49 , 


SECOND DECLENSION.-EXCEPTIONS. 


27 


Plural. 


N. dom'-i-ni, gen'-e-ri, a'-grij 

G. dom-i-no'-rum, gen-e-ro'-rum, a-gro'-rum, 

D. dom'-i-nis, “ gen'-e-ris, a'-gris, 

Ac. dom'-i-nos, gen'-e-ros, a'-gro 3 , 

V. dom'-i-ni, gen'-e-ri, a'-gri, 

Ab. dom'-i-nis. gen'-e-ris. a'-gris. 


Like domXiius decline 


reg'-na, 

reg'-no'-rum, 

reg'-nis, 

reg'-nS, 

reg'-na, 

reg'-nis. 


An'-i-mus, the mind. Fo'-cus, a hearth. Nu'-me-rus, a number. 
Clip'-e-us, a shield. Gla'-di-us, a sword. O-ce'-a-nus, the ocean. 
Cor'-vus, a raven. Lu'-cus, a grove. Tr5'-chus, a trundling-hoop. 

Notb. Nouns in ns of the second declension are the only Latin nouns, whose nomina* 
live and vocative singular differ in form. See J 40, It. 3. 


§47. A few nouns in er, like gener, add the terminations to the 
nominative singular, as a root. They are the compounds of g^o and 
fero; a.3, armiger,-eri, an armor-bearer; Lucifer^-eri, the morning 
star; and the following:— 

A-dul'-ter, an adulterer. Li'-ber, Bacchus. Pu'-er, a boy. 

CeT-tl-ber, a Celtiberian. hW-h-xi, (plur.b children. So'-cer, a father-in-icno. 
T-ber, a Spaniard. Pres'-bj^’-ter, an elder. Ves'-per, ike evening. 

MuV-d-ber, Vulcan, sometimes has this form. 


§48. 1. All other nouns in er reject the e in adding the termi¬ 

nations, (§ 322, 4), and are declined like ager ; thus, 

A'-per, a unld boar. Li'-ber, a book. ' Al-ex-an'-der. 

Aus'-ter, the south wind. Ma-gis'-ter, a master. Is'-ter. 

Fa'-ber, a workman. On'-^ger, a wild ass. ■ Teu'-cer. 


2. FtV, a man, with its compounds, and the patrial Trevir^ (the only 
nouns in ir,) are declined like gener. 

Like regnum decline 

An'-trum, a cave. Ex-em'-plum, an example, Prae-sid'-i-um, a defence 

A'-tri-um, a hall* Ne-go'-ti-um,* a business. Sax'-um, a rock. 

BeF-lum, war. Ni'-trum, natron. Scep'-trum, a sceptre. 


Exceptions in Gender. 


§ 49. 1. The following nouns in us and os are feminine:— 

Abyssus, a bottomless pit. Dialectos, a dialect. Miltos, vermilion. 

4ivus, the belly. Diphthongus, a diphthong. Pbarus(os), a light-house. 

Antidotus, an antidote. Doinus, a house, home. Plinthus, the base of a 

Arctos(us), the Northern Eremus, a desert. column. 

Bear. Humus, the ground. Vannus, a cam-fan. 

Carbasus, a sail. 

2. Greek nouns in 5dus (fj dSoc), and mltros^ are likewise feminine; as 
tgnddtis, an assembly; diamitros^ a diameter. 


* Pronounced See S 13- 



28 


SECOND DECLENSION.-EXCEPTIONS. 


§ 50-53. 


§ 50 . Names of countries, towns, trees, plants, etc. are feminine. See 
\ 29,2 


i’'et the following names of plants are masculine:— 


Acanthus, bear's-foot. 
Amarantus, amaranth. 
Asparagus, asparagus. 
Calamus, a reed. 
Carduus, a thistle. 
Dumus, a bramble. 


Ehiilus, an elder. 
Helleborus, hellebore. 
Intubus, endive. 
Juncus, a bulrush. 
Eaphanus, a radish. 
Rliamnos, buck-thorn. 


Ruhus, a blaclcberrg-hii^ 
Tribulus, a caltrops. 

And sometimes 
Amaracus, marjo^'am. 
Cytisus, s7iail-clover. 


Ohaster and pinaster, names of trees, are also masculine. 


The following names of gems are also masculine:— 

Berrllus, a beryl. Chrysoprasus, chrysoprase. So also, 

Curbunculus, a carbuncle. Opalus, ojial. RjTupus, gold-bronze. 

Chiu’^sollthus, chrysolite, and smaragdus, an emerald, are doubtful. 

Names of females in um are feminine: ^ 29, 1; as, mea Glycerium, Ter. 
Names of trees and plants in are generally neuter; as, qpiWi, parsley; 
aconitum, wolf’s bane. 

Canojnis, Pontus, UeUe^ontus, Isthmus, and all plural names in-i of countriei 
and to\\Tis are masculine. Alydus{os) is doubtful. 

Names of countries and towns ending in um, or, if plural, in a, are neuter 
as. Ilium or Ilion; Ecbatdna, 6nim. 


§ 51 . The following are doubtful, but more frequently masculine:— 

Balanus, a date. Grossus, an umnpe fg. Phaselus, a light vessel. 
Barbltos, a lute. Pampinus, a vine-leaf. 

Atdmus, an atom, and c6lus, a distaff, are doubtful, hut more frequently femi¬ 
nine. 


Pelagus, the sea, and virus, poison, are neuter. 

Vulg'us, the common people, is neuter, and rarely masculine. 


Exceptions in Declension. 

§ 5S. Genitive singular. When the genitive singular ends in 
the poets frequently contract it into I; as, ingenl, for ingenii. 

Vocative singular. The vocative of nouns in us is sometimes like 
the nominative, especially in poetry; as, Jiuvius, Latinus, in VirgiL 
So, audi tu, populus Albanus. Liv. 

Proper names in tus omit e in the vocative ; as, Iloratius, Ilordti, 
Virgilius, Virgili. 

FiUus, a son, and genius, a guardian angel, make also fdi and geni. Other 
nouns in ius, including patrials and possessives derived* from proper names, 
tor.n their vocative re^arly in e; as, Delius, Ddie; Tirynthius, Tirynthie; 
Laertius, Laertie. 

§ 53. Genitive plural. The genitive plural of some nouns of 
the second declension, especially of those which denote money, weig ht 
and measure, is commonly formed in um, instead of drwn: § 822, 4. 

Such are particularly nummum, sestertium, denarium, rriedimnum, jugerum 
moditim, talentum. The same form occurs in other words, especially in poetry 
as, deum, libei'vm, Danaum; etc., and sometimes om is round intitead of utn 
as, Achlvom. Virg. Cf. ^ 322, 8. 


§ 54, 55. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


29 


Deu8, a god^ is thus declined:— 


Singular. 

N. . de'-us, 
G. de'-i, 

D. de'-o, 
Ac. de'-um, 
V. de'-us, 
Ab. de'-o. 


Plural. 

N. di'-i. di, or de'-i, 

G. de-o'-rum, 

di'-is, dis. or de'-is, 
jfic. de'-os, 

V. di'-i, di, or de'-i. 
Ah. di'-is, dis, or de'-is. 


or lesusy the name of the Savior, has um in the accusative and « 
in all the other obUque cases. 


Greek Nouns. 


§^4. 1. Os and on, in the second declension, are Greek ter* 

minations, and are commonly changed, in Latin, into us and um ; but 
sometimes both forms are in use ; as, AlpheoSy and Alpheus; Ilion and 
Ilium. Greek names in ros after a consonant commonly change ros 
into er ; as, Alexandros, Alexander; Teucros, Teucer. In a fewwords 
ros is changed to rus ; as, Codrus, hydrus, and once in Virgil, Teucrus 


Greek nouns are thus declined in the singular number:— 


Singular. 

N. De'-los, An-drd'-ge-ds, 

G. De^-li, An-dro'-ge-6, or !, 

D. DeMo, An-dro'-ge-o, 

Ac. I)o'-15n or iim, An-dro'-ge-o, or on, 
V. De'-le, An-dro'-ge-os, 

Ab. De'-lo. An-dro'-ge-o. 


Barbiton, a lyre. 
N. bar'-bi-ton, 
G. bar'-bi-ti, 

D. bar'-bi-to, 
Ac. bar'-bi-ton, 
V. bar'-bi-ton, 
Ab. bar'-bi-to. 


2. The plurals of Greek nouns in os and on are declined like those of domlnus 
and regnum; but the nominative plural of nouns in os sometimes ends in le ; 
as, canephdroe. 

8. In early writers some nouns in os have a genitive in u (ou); as, MenandrU. 
Ter. 

4. A genitive plural in on, instead of occurs in the titles of books and 
in some names of places; as, Georglcbn; Philenon arcs. Sail. 

6. Greek proper names in eus (see ^ 9, R. 8), are declined like dmninus, except 
that the vocative ends in eu; but sometimes in the genitive, dative, and accii- 
tfative also, they retain the Greek form, viz. gen. eds, dat. H (contracted ei), 
acc. ed or ed, and are of the third declension. See 86, and 806, (1.) So in 
Lucretius the neuter peldgus {Greek 7rt\ctycc, tos) has an accusative plural 
peldge for pclagea after the third declension. § 83,1.—See also respecting a geni¬ 
tive in i of some proper nouns in es, ^ 73, Rem.— Panthu occurs in Virgil, A. 2, 
322, as the vocative of Panthus. Cf. ^ 81. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


§ The number of final letters, in this declension, is 

twelve. Five are vowels—a, e. i, o, y; and seven are conso¬ 
nants_ c, I, n, r, s, t, X. The number of its fiutil eyllables ex 

ieeds fifty. 

Rem. The following terminations Delong exclusively to Greek nouns ; viz 
ma, i, y, an, in, on, yn, er, yr, ys, eus, yx, inx, ynx, and plurals in e. 

8 * 



80 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


§56 


Mode of declining Nouns of the Third Declension. 

To decline a word properly, in this declension, it is necessary to know its gender, it* 
nominative singular, and one of its oblique cases; since the root of the cases is not al¬ 
ways found entire and unchanged in the nominative. The case usually' selected for this 
purpose is the genitive singular. The formation of the accusative singular, an J of the 
nominal ive, accusative, and vocative plural, depends upon the gender: if it is masculine 
or feminine, these cases have one form; if neuter, another. 

¥ 

§50. The student should first fix well in his memory the terminations of one 
tif these forms. He should next learn the nominative and genitive singular of the word 
Which is to be declined. If is be removed from the genitive, the remainder will always be 
the root of the oblique cases, and by annexing their terminations to this root, the word is 
declined; thus, rapes genitive (found in the dictionary) rupis,, root rap, dative rup\, etc.; 
»c ars, gen. artls, root ar(, dat. arti, etc.; opus gen. operis, root oper,, dat. operi, etc. 

Rules for Forming the Nominative Singular of the 
Third Declension from the Root. 

I. Roots ending in c, g ; b, m, p; u, d, and some in r, add s to 
form tlie nominative; as, trabis, trabs ; hiemia, hiems; grma, grus. 

Remark 1. T, d and r before s are dropped; as, nepdtis, nepos; laudis, law, 
foris, flos. So Z^oris, bos, drops r. 

Rem. 2. C and g before s form x; as, vocis, vox; regia, rex. So vs forms x 
in nit'is, nix. Cf. H 3, 2, and 171, 1. 

Rem. 3. Short f in the root before c, &, p, t, is commonly changed to S ; as, 
polllcia, pollex; coelibis, coelebs', princlpia, princeps; comltia, comis. So tJ is 
changed to ^ in aucupis, auceps. 

Rem. 4. Short e or d before r in neuters is changed to u ; as, generis, genus; 
tempdria, iempus. 

Rem. 6. Short_^ before r is changed to I in the masculines cdneria, ctnis; 
cucumb'ia, cucumis; pulviria, pulvis; vomeris, vomis. 

Rem. 6. A few and those mostly monosyllabic roots of masculines and fem¬ 
inines, not increasing in the genitive, add es or is, instead of s alone; as, gen. 
•^pis, nom. riqies ; gen. awris, nom. aurds. 

Rem. 7 . A few neuters add ^ to the root to form the nominative; as, retia, 
yetd; maria, mdrL 

n. To roots ending in I and n, to some in r and s, and to those of 
most neuters in t, no addition is made in forming the nominative ; as, 
gLnimdlia, animal; canonia, canon ; honoria, honor ; assis, as. 

Remark 1, Final on and in in the roots of masculines and feminines, become 
9 in the nominative; as, sermonxa, sermo; amindinia, arundo. 

Rem. 2. Final in in the roots of neuters becomes H in the nominative; as 
fiuminia, jlumen. So also in the masculines, oscen, pecten, tibicen and tubicen. ’ 

Rem. 3. Tr and br at the end of a root, take ^ between them in the nomina¬ 
tive; as, pntr'ia, pater; imbria, imber. Cf. \\ 108, 48, and 106. 

Rem. 4. Short 6 is changed to u in ebbria, iMr; femdria, f^mur; jeedria, 

*ur; and robdria, robur. '' 

^ Rem. 5. In the roots of neuters at drops t, and it becomes ut in the nomina¬ 
tive ; as, poemdtia, jjoema; capitis, caput. 

Rem. 6. Roots of this class ending in repeated consonants drop one of tha^ 
tn the nominative; as, feUia, fel; farris, jar; as$ia, as; dewis, bes 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


31 


1.^7- 


The following are the two forms of termination in this declension:— 


Singular, 


Plural 


, Neut. 

a, (ia)j^ 

, um, (imn), 
ibiis, 
a, ria), 
a, (ia), 
ibus. 

The asterisk stands for the nominatiTe, and for those cases which are like it. 

§ sr. The following are examples of the most common forms oi 
uouns of this declension, declined through all their cases. 


Masc. and Fern. 

Neut. 

3fasc. and 

N. 

* 

* 

N. 

es. 

G. 

is. 

is, 

G. 

um, (i 

D. 

h 

h 

D. 

ibus. 

Ac. 

em, (im). 

* 

Ac. 

es. 

V. 


* 

V. 

es. 

Ah. 

e, (i). 

e, (i). 

Ah. 

ibus. 


Honor, honor ; masc. 


Singular. 

N. ho'-nor, 

G. ho-no'-riS{ 
D. ho-no'-ri, 
Ac. ho-no'-rem, 
' V. ho'-nor, 

Ab. ho-Do'-re. 


Plural. 

ho-no'-r^'s, 

ho-n5'-rum, 

ho-nor'-i-bus, 

ho-no'-res, 

ho-n5'-res, 

ho-nor'-i-bus. 


I Turris, a tower; fern. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. tur'-ris, tur'-res, 

G. tur'-ris, tur'-ri-um, 
D. tur'-ri, tur'-ri-bus, 

Ac. tur'-rim, rem, tur'-res, 

V. tur'-ris, tur'-res. 
Ah. tur'-ri, or re. tur'-ri-bus. 


Rupes, 

Singular. 

N. ru'-pes, 
G. ru'-pis, 

J). ru'-pi, 

Ac. ru'-pem, 
V. ru'-pes. 
Ah. ru'-pe. 


rock; fern. 

Plural. 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pi-um, 

ru'-pi-bus, 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes, 

ru'-pi-bus. 


Nox, night; fern. 


Singular. 
N. nox, 

G. noc'-tis, 
D. noc'-ti, 
Ac. noc'-tem, 
V. nox. 

Ah. noc'-te. 


Plural. 

noc'-tes, 

noc'-ti-um,* 

noc'-ti-bus, 

noc'-tes, 

noc'-tes, 

noc'-ti-bus. 


Ars. art: fern. 


Singular. 
N. ars, 

G. ar-tis, 
D. ar'-ti, 
Ac. ar'-tem, 
V. ars, 

Ab. ar'-te. 


Plural. 

ar'-tes, 

ar'-ti-um,* 

ar'-ti-bus, 

ar'-tes, 

ar'-tes, 

ar'-ti-bus. 


Miles, a soldier ; com. gen. 


Singular. 

N. mi'-les, 

G. mil'-i-tis, 
D. mil'-i-ti, 
Ac. mil'-i-tem, 
V. mi'-les. 
Ah. mil'-i-te. 


Plural. 

mil'-i-tes, 

mil'-i-tum, 

mi-lit'-i-bus, 

mil'-i-tes, 

mil'-i-tes, 

mi-lit'-i-bu& 


Sermo, speech ; masc. 

Singular. Plural. 

W. ser'-mo, ser-mo'-nes, 

G. ser-mo'-nis, ser-mo'-num, 

V. ser-mo'-ni, ser-mon'-i-bus, 

ic. ser-mo'-u em, ser-mo'-nes, 

V. ser'-mo, ser-mo'-nes, 

Ab. ser-md'-ne. ser-mon'-i-bus. 


Pater, a father ; masc. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N. pa'-ter. 

pa'-tres, 

G. pa'-tris, 

pa'-trum, 

D. pa'-tri. 

pat'ri-bus, 

Ac. pa'-trem. 

pa'-tres, 

V. pa'-ter, 

pa'-tres, 

Ah. pa'-tre. 

pat'-ri-bua. 


* Pronounced ar'-she^m, noc'-she-um. See $ 12. 





B2 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


§57 


Sedile, a seat; neut 


Singular. 
N. se-di'-le, 
G. se-di'-lis, 
D. se-di'-li, 
Ac. se-di'-le, 
V. se-di'-le, 
Ab. se-di'-li. 


Plural. 

se-dil'-i-a, 

se-dil'-i-um, 

, se-dil'-i-bus, 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-a. 
se-dil'-i-bus. 


Virgo, a virgin fern. 


Singular. 

N. vir'-go, 

G. vir'-gi-nis, 
D. vir'-gi-ni, 
Ac. vir'-gi-nem, 
V. vir'-go, 

Ah. vir'-gi-ne. 


Plural. 

vir'-gi-i)es, 

vrr'-gi-nura, 

vir-gin'-i'bus, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir'-gi-nes, 

vir-gin'-i-bus. 


, a verse ; neut. 


Carmen 

Singular. 

N. car'-men 
G. car'-mi-nis, 
D. car'-mi-ni, 
Ac. car'-men, 
V. car'-men. 
Ah. car'-mi-ne. 


Plural. 

car'-mi-na, 

car'-mi-num, 

car-min'-i-bus, 

car'-mi-na, 

car'-mi-na, 

car-min'-i-bus. 


Animal, an animal: neut. 


Singular. 

N. an'-i-mal, 

G. an-i-ma'-lis, 
D. an-i-ma'-li, 
Ac. an'-i-mal, 

V. an'-i-mal. 
Ah. an-i-ma'-li. 


Plural. 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-ma'-li-um, 

an-i-mal'-i-bua. 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-ma'-li-a, 

an-i-mal'-i-bua 


Iter, a journey; neut. 


Singular. 

N. i'-ter, 

G. i-lln'-e-ris, 
D. i-tin'-e-ri, 
Ac. i'-ter, 

V. i'-ter. 

Ah. i-tin'-e-re. 


Plural. 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

i-tin'-e-rum, 

it-i-ner'-i-bus, 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

i-tin'-e-ra, 

itri-ner'-i-bus. 


Opus, work ; neut. 


Singular. 
N. o'-pus, 

G. op'-e-ris, 
D. op'-e-ri, 
Ac. o'-pus, 

V. o'-pus. 
Ah. op'-e-re. 


Plural. 

op'-e-ra, 

op'-e-rum. 

o-per'-i-bus, 

op'-e-ra, 

op'-e-ra, 

o-per'-i-bus. 


Lapis, a stone ; masc. 


Singular. 

N. la'-pis, 

G. lap'-i-dis, 
J). lap'-i-di, 
Ac. lap'-i-dem, 
V. la'-pis, 

4fc. lp.p'-i-de. 


Plural. 

lap'-i-des, 

lap'-i-dum, 

la-pid'-i-bus, 

lap'-i-des, 

lap'-i-des, 

la-pid'i-bus. 


Caput, a head; neut. 


Singular. 

N. ca'-put, 
G. cap'-i-tis, 
D.» cap'-i-ti, 
Ac. ca'-put, 
V. ca'-put, 
Ah. cap'-i-te. 


Plural. 

cap'-i-ta, 

cap'-i-tum, 

ca-pit'-i-bus, 

cap'-i-ta, 

cap'-i-ta, 

ca-pit'-i-bus. 


Poema, a poem; neut. 


Singular. 

N. po-e'-ma, 

G. po-em'-a-tis, 
D. po-em'-a-ti, 
Ac. po-e'-ma, 

V. po-e'-ma, 
Ab. po-em'-a-te. 


Plural. 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-em'-a-tum, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus, or po-em'-a-tis, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-em'-a-ta, 

po-e-mat'-i-bus, or po-em'-a-tis. 



33 


I 58-61. THIRD DECLENSION.-GENDER. 

Rules for the Gender of Nouns of the Third Declension 

§ Nouns whose gender is detennined by their si^ification, accord-* 

mg to the general rules, 4 28—34, are not included in the lollowing rules and 
exceptions. 


MASCULINES. 

Nouns ending in o, er, or, es increasing in the genitive, os, and 
n, are masculine; as, 

sermo, speech; d<}lor, pain;^os, a flower; career, a prison; j>es, a foot; 
odtum, a rule. 


Exceptions in O. 

§ 59. 1. Abstract and collective nouns in io are feminine; as, 

ratio, reason; legio, a legion. 

Rkm. 1. But numerals in io; as, hinio, trinio, etc., except unio, unity, are 
masculine. 

2. Nouns in do and go, of more than two syllables, are feminine, 
as, arundo, a reed; imago, an image. So also grando, bail. But 
comMo, a glutton ; unedo, the arbute tree ; and harpdgo, a grappUng 
hook, are masculine. 

Rem. 2. Margo, the brink of a river, is doubtful. Cupido, desire, is often 
masculine in poetry, but in prose is always feminine. 

3. Giro, flesh, and Greek nouns in o, are feminine; as, echo, an echo. JBUbo, 
the owl, is once feminine, Virg. A. 4, 482. 


Exceptions in ER. 

§ 60. 1. Laver, a water plant, and tuber, the tuber tree, are feminine, 

but when the latter denotes the fruit, it is masculine. Linter, a boat, is femi¬ 
nine, and once, in Tibullus, masculine. Siser, skirret, is neut3r in the singu¬ 
lar, but masculine in the plural. 

2. The following, in er, are neuter:— 

Acer, a maple-tree. Papaver, a poppy. 

Cadaver, a dead body. Piper, pepper. 

Siler, an oder. 

Spinther, a clasp. 

Suber, a cork-tree. 


Cicer, a vetch. 
Iter, a journey. 
Laser, assafveiida. 


Tuber, a swelling. 
Tiber, a teat. 

Ver, the spring. 
Verber, a scourge. 
Zin^ber, ginger. 


Exceptions in OR. 

. § 61 . Arbor, a tree, is feminine: ddor, spelt; cequor, the sea; marmor 
tLarbie; and cor, the heart, are neuter. 


Exceptions in ES increasing in the genitive. 

1. The following are feminine:— 

Compes, a fetter. Quies, and Requies, rest. T2ges, a mat. 

pierces, a reward. Inquios, restlessness. 

ilerges, a sheaf of com. Seges, gi'owing corn. 

2. Ales, a bird; edmes, a coropanion; hospes, a guest; interpres, an inter¬ 
preter; TBiJes, a soldier; obses a hostage; pi'osses, a president; and satelks, a 
we-guai'd, are common, ^ 30. .^Es, brass, is neuter. 

/ 


54 


TfafRD DECLENSION.-GENDER. 


§ 62, 63. 


Exceptions in OS. 

8. Arbcs, a tree; cos, a whetstone; dos, a dowry; ec«, the morning; and 
rarely^ nopos, a grandchild, are feminine: sctcerdos, custos, and bos are common 
§ 80r* 6s, the mouth, an i 6s, a hone, are neuter; as are also the Greek words 
2pos, epic poetry; and ineU)s, melody. 

Exceptions in N. 

4. Nouns in men with four in n are neuter— gluten, glue; inguen, the groin; 
pollen. One flour; and unguen, ointment. 

6. Four nouns in on are feminine— aedon, a nightingale; halcyon, a king¬ 
fisher; icon, an image; amdsindon, muslin. 

F E ININ E S. 

§ Nouns ending in as, es not increasing in tlie geni¬ 

tive, is, ys, aus, s preceded by a consonant, and x, are feminine; 
as, 

(Bias, age; niibes, a cloud; dvis, a bird; chlamys, a cloak; laus, praise; traba 
a beam; pax, peace. 


Exceptions in AS. 

1. Mas, a male, vas, a surety, and as, a piece of money, or any unit divisi¬ 
ble into twelve parts, are masculine. Greek nouns in as, antis, are also mascu¬ 
line; as, addmas, adamant. So also Melos, the name of a river, ^ 28, 2. Areas 
and Ndmas are common.—2. Few, a vessel, the indeclinable nouns, /as and 
nefas, and Greek nouns in as, dtis, are neuter; as, artocreas, a meat-pie; bttci- 
ras, a species of herb. 

Exceptions in ES not increasing in the genitive. 

3. Ae^.rAces, a scimitar, and coles or c6lis, a stalk, are masculine. Antistes, 
pahmbes, votes, and vepres, are masculine or feminine. Cacoethes, hippomdnes, 
nepenthes, and pandees, Greek words, are neuter. 


Exceptions in IS. 

§ 63 . 1. Latin nouns in nis are masculine or doubtful. 


(1.) Llasc. Omis, hair; ignis, dro; yarn's, bread; manes, (plur.), departed 
spirits.—(2.) Masc. or fern. Amnis, a river; dnis, ashes; finis, an end; clunis 
the haunch; canis, a dog; /unis, a rope. The plurals, cineres, the ashes ^ the 
dead, and fines, boundaries, are always masciiline. 

2. The following are common or doubtful:— 


Angiiis, a snake. Corbis, a basket. Tigris, a tiger. 

Callis, n ^ ^ Pollis,/ne four. Torquis, a cAain. 

Canalis, a conduit pipe. Pulvis, dust. 

Coutubernalis, a comrade. Scrobis, a ditch. 


8. The following are masculine:— 


Axis, an axle. 
Aqualis, a water-pet. 
Cassis, a net. 

Caul’S, or 
Colis, 


a stakk. 


Cenchris. a serpent. 
Coll is, a hill. 

Cucumis, a cucumber. 
Ensis, a sword. 

Fascis, a bwndU. 


FoUis, a pair of beHotoa. 
Fustis, a club. 

Glis, a dormome. 

Lapis, a stone. 

Lemures, pi., spectres. 


I ♦ 54 , 65 . 


THIRD DECLENSION.—GENDER. 


35 


Mensis, a month. 
Mugllis, a mvJXeX. 
Orbis, a circle. 
Piscis, a Jish. 

Post is, a post. 
Quiris, a Roman. 
Saxtmis, a Samnite. 


Sanguis, hhod. 

Semis, or 
Semissis, 

Bessis, compounds 
Centussis, of os. 
Decussis, 

Tressis, 


Sentis, u brier. 
Sodalis, a companion. 
Torris, a firebrand. 
Unguis, a nail. 

Vectis, a lever. 
Vermis, a worm. 
Vomis, a ploughshare. 


4. Names of male beings, rivers, and months in is are masculine ; 
48, IXs, Pluto ; Anubis, an Egyptiar. deity , Tigris, the river Tigris; 
dpriiis, April. See § 28. 


Exceptions in TS. 

Names of rivers and mountains in ys are masculine; as, Rdlys, Othrys. Sea 
i 2B, 2 and 8 


Exceptions in S preceded by a consonant. 

§ 64 . 1. Dens, a tooth; fons, a fountain; mons, a mountain; and pom, 

a bridge, are masculine. So also are auceps, a bird-catcher; chdlybs. steel; 
eliens, a client; ellops, a kind of fish; epops, a hoopoe; gryps, a griffin; hydrops, 
the dropsy; merqps, a kind of bird. Rudens, a rope, is masculine and very 
rarely icminine. 

2. The following nouns also are masculine, viz. (a.) these which are properly 
adjectives —confiuens and toirens, sell, amnis; occidens and oriens, soil, sol; 
(6.) compounds of dens — tridens, a trident, and bidens, a two-pronged mattock;— 
but bidens, a sheep, is feminine; (c.) the parts of as ending in tm; as, sextans, 
gmadrans, triens, dodrans, and dextans. 


S. The following are common or doubtful:— 

O 

Adeps, grease. Seps, a kind of serpeM- Serpens, a serpent. 

Forceps, pincers. Scrobs, a ditch. Stirps, the trunk of a tree. 

Animam an animal, which is properly an adjective, is masculine, feminine, 
or neuter. 


Exceptions in X. 

§65. 1. AX. Anthrax, cinnabar; edrax, a raven; cordax, a kind of 

dance; dropox, an ointment; styrax, a kind of tree; thorax, a breast-plate; and 
Atax, the river Aude, are masculine; Umax, a snaU, is common. 

2. EX. Nouns in ex are masculine, except /cea:, forfex, lex, nex, prex, 
(obsolete in nom. and gen. sing.), and supellex, which are feminine; to which 
add (4 29) edrea;, Uex, murex, pellex, saidvitex. Atiiplex is neuter and very 
rarely masculine or feminine. Alex, a fish-pickle; cortex, bark; imbrex, a gut¬ 
ter-tile; obex, a bolt; and silex, a fiint, are doubtful: senex, an old person: 
QTrx, a herd; rumex, sorrel,* and phmex, pumice-stone, are masculine ana 
very rarely feminine. 

8. IX. Cdlix, a cup;/orma;, an arc£, phoenix, a kind of bird; &ud spadix, 
a palm-branch, are masculine: Idrix, the larch-tree; perdix, a partridge; and 
Borix, a swollen vein, are masculine or feminine. 

4. OX. Box and hox, names of fishes, are masculine. 

5. UX. Tradux, a vine-branch, is maseffiine. 

6. YX. Bombyx, a silk-worm; calyx, the bud of a flower; coccyx, a cuckoo; 
Wyx, a wild goat, and names of mountains in yx, as Eryx, are masculine. 
Onyx a box made of the onyx-stone, and sardbnyx, a precious stone; also, 

tne heel, and calx, lime; hjnx, a lynx, and sanJ^x, a kind of color, arg 
ffvasculiue or feminine. 

Note. Bombyx, when it signifies silk, is doubtful. 

V. Ofidneunx, septunx, dScunx, deunx, parts of as, are maeculine. 



36 


THIRD DECLENSION.—GENITIVE. 


§ 66-69 


^ NEUTERS. 

§ 66. Nouns ending in a, e, c, I, t, ar, ur, us, and men 
are neuter; as, 

diad^ma, a crown; rete, a net; hydromeU, mead; lac,, milk; vecdgal, revenue 
cdptd, the head; calcar, a spur; guttur, the throat; pectus, the breast; and ilu~ 
men, a river. 


Exceptions in L, C, and E. 

Mitgil, a mullet, and sol, the sun, are masculine. Scd, salt. Is masculine or neuter 
in the singular; but, in the plural, it is always masculine. I.ac is neuter and rarely 
masculine. Franeste is neuter, and once in Virgil feminine. 

Exceptions in AR and UR. 

§ 67. Furfur, bran; sdlar, a trout; turtur, a turtle dove; and vuUur, a 
vulture, are masculbse. 

Exceptions in US. 

1. L^pus, a hare; and Greek nouns in pus (ttovc), are masculine; as, tripos, 
a tripod; but lagdpus, a kind of bird, is feminine. 

2. Nouns in us, having utis, or udis,\n the genitive, are feminine 
as, juventus, youth; incus, an anvil. 

3. Pecus, -udis, a brute animal, and teUtis, the earth, are feminine. Pessinus, 
and Selinus, names of towns, are also feminine. See § 29. 

4. Grus, a crane; m«s, a mouse; and sus, a swine, are masculine or feminina. 

6. Rhus, sumach, is masculine, and rarely feminine. 

Rules for the Oblique Cases of Nouns of the Third 

Declension. 

GENITIVE SINGULAR. 

§68. 1. The genitive singular of the third declension of Latin 

nouns always ends in is ; in Greek nouns it sometimes ends in os 
and us. 


A. 

2. Nouns in a form their genitive in dtis; as, di-a-de-ma, di-Or 
dem'-d-tis, a crown; dog'-ma, dog'-md-tis, an opinion. 

E. 

8. Nouns in e change e into is; as, re-te, re-tis, a net; se-dC le, 
se-dl'-lis, a seat. 


L 

4. Nouns in t are of Greek origin, and are generally iodecliaable; but Z*?/. 
irom'ri-li, mead, has hydrro-meV-i-tis in the genitive. 

O.' 

§ 60 . Nouns in o form their genitive in dnis; as, ser'-mo, set 
vid-nis, speech; pd'-vo, pa-vd'-nis, a peacock. 


§ 70, 71, 


THIRD DECLENSION.—GENITITE. 


3 ^ 


Remark. Patrials in o have 6nis; as, MacMo,-dnis; but some hare {htis , 
fcs, EburdneA, etc. See 3d exception to increments in 0, ^ 287. 

Exc. 1. Nouns in do and go form their genitive in mis; as, a-run' 
do, a-run'-di~nis, a reed; i-ma-go, i-mag'-i~nis, an image. 

But four dissyllables— cudo, udo, ligo and mp,ngo; and three ti isyllables— 
comedo, wmio, aud haiydgo, have bnis. 

Exc. 2. The following nouns, also, have Inis: — Apollo; hdmo, a man; neTM, 
nobody; and iurbo, a whirlwind. 

Giro, flesh, has, bv syncope, carnis. Anio, the name of a river, has AniSnia; 
Net'ii, the wife of Mars, Neriinis; from the old nominatives, Anim, and Ner 
Hines. 

Exc. 3. Some Greek nouns in o form their genitive in us, and their other 
cases singular, in o ; as. Dido, gen. D'ulus, dat. Dido, etc.; Argo, -us ; but they 
ure sometimes declined regularly; as. Dido, Didbnis. 


Y. 


Greek nouns in y have their genitive in yos; as, mlsy, misyos, or, by contrac¬ 
tion, misys. 


c. 


§ 70 . The only nouns in c are a'-lec, ctrZe'-cis, fish-brine, and lac, lacf- 
tis, milk. 


L. N. R. 


Nouns in I, n, and r, form their genitive by adding is ; as, consul, 
con'su-lis, a consul; ca-non, can'-d-nis, a rule; ho-nor, ho-no-iis, 
honor. 


So, An'-I-mal, an-i-ma'-lis, an animal, 
Vi'-gil, vig'-i-lis, a watchman. 
Ti'-tan, Ti-ta'-nis, Titan. 

Si'-ren, Si-re'-nis, a Siren. 
DeT-phin, del-phi'-nis, a dolphin. 


CaF-car, cal-ca'-ris, a sp^ir. 
Car'-cer, car'-cfi-ris, a prison. 
A'-mor, a-mo'-ris, love. 
Gut'-tur, gut'-tu-ris, the throat. 
Mar'-tyr, mar'-ty-ris, a martyr. 


Exceptions in L. 

Fel, gaU, and mel, honey, double I before is, making feUis and mcUis. 

Exceptions in N. 

§ 71 . 1. Neuters in en form their genitive in Xnis; as, flu-men, 

fiu-mi-nis, a river; glu-ten, glu-ti-nis, glue. 

The following masculines, also, form their genitive in inis: — oscen, a bird which fbr» 
bi'4e>l by its notes; pecten, a comb; tiblcen, a piper; and tubUen, a trimpeter. 

2. Some Greek nouns in dn form tbei'" genitive in ontis; as, Lnomidon, Imo- 
vudantis. Some in In and yn add is or os; as, Trdchin, or 2'rdchyn, Trachinii 
or Trachynos. 


Exceptions in R. 

1. Nouns in ter drop e in the genitive ; as, pa-ter, pa'-trk, a father 
Bo also imber, a shower, and names of months in her ; as, October 
Octobris. 


4 


88 THIRD DECLENSION.—GENITIVE. § 72-74 

But crdter, a cup; soter, a savior; and Uter, a brick, retain e in the gon- 
ftive. 

2. Far, a kind of com, has farris ; hepar. the liver, Jiepdtis : Lar or 
Lartis; iter, a. journey, has itineris from tne old nominative Jvpiter 
Jdvis ; and cor, the heart, cordis, 

8. These four in ur have 6ris in the genitive;— Sbur, ivory, femury the thigh* 
j}cur, the liver; robur, strength. 

Femur has also ftmXnis, and jecur, jecin&ris, and jocindris. 


AS. . 

§ 79. Nouns in as form their genith e in atis ; as, ce'-tas, ce-ta - 
lis, age; pi'-e-tas, pi-^e-ta-tis, piety. 

Exc. 1. As has assis; mas, a male, mams; ras, a surety, vadis; and vda, a 
vessel, vCisis. Anas, a duck, has andtis. 

Exc. 2. Greek nouns in as form their genitive according to their gender; 
the masculines in antis, the feminines in aais or ados, and the neuters in atis ; 
as, adCimas, -antis, adamant; lampas, -ddis, a lamp; Pallas, -ddis or -ados; bued- 
ras, -atis, a species of herb. Areas, an Arcadian, and Ndmas, a Numidian, 
which are of the common gender, form their genitive in ddis. Melos, the name 
of a river, has Meldnis. 


ES. 


§ 73. 1. Nouns in es form their genitive by changing es into is, 
Itis, elis, or etis; as, ru'-pes, ru'-pis, a rock; mi'-les, mil-i-tis, a soldier; 
•te-ges, seg'-e-tis, growing corn ; qui'-es, qui-e-tis, rest. 

Remark. A few Greek proper names in es (gen. is) sometimes fonn their 
genitive in ei, or, by contraction, i, after the second declension; as, Achilles, is, 
ei or -i: and a few in ce after the first declension; as, Orestes, is or ce. 


2. Those which make Uis are, 


Ales, a bird. 

Ames, a fowler's staff. 
Antistes, a priest. 
Caespes, a turf. 

Comes, a arnipanion. 
Eques, a hoi'seman. 
Foines, touchwood. 


Gurges, a whirlpool. 
Hospes, a guest. 

Limes, a limit. 

Merges, a sheaf of corn. 
Miles, a soldier. 

Palmes, a vine-branch. 
Pedes, a foot^soldier. 


Poples, the ham. 

Satelles, a lifeguard. 
Stipes, the stock of~% tree. 
Tennes, an olive txmgh. 
Trames, q by-path. 

Veles, a skirmisher. 


8. The following have His: — cibies, a fir-tree; aries, a ram; indiges, i man 
deified; inter^-ea, an interpreter; i>anes, a wall; seges, acorn-field; and %es, 
a mat. 

4. The following haveefo’s;— C%hes; (7res, a Cretan; lebes, a caldron; mag- 
B<! 3 , a loadstone; quies ao^L requies. re?>t’, inquies, restlessness; and tdpes (used 
only in acc. and abl.), tapestry.—Some Greek proper names have jitLer His or 
U in the genitive; as, ChrHnes, -etis, or -is. Dares, -etis, or -is. 

Exc. 1. Ohses, a hostage, and preeses, a president, have Idis. Eeres, an heir 
and merces, a reward, have edis; pes, a foot, and its compounds, have i^s. 

Exc. 2. Ceres has Cereris ; bes, bessis ; prees, preedis; and oes, aeiis. 


IS. 

^ §74. Nouns in is have their genitive the same as the nomina¬ 
tive ; as, au-ris, at •ris, the ear; d -vis, a-vis, a bird. 


S 75, 76. 


THIRD DECLENSION.-GENITIVE. 


39 


Exc. 1. The following have the genitive in Sris: — dnis, ashes; puivls, duat 
v5this cr vomer, a plouglishare. Cucumis, a cucumber, hixs iris and rarely is. 

Exc. 2. The following have {f/w:— capis, a cnp; cassis, a helmet; cuspis, a 
point; Ulpis, a stone; and prdmulsis, an antepast. 

Exc. 3. Two have Inis: — pollis, fine flour, and sanguis or sanguen, h cod. 

Exc. 4. Four have itis: — IHs, Pluto; lis, strife; Qidris, a Koman; and 
Samnis, a Samnite. 

Exo. 6. Glis, a dormouse, has gllris. 

GREEK NOUNS. 

1. Greek nouns in is, whose genitive ends in ios or eos, {io( or fuc), form their genitive 
fca Latin in is; as (a.) verbals in sis ; as, basis, mathSsis, etc. (i.) compcunds of polls 
(or3X/f); as, metropdlis, Neapdlis, etc.; and (c.) a few other proper names, as CharybtJis, 
Lackdsis, Syrtis, etc. In some nouns of this class the Greek genitive is sometimes found; 
■s, NfrnSsis, Nemesios. 

2. Greek nouns in is, whose Greek genitive is in Idas (iS'oz), form their Latin genitive 
In idis; as, tT^is, aspis, ephemSris, pyramis, tyrannis, JEniis, Iris, NerSis, etc. Tigris 
has both is and Idis ; and in some other words of this class later writers use is instead 
of \dis. 

3. Claris has CharUis; SaHmis, Salamlnis, and Ni'mffjs, Simoentis. 


OS. 


§ To. Nouns in os form their genitive in oris or Mis; as, /Zo5, 
Jlo-ris, a flower; ne-pos, ne-po-tis, a grandchild. 


The following have &ris :— 

Flos, a flower. Lahos or labor, labor. Os, Ike mouth. 

Glos, a husband's sister. Lf’pos or lepor, unL Eos, dew. 

Houos or honor, honor. Mos, a custom. 

Arbos or arbor, a tree, has 5ris. 


The following have otis :— 

Cos, a whetstone. NonocSros, a unicorn. a grandchild. 

Dos, a dowry. Rhinoceros, a rhinoceros. Sacerdos, a pi'iest. 


Exc. 1. Gustos, a keeper, has cvstodis ; bos, an ox, bbns; and ds, a bone, ossis. 
Exc. 2. Some Greek nouns in os have 6is in the genitive; as, heros, a hero; 
Minos; TV’os, a Trojan; and some Greek neuters in os are used in tho third 
declension in the nominative and accusative only; as, Ai'gos, cetos, ipos, milos. 


US. 

§ 76 . 1. Nouns in us form their genitive in ms or ms; as, 

nus, gen'-e-ris, a kind; tern-pus, tem'-pd-rls, time. 

2. Those which make iris are, ac^is, (chaff fiinus, ginus, gUmrn, IS 

tiis, munus, 6lus, Onus, Opus, /xmdus, rfidiis, scilus, sidus, ulcus, vellus, viscus and 
minus. In early writers pignus has somitimes pigneris. 

3. Those which make Oris are, corpus, decus, dedec7is, fadnus, finus, frigug, 
Upus, litus, nemus, pectus, pious, penus, pignus, stercus, tenipus, and tergus. 

Exc. 1. These three in us have udis: — incus, an anvil; pdliis, a morass; and 
iubscus, a dove-tail. Peciis, a brute animal, has jiecidis. 

Exc. 2. These fiv3 ha.YQ utis:—juventus, youth; tOdm, safety; seneciua, old 
»ge; serviius, slavery mrtds, virtue. 


40 


THIRD DECLENSIOX.-GENITIVE. 


§ 77, 78 


Exo. 3. Monosyllables in us have uris; as, crus, the leg; jus, right; jus, broth 
»n«a, a monse; p/5, matter; rus, the country; tus, frankincense; except f/7'us 
and sm, which have fp'uis, and suis; and 7'hns, which has 7'hids or ro/i's. Tellus 
the earth, has telluris; and Jjgus or Lujur, a Ligurian, has Liyuris. 

Exc. 4. F7'a7is, fraud, and Imis, praise, have fraudis, laudis. 

Exc. 6. Greek nouns in pus have ddis; as, trijms, Udjiddis, a tripod, 

CEdifms, -ddis; but this is sometimes of the second declension. 

Exc. 6. Some Greek names of cities in us have untis ; as, Amdthus, Amathutu 
Us. So Ti'apiizus, 0/nis, Ptssinus, and Selhim. 

Exc. 7. Greek nouns ending in eus are all proper names, and have theil 
genitive in eos; as, Orpheris, -cos. But these nouns are found also in the second 
declension; as, Oiphtvs, -ei ox-l. Cf. ^ 64, 6. 

rs. 


§ 77 . 1. Nouns in ys are Greek, and make their genitive in 

yis (contracted ys), or, as in Greek, yos (woe) ; as, 



S preceded by a consonant. 

2. Nouns in s, with a consonant before it, form their genitive by 
changing s into is or tis ; as, trahs, tra-his, a beam ; M-ems, hi-e-mis, 
winter; pars, par-tis, a part; frons, fron-tis, the forehead. 

(1.) Those in bs, tus, and ps ; as, scrobs, hieTTcc, siirps, change s into is; except 
gryjis, a grithn, which has yi-yphis. 

Remark. Compounds in ceps from capio have Ipis ; as, princeps, prindpis. 
a prince. But auceps has aucupis. 

(2.) Those in Is, ns, and rs, as, puls, gens, ars, change s into tis. 

Exc. 1. The following in ns change s into dis:—fro7is, foliage; glans, an 
aconi; jugkiTis, a walnut; lens, a nit; and libidpcTis, a weigher. 

Exc. 2. Ti7'yns, a town of Argolis, has Tiry7ii}iis in the genitive. 

T. 

§ 78. 1. Nouns in t form their genitive in Xtis. They are, caput, 

the head, gen. cap-l-tis; and its compounds, occiput and sinciput. 

X. 

2. Nouns in x form their genitive by resolving x into or gs, and 
inserting i before s; as, vox (vocs) vo-cis, the voice; lex (legs) le-gis, 
a law. 

(1.) Latin nouns in ax have acis; as, fomax, forndcis, fax, fads. 

Mo at Greek nouns in ax have dcis ; as, thorax, ihordcis; a few have dcis ; as, 
zdrax, cordcis; and Greek names of men in nax have nactis; as, Aslydmue, 
Asiyanactis. 

(2.) Nouns in ex have ids; as, judex, jtultds: dbex has obids or objicis; and 
tliex, vihlds. Nex, prex, {nom. ous.), resex nud fe7ilsex have ecis ; dlex, 7iar~ 
}hex, and vern;ex have ecis, and fax, feeds. Lex and 7'ex have egis; aqullex 
ind grex have dgis; remex has remigis; senex, sdnis; and supellex, supelleciUis 


§ 79, 80. THIRD DECLENSION.-DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 41 


(8.) Nouns in ix have Icis; as, cervix^ cervicis; and less frequently Icie; aa, 
cdUx, calicis. But nix has nivis; strix, foreign names of men, and gentile nouns 
In rix have (gis; as, Bituinx, Dumndrix, etc. 

(4.) Nouns in ox have ocis; as, vox, vocis; but Cappddox has Cappaddcis 
AUdbrox, AllL>br6gis; and nox, metis. 

(6.) Of nouns in ux, cmx, dux, trddux, and nux have ucis; Inx and P(illuX\ 
ids. — Cunjux has coiijiigis, frux (nom. obs.) frugis, and faux, faucis. 

) Yx, a Greek termination, has yds, yds, or ygis, ygis. Onyx and sar 
dSriyx, in which x is equivalent to chs (§ 3, 'i) have ychis; as, dnyx, onychis. 

DATIVE SINGULAR. 

§ 79. The dative singular ends in i; as, senno, dat. sennont. 

Anciently it also ended in e; as, morte ddtus. Varro in Gellius. So asre f\ 
ipri, Cic. and Liv.; and Jure iox juri. Liv. 

ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. 

(rt.) The accusative singular of all neuter nouns is like the nomi- 
D itive. 

(&.) The accusative singular of masculines and feminines, ends in 
em. Yet some Latin nouns in is, which do not increase in the geni¬ 
tive, have im, and some Greek nouns have im, in, or a. 

1. Many proper names in is, denoting places, rivers, or gods, have the accus¬ 
ative singular in im; as, Hispdlis, Tiberis, Anubis; so also Albis, Athesis, Boetis, 
Avar or Ardris, Bilbilis, Ajns, Osiris, Syrtis, etc. These sometimes, also, make 
the accusative in in; as, Albin. Scaldis has in and em, and Llids, im, in, and em, 
Liger has Ligerim. 

2. The following also have the accusative in im :— 

Amussis, a mason's rule. Mephitis, air. Sinapis, mustard. 

Buris, a phughr-tail. Pelvis, a basin. Sitis, thirst. 

Cannabis, hemp. Ravis, hoarseness. Tussis, a cough. 

Cucumis, {gen. -is), a cucumber. Securis, an axe. Vis, strength. 

8. These have im, and sometimes em: — 

Febris, a fever. Puppis, the stern. Restis, a rope. Turris, a Unoer. 

But these have em, and rarely im: — 

Bipennis, a battle-axe. Navis, a ship. Sementis, a sovnng. 

Clavis, a key. Praesepis, a stall. Strigilis, a feshr-b'i'U^ 

il essis, a hai'vest. 

4. Lens and pars have rarely lentim and partim; and erdtim from crates, .a 
found in Plautus. 

6. Early writers formed the accusative of some other nouns in im. 

Accusative of Greek Nouns. 

§ 80 . The accusative singular of masculine and feminine Greek 
nouns sometimes retains the Greek terminations in and a, but often 
ends, as in Latin, in em or im. 

I. Tklasculine and feminine Greek nouns, whose genitive increases in is or os. 
\mpurre, that is, with a consonant going before, have their accusative in cm or a ; 
l»,lampa 3 ,lampddis (Greek-/oc), lampdda; chlAmys, chlamydis, chla7:<iydem, or 
yda; Helicon, Helicdnis, He’icdna. 

4* 


42 THIRD DECLENSION. - VOCATIVE ASs’D ABLATIVE. § 81,8^ 

Rkmakk. In like manner these three, which have is jnire in the genitive— 
Ihvs, Trois, Troem, and Trda^ a Trojan; hh'os, a hero; and Minos, a king oi 
Crete. — A/‘r, the air; cuther, the sky; delphin, a dolphin; and jxean, e hymn 
have usually a; as, aira, cethera, dtlphlna, piBdiui. Pan, a god, has only a. 

Exc. 1. Masculines in is, whose genitive increases in is or os impure, have 
tlieir accusative in im ovm; sometimes in idem; Pains, Paridis; Panm, or 
Paridem. 

Exc. 2. Feminines in is, increasing impurely in the genitive, though they 
nsuall}’ follow the rule, have sometimes im or in; as, Plis, Elidis; Elin or A'Zt- 
dem. So tU/ris, gen. is or idis ; acc. tigrim or tigiin. 

II. Masculine and feminine Greek nouns in ts not increasing, and in ys, gen. 
yo$, form their accusative by changing the s of the nominative into m or n; as, 
Char^bdis, (gen. Lat. -is, Gr. joic), acc. Charyhdim or -in; Hdlys,-yis or-yo$, 
Bulym or -yn. So rhus, gen. 7‘]iuis, has rhun or rhum. 

III. Proper names ending in the diphthong eus, gen. ei and Sos, have the ac¬ 
cusative in ea; as, Theseus, Tkesea; Tydeus, Tydea. See § 54, 5. 

IV. * Some Greek proper names in es, whose genitive is in is, have in Latin, 
along with the accusative in em, the tennination en, as if of the first declension; 
as, Achilles, Achillen; Xerxes, Xei-xen; Sophdcles, ^phdclen. Cf. ^ 45, 1. Soma 
also, which have either etis or is in the genitive, have, besides Hem, eta, or em, 
the termination en; as, Chremes, Thales. 

VOCATIVE SINGULAR. 

§ 81 . The vocative is like the nominative. 

Remark. Many Greek nouns, however, particularly proper names, drop * of the 
nominative to form the vocative; as, Daphnis, Daphni; TSthys, Tethy ; Melamput, 
Melarnpu; Orpheus, Orpheu. Proper names in es {gen. is) sometimes have a vocative 
In e, after the first declension; as, Socrates, Soerdte. } 45, 1. 

ABLATIVE SINGULAR. 

§8S. The ablative singular commonly ends in e. 

Exc. 1. ( t.) Neuters in e, al, and ar, have the ablative in i; as, 
sedlle, sedlli; animal, animdli; calcar, calcdri. 

(b.) But names of towns in e, and the following neuters in ar, have e in the 
ablative; viz. baccar, an herb; /Vm, com; hepnr, the liver; jubar, a sunbeam; 
nectar, nectar; a pair. So, sal, salt^ RHe, a net has either e or i; mare, 
the sea, has sometimes iu poetry mare in the ablative. 

Exc. 2. (a.) Nouns which have im alone, or both im and in in the 
accusative, and names of months in er or i.s, have i in tlie ablative; 
os, vh, vim, vi; Tiberis, -im, i; December, Decembri; Aprilk, Aprili. 

(6.) But Batis, cannabis, and sindpis, have e or i. Tigris, the tiger, has 
{{gride ; as a river it has both Tigrlde and TigH. 

Exc. 3. (a.^ Nouns which have em or im in the accusative, have 
their ablative m e or i; as, turi'is, turre or turri. 

{b.) So Elis, acc. EMem and Elin, hns Elide or Eli. But restis, and most 
Greek nouns with idis iu the genitive, have e only; as, Paris, -idis, -ide. 

^ Exc. 4. (a.) Adjectives in t'Sj used as nouns, have commonly i in the abla* 
live, but sometimes e; as, J'amdidris, a friend; natdlis, a birthday; soddlis, t 
companion; triremis, a trireme.—Participles in tw, used as nouns, have coiiv 
moniy e in the ablative, bu« continens has t. 


THIRD DECLENSION.-PLURAL CASES. 


43 


5 83. 

(5.) Wllen adjectives inis become proper names, they always have e; as 
Juvenalis, Juzenale. Afflnis and ved'dis have generally e; as have always jut5d« 
nis, a youth; ididis, a rod; and volucns, a bird. 

I'lxc. 6. (a.) The following, though they have only em in the accusative 
have e or i m the ablative, but most of them have oftener e than i :— 


Amnis, 

Collis, 

Ignis, 

Pars, 

Supellex, 

Anguis, 

Convallis, 

Imber, 

Postis, 

Tridens, 

Avis, 

Corbis, 

Mugilis, 

Pugil, 

Sordes, 

Unguis, 

Bilis, 

Finis, 

Orb is. 

Vectis, 

Civis, 

Classis, 

Fustis, 

Ovis, 

Sors, 

Vesper. 


(b.) Occiput has only i, and rus has either eori; but rure commonly signiliea 
from the country, and iniri, in the country. Jld has rarely i. 

(c.) So also names of towns, when denoting the place where any thing ij 
said to be, or to be done, have the ablative in i; as, Carthnylni, at Carthage; 
BO, Anxiiri and Lncedicindni, and, in the most ancient writers, many other nouns 
occur with this termination in the ablative. Candlis has i, and very rarely e. 

Exc. 6. Nouns in ys, which have ym ox yn m the accusative, have their ab¬ 
lative m. ye ox y ; as, Atys, Atye, or Aty. 

NOMINATIVE PLURAL. 

§ 83 . I. The nominative plural of masculines and feminines 
ends in es; as, sermones, rupes: —but neuters have a, and those 
whose ablative singular ends in i only, or in e and i, have ia; as, 
caput, capita ; sedile, sedilia ; rete, retia. Aplustre has both a and ia. 

1. Some Greek neuters in os have ^ in the nominative plural; Qs,,m6lo8; 
nom. plural, mele; (in Greek fxiKtAy by contraction So Teiiype. 

GENITIVE PLURAL. 

n. The genitive plural commonly ends in um; sometimes in ium. 

1. Nouns which, in the ablative singular, have i only, or both e 
and i, make the genitive plural in iun; as, sedile, sedlli, sedilium 
turruf, turre or turri, turrium. 

2. Nouns in es and is, which do not increase in the genitive singu¬ 
lar, have ium ; as, nuhes, nubinm ; liostis, hostium. 

Exc. CdniSj jtivSnis, fdris, mugilis, proles, strues, and rates, have um; so oftener 
have dj/is, stingilis, and volucins; less frequently sedes, and, iu the poets 

wiiiy, ambdges, cades, eludes, repres, and ccelestis. 

8. Monosyllables ending in two consonants have ium in the geni¬ 
tive plural; as, urbs, urbium; gens, gentium ; arx, arcium. 

Exc. Lynx, sphinx, and ops (nom. obsolete) have um. 

Most monosyllables in s and x pure have um, but the following have him; 
dos, mas, glis. Us, os. (ossis), faux, (nom. obs.) nix, nox, strix, vis, generally 
fraus and mus; so also fur and /-en, and sometimes lar. 

4. Nouns of two or more syllables, in ns or rs, and names of na¬ 
tions ill as, have commonly ium, but sometimes um; as, cliens, clieru 
f'Vtn or clientum, Arplnas, Arpmatium. 


44 THIRD DECLENSION.-PLURAL CASES. § 84, 85 

1.) Other nouns in ns generally have wm, but sometimes turn; as, cefos, ceicl- 
ium or oelaiium. Penates and ojMmdtes have usually ium. 

5. The following have ium: — cdro, compes^ linter imher, iiter, venter^ Samnis. 
Quii-iSj and usually Insuber. Fornax and pCdus have sometimes ium, 

6. Greek nouns have generally um; as, gigas, f/igantwn; Arabs, Ardbum^ 
Thrnx, Thrdcum ;—but a few. used as titles of boo'kft, have sometimes bn; as, 
Fpigrammn, epigrammdton; Aletamorphosis, -eon. The patrial Malebn also ia 
found in Curtins, 4, 13. 

Remark 1. Bos has bown in the genitive plural. 

Rem. 2. Nouns which want the singiilar, form the genitive plural as if they 
were complete; as, manes, manium; coelites, cceliium; ilia, ilium; as if from 
mdnis, coelrs, and He. So also names of feasts in alia; as. Saturnalia Satuma- 
Hum; but these have sometimes di'um after the second declension. Alts has 
Bometimes, by epenthesis, alituum. See ^ 322, 3. 


DATIVE AND ABLATIVE PLURAL. 

§ 8^. The dative and ablative plural end in ihus. 

Exc. 1. Bos has hohus and huhus, by contraction, for bovtbus; sus has sUbus by 
syncope, for sulbus. § 322, 5, and 4. 

Exc. 2. Greek nouns in ma have the dative and ablative plural more fire* 
quently in is than in ibus; as, poema, poemdtis, or poematibus. 

Exc. 8. The poets sometimes form the dative plural of Greek nouns, that in¬ 
crease in the genitive, in si, and, before a vowel, in sin; as, herdis, heroidis; 
heroisi, or heroisin. Ovid. So in Quintilian, Aletamoiphosesi. • 


ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. 

§ 85. The accusative plural ends, like the nominative, in e?, 
a, id. 

Exc. 1. The accusative plural of masculines and feminines, whose genitive 
plural ends in ium, anciently ended in is or eis, instead of is; as, paries, gen. 
partium, acc. parteis or partes. 

Exc. 2. Greek masculines and feminines, whose genitive increases in is orc< 
impure, have their accusative in as; as, lampas, lampddis, lampddas. So also 
hiros, herdis, herons, and some barbarian names of nations have a similar form, 
as, Brigasdas, Alhbrdgas. 


Jupiter^ and vis^ strength, are thus declined:— 


Singular. 

N. Ju'-pi-ter, 
G. Jo'-vis, 

D. J6'-vi, 

Ac. Jo'-vem, 
V. Ju'-pi-ter, 
J6'-ve. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N. vis. 

vi'-res. 

G. vis, 

vir'-i-um, 

D. — 

vir'-i-bu8, 

Ac. vim, 

vT-res, 

V. vis, 

vi'-res, 

Al. V . 

vir'-i-bus. 




§ 86-88. 


FOURTH DECLENSION. 


45 


§ 86. The following table exhibits 
nouns of Ihc third declension :— 


the principal forms of Qreek 


S. 

PL 

S. 

PL 


Nom. 
Lampas, 
-Mes, 
Heros, 

-oes, 
Chelys, 
Poesis, 

Achilles, 

Orpheus, 

Aer, 

Dido, 



Voc. 

-as, 

-ades, 

-os, 

-oes, 

-b 

-es, -e. 


-eu 

-er, 

-o, 


Abl 
-adc. 
-adibus. 
-oe. 
-oibus. 
-ye or y 
-i. 

-e or -i. 

See § 54. 
-ere. 

-o. 


FOUPTII DECLENSION. 


§87. Nouns of the fourth declension end in us and m. 
Those in us are masculine; those in u are neuter, and, except in 
the genitive, are indeclinable in the singular. 


Nouns of thie declension are thus declined:— 


Fructus, fruit. 


Singular. 

N. fruc'-tiis, 
G. fruc'-tus, 
D. fruc'-tu-i, 
Ac. fruc'-tum, 
V. fruc'-tus, 
Al. fiuc'-tu. 


Plural. 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-tu-um, 

fruc'-ti-bus, 

fruc'-t’ls, 

fruc'-tus, 

fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu, 
Singular. 
N. cor'-nu, 
G. cor'-nus, 
D. cor'-nu, 
Ac. cor'-nu, 

V. cor'-nu. 
Ah. cor'-nu. 


a horn. 

Plural. 

cor'-nu-S, 

cor'-nu-um, 

cor'-ni-bus, 

cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-nu-a, 

cor'-ni-bus. 


In like manner decline 

Can'-tas, a song. ' F^uc'-tiis, a wave. Se-ra^'-tus, ike senate. 

CuK-rus, a chainot. Luc'-tus, ginef. Ge'-lu, ice. (in sing.) 

Ex-er'-cl-tus, an army. MO'-tus, motion. V e'-ru, a spit. 


Exceptions in Gender. 

§88. 1. The following are feminine:— 

Acus, a needle. Ficus, a fig. Porticus, a ydUery. 

Doaius, a house. Manus, a hand. Tribus, a tnbe. 













46 


FOURTH DECLENSION.—EXCEPTIONS. 


§ 89 


C6lu*^ a distaff, and the plurals Quinqudtrm, a feast of Minerva, and /rfiM, the 
Ides, are also feminine. So noctu, by night, found only in the ablative singular 

Penus, a store of provisions, a\ hen of the fourth declension, is masculine oi 
feminine. Recus, sex, is neuter; see § 94. Sjpecus^ a den, is masculine and 
rarely feminine or neuter. 

2. Some personal appellatives, and names of trees, are feminine by 
signification ; as. 

Antis, nm'us^ socnis; — cornus, fawms, and quercus. Myrtus also is feminine 
and rarely masculine. See § 29, 1 and 2. 

Exceptions in Declension. 


§ 89. Bamus, a house, is partly of the fourth declension, and 
partly of the second. It is thus declined:— 


Singular. 

N. do'-mus, 

G. do'-mus, or do'-nu, 
D. dom'-u-i, or do'-mo, 
Ac. do'-mum, 

V. do'-mus, 

Ab. do'-mo. 


Plural. 

do'-mus, 

dom'-u-ura, or do-mo'-rum, 

dom'-i-bus, 

do'-mus, or do'-mos, 

do'-mus, 

dom'-I-bu3. 


(a.) Domus, in the genitive, signifies, of a house; doml commonly signifies 
at home. The ablative (/otwm is found in Plautus, and in ancient inscriptions. 
In the genitive and accusative plural the fonns of the second declension are 
more used than those of the fourth. 

(6.) CX>rnus, a coniel-tree; yiciis, a fig, or a-fig-tree; laurm, a laurel; and 
myrtus, a m\Tt}e, are sometimes of the second declension. Penus is of the 
second, third or fourth declension. 

(c.) Some nouns in u have also forms in us and um; as, cornu, comus, or cor- 
num. Adjectives, compounds of manus, are of the first and second declensions. 


Remark 1. ‘ Nouns of this declension anciently belonged t© the third, and 
were formed by contraction, thus:— 


Singular. 

N. fnictus, 

G. fmetuis, -us, 

D. fi-uctui, -u, 

Ac. fructuem, -iim, 
V. fructus, 

Ab. fructue, -u. 


Plural. 
fructues, -us, 
fructuum, -um, 
fructuibus, -ubus, or -Ibiis, 
fnretues, -us, 
fructues, -us, 

fructuibus, -ubus, or -Ibhs 


2. The genitive singular in is is sometimes found in ancient authors; as, 
anuis. Ter. A genitive in after the second declension, also occurs; as, senS 
tus, senati; tumultus, tumulti. Sail. 

3. The contracted form of the dative in u is not often used; yet it somotimet 
occurs, especially in Caisar, and in the poets. 

4. The contracted form of the genitive plural in um rarely occurs. 

5. The following nouns have ubus in the dutive and ablativa 
plural:— 

Acus, a needle. Artus, a joint. Partus, a birth. Specus, a den. 

Arcus, a bow. Lacus, a lake. Pecu, a Jiock. Tribus, a tribe. 

Ginu, a knee; partus, a harbor ; tonitrus, thunder ; and vim, a spit, have ibu. 
or iibus. 


§ 90 , 91 . 


FIFTH DECLENSION. 


4 ? 


FIFTH DECLENSION. 

§ 90. Nouns of the fifth declension end in es, and are of 
the feminine gender. 


They are thus declined: — 

Ties, a iking. 

Dies, 

a day. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singtdar. 

Plural, 

N. r3s. 

res. 

N. di'-es. 

di'-as. 

G. re'-i. 

re'-riim. 

G. di-e'-i. 

dl-e'-rum, 

D. re'-i. 

re'-bus. 

D. di-e'-i. 

di-e'-bu8, 

Ac. rem. 

res. 

Ac. dl'-em. 

di'-es. 

V. res, 

les, 

V. di'-es, 

di'-es. 

Ah. re. 

re'-bus. 

Ah. di'-e. 

di-e'-bus. 

Remark. Nouns of this declension, 

like those of the fourth, seem to 


belonged originally to the third declension. 

Exceptions in Gender. 

1. Dies, a day, is masculine or feminine in the singular, and always 
masculine in the plural; meridies, mid-day, is masculine only. 

Note. Dies is seldom feminine, in good prose writers, except when it de¬ 
notes duration of time, or a day fixed and determmed. 


Exceptions in Declension. 

2. The genitive and dative singular sometimes end in e or in i, instead of ei; 
as, gen. die for diet, Virg.; fide for jidei, Hor.; acie for aciei, Caes.—gen. pledi 
for plebei, Liv.—dat. fide for fidei, Hor., pei'iiicie, Liv., anrl pernicii, Nep., for 
pernivu'i. The genitive rabies contracted for rabieis, after the third declension 
is found in Lucretius. 

Remark 1. There are only about eighty nouns of this declension, and of 
these only two, res and dies, are complete in tne plural. Acies, effiyies, eluvies 
facies, ‘glades, progenies, sedes, species, spes, want the genitive, dative, and ab¬ 
lative plural, and the rest want the plural altogether. 

Rem. 2. AU nouns of this declension end in ies, except ^o\\r—fides, faith; 
res, a thing; spes, hope; and plebes, the common people;—and ah nouns in 
are of this declension, except abies, aries, paries, quies, and requies, which are 
of Uie third declension. 


Declension of Compound Nouns. 


§ 01. T\’lien a compound noun consists of two nominatives, both 
pqirts are declined; but when one part is a nominative, and the other 
an oblique case, the nominative onlj is declined. Of the former kind 
are re.sy^w/^/tca, a commonwealth, and jusjurandum, an oath; of tii« 
latter, rno .er-fam'dias, a mistress of a family* Cf. § 43, 2. 


Singular. 

JV. V. res-pub'-ll-ca, 

0. D. re-i-pub^-U-cae, 
Ac. rem-pub'-U-cam, 
Ab. re-pub'-li-ca. 


Plural. 

N V. res-pub'-U-cse, 

G. re-rum-pub-li-ca-rum, 
D. .45.re-bus-pub'-h-cis, 

Ac. res-pub'-U-cas, 



IRREGULAR NOUNS. 




§ 92 


Singulai Plural. 

JV. Jus-Ju-ran-dum, ju-ra-ju-ran -da, 

G. ju-ri.>ju-rai/-di, • - 7 - 

D. ju-ri-jn-ran'-do, - 

Ac. jus-ju-ran'-dum, ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 
V. jus-ju-ran'-dum, ju-ra-ju-ran'-da. 
Ab. ju-re-ju-ran'-do. - 


Singular. 

N. ma-ter-fa-mil -i -as, 

G. ma-tris-fa-rnil'-i-as, 

D. ma-tri-fa-mir-i-as, 

Ac. ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, 

V. ma-ter-fa-miK-i-as, 

Ab. ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as, etc. 


Noth. The preceding compounds are divided and pronounced like the simple words o. 
ffliich they are compounded. 


milEGULAR NOUNS. 

§ 9^. Irrej^lar nouns are divided into three classes-— 
Vai't^oie, defective, and 'Redundant. 

I. VARIABLE NOUNS. 

A noun is variable, wliich, in some of its parts, changes either 
its gender 01 declension or both. 

Nouns which vary in gender are called heterogeneous; those 
which vary in declension are called heteroclites. 

Heterogeneous Nouns. 

1. Masculine in the singular, and neuter in the plural; as, 

Avermis^ Dindyrmis, Ismdrus, Masslcus^ MandluSy Pangceus, Tartarus, Taygi* 
tus; plur. Aver7ia, etc. 

2. Masculine in the singular, and ma^cuhne or neuter in the plu¬ 
ral ; as, 

jdcus, a jest; plur. jdci, or jdca; — Idcus, a p^ace; plur. Idci, passages in books, 
topics, places ', ldca^ places;— stilus, a hissing; plur. sibila, rarely siblli; — intvbuA, 
endive; plur. intiibi or intiAa. 

8. Feminine in the singular, and neuter in the plural; as, • 

carbastis, a snecies of flax; plur. carbasa, very rarely cai'bad, sails, etc., made 
of it;— Hierosolyma, -<b, Jerusalem; plur. Ilierosolyma, -brum. 

4. Neuter in the singular, and masculine in the plural; as, 

caelum, heaven; plur. cceli; — Elysium; plur. Elysii; — Argos; plur. Argy 
So siser, neut., plur. sisires, masc. 

5. Neuter in the singular, and masculine or neuter in the plural 
as, 

J'rc’Mm, a bridle; plur. freni or frrna; — rastrum, a rake; plur. rastri, or 
more rarely, rastra ;—j)ugillar, a VTitiug tablet; plur. pugilldres or pugillaria. 

6. Neuter in the singular, and feminine in the plural; as, 

epulum, a feast; plur. epuUz; — balneum, a bath; plur. balnea 01 balnea;— 
nunalnum, a market-day; plur. nundlnue, a fair. 

7. Feminine or neuter in the singular, and feminine in the plural 
as, 

delicia 01 fkUciwn, delight; plur. deUcus. •> 






§ 93 , 94 . 


DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


49 


Heteroclites. 

1. Second or third declension in the sinjiular, and third 
in th*' plural; as, 

noiTs. and acc. jufferiim, an acre; gen. jugdri or jtigSris; abl. JugSro and 
jugere; plur., nom., andacc. jugera; gen. jugerum; abl. jugh'is ^na jugeribus. 

2. Third declension in the singular, and second in the plural; as, 

rf7«, a vessel; plur. orww. Anclle, a sliie d, has sometimes anciliorum^ 
in the genitive plural. 

Note. Yariable nouns seem anciently to have been redundant, and to have retained 
a part of each of their original fjrms. Thus, vasa. -drum, properly comes from vGsum^ 
-i, but the latter, together rvith the plural of vas, vdsis, became obsolete. 


II. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


§ 94:. Nouns are defective either in case or in number. 

1. Nouns defective in case may want either one or more cases. 
Some are altogether indeclinable, and are called aplotes. 

Such are pondo., a pound; most nouns in i; as, gummi, gum: foreign words* 
as, Aaron, Jacob: semis, a half; git, a kind of plant; the singular of mille, & 
thousand; words put for nouns; as, vdlesuum, for sua voluntas, his own inclina¬ 
tion ; and names of the letters of the alphabet. 

A noun which is found in one case only, is called a Monoptote, 
if found in two cases, a Dipiote; if in three, a Triptote; if in four, a 
TetrajJtote; and if in five, a Pentaptote. 

The following hst contains most nouns defective in case. Those 
which occur but once in Latin authors are distinguished by an as¬ 
terisk :— 


*Ab actus, acc.pl.; a dnving away. 

Accitu, abl.; a calling for. 

Admissu, ahl.; admission. 

Adinonitu, abl.; admonition. 
not used in g€7i. pi. 

Affatu, (tbl.; an addressing ;—pl. affa- 
tus, -ibus. 

Alppis, nom.; algum, acc.; algu, abl. ; 
cold. 

Ambage, abl.; a going around;—pi. 
entire. 

*Amissum. acc.; a loss. 

Aplnstro, nom. and acc.; the flag of a 
ihp ;—pl. aplustria, or aplustra. 

Arbitrf.tus, ; -um, acc.; -u, abl.; 
judgmerd. 

Arcessitu, abl.; a sending for. 

Astu, nom., acc.; a city. 

Astus, nom.; astu, abl.; craft; —astus, 
acc. pi. 

Cacoethes, nom., acc.; an evil cus¬ 
tom; —cacoetiie, nvm. pi.; -e, and 
-es, acc. pi. 

Canities, ncm -em, acc.; -e, ahl. 


Cetos, acc.; a whale; —cete, nom. and 
acc. pi.; cetis, dat. 

Chaos, nom. acc.; chao, abl.; chaos. 

Cassem, acc.; casse, abl.; a net;—pi. 
entire. 

Circumspectus, nom.; -um; -n; a hdk^ 
ing around. 

Coactu, abl.; constraint. 

Ccelite, abl.; 2)1. entire; inhabitants of 
heaven. 

*Commutatum, acc.; an alteration. 

Compedis, gen.; compede, abl.; a feb 
ter; — pi. compedes, -ium, -ibus. 

Concessu, abl.; ])ermission. 

Condiscipulatu, abl., companionship at 
school. 

Cratim, or -em, acc. ; -e, abl.; a hur¬ 
dle -—2)1. crates, -ium, -ibus. 

Cupressu, abl.; a cypress. 

Daps, nom., scarcely used; dapis, gm. 
etc. 2^1- dapes, -ibus; a feast. 

’ffDatu, abl.; a giving. 

Derisus, -ui, dot.; -um, acc.; -u, abl ; 
ridicule. 


50 


DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


§ 94 


Desuicatui, dai.; contempt. 

Dica, nom.; dicam, acc.; a legal pro¬ 
cess ;—dicas, acc. pi. 

Dicis, gen.; as, dicis gratia, for form's 
sake. 

Ditionis, gen.; -i, dot.; -em, acc .; -e, 
abl.; power. 

Dill, ahl.; in the day time. 

Divisui, dat.; a dividing. 

Ebur, ivory; —not used in tje plural. 

^ Efflagitatu, abi.; importunity. 

♦Ejectus, nom.; a throwing out. 

Epos, nom. and acc.; an epic poem. 

Ergo, abl. (or adv.); for the sake. 

Eflsfedas, acc. pi.; UMr chariots. 

Evectus, nom.; a carrying out. 

Faex, dregs, wants gen. pi. 

Fame, abl.; hunger. 

Far, corn, not used in the gen., dat., 
and ahl. pi. 

Fas. nom.; acc.; right. 

Fauce, abl.; the throat;—pi. entire. 

Fax, a toixh, wants gen.pl. 

Fel, gall, wants gen. pi. 

Feminis, gen.; -i, dai.; -e, abl.; die 
thigh; — pi. femlna, -Ibus. 

Flictu, abl.; a striking. 

Foris, nom. and gen.; -em, acc; -e, 
abl.; a door ;—pl. entire. 

Fors, nom.; -tis, gen.; -tern, acc.; -te, 
abl.; chance. 

J^Frustratui, abl.; a deceiving. 

Frux, fruit, nom. scarcely used;— 
friigis, gen., etc. 

Fulgetras, acc. pi.; lightning. 

Gausape, nom., acc., abl.; a rough gar¬ 
ment ;—gausapa, acc. pi. 

Glos, nom.; a husband’s sister. 

Grates, acc. pi.; —gratibus, abl.; thanks. 

Hebdomadam, acc. ; a week. 

Hiems, winter, not used in gen., dat., 
and abl. pi. 

llippomanes, nom. and acc. 

*Hir, nom.; the palm of the hand. 

Hortatu, abl.; an exhoi-ting ;—pl. hor- 
tatibus. 

Impetis, gen.; -e, abl.; a shock ;—pl. 
impetibus. 

ilncitas, or -a, acc. pi.; as, ad incitas 
redactus, reduced to a sti-ait. 

♦Tnconsultu, abl.; without advice. 

^^Indultu, abl.; indulgence. 

Inferiae, nom. pi.; -as, acr ; -is, abl.; 
sacrifices to the dead. 

\nfitias, acc.pl.; a denial; as, ire infit- 
ias, to deny. 

Ingratiis, abl. pi., (used adverbially); 
against one's will. 

Injussu, abl.; without command. 

Inquies, nom.; restlessness. 

Instar, nom., acc.: a likeness. 


Interdiu, abl. (or adv.); -as, acc.; sup- 

*Invitatu, abl.; an invitation. 

Irrisui, dat.; -um, acc.; -u, abl.; de 
vision. 

Jovis, 7iom., rarely used;— pi. Jovcs. 

Jugeris, gen.; -e, abl.; an acre J5i 
jugera, -uin, -ibus. 

Jussu, ahl.; command. 

Labes, a spot, wants gen. pi. 

Lucu, abl.; day-light. 

*Ludificatui, dat.; a mockery. 

Lux, light, wants the gen. pt. 

Mandatu, abl.; a command. 

Mane, nom., acc.; mane, or rarely -i 
abl.; the morning. 

Mel, honey, not used in gen., dat., and 
aol. pi. 

^lelos, nom., acc.; melo, dat.; melody 
—mele, nom., acc. jol. 

Metus, fear, not used in gen., dat., and 
abl. pi. 

lilissu, abl.; a sending ;—pl. missus, 
-ibus. 

Monitu, abl.; admonition; — pi. mon- 
itus. 

Natu, abl. ; by Kith. 

Nauci, gen., with non; as, homo non 
nauci, a man of no account. 

Nefas, nom., acc.; loickedness. 

Nemo, nobody, wants the voc. and 
the pi. 

Nepenthes, nom., acc.; an herb. 

Nex, death, wants the voc. ; —n^ces, 
nom., acc. pi. 

NiliU, or nihilum, nom. and acc.; -i, 
gen.; -o, abl.; nothing. 

Noctu, abl.; by night. 

Nuptui, dat.; -um, acc.; -u, abl.; 
marriage. 

Obex, nom.; -icem, acc.; -ice, or -jice, 
abl.; a bolt; — pi. obices, -jicibus. 

Objectum, acc.; -u, abl.; an inteiposi- 
tibn; — pi. objectus. 

Obtentui, dat.; -um, acc.; -u, abl.; a 
pi'etext. 

Opis, gen.; opem, acc.; ope, abl 
help; — pi. entire. 

Oppositu, abl.; an opposing ;—pl. op- 
positus, acc. 

Opus, nom., acc.; need. 

Os, the mouth, wants the gen. pL 

Pan aces, nom.; -is, gen.; -e, abl.; an 
herb. 

Pax, peace, wa,nts gen. pi. 

Peccalu, ; a fault. 

I’ecudis,/yen.; -\, dat.; -em, acc. ; -e 
abl. ;—pl. entire. 

Pelage, acc. pi. of pelagus; the sea. 

Permissu abl.; -um, acc.; permission 

Piscatus, nom.; -i, gen ; -um, acc. 
-u, abl.; a f slung. 


DEFECTIVE N0UN8. 


51 


§ 95 


Pix,«<ci; pices, acc.^?. 

I’ondo, abl.; in loeighi. Cf. ^ 94, 1 . 

Pr6ci. dat.; -era, acc.; -o, abl.; prayer • 
— pi. entire 

Procer ; nom., -era, acc .; a peer ;—pl 
entire. 

Proraptu, abl., readiness. 

Pus wiints gen. dat. and abl. pi. 

Kelatum, acc.; — u, abl.; a recital. 

licpetundaram. gen. pL • -is, abl.; 
tnoney taken by extortion. 

Rogatu, aJbl.; a 7'eqtiest. 

Ros, dew, wants gen. pi. 

Rus, the country, wants gen., dat., and 
abl. pi. 

Batias, nom.; -atem, acc.; ate, abl.; 
satiety. 

Secus, nom., acc. ; sex. 

Situs, nom.; -um, acc. : -u, abl.; situa¬ 
tion ; — situs, nom. and acc. pi. 

Situs, nom.; -ii?, gen.; -um, acc. ; -u, 
abl.; rust ;— situs, acc.pl. 

Sol, the sun, wants gen. qn. 

Sordis, gen. ; -era, acc.; -e and -i, abl; 

Jilth ;—pl. sordes,-iura, etc. 

Spontis, gen.; -e, abl.; of one's own 
accord. 

Suboles, offspring, wants gen. pi. 


Suppetiae, nom. pi.; -as, acc .; szip- 
plies. 

Tabum, nom.; -i, gen. ; -o, abl.; cor- 
mipt matter. 

Tempe, nom. acc. voc. pi.; a vale in 
Thessaly. 

Tus wants gen., dot., and obl.pl. 

Venui and -o, dat.; ura, acc.; -o, abl. 
sale. 

Veprem, acc.; -e, abl.; a brier;—pL 
entire. 

Verberis, gen.; -e, abl.; a stripe;—pi. 
verb era, ura, ibus. 

Vesper, nom.; -um, acc-; -e, -i, or-o, 
abl.: the evening. 

Vespera, nom.; -am, acc.; -a, abl. ; the 
evening. 

Vicis, gen.; -i, dat.; -era, acc.; -e, 
abl.; change ; — pi. entire, except gen. 

Virus, nom.; -i, gen,; -us, acc.; -o, aZ»/.; 
poison. 

Vis, gen. and dat. rare ; strength; pL 
vires, -iuin, etc. See § 85. 

Viscus, nom. ; -6ris, gen.; -6re, abl.; 
an intei'nal organ, pi. viscera, etc. 

Vocatu, abl.; a calling; —vocatus, acc. 
pi. 


Remark 1. To tliese may be added nouns of the fifth declension, which 
either want the plural, as most of them are abstract nouns, or have in that 
number only the nominative, accusative, and vocative. Res and dies, however, 
have the plural entire. Cf. ^ 90, R. 1 . 

Rem. 2. For the use of the vocative, also, of many nouns, no classical au¬ 
thority can be found. 

§ 95. 2. Nouns defective in number, want either the plural or 

the singular. 

(rt) hlany nouns want the plural from the nature of the things 
which they express. Such are generally names of persons, most names 
of places (except those which have only the plural), the names of 
herbs, of the arts, most material and abstract nouns; but these may 
have a plural when used as common nouns, (§ 26, K. 3.), and many 
others. 


Rem, In Tiatin the plural of abstract nouns is often used to denote the exist¬ 
ence of the quality, attribute, etc. in different objects, or the repetition of an 
action ; and in poetry such plurals are used for the sake of emphasis or metre. 
See % 98. 

The following list contains many of the nouns which leant the plural^ 
and also some, marked p, which are included in the above classes, but 
are sometimes used in the plural. 


Aconitum, wolfsbane, p. 
Adorea, a military re¬ 
ward 

Aer. the air, p. 

.d!l 8 ,’ 67 'as«, money, p. 
dither, the sky. 


Jivum, age, lifetime, p. 
Album, an album. 
Allium, garlic, p. 
Amicitia, p. 

Argilla, white clay. 
Avena, oats, p. 


Balaustium, the fewer oj 
the pomegranate. 
Balsamum, balsam, p. 
Barathrum, a gulf. 
Callum, hard&necl skin, p. 
Calor, heat, p. 


52 


DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


§ 96 


Carduus, a Mslle, p. 
Caro, jle&h, p. 

Cera, wax^ p. 

Cestus. a girdle. 

Cicuta, hemlock, p. ' 
Cceinini, mud. 
Contagium, contagion, p 
Crocum, saffron. 

Crocus, saffron, p. 

Cruor, blood, p. 

Cutis, the skin, p. 
Diluciilum, the dawn. 
Ebnr, ivory. 

FJoctruni, amber, p. 

Far, corn, p. 

Fol, gall, p. 

Fervor, heat, p. 

Fides, 

Ftmus, dung. 

Fumus, smoke, p. 

Furor, madness, p. 

Galla, an oak-ajyde, p. 

Gi“lu,y;*os<. 

Glarea, gravel. 

Gloria, glory, p. 
Glastum, woad. 

Gluten, or 
Glutlnum, glue. 

Gypsum, tchite plaster. 
Hepar, the liver. 
Hesperus, the evening 
star. 

IlTluin, a little thing. 
Hordeum, barley, p. 
Humus, tlie ground. 
Indoles, native quality, p. 
Ira, anger, p, 

Jubar, radiance. 

1vL?>, justice, law, p. 
wl astilium, a law vacation. 


Lac, milk. 

L«titia,^'o^, p. 

Languor,/ai«<«css, p. 
Lardum, bacon, p 
Latex, liquor, p. 

Letum, death. 

Lignum, wood, p. 

L'nnus, mud. 

Liquor, liquor, p. 

Lues, a plague. 

Lutum, clay, p. 

Lux, light, n. 

JIacellum, the shambles. 
JMilne, the morning. 

Marmor, marble, p. 

Mel, honey, p. 

Meridies, mid-day. 

Mors, death, p. 

Munditia, neatness, p. 
Mundus, female ornob- 
ments. 

Muscus, moss. 

Nectar, nectar. 

Nemo, no man. 

Nequitia, loickcdness, p. 
Nihllum, nihil, or nil, no¬ 
thing. 

Nitrum, natron. 

OhWvxQ, forgetfulness, p. 
Omasum, bullock's tripe. 
Opium, opium. 

Palea, chaff, p. 

Pax, jnertce, p. 

Penum, and 
Vonvi?,, provisions, p. 
ViYiQv, pepper. 

Pix, piith, p. 

Pontus, the sea. 
Prolubium, desire. 

Pubes, the youth. 

Pulvis, dust, p. 


Purpura, purple, p. 
Quies, rest, p. 

Kos, dew, p. 

Kiibor, redness, p. 

Sabiilo and 
Sabulum, gravel. 

Sal, salt. 

Salum, the sea. 

Siiliis, safety. 

Sanguis, blood. 
Scrui>ulum, a scruple, p 
Senium, old age. 

Siler, an osier. 

Sinapi, mustard. 

Siser, skirret, p 
Sitis, thirst. 

Sol, the sun, p. 

Sopor, sleep, p. 
Specimen, an example. 
Sgiimii, foam, p. 

Sulfur, sulphur, p. 
Supellex, furniture. 
Tabes, a consumption. 
Tabum, corrupt matter. 
Tellus, the earth. 

Terror, terror, p. 
Thy’mum, thyme, p. 
Tribulus, a thistle, p. 
Tristitiaj sadness. 

Ver, spring. 

Vespera, the evening. 
Veternus, lethargy. 
Vigor, strength, p. 

Vinum, wine, p. 

Virus, poison. 

Viscum, and 
Viscus, bird-lime. 
Vitrum, u'oad. 

Vulgus, the common peo. 
pie. 

Zingiber, ginger. 


§ SO. (?;). The names of festivals and games, and several names 
Li places and books, want the singular; as, Bacchanalia, a festival of 
Bacchus; Olgtnpia, the Olympic games ; Bucolica, a.hook of pastorals 
and the following names of places:— 


Acrocerannia, Baiae, 
Amt'clae, Ceraunia, 

Artaxata, Ecbatana, 

Atbenaj, Esquilise, 


Fundi, 

Gabii, 

Gades, 

Gemoniae, 


Locri, 

Parisii, 

Philippi 

Puteoli, 


Susa, 
Syraciisre, 
'’I'hennopyloe, 
V eii. 


Note. Some of those in i properly signify the people- 
The following list contains most other nouns which want the singular 
Und also some, marked s, which are rarely used in that number:— 


Acta, records. 
Adversaria, a memoranr 
aum-book. 

Estiva, 8c. castra surtir- 
mer i^uartei’s 


Alpes, the Alps, s. 
Aimales, annals, s. 
Antae, door-posts. 
Antes, rows. 
Autiae, a forelock. 


Apinae, tvifies. 
Argutia;, witticisms, s. 
Anna, arms. 

Artus, the joints, s. 
BelUu'ia, sweetmeats- 


de:*ective nouxs. 


53 


!i 97 


Bi^ae, a itoo-horse char¬ 
iot, s. 

Bruccre, breeches. 
Branchiae, the gills of 
fshts. 

Brevia, shallow places. 
Calendae, the Calends. 
Uaiiceili, balustrades. 
Cani, gray hairs. 

Ciisfcs, a hunte7'\<i net, s. 
Caulae, shee/>-fol(L<(. 
Oelcres, (he body-guard 
of the Roman kings. 
(’ibaria, victuals, s. 
ClitelliB, a pack-saddle. 
Codicilli, a writing. 
Cadites, the gods, s. 
Crepundia, a rattle. 
Cunabula, and 
Cunae, a cradle. 
Cyclades, the Cyclades, s. 
Decimae, tithes, s. 

Dirae, the Furies, s. 
Divitiae, riches. 

Druldes, the Druids. 
Dryades, the Dryads, s. 
Epulae, a banquet, s. 
Eumenides, the Furies, 8. 
Excrrbiae, watches. 
Exsequi£e,yM?ie/‘a/ rites. 
Exta, entrails. 

Exuviae, spoils. 

Facetiae, pleasantry, s. 
Feriae, holidays, s. 

Fides, a stringed instru¬ 
ment, s. 

Flabra, blasts. 

Fraces, the lees of oil. 
Fraga, strawberries, s. 
Geiiilni, twins, s. 

Geiiae, cheeks, s. 

Gen’ae, trijies. 

Grates, thanks. 

Habenae, reins, s. 

Hibenia, sc. castra, voirtr 
ter quarters. 

Evades, the Ilyades, s. 
Idas, the ides of a month. 
Ilia, the flank. 

Incunabula, a cradle. 
jiJutia'., a truce. 


Induviae, clothes. 
Ineptiae,ybo/e?‘tcs, s. 
Infcri, the dead. 

Inferia^,sr/c/u’/ices in honor 
(f the decul. 

Insecta, insects. 

Insidiae, an ambuscade, s. 
Justa,yMnerrr/ i-ites. 
Lactes, small enti'ails, s. 
Lamenta, lamentations. 
Lapicidinae, a stone quar- 
ry. 

Latebrae, a hiding place, 

s. 

Lauiices, young rabbits. 
Lautia, presents to for¬ 
eign ambassadors. 
Lemures, hobgoblins. 
Lendes, nits 
Liberi, children, s. 
Luceres, a division of the 
Roman cavalry. 
Magalia, cottages. 
^lajores, ancestors. 
Planes, the shades, s. 
llanubiae, spoils of war. 
Mapalia, huts, s. 

Minacise, and 
llinae, threats. 

Minores, posterity. 

Moenia, the walls of a 
city, s. 

Multitia, garments finely 
wi'ought. 

Munia, official duties. 
Naiades, water-nymphs, s. 
Nares, the nostrils, s. 
Natrdes, pai-entage. 

Nates, the haunches, s. 
NonuB, corroding sores or 
ulcers., s. 

Nona}, the nones of a 
month-. § 326, 1. 
Nugae,_;es<s, nonsense. 
Nuntllnae, the weekly mar¬ 
ket. 

Nuptioe, a marriage. 
Ob\\\rx,forgetfulness, s. 
Offucia}, cheats, s. 
Optiinates, the amsto- 
cratic party, s. 


Palearia, the dewlaqf, s. 
Pandects, the pajKiects. 
Parietins, old walls. 
Partes, a party, s. 
Pascua,^^?^/^/^^. s. 
Penates, household godsx 
s. 

Phal?rs, irappinjt. 
Philtra, hi'c potUms. 
Pleiades, the Pleiadk or 
seven stars, s. 

Postcri, posterity. 

Prsbia, an amulet. 
Prscordia, the dior 
phraym, the entrails. ■ 
Vi'hxnixsi, fr St fruits. 
Proccres, nobles, s. 
Pugillaria, or -ares, 
writing-tablets, s. 
Quadrigs, a team of four 
hoi'ses, s. 

Quirites, Roman citizens, 

s. 

Quisquilis refuse. 
Reliquis, me remains, s. 
Salebrs, rugged roads, b. 
Sallns, salt pits. 

Seals, a lamer, s. 
Scatebi's, a spiing, s. 
Scops, a broom. 

Scruta, old stuff. 

Sentes, thorns, s. 
Sponsalia, espousals. 
Stativa, sc. castra, a 
stationary camp. 
Superi, the gods abotxe. 
Talaria, unnged shoes. 
Tenebrs, darkness, s. 
Tesca, rough places. 
Thenns, warm baths. 
Tormina, colic-pains. 
Transtra, seats for row- 
ers, s. 

Tries, trifles, toys. 
Utensilia, utensils. 

YiiWsi, folding doors, 8. 
Vepres, brambles, s. 
Vergilis, the seven stars. 
VindicIs, a legal claim, s 
Virgulta, bushes. 


§ 97. The following usually dilfer in meaning in the different 
numbers. 


les, -is, a temple. 
^des, -ium, a house. 
Aqua, water. 

Aqus, medicinal springs. 
Auxilium, aid. 

AuxUia. auxiliary troops. 

6 * 


Bonum, a good thing. 
Bona, property. 

Career, aqirison. 
Carceres, the bai'riers of 
a race-course 
Castrum, a castle. 


Castra, a camp. 
Comitium, a part of the 
Roman forum. 

Coraitia, an assembly for 
election. 

Go fxs., plenty. 


54 


REDtJNDANT NOUNS. 


§ 98 , 99 


Co|'.ise, troops, forces. 
Cupedia, -£e, ciaintiness.. 
Cupediae, -amra, and 
Cupedia, -Oruin, dainties. 
Facultas, ability. 
Facultates, property. 
Fastua, -us, pride. 
Fastus, -uuiii, and 
Fasti, -orum, a calendar. 
Fortuua, FoHune. 
Fortunaj, wealth. 

Furfur, brayi. 

Furfures, dandruff. 
Gratia, 

GraticC, O'anks. 


Impedimentum, a hinder- 
ance. 

Impedimenta, baggage. 

Litera, a letter of the al¬ 
phabet. 

Literae, an epistle. 

Ludus, pastime. 

Ludi, public games. 

Lustrum, a morass. 

Lustra, a haunt or den off 
wild beasts. 

Mos, custom. 

ISlores, manners. 

Karis, a nostril. 

N^es, the nose. 


Natalis, a Hrthday. 
Natales, birth, lineage. 
Opera, work, labor. 
Operae, loorkinen. 

Opis, g 3 n. power. 

Opes, -um, means, localth 
Plaga, a region, tract. 
Plagae, nets, toils. 
Principium, a beginning 
Principia, the general' 
quarters. 

Rostrum, a beak, proto. 
Rostra, tlic Rostra. 

Sal, salt. 

Sales, witticisms. 


§98. The following plurals, with a few others, are sometimes 
used in poetry, especially in the nominative and accusative, instead 
of the singular, for the sake of emphasis or metre. 


^quora, the sea. 
Alta, the sea. 

Animi, courage. 
Aurae, the air. 
Carinoe, a keel. 
Cervices, the neck. 
Colla, the neck. 
Comae, the hair. 
Coimubia, marriage. 
Corda, the heart. 
Corpora, a body. 
Crepuscula, twilight. 
CuiTus, a chariot. 
Exsilia, banishment. 
Frigora, cold. 
Gaudia, joy. 
Gramina, grass. 
Guttura, uie throat. 


Hymenaei, marriage. 
Ignes, love. 
luguina, the groin. 

Ir», anger. 

J ej unia, ffasting. 

.Jubse, a mane. 

Limina, a threshold. 
Litora, a shore. 

Mensaj, a service or course 
off dishes. 

Neniae, affuneral dirge. 
Numina, tke divinity. 
Odia, hatred. 

Ora, the mouth, the coun¬ 
tenance. 

Orse, conjlnet. 

Ortus, a rising, the east. 
Otia, ease, leisure. 


Pectora, the breast. 
Reditus, a return. 

Regna, a kingdom. 
Rictus, the jaws. 

Robora, strength. 
Silentia. silence. 

Sinus, tne bosom off a Ro¬ 
man garment. 

Taedae, a t07'ch. 

Tempora, thne. 

Terga, the back. 

Thalami, marriage or 
marriage-bed. 

Tori, a bed, a couch. 

• T ura, ffrankincense. 

Viae, a journey. 

Vultus, the countenance. 


III. REDUNDANT NOUNS. 

§ 99. Nouns are redundant either in termination, in declension 
u gender, or in two or more of these respects. 

1 . In termination : (a.) yf the nominative ; as, arbor, and arbos, a tree; {b. 
of the oblique cases; as, tigris,; gen. tigiis, or -Idis; a tiger. 

2. In declension; as, laurus; gen. -i, or -us; a laurel. 

8 . In gender; as, vulgus, masc. or neut.; the common people. 

4. In termination and declension; as, senecta, -ce, and senectus, -utis; old 

age. 

6 . In termination and gender; as pileus, masc., ondjnleum, neut.; a hat. 

6 . In dsclension and gender; as pSnus,-i or us, masc. or fern., and iwnus 
dris, neut.; a store of provisions. Specus, -us or -i, masc. fern, or neut.; a cave 

7. lu tennination, declension, and gender; as, menda -a, fern, and mendum 
•*, neut.; a fault 


REDUNDANT NOUNS. 


55 


I 99. 

The following list contains most Redundant Nouns of the above classes;- 


Acinus, -um, and -a, a berry. 

Adagium, arid -io, a proverb. 
Admonitio, -um, and -us, us, a remind¬ 
ing. 

£tlira, and aether, the clear shy. 
AlTectio, arul -us, us, affection. 
Agamemno, and -on, Agamemnon. 
Alabaster, tri, and p)l- -tra, brum an 
alabaster box. 

Alimonia, and -um, aliment. 

Aliuvio, and -es, a flood. 

Alvearium, and -are, a bee-hive 
Amaracus, and -um, marjco'am 
Am vgdala, and -um, an almond. 
Anfractum, and -us, us, a windw.g. 
Angiportum, and -us, ms, a narrow lane 
or alley. 

Antidotus, and -um, an antidote. 
Aranea, and -us, i, a spider. 

Arar, and Ai’aris, the river Arar. 

Arbor, and -os, a tree. 

Architectus, and -on, an architect. 
Arcus, -us, and i, a bow. 

Attagena, and -gen, a mow'-hen. 
Avaritia, and -ies, avarice. 

Augmeutum, ana -men, an increase. 
Baccar, and -aris, a Ichm of herb. 
Baculus, and -um, a staff. 

Balteus, and -um, a belt. 

Barbaria, and -ies, barbarism. 

Barbltus, and -on, a harp. 

Batillus, and -um, afire-shovel. 
Blanditia, and -ies, flattery. 

Buccina, and -um, a trumpet. 

Bura, and -is, a plough-tail. 

Buxus, and -um, the box-tree. 

Caepa, and caepe, an onion. 

Calamister, trt, and -trum, a crisping- 
pin. 

Callus, and -um, hardened shin. 

Cancer, cri, or eris, a crab. 

Canitia, and -ies, hoanness. 

Cai)us, ami capo, a capon. 

Carrus, and -um, a kind of waggon. 
CasBida, and -cassis, a helmet. 

Catinus, and -um, a bowl, dish. 
Ciiirographus, and -um, a hand-writing. 
UingCila, -us, and -um, a girdle. 
Clip-us, and -um, a shield. 
CocLlearium, -ar, and -are, a spoon 
Colluvio, and -ies, filth. 

Commentarius, and -um, a journal 
vCompages, and -go, a joining. 

Conatum, and -us, us, an attempt. 
Voncinnltas, and -tudo, neatness. 
Consortium, and -io, partner'ship. 
Contagium, -io, and -es, contact. 
Comum, -us, or us, a cornel tree. 
Cost08,i, and -um a kind of shrub. 


Cratera, cmd crater, a bowl. 

Crocus, and -ura, saffron. 
Crystallus, atid -um, crustal. 
Cubitus, and -um, the elbow. 
Cupiditas, and -pido, desire. 
Cupressus, i, or us, a cypress-tree. 
Delicia, and -um, delight. 

Delphinus, and delphiuj a dolphin. 
Dictamnus, and -um, dittany. 
Diluvium, -o, and -ies, a deluge. 
Domus, i, or us, a house. 

Dorsus, and -um, the back. 

Duritia, and -ies, hardness. 

Effigia, and -ies, an image. 

Elegla, and -on, i, an elegy. 
Elephantus, arid -phas, an elephant. 
Epitoma, and -e, an abridgment. 
Esseda, and -um, a chariot. 

Evander, dH, anil -dms, Evander. 
Eventum, arid -us, us, an event. 
Exemplar, and -are, a pattern. 

Ficus, i, or us, a fig-tree. 

Fimus, end -um, dung. 

Fretum, and -us, us, a strait. 
Fulgetra, and -um, lightning. 
Galerus, and -ura, a hatj cap. 

Ganea, and -um, an eating^ouse. 
Gausapa, -es, -e, and -um, frieze. 
Gibba, -us, and -er, bH, a hump. 
Glutlnum, and -ten, glue. 

Gobius, and -io, a gudgeon. 
Grammatica, and -e, grammar. 
Gras, gruis,and gruis, is, a crane. 
Hebdomada, and -mas, a week. 
Helleborus, and -um, hellebore. 
Honor, and honos, honor. 

Hyssopus, and -um, hyssop. 

Ilios, -um, and -on, Troy. 

Incestum, and -us, us, incest. 
Intubus, and -um, endive. 

Jugulus, and -um, the throat. 
Juventa, -us, utis, and -as, youth. 
Labor, and labos, labor. 

Lacerta, and -us, a lizard, 

Lauras, i, or us, a laurel. 

Lepor, and lepos, wit. 

Ligur, and -us, uHs, a Ligurian. 
Lupinus, and -um, a lupine. 

Luxuria, and -ies, luxury. 

Maeander, -dros, and -drus, Mceander 
Margarita, and -um, a pearl. 

Materia, and -ies, matenais. 
Medimnus, and -um, a measufe. 
Menda, arid-um, a fiult. 

Modius, and -um, a measure. 

Mollitia, and -ies, softness. 
Momentum, and -men, influence. 
Mugil, and -Ilis, a mullet. 

Mulciber, m, or eris, Vulcan. 


56 


DEE/VATION OF NOUNS. 


§ 700 


Mulctra, and -tim, a milh-pail. 
Munditia, and -ies, neatness. 

Muria, and -ies, bi'me or jneklc 
Myrtiifi, i or us, a myrtle. 

Nardus, and -um, nard. 

Nasias, aiul -um, the nose. 

Necessitas, and -udo, necessity. 
Nequitia, and -ies, wcn'thlessmss. 
Notitia, and -ies, knowledyt. 

ObJivium, and -\o, forgetfulness. 
Obsidium, and -io, a sieye. 

(Eclpus, i, cr Cdis, (Edipus. 

Ostrea, and -am, an oyster. 

Pelatus, and -um, the palate. 

Palumba, -us, and -es, a jngeon. 
PapjTus, and -xim,pag)yrus. 

Paupertas, and-ies, pocertu. 

Pavus, and pavo, aj^eacock. 

Penus, i,-dns, or us, and penum,/w’o- 
visions. 

Psplus, and -um, a veil. 

Perseus, ei, or eos, Perseus. 

Piletis, and -um, a hat. 

Pinus, i, or us, a pine-tree. 

Pistiina, and -um a bake-house. 
Planitia, and -ies, a jdain. 

Plato, and Platon, Plato. 

Flebs, and plebes, ei, the commxm 
people. 

PoiTus, and -um, a leek. 

Postulatum, ami -io, a request. 
Prsesepia, -ium, -es, or -is, and -e, 3 
stable. 

Prmtextum, and -uSj us, a pretext. 
Prosapia, and -ies, lineage. 

Papa, arid -um, a turnip. 

Kequies, etis or rest. 

Rete, and retis, a net. 

Reticulus, and -um, a small net. 


Rictum, and -irs, us, the open mouifu 
Smvitia, -udo and-\e,s, ferocity._ 
Sagus, and -um, a niiUiary cloak. 
Sanguis, and sanguen, blood. 

Satrapes, and satraps, a satrap. 
Scabritia, and -ies, roughness. 
Scorpius, -os, and-\o, a scorpion. 
Segmentum, and -men, a piece. 
Segnitia, and -ies, sloth. 

Senecta, and -us, old age. 

Sequester, tri, or iris, a timstee. 
Sesama, and -um, sesame. 

Sibilus, and -a, di'um, a hissing. 

Sinapi, and -is, mustard. 

Sinus, ami -um, a goblet. 

Spams, o.nd -a, drum, a spear. 
Spurcitia, and -ios, flthiness. 
Stramentum, and -men, straw. 
Suffimentum, and -mew, fumigation. 
Suggestus, and -um, a pulpit, stage. 
Supparus, and -um, a linen garment, 
Supplicium, -icamentum, and -icatio 
a public supplication. 

Tapetum, -ete, and -es, tapestry. 
Teneritas, ojitf-tb.do^ softness. 

Tergum, and -us, dris, the back. 

Tiara, and -as, a turban. 

Tignus, and -um, a beam, timber. 
Tigris, is, or idis, a tiger. 

Titanus, and Titan, Titan. 

Tonitruum, and -trus, iis, thunder. 
Torale, and -al, a bed-covering. 

Trabes, and trabs, a beam. 

Tribula, and -um. a threshing sledge. 
Vespera, -per, eri and iris, the evening. 
Viuaceus, and -a, drum, a grape-stone, 
Viscus, and -um, the mistletoe. 

Vulgus, masc. and neut., the commm 
people. 


Remark 1. To these may be added some other verbals in us and io, and 
Greek notms in o and on; as, Dio and Dion; also some Greek nouns in es and 
e, which have Latin forms in a; as, Atrides and Atrlda. See § 45. 

Rem. 2. Some proper names of places also are redundant in number; ofl, 
Argos diwdi Argi; Fidena Fklence; Thebe &w<l Thebie. 

Note. The different forms of most words in the above list are not equally common, and 
Eome are rarely uesd, or only in particular cases. 


DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 


5 100. Nouns are derived from other nouns, from adjectives, 
ftud from verbs. 


I. From Nouns. 


From nouns are derived the following classes :— 

1. A patronymic is the name of a person, derived from that of his 
father or other ancestor, or of the founder of his nation. 


DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 


57 


I IOC 

Note 1 Patronymics are properly Greek nouns, and hare been borrowed from that Ian 
ruage by the Latin poets. 

(a.) ]\Iasculine patronymics end in \des^ Ides, ades, and lades. 

(1.) Konns in «s of the second declension, and those nouns of the third do* 
clension, \vhose root ends in a short syllable, form their patronymics in tdei, 
as, Pndmus, Priamides; Aijaine/ir.^idn, gen. 6nis, A<jamemn6nides. 

(2d Nouns in cos and cles form their patronymics in Ides; as, A-trMs, AtrUks , 
Heracles (i. e. Hercules,) Jleradldes. 

Kem. 1 . ^7ildes, in Virg. A. 9, 653, is formed in like manner, as if from jEn^s, 
instead of uEnms. 

(3.) Nouns in as and es of the first declension form their patronymics in &de*^ 
as ^ncds, uEnmdes; JIipp6f.es, Bippdtddes. 

(4.) Nouns in ins of the second declension, and those nouns of the third de¬ 
clension, whose root ends in a long vowel^ form their patronymics in iddts; as, 
Thestius, Thestmdes; Amjdiitvyd {gen. otiis), Amphiti-yoniddes. 

Kem 2 . A few nouns also of the first declension have patronymics in iddes: 
as, Anchlses, Ancliislddes. 

(6.) Feminine patronymics end in is, eis, and ias, and correspond 
in termination to the masculines, viz. is to ides, eis to ides, and ias to % 
tddes ; as, T'yndarus, masc. Tyndarides, fern. Tyndaris; iVerei/s, masc. 
Nereides, fern. Nereis; Thestius, masc. T'hestiddes, fern. Thesiias. 

Kem. 3. A few feminines are found in Ine, or ione; as, Nerlne, Acrisione, 
from Nereus and Acrisius. 

Note 2 . Patronymics in des and ne are of the first declension ; those in is 
and as, of the third. 

2. A. patriot or gentile noun is derived from the name of a country; 
and denotes an inhabitant of that country; as, 

Tros, a Trojan man ; Troas, a Trojan woman : MacSdo, a Macedonian ; 
Samnis, a Samnite ; from Troja, Macedonia, and Samniunu 

Note 3. Most patrials are properly adjectives, relating to a noun understood ; 
as, hOnio, civis, etc. See § 128, 6. 

3. A diminutive signifies a small thing of the kind denoted by the 
nrimitive; as, liher, a book; libellus, a little book. 

Diminutives generally end in ulus, ula, ulum, or cuius, cula, culum, 
according as the primitive is masuline, feminine, or neuter. 

A. 1. If the primitive is of the first or second declension, or its root ends 
vn c, g d, or t after a vowel, the diminutive is formed by annexing uhis, a, 
urn to the root ; as, arula, sermlus, jmerulus, scutuluin, cornicula, reyvlns, cOn 
pduluin, mercedula; from dra, servus, puer, scutum, cornix, {-ids), rex, {reyis), 
caput, {-Itis), merces, {-hlis.) 

2 . Primitives of the first or second declension whose root ends in e or 
Instead of ulus, a, um, add 6lus, a, um; as, Jilidlus, ghridla, horredlum; from 
filius, gloria, hoi'veum. 

3. Primitives of the first or second declension whose root ends in I n or r, 
form diminutives bv contraction in ellus, a, um, and some in Ulus, a, ur.i; 
ocellus, asellus, libeltus, lucellum; from oculus, asina, liber, lucrum ; and sigillum, 
tigillum, from signum, lignum. 

B. 1 If the primitive is of the third, fourth, or fifth declension, the diminu- 
Jve is formed in ciilus, (or iculus), a, um. 

2. Primitives of the third declension whose nominative ends in r, or in os or 

Ifom ending in roots r, annex cuius to the nominative ; a,s,/ratercuius, soror- 


58 


DERIVATION OF NOUNS. 


§ 101 


tula osculum, corpuscuhim; from/rafer, sdror, ds, {6i'is),corpmy So also 

primitives in es and js, but these drop the s of the nominative ; as, igniculus, 
nubecula^ diecula ; from iffnis, nubes, dies. 

3. Primitives of other terminations of the third declension, and those of the 
fourth, add iculns to the root ; as, ponticulus, coticula, ossiculum, verslculus, corni- 
culum; from pens, cos, Ss, {ossii ■, versus, coi'nu. 

4. Primitives in o, {inis or onis), in adding cuius, a, um, change the final vowel 
of the root (i or o) into u ; as, homunculus, sermunculus ; from hOmo and sermo ; 
and a few primitives of other terminations form similar diminutives ; as, avurir. 
culut, domuncula ; from dvus and ddmus. 

C. 1. A few diminutives end in uleus, as, equuleus, aculeus; from eqvm and 
dcus; and a few also in lo; as, homuncio, senecio, from hdmo and senex. 

2 Diminutives are sometimes formed from other diminutives ; as, asellulus, 
from csellus; sometimes two or more diminutives with different terminationa 
are formed from the same primitive, as, homunculus, homullus, and homuncio; 
from hdino; and sometimes the primitive undergoes euphonic changes ; as rw- 
musculus, from rumor. 

, Rem. Some diminutives differ in gender from their primitives ; as ranun^ 
cuius, scamillus, from rdna and scamnum. 

4. (a.) An amplificative is a personal appellation denoting an ex¬ 
cess of that which is expressed by its primitive ; as, 

Capito, one who has a large head: so ndso, labeo, bucco, fi'onto, mento, one who 
has a large nose, lips, or cheeks, a broad forehead or long chin; from cdput, 
ndsus, labia, bucca,frons, and mentum. 

(b.) A few personal appellatives in io denote the trade or profession to which 
a person belongs ; as, ludvo, an actor ; pellio, a funder ; from ludus, and peUis. 

5. The termination ium added to the root of a noun, indicah s the office or 
condition, and often, derivatively, an assemblage of the individuals denoted by 
the primitive ; as, collegium, colleagueship, and thence an assembly of col¬ 
leagues ; servitium, servitude, and collectively the servants ; so sacerdoiium, and 
ministerium; from collega, servus, sacerdos, and minister. 

6 . The termination imonium is added to the root of a few nouns, denoting 
something derived from the primitives, or imparting to it its peculiar character; 
as, testimonium, testimony ; so vadimonium, patrimonium, matrimonium; frona 
testis, vds {vddis), pdter, and mdter. 

7. The termination Hum, added to the root of names of plants, denotes a 
place where they grow in abundance ; as, quercHum, laurHum, olivetum, from 
quercus, laurus, and ollva. 

So, also, cEsculetum, dumHum, myrteium, and by analogy saxHum. But some 
drop e ,* as, carectum, salictum, virgultum, and arbustum. 

8 . The termination drium, added to the root of a noun, denotes a recentacle 
of the thmgs signified by the primitive; as, avidrium, an aviary; j^l'^i'f^tdrium, a 
nursery ; from dvis, a bird, and jilanta, a plant. 

9. Tbe termination lie, added to the root of names of animals, marks the 
p’ace where they are kept ; as, borlle, a stall for oxen; so caprile, ovilc; from 
yos, an ox, caper, a goat, and dvis, a sheep. 

Note 1 . This class and the preceding are properly neuter adjectives. 

Mote 2. Abstract nouns ai'e derived eithjgr from adjectives or from verbs. 
See S 26, 6. 


n. From Adjectives. 

§ 101 . 1. Abstract nouns are formed by adding tbe terminatior 
Mas, itudo, ia, ilia or (ties, edo, and imdnia to the root of the primitive 


§ 102. 


DERIVATI >N OF NOUNS. 


59 


1 

2. Abstracts in Uas^ (equivalent to the English ty or ity), are formed from 
adjectives of each declension ; as, cupiditaSy teneHtas^ celeritas, crudeUtm^ fd%(A~ 
tas; from cupldus, tener, celer, cr'udelis, and felix. 

(1.) When the root ends in i, the abstract is formed in Stas; a.s, jriStas, from 
fnus; and Avhen it ends in t, as only is added ; as, honestas from honestus. 

( 2 .)_ In a few abstracts i before tas is dropped ; as, Ubertas, juventas, from 
UL-tr,juvenis. In facultas and difficultas, from facilis, aifficUiSy there is a change 
also in the root-vowel from i to u. 

(3.) A few abstracts are fonned in tttis or tus, instead of Uas; as, serviius, 
inventus, from servus Sind Juvenus. See § 76, Exc. 2 . 

3. Abstracts in itudo are formed from adjectives in us, and seme from adjec¬ 
tives of the third declension of two or three termmations; SiS,, magnitudo, alii- 
4ido, fortitudo, acritudo, from magnus, altus, fm'tis, deer. Polysyllabic adjectives 
In tus, generally form their abstracts by adding ikfo instead of to their root^ 
as, consuetudo, h'om coiisuetus. 

4. Abstracts in ia (equivalent to the English ce or cy,) are for the most part 
fonned from adjectives of one termination ; as, dementia, constantia, impuden- 
tin, from demens, constans,impudens. But some adjectives in us and er ,including 
verbals in cundus, likewise form their verbals in ia; as, miseria, angustia, facun- 
dia, ixom. miser, angustus, f acundus. 

5. Abstracts in itia and ities are formed from adjectives in m and is; as, 
Justitia, tristitia, duritia, and duHties, segnitia and segnities, from. Justus, tristis, dur- 
rus, and segnis. 

6 . A few abstracts are formed in edo, and a few in imonia; and sometimes 
two or more abstracts of different terminations are formed from the same adjec¬ 
tive ; as, acritas, acritudo, acredo, and acrimonia, from deer. In such case those 
in itudo and imonia seem to be more intensive in signification than those in 
I tas. 

Remark. Adjectives, as distinguished from the abstracts which 
are formed from them, are called concretes. 

in. From Verbs. 

§ lOS. Nouns derived from verbs are called verbal nouns. 

The following are the principal classes :— 

1. Abstract nouns expressing the action or condition denoted by a verb, es¬ 
pecially by a neuter verb, are formed by annexing or to their first root: as 
imor, love ; favor, favor ; moeror, grief ; splendor, brightness; from dtmo, jdveo, 
motreo, and splendoc. 

2. (a.) Abstracts are also formed from many verbs by annexing turn to the 
first 01 to the third root ; as, colloquium, a conference ; gaudium, joy ; exor- 
dium, a beginning ; exitium, destruction ; solatium, consolation ; from colldquor, 
gaudeo, exordior, exeo and sdlor. 

8. Some verbal abstracts are formed by annexing ela, imonia, or imdnium, to 
Ibe first root of the verb ; as, querela and querimonia, a complaint; suadeix^ 
persuasion ; from queroi' and suadeo. 

4 . (a.) The terminations men and mentum, added to the first root of the 
verb, generally with a connecting vowel, denote the thing to which the action 
belongs, both actively and passively, or a means for the performance of the ac- 
iion ; as,fulmen from fid geo, flumen from fvo, a gmen from ago, soldmen from 
^cumentum from ddceo, hlandimentum from Uandior. 

(b.) The final consonant of the root is often dropped, and the preceding and 
<onnecting vowels contracted into one syllable ; as, dgo, (dgimen,) agmen; fdveo, 
\fdvimentum,) fomentum. 


60 


COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 


§ 103 


(c.) Some words of this class have no primit ve veib in use ; as, atramentum, 
mk; but, in this case, the connecting vowel seems to imply its reference to such 
B verb as atrdre, to blacken. 

5. {a.) The terminations uliim, hulum^ culum; brum, crum, trum, annexed to 
the first root of a verb, denote an instrument for perfonning tli<j act expressed 
by the verb, or a place for its performance ; as, cin(/ulum,uperculum,yenc^ulimi, 
vmtildhrum, fulcrum, spectrum, from cinyo, operio, venor, ventllo,fulch, ?/jCcio. 

(6.) Sometimes culum is contracted into clum; as, vinclum for viuculum. 
Sometimes, fUso, s is inserted bef)re ti'um; as, rostrum, from rbdo, and a con¬ 
necting vowel is placed before this and some of the other terminations; aa, 
ardlmm, stabulum, cubiculum, from aro, sto, and citbo. 

(c.) Some words of this kind are fonncd from nouns ; as, acetabulum, a vin¬ 
egar cruet ; turibulum, a censer ; from acUum and tus. 

6. {a.) Nouns fonned by adding or and rix to the third root of the verb, de¬ 
note respe-Dtively the male and female agent of the action expressed by the verb 
as, adjuior adjutrix, an assistant ; fcuutor, fautinx, a favorer; victor, victrix, a 
conqueror ; from adjuvo {a^'ut-),fdveo {faut-), vinco {vict-). They are often like¬ 
wise used as adjectives. Tne feminine form is less common tnan the mascu¬ 
line, and when the third root of the verb ends in s, the feminine is sometimes 
formed in tidx; as, b>ndeo {tom-) ionstrix. 

(6.) Some nouns in tor are formed immediatelvfrom other nouns ; as, vidUrr, 
a traveller ; janitor, a door-keeper; from via o.nd janua. In meretrix from mereo, 
i of the third root becomes e. 

(c.) The agent of a few verbs is denoted by the tennlnations « and o annexed 
to the first root ; as, convlva, a guest ; advena, a stranger ; scriba, a scribe ; 
erro, a vagrant ; bibo, a drunkard; comedo, a glutton, from convlvo, advenio, etc. 

7. Many abstract nouns are fonned by annexing io and us (gen. us) to the 
third root of a verb; as, actio, an action ; lectio, reading ; from dyo {act-), leyo 
{lect-); — Cantus, singing ; vlsus, sight; usus, use; from cutw {cant-), video {vis-), 
utor {us-). 

Remark 1, Nouns of both forms, and of like signification, are frequently de¬ 
rived from the same verb; as, concursio and concursus, a running together; rnotic 
and motiLS, etc. 

Rem. 2. Nouns formed by adding the termination ura to the third root of 
a verb, sometimes have the same signification as those in io and us, and some¬ 
times denote the result of an action; a?; posit ura, position; vinctura, a binding 
together; from and vincio; and the termination Ha has sometimes the 
same meanmg; as, querela, complaint ; loquHa, speech, from queror and Idqitor. 

Note. One of these forms is generally used to the exclusion of the others, and when 
two or more are found, they are usually employed in somewhat different senses. 

8. The termination driurn, added to the third root of a verb, denotes the place 
where the action of the verb is performed; as, auditorium, a lecture-room; con- 
ditdriuin,?i repository, from audio and condo. 


COMPOSITION OF NOUNS. 

§ 103* Compound nouns are formed variously:— 

1. Of two nouns; as, rupicapra, a wild goat, of riipes and copra. In some 
wt.r-is, compounded of two nouns, the former is a genitive; as, senatusconsulturi, 
a decree of the senate; jurisconsultus, a lawyer; in others. Loth paits are de¬ 
clined; Qs>, respubllca,jusjurandum. See ^ 91. 

2. Of a noun and a verb ; as, artlfex, an artist, of ars and fdcio; Jidi 
'■m, a harper of/ides and edno; ayricdla, a husbandman, of dyer and cblo. 


15 104 


AL JECTI\ ES 


61 


3. Of an adjective and a noun; as, (Bjuinoctium, the equinox, of ceqms and 
n(>x; millepeda, a millepede, of mille and pes. 

Tn (luuinmr, triumvir, dtcemmr, centumvir, the numeral adjective is in the 
genitive plural. 

R KM ARK 1. "When the former part of a compound word is a noun or an adjec¬ 
tive, it usually ends in i; as, artifex, rujncapra, agricdla, etc. If the second 
word begins with a vowel, an elision takes place ; as, quinquennium, of quinqm 
and annus; maynanimus, of mngnus and animus. 

4. Of an adverb and a noun ; as, wickedness; 7i€mo, nobody; of rte,Ja8, 
9jid k6mo. So biduum, of bis and dies. 

6 Of a preposition and a noun: as, incuria, want of care, of in and ctira. So 
inttrvi.lliim, an interval; prcecordia, the diaphragm; proverbium, a proverb; sub- 
Tellium, a low seat; suptrjicies, a surtace. 

Rem. 2. When the fonner part is a preposition, its final consonant is sometimes 
changed,to adapt it to that which follows it ; as, iynobilis, iliepidus,imp)'udentia, 
irrumpo, of in and nobilis, lepidus, etc. See ^ 196. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§ 104. An adjective is a word wliicli qualifies or limits the 
meaning of a substantive. 

Adjectives may be divided, according to their signification, into 
various classes; as denoting, 

1. Character or quality ; as, bdnus, good; albus, white; amicus, friendly. 

2. State or condition; as,happy; rfim, rich. 

3. Possession; as, lierilis, a master’s; patmus, a father’s. 

4. Quantity; as, magnus, great; totus, entire; jynrras, small. 

6. Number; as, un'<s, one; secundus, second; tot, so many; quot, as many. 
These are called numerals. 

6. Time; as, owmiis, yearly; hesternus, of yesterday; blmus, of two years; 
Irimestris, of three months. 

7. Place; as, high; vicmMS, near; a^rius, ailrial; terrestHs, terrestriaL 

8. Material; as, ctwrej/s, golden; yh^rmews, beechen; <erren«s, earthen. 

9. Part; as, nullus, no one; aliquis, some one. These are called partitives. 

10. Country; as, ZSo/ndnws, Roman; Arplnas of Arpinum. These are called 
patrials. 

11. lliminution; as,from small; misellus, from miser, 

able. These are called diminutives. 

12. Amplification; as, vindsus and vinolentus, mrih. given to wine; auritvs, 
having long ears. These are called anpUficatives. 

13. Relation; as, dvidus, desirous of; memor, mindful of; insuetus. These 
are called relatives. 

14. Interrogation; as, quantusl how great; qzialis? of what kind; qnntf how 

inanv? qnatusf of what number? These are called and, wnen 

^at usej interrogatively, they are called carrelalives. 

lb. Soecification; as, tdlis, such; tantus so great; tot, to many. These are 
tailed demonstratives. 


6 


62 ADJECTIVES-FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. § 105 


DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 10^. 1. Adjectives are declined like substantives, and are 

either of the hrst and second declensions, or of the third cnly. 

ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DE¬ 
CLENSIONS. 

2. The masculine of adjectives belonpring to the first and second 
declensions, ends either in us or in er. The feminine and neuter are 
foimed respectively by annexing a and ran to the root of the mascu¬ 
line. The masculine in us is declined like dominus; that in er like 
gmer or dyer; the feminine always like musa ; and the neuter like 
reynum. 

Remavk 1. The masculine of one adjective, sdiur, -ura, -urum, full ends in 
ur, and is declined Like gener. 


Bonus, yood. 



Masc. 

Singular. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

bo'-nus. 

bo'-na. 

bo'-niun. 

G. 

bo'-ni. 

bo'-n®, 

bo'-ni, 

D. 

bo'-no, 

bo'-n®. 

bo'-no. 

Ac. 

bo'-num, 

bo'-nam, 

bo'-num. 

V. 

bo'-ne. 

bo'-na. 

bo'-num. 

Ah. 

bo'-no. 

bo'-na. 

bo'-no. 

N. 

bo'-nl, 

Plural. 

bo'-n®. 

bo'-na. 

G. 

bo-no'-rum, bo-na'-rum, 

bo-no'-rum, 

D. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-na. 

Ac. 

bo'-n5s. 

bo'-nas. 

V. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-n®. 

Ah. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

In like manner decline 
-tus, high. Fi'-dus, faithfid. 

Lon'-gus, long. 

/a -rus, 

covetous^ 

Im'-pro-bus, xcicked. 

Ple'-nus, full. 

-nig'-nus, Jcind. 

In-i'-quus, unjust. 

Tac'-i-tus, silent. 


Rem. 2. Like bonus are also declined all participles In us ; as, 
A-ma'-tus. Am-a-tu'-rus. A-man'-dus. 

Rem. 3, The masculine of the vocative singular of adjectives in us is some- 
hmes like the nominative; as, 0 vir fords aique amicus. Hor. Meus has both 
mi and meus. 

Rem. 4. The genitive plmal of distributive numerals ends commonly in dm 
listead if drum; as, crassitude binfim digitorum. Plin. 


S 106 


ADJECTIVES- 


•FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 63 


S. Tener, tender. 


Singular. 



Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-;e-ra, 

ten'-e-rum, 

G. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-^ri, 

D. 

ten'-e-ro, 

ten'-e-rae. 

ten'-e-ro, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-rum, 

ten'-e-ram, 

ten'-e-rum. 

V. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-c-ra. 

ten'-e-rum, 

Ab. 

ten'-e-ro. 

ten'-e-ra. 

Plural. 

ten'-e-ro. 

N. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ra, 

G. 

ten-e-ro'-riim, 

ten-e-ra'-rum, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

V. 

ten'-e-ri 8, 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

Ac. 

ten'-e-ros, 

ten'-e-ras, 

ten'-e-ra. 

V. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-6-ra. 

Ab. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 


In like manner are declined 

As'-per, rough. ^ La'-cer, torn. Pros'-per, prosperous 

Ex'-ter, foreign. Li'-ber, free. Sa'-tur, full. 

Gib'-ber, crook-backed. IVIi'-ser, wretched. 

So also alter, except in the genitive and dative singular (see ^ 107), semifer 
and the compounds of giro and f ero ; as, laniger, oplfer. 

Note. Prosper is less frequent than prosperua^ and exter is scarcely used 
}n the nominative singular masculine. 

§ 106. The other adjectives in er drop e in declension; as, 


Piger, slothful. 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 


N. 

pi'-ger. 

pi -gra. 

pi'-grum, 

G. 

Pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae. 

pj'-gr'b 

D. 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-grae. 

pi'-gro. 

Ac. 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-gram. 

pi'-grum, 

V. 

pi'-ger. 

pi'-gra. 

pi'-grum. 

Ab. 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-gra. 

Plural. 

pi'-grb. 

N. 


pi'-gr®. 

pi'-grS, ^ 

G. 

pi-gro'-rum, 

pi-gra'-riim. 

pi-gro'-rum, 

D. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

Ac. 

pi'-grbs. 

pi'-gras. 

pi'-gra. 

V. 

pi'-g^b 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gr®. 

pi'-gra. 

Ab 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 



64 


ADJECTIVES—THIRD DECLEKSION. § 107, 108 


In like manner decline 


A'-ter, black. 
Cre'-ber, frequent. 
Glii'-ber, suaioth. 
In'-te-ger, entire. 


I\I:V-cer, lean. 
Ki'-ger, black. 
Pur-clier, fair. 
Eu'-ber, red. 
SiX'-cer, sacred. 


Sca'-ber, rc/ugh. 
Si-nis'-ter, left. 
Te'-ter, foul. 
Va'-fer, crafty. 


Dexter., right, has -tra, -trum, and less frequently -tera, -tei'um. 


§ lO?'. Six adjectives in and three in er, have their genitive 
singular in iu.*?, and their dative in i, in all the genders :— 

Alius, another. Tbtus, udiole. Alter, -tera,-tenim,o^/;6r. 

Nullus, no o7ie. Ullus, any. T'tcr, -tra, -tnun, ictiich of the tix 

So'us, ahme. Uiins, otie. Keuter, -tra, -tmm, neither. 

To these may be added the other compounds of fder,—namely, uterque. ea'^h 
of two; utercumque, uterlibet, and w/e?a7S, ■which of the two you j)lease; gen. 
utriusque, etc.—also, alteruter, one of two; gen. alterutrius, and sometimes alt&- 
rius utrius; dat. alterutri. So alteruterque., and luiusquisque. See § 138, 4. 

Nullus, solus, lotus, ullus, and unus are thus declined :— 

Singular. 



Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

u'-nus, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

G. 

u-ni'-us,* 

u-ni'-us, 

u-nl-us. 

D. 

u'-ni, 

u'-ni. 

•u'-ni. 

Ac. 

u'-num. 

u'-nrim, 

u'-num, 

V. 

u'-ne, 

u'-na. 

u'-niim. 

Ab. 

u'-no. 

u'-na. 

u'-no. 


The plural is regular, like that of bonus. 

Remark 1. Alim has aliud in the nominative and accusative singular neu¬ 
ter, and in the genitive alius, contracted for aliius. 

Rem. 2. Except in the genitive and dative singular, alter is declined like tener 
and liter and neuter like plger. 

Rem. 3. Some of these adjectives, in early writers, and occasionally even in 
Cicero, Caesar, and Nepos, form their genitive and dative regularly, like bbnus, 
tener, or plyer. 

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

§ 1(^8. Some adjectives of the third declension have three termi¬ 
nations in the nominative singular; some two ; and others only one. 

I. Those of three terminations end in er, masc.; is, fern.; and 6^ 
neut.; and are thus declined :— 

Acer, sharp. 


Singular. 



Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

a'-cer, 

a -cris. 

a'-cre, 

G. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cris, 

D. 

a'-cri, 

a'^ri. 

a'-cri, 

Ac. 

a'-crem. 

a -crem, 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 


* See § 16 






5 109, 110. ADJECTIVES-THIRD DECLENSION. 


55 


Plural. 


N. 

a'-cr6s. 

a'-cres. 

a'-cri-a. 

G. 

a'-cri-iim. 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-iiTTi, 

D. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-bus, 

Ac. 

a'-cres. 

a'-cres. 

a'-cri-a. 

V. 

a'-cres. 

a'-cres. 

a'-cri-a. 

Ah. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 

ac'-ri-bus. 


Id like manner are declined the following;— 

Al'-acer, cheerful. Pa-lus'-ter, marshy. Sil-ves'-ter, jooody, 

Vam-pes'-tcr, champaign. Po-des'-ter, ok foot. Ter-res^-ter, terresiriaL 

CQ['-^-hcr,fam<nis. yu'-ter, rotten. Vol'-ii-cer, winged. 

E-ques'-tor, e(fitst?'ian. Sa-lu'-ber, wholesome. 

To these add names of months in -her, used as adjectives; as, October^ etc. 
(cf. ^ 71), and cc/er, swift, which has ceUris, celere; gen. celeris, etc. 

Pemark 1. The termination er was anciently sometimes feminine; as, voliicet 
fama. Petr.: and, on the other hand, tlie masculine often ends in is; as, 
collis silvestrisj CaiS. 

Bem. 2. Volucer has um in the genitive plural. 


§S09. n. Adjectives of two terminations end in tsfor the mas¬ 
culine and feminine, and e for the neuter, except comparatives, which 
end in or and us. 


Those in is, e, are thus declined 




Mitis mild. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


M. (f F. 

N. 


M. 4- F. _ N. 

N. 

mi'-tis. 

mi'-te. 

N. 

mi'-tes, mit'-i-S,* 

G. 

mi'-tis. 

mi'-tis. 

G. 

mlt'-i-um,* mit'-i-um, 
mlt'-i-bus, mit'-i-bus, 

D. 

mi'-ti. 

mi'-ti. 

D. 

Ac. 

mi'-tem. 

mi'-te, 

Ac. 

mi'-tes, mit'-i-a. 

V. 

mi'-tis. 

mi'-te. 

V. 

mi'-tes, mit'-i-a. 

Ah. 

mi'-ti. 

mi'-ti. 

Ah. 

mit'-i-bus. mit'-i-bus. 



In like manner decline ’ 

Ag'-I-lis, active. 

Dul'-cis, sweet. 


In-col'-ii-mis, safe. 

P>i(j'-vis 

, short. 

For'-tis, brave. 


Mi-rabM-lis, wonulerftd. 

Cru-de' 

-lis, cruel. 

Gra'-vis, heavy. 


Om'-nis, ail. 


Tres, three, is declined like the plural of mitis. 

Note. Several aiijectives of this class have forms also in m.v, a, um. See § 116. 


§ (a.) All comparatives, except plus, more, are thua do 

dined:— 


* Pronouneeo mish'-e-a, etc. See § 12. 



ADJECTIVES-THIRD DECLENSION. 


s ni 


IMitior,* milder. 


N. 

Singular. 

M. f F. 
mit'-i-or, 

nait'-i-us. 

G. 

mit-i-o'-rls. 

mit-i-o'-rls, 

D. 

niit-i-o'-ri. 

mit-l-o'-ri. 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-rem. 

mit'-i-us. 

V. 

mit'-i-6r. 

mit'-i-us. 

Ab. 

mit-i-o'-re, or -ri. 

mit-i-b'-re, or -ri. 

N. 

Plural. 

M. f F. 
mit-i-o'-res. 

mit-i-6'-ra. 

G. 

mit-i-o'-rum. 

mit-i-5'-rum. 

D. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

Ac. 

mit-i-5'-res. 

mit-i-6'-ra. 

V. 

mit-i-5'-res, 

mit-i-6'-ra, 

Ah. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

A1 -ti-or, higher. 
Au-da'-ci-or, bolder. 

In like manner decline 

Dul'-ci-or, siceeter. Gra'-vi-or, hen 

Fe-lic'-i-or, happier. Pru-den'-ti-or, 

Bre'-vi-or, snorter. 

Fe-ro'-ci-or, j?ercer 

. dent. 


Cru-de'-li-or, mare cruel. For'-ti-or, braver. U-be'-ri-or, more fertile. 

Plus, more, is thus declined :— 


Singular. 

N. 

N. plus, 

G. plu'-ris, 

D. -, 

Ac. plus, 

V. -, 


Plural. 


M. # F. 

N. plu'-res, 

G. plu'-ri-ura, 
D. plu'-ri-bus, 
Ac. plu'-res, 

V. -, 


N. 

plu'-ra, rarely plu -ri-5, 
plu'-ri-um, 

'plu'-ri-bus, 

plu'-ra, 


Ab. (plu'-re, o5s.) Ab. plu'-ri-bus. plu'ri-biis. 

So, but in the plural number only, complures, a great many. 


m. Other adjectives of the third declension have but 
one terniination in the nominative singular for all genders. They all 
end in /, r, s, or x, and increase in the genitive. 

They are thus declined :— 

Felix, happy. 

Singular. 


M. ^ F. 

N. fe'-lix, 

G. fe-li'-cis, 

D. fe-li'-ci, 

Ac. fe-li'-cem, 

V. fe'-lix. 

Ah. fe-li'-ce, or -ci. 


N. 

fe'-lix, 

fe-li'-cis, 

fe-li'-ci, 

fe'-lix, 

fe'-lix, 

fe-li'-ce, or -ci. 


* Pronounced mish'-e-or^ etc. See § 12. 








1112 


ADJECTIVES-OBLIQUE CASES. 


67 


Plural. 

M. ^ F. N. 


N. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-iic'-i-a,* 

G. 

fe-lic'-i-ilm,* 

fe-Iic'-i-iim, 

D. 

fe-lic'-i-btis, 

fe-lic'-i-bufl, 

Ac. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a. 

V. 

fe-li'-ces, 

fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ah. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 

fe-lic'-i-bus. 


Praesens, present. 


Singular. 



M. ^ F. 

N. 

N. 

prse'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

G. 

prae-sen'-tis. 

prae-sen'-tls. 

D. 

prae-sen'-ti, 

prae-sen'-ti. 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tem. 

prae'-sens, 

V. 

prae'-sens, 

prae'-sens, 

Ah. 

prae-sen'-te, or -ti. 

prae-sen'-te, or -ti. 


Plural. 


N. 

prse-sen'-tes, 

pfaB-sen'-ti-a,f 

G. 

prae-sen'-ti-um. 

prae-sen'-ti-um. 

D. 

praB-sen'-ti-bus, 

prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

Ac. 

prae-sen'-tes. 

prae-sen'-ti-a. 

V. 

praB-sen'-tes, 

prae-sen'-ti-a, 

Ah. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

prae-sen'-ti-bus. 


In like manner decline 

Aa'-dax, -acis, bold. 

Par'-tl-ceps, -Ipis, 

pair- Sol'-lers, -tis, shretod. 

Com'-pos, -ctis,. master of. ticipant. 

Sos'-pes, -itis, safe. 

r6'-rox, -ech, fierce. 

Prse'-pes, -etis, s^tnfL Sup'-plex, -icis, sup- 

In'-gens, -tis, huge. 

Pru'-dens, -ii%, jyrudent. pliant. 


Remark. All present participles are declined like/)rGB5ens; as, 
A'-mans. Mo'-nens. Re'-gens. Ca'-pi-ens. Au'-di-ens. 

Note. A few adjectives of one termination have redundant forms in us, a, 
um; see § 116. 

Rules for the Oblique Cases of Adjectives of the 
Third Declension. 

GENITIVE SINGULAR. 

§ IIS. ]\Iost adjectives of the third declension form their geni¬ 
tive iingalar like nouns of the same termination. 

The following may here be specified:— 

1. Of those in es (cf. ^ 73) some have -efts; as, h3es, pe'^es, preepes, and teres , 
—inqtiies and locuples have -etis ; —some have -Uis; as, d'lces, sospes, and super- 
iies ; —some have -idis; as, deses, and 7'eses; — hipes, and tripes have -pMis ;—pubes 
nas put.eris, and impubes, impitheris and impubis. 

* VTonounced Je-lisb/-e-um etc See § 10, £so., and § 7., S, (6.) 
t Pronounced pre-zen^-she-a, etc. 



68 


ADJECTIVES-OBLIQUE CASES. 


§ 113,11^ 


2. Compos and impos have -dtis, and exos, exossis.—Exhx has exlegis, pervox 
\ni^^pcrno( tis 78),/WYtcoa:,/>rti?c(5( /.s, and redux^ rediia's. — Ccelcbs has ccnUhis 
(§ 77); inUrcus,intttxutia,?i\\(\ v^tus,reteris. Those in ceps which are compounds 
of cdput^ have -cipitis; as, anceps^ pneceps (§ 78, 1); but tue compounds of ceps 
from cdjnu have -ipis; as,, particeps, pai'ticipis. —Those in CW6, compounds of 
cor, have -cordis; as, concors, concordis (§71, Exc. 2).— Memor and vnmfmoi 
nave -Oris. 


- ABLATIVE SINGULAR. 

§ 113. 1. Adjectives wliicb have e in the nominative singular nets- 
ter have only i in the ablative. 

Exc. 1. Tlie ablatives bimestre, cceleste, and perenne are found in Ovid, asd 
&)ynomine in Virgil. 

2. Comparatives and participles in n.s, when used as parficiplcs, 
especially in the ablative absolute, have rather .£ than i; but parti¬ 
cipial adjectives in ns have rather i than e. 

8. Adjectives of one termination have either e or i in the ablative. 

Exc. 2. The following adjectives of one termination have only e in the ablar 
tive:— 

Bicorpor, bTpes, caelebs, compos, deses, discolor, hospes, impos, impubes, jn- 
vf'uis, locuplcs, pauper, princeps, puber or pubes, senex, sospes, superstes, 
tricorpor, tricuspis, and tripes. 

Exc. 3 . The following adjectives of one termination have omv i in the abla¬ 
tive :— 

Anceps, concors, discors, hebes, immemor, iners, ingens, Tnops, memor, par, 
pra'ceps, recens, repens, vigil, and most adjectives in x, especially those in 
pkx. 

Rem. 1. Inerte occurs in Ovid, recente in Ovid and Catullus, and prcecipt in 
Ennius. 

Rem. 2. Preesens, when used of things, makes the ablative in i; when used 
of persons, it has e. 


NOMINATIVE, ACCUSATIVE, AND GENITIVE PLURAL 

§ 114:. 1. The neuter of the nominative and acc”.sative plural 
ends in ia, and the genitive plural of all genders in ium ; but compar¬ 
atives in or, with veins, old, and uher, fertile, have a, and um. 

2. The accusative plural of masculine and feminine adjectives, whose geni 
tive plural ends in ium, anciently ended in is or ns, instead of es. Cf. § 85, E xc. 1, 

Esc. 1. Those adjectives that have only e in the ablative singular, have «,% 
in tlie genitive plural. 

Exc. 2. Compounds of facto, cdpio, and of such nouns as make?/??! in their 
genitive plural, with celer, comjmr, cicur, dh-es, memor, immemor, preepts, sup- 
plex, and vigil, make their genitive plural in um. 

Exc. 3. Dis, locvples, sons, and insons have either um or ium. The poets and 
the inter prose writers sometimes form the genitive plural of ether adjectives 
and of participles in ns, by syncope, in um, instead of ium; as, coaUstum, Viro- 
Ovid, etc. ° 


S 115, 716. 


IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 


69 


mUEGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

§ 11^* Some adjectives are defective, others redundant 

DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 

1. (a.) IVIany adjectives denoting personal qualities or attributes 
want tiie neuter gender, unless when occasionally joined to a neuter 
substantive used liguratively. Such are the following;— 

Bicorpor, bipes, ctelebs, compos, consors, degener, dives, impos, impf.bes, 
Indtistrius, inops, iiisons, invitiis, juvenis, locuples, meinor, puu|)er, j)articep 3 
princeps, ])uber, or pubes, redux, seiiex, sous, sospes, superstes, supplex, tri- 
ccipor, vigil. 

(b.) Victrix and ultrix are feminine in the singular, seldom neuter; in the 
plural, they are feminine and neuter. Such verbals partake of the nature both 
of substantives and adjectives, and correspond to masculines in tor. See ^ 
102, 6, (u.) 

2. The following want the genitive plural, and are rarely used 
in the'neuter gender :— 

Concolor, deses, hebes, perpes, reses, teres, versicolor. 

3. The names of months, which are properly adjectives, have only 
the masculine and feminine genders. 

4. Some adjectives are wholly indeclinable. 

Such nre fruf/i, temperate; nequajti, worthless; sat or satis, sufficient; the 
plurals alifpcot, tot, qudt, totidem, quotquot; and the cardinal numbers from quatVr- 
or to centum inclusive, and also viille. Cf. ^ 118, 1, and 6, (b.) 

5. The following adjectives are used only in certain cases: — 

Bilicem, acc.; doubly-tissued. Cetera, ceterum, the rest, wants the nom. sing, 
masc. i)QCQm\>\\Q,Q\n, acc.; tenfold. Exspes, wnra. ; hopeless. Inquies, ; 
-etem, acc.; -ete, abl.; restless. Mactus, and niiacte, norn.; macte, acc.; honored, 
— iniicti, nom. plur. Necesse, rtjjdnecessum, «tc. ; necessary. Tlus, 
acc. ; pluris, yen.; more ;— pi. plures, -a, nom. acc. ; -ium yen.; ibus, dat., abl. 
Cf. §110. Postera, posterum, comdiy rr/ie?*, wants the nom. sing. masc. Fotis, 
nom.siny. aivXpl., all genders; able. Dote, 7«o//i. siny., for potest; possible. Sep* 
templicis, yen.; -ce, abl .; seven-fold. Siremps, and sirempse, nom. and acc. j, 
alike. Taiitundem, nom. acc.; tantidem, yen.; tantandem, acc. ; so much 
Trilicem, acc.; trebly-tissued; trihces, nom. and acc. pi. 


REDUNDANT ADJECTIVES. 

§ SI6. The following adjectives are redundant in termination 


and declension. Those marked r 

Acclivis, and tus, r, ascendiny. 
Aaxiliaris, and -ius, auxiliary. 

Piijugis, and -us, yoked two toy ether. 
Dechvis, and-M'S, r, descendiny. 
Exanimis, and-us, r, lifeless. 
jlilaris, and-ns, cheerful. 
tmbccillis, r, and-us, weak. 

Irapubes, and -is, r, -is or -eris^ not 
(p'orni up. 

Ineimis, and -us, r, unarmed. 
inirenhi- and -ns. unbi-idled. 


are more rarely used. 

Inquies, and -etus, restless. 

Jocularis, and -ius, r, lauyhable. 

Multijugis, r, and -us, yoked many to~ 
yether. 

Opulens, and -lentus, rich. 

Priecox, -coquis, arid -coquus, early 
ripe. 

Proclivis, and -us, r, sloping. 

Quadrijugis, arid -us, yoked four to¬ 
gether. 

Semianimis, and -us, half alive. 


70 


NUMERAL ADJECTIVES, 


§117. 


Semiert/iis, and -us, half armed. Sublimis, and -us, high. 

Setnisomnis, and -ns, r, half asleep. Unanlmis, r, and -us, unanimous. 
Singularis, and -ius, single. Violeiis, r, ajjt/ -lentus, violent. 

To these may be added some adjectives in er and is ; as, saluler and -bns 
tdeber and -bris. Cf. ^ lOS, R. 1. 


NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ IS7. Numeral adjectives are divided into three principal 
classes— Cardinal, Ordinal, and Distributive. 


1. Cardinal numbers are those which simply denote the number oi 
things, in answer to the question Quot 1 ‘ How many V ’ They are, 


1. Unus, 

2. Duo, 

3. Ti-es, 

4. Quatuor, 

6. Quinque, 

6. Sex, 

7. Septem, 

8. Octo, 

9. Novem, 

10. Decern, 

11. Undecim, 

12. Duodecim, 

13. Tredecim, 

14. Quatuordecim, 

15. Quindecim, 

16. Sedecim, or sexdfecim, 

17. Septendecira, 

18. Octodecim, 

19. Novendecim, 

20. Viginti, 

21 Viginti unus, or ) 
unus et viginti, ) 

22. Viginti duo, or ) 
duo et viginti, etc., J 
30. Triginta, 

40. Quadraginta, 

60. Quinquaginta, 

60. Sexaginta, 

70. Septuaginta, 

80. Octoginta, or octuaginta, 
90. Nonaginta, 

100. Centum, 

101. Centum unus, or ) 
centum et unus, etc., J 

200. Diicenti, -se, a, 

800. Trecenti, etc., 

400. Quadriiigeuti, 

600. Quingenti, 

600. Sexcenti, 

700. Septingenti, 

800. Octingeriti, 

BOO. Nongenti, 

1000. Mille, 

2000. Duo millia, or ) 
bis mille, ( 


one. 

two. 

three. 

four. 

Jive. 

six. 

seven. 

eight 

nine. 

ten. 

eleven. 

twelve. 

thirteen. 

fourteen. 

f/teen. 

sixteen. 

seventeen. 

eighteen. 

nineteen. 

twenty. 

twenty-one. 

twenty-two. 

thirty. 

forty. 

sixty, 
seventy, 
eighty, 
ninety, 
a hundred. 

a hundred and one 

two hundred, 
three hundred, 
four hundred, 
f ve hundred, 
six hundred, 
seven hundred, 
eight hundred, 
nine hundred, 
a thousand. 

two thousand. 


I. 

II . 

ILL. 

ILLI. or IV. 

V. 

VI. 

VII. * 

VIII. 

vmi. or IX. 

X. 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII. 

XIUI. or XIV. 

XV. 

XVI. 
XVU. 

xvni. 

XV nil. or XIX 
XX. 


XXI. 


xxn. 

XXX. 

XXXX. or XL. 

L. 

LX. 

LXX. 

LX XX. 

LXXXX. or xa 

C. 

CL 

CC. 

CCC. 

CCCC, or CD. 

10. or I). 

IOC, or DC. 
lOCJ, or DCC. 

10CCC, or DCCC. 
LjCCCC, or DCCCC 
CIO, or M. 

CIO CIO, or MM; 


§ 118 

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 


8000 

Quinque millia, or i 
quinquies mille, ) 

five thousand. 

100. 

10000 

Decein millia, or 1 

ten thousand. 

CCIOO, 

decies mille, J 

60000. 

Quinqnagitua millia, 
or cuinqnagies mille. 

^ fifty thousand. 

1000. 

lOOOOO. 

Centum nnl'ia, tt ) 
ceiicics mihe. i 

a hundred thousand. 

CCCIOOO. 


§ 118. 1. Tho first three cardinal numbers are declined; from 

four to a hundred inclusive they are indeclinable; those denoting 
hundreds are declined like the plural of bonus. ° 

For tha declension of unus and tres^ see 107 and 109. 

Thic IS thus declined:— 


M. 

N. du'-o, 

G. du-o'-rum, 

D. du-o'-bus, 

Ac. du'-os, or du'-o, 
V. du'-o, 

Ab. du-o'-bus. 


Plural. 

F. 

du'-ae, 

du-a'-rum, 

du-a'-bus, 

du'-as, 

du'-ae, 

du-a'-bus. 


N. 

du'-o, 

du-o'-rura, 

du-o'-bus, 

du'-o, 

du'-o, 

du-o'-bus. 


Remark 1. Dudrum^ dudmm, are often contracted into dudm^ especially in 
compounds; as, dufimvir^ and when joined with millium. — Ambo, both, which 
partakes of the nature of a numeral and of a pronoun, is declined like duo. 


2. The cardinal numbers, except unus and mille, are used in the 
plural only. 

Rem. 2. The plural of unus is used with nouns which have no singular, or 
whose singular has a different sense from the plural; as, unce nupiiai^ one mar¬ 
riage ; una castra^ one camp. It is used also with nouns denoting several things 
considered as one whole; as, una vestimenta, one suit of clothes. So. also, when 
it takes the signification of “ alone ” or “ the same ”; as, uni Jjhii^ the Ubiona 
alone; unis moribus vivere ,—with the same manners. 

3. (a.l Thirteen, sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, and nineteen, are often ex¬ 
pressed by two numbers, the greater of which usually precedes, united by et^ 
thus, dicem et tres, decern et ndvem, or, omitting et, dezem ndvem. Octodicim haa 
no good authority. See infra, 4. 

{b.) From twenty to a hundred, the smaller number with et is put first, iw 
the greater without et; as, unus et viginti, or viginti unus. Above one hundml, 
the greater precedes, with or without et; as, centum et unus, or centum unu 9 ; 
trecenii sexaginta sex, or trecenti et sexaginta sex. Et is never twice used, bet 
the poets sometimes take ac, atque, or que, instead of et. 

4. For eighteen, twenty-eight, etc., and for nineteen, twenty-nine, etc. (ex¬ 
cepting sixty-eight, sixty-nine, and ninety-eight), a subtractive expression is 
more frequent than the additive form; as, duodet'igir.ti two from twenty; unde~ 
viginti, one fr..;m twenty; duodetriginta, umletriginla, etc. Neither wi (unus) 
nor duo can be declined in these combinations. The additive fonns for thirty- 
eight, “tc. to ninetv-eight, and for forty-nine^ etc. to ninety-nine, except those 
for sixty-nine, seem not to occur. 

5. (a.) Thousands are generally expressed by prefixing the smaller cardinal 
numbers to millia: as, decern millia, ten thousand; ducenta millia, two h andred 
thousand. As there is in Latin no unit above mille, a thousand, tlie higher units 

modem numeration are expressed by prefixing the numer^ adverbs tc the 


72 


NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 119 . 


tom\>mKi\on centena rnillia; as, decies centena millia, a million; ccnties centra 
millia, ten millions. lu such combinations centcna millia is someliines omitted; 
as, dtcies^ sell, centena millia. 

(b.) The poets eometimes make Use of numeral adverbs in expressing snialler 
numbers; as, bis sex for duodeciin; bis centum for ducenli, etc. 

6. Mille is used either as a substantive or as an adjective. 

(a.) When taken substantivelv, it is indeclinable in the singular number 
and, in the plural, has millia^ mitlium, millibus, etc.; as, mille honiinvm, a thou¬ 
sand men; diu> millia hotninum, two thousand men, etc. When 7nille is a sub¬ 
stantive, the things numbered are j)ut in the genitive, as in the preceding 
exRm})les, unless a, declined numeral comes betweeu; as,,kabuit tria millia tre- 
centos milites. 

(b.) As an adjective, mille is plural only, and indeclinable: as, mille homines, 
a thousand men; cum bis mille hominibus, with two thousand men. 

7. Capitals were used by the Romans to mark numbei’s. The letters em¬ 
ployed for this purpose were C. I. L. V. X., which are, therefore, called Nu¬ 
meral Letters. I. denotes o?ie; X.fioe; X./en; h. Jifty; and C. a hundred. By 
the various combinations of these five letters, all the difierent numbers are ex¬ 
pressed. 

(n.) The repetition of a numeral letter repeats its value. Thus, IT. signifies 
ttoo ; \\\. three; XX. twenty; XXX. thirty; CC. two hundred, etc. But V. and 
L. are never repeated. 

{b.) When a letter of a less value is placed before a letter of a gi-eater value, 
the less takes away its value from the greater; but being placed after, it adds 
its value to the greater; thus. 


IV. Four. 
IX. Nine. 
XL. Forty. 
XC. Ninety. 


V. Five. Six. 

X. Ten. XI. Eleven. 

L. Fifty. LX. Sixty. 

C. A hundred. CX. A hundred and ten. 


(c.) A thotisnnd was marked thus, CIO, which, in later times, was contracted 
into M. Fire hundred is marked thus, IJ, or, by contraction, 1). 

(d.) The annexing of the apostrophus or inverted C (0) to lO makes its value 
ten times greater; thus, 100 marks Jive thousand; and lDDD,Jifty thousand. 

(e.) The prefixing of C, together with the annexing of 0, to the number CIO, 
makes its value teu times greater; thus, CCIOO denotes ten thousand; and 
CCCIDOO, a himdred thousand. The Romans, according to Pliny, proceeded 
no further in this method of notation. If they had occasion to express a larger 
number, they did it by repetition; thus, CCCIOOO, CCCIOOO, signified two 
hundred thousand, etc. 

if') We sometimes find thousands expressed by a straight line dravm over 
tne top of the numeral letters. Thus, III. denotes three thousand; X., the 
thousand. 

§ IID. IT. Ordinal nnmhQrs, are such as denote order or rank 
and ausAver to the question, Qndtus ? Wliieh of tlie numbers V They 
all end in us, and are declined like bonus ; nsjjtrinius, first; sectinduSf 
second. 

III. Distributive numbers are those which indicate an equal divi.sioc 
among several persons or things, and answer to the question, Quoteni? 
How many apiece V as, sinyuli, one by one, or, one to each; bUii, two 
by two, or two to each, etc. They are always used in the plural, and 
r'.re declined like the plural of bonus, except that they usually have 
H>n Instead of orutn in the genitive plural. Cf. § 105, R. 4. 


§ 120 


NUMERAL ADJEOTiyES. 


73 


The following table contains the ordinal and distributive tumbers, and the 
corresponding numeral adverbs, which answer to the question, Quoiies f How 
mauv times V — 


1 . 

2 . 

3. 

4. 
6 . 

6 . 

W 

& 


10 . 

11 . 

12 . 

13. 

14. 

15 . 

16 . 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20 . 

21 . 

22 . 

30. 


40. 

60. 

60. 

70. 

80. 

90. 

100 . 

200 . 

800. 

400. 

600. 

600. 

700. 

800. 

900. 

1000, 

2000 


Ordinal. 

Primus, first. 
S&cundus, second. 
Tertius, third. 
Quartus, 

Quintus, 

Sextus, sixth. 
Septimus, seventh. 
OctaviTS, eighth. 
Nonus, ninth. 
Decimus, tenths etc. 
Undecimus. 
Duodecimus. 

Tertius decimus. 
Quartus decimus. 
Quintus decimus. 
Sextus decimus. 
Septimus decimus. 
Octavus decimus. 
Nonus decimus. 
Vicesimus, or ) 
vigesimus. ) 
Vicesimus primus. 
Vicesimus secundus. 
Tricesimus, or ) 
trigesimus. ) 
Quadragesimus. 
Quinquagesimus. 
Sexagesimus. 
Septuagesimus. 
Octogesimus. 
Nonagesimus. 
Centesimus. 
Ducentesimus. 

Trecente.simus. 

Quadringentesimus 

Quingentesimus. 

Sexcentesimus. 

Septingentesimus. 

Octingentesimus. 

Nongentesimus. 

Millesimus. 

Bis millesimus. 


Distributive. 

Singuli, one by one. 

Biui, two by two. 

Terni, or trini. 

Quaterni. 

Quini. 

Seni. 

Septeni. 

Octoni. 

Noveni. 

Deni. 

Undeni. 

Duodeni. 

I'erni deni. 

Quaterni deni. 

Quini deni. 

Seni deni. 

Septeni deni. 

Octoni deni. 

Noveni deni. 

Viceni. 

Viceni singuli. 

Viceni bini, etc. 

Triceni. 

Quadrageni. 

Quinquageni. 

Sexageni. 

Septuageni. 

Octogeni. 

Nonageni. 

Centeni. 

Duceni. 

Treceni, or trecenteni. 

Quadringeni, or ) 
quadringenteni. ) 
Quingiini. 

Sexceni, or sexcenteni. 
Septingeni. 

Octingeni. 

Nongeni. 

Milleni, or 
singula millia. 

Bis milleni, or ) 
bina miUia. J 


Numeral Adverbi. 
Semel, once. 

Bis, twice. 

Ter, thrice. 
Quater,y(>Mr Uim$. 
Quinquies. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octics. 

Novies. 

Decies. 

Undecies. 

Duodecies. 

Terdecies. 

Quatuordecies. 

Quindecies. 

Sedecies. 

Decies et septies 

Duodevicies. 

Undevicies. 

Vicies. 

Semel et vicies. 
Bis et vicies, etc. 

Tricies. 

Quadragies. 

Quinquagios. 

Sexagies. 

Septuagies. 

Octogies. 

Nonagies. 

Centies. 

Ducenties. 
Trecenties, or ) 
tricenties. J 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 

Sexcenties. 

Septingenties. 

Octingenties. 

Koningenties. 

Slillies. 

Bis millies. 


§ 120. 1. In the ordinals, instead of primus, pmor is used, if only two 
are spoken of. Alter is often used for secundus. 

2. (a.) From thirteenth to nineteenth, the smaller number is usually put 
first, v/ithout et; as, tertius decimus, but sometimes the greater with or without 
et; as, decimus et terdius, or decimus tertius. 

{b.) Twenty-first, thirty-first, etc. are often expressed by unus et vieesimusj 
unus et tricesimus, etc., one and twentieth, etc.; and twenty-second, etc., by 
dioo, or alter et vicesimus, etc., in which duo is not changed. In the other com¬ 
pound numbers, the larger precedes without et, or the smaller with et ; as, viceO- 
mus quartus, oi quartus et vicesimus. 


ADJECTIVES-COMPARISON. 


§ 121 , 122 


r4 


(c.) For iighteenth, etc., to fifty-eighth, and for nineteeo'.h, et^.to fifty-ninth, 
the snotractive forms, duodevicesimus, etc., and undevicesimm^ etc., are often used. 

8. In the distributives, eighteen, thirty-eight, forty-eight, and nineteen and 
twenty-nine, are often expressed by the" subtraotives duodtviceni, etc., undtvi- 
ceni. etc. 

4. (a.) Distributives are sometimes used by the poets for cardinal numtsrs; 
as, Inna ^ iciila, two darts. Virg. So likewise in prose, with nouns that want the 
singular; as, bince nnptice, two weddings. 

^6.) Tlia singular of some distributives is used in the sense of multiplica- 
tives; as, bintis, twofold. So ternus, quinus^ septenus. 

5. In the numeral adverbs, for the intermediate numbers 21, 22, etc., the 
larger number also may be put first, either with or without et; and foi 
twenty-eight times and thirty-nine times, duodetricies and undtquadratjia are 
found. 


§ 121. To the preceding classes may be added the following:—. 

1. Multiplicntives, which denote how many fold, in answer to the question, 
vuotupltx 1 They all end in and are declined like fvlix ; as. 

Simplex, single. QuincupleXj^^reyoW. 

Duplex, ticqfold, or double. Septemplex, 

I'riplex, threefold. Decemplex, tenfm. 

Quadi'uplex, fourfold. Centuplex, a hundred fold. 

2. Proqiortionals, wdiich denote how many times one thing is gi'eater than 
another; as, duplus, «, a??i, twice as great; so tnplus, quadruplus, octuplus, de- 
cuplus. They are generally found only in the neuter. 

3. Temjiorals^ wdiich denote time; as, bhnus, n, uni, twm years old; so trimm, 
quadrivius, etc. Also, biennis, lasting tw’O years, biennial; so quadriennis, quin- 
quennis, etc. So also, biniestris, of twm months’ continuance; trimestris, etc., 
minus, etc. To these may be added certain nouns, compounds of annus and 
dies with the cardinal numbers; as, biennium, triennium, etc., a period of two, 
etc. years; biduum, triduurn, etc., a period of two, etc. days. 

4. Adjectives in aiius, derived from the distributives, and denoting of how 
many equal parts or units a thing consists; as, binarius, of tw'O parts; ternarius, 
etc. 


6. Jnterrogatives; as, qiiot, how many? qvMus, of wdiat number? quoifni, 
how many each? quoties, how' many times? Their con’elatives are tot, totulein, 
so many; aliquot, some; which, wdth quot, are indeclinable; and the adverbs, 
totie^, so often; uliquoties, several times. 

6. Fractional expressions, w'hich denote the parts of a thing. These are ex¬ 
pressed in Latin by pai's with dimidia, tertia, quarta, etc. Thiis, elhnidia 
pars; i, tei'tia i)ars, etc. When the number of parts into which a thing is 
divided exceeds by one only the parts mentioned, as in J, etc. the fraction is 
expressed simply by duce, tres, etc. partes, denoting two out of three, three out 
of four, etc. • 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 122. 1 . Adjective? may be divided into two classes—tiose wliich 

denote a variable, and those which denote an invariable, quality or 
limitation. 

Thus, bbnus, good, alius, high, and opdeus, dark, denote variable attributes; 
but ceneus, brazen, triplex, threefold, ?m(S.diurnus, daily, do not admit of diffei'ent 
degrees in their signification. 

2. The comparison of an adjective is the expression of its quality 
in dilfcrent desrees. 

o 


§ 123-125. ADJECTIVES.-IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


75 


8. There are tliree degrees of comparison—the positive, tie com- 
parative, and the superlative. 

4. The positive simply denotes a quality, without reference to other 
degrees of the same quality; as, altus, high; mltis, mild. 

5. The comparative denotes that a quality belongs to one of two 
objects, or sets of objects, in a greater degree than to the other; as, 
altior, higher; mitior, milder. 

6. The superlative denotes that a quality belongs to one of several 
objects, or sets of objects, in a greater degree than to any of the rest; 
as, altissXmus, highest; mitissXmus, mildest. 

Rem 1. Sometimes also the comparative denotes that a qiiality, at different 
times or in other circumstances, belongs in different degrees to the same objec ; 
as, est sapientim' qticun fiiit, he is wiser than he was. 

Rem. 2. The comparative sometimes expresses the proportion between two 
qualities of the same object; as, est doctlor quam sajnentior, he is more learned 
tnan wise; that is, his learning is greater than his wisdom. 

Rem. 3. The comparative is also used eiliptically instead of our ‘too’ oi 
rather ’; as, vivit lioerins, he lives too freely, or, rather freely. Cf. ^ 256, R. 9 

Rem. 4. The superlative, like the positive with j?er, (cf. § 127, 2), often indi¬ 
cates a high degree of a quality without direct comparison with the same qual¬ 
ity in other objects; as, amictis carissimus, a very dear friend. 

§ 123. 1. Degrees of a quality inferior to the positive may be denoted 

by the adverbs minus, less; minime, least, prefixed to the positive; a.s, jucundtu, 
pleasant; minus jucundus, less pleasant; minime jucundus, least pleasant. 

2. A .small degree of a quality is indicated by sub prefixed to the positive; as, 
amdrus, bitter; subamdrus, bitterish, or, somewhat bitter. 

3. An equal degree of a quality may be denoted by tarn followed by 
tsque followed by ac, sic followed by ut, etc.; as, hebes, veque ac pecus, as stupid 
as a brute. 


§ 124. 1. The comparative and superlative in Latin, as in Eng¬ 
lish, are denoted either by peculiar terminations, or by certain ad¬ 
verbs prefixed to the positive. Cf. § 127, 1. 

Masc. Fem. Neut 

2. The terminational comparative ends in ior, ior, ius; 
the terminational superlative in issimus, issima, issimiun, 

3. These terminations are added to the root of the positive; as, 

altxis, altiov, a/dssimus; high, higher, highest. 

wins, 7niVior, wnVissimus; mild, milder, mildest. 

fclix, (gen. fellcis,') felicior, /eZicissimus; happy, happier, happiest 
In like manner compare 

Arc'-tns, strait. Cru-de'-lis, cruel. Ca'-pax, capacious. 

Ca'-rus, dear. Yer'-tl-W?., fertile. Cle'-mens, ((/en.-tis) merdfuL 

Doc'-tus, learned. Le'-vis, light. In'-ers, {gen. -tis), sluggish. 

IRREGULAR CQMPARISOiM. 

§ 1^0. 1. Adjectives in er form their superlative by adding 

ft 7 nus to that termination; as, acer, active; gen. acris; comparative, 
ocrior; superlative, accrrimus. 


r6 ADJECTIVES.—DEFECTIVE COIUPARISON. § 12^ 


In like manner, pauper, pauperrimus. Vetus has a similar superlative, veU/t* 
Timvis, from the old collateral fonn veter. 

2. Six adjectives in lis form their superlative bj adding IXmus ttt 
the root:— 


Facllis, 

facilior. 

facilllraus. 

east'. 

Difficilis, 

difficilior. 

difficillimus. 

difoult. 

Gracilis, 

OTacilior, 

gracilliinus, 

stertder. 

Humilis, 

numilior. 

humillimus, 

lino. 

Siinilis, 

similior. 

simillimus. 

like. 

Dissimilis, 

dissimilior. 

dissimillimus, 

urdike. 

IvxleciUus or imbeciUis, 

weak, has two forms, imbecillisstmus and imbec 


3. (a.) Five adjectives in ficus (from fdcio) derive their compar¬ 
atives and superlatives from supposed forms in ens :— 

Beneficus, beneficentior, beneficentissimus, heneficent. 

Honorificns, honorificentior, honorificeiitisshnns, honorable. 

^lagniflcus, magiiificentior, magnificeiitissimus, splendid. 

Aluriificus, munificeutior, muiiificentissimus, liberal. 

Maleftcus, -, maleficeutissiinus, hurtful. 

{h ) Adjectives in dicens and vdlens form their comparatives and superlatives 
regularly; but instead of those positives, forms in dicus and vdlus are more 
common; as, 

Maledicens or dicus, maledicentior, maledicentissimus, slanderous. 

Benevolens, or -volus, benevolentior, benevolentissimus, benevolent. 

4. These five have regular comparatives, but irregular snpep* 
latives: — 


Dexter, dexterior, 

Extera, {fern.) exterior, 

Posterd, {fern.) ' posterior, 
Iiiferus, inferior, 

Superus, superior. 


dextimus, right. 

extrOmus, or extimus, outward. 

postremus, or postuinus, hind. 

infimus, or imus, below. 

supremus, or summus, above. 


Remapk 1. The nominative singular of p>ostera does not occur in the mas* 
culine, and that of extera wants good authority. 


6. The following are very irregular in comparison :— 


Bonus, 

melior. 

optimus. 

good, 

better, 

best. 

^Ifilus, 

pejor. 

pessimus. 

bad, 

woi'se. 

worst. 

I.lagnus, 

major. 

maximus. 

great. 

greater, 

greatesL 

Parvus, 

minor. 

minimus, 
pluiimus, ■) 
plurima, > 

little. 

less. 

least. 

Multus, 

Malta, 


much. 

more. 

most. 

Multum, 

Nequam, 

plus,* 

necpiior. 

plurimum, ) 
nequissimus. 

worthless, etc. 


Frugi, 

frugalior, 

frugalissimus, frugal, etc. 



Fk 5I. 2. All these, except magnus, whose regular fonns are contracted, either 
farm their comparatives and superlatives from obsolete adjectives, or take them 
frjm other words of similar signification. 


DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

§ 120 . 1. Seven adjectives want the positive:— 

Citerior, citimus,neorer. Prior, piimus,yorTner. 

Deierior, deterrimus, roorse. Propior, proxlmus, nearer. 

Interior, intimus, inner. Ulterior, ultimus, farther. 

Ocior, ocissiinus, swifter. 


* See h 110. 






§ 127. 


ADJECTIVES-DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 


77 


2. Eight want the terminational comparative :— 


ConsTiltns, consultissimus, skilful. 
Iticlutus, inclutissirnus, reuowned. 
Lavictus, invictissiinus, irn'incUde. 
Invitus, iiivitissnims, unmtl/iuy. 
Merltus. meritisslmus, (very rare,) 
dtiferving. 


Par, parissimus, (very rare), equal. 
Persuilsus, persuasisslmum (neuter) 
persuaded. 

Saeer, sacerrimus, sacred. 


3. Eight have very rarely the terminational comparative :■ 


Apricus, apricissluius, sunny. 
Bellas, bellisshnus,y7He. 

Comis, comissiinus, courteous. 
Diversus, diversissimus, different. 


Falsus, falsisslmus, 

Fidus, fidissimus, faithful. 
Nevus, novisshnus, new. 
Vetus, veterrimus, old. 


4. The following want the terminational superlative :— 


Adolescens, adclescentior, young. 
A^estis, ap'estior, mistlc. 

Ahtcer, alacrior, active. 

Ater, atrior, black. 

Caecus, ciecior, blind. 

Deses, desidior, inactive. 
Diutunms, diuturnior, lasting. 
Infinitus, infinitior, unlimited. 
lugens, ingentior, great. 

Jejunus, jejunior,yashn^. 
Juvfenis, junior, young. 

Licens, licentior, unrestrained. 
Longinquus, longinquior, distant. 
Opimus, opimior, nch. 


Procllvis, proclivior, sloping. 
Pronus, pronior, bending down. 
Protervus, protervior, violent. 

-sequior, vxrrse. 

Propinquus, propinquior, nea/r. 
Salataris, salutarior, salutary. 

Sat is, sufficient; satius, prefer able. 
Siltur, saturior,yuW. 

Senex, senior, old. 

Silvestris, silvestrior, woody. 
Sinister, sinisterior, left. 

Suplnus, supinior, lying on (he back. 
Surdus, surdior, deef. 

T fires, teretior,' •round. 


Remark 1. The superlative of juvinis and adolescens is supplied by mirdmu 
natu^ youngest; and that of senex by maximus ndtu, oldest. The comparatives 
minor ndtu and major ndtu sometimes also occur. 

Rem. 2. Most adjectives also in llis, ilis, dlis^ and bilis, have no terminational 
superlative. 

5. Many variable adj'ectives have no terminational comparative or 
superlative. Such are, 

(a.) Adjectives in bundus, imus, Inus (except divtnus), drus, most in Ivus, and 
in us pure (except -quus.) Yet ardnus., assiduus, egregius, exigmis, industrius^per¬ 
petuus^ pius, strenuus^ and vacuus, have sometimes a terminational comparison 
DO, dropping i, noxior, innoxior, sobrior. 

(b.) The following— almus, calvus, ednus, dcur, claudus, degener, delirm, dispar, 
egenu:^ impar, impiger, invidus, Idcer, mevwr, minis, nudus, pi'cecox, protditus 
rudis, salvus, sosqjes, superstes, vulgaris, and some others. 


§ 12T. 1. The comparative and superlative may also be 
formed by prefixing to the positive the adveros magis, ipore, and 
maxime, most; as, idoneus, fit; magis idoneus, maxime idoneut^ 
2. Various aegrecs of a quality acove the positive are expressed 
jv adinodum, a/iquaydo, apprlme, bene, imprimis, mxdtum, oppido, per- 
qiiam, and valde, and also by per compounded with the f ositive; as, 
dijpe’dis, difficult; perdifficllis, very diflicalt. To a few adjectives pres 
js in like manner jirefixed; as, preedurm, very hard. 

8. The force of the comparative is increased by prefixing efiam, 
even, still, or )'et; and that of botn comparative and superlative, by 



ADJECTIVES—DERIVATION. 


rs 


§ 128 


prefixing longe or rnulto^ much, far; as, longe nobilissimus ; longe melior 
Her multo facilius; multo maxima pars. 

4. TW, ‘even’, and with or without possnm, ‘as much 38 

possible’, before the superlative, render it more emphatic; as, Cicero 
vel optlmus oratoruin Romandrum. Quam maximum potest milllum nu- 
mcrum coll~i()it, quAm docti^slmus, extremely learned; quam celerrlniej 
as speedily as possible. 

Note 1. Instead of qunm with possum, quanhis is sometimes used, in the same 
case as the superlative; as, Quaiitis nuiximis potuit itinej'ibus cmUendii. 

Note 2. Units, with or without omtiium, is sometimes added to superlatives to 
increase their force; as, floe ego uno omnium plurimum utor. Cic. Urbem unam 
miki amicusimam declindvi, Id. It is used in like mauuer with excdlo. 

5. All adjectives whose signification admits of different degrees, it 
tliey have no terminatioual comj^arison, may be compared by means 
of adverbs. 

6. Instead of the comparative and superlative degrees, the positive with 
the prepositions q^rce, ante, prtzler, or supra, is sometimes used; i\%, pree nobis 
bedtus, happier than we. Cic. Ante alias pulcliritudine insignis, most beauti¬ 
ful. Liv. Sometimes the preposition is used in connection with the superla¬ 
tive ; as. Ante alios pulcherrimus omnes. Virg. 

7. Among adjectives which denote an invariable quality or limitation, and 
which, therefore, cannot be compared, are those denoting matter, time, num¬ 
ber, possession, country, part, interrogation; also compounds of jugum, sotnnus, 
gero, and fero, and many others. 


DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 128. Derivative adjectives are formed chiefij from nouns, 
from other adjectives, and from verbs. 

I. Those derived from nouns and adjectives are called denomina¬ 
tives. The following are the principal classes:— 

1. _ (a.) The termination dis, added to the root, denotes the material of which 
t thing is made, and sometimes similarity; as, aureus, golden; argenteus, of 
silver; ligneus, wooden-, rhrews, of glass; virgineus, maideniy, from aurum, ar¬ 
gentum, etc. See ^ 9, llem. 3. 

{b.) Some adjectives of this kind have a double form in neus and nw; as, 
dnij-neus and eburnus, of ivory. 

(c.) The termination Inus has the same meaning; as, adamanttnus, of ada¬ 
mant; cedtinus, of cedar j from addmas and cedrus. So, also, ; as, tem-enus. 
of earth, from iert-a. 

(d.) The terminationsor (Greek «o?), and also ic?«, belong to adjec¬ 
tives formed from Greek names of men, and denote ‘of’ or ‘ pfirtainiim to’- 
ss, Aehilh'us, Soplioch'us, Aristotellus, Platonicus ; Pgtlingoreus and Pgthag^rus; 
Bo-mermsand Homericus. Names in ias make adjectives in idens; as, Archias 
Archidnis. Sometimes, tlmugli rarely in the purest Latin anthers, adjectives in 
his or ins are formed from Latin names; as, Marcellla or -ea, a /estival in 
honor of the Marcelli. 

2. (a.) The terminations dlis, dris, drius, ilis, atilis, icius, icus, ius, eus, and 

inus denote ‘ belonging’ ‘pertaining,’ or ‘relating to’; as, capitals, relatmc 
0 the hfe; from caput. * 


§ 128 . 


ADJECTIVES-DERIVATION. 


78 


So comitialis, regdlis; Aj^ollindris^ consuldris, populdris; argentarim ; civiUa, 
bostilis, juvenilis; aguatllis, fiuvintilis; tiubtinicius, patricius ; beilicus, civtcus, Get’ 
wianicus; ncensnlorms, impei'citorivs., regius; Hectorms; canlnus, equlmts, ferinvA 
tiasculinus; from coinitia, rex, Apollo, consul, populus, argentum, clvis, etc. 

(6.) The tennination sometimes expresses character; as, hostliia, hostile 
pucrilis, boyisli; from hosds ami puer. 

(c.) The tenniiiation inns belongs especially to derivatives from names of 
smimals, and other living beings. 

3. The termination arius, as a substantive, scil. fdber, etc., generally .denotes 
profession or occupation; as, argentarius, a silversmith; from argentum; —■ 
coriarius, statuarius ; from coriuni and statua. When added to numeral adjec¬ 
tives, it denotes how many equal parts a thing contains. See §.121, 4. 

4. The terminations osus and lentus denote abundance, fulness; as, animdsus, 
ftill of courage; fraudulentus, given to fraud; from animus and fraus. So lapti- 
desus, vinosus, poi-tudsus, turbulentus, sanguinolentus, violentus. Before lentus, a 
connecting vowel is inserted, which is commonly u, but sometimes 6. 

Note.— Adjectives of this class are called amplificatives. See § 104, 12. 

6. From ad jectives are formed diminutives in ulus, cithis, etc., in the same 
manner as from nouns; as, dulciculus, sweetish; from dtdeis. So lentulus, mi- 
sellus, parvulus, etc. See § 100, 3, and § 104, 11. Diminutives are sometimes 
formed from comparatives; as, nwjusculus, duriusculus, somewhat great, some¬ 
what hard, etc. Double diminutives are formed from paucus, viz pauxillus and 
pauxillulus; and from bdnus, (bonus) are formed bellus and bellulus. 

6. (a.) From the names of places, and especially of towns, are derived pa- 
trial adjectives in ensis, inus, as, and antis, denoting of or belonging to such 
places. 

(b.) Thus from Cannee is formed Cannensis; from Sulmo, Sulmonensis. In 
like manner, from castra and circus come castrensis, circensis. But Athena 
makes Atkeniensis; and some Greek towns in la and ea drop i and e in their 
adjectives; as, Antiochensis, Niewnedensis. 

(c.) Those in tnus are formed from names of places ending in ia and ium; 
as, AHcia, Arictnus; Caudium, Caudinus; Capitolium, Cajntollnus; Latium, La- 
tinus. Some names of towns, of Greek origin, with other terminations, also 
fonn adjectives in tnus; as, Tarentum, Tarentinus. 

(d.) Most of those in ns are formed from norms in um; some from nouns in 
a; as, Arplnum, Arplnns; Cnpena, Cnpenas. 

(e.) Those in anus are foraied from names of towns of the first declension, 
or from certain common nouns; as. Alba, Albdnus; Roma, Romdnus ; CunuB, 
Cumdniis; Thebte, Thebdnns; also from some of the second declension; as, 
Tusculum, Tusculdnns; Fundi, Funddnus :—fons, fontdnus; mons, tnonidnus; 
urbs, tirbdnus: ojtpidum, o/ipiddnus. 

{/.) Adjectives witli the terminations anus, idntis, and Inus are formed from 
names of men; as, Sulla, Sullanus ; Tullius, Tullidnus; Jugurtha, Jugurthinus. 

ig.) Greek names of towns in polis fox’m patrial adjectives m poiitdnus; ae, 
Neapdlis, Neapolitdnus. 

(h.) Greek names of toxvns generally form patrials in ; as, Rhodus, Rha- 
eHus; Lacedeemon, Lacedaimonius ; —but those in a form them in cetis ; as, La¬ 
rissa, Larissceus ; Simjrna, Smtjrrueus. 

(i.) From many patrials; as, B'dtannus, Callus, Afer, Persa. Arabs, etc., 
xdje olives are fanned in tcus and itis ; as, Britannicus, Gallicus, Afrlcus, Persi- 
ras, Arabicus; so Sgrus, Syrius; Thrax, Thracius. 

7. A large class of derivative adjectives, though formed from 
Qouns, have the terminations of perfect participles. They generally 
Ugnify wearing or furnished with; as, 

aldtus, winged barbdtus, bearded; galedtus, helmeted; aurltus, long-caied 
turrltus. turreteu , cornuius, horned ; from a/a, barba, galea, auids, etc. 


BO 


ADJECTIVES-DE:JIVATI0K 


§ 129 


8. The termination aneus, annexed to the root of an adjective ot 
participle in us, expresses a resemblance to the quality denoted b} 
the primitive; as, supervacaneus, of a superfluous nature. 

§ ISO. n. Adjectives derived from verbs are called verbal ad 
jectives. Such are the following classes:— 

1. The termination hundus, added to the first root of the verb, 
with a connecting vowel, which is commonly that of the verb, (see 
§ 150, 5,) has the general meaning of the present participle; as, 

errabundus, moribundus, from eri'O, moiior, equivalent to errans, rnmnens, 

(a.) In many the meaning is somewhat strengthened; as, gratulabundus, full 
of congratulations; lacrimibundus, weeping profusely. 

(&.) Most verbals in hundus are from verbs of the first conjugation, a few from 
those of the third, and but one from the second and fourth respectively, viz. 
*Midlbundus and lascivlbundm. 

(c.) Some verbal adjectives in have a similar sense; as, ruhicundus, 

verecundus, from rubeo and vereor. 

2. Ihe termination idus, added to the root, especially of neuter 
verbs, denotes the quality or state expressed by the verb; as, 

algtdus, cold; caUdus, warm; madldus, moist; rapidus, rapid; from algeo, 
caleo, madeo, rapio. 

3. The termination uus, also, denotes the quality expressed by the 
verb ; and adjectives in uus derived from active verbs take a passive 
meaning; as, 

congruus, agreeing, from congruo ; so, assiduus, nocuus, innocuus: — irriguus, 
wen watered; conspicuus, visible; from irrigo,^conspicio, 

4. (a.) The terminations ilis and btlis, added to the root of a verb, 
with its connecting vowel, denote passively, capability, or desert; as, 

amaUlis, worthy to be loved; credibllis, deserving credit; placaUlis, easy to be 
appeased; agilis, active; ductiUs, ductile; from arm, credo, pldco; ago, duco. 
They are rarely active; as, horribilis, terribllis, fertilis; aer per cuncta meor- 
Wis. Plin. 

(b.) In adjectives of these forms, derived from verbs of the third conjuga- 
lion, the connecting vowel is i; sometimes, also, in those from verbs of the 
second conjugation, in these and other forms, i is used instead of e; as, hoi'ri- 
bilis, terribllis, from horreo and ierreo. 

(c.) These terminations, with the connecting vowel, are sometimes added to 
the tiurd root; as, Jtexilis, flexibilis; coctilis, coclibllis, from Jlecto (Jlex-), etc. 

5. The termination icius or itius, added to the third root of the 
verb, has a passive sense; as, Jictitius, feigned; conductitius, to be 
hired; from Jingo (fid-), etc. 

6. The termination ax, added to the root of a verb, denotes an in¬ 
timation, often one that is faulty; as, 

audax, audacious; Uquax, talkative; rdpax rapacious; from avdeo, Ibguor 
-dpio. 

7. The termination Ivus, annexed to the third root of a verb, de« 
lotes fitness or ability to produce the action expressed by the verb 
as, disjunctlvus, disjunctive, from disjungo. 


§ 130,131. 


ADJECTIVES—COMPOSITION. 


81 


^ 8. Verbals in tor and irix, (see § 102j 6, (a.), are often used as adjectives, espo* 
cially in poetry; as, victor exercUits, victrlcesliterce. In the plural they becoun 
adjectives of tbree terminations; as, victf^es, vicU’ices, victncia. So also hospes^ 
especially by the later poets, is used as an adjective, having hosjnta in the feioi- 
nine singular and also in the neutei plural. 

§ ItlO. in. Adjectives derived from participles, and retaining 
their form, are called participial adjectives \ as, dmans,, fond of; rfoc- 
tus, learned. 

IV. Some adjectives are derived from adverbs; as, crastXnus^ of 
to-morrow; hodiernus, of this day; from eras and liodie. 

V. Some adjectives are derived from prepositions; as, contrariuSf 
contrary, from contra ; posterns^ subsequent, from post. 


COIMPOSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 131 * Compound adjectives are formed variously:— 

1. Of two nouns; as, ca^n>e», goat-footed—of caper and pes; ignicOmus, 
having fiery hair—of ignis and cdina. 

Note.— See, respecting the connecting short I, in case the first part of the compound 
3 a noun or an adjective, § 103, Rem. I. 

2. Of a noun and an adjective; as, noctivdpis, wandering in the night— 
of nox and vagus. So lucifugax, shunning the light—of lux and fugax. 

3. Of a noun and a verb; as, corniger, bearing horns—of cornu and g^ro; 
letifer, bringing death—of letum and fero. So carnivdrus, causicUcus, i'gnivd- 
mus, lucifugus^ particeps. 

4. Of an adjective and a noun; as, eequams, of the same age—of cequus and 
tvmim ; celertpes, swift-footed—of celer and pes. So centimdnus, decennis^ mag- 
nanimus, misericors, unanimis. 

5. Of two adjectives; as, centumgeminus, a hundred-fold; muUicdvua, having 
many cavities; quintusdecimus, the fifteenth. 

6. Of an adjective and a verb; as, brevildquens, speaking briefly—of brem 
and Idquor; magnificus, magnificent—-of magnus and /dcio. 

7. Of an adjective and a termination; as, qualiscumque, quotcumque, uterque^ 

8. Of an adverb and a noun; as, bicorpor, two-bodied—of bis and corpus. 

9. Of an adverb and an adjective; as, maledicax, slanderous—of Tndle and 
^cax. So antemerididnus, before mid-day. 

10. Of an adverb and a verb; as, beneflcus, beneficent—of bene and J'ado t 
nalevdlus, malevolent—of male and vdlo. 

11. Of a preposition and a noun; as, dmens, mad—of a and mens. So con- 
SOTS, decdloi’, deformis, impluwls, inermis. 

12. Of a preposition and an adjective; as, covcdt'ws, conc.ave; infidus,tm- 
faithful. So impro-ddus, j^credrus, prontives, stibalbidus. 

13. Of a preposition and a verb; as, continuus, uninteirupted—of con and 
Uneo ; insciens, ignorant—of in and scio. So prceciqmus, qn’omiscuus, substiUus, 
tuperztes. 

Eem.^rk. When the former part is a preposition, it(» final consonant is sometime? 
kliaiiKcil, to adapt it to the consonant which follows it, as, imprudens —of in and priu 
tens See U96; and cf. § 103, R. 2. 


82 


PRONOUNS.—SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 132, 133. 


PRONOUNS. 


§ 139. 1. A pronoun is a word whicli supplies the place 

of a noun. 


2. There are eighteen simple pronouns:— 


Ego, L 
Tu, thou. 

Sui, of himself etc. 
Ilie, that^ the former. 
Ipse, himself. 

Iste, that, that of yours. 


Ilic, thls^ the latter. 
Is, that or he. 

Quis V who f 
Qui, loho. 
hleus, my. 

Tuus, thy. 


Siius, Zti.?, hers., itSy etc, 
Cujus? whose f 
Noster, our. 

Vester, your. 

Nostras, of our country. 
Cujas V of what country 


3. Ego, tu, and sui, and commonly also quis and its compounds, are substan¬ 
tives: the other pronouns, both simple and compound, are adjectives, but are 
often by ellipsis used as substantives. 

4. Ego, tu, and sui are commonly called personal pronouns. They are a 
species of appellatives (§ 26, 3,) of general application. Ego is used by a 
speaker to designate himself; tu, to designate the person whom^ he addresses. 
Hence ego is of the first person, tu of the second. (§ 35, 2.) Sui is of the third 
person, and has always a reflexive signification, referring to the subject of the 
sentence. The oblique cases of ego and tu are also used reflexively, when the 
subject of the proposition is-of the first or second person. 

5. The remaining pronouns, except quis and its compounds, are adjectives, 
as they serve to limit the meaning of substantives; and they are pronouns, be¬ 
cause, like substantive pronouns, they may designate any object in certain 
situations or circumstances. 

6. Meus, tuus, sum, noster, vester, and cujxis, have the same extent of signifi¬ 
cation as the pronouns from which they are derived, and are equivalent to the 
genitive cases of their primitives. 

7. Pronouns, like substantives and adjectives, are declined; but most of 
them want the vocative. Sui, from the nature of its signification, wants also 
the nominative in both numbers. 

8. The substantive pronouns take the gender of the objects which they de* 
note. The adjective pronouns, like adjectives, have three genders. 


SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 133 . The substantive pronouns are thus declined:— 


N‘ e'-go, I. 

G. me'-i, of me. 

D. mi'-hl, to me.. 
Ac. me, me, 

V. - 

16. me , unih me. 


Singular. 

tu, thou. 

tu'-i, of thee. 

tib'-i,* to thee. 
te, thee. 
tu, 0 thou. 
te, with thee. 


su'-i, of himself her- 
self itself. 

sib' •!,* to himself etc 
se, himself etc. 


se, with himself etc. 


* See i 19,1, Exc. 







§ 134. 


ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 


83 


/V. nos^ xce. 

( nos'-truni ) - 

I or nos'-tri,r/ 
D. no'-bis, to us. 
Ac. nos, us. 

V. -- 


us. 


Ah. ny-bis, with us. 


Plural. 
VOS, ye or you. 
ves'-trum or) ^ 
ves'-tri, 
vo'-bis, to you. 
VOS, you. 

VOS, 0 ye or you. 
vo'-bis, with you. 


su'-i, of themselves. 

sib'-i, to themselves. 
se, themselves. 


se, with themselves. 


Remark 1. Me and ml are ancient forms for mihi. So min' for mikin& 
Pers. 1 2. 

Rem. 2. Tlie syllable met is sometimes annexed to the substantive pronouns, 
in an intensive sense, either with or without ipse; as, egdmet, I myself; mihi- 
mii ipsi, for myself. It is not annexed, however, to the genitives plural, nor to 
tu in the nominative or vocative. Li these cases of tu, tate or tutemei is used. 
In the accusative and ablative the reduplicated forms meme and tete in the sin¬ 
gular, and sese in both numbei-s, are employed intensively. Mepte, intensive, 
med and ted., for me and te, and mis and Us for mei and iui, occur in the comic 
writers. 

3. ^ Nostrum and vestrum are contracted from nostroj'um, nostrarUm, and ves- 
trorum, vestrdrum. Respecting the difference in the use of nostrum and nostri^ 
vesti-um and vestri, see § 212, R. 2, N. 2. 

4. The preposition cum is affixed to the ablative of these pronottns in both 
numbers; as, mecum, nohiscum, etc. Cf. § 136, R. 1. 


ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 134. Adjective pronouns may be divided into the follow¬ 
ing classes:— demonstrative, intensive, relative, interrogative, in- 
definite, possessive, and patrial. 

Note. Some pronotms belong to two of these classes. 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative pronouns are such as specify what object is 
meant. 

They are die, tste, hie, and is, and their compounds, and are thus 


dechned:— 

M. 

Singular. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

Plural. 

F. 

N. 

N. il'-lc, 

il'-la, 

il'-liid. 

il'-li. 

U'-lae, 

il'-la, 

G. 

D. il'-ll, 

il-li'-us, 

il-ll'-us. 

il-lo'-mm. 

il-la'-rum. 

il-lo'-rum, 

il'-li. 

il-li, 

il'-lis, 

il'-lis. 

il'-lis. 

Ac. il'-liun 

il'-lam, 

il'-la, 

ii'-la. 

il'-lud. 

il'-lbs, 

il'-las. 

il'-la. 

V. d'-le, 

il'-liid. 

il'-li. 

il'-lm. 

il'-ia. 

Ah. U'-lo. 

U'-lo. 

il'-hs. 

U'-lis. 

il'-lig. 


*0eej 16,1. 








84 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 134 


hie is declined like ille. 



Singular 




Plural. 

• 

M. 

F. 

N. 


M. 

F. 

N. 

N Wc, 

haec, 

h§c. 


hi. 

hae. 

Lsec, 

G. hu'-jus, 

hu'-jiis. 

hu'-jus. 


lio'-rum, 

ha'-rum. 

ho'-rum, 

D. huic*, 

huic, 

huic, 


his, 

his. 

his. 

Ac. hunc. 

hanc. 

hoc. 


hos. 

has. 

h®c. 

F. Me, 

hmc. 

hoc. 


hi. 

hac. 

haec, 

Ab* hoc. 

hac. 

hoc. 


his. 

his. 

his. 


Singular. 




Plural. 


M. 

F. 

N. 


M. 

F 

N. 

N* is, 

e'-a, 

id, 

i 

'-h 

e'-ae. 

e'-a. 

G. e'-jus, 

e'-jus. 

e -JUS, 

e 

!-o'-rum, 

e-a'rum. 

e-o'-rum. 

D. e'-i, 

e'-i, 

e'-i, 

1 

-IS or e -is. 

i'-is or e'-is. 

i'-is or e'-i8, 

Ac. e'-um, 

e'-am. 

id. 

e 

'-6s, 

e'-as. 

e'-a. 

T7 







r • " 







Ab. e'-d. 

e'-a. 

e'-o. 

i 

'-is or e'-is. 

i'-is or e'-is. 

i'-is or e'-ia 


Remakk 1. Instead of ille, ollus was anciently used; whence oUi raasc. plur. 
in Virgil. Illce fern., for illius and illi, is found in Lucretius and Cato, as also 
in Cato, hm for huic fern.; hice for hi, and hcec for hce in Plautus and Terence. 
Jm for eum, is found in the Twelve Tables; eiiforei, and ilfus and iibus foi 
iis, in Plautus; ete, fern., for ei, and edbus for iis, in Cato. 

Rem. 2. From ecce, lo! withiZZe, iste, and is, are formed, in colloquial language, 
nom., ecca; eccilla, eccillud; acc. sing., eccum, eccam; eccillum (by syncope 
dlum), eccillam; eccistam; acc. plur., eccos, ecca. 

Rem. 3. Istic and illic are compounded of iste hie, and ille hie; or, as some 
Bay, of iste ce, and ille ce. The former sometimes retains the aspirate, as isthic. 
They are more emphatic than ille and iste. 

Istic is thus declined:— 

Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. is'-tic, is'-taec, is'-tCx;, or is'-tuc, 

Ac. is'-tunc, is'-tanc, is'-tbe, or is'-tuc, 

Ab. is'-tbe. is'-tac. is'toc. 

Illic is declined in the same manner. 

Rem. 4. Ce, intensive, is sometimes added to the several cases of hie, and 
rarely to soma cases of the other demonstrative pronouns; as, hujusce, huncce, 
hanece, hocce, hice, hcece or hose, horunc, havumce, harunce, or harunc, hascOj 
tasce, hisce; ilUusce, illdce, illosze, illasce, illisce; istdee, istisce; eiusce, iisce. 
mieii rCj interrogative, is also mnexed, ce becomes ci ; as, haeccine, hosciwif 
hiscine; istuccine, istacclne, istosclne ; illiccine, illancclne. 

Rem. 5. Mddi, tlie genitive of mddus, annexed to the genitive singular of de¬ 
monstrative and relative pronou is, imiiarts to them the signification of adjec¬ 
tives of quality ; as, Imjusmddi or hujuscemddi, like tails,, of this sort, such 
Uliusniddi ani istiusmddi, of that sort; cujusinddi, of what sort, like guaUs; cu. 


Plural. 

M. F. N. 

N. - W-tSic, - 

Ac. - - is'-tiBC. 


•Seej 9, 6. 















§ 135. 


INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 


85 


Jii8ce7n6(h, cujusquemddi, cujusmodicumque, of what kind soever; cujusdammddi 
of some kind. So also istimddi, cuiniddi and cuicuimddi^ instead of istiusm6d\ 
cuJmmOdi^ etc. 

Kem. 6. 1 he suffix dem is annexed to is, forming idem, “ the same,” which 
is thus declined:— 


M. 

N. i'-dora, 

G, e-jus'-dem, 
2>. e-i'-dem, 
Ac. e-un'-derat 

V. - 

Ab. e-6'-dem. 


Singular. 

F. 

e'-a-dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 

e-i'-dem, 

e-an'-dem, 


N. 

I'-dem, 

e-jus'-dem 

e-i'-dem, 

I'-dera, 


e-a'-dem. 


e-o'-dem. 


M. 

N. i-i'-dern, 

O. e-o-ruu'-dem, 

D. e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, 
Ac. e-os'-dem, 

V. - 

Ab. e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem. 


Plural. 

F. 

e-©'-dem, 
e-a-run'-dem, 
e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, 
e-as'-dem, 

e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem. 


N. 

e'-a-dem, 
e-o-nm'-dem, 
e-is'-dem, or i-is'-dem, 
e'-a-dem. 


e-is'dem, or i-is'-dem. 


Note 1. In compound pronouns, m before d is changed into n; as, eundem., 
torundem, etc. 

Note 2. In Sallust isdem, and in Palladius Jiisdem occur for iisdem; and En¬ 
nius .in Cicero has eademmet for eddem. 


INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 13o. Intensive pronouns are such as serve to render an 
object emphatic. 

To this class belong ipse, and the intensive compounds already 
Daentioned. See §§ 133, 11. 2, and 134, II. 4. 

Ipse is compounded of is and the suffix pse, and is thus declined:— 


Singular. Plural. 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. ip'-se, 

ip'-sa, 

ip'-sum. 

ip'-si. 

ip'-sm. 

ip'-sa, 

G. ip-sl'-us, 

ip-sl'-us, 

ip-si'-us, 

ip-so'-rum. 

ip-sa'-rum. 

ip-so'-mm. 

JX ip'-si, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-si, 

ip'-si s. 

ip'-sis. 

ip'-sis, 

Ac. ip'-sum, 

ip'-sam. 

ip -sum. 

ip'-sos. 

ip'-sas. 

ip'-sa. 

V. ip'-se, 

ip'-s% 

ip'-«um. 

ip'-si. 

ip'-sae. 

ip'-sa, 

Ah. ip-so. 

ip'-sa 

ip -so. 

ip'-sis. 

ip'-sis. 

ip'-sis. 


Pemaijk 1. Ijfse is commonly subjoined to nouns or pronouns; 2 i%,Jupitei 
ipse, tu ipse, Jupiter himself, etc.*; and hence is soinethnes called the adjunctive 
pronoun. 

Rem. 2. A nominative ipsus, occurs in early writers, and a superlative ijjsis- 
sinms, his very self, is found in Plautus. 

Rem. 3. In old writers the is of ipse is declined, while pse remains unde- 
slined; ns, eapse, (nom. i nd abl.), eainpse, and eo 2 )se, instead of ipsa, ipsam 
and ipso. So also reapse, . e. re eapse, “ in fact.” 

8 














86 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ 136 


RELATI\^ PRONOUNS. 

§ Tlelative pronouns are such as relate to a preceding 

noun or pronoun. 

1. They are qnl, who, and the compounds qnicumque and quisquis^ 
whoever. The latter are called (jenerai relatives. 

2. In a general sense, the demonstrative pronouns are often relatives; hut 
the name is commonly appropriated to those above specified. They serve to 
irt^'oduce a proposition, limiting or ex})laining a preceding noun or pronoun, tc 
which they relate, and which is called the aatactdmt. 


Qui is thus declined:— 


M. 

Singular. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

Plural. 

F. 

N. 

N. qui, 

quae. 

quod. 

qui. 

quae. 

quae. 

G. cu-jus, 

cu'-jiis, 

cu'-jus. 

qu5'-rum. 

qua -rum. 

quo -rum 

D. cui,* 

cui, 

cui, 

quod. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

Ac. quern, 
V. 

Ah. quo. 

quam. 

quos. 

quas. 

quae. 

qua. 

quo. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 


Remark 1. Qui is sometimes used for the ablative singular, in all genders 
and rarely also for the ablative plural. To the ablatives quv, qua, qui, and qui- 
kus, cum is commonly annexed, cf. § 133, 4. Cicero uses quicum for qzidcum, 
when an indefinite person is iheant. 

Rem. 2. Queis (monosyllabic, § 9, R. 1), and q^iis are sometimes used in the 
dative and ablative plural for quibus. Cujus and cui were anciently written 
qubjus and quoi : and, instead of the genitive cujus, a relative adjective cujus, 
a, urn, very rtu'ely occurs. 

3. Quicumque, (or quicunque), is declined like qui. 

Rem. 3. Qui is sometimes separated from cumqut by the interposition of 
one or more words; ?is, qwe me cumque vacant terree. Virg. A similar separa¬ 
tion sometimes occurs in the other compounds of cumque. 


4. Quisquis is thus declined:— 

Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. quis'-cjuis, quis'-quis,f quid'-quid, 

Ac. quera'-quem, - quid'-ejuid. 

Ah. quo'-quo. qua'-qua. quo'-quo. 


Plural. 

M. 

N, qui'-qm, 

D. qui-bus'-qol btts, 


Rkm. 4. Quicquid is sometimes used for quidquid. Quiqui for quisquis occur? 
in Plautus; and quidquid is used adjectively iu Cato R. R. 48. 


* S«e i 9, 6; and cf. § 306. 1 R. 2. 


t Cf. 4 137, R. (1 i 












§ 137. 


INTEllROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 


87 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 


§ I3T. Interrogative pronouns are sucli as serve to inquire 
which gf a number of objects is intended. 


Tliej are 


Qujsnan:; 


Ecqnis ? 
Ecquisnam ? 
Nuiiujuis? 
Kumqulsnam?^ 


is any one f 


Cuju3? wlioseJ 
CujasV of what 
country f 


1. Quis is coimr.only used substantively; qui, adjectively. The 
interrogative qui is declined like qui the relat.ve. 


Quis is thus declined:— 



Singular. 



Plural. 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. quis, 

G. cu'-jus, 
D. cui, 

Ac. quern, 

pr _ 

quae, 

cu'-jus, 

cui, 

quam. 

quid, 

cu'-jus, 

cui, 

quid. 

qui,^ 

quo'-rum 

qui'-bus, 

quos. 

quae, 

, qua'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quas. 

quae, 

qu5'-rum, 

qui'-bus, 

quae. 

Ah. quo. 

qua. 

quo. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 


Remark (1.) Quis is sometimes used by comic writers in the feminine, and 
even in the neuter. Quisnam, quisque and quisqucm also occur as feminine. 

Rem. (2.) Qui is used for the ablative of quis in all genders, as it is for that 
of the relative qui. Cf. § 136, R. 1. 

Rem. (3.) Quis and qui have sometimes the signification of the indefinite 
pronoun allquis (some one, any one), especially after the conjunctions ec (for 
en)i si, ne, neu, nisi, num; and after relatives, as quo, quanto, etc. Sometimes 
quis and qui are used in the sense of qudlis f what sort ? 

2. The compounds quisnam and quinam have respectively the sig¬ 
nification and declension of the interrogatives quis and qui. In the 
poets nan. sometimes stands before quis. Virg. G. 4, 445. 

3. Ecquis and numquis are declined and used like quis; but are 
sometimes adjectives. Virg. Eel. 10, 28: Cic. Att. 13, 8. 

Rem. (4.) Ecqua is sometimes found in the nominative singular feminine; 
and the neuter plural oi numquis is numqua. 

Rem. (5.) Ecq^d and numqui also occur, declmed like the interrogative qui, 
and, like that, used adjectively. 

4. Ecquisnam aval mmquisnani declined Vtke, ecqms ; but are 
found only in the singular;—the former in the nominative In all gen¬ 
ders, and in the ablative masculine ; the latter in the nominative 
uiascuhne and accusative neuter. In the nominative feminine and 
In the ablative, the former is used adjectively. 







88 


INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 


188 


/). The interrogative cujus is also defective:— 
Sinnular. 

F. N. 

cu'-jum, 


M. 

N. cu'-jus, 
A:, cu'-jum, 
Ab. - 


cu -ja, 

cu'-jam, 

cu-ja. 


Plural. 

F. 

N. Cu'-j8B, 
Ac. cu-jas. 


6. Cnjas is declined like an adjective of one termination; cujas 
cujatis. See § 139, 4. 

Notb. Ike interrogative pronoims are used not only in direct questions hu 
in such dependent clauses also, as contain only an indirect question; as, e. g 
in the direct question, quis estf who is he V in the indirect, nescio quissit, I know 
not who he is. Qtii, in this sense, is found for quis; as, qui sit ajmnty ho ib- 
closes who he is. Cf. § 265, N. 


INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

§ 138. Indefinite pronouns are such as denote an object 
in a general manner, without indicating a particular individual 
They are 


Quisquam, any one. 
Quispiam, some one. 
Unusquisque, each. 
Aliquipiam, any, some. 


Allqxiis, some one. 

Siquis, if any. 

Nequis, lest any. 

Quisque, every one. 

Note. Siquis and nequis are commonly written separately, si quis and ne 
(uis: so also unus quisque. 


Quid am, a certain one. 
Quilibet, ) any one you 
Quivis, ) please. 

Quis and qui, ^ 137, R. (8.) 


1. Altquis is thus declined:— 

♦ 



Singular. 



M. 

F. 

N. 

;v; 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab 

al'-I-quis, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-tiuem. 

al'-i-qua, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-quam. 

al'-i-quod, or -quid, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 

al'-i-cui, 

al'-i-tiuod, or -quid, 

al'-i-quo. 

al'-I-qua. 

al'-i-quo. 



Plural. 



M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

al'-i-qui, 

al-i-cpio'-rum, 

a-li(['-ui-bus,* 

al'-t-qu®, 

al-i-'pia'-rum, 

a-li(j'-ui-bus. 

al'-i-qua, 

al-i-qu6'-rum, 

a-li(j'-ui-bus, 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 

rn 

O 

’ 1 

al'-i-ciuas. 

al'-i-cpia. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 


* Pronounced a-lik'-ivS-bus. See ^ 9, 4, and 21, 8 













5 139. 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 


89 


2. 5! quis and nequis are declined in the same manner; but they 
wmetimes have quce in the fern, singular and neut. plural. 

(a.) Aliqnis^ in the nominative singular masculine, is used both as a sub- 
Btantive and as an adjective;— aliqiii, as an adject.ve, but is neally obsolete, 
AUqucE in the fern. sing, occurs as an adjective in Lucretius, 4, 2, 64. 
ancl ni'qu\ which are projierly adjectives, are used also substantively for tlquis 
and nprji.is, and in the nominative singular masculine these two fcnns are' 
soi’.ivalti it. The ablatives aliqui and slqui also occur. 

(i.) Aliquid, slquiri and ??>'//?//>/, like quid, are used substantively; aUquod, 
3tc., like quad, are usee adjectively. 

3. Quisque, qi(isqu(un, and quispiam, are declined like qtm. 

(a.) In the neuter singularj however, quisque has qnodfpie, quidque, or quicqx’e 
quisquam has quidqnam or quu quarn; and quispicwi has quodjnam, quulpiam, or 
quipjifnn. Ihe I'onns quidque or quicque, quidpiam or qidqqnain are used sub- 
suiiilivcly. 

(6.) Quisqmm Avants the feminine (except quamqnam, Plant. Jlil. 4, 2, 68), 
ar.d also the jilural, and, wdth a few exceptions in Plautus, it is alv;ays used 
substantively, its place as an adjective being supplied by tdlus. Ciuispiam is 
scarcely used in tlie plural, except in the nominative feminine, qiuejjuim. 

4. Unusquisqiie is compounded of unus and quisque, which are 
often written separately, and both words are declined. 

Thus unusqiiisque, uniuscujusque, unicidque, unumquemque, etc. The neuter 
13 unumquodque, or unumquidque. It has no pim'al. Unumquidquid for unum- 
quidque occurs in Plautus and Lucretius. 

5. Quldam, quillbet, and qulvis, are declined like qui, except that 
they have both quod and quid in the neuter, the former used adjec¬ 
tively,. the latter substantively. 

Note. Quldam has usually n before d. in the accusative singular and geni¬ 
tive plural; as, quendam, quorundam, etc. Cf. § 134, Note 1. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 139 . 1. The possessive are derived from the genitives of 

the substantive pronouns, and of quis, and designate something 
belonging to their primitives. 

They are mens, tuus, suus, noster, vester, and ciljus. Mens, tuus, 
and sut^, are declined like bonus; but meus has in the vocative sin¬ 
gular masculine mi, and very rarely mens. Cf. § 105, K. 3. In late 
writers mi occurs also in the feminine and neuter. 

2. Cujus also is declined like bonus; but is defective. Sec § 137,6. 
It occurs only in early Latin and in legal phraseology. 

3. Nosier and vester are declined like pujer. See § 106. 

Remakk 1, The terminations pte and met intensive are sometimes annexed 

to poss 3 .ssive pronouns, especially to the ablative singular; as, suopte pondire, 
by its own weight; suapte manu, bv his own hand. So nostrnnte culpa; BV- 
uiniie nmicum; medmet culpa. The'suffix met is usually followed by ipst; as, 
Umnubed sudmet ipse Jvaude ca 2 )lus abiit. Liv.; but Sallust has mtamel J'o.ciu 

Rkm 2 t^uus, like its primitive sid, has always a reflexive signification, rb- 
ferrin" to’the subject of the sentence. Meus, urns, noster, and vester, are also 
used roflexively, when the subject of the proposition is of the first or second 
oerson. See § 132, 4. 

S* 


^ PATRIAL PRONOUNS.-PRONOMINAL ABJECTIVES. § 139 


PATRIAL PRONOUNS. 

4. (a.) These are noi^fras and cujns. See §§ 100, 2, and liS, 6 
They are declined like adjoctives of one termination; as, nostras^ 
nostrdtui, but both are defective. 

(h.) lYosfras is found in the nominative and genitive singular, in 
the nominative plural, (masc. and fern., no.'ilrates, neut. nostratia), 
and in tae ablative, (noslraflbus). Cujas or qiidjas occurs in the 
nominative, genitive and accusative {cujCitem masc.) singular, and in 
the nominative plural, masc. {cujdtes.'). Cf. § 137, 6. —Nostrdtis and 
cvjatis (or quojdtis) also occur in the nominative. 

PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

5. To the adjective pronouns may be added certain adjectives 
of so general a meaning, that they parttike, in some degree, of 
the character of pronouns. Of this kind are:— 

(1.) (a.) Alius^ ullus, nullus, and nonnullus, which answer to the 
question, who? 

(b.) Alter, neuter, alteruter, utervis, and uterlibet, which answer to 
the question, uter? which of two? 

(2.) Adjectives denoting quality, size, or number, in a general 
way. These stand in relation to one another, and are hence called 
correlatives. * 

Remark. The relatives and interrogatives of this class begin with qu, and 
B"e alike in form. The indefinites are formed from the relatives by prefixing 
ali. The demonstratives begin with t, and are sometimes strengthened bv dem. 
A general relative, having a meaning more general than the relative, is fonned 
by doubling the simple relative, or by affixing to it the termination cumque. 
A general indefinite is formed by annexing Ubet or vis to the relative. 

(3.) Their mutual relation is denoted by the following table, with 
which may be compared the adverbial correlatives, § 191, R. 1. 

Interrog. Dnnonstr. Relat. Relat. gpneral. IndeJin. hide/ general. 

^nalis? tfilis, qualis, {)- quaUs’Ibet, 

quantus? { } quantus, [ } aliquantus, quantuslibet. 

quot? tot, totldem, quot, {quotcunique, j aliquot, quotll’ist, 

aubtas? totus, quotas, quotuscumque, (aliquotus), - — ■ 

Diminutives. 

qnactulufl? tantulus. -. quautuluscumque. aliquantiilum. 

Note 1. The suffix c?<7??7we, which is used in fonning general relatives, is 
composed of the relat.ve adverb cum ((pium) ajul the suffix qiie, cx])ressive of 
Universality, as in quispte and in adverbs, (see § 191).- Cumque, therefore, ori¬ 
ginally signifieil ‘whenever.’ When attached to a relative, whether a pro¬ 
noun, adjective, or adverb, it renders the relative meaning more general; ai 
yiii, who; qukumque, whoever; or, every one who. 

Note 3. Cvjusmddi is somethms used for mialis, and hujusmAdi, istimm6dK 
ejusTn^di imd ejmdemmddi foe idlis. Cf. ^ 134, K. 6. 






^ 14<^ 141. 


VERBS.-VOICES. 




VERBS. 

§ I S O. A verb is a word by which something is affirmed 
ol’ a person or thing. 

1. That of which any thing is affirmed is called the of the 

verb. ('>.) That which is affirmed of the subject is callecl the predi' 
cate. Cf. § 201. 

3. A verb either expresses an action or state; as, pner legit, the 
hoy reads; aqva calet, the water is icann; —or it connects an attri¬ 
bute with a subject; as, terra est roturidaj the earth is round. 

4. All verbs belong to the former of these classes, except sum, I am^ the 
most common use of which is, to connect an attribute with a subject. W hen 
so used, it is called the copula. 

§ 34:3. Verbs are either active or neuter. 

ITotk. Active and neuter verbs are sometimes called transitive and intrnnsi- 
live; and verbs of motion are by some grammarians divided into active-transit 
five and active-intransitive, according as they require, or do not require, an ob¬ 
ject after them. 

I. An active or transitive verb expresses such an action as 
requires the addition of an object to complete the sense; as, 
amo te, I love thee ; sequitur consulem, he follows the consul. 

IT. A neuter or intransitive verb expresses such an action or 
state, as does not require the addition of an object to complete 
the sense; as, equus currit, the horse runs; gradior., I walk. 

Remark 1. Many verbs, in Latin, are considered as neuter, which are 
usually translated into English by active verbs. Thus indulyeo, I indulge, 
noceo, I hurt, pareo, I obey, are reckoned among neuter verbs. In strictness, 
such Latin verbs denote ralher a state than an action, and their sense woiila 
be more exactly expressed by the verb to be with an adjective; as, ‘ I am in¬ 
dulgent, I am hurtful,’ etc. 'Some verbs in Latin, which do not iisually take 
an object after them, are yet active, since the object is omitted by ellipsis. 
Thus credo j)roperly signifies to intrust, and, i.i this sense, takes an object; as, 
credo tibi snlultm vieam, I intrust my safety to you; but by ellipsis it usually 
means to believe; as, crede mihi, believe me. 

To verbs belong voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 

VOICES. 

(a.) Voice, in verbs, is the form by which they denote the re¬ 
lation of the agent to tlie action of the verb. 

(}).) Most active Latin verbs have, for this purpose, two forms, 
wine., are called the active and passive voices. 

1. A verb in the active voice represents the agent as actirq 
upon some person or thing, called the object; as, legit lU 
brum, the boy is reading a book. 


92 


VERBS.—MOODS. 


§ 142, 145 


2. A verb in the pccssive voice represents the object as acted 
upon by the agent; as, Uher legitur a puero, a book is read by 
the boy. 

Rkm. 2. Rr corj'oaring the two preceding examples, it will be seen that they 
have the same meaning, d'he jiassive vrice may thus be snl)stituted at plea¬ 
sure for the active, by making the ol))ect of the active the subject of the pas¬ 
sive. and placing the subject of tlie active in the ablative case, with oi without 
the preposition a or nh, according as it is a voluntary or involuntary agent. 
The active form is used to direct the attention especially to the agent as act¬ 
ing; the passive, chiefly to exhibit the object as acted upon. In the one case 
the object, in the other ihe agent, is frequently omitted, and left indefinite; as. 
jmer ler/il, the boy JS reading, scil. librum, Uteras, etc , a book, a letter, etc. 
vivtas lauddtur, virtue is praised, scil. ab ho/yiinibus, by men. 

The two voices are distinguished from each other by peculiar terminations. 
Cf, ^ 152. 

§ 142. 1. Neuter verbs have, in general, only the form of the 

active voice. They are, however, sometimes used impersonally in 
the passive voice. See § 184, 2. 

2. The neuter verbs audeo, I dare, J'ldo, I tnist, gmideo, I rejoice, and soleo, 
I am wont, have the passive form in the perfect aiid its cognate tenses; as 
•^ausus sum, I dared. Hence these verbs are called neuter passives, or sewii- 
deponents. 

3. The neuter verbs vapulo, I am beaten, and veneo, I am sold, have an ac¬ 
tive form, but a passive meaning, and are hence called neutral passives. 

4. (a.) Deponent verbs have a transitive or intransitive significa¬ 
tion with only the passive form. They are called deponent verbs, 
from depbno, to lay aside, as having laid aside their active form, and 
their passive signification ; as, sequor, I follow ; morior, I die. 

(f.) Some deponent verbs have both an active and a passive signification, 
especially in the perfect participle. These are sometimes called common verbs. 
Cf. ^ 162, 17. 


MOODS. 

§ 143. (a.) Moods (or modes) are forms of the verb, which 
denote the relation of the action or state, expressed by the verb, 
to the mind of the speaker or to some other action. 

(ft.) Latin verbs have four moods—the indicative, the subjunctive, 
the imperative, and the injinilive. 

1. Tlie indicative mood is used in independent and absoluto 
V.sseriions and inquiries; as, amo, I love ; audisne ? dost thou 
near ? 

2. Tlie subjunctive mood is used to express an action or state 
gimply as conceived by the mind; as, si me obsecret, redibo ; if 
he entreat me, 1 will return. 

3. The imperative mood is used in commanding, exhorting 
or entreating; as, ama, love thou ; amanto, they shall love. 


§ 144, 145. 


VERBS.-TENSES. 


98 


4. The infinitive mood is used to denote an action or state in 
definitely, witliout limiting it to any person or thing as its sub 
ject; as, virtus est vitium fugere, to shun vice is a virtue. 


TENSES. 

§ 14^4:. Tenses are forms of the verb, denoting the time of 
the action or state expressed by the verb. 

1 . Time admits of a threefold division, into present, past and future; and, 
in each of these times, an action may be represented either as going on, or as 
completed. From these two divisions arise the six tenses of a Latin verb, 
each of which is distinguished by its peculiar terminations. 

2. They are called the present^ imperfect^ future^ perfect^ plupeT'^ 
feet, and future perfect tenses. 

Present ( action I amo, I love, or am loving; Present tense. 

Past < not com- > aniabam, I was loving; hnperfeet tense. 

Future ( pleted; ) ajjidto, I shall love, or be loving; Future tense. 

Present! action laTudri, I have loved; Pe7*/ec! !ense. 

Past < com- > I had loved; Pluperfe,ct tense. 

Future { pleted; ) amavero, I shall have loved; Future perfect tense. 

8. There is the same number of tenses in the passive voice, in 
which actions not completed are represented by simple forms of the 
verb, and those which are completed by compound forms. 

Present ( action 1 amor, I am loved; Present tense. 

Past < not com- > amdbar, I was loved; Imperfect tense. 

Future ( pleted; ) amdbor, I shall be loved; b'uture tense. 

Present ( action ^ amdtus sum, or fui, I have been lOved; Perfect tense. 

Past < com- \amdtuseram, or fimnim, I hatl been loved; Pluperfect. 
Future ( pleted; ) amdn<sero, or yw^ro,! shall have been loved; 

§ 14«»5. I. The present tense represents an action as now 
going vn, and not com[)leted; as, dmo, I love, or am loving. 

1. Any existing custom, or general truth, may be expressed by this tense 
as, apuif Parthos, siynum dntur tympdno; among the Parthians, the signal is 
given by a dnim. A general truth is sometimes also expressed by the perfect. 

2. The present tense may also denote an action which has existed for some 
time, and which still exists'; as, tot annus bella yero; for so many years I have 
waged, and am still waging war. 

3. The present tense is often in nan'ation used for the perfect indefinite. It 
s then called the historical present; as, desiliunt ex equis, provOlant in priimtm ; 
they dismount, they fly forward to the front. 

II. The imperfect tense represents an action as going on at 
some past time, bu: not then completed; as, amdhum^ 1 was 
lOving. 

1. The imperfect sometimes denotes repeated or customary past action; ai.' 
\egebam, I was wont to read. 

A. It may also denote an g.ction which had existed for some time, and which 
was still existing at a certain past time; as, audiebat jamduduin verba; he had 
ong heard, and was still hearing the words. 


H 


VERBS.—TENSES. 


§ 145 


8. Ill letters, and with reference to the time of t;.\elr being written, hut 
to that of their being read, the imperfect is sometimes used for the present 
d.&,exspectaham, I was expecting, (i. e. when 1 wrote). 

4. The imperfect also sometimes denotes the intending, preparing, or attempt¬ 
ing to act at a definite past time. 

III. The future tense denotes that an action will be going on 
hereafter, but without reference to its completion; as, amdbo, 
I shall love, or shall be loving. 

IV. The perfect tense represents an action either as just com¬ 
pleted, or as completed in some indciinite jiast time; as, amdvi, 
I have loved, or I loved. 

Rp:mauk. In the former sense, it is called the perfect defnite, ic- 
the latter, the perfect uidefuite, historical perfect, or aorist. 

V. The plnperfect tense rejiresents a ])ast action as completed, 
at or before the time of some other past action or event; as, ht- 
teras scripseram, qinun iiuncius venit; I hud written the letter, 
when the messenger arriv^ed. 

YI. The future perfect tense denotes that an action will be 
comjileted, at or before the time of some other future action or 
event; as, quum cosnavero, profciscar ; when I shall have supped^ 
I will go. 

Note 1. This tense is often, but improperTy, called the future subjunctive. 
Tt has the signification of the indicative inooJ, and corresponds to the seema 
future ill English. 

Note 2. -The imperfect, historical perfect, and pluperfect tenses are some¬ 
times called preterites or the preterite tenses. 

Note 3. The present, imperfect, and future tenses passive, in English, do 
not express the exact .sense of those tenses in Latin, as denoting an action 
which is, was, or will be, going on at a certain time. Thus laudor signifies, not 
‘ I am praised,’ but ‘ 1 am in the act of being praised, or, if such an expression 
is admissible, ‘ 1 am being praised.’ 

K KM A UK 1. The six tenses above enumerated are found only in 
the indicative mood. 

Rem. 2. The subjunctive mood, in the regular conjugation, has 
tlie jiresent and past, but no future tenses. 

Note 4. The tenses of the subjunctive mood have lies definiteness of meaning, in re- 
jai"d to time, than tliose of the indicative. Thus the present and perfect, besides tbelt 
•.J5irr.ion signs, wai/or mn, may have or can have, must, in certain connections, be 
translated by might, could, would, or should; might have, could have, etc. The teusee 
of this irood must often, also, be translated by tlie corresponding tenses of the indica¬ 
tive. for a more particular accouut :f the siguiticatiou of each of the tenses of the sub¬ 
junctive mood, see ^ 260. 

Rkm. 3. The imperative mood has two tenses—a present and a 
future; the former for that which is to be done at once, and tlie latter 
for that which is to be done in future. 

Rkm. 4. The infinitive mood has three tenses—^tbe present, the 
perfect, and the future; the first of which denotes an incomplete, the 
second a completed action, and the last an action to be performed. 


^ 146-148. VERBS.-NUMBERS-PERSONS. 



NUMBERS. 


§ 140. Number, in verbs, is the form by which the unity or 
vlurality of tlieir subject is denoted. Hence verbs, like nouns, 
have two nundx^rs—the singular and the plural, Cf. § 35, 1. 


PERSONS. 


§ 14’?'. Person, in verbs, is the form by which they denote 
the person of their subject. Hence in each number there are 
three persons—the Jirst, second, and third. Cf. § 35, 2. 

1. The iiTi])erativo present has only the second person In both 
numbers. The iin[)erative future has In each nund)er the second 
and third persons, but in the singular they have both the same form, 
-to in the active, and 4or in the passive voice. 

2. As the signification of the infinitive mood is not limited to any 
subject, it admits no change to express either number or person. 

3. The following are the terminations of the different persons of 
each number, in the indicative and subjunctive moods, in both 
•voices:— 


Active. 


Passive. 

1. 2. 3. 

r, ris, tur; 
mur, mini, ntur. 


Person. 1. 2. 3. 

Singular, o, i, or m, s, t; 
Plural. mu3, tis, nt. 


These may be called personal terminations. 

Remark 1. The perfect indicative active is irre^lar in the second person 
singular and plural, which end in sti and siis, and in one of the forms of the 
third person plural, which ends in re. 

Rem. 2. The passive form above given belongs to the simple tenses only. 

Rem. 3. The pronouns of the first and second persons, er/o, nos; tu and vos, 
are seldom expressed in Latin as subjects of a finite verb, the several persons 
being sufficiently distmguished by the terminations of the verb. 

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND SUPINES. 

§ 148 . 1. A jjarticiple is a word derived from a verb, and 

partaking of its meatiing, but having the form of an adjective. 

(1.) Like a verb, it has different voices and tenses; like an ad- 
iective, it haf declension* and gender; and like both, it has two 
nurnoers. 

(2.) Active verbs have usually four participles—two in the active 
voice, a present and a future; as, amans, loving; amaturus, about to 
love;—and two in the passive voice, a perf-'ct and a future ; as, a//ja- 
ius, loved, or having been loved; amandus, to be loved. 


*S«e in05, R. 2; and 111. R. 



96 VERBS.-CONJUGATION. § 149, 150 

(3.) Neuter verbs have usually only the participles of the active 
voice. 

(4.) Deponent verbs, both active and neuter, may have the par¬ 
ticiples of both voices. 

2. (a.) Gerunds are verbal nouns, used only in the oblique 
cases, and expressing the action or state of the verb; as, arnandi^ 
of loving, etc. 

(&.) Like other abstract nouns, they are found only in the singulai 
number, and by their cases*supply the place of a dechnable present 
infinitive active. 

3. Supines also are verbal nouns of the fourth declension 
in the accusative and ablative smgular; as, amdtum, to love 
amdtu, to be loved. 

Remark. These also serve in certain connections to supply the 
place of the infinitive present both active and passive. The supine 
m urn is called the former supine ; that in w, the latter. The former 
is commonly used in an active, the latter in a passive sense. 

CONJUGATION. 

§ 140 . 1. The conjugation of a verb is the regular for¬ 

mation and arrangement of its several parts, accordmg to their 
voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons. 

2. There are four conjugations, which are characterized by 
the vowel before re in the present of the infinitive active. 

In the first conjugation, it is a long; 


In the second,. e long; 

In the third,. e short; 

In the fourth,. i lon^. 


Exception. Do, dare, to give, and such of its compounds as are of the first 
conjugation, have d short beiore re. 

§ I •TO. A verb, like a noun, consists of two parts—the root, 
and the termination. Cf. § 40, 10. 

1. The first or general root of a verb consists of those letters that 
are found in every part. This root may always be found by remov¬ 
ing the termination of the present infinitive. 

2. There are also two special roots, the first of which is found in 
the perfect, and is called the second root; the other, found in the su 
pine or perfect participle, is called the third root. 

3. In regular verbs of the first, second, and fourth conjuga¬ 
tions, the second root is formed by adding, respectively, dv, u, 
and iv, to the general root; and the third root by a similar ad¬ 
dition of dt, It, and it. 

Remark. Many verbs, in each of the conjugations, form their second and 
third roots irregularly. 




5 151, 152. 


VERBS.—CONJUGATION. 


97 


4. In the third conjugation, the second root either is the same 
as the first, or is formed from it by adding s ; the third root is 
formed by adding t. See § 171. 

Note. In the seoond and fourth conjugations, e and i before o are considered 
as belonging not to the root, but to the termination. In verbs whose second 
or third roots are formed irregularly, the general root often undergoes soma 
change in the parts derived from them. 

5. The vowel which unites the general root with the remaining 
Ictt-ors of the verb, is called the connecting vowel. Each conjugation, 
except the third, is, in a great degree, distinguished by a peculiar 
connecting vowel, which is the same as characterizes the infinitives. 
See § 149, 2. 

(a.) In the third conjugation, the connecting vowel is generally e or t. In 
the second and fourth conjugations, and in verbs in io of the third, a second 
connecting vowel is sometimes added to that which characterizes the conjuga¬ 
tion ; as, a in doceani, u in capiunt, etc. 

(6.) In verbs whose second and third roots are formed irregularly, the con¬ 
necting vowel often disappears, or is changed in the parts derived from those 
roots; but it is almost always found in the parts derived from the first root. 

§ 1^1. 1. From the first root are derived, in each voice, the 

present, imperfect, and future indicative; the present and imperfect 
subjunctive ; the imperative, and the present infinitive. From this 
root are derived also the present participle, the gerund, and the fu¬ 
ture participle passive. 

2. From the second root are derived, in the active voice, the per 
feet, pluperfect, and future perfect indicative; the perfect and plu 
perfect subjunctive, and the perfect infinitive. 

3. (a.) From the third root are derived, in the active voice, tho 
supine in wm, and the future participle ; the latter of which, with the 
verb esse^ constitutes the future infinitive active. 

(}).') From this root are derived, in the passive voice, the supine in 
w, and the perfect participle; from the latter of which, with the verb 
sum, are formed all the tenses which in the active are derived from 
the second root. The future infinitive passive is formed from the 
supine in um, and Iri, the present infinitive passive of the verb eo, 
to go. 

4. The present and perfect indicative, the supine in wm, and the 
present infinitive, are called the principal parts of the verb, because 
from the first three the several roots are ascertained, and from the 
last, the characteristic vowel of the conjugation. In the passive voice, 
the principal parts are the present indicative and infinitive, and the 
perfect participle. 

Note. As the supine in um is wanting in most verbs, the third root must 
often be determined from the perfect participle, or the future participle active. 

§ The following table exhibits a connected view of the 

verbal terminations, in all the conjugations. By annexing these to 
the several roots, all the parts of a verb may be formed. 

« 


98 


VERBS.—TERMINATIONS. 


§152 


Q 

•-4 

o 

> 


eo 



^ A 

04 


>H C J? 5 

2 2 2 ^ 

C C 5 C3 

? ? ?-r 

-abantur. 

-ebantur. 

-ebantur. 

-iebantnr. 

-abuntur. 

-ebiintur. 

-entur. 

-ientur. 

• 

-ontfir. 

-eantur. 

-antur. 

IF^ t^l-^.-T 

C 'P *3 

>p 2 

g s g| 

9 9.s.g 

£ = =1 
a B B I 
si 

9 9 9.2 

! ip" * 3 ' 

£ ~ .j-'J 

'S ’2 ^ ® 

999 .^ 

•F«r* 

IrT C I-T 

*= c 

>F- >- »<— 

B.5 B 

IV V .03 ' 
1 1 1 

tT 

>p >p >3 >3 
a H s a 

.9 .9 ^ ,r. 

-abaraur, 

-ebamur, 

-ebamfxr, 

-iebamur. 

U U 

>P >P - H 

B B .g >1 

23 B,I 

99 . 9 .^ 

•« 

^ b • ^ 

^ >53 s- 
>p C ‘p 

B 3 a 

i^ ^ iV • 


c> 




H 

> 

t-* 

GO 

(A 

-»} 


Q 

l-H 

o 

> 

» 


eo -- 
irt 


O 

O 


H 

O 

I—I 

Q 

s 





CO 



IT 

'-M 2 *i 


T T 


>C? XD x© ^ 
Ih ^ 

ICS XV .Jj] 


>2 ^ >2 ” 
*C *C ^ 

103 iV 
I I I i 


^>o J-",§ 
>9 9 >9.2 


V4 

>P >?3 


4-» 

103 iS tec 

? ? ?-T 


> 0 ) >a;> >v 

H »-i Vi 

loc loe io3 

^ ? T 


*)C? 

'g 


cn CO 

^v, 

io3 leC 

W ^ 

s 

H 103 IV 
Qri 1 I 


09 

>S T! 

V 

I I 


b >et 

^;2 
I I 


^ (h 

>;3 »:3 u 

>2 ^ 
I© 

CS ^ 


XV )V 

xi^ x:^ >v ^ 
>M ,S 
9 9 ,9 




qq 


r-IC^CO’^ HH IHC^CO'^ 


09 09 

T 2 

>V >V >tH 

^ ^ t: S 

CS -Y 'T 

PC ^ ^ 

P >0 »o ^ 

n ;g^g>S.>2 

^ ' \ '. . 
rH c 4 CO ^ 


a 

O 

O 

S 5 
^ H 


H 

O 

P 


i b 3 
JC3 tc 

^ io3 4-> io3 
*? nS 


*^> 0 ? 

>v 

loi 'q) iS ;§ 

^ ^ 5 % 


tfi go 

W >C ’T' 

’nl’ciS 

IV V lOC *^4 
111 * 


V >5C S 
I I 1 I 


rH Cl CO ^ 


-ant. 

-ent. 

-nnt. 

-iunt. 

-abant. 

-ebant. 

-ebant. 

-iebant. 

-abunt. 

-ebunt. 

-ent. 

-ient. 

SUBJ 

P 

-ent. 

-eant. 

-ant. 

-iant 

oT DO* rtT* jt 

^ 53 53 ^ 

. 9.9 ^ 

•« 

^ — OD 

SO 09 09 )P 

M >fH >F^ Vj 

V-» ^ 

103 Ip 103 5 

05 V V *2 

1 1 T 1 

^ •» 

09 09 ^ 

5 : Q ^ «3 

>-« >rH ^ Q 

fO XJ 23 

*f ? '? ’V 

-eti», 

-eatls, 

-atls, 

-iatls. 

.2 s' ® « 

a B a B 

*? *V >F^ Irp 

-abarnns, 

-ebamus, 

-ebamus, 

-iebamus, 

oT ^ 

1’g.s-3 

lsa| 

03 V IV 

1 T 1 1 

mT 2 ^ 

09 >C3 09 

>c= p 2 

E iS £ 1 

IV V o3 

1 T 1 1 


H 

Q 

■45 


• ^ TS **^ ■4.J ^ 

P 3 CO >c« >v ^ ;p 

- 1 I I I 


"b ti IS > 5 ® 

>c 8 >x >ro ^ 

1 ^ 1(19 

ICO IV IV .)h 
I I I 1 


>09 

105 -Y 


^ >3Q 4~> ^ 

XV V >rC S 

I T • I 


O w if .v.2.^ 
o' - 

FH 9’' 9 9 -2 

• • • • 

1-1 d CO 
%--/ 

*voijv6 

-ntuQQ 


09 ^ « ig 

ic3 1 ^ icS _5 
l^ fP rP 
IC3 IV IV 

1111 


BBS 

c3 cC Cv 

^ fO ^ 

lA 1 ^ 


fO 

IV 

•T 


03 09 ^ 

>:r 00 

fC x> « ,S 
105 IV IV 


o o 

r^F^ 

.05 tcj. 


ii 

1 I 


1-1 C« CO 


rH C^ CO ^ 


** S no 

” .a ;3 


iV 


ij 9 . 9:9 










n52. 


VERBS.—TERMINATIONS. 


99 


iUi 

£ £ £ 3 

« Cf y -5? 


£ = .= '3 
g s s-g 
£ £ £ I 


)P >s .3 .d 

B a g I 

■£ '£ '£ I 




•§ 

>o >o >o -Ij 


<s 



cT 

f Y ?-T 

•N ^ 

W CC H) ,#1^ 

>3 .3 .3 !q 
33 -3 -3 ^ 

o 

t 

'g ‘o' 

? Y ?•? 

’5* 

^ a != -3 
s-a e a 

1-5 (H eo 

o 

o 


U ® E.2 

I » T I 



a a a a 

iH ei eo Wi 


‘pi999UJ 

















iOO 


VERBS.—SUM. 


§153 


Remar I 1. In analyzing a verb, the voice, person, and nnmber, are ascer* 
tained by the personal terminations. See § 147, 3. The conjugation, mood, 
and tense, are, in general, detennined by the letter or letters whii h intervene 
between tlie root of the verb and the personal terminations. Thus in antaba- 
mus, mus denotes that the verb is of the act.ve voice, plural number, and first 
person; bn denotes that it is of the indicative mood, im[)erfect tense; and the 
connecting vowel a detennines it to be of the first conjugation. So in ama7 em- 
tm, mmi denotes the passive voice, plural number, and second person; re, the 
subjunctive mood, imperfect tense; and a, as before, the first conjugation. 

Rem. 2. Sometimes, the part between the root of the verb and the personal 
termination, does not precisely determine the conjugation, mood, and tense, 
but only within certain limits. In such cases, the conjugation may be learned, 
by findmg the present tense in the dictionary, and if two forms are alike in the 
same conjugation, they can only be distinguished by the sense. Thus amemus 
and tfocemws have the same tennination; but, as O7/t0 is of the first, and (/oceo 
of the second conjugation, the former is determined to be the subjunctive, the 
latter the indicative, present. Regar may be either the future indicative, or 
the present subjunctive —bibimus either tne present or the perfect indicative. 

§ Sum, I am, is called an auxiliary verb, because it is 

used, in conjunction with participles, to supply the want of simple 
forms in other verbs. From its denoting existence, it is sometimes 
called the substantive verb. 

Remark. Sum is very irregular in those parts which, in other verbs, are formed 
from the first root. Its imperfect and future tenses, except in the third person 
plural of the latter, have the form of a pluperfect and future perfect. It is 
thus conjugated:— 


PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Pres, Indie. Pres. InJin. Perf. Indie. Fut. Part. 
Sung, es'-se, fu'-i, fu -tu'-rus. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 



su'-mus, ice are, 
es'-tis, ye] are, 
sunt, they are. 


Imperfect. 


1. e'-ram, I was, 

2. e'-ras, thou least, 
8. e'-rat, he was; 


e-ra'-mus, we were, 
e-ra'-tis, ye were, 
e'-rant, they were. 


F uturc. 


!. shall, or will. 


1. e'-ro, I shall he, 

2. e'-ris, thou wilt he, 

3. e'-rit, he will he; 


er'-i-mus, we shall he, 
er'-i-tis, ye ivill be. 
e'-runt, they will le. 


• In the second person singular in English, the plural form you is Dommonly used 
xcept in solemn discourse; as, tu es, you are. ^ 

t Tho plural pronouu of the second person is either ye or you. 




S15S. 


VERBS.—SUM. 


10) 


Perfect, have been, or was. 


1. fa'-i, I have been, 

2. fu-is'-ti, thou hast been, 
B. fu'-it, he has been; 


1. fti'-6-rara, I had been, 

2. fu'-e-ras, thou hadst been, 
8. fu'-e-rat, he had been ; 


fu'-i-mus, we have Oeen, 
fu-is'-tis, ye have been, 
fu-e'-runt or re, they have been. 


Pluperfect 


fu-e-ra'-mus, we had been, 
fu-e-ra'-tis, ye had been, 
fu'-e-rant, they had been. 


Future Perfect shall or will have. 


1. fu'-e-ro, I shall have been, 

2. fu'-e-ris, thou wilt have been, 
8. fu' e-rit, he will have been ; 


fu-er'-i-mus, we shall have been 
fu-er'-i-tis, ye will have been, 
fu'-e-riut, they will have been. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present may, or can. 

1. sim, I may be, si'-mus, we may be, 

2. sis, thou mayst be, si'-tis, ye may be, 

3. sit, he may be sint, they may be. 

Imperfect might, could, would, or should. 

1. es'-gem, I would be, es-se'-mus, we would be, 

2. es'-ses, thou wouldst be, es-se'-tis, ye would be, 

3. es'-set, he would be ; es'-sent, they would be. 

Perfect 

1. fu'-e-rim, I may have been, fu-er'-f-mus, we may have been, 

2. fu'-e-ris, thou mayst have been, fu-er'-I-tis, ye may have been, 

8. fu-^rit, he may have been ; fu'-e-rint, they may have been. 

Pluperfect might, could, would, or should have. 

1. fu-is'-sem, I would have been, fu-is-se'-mus, we would have been^ 

f. fu-is'-ses, thou wouldst have been, fu-is-se'-tis, ye would have been, 

8. fu-is'-set, he would have been / fu-is'-sent, they would have been. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Pres. 2. es, be thou, es'-te, be ye. 

^ut. 2. es'-to, thou shall be es-to'-te, ye shall be, 

3. es'-to, let him be ; sun'-to, let them be . . 

INFINITIVE >40OD. 

Present, es'-se, to be. 

Perfect, fu-is'-se, to have been. 

Future, fii-tu'-rus (a, um), es'-se, w fo'-re, to be about to he* 
s* 


102 


VERBS.-POSSUM. 


§154. 


PARTICIPLE. 

Future, fu-tu'-rus, a, um, about to be. 

§ 151. Remark 1 . A present participle en$ seems tc have been an< 
tiently in use, and is still found in the compounds abstns, prcRseMS, and pdUns. 

Rem. 2. The perfect fui, and its derivative tenses, are formed from an obso* 
lete fuo. whence come also the participle fuiurics, an old subjunctive present 

fuam, jua$^ fuat; -,-, fuant, and the forms Juvlmus, perf. ind., /ux>^ 

rinty perf. suoj., and fuvisstty plup. subj. 

Rem. 3. From fuo appear also to be derived the following:— 

Siihj. imperf. fo'-rem, fo'-res, fo'-ret; -, - fo'-rent. 

Inf. pres. f 6 '-r 6 . 

These forms seem to have been contracted from fu^rem. etc., and fuSre. 
F&rem is equivalent in meaning to essem, but the infinitive j6re has, ir most 
cases, acquired a future signification, equivalent to futurus esse. 

Rem. 4. Sieniy sies, siet, sient, for sinty sisy sity sinty are foimd in ancient 
writers, as are also escit for erity escunt for erunt, ese, esetisy and esent, for esse, 
essetisy and essent. 

Rem. 5. Like sum are conjugated its compounds, absum, adsum, 
desum, insum, intersum, obsum, preesum, subsum, and supersum. 

Rem. 6. Prosum, from the old form prod for pro, and sum, has d 
after pro, when the simple verb begins with e ; as, 

Ind. pres. pro'-sum, prod'-es, prod'-est, etc. 

- imperf. prod'-e-ram, prod'-e-ras, etc. 

Rem. 7. (a.) Possum is compounded of potis, able, and sum. 
They are sometimes written separately, and then polls is the same in 
all genders and numbers. 

( 6 .) In composition, is is omitted in pdtis, and t, as in other cases, coming be¬ 
fore Sy is changed into s. In the infinitive, and imperfect subjunctive, es of the 
simple verb is dropped, as is also f at the beginning of the second root. In 
every other respect possum is conjugated like sumy wherever it is found; but 
the imperative, and the parts derived from the third root, are wanting. 

Pres. Indie. Pres. Infin. Perf. Indie. 

Pos'-eum, pos'Hse, p 6 t'-u-i, I can, or I am able. 

^ UTDICATTVE. SUBJUNCTIVK. 

Present. 

poe'-flum, po'-tgs, po'-test; pos'-sim, pos'-sis, pos'-slt; 

Doe'-Bu-mQs, po-tes'-tls, pos'-sunt. pos-si'-mus, pos-si'-tls, pos'nsint. 

Imperfect. 

p5P-g-ram, pot'-^-rM, poP- 6 -rat; pos'-sem, pos'-ses, pos'-eSt; 

p 6 t-^-ra'-mus, -^-ra'-tls, -^-rant. pos-se'-mus, -se'-tls, po 8 '-««nt. 

Future. 

pfit'-?-r 8 poP-^-ris, p 6 t'-^-rIt; 
pd-tep-I-rniis, po-teP-l-tls, poP-€-runt. 

Perfect. 

p 6 P-u-i, pot-u-is'G, p 6 P-u-It; p 6 -tu'-g-rim, -g-rft; 

5 > 6 -tu'-i-miis, -is'-tls, -e'-runt or -§'r 6 . pot-u-^r'-I-mfis, l-tls, 




I t55» 


VERBS.-FIRST CONJUGATION, ACTIVE. 


108 


Pluperfed. 

p^tn'^ram, -«-ras, -€-rat; pot-n-is'-sem, -is'-aeg, -ia'-sfit; 

p6t-u-€-ra'-m£ls, -e-ra'-tls, -^-rant. pot-u-is-fle'-mtta, -isHse'-tls, -is''-8eiit. 


FtUure Perfect. 

p^tti'-S-r§, po-ti'-^-rfs, p6-tu'-S-rIt; 
pot^u-^-I-mOs, pot-u-^r'-i-tig, p6-tu'-€-riiit 

(No Imperative.) 

INFINTTIVK. PARTICIPIAIj ADJKCTIVB. 

Free. pos'-sS. Per/. p6t-u-is'-sg. po'-tens, able. 

Note. The folio-wing forms are also found; potissum for possum, potesaunt fbr 
possunt, potessim and possiem for possim, possies, possiet and potessit for possss 
and possit, potessem for possem, potesse for posse, and before a passive infinitive 
the passive forms poiestur for potest, poterdtur for potirat, and posseiur for 
posset.--Potis and pote -without esi are sometimes used for potest. 


§ 155. FIRST CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. 

&-ina'-rSy 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present 
Sing. S'-mo, 
a'-mas, 
a'-mat, 

Plur. a-ma'-mus, 
a-ma'-tis, 
a'-mant, 


lovej do love^ am loving. 
I love, 
thou lovesty 
he loves; 
we lovey 
ye lovCy 
they love. 


wzs lovingy loved, did love. 


Imperfect 
Sing, a-ma'-bam, 
a-ma'-bas, 
a-ma'-bat, 
Plur. am-a-ba'-mus, 
am-a-ba'-tis, 
a-ma'-bant, 

Future. 

Sing, a-ma'-bo, 
a-ma'-bis, 
a-ma'-bit, 

Plur. a-mab'-i-mus, 
a-mab'-i-tis, 
a-ma'-bunt, 


I was loving, 
thou wa^t loving, 
he was loving ; 
we were loving, 
ye were loving, 
they were loving. 

shall, or will. 

I shall love, 
thou wilt love, 
he will love ; 
we shall love, 
ye will love, 
they will love. 




VERBS.—FIRST CONJUGATION, ACTIVE. 


Zouec?, or have loved. 


Perfect. 

Sing. S-ma'-vi, 

am-a-vis'-ti, 
S-ma'-vit, 

Plur. a-mav'-i-mu8, 
am-a-vis'-tis, 
am-a-ve'-runt or -re, 

Pluperfect 
Sing. &-mav'-e-ram, 
a-mav'-e-ras, 
S-mav'-e-rat, 

PLur. &-mav-e-ra'-muSj 
S-mav-e-ra'-tis, 
S-mav'-e-rant, 

Future Perfect 

Sing, fi-mav'-e-ro, 
fi-mav'-e-rl8, 
a-mav'-^rit, 

Plur, am-a-ver'-!-mu8, 
Sin-a-ver'-!-ti8, 
i-mav'-e-rint, 


I have loved^ 
thou hast lovedy 
he has loved; 
we have lovedj 
ye have lovedy 
they have loved. 

had. 

I had lovedj 
thou hadst lovedj 
he had loved ; 
we had lovedy 
ye had lovedy 
they had loved. 

shallf or rvill have. 

I shall have lovedy 
thou wilt have lovedy 
he will have loved; 
we shall have lovedy 
ye will have lovedy 
they will have loved 


SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present may, 


iSiny. &'-inem, 
S'-mes, 


a'-met, 

Plur. fi-me'-mu8, 
a-me'-tis, 
S'-ment, 


MOOD, 

or can. 

I may lovcy 
thou mayst lovCy 
he may love ; 
we may lovcy 
ye may lovey 
they may love. 


Imperfect, mighty couldy wouldy or should. 


Sing. &-ma'-rem, 
fi-ma'-re8, 
S-ma'-ret, 

Plur. am-a-re'-musj 
am-a-re'>ti8, 
S-ma-rent, 


I would lovey 
thou wouldst love^ 
he would love; 
we would lovey 
ye would lovey 
they would love. 


Perfect may, or can have. 


Sing. S-mav'-e-rim, 
a-mav'-e-ri8, 
a-mav'-^rit, 
Plur. am-a-ver-i-mu8, 
am-a-ver'-i-ti8, 
a-mav'-e-rint, 


I may have lovedy 
thou mayst have loved, 
he may have loved; 
we may have lovedy 
ye m ay have lovedy 
they may have loved 


S VERBS.—FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. 


Pluperfect miglit, could^ would, or should have. 


Sing, am-a-vis'-sem, 
am-a-vis'-ses, 
am-a-vis'-set, 
Plur. am-a-vis-se'-mufl, 
am-a-via-se'-tis, 
^m-a-vis'-sent, 


I would have loved, 
thou wouldst have loved^ 
he would have loved ; 
we would have loved, 
ye would have loved, 
they would have loved. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


PrcSo Sing, a'-ma, 
Plur. a-ma'-te, 
FiU. Sing, a-ma'-to, 
a-ma'-t5, 

Plur. am-a-to'-te, 
a-man'-to, 


love thou ; 
love ye. 

thou shalt love, 
he shall love ; 
ye shall love, 
they shall love 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, fi-ma'-r©, to love. 

Perfect, am-a-via'-se, to have loved. 

Future, am-a-tu'-rus, (a, um,) es'-se, to he about to love. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present. E'-mans, loving. 

Future, am-artu'-rufl, E, um, abov4. to lov^ 


GERUND. 


O. Erman'-di, 

of loving. 

D. E-man'-d5, 

for loving. 

Ac. E-man'-dum, 

loving. 

Ah. E-man'-(15, 

hy loving. 

SUPINE. 


Former, fi-ma'-tum, 

to love. 

§ PASSIVE 

VOICE. 


PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


Pres. Indie. Pres. Infn. Perf. Part. 
A'-mor, E-ma'-ri, S-ma'-tus. 


10 « 


106 


VERBS.—FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. 


5156 . 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present am. 


Sing. 

S'-mor, 

I am lovedy 

a-ma'-ris or -re, 

thou art lovedy 


S-ma'-tur, 

he is loved; 

Plur. 

S-ma'-mur, 

we are lovedy 


S-mto'-I-ni, 

ye are lovedy 


S-man'-tur, 

they are loved. 


Imperfect 

was. 

Sing. 

S-ma'-bSr, 

I was lovedy 

Sm-a-ba'-rls or -re, 

thou wast lovedy 


Sm-a-ba'-tur, 

he was loved; 

Plur. 

Sm-a-ba'-mur, 

we were lovedy 


Sm-a-bam'-i-ni, 

ye were lovedy 


Sm-a-ban'-tur, 

they were loved. 


Future, shally 

or will be. 


S-ma'-bor, 

I shall be lovedy 

S-mab'-e-rls or -re, 

thou wilt be lovedy 


S-mab'-i-tur, 

he will be loved; 

Plur. 

S-mab'-i-mur, 

we shall be lovedy 


Sm-a-bim'-i-ni, 

ye will be lovedy 


Sm-a-bim'-tur, 

they will be loved. 


Perfect have heen, or was. 

Sing, S-ma'-tus sum or fu'-i, I have been lovcds 

S-ma'-tus es or fu-is'-ti, thou hast been loved^ 

S-ma'-tus est or fu'-it he has been loved ; 

Plur. S-ma'-ti su'-mus or fu'-I-mus, we have been lovedj 

S-ma'-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, ye have been lovedy 

S-ma'-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re, they have been loved 

Pluperfect had been. 

Sing. S-ma'-tus e'-ram or fu'-^ram, I had been lovedy 

S-ma'-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, thou hadst been lovedj 

S-ma'-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat, he had been loved ; 

Plur. S-ma-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-miis, we had been lovedy 
S-ma'-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, ye had been lovedy 
S-ma'-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant, they had been loved. 


Future Perfect shall have been. 


Sing. S-ma'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-ro, 
S-ma'-tiis e'-ris or fu'-e-r!s, 

S ma'-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit, 

Plur S-ma'-ti er-i-mus or fu-er'-i-mus 
S-ma'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-!-tis, 
S-ma'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint, 


I shall haje been lovedy 
thou wilt have been lovedy 
he will have been lotted; 
we shall have been lovedy 
ye will have been lovedy 
they will have been lov^ 


§156. 


VERBS.-FIRST CONJUGATION, PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


107 


Present may, or can he. 


Sing. 

& -mer, 

I may be loved, 


a-me'-rls or -re, 

thou mayst be loved. 

Plur. 

a-me'-tur, 

he may he loved; 

a-me'-mur^ 

we may be loved. 


&-mem'-I-nI, 

ye may be loved. 


a-men'-tur, 

they may be loved. 


Imperfect, might, could, would, or should he. 


Sing. 

a-ma'-rer, 

I would be loved, 


Sm-a-re'-rls or -re. 

thou wouldst he loved, 


fim-a-re'-tur, 

he would be loved; 

Plur. 

&m-a-re'-mur, 

we would be loved. 


&m-arrem'-i-ni, 

ye would be loved, 


am-arren'-tur, 

they would be loved. 


Perfect may have been. 

Sing. S-ma'-tiis sim or fu'-e-rim, I may have been loved, 

&-ma'-tus sis or fii'-e-ris, thou mayst have been loved, 

a-ma'-tus sit or fu'-^rlt, he may have been loved, 

Plur. S-ma'-ti si'-miis or fu-er'-!-mus, we may have been loved, 

&-ma'-ti si'-tis or fu-er'-I-tis, ye may have been loved, 

a-ma'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint, they may have been loved. 

Pluperfect might, could, would, or should have been. 

Sing. S-ma'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, I would have been loved, 

5- ma'-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, thou wouldst have been loved^ 

firma'-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set, he u'ould have been loved ; 

Plur. a-ma'-ti es-se'-mus or fu-is-se'-mus, we would have been loved, 

6- ma'-ti es-se'-tls or fu-is-se'-tis, ye would have been loved, 
a-ma'-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent, they would have been loved. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. Sing. 

5-ma'-re, 

be thou loved; 

Plur. 

a-mam'-I-ni, 

be ye loved. 

Fut. Sing. 

a-ma'-tor, 

thou shall be loved, 

&-ma'-t6r, 

he shall be loved; 

Plur. 

(am-a-bim-i-ni, 

ye shall be loved). 


fi-man'-tor, 

they shall be loved. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present, a-ma'-ri, to be loved. 

Perfect, a-ma'-tus es'-se yr fu-is'-se, to have been loveu. 
Furure. a-ma'-tum i'-ri, to be about to be loved. 


108 


VERBS.—SECOND CONJUGATION. 


§ 15 ^ 


PARTICIPLES. 

'Perfect, a-ma'-tus, loved., or 'having been hoed. 

Future, a-man'-d^, to he loved. 

SUPINE. 

Latter. S-ma'-tu, to he loved. 


Formation of the Tenses. 


From tliB first root, am, are de¬ 
rived 


From the second root, 
amav, are derived 


From the third root 
amat, are derive-f 


Ind. ]^e$. 

.— imperf. 

— jftrf. 

8^j. jpret. 

'— — tmperf. 
Jmperai. pre$. 
• fui. 

Inf. pre$. 
Part. pres. 

— fut. 
Gerund. 


Active. 

amo, 

amdiam, 

amdAo, 

amem, 

amdrem, 

amd, 

amdto, 

amdre, 

amaTU, 

amaruft. 


Passive. 

amor. 

amdfiar. 

amdAor. 

amer. 

amdrer. 

amdre. 

amator. 

amdn. 

smandus. 


Active. Passive. 

Ind. perf. amavt, amat?/a sum, etc. 
— plup. amav^ram, amatjw eram, etc. 

- fut. perf. amav^ro, amatus ero, etc. 

Subj. perf. amav^rtm, amat«s sim, etc. 

- plup. amavwsew, amat«« essem, etc 

Inf. perf. amavisse, amattM esse, etc. 

From the third root. 

Inf. fut. amatdrnis esse, amat«m irL 
Part. fut. amatuT^. 

- perf. amattM. 

Form. sup. amatMTn. Lot. sup. amitu. 


§ 1^7. SECOND CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


Pres. Ind. 
Pres. Inf. 
Perf. Ind. 
Supine. 


mo'-ne-o. 

mo-ne'-re. 

mon'-u-i. 

’Hon'-i-tjun. 


Pres. Ind. 
Pres. Inf. 
Perf. Part. 


mo'-ne-or. 

mo-ne'-ri. 

mon'-i-tus. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 


i advise. 

Sing, mo'-ne-o, 
mo'-nes, 
mo'-net; 

Flur. mo-ne'-mus, 
mo-ne'-tis, 
mo'-nent. 


/ am advised. 

Sing, mo'-ne-or, 

mo-ne'-ris or -re, 
mo-ne'-tur; 

Plur. mo-ne'-mur, 
mo-nem'-i-ni, 
mo-nen'-tur. 


I was advising. 

S. mo-ne'-bam, 
mo-ne'-bas, 
mo-ne'-bat; 

P. mon-e-b.a'-miis, 
m6n-e-ba'-tis, 
m6-ne'-bant. 


Imperfect. 

I was advised. 

S. mo-ne'-bar, 

mon-e-ba'-rls or -re, 
mon-e-ba'-tur; 

P. mon-e-ba'-mur, 
mon-e-bam'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ban'-tur. 








I 157 


VERBS.-SECOND CONJUGATION 


m 


ACTIVE. 

T shall or vnll advise, 

S. Tiio-ne'-bo, 
mo-ne'-bis, 
mo-ne'-bit; 

P. mo-neb'-i-mus, 
mo-neb'-i-tis, 
mo-ne'-bunt. 


PASSIVE. 

Future. 

I shall or mil he advu ed. 

S. mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-nob'-e-ris or -re, 
mo-neb'-i-tur; 

P. mo-neb'-i-mur, 
mon-e-bim'-i-nl, 
mon-e-bun'-tur. 


Perfect. 


T adimed or have advised. 

S. mon'-u-i, 
mon-u-is'-ti, 
mon'-u-it; 

P. mb-nu'-i-mus, 
luon-u-is'-tis, 
mon-u-e'-runt or -r§. 


I was or have been advised. 

S. mon'-i-tus sum or fu'-i, 
mon'-i-tus es or fu-is'-ti, 
mon'-i-tus est or fu'-it; 

P. mon'-I-ti su'-mus or fu'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -ri 


I had advised. 


Pluperfect 

I had been advised. 


S. mo-nu'-e-ram, 
mo-nu'-e-r^, 
mo-nu'-e-rat; 

P. m6n-u-6-ra'-mus, 
mon-u-^-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rant 


S. mon'-i-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, 
mon'-i-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat; 

P. mon'i-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant 


I shall have advised. 

b. mo-nu -e-ro, 
mo-nu'-e-rTs, 
mo-nu'-e-rit; 

P. mon-u-er'-f-mus, 
mon-u-er'-i-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


Future Perfect. 

I shall have been advised. 

S. mon -i-tus e -ro or fu -e-ro, 
mon -i-tus e -ns or tu -e-ns, 
mon'-i-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit; 

P. mon'-i-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-I-miis 
mon'-i-ti er'-i-tis oi fu-er'-l-tia, 
mon'-i-ti e'-runt or lu'-e-rint 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


I may or can advise. 

S. mo'-ne-am, 
mo'-ne-as, 
m5'-ne-at; 

P. mo-ne-a'-mus, 
m5-ne-a'-tis, 
m5'-ne-ant. 

10 


Present. 

' I may or can be advised. 

I S. mo'-ne-^,' 

mo-ne-a'-ris or -re, 
mo-ne-a'-tur; 

P. mo-ne-a'-mur, 
mo-ne-am'-i-ni, 
mo-ne-an'-tur. 







110 


VERBS.-SECOND CONJUGATION. 


§157 


ACTxVE. 


I might, could, would, or should 
advise. 

S. mo-ne'-rem, 
mo-ne'-res, 
mo-ne'-ret; 

P. mon-e-re'-mus, 
mon-e-re'-tis, 
mo-ne'-rent. 


PASSIVE 

Imperfect. 

I might, could, would, or shi uld 
he advised. 

S. mo-ne'-rer, 

mon-e-re'-ris or -re, 
mon-e-re'-tur; 

P. mon-e-re'-mur, 
mon-e-rem'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ren'-tur. 


Z may have advised. 

S. mo-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nii'-e-rfs, 
mo-nu'-e-f it; 

P. moD-u-er'-I-mus, 
mon-u-^r'-i-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


Perfect. ' 

I may have been advised. 

S. mon'-i-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, 
mon'-i-tus sis or fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus sit or fu'-e-rit; 

P. mon'-i-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-l-mus, 
mon'-i-ti si'-tis or fu-^r'-i-tis, 
mon'-i-ti sint or fu'-e-rint. 


[ might, could, would, or 
should have advised. 

S. raon-u-is'-sem, 
mon-u-is'-ses, 
mon-u-is'-set; 

P. mon-u-is-se'-mus, 
mon-u-is-se'-tis, 
mon-u-is'-sent. 


Pluperfect. 

I might, could, would, or should have 
been advised. 

S. mon'-i-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, 
mon'-i-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, 
mon'-i-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set; 

P. mon'-i-ti es-se'-mus or fu-is-se'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti es-se'-tis or fu-is-se'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pr/*s. S. mo'-ne, advise thou; 

P. mo-ne'-t^, advise ye. 

P'ut. S. mo-ne'-to, thou shall ad¬ 
vise, 

mo-ne'-to, he shall advise; 

P. mon-e-to'-te, ye shall ad¬ 
vise, 

mo-nen'-to, they shall ad¬ 
vise. 


Pres, mo-ne'-re, to advise. 

Per/, mon-u-is'-se, to have advised. 
Fut. mon-i-tu'-rus es'-se, io be 
about to advise. 


Pres. S. mo-ne'-re, be thou advised, 
P. m6-nem'-i-ni, be ye ad¬ 
vised. 

Fut. S. mo-ne'-tor, thou shall be 
advised, 

mo-ne'-tor, he shall he 
advised; 

P. (mon-e-bim'-i-ni, ye shall 

be advised,') 

mo-nen'-tor, they shall be 
advised. 

Pres, mo-ne'-ri, to be advis'^d. 
Per/, mon'-i-tus es'-se or fu-is'-ee, 
to have been advised. 

Fut. mbn'-i-tum i'-ri, to he ahovi 
to be advised. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 







H58. 


VERBS.-THIRD CONJUGATION, 


111 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres, mo'-nens, advising. P^rf. mon'-l-tus, advised. 

Tut. mon-i-tu'-rus, about to advise. Fut. mo-nen'-dus, to be advised* 

GERUND. 

G. mo-nen'-di, of advising^ 

D. mo-nen'-do, etc. 

Ac. mo-nen'-dum, 

Ab. mo-nen'-do. 


SUPINES. 

Former. mon'-I-tum, to advise. I Latter, mon'-i-tu, to be advised. 


Formation op the Tenses. 


from the first root, mon, are de¬ 
rived, 

Active. Passive. 
moneo, moneor. 
m ouebam^monebar. 
morxebo, monebor. 
moneam, monear. 

—^ imperf. monerewi, monerer. 
Imperat. pres, mone, monere. 

-- fut. moneto, monetor. 

Inf. pres. mon^e, monm. 
Part. pres. moneTW, 

- fut. mouendus. 

UerhKM. monenJt. 


Ind. j^es. 

— imperf. 

— fut. 
Subj. ^es. 


From the second root. From the third root, 
monu^ are derived, monit, are derived, 
Active. Passive. 

Ind. perf. monui^ monittw sum, etc. 

- plup. moxmeram, monitiw eram, etc. 

- fut. perf . monu^ro, monltu« ero, etc. 
Suhj. perf. monu^rim, monIt?« sim, etc. 

- plup. monuissem, monittw es3om,eto. 

Inf. perj. monuisse, monitiis esse, etc 

From the third root. 

Inf. fut. monituTTw esse, monltum in. 
Part. fut. monituras, 

- P^vf- monIttM. 

Form. Sup. monitwm. Lat. Sup. moultu. 


§ 158. THIRD CONJUGATION. 


PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


Pres. Ind. re'-^o. 
Pres. Inf. reg-e-r6. 
Perf. Ind. rex'-i. 
Supine. rec'-tum. 


Pres. Ind. 
Pres. Inf. 
Perf. Part. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 


re -gor. 

re'-gi. 

rec'-tus. 


I rule. 

Sing, re'-go, 
re'-gis, 
re'-pt; ^ 
Vlur. reg-i-mus, 
re^'-i-tis, 
re-gunt 


I am ruled. 

Sing, re'-gor, 

rcg'-e-rl8 or -rS, 
reg'-i-tur; 

P'.ur. reg'-i-mur, 
re-gim'-I-ni, 
re-gun'-tur. 









132 


VERBS.—THIRD CONJUGATION. 


M58 


ACTIVE. 

I was ruling^ 

S. re-ge'-bam, 
re-ge'-bas, 
re-ge'-bat; 

P. reg-e-ba'-mus, 
reg-e-ba'-tis, 
re-ge'-bant. 


I shall or will rule. 

S. re'-gam, 
re'-ges, 
re'-get; 

P. re-ge'-mufl, 
r^ge'-tis, 
re'-gent 


PASSIVE. 

Imperfect. 

I was ruled. 

S. re-ge'-bar, 

reg-e-ba'-ris or -re, 
reg-e-ba'-tur; 

P. reg-e-ba'-mur, 
reg-e-bam'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ban'-tur. 

Future. 

I shall or tcill he ruled. 

S. re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris or -re, 
re-ge'-tur; 

P. re-ge'-mur, 
re-gem'-i-ni, 
re-gen'-tur. 

Perfect. 


I ruled or have ruled. 

S. rex'-i, 
rex-is'-ti, 
rex'-it; 

P. rex'-I-miis, 
rex-is'-Gs, 
rex-e'-ruxt or -re. 


/ ims or have been ruled. 

S. rec'-tus sum or fu'-i, 
rec'-tus es or fu-is'-ti, 
rec'-tiis est or fu'-it; 

P. rec'-ti su'-mus or fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re 


I had ruled. 

S. rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat; 

P. rex-e-ra'-mus 
rex-e-ra'-tis, 
rex'-e-rant 


Pluperfect. 

I had been ruled. 

S. rec'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, 
rec'-tus e'-ras or fu'-e-ras, 
rec'-tus e'-rat or fu'-e-rat; 

P. rec'-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-mu*. 
rec'-ti e-ra'-tis or fu-e-ra'-tis, 
rec'-ti e'-rant or fu'-^rant. 


/ shall have ruled 

S. rex'-e-r5, 
rex'-^rTs, 
rex'-e-nt; 

P. rex-er'-l-mus, 
rex-er'-i-tis, 
rex'-e-rint 


Future Perfect 

I I shall have been ruled. 

, S. rec'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-rS, 

rec'-tus e'-ris or fu'-e-r!s, 

rec'-tus e'-nt or fu'-e-rit; 

P. rec'-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-f-mus, 
rec'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-l-tis, 
rec'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint 






§158. 


VERBS.-THIRD CONJUGATION. 


118 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present 


T may or can rule. 
S. re'-jram, 

re'-g^, 

re'-gat; 

P. re-ga'-mua, 
re-ga'-tis, 
re'-gant 


I may or can he ruled 
S. re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris or -re, 
re-ga'-tur; 

P. re-ga'-mur, 
re-gam'-i-ni, 
re-gan'-tiir. 


Imperfect 


I mighty could, would, or should 
rule. 


I might, could, would, or should 
be ruled. 


S. reg'-e-rem, 
reg'-e-res, 
reg'-e-ret; 

P. reg-e-re'-mus, 
reg-e-re'-tis, 
reg'-^rent 


S. reg'-e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-rls or -re, 
reg-e-re'-tur; 

P. reg-e-re'-mur, 
reg-e-rem'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ren'-tur. 


Perfect 


I may have ruled. 

S. rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit; 

P. rex-#r'-i-mus, 
rex-€r'-!-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


7 might, could, would, or 
should have ruled. 

S. rex-is'-sem, 
rex-is'-ses, 
rex-is'-set; 

P. rex-is-se'-miis, 
rex-is-se'-tis, 
rex-is'-sent 


I may have been ruled. 

S. rec'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, 
rec'-tus sis or fu'-e-r!s, 
rec'-tus sit or fu'-e-rit; 

P. rec'-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-f-mus, 
rec'-ti si'-tis or fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint 

Pluperfect 

I might, could, rvould, or should have 
been ruled. 

S. rec'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, 
rec'-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set; 

P. rec'-ti es-se'-niiis or fu-is-se'-mua, 
rec'-ti es-se'-tis or fu-is-se'-tis, 
rec'-ti es'-sent or fu-is -sent. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. S. re'-ge, rule thou ; 

P. rcg'-i-te, rule ye. 

Fut. S. rcg'-i-td, thoti shall rule, 
reg'-i-to, he shall rule ; 

P. reg-i-to'-te, ye shall rule, 
r^gun' to, they shall rule. 
in* 


Pres. S. reg'-e-re, he thou ruled; 

P. re-gim'-i-ni, he ye ruled. 
Fut. S. TCg'-i-tor, thou shall be ruled^ 
reg'-i-tor, he shall be ruled, 
P. (re-gim'-i-ni, ye shall, etc.) 
re-gun'-ior, they shall, etc. 








£14 


VERBS.-THIRD CONJUGATION. 


§169. 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


mriNITIVE MOOD.- 


Pres, reg'-e-re, to rule. 

Per/, rex-is'-se, to have ruled. 

Put. rec-tu'-rus es'-se, to be about 
to rule. 


Pres, re'-gi, to be ruled. 

Perf. rec'-tus es'-se or fu-is'-sC, tA 
have been ruled. 

Fut. rec'-tmn i'-ri, to be about to 
be ruled. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres, re'-gens, ruling. I Perf. rec'-tus, ruled. 

Fut. rec-tu-rus, about to rule. \ Fut. r^-gen'-dus, to be ruled. 

GERUND. 

G. rfi-gen'-di, of ruling. 

D. re-gen'-d§, etc. 

Ac. re-gen'-dum, 

Ab. re-gen'-do. 

SUPINES. 

Former, rec'-tum, to rule. \ Latter, rec'-tu, to be ruled. 


Formation of the Tenses. 


From the first root, reg, are de¬ 
rived, 

Active. Passive. 
Ind. pres. rego. regor. 

<— imperf. regeoam, regebar. 
— fut. regoOT, regar. 
Stiij. pres. regam, regar. 

■ - imperf. regirem. reg^rer. 

Imperai. pres, rege, reg^re. 

-- fut. reglto, regitor 

Jnf. jrres. regire, regi. 
Part. pres. regens, 

- - fut. regendus. 

Gcruii^. xegendi. 


From the second root, From the third roof, 
rex, are derived, rect. are derived, 

Active. Passive. 

Ind. perf. rexi, rectus sum, etc. 

— plup. rexeram, recttis eram, etc 

— fut. perf. rexiro, rectus ero, etc. 

Sulj. perf. rexirim, recttis sim, etc. 

- plup. rexissem, rectiw essem, eta 

Inf. perf. rexisse. recti« esse, etc. 

From the third root. 

Inf. fut. recturnM esse, rectum iri. 

Part. fut. recturus. 

- 2^er/". rectiw. 

Form. Sup. rectum. Lat. Sup. rectu. 


§159. Verbs in 10 of the Third Conjugation. 

Verbs in lo of the third conjugation, in tenses formed from the 
first root, have, as connecting vowels, ^a, ie, io, or iu, wherever 
the same occur in the fourth conjugation; but where they have 
only a single connecting vowel, it is the same which character* 
izes other verbs of the third conjugation. They ars all conju¬ 
gated like cdpio. 


.1 






§159. 


VERBS.-THIRD CONJUGATION. 


115 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 


Pres. Tnd. ca'-pi-S, to take. 
Pres. Inf. cap'-e-re. 

Per/. Lid. ce-pi. 

Supine. cap'-tum. 


Pres. Ind. ca'-pi-or, to he taken. 
Pres. Inf. ca'-pi. 

Perf. Part, cap-tsiis. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present 

S. ca'-pi-5, 
ca'-pis, 
ca'-pit; 

P. cap -i-mus, 
cap'-I-tis, 
ca -pi-unt 

Imperfect 

S. cS-pi-e'-bam, 
ca-pi-e'-ba^, 
cE-pi-e'-bat; 

P. ca-pi-e-ba'-mus, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, 
ca-pi-e'-bant 

Future. 


S. ca'-pi-br, 

cap'-e-ris or -re, 
cap'-I-tur; 

P. c&p'-I-mur, 
ca-pim'-l-ni, 
c^-pi-un'-tur. 


S. ca-pi-e'-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-ris or -rb, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tiir; 

P. ca-pi-e-ba'-mur, 
ca-pi-e-bam'-I-ni, 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


S. ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-es, 
ca'-pi-et; 

P. ca-pi-e'-mus, 
ca-pi-e'-tis, 
ca'-pi-ent 


S. ca'-pi-5r, 

ca-pi-e'-ris or -r6, 
ca-pi-e'-tur; 

P. ca-pi-e'-mur, 
ca-pi-em'-I-ni, 
ca-pi-en'-tur. 


The parts formed from the second and third roots being entirely 
regular, only a synopsis of them is given. 


Perf. ce'-pi. 

Plup. cep'-b-ram. 

Put ptf. cep'-e-ro. 


Perf. cap'-tus sum or fu'-i. 

Plup. cap'-tus 6'-rani or fu'-e-ram. 

Fut. perf. cap'-tus 6'-ro or fu'-b-r5. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present 


S. ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at; 

P. ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 


S. ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a'-ris or -re, 
ca-pi-a'-tur; 

P. ca-pi-a'-mur, 
cS-pi-^'-l-ni, 








116 


VERBS.—FOURTH CONJUGATION 


. § 160. 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


Imperfect. 


S. cap'-6-rem, 
cap'-6-res, 
cap'-e-ret; 

P, cap-e-re'-mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cup'-e-rent. 


S. cap'-e-r6r, 

cap-e-re'-ris or -r6> 
cap-€-re'-tur; 

P. cap-e-re'-mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-€-ren'-tur. 


Per/. cep'-€-rim. 
Plup. ce-pis'-sem. 


Per/, cap'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim. 
PLup. cap'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. 2. S. ca'-p§; P. 2. cSp'-i-te. 
Put. 2. cap -I-to, cap-i-to'-te, 

--8. c^p'-i-t(5; c^-pi-un'-tS. 


S. cap'-e-re; P. ca-pim'-I-ni. 
cap'-i-tor, (ca-pl-em'-l-ni,) 
cap'-I-tor; ca-pi-un'-tor. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Pres. c2p'-e-re. 

Per/, ce-pis'-se. 

FiU. cap-tti'-rus es'-se. 


Pres, ca'-pi. 

Per/, cap'-tus es'-se or fi-is' sS 
P^'ut. cap'-tum i'-ri. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres. cS'-pi-ens. I Per/, cap'-tus. 

Fut. cap-tu'-rus. | Fut. ca-pi-en'-dus. 


GERUND. 

G. ca-pi-en'-di, etc. 
SUPINES. 


Former, cap'-tum. | Latter, cap'-tu. 


§ 160. FOURTH CONJUGAllON. 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Pres. Tnd. au'-<li-o. 

Pres. Inf. au-di'-re. 

Per/. Ind. au-di' -vL 
Supine. au-di'-tum, 


Pres. Ind. au'-di-5r. 
Pres. Inf. au-di'-ri. 
Per/. Part, au-di'-tus. 






§160. 


VERBS.—FOURTH CONJUGATION. 


117 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 


I hear. 

S. au'-(li-5, 
au'-(lis, 
au'dit; 

P. au-di'-mus, 
au'-di'-tis, 
au'-di-unt 


Preseat 

lam heard. 

S. au'-di-dr, 

au-<ir-rls or -r§, 
au-<li'-tur; 

P. au-di'-mur, 

au-di-un'-tur. 


/ was hearing. 

S. au-di-e'-bam, 
au-di-e'-baa, 
au-di-e'-bat; 

P. au-di-e-ba'-mus, 
au-<li-e-ba'-ti3, 
au-di-e -Dant 


Imperfect 

I was heard. 

S. au-dl-e'-b^, 

au-dl-e-ba'-rls or -r6, 
au-di-e-V)a'-tur; 

P. auHli-e-ba'-miir^ 
au-<il-e-bam'-i-ni, 
au-di-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


I shall or will hear. 

S. au'-<li-am, 
au'-<li-es, 
au'-<li-et; 

P. au-di-e'-mus, 
au-di-e'-tis, 
au'-di-ent 


I shall or will he heard. 

S. au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-rls or -r6, 
au-di-e'-tur; 

P. au-di-e'-mur, 
au-di-em'-i-ni, 
au-di-en'-tur. 


[ heard or have heard. 
S. au-di'-vi, 
au-<li-vis'-ti, 
au-di'-vit; 

P. au-<liv'-i-mus, 
au-di-vis'-tis, 
au-di-ve'-runt or -re. 


Perfect 

I have been or was heard. 

S. au-di'-tus sum or fu'-i, 
au-di'-tus es or fu-is'-ti, 
au-di'-tus est or fu'-it; 

P. au-di'-ti su'-mus or fu'-i-mus, 
au-di'-ti es'-tis or fu-is'-tis, 
au-di'-ti sunt, fu-e'-runt or -re. 


/ had heard. 

S. au-div'-e-ram, 
au-div'-e-ras, 
au-div'-e-rat; 
r. au-<liv-e-ra'-mus, 
au-div-e-ra'-tis, 
au-div'-e-rant. 


Pluperfect. 

I had been Skeard. 

S. au-di'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, 
au-di'-tus e'-r^ or fu'-e-r^, 
au-di'-tus e'-rfit or fu'-e-rat: 

P. au-di'-ti e-ra'-mus or fu-e-ra'-mus, 
au-di'-ti e-ra'-tls or fu-e-ra'-tis, 
au-di'-ti e'-rant or fu'-e-rant 







118 


VERBS.-FOURTH CONJUGATION. 


§160 


ACTIVE. 

r shall have heard. 

S. au-(liv -e-ro, 
au-(liv'-e-ns, 
au-div'-e-rit; 

P, au-di-ver'-I-mus, 
au-di-ver'-I-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


PASSIVE 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have been heard. 

S. au-di'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-r*?, 

au-di'-tus e'-ris or fu'-e-r!s, 

au-di'-tus e'-rit or fu'-e-rit; 

P. au-di'-ti er'-i-mus or fu-er'-!-mu9, 
au-di'-ti er'-i-tis or fu-er'-I-tis, 
au-di'-ti e'-runt or fu'-e-rint 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


I may or can hear. 

S. au'-di-am, 
au'-di-as, 
au'-di-at; 

P. au-di-a'-mus, 
au-di-a'-tls, 
au'-di-ant. 


Present. 

I may or can he heard. 

S. au'-di-ar, 

au-di-a'-ris or -re, 
au-di-a'-tur; 

P. au-di-a'-mur, 
au-di-am'-I-ni, 
au-di-an'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


1 might, could, would, or should 
hear. 

S. au-di'-rem, 
au-di'-res, 
au-di'-ret; 

P. au-di-re'-mus, 
au-di-re'-tis, 
au-di'-rent. 


I might, could, would, or should 
be heard. 

S. au-di'-rer, 

au-<li-re'-ris or -re, 
au-di-re'-tur; 

P. au-di-re'-mur, 
au-di-rem'-i-ni, 
au-di-ren'-tur. 


I may have heard. 

S. au-div'-e-rim, 
au-<liv'-e-ri8, 
au-div'-e-rit; 

P. au-<li-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-!-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


Perfect. 

I may have been heard. 

S. au-di'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, 
au-di'-tus sis or fu'-e-r!s, 
au-di'-tus sit or fu'-e-rit; 

P. au-di'-ti si'-mus or fu-er'-T-mua, 
au-di'-ti si'-tis or fu-er'-i-tis, 
au-di'-ti sint or fu'-e-rint. 


I might, could, would, or 
should have heard. 

S. au-<li-\ns'-sem, 
au-di-vds'-scs, 
au-di-vis'-set; 

P. au-di-vis-se'-mus, 
au-di-vis-se'-tis, 
au-di-vis'-sent 


Pluperfect. 

I might, could, wotdd, or should 
have been heard. 

S. au-di'-tus es'-sem or fu-is-sem, 
au-di'-tus es'-ses or fu-is'-ses, 
au-di'-tus es'-set or fu-is'-set; 

P. au-di'-ti es-se'-mus or fu-is-se'-mus 
au-di'-ti es-se'-tis or fu-is-se'-tls, 
au-di'-ti es'-sent or fu-is'-sent 







VERBS.-FOURTH CONJUQ A.TION. 


119 


§160 

ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. S. au'-dl, hear thju; 

P. au-(li'-te, hear ye. 

FtU. JS. au-<ii'-to, thou shall hear, 
au-di'-to, he shall hear ; 

P. au-di-to'-t6, ye shall hear, 
au-di-un'-to, they shall 
hear. 


Pres. S. au-dl'-re, 1 1 th: m heard, 
P. au-dim'-i-ni, be ye heard. 

Fut. S. au-di'-tor, thou shall be 
heard, 

au-di'-tor, he shall be 
heard ; 

P. (au-di-em'-i-ni, ye shall 
be heard,') 

au-di-un'-tor, they shall 
be heard. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


pres, au-di'-re, to hear. 

Per/, au-di-vis'-se, to have heard. 
Fut. au-di-tu'-rus es-se, to be 
about to hear. 


Pres, au-di'-ri, to be heard. 

Perf. au-di'-tus es'-se or fu-is'- 
se, to have been heard. 
Fut. au-di'-tum i'-ri, to be about 
to be heard. 


PARTICIPLES. 

pres, au'-di-ens, hearing. 1 Perf. au-di'-tus, heard. 

Fut. au-di-tu'-rus, about to hear. I P'ut. au-di-en'-dus, to be heard. 


GERUND. 

G. au-di-en'-di, of hearing. 
D. au-di-en'-do, etc. 

Ac. au-di-en'-dum, 

Ab. au-di-en'-do. 


SUPIN6S. 

Former, au-di'-tum, to hear. | Latter, au-di'-tu, to be heard. 


Formation of the Tenses. 


From the first root, avd, are de¬ 
rived 

Active. Passive. 
Tnd. j^es. audio, audior. 

—• impef. &ndiebam, audiebar. 

.— fut. audiam, audiar. 
Bubj. pres. audirtTW, audior. 

- iniperf. audirem, audJrer. 

Imperat. pres, audi, audh'e. 

-- fut. audiio, auditor. 

Inf pres. audire, audiri. 
Part. pres. audiefw, 

- fui. avAxendus. 

Gssrund. audwndi. 


From the second root. From the third root, 
audio, are derived, audit, are derived, 
Active. Passive. 

Ind. perf. audivi, auditw* sum, eta 
— plup. audiveroTO, audit«« eram, etc 
— fut. perf. audivero, auditiw ero, etc. 
Subj. perf. audiverim, audlt?« sim, etc. 

- plup. audivisse?/^, aud!t?isessem,et.Q 

Inf. perf. audivisse, audit?i« esse, etc. 

From the third root, 

Inf. fut. auditunw esse, auditttwi iri. 
Pari. fut. auditu7‘«is. 

- ^rf. auditiw. 

Foi'jn. sup auditem LaU sup. audltu 







120 


DEPONENT VERBS. 


§161 


DEPONENT VERBS. 

§ tOfl. Deponent verbs are conjugated like the passive 
voice, and have also all the partici})les and particij)ial formations 
of the active voice. Neuter depor.ent verbs, however, want the 
future passive participle, except that the neuter hi dam is some¬ 
times used impersonally. See § 184, 3. 

The following is an example of an active deponent verb of the first 
conjugation:— 

PRINCIPAL PARTS. 

Mi'-ror, mi-ra-ri, mi-ra'-tus, to admire. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. mi'-ror, mi-ra'-ris, etc. 

Imperf. mi-ra'-bar, etc. 

Fut. mi-ra'-bor, 

Perf. mi-ra'-tus sum or fu'-i, 

JHup. mi-ra'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram, 

Fut. Perf. mi-ra'-tus e'-ro or fu'-e-ro, 


I admire^ etc. 

I ivas admiring. 

I shall admire. 

J have admired. 

I had admired. 

I shall have admired. 


“SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Pres. mi'-rer, mi-re-rls, etc. I may admire, etc. 

Imperf. mi-ra'-rer, / would admire. 

Perf mi-ra'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim, I may have admired. 

Plup. mi-ra'-tus es'-sem or fu-is'-sem, I would have admired. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Pres. S. mi-ra'-re, admire thou, 

Fut. S. mi-ra'-tor, thou shalt admire, 
mi-ra'-tor, he shall admire; 


P. mi-ram'-i-ni, admire ye. 

P. (mir-a-bim'-i-ni, ye shall, etc. 
mi-ran'-tor, they shall, etc. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. mi-ra'-ri, to admire. 

Perf mi-ra'-tus es'-se or fu-is'-se, to have admired. 

Fut. Act. mir-a-tu'-rus es'-se, to he about to admire, 

rlit. Pass, mi-ra'-tum i'-ri, to he about to be admired. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres. mi'-rans, admiring. 

Perf. mi-ra'-tus, having admired. 

Fut. Act. mir-a-tu'-rus, about to admire. 

Fut. Pass, mi-ran'-dus, to he admired. 

GERUND. 

G. mi-ran'-di, of adminng, etc. 

SUPINES. 

Farmer mi-rS'-tum, to admire. \ Latter, mi-ra'-tu, to he admired. 



§ 162. VERBS.-REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 


121 


Kemares on the Conjugations. 

Of the Tenses formed from the First Boot 

§ 1. A few words in the present subjunctive of the first and 

third conjugations, in the earlier writers and in the poets, end in m, w, it, etc. 
Bs, edim, mis, edit, edlmus; comidim, cennedis, coinidint; for edam, etc. comi- 
dim, etc.; duirn, duis, duit, duint; KnUi perdidm, perduis, perduit, perduint ; foi 
rfet/j, etc. perdam, etc. from old forms duo and perduo, for do and perdo: so ere- 
duis, creduit, and also creduam, creduos, creduat, for credam, etc. from the old 
form creduo, for credo. The form in im, etc. was retained as the regular form 
in and velim, from sum and wlo, and in their compounds. 

2. The imperfect indicative in the foiirth conjugation, sometimes, especially 
in the more ancient writers, ends in ibam and ibar, for iebam and iebar, and 
the future in Ibo and ibor, for iam and tar; as, vestlbat, Y\rg.,largibar, Propert. 
for vestiibat, laryiebar; scibo, opperibor, for sciam, opperiar. Ibam and ibo were 
retained as the regular forms of eo, queo, and nequeo. Of. § 182. 

3. The termination re, in the second person sin^ar of the passive voice, is 
rare in tlie present, but common in the other simple tenses. 

4. The imperatives of dico, duco,fdcio, Bxid fero, are usually writteil die, due. 
fac^ and fer; in like manner their compounds, except those compounds or 
facto which change a into i; as, effice, confice; but calfdee also is foimd in 
Cicero; and in old writers dice, edtice, aadlce, indice, duce, abduce, reduce, traduce. 
and fdee. Inger for ingSre is rare. Scio has not sci, but its place is supplied 
by sclto, and scitote is preferred to scite. 

6. In the imperative future of the passive voice, but especially of deponents, 
early writers and their imitators sometimes used the active instead of the pas¬ 
sive form; as, arbitrdto, amplexdto, utito, nitito; for arbitrator, etc.; and cef»- 
senlo, utunto, tuento, etc. for censentor, etc.—In the second and third persons 
singular occur, also, fonns in -^lino; as, hortamlno, veremino, fruimino ; foi 
hortdtor, etc. 

6. The syllable er was often added to the present infinitive passive by eariy 
writers and especially by the poets; as, amarier for amdri, dicier for diet. 

Of the Tenses formed from the Second Root. 

7. (a.) When the second root ends in v, a syncopation and contraction often 
occur in the tenses formed from it, by omitting v, and sinking the first vowel 
of the termination in the final vowel of the root, when followed, in the fourth 
conjugation, by s, and in the other conjugstiens, bysorr; as, audissem for 
au<liv\ssem, amasti for amayisti, implerunt for impieyerunt, ndram and nosse for 
noy^ram and Twvisse. 

(6.) When the second root ends in iv, v is often omitted without contraction; 
aa, audiiro for audiyero ; audiisse for dudiyisse. 

(c ) When this root ends in s or X, especially in the third conjugation, the 
syllables is, iss, and sis, are sometimes omitted in the termination of tenses de¬ 
rived from it; as, evasti for evasisti, extinxti for extinxx&ti, divisse for divisisse; 
eztinxem for extinxissem^ surrexe for s?<rrexisse ; qccestis for accessistis, justi for 
jussisti; dixti for dixisti. So faxem for (facsissem, i. e .) fecissem. 

(d.) In the perfect of the first, second, and fourth conjugations, a syncope 
sometimes occurs in the last syllable of the root and the following syllable of 
the termination, especially in the third person singular; as, fumdt, audit, cdpil; 
for fumdvit, audivit, cupivit. So, also, but rarely, in the first person; as, sepHi, 
erMrrdmus; for sepelivi, enarrdvimus. 

8. In the third person plural of the perfect indicative active, the form in ert 
is less common than that in erunt, especially in prose. 

11 


122 


VERBS.—REMARKS ON THE CONJUGATIONS. % 1€2. 


9. Ancient forms of a future perfect in so, a perfect and pluperfect subjuno- 

live in sim and sem, and a perfect infinitive in se sometimes occur. They may, 
In general, be fonned bv adding these terminations to the second roct of the 
verb; recepso, emisshn, misbn from the obsolete perfect, fiom mideo, 

confexim and promissem: t/ims6»and proinisse. lUit when the root ends in x, 
and frequentlv wlien it ends in s, only o, hn, em, and e, etc. are added; as, 
jttsso, dixis ; Intellexes, percepset; surr-exe, su7)^e. V, at the ei.d of the root, iu 
the first conjugation, is changed into s; as, let'asso, htassim. U. at the end of 
tbs root, in the second conjugation, is changed into es; as,h(ibesso, licessit. 
Sometimes the vowel of the present is retained in these forms, though charged 
in the other parts derivedfrom the second root; as, capso, faxo (facsoj, 
faxim (facsimj. 

Notk. Faxo expresses determination, " I will,’ or, ‘ I am resolved, to make^ 
cause,’ etc. The subjunctive faxit, etc., expresses a solemn wish; as, dii 
imrmrtdles faxint. Ausim, etc. express doubt or hesitation, ‘ I might ven¬ 
ture,’ etc. The perfect in sim is used also in connection with the present sub* 
junctive; as, quaso uti tu calamitdtes prohibessis, defendas, averruncesque. Cato. 

10. In the ancient Latin a few examples occur of a future passive of simi¬ 
lar form; as, tui'bassiiur, jussitur, instead of turbdtum fmrit, and jussus fvJi- 
rit. —A future infinitive active in sere is also found, in the first conjugation, 
which is formed by adding that termination to the second root, changing, as 
before, v into s; as, expugnassere, impetrassere, for expugnatHrum esse, etc. 


Of the Tenses formed from the Third Root. 

11. The supine in um, though called one of the principal parts of the verb, 
belongs in fact to very few verbs, the whole number which have this supine 
not amounting to three hundred. The part called in dictionaries the supine 
in um must therefore, in most cases, be considered as the neuter gender of the 
perfect participle. 

12. In the compound tenses of the indicative and subjunctive moods, the 
participle is always in the nominative case, but it is used in both numbers, and 
m all genders, to correspond with the number and gender of the subject of the 
verb; as, amdtus, -a, -um, est; amdti, -or, -a, sunt, etc. 

(1.) Fui, fu^ram, fuerim, fuissem, and fuisse, are seldom used in the com- 
^H^und tenses of deponent verbs, and not so often as srim, etc., in those of cthei 
verbs, but when used they have generally the same sense. It is to be remark¬ 
ed, however, that fid with the perfect participle usually denotes that which 
kas been, but which no longer exists. In the pluperfect subjunctive, fdrem, 
etc., for essem, etc., are sometimes found. 

(2.) But as the perfect participle may be used in the sense of an adjective, 
expressing a permanent state, (see § 162, 22), if then connected with the tenses 
of sum its meaning is different from that of the participle in the same connec¬ 
tion; epistdla scidjHa est, when scripta is a participle, simiifies, the letter ha^ 
6«en vnitten, but if scripta is an adjective, the meaning of the expression is the 
letter is written, and epistdla scripta fuit, in this case, w’ould signify, the letter 
has been written, or, has existed as a written one, implying that it no longer 
exists. 

13. The participles in the perfect and future infinitive, are used only in the 
nominative and accusative, but in all genders and in both numbers; ks, amdtus, 

-um, esse or fuisse; amdtum, -am, -um, esse or fuisse; amdti, -ce, -a, esse ot 
fuisse ; amdtos, -as, -a, esse or fuisse ; and so of the others. With the hifini- 
nve fuisse, amdtus, etc. are generally to be considered as participial adjectives 

(1.) These participles in combination with esse are sometimes used as inde> 
tlinable; as, cohortes ad me missum facias. Cic. Ad me, mea Terentia, scribis 
te vicum venditurum. Id. 


§162. 


VERBS.-PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS, 


123 


Periphrastic Conjugations, 

14. The parti :iple in rus, joined to the tenses of the verb 
tum^ denotes either intention, or being upon the point of doing 
something. This form of the verb is called the active periphrcU'- 
tic conjugation. 

Remark 1. As the performance of the act depends either on the will of the 
subject, on that of others, or upon circumstances, we may ssy, in English, io 
the first case, ‘ I intend,’ and in the others, ‘ I am to,’ or ‘ 1 am about to ’ (be or 
do any thing). 


Pres. 

Imperf. 

Put. 

Perf. 

Plup. 


Pres. 

Imperf. 

Perf. 

Plup. 


INDICATIVE. 

amatums sum, I am about to love. 


amaturus eram, 
amaturus ero, 
amaturus fui, 


I was about to love. 

I shall be about to love. 

I was or have been about to love. 


amaturus fueram, I had been about to love. 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 

amaturus sim, I may he about to love. 
amaturus essem, I would be about to love. 
amaturus fuerim, I may have been about to love. 
amaturus fuissem, I would have been about to love. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres. amaturus esse, to be about to love. 

Perf. amaturus fuisse, to have been about to love. 

Rem. 2. Fv^ro is scarcely used in connection with the participle in rue. 

Rem. 3. Amaiurus sim and amaturus essem serve also as subjunctives to the 
^ture amdbo. The infinitive amaturus fuisse answers to the English. ‘ I sh mid 
have loved,’ so that in h\’pothetical sentences it supplies the place of an ii £ni- 
tive of the pluperfect subjunctive. 

Rem. 4. In the passive, the fact that an act is about to be performed is ex¬ 
pressed by a longer circumlocution: as, in eo est, or futurum est, ut ejneidla 
tcribdtur, a letter is about to be written. So in eo erat, etc., through all tha 
tousos. 

15. The participle in dus, with the verb sum, expresses neces-' 
sity or propriety; as, amandus sum, I must be loved, or deserve 
to be loved. With the various moods and tenses of sum, it forms 
a passive periphrastic conjugation;—thus : 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres. amandus sum, 

Imperf. amandus eram, 

Put. amandus ero, 

Perf. amandus fui, 

plup. amandus fueram, 

Yut. Perf. amandus fuero. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres. amandus sim, 

Imperf amandus essem, 

Perf. amandus fuerim, 

Plup. amandus fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. amandus esse, 

Perf amandus fuisse. 



124 


VERBS.—RULES OP CONJUGATION. 


§i6a 


Rem. 5. The neuter of the participle in dm with est and the dative of a per 
jon, expresses the necessity 3i performing the action on the part of that person 
R8, mihi scribettdum est I must write, etc., and so through all the tenses. 

Participles. 

16. The following perfect participles of neuter verbs, like those of active 

deponents, are translated by active participles:— coenatus, having supped; pdttis^ 
having drunk; prorwiw, having dined; and sometimes having swera 

So also adultm,.coalltus, conspirdtus^ interituSy occdsus, obsolitus, and cretm. 

For the active meaning of dsns and its compounds, see ^ 183, 1. 

17. (a.) The perfect participles of some deponent verbs have both 
an active and a passive sense; as, adeptus Ubertdtem, having obtain¬ 
ed liberty, or adeptd libertdte^ liberty having been obtained. C£ 
§ 142, 4, (6.) 

So abimiindtusy comitdtus, commentdtus, complexes, confessus, contesfafus, d& 
testdtus, diyndtus, dimensits, effdtus, emensns, ementUus, emeritus, expertus, ex8e-> 
erdtus, interpretdtus, laryitus, machindtm, meditatus, viercdtus, rnetdtus, oblitm 
onindtm, orsus, pactus, partitus, perfunctus, pericUtdtus, pollicitus, populdtmy 
iepopulddis, stipuldtm, testdtus, ultm, venerdlus. 

(b.) The participle in dus, of deponent verbs, is commonly pas¬ 
sive. 

18. The perfect participles of neuter passive verbs have the signi¬ 
fication of the active voice; as, gavisus, having rejoiced. But ausus 
is used both in an active and a passive sense. 

19. The genitive plural of participles in rus is seldom used, ex¬ 
cept that of futunis. Venturdrum is found in Ovid, exiturdrian, trans¬ 
it urdru?n and periturdrwn in Seneca, and inoriturOrum in Augus- 
fine. 

20. In the third and fourth conjugations, the gerund and future 
passive participle (including deponents) sometimes end in undum 
and undus, instead of endum and endus, especially when i precedes; 
as, faciundutn, audiundum, scribundus. Potior has usually potiundus. 

21. Many present and perfect participles are compounded with in, signifying 
not, whose verbs do not admit of such composition; they thus become adjec¬ 
tives; as, insciens, ignorant; impardtm, unprepared. 

22. Participles, when they do not express distinctions of time, become adjeo- 
t.ves, and as such are compared; as, amans, loving; amantun', amantisslmm. 
They sometimes also become substantives; as, pi'ce/ectus, a commander; ati- 
\um, an attempt; commissum, an offence. 

Note. Many words derived from substantives, with the terminations of par- 
ficiples, dtus, itus, and utus, are yet adjectives; as, aldtus, winged; turritm, 
tuixeted, etc. See ^ 128, 7. 


General Rules of Conjugation. 

? 163. 1 Verbs which have a in the first root have it also iu 

the third, even when it is changed in the second ; as, fdcio, factum 
\dbco, habitum. 


S164. 


VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


125 


2. The connecting vowel is often omitted in the second root, and 
in such cases, if v follows, it is changed into u. This happens in moet 
verbs of the second conjugation. 

Remark. Some verbs of the first, second, and third conjugations 
prefix to the second root their initial consonant with the vowel which 
follows it, or with e: as, curro^ cucurri; fallo, fefelli. This prefix is 
called a reduplication. 

Note 1. Sfxnuleo and sto lose s in the second syllable, makingand iftStL 
For the verbs that take a reduplication, see 165, R. 2; 168, N. 2; 171, Exc 1,(4. j 

3. Verbs which want the second root commonly want the third 
root also. 

4. Compound verbs form their second and third roots like the sim¬ 
ple verbs of which they are compounded; as, audio., audlvi, auditum; 
exaudio, exaudlvi, exaudltum. 

Note 2. Some compound verbs, however, are defective, whose simples are 
complete, and some are complete, whose simples are defective. 

Exc. 1. Compound verbs omit the reduplication; but the com¬ 
pounds of do, sto, disco, posco, and some of those of curro, retain it. 

Exc. 2. Verbs which, in composition, change a into e in the first 
root, (see § 189, 1,) retain e in the second and third roots of the com¬ 
pound ; as, scando, scandi, scansum ; descendo, descendi, descensum. 

Exc. 3. (a.) When a, ce, or e, in the first root of the simple verb, 
is changed in the compound into i, (see § 189, 2,) the same is retained 
in the second and third roots, in case the third root of the simple verb ia 
a dissyllable ; as, hdbeo, hdbui, hdbltum; prohibeo, prohlbui, prohibitum. 

(b.) But if the third root is a monosyllable, the second root of the 
compound has usually the same vowel as that of the simple, but 
sometimes changes a or e into i, and the third root has e ; as, fdcio^ 
feci, factum; conflcio, confeci, confectum; teneo, tenui, tentum; retl- 
'leo, retlnui, retentum; rdpio, rdpui, raptum; cbrlpio, abrlpui, abreptum. 

Note 8. The compounds of cddo, dgo, frango, pango, and tango, retain a 
In the third root. See ^ 172. 

Exc. 4. The compounds of pdrio, (Sre), and some of the compounds of (b 
ind dido, are of different conjugations from their simple verbs. See do, citdo and 
pdrio in 166 and 172. 

A few other exceptions will be noticed in the following lists. 


Formation op Second and Third Roots. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. 

§ 104. In regular verbs of this conjugation, the second root 
i'Dds in nv, and the third in at; as, amo, amavi, amatMwi. 

The following list contains such regular verbs of this conjugation 
as are of most frequent occurrence. 

11 * 


t26 


VERBS.—SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


§164 


Notx. In this and subsequent lists, those verbs which are marked * are said to have 
bo perfect participle; those marked t to have no present participle. A da8h(—) after 
the present, denotes that there is no second root. The parlicfples in rus and du.s^ and 
the supines in um and u which are in use, are indicated respectively by the letters r., d.^ 
ni , and u. Abundo, for example, has no perfect participle, no supine, no participll is 
dus; but it has a present participle, and a participle in rus. 

In the lists of irregular verbs, those compounds only are given, whose conjugation dif¬ 
fers from that of their simples. 

When p. is subjoined to a deponent verb, it denotes thatsome of the parts which have 
commonly an active meaning, are used either actively and passively, or passively alone. 
Such verbs are by some grammarians called common. Cf. J 112, 1, (6.) 


♦Abundo, r. to overflow. 
Accuso, m. r. d. to accuse. 
t Adumbro, to delineate. 
.ildifico, r. d. to build. 
Jtquo, r. d. to level. 

stimo, r. d. to value. 
*Arabulo, m. d. to walk. 
Amo, r. d. to love. 
tAmplio, d. to enlarge. 
Appello, d. to call. 

Apto, d. to fit. 

Aro, r. d. to plough. 

Ausculto, to listen. 
^fAutumo, to assert. 
t Basic, —, d. to kiss. 
i^Bello, m. r. d. to wage 
war. 

fBeo, to bless. 

* Boo, to bellow. 
tBrevio, to shorten. 
■fCaeco, to blind. 
fCKlo, to carve. 
jCalceo, d. to shoe. 
*tCalcitro, to kick. 
Canto, m. to sing. 

Capto, m. r. d. to seize. 
t Castigo, m. d. to chastise. 
Celfebro, d. to celebrate. 
Celo, d, to conceal. 

Jesso, d. to cease. 

Certo, r. d. to siiive. 
Clamo, to shout. 

Cngito, d. to think. 
Concilio, r. d, to conciliate. 
Considero, r. d. to con¬ 
sider. 

Cremo, d. to burn. —con- 
cremo, r. 

\'Creo, r, d. to create. 
Ci'iicio, d. to toi'ment. 
Cnlpo, r. d. to blame. 
tCiineo, d. to wedge in. 
Oiiro, r. d. to care for. 
Damuo, m. r. d. to con- 
demn. 

Dccoro, d. to adorn. 
'^tDelineo, to delineate. 
Dosidero, r. d. to desire. 


Destine, d. to design. 
Dico, m. r. d. to dedicate. 
Dicto, to dictate. 
tDolo, to hew. 

Done, r. d. to bestoio. 
Du])llco, r. d. to double. 
Duro, r. to harden. 
tEffigio, to portray. 
tEnucleo, to explain. 
Equlto, to ride. 

Erro, to wander. 
Existimo, u. r. d. to think. 
Explore, m. d. to search. 
Exsulo, m. r. to be ban¬ 
ished. 

Fabrlco, d. to frame. 
tFatigo, r. d. to weary. 

Festino, r. to hasten. 
Firmo, r. d. to strengthen. 
Flagito, m. d. to demand. 
*Flagro, r. to he on fire .— 
conflagro, r.—deflagro. 
Flo, d. to blow. 

Formo, r. d. to form. 

F oro, d. to bore. 
fFraudo, d. to defraud. 
fFreno, to bridle. 
fFrio, —, to crwmble. 
Fugo, r. d. to put to fiight. 
tFundo, r. to fniml. 
t Furio, —, to madden. 
[■Galeo, —, to on a 
helmet. 

Gesto, d. to hear. 

Glacio, —, to congeal. 
Grave, d. to weigh down. 
Gusto, d. to taste. 

Habito, m. d. to dwell. 
*Halo, —, to breathe. 
Hiemo, m. to winter. 
’^'fllio, d. to gape. 
tHiiiiio, r. d. to bury. 
Ignoro, r, d, to be igno¬ 
rant of 

Irapero, r. d. to command. 
tlmpetro, r. d. to obtain. 
Inclioo, r. to begin. 
Indago, r. d. to trace out. 


Indico, m. r. d. to show. 
tinebrio,—, to inebriate. 
Initio, to initiate. 

Inquino, to jwllute. 
Instauro, d. to renew. 
Intro, r. d. to enter. 
Invito, d. to invite. 

Irrito, r. d. to irritate. 
Itero, u. d. to do again. 
Jacto, r. d. to thi'ow. 
Judico, r. d. to judge. 
Jugo, d. to couple. 
Jugulo, m. d. to butcher 
Jure, d. to swear. 

Laboro, r. d. to labor. 
Lacero, d. to tear. 
*Lacto, to suckle. 
t Lanio, d. to tear inpieces. 
Latro, to bark. 

Laudo, r. d. to praise. 
Laxo, d. to loose. 
t Lego, to depute. 

Levo, r. d. to lighten. 
Libero, r. d. to free. 
Libo, d. to pour out. 

Li go, to bind. 
t Liquo, d. to melt. 

Lite, to appease. 

Loco, r. d. to jdace. 
Lustre, d. to survey. 
Luxiirio, to be luxuriante 
IMacto, d. to sacrifice. 
Maciilo, to spot., stain. 
IMando, r. d. to command 
Manduco, to chew. 
*Mano, to fiow. 

Mature, d. to ripen. 
^lemoro, u. d. to tell. 
*Meo, to go. 

*Migro, u. r. d. to depart 
*jMilito, in. 1 ’. to serve m 
a soldier 

tMlnio, d. to paint red. 
Ministro, d to sei'ue. 
Mitigo, d. to p icify. 

Monsfro r. to show _ 

fdemonstro, d. 

Muto, r. d. to change. 


(j 165. 


VETir.S.—SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


127 


Narro, r. d. to teU. 

Nato, m. r. to miim. 
^Nauiieo, to ht sea-sick 
fNavIgo, r. d. to sail. 
Navo, r. d. to perform. 
N^go, m. r. d. to deny. - 
♦No, to swim. 

Nomliio, r. d. to name. 
Koto, d. to mark. 

Novo, r. d. to renew. 
Kudo, d. to make bare. 
Knnciipo, r. d. to name. 
Huntio, m. r. to tell .— 
renuiitio, d. 

♦NLto, r. to nod. 

Obsecro, m. r. d. to be¬ 
seech. 

Obtrunco, r. to kill. 
Oiiero, r. d. to load. 

Opto, d. to loish. 
fOrbo, r. to bereave. 
Oruo, r. d. to adorn. 

Oro, m. r. d. to beg. 

Paco, d. to subdue. 

Pai’o, r. d. to prepare. 

comparo, d. to compare. 
Patro, r. d. to perform. 
♦Pecco, r. d. to sin. 
tPio, d. to propitiate. 
Placo, r. d. to appease. 
Ploro, m. d. to bewail. 
Porto, u. r. d. to carry. 
Postulo, m. r. d. to cfe- 
mand. 

Privo, d. to depidve. 
Probo, m. u. r. d. to ap¬ 
prove. —comprobo, m. 
Profligo, d. to rout. 
Propero, d. to hasten. 
♦fPropino, to drink to. 
Propitio, d. to appease. 
Pugno, r. d. to fght. 
Pulso, d. to beat. 

Purgo, u. r. d. to cleanse. 


Puto, d. to reckon. 
Quasso, d. to shake. 
Radio, to emit rays. 
Rapto, d. to drag away. 
Recupero, m. r. d. to re¬ 
cover. 

Recuso, r. d. to refuse. 
Reduudo, to overflow. 
Regno, r. d. to rule. 
tRepudio, r. d. to reject. 
Resero, d. to unlock. 
♦tRetalio,—, to retaliate. 
Rlgo, to water. 

Rogo, m. r. d. to ask. 
Roto, to whirl around. 
Sacrifico, ra. to sacrifice. 
Sacro, d. to consecrate. 
fSagino, d. to fatten. 
Salto, r. to dance. 

Saluto, m. r. d. to salute. 
Sano, r. d. to heal. 

Satio, to satiate. 
fSaturo, to fill. 

Saucio, d. to wound. 
♦Secundo, to prosper. 
Sedo, m. d. to aUay. 
Servo, r. d. to keep. 
♦fSibilo, to hiss. 

Sicco, d. to dry. 

Signo, r. d. to mark out. — 
assigno, m. 

Simulo, r. d. to pretend. 
Socio, d. to associate. 
♦Somnio, to dream. 
Specto, m. r. d. to behold. 
Spero, r. d. to hope. 
♦Spiro, to breathe. —con- 
spiro. — exspiro, r. — 
suspiro, d. 

Spolio, m. d. to rob. 
Spumo, to foam. 

Stillo, to drop. 

Stimulo, to go ld. 

Stipo, to stifi'. 


Sfido, to sweat. 

Suffoco, to strangle. 
Sugillo, d. to taunt. 
Supero, r. d. to overcome 
Suppedito, to afford. 
♦Supplico, m. to siipjjli- 
cate. 

♦Susurro, to whi^r. 
Tardo, to delay. 

Taxo, d. to rate. 

Temero, d. to defile. 
Tempfiro, r. d. to temper 
—obtempero, r toobey. 
Tento, m. r. d. to try. 
Terebro, to bore. 
Termino, r. d. to limit. 
Titubo, to stagger. 
Tolero, u. r. d. to bear. 
Ti'acto, u. d. to handli. 

♦ tTripudio, to dance. 
Triumpho, r. to triumph. 
Trucido, r. d. to kill. 
Turbo, d. to disturb. 
♦Vaco, to he at leisure. 
♦Vapulo, m. d. to be beat 
en. Cf. I 142, 3. 

V^'io, to diversify. 

Vasto, d. to lay waste. 
Vellico, to pluck. 
Verbfiro, r. d. to heat. 
♦Vestigo, to search for 
Vexo, a. to tease. 

Vibro, d. to brandish. 
Vigilo, to watch. 

Violo, m. r. d. to violate 
Vitio, d. to vitiate. 

Vito, u. d. to 
Ululo, to /wwZ. 

Umbro, r. to diode. 

Voco, r. d. to call. 

♦Volo, to 
Voro, r. to mvour. 

Vulgo, r. d. to publish. 
Vubiero, d. to wound. 


§ 165. The following verbs of the first conjugation are either 
iTCsrular or defective. 

o 


> CrSpo, crepui, to make a noise, ♦dis- 
crepo, -ui, or -avi. . increpo, -ni or 
-avi, -i t lira *»r -atum. ♦ f j -ercrepo, — . 
♦trecrepo, —. 

Cubo, cubui, ( perf. subj. cubaris, inf. 
cubasse), cubitum (sup.), to recline. 
incubo, -ui or avi, d. Those '•otu- 
pounds oj cuoo which take m before 
b, are of the third conjugation. 

Do, (l( di, datum, m. r. d. to give .— 
Ho ciroumdo, pessumdo, satisdo, and 


venumdo; the other compounds cf dc 
are of the third conjugation. See 
\ 163, Exc. 1. 

Domo, domui, domitum, r. d. to tome. 

•Frico, fricui, frictum or fricatum, d. 
to rvk confilco, —, -atum. So iuM- 
CO. defrico^ —, -atum or-ctum. 

Juvo, juvi, jutum, r. d.^ also juvatu- 
rus, to help, adjuvo, -ju’ri, -jutuna 
m. r. d. a«o adjuvaturus. 

♦Labo, labasse, to totter. 


128 


VERBS.—SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


§ 166 


Lnvo, 15 vi, rar. lavavi, lavatum, lanttim 
or lotum; (tup.) lautum or lavatum, 
lavatunis, d. to wash. Lavo is also 
sometimes of the third conjugation. 

♦Mico, micui, d. to glitter, diralco, 
-5vi or -ui, -aturus. *emIco, -ui, 
-aturus. ^intermico, —. ^proml- 
co, —, d. 

Neco, necavi or necui, necatum, r. d. 
to kill, eneco, -avi or -ui, -atum, or 
-ctum, d. tintemeco, —, -atum. 

*tNexo, —, to tie. 

Plico, —, plicatum, to fold, dupllco, 
-avi, -atum, r. d. multiplico and re- 
plico have -avi, -atum. ^supplico, 
-avi, m. r. applico, -avi or -ui, 
-atum or -itum, -iturus. So implico. 
—compUco, -ui, -itum or atum. 
expllco, -avi or -ui, -atum or -itum, 
-aturus or -iturus. 

Poto, potavi, pctatum or potum, r. r. 
m. m. d. to drink, fepoto, -avi, -um. 
—*perp6to, -avi. 

Seco, secui, sectum, secaturus, d. to 


cut. —*circums6co, —. ^hitorsCco 
—, d. ^perseco, -ui. praeseco, -ui. 
-turn or -atum. So reseco, d. 

*Sono, sonui, -aturus, d. to sound. 
*cons6no, -ui. So ex-, in-, per- 
prae-sdno. *resdno, -avi. *ass6no 
—. So circumsdno and dissdno. 

*Sto, steti, staturus, to st-md. ♦aor' 
testo, -steti. So circiimsto, interoto, 
supersto.— Its compirunds with mo¬ 
nosyllabic prepositions have stitij 
as, ♦consto, -stiti, -staturus. So ex- 
sto, insto, obsto, persto. ^prassto, 
-stiti, -staturus, d. *adsto or asto, 
-stiti, -stiturus. *prosto, -stiti. S^ 
resto, restiti: but smj. perf. restave- 
rit, Propert, 2, 34, 53. *disto, —. 
So substo and supersto. 

*Tdno, tonui, to thunder. So circum- 
tdno. attdno, -iii, -itum. intdno, 
-ui, -atum. *retdno, —. 

Veto, vetui, rarely avi, vetitum, to 
forbid. 


Rekabk 1. . The principal irregularity, in verbs of the first and second con¬ 
jugations, consists in the omission of the connecting vowel in the second root, 
and the change of the long vowels a and e in the third root into i. The v re¬ 
maining at the end of the second root, when it follows a consonant, is pro¬ 
nounced as u; as, cubo, (cubdvi, by syncope cubvi), i. e. cubui; {cubdtum, by 
change of the connecting vowel,) cvbitum. Sometimes in the first conjugation, 
and very frequently in the second, the connecting vowel is omitted in the third 
root also; as, juvo^ (dre) juvi, jutum; teneo^ (ere) Unui., tentum. In the second 
conjugation several verbs whose general root ends in d and g, and a few others 
of different terminations, form either their second or third root or both, hke 
verbs of the third conjugation, by adding s ; as, video, rlsi, risum. 

Rem. 2. The verbs of the first conjugation whose perfects take a redu¬ 
plication are do, sU), and their compounds. 

Rem. 3. The following verbs in eo are of the first conjugation, viz. heo, calceo, 
creo, cuneo, enucleo, illdqueo, coUineo, dellneo, meo, nauseo, screo ; eo and its com¬ 
pounds are of the fourth. 


§ 166 . All deponent verbs, of the first conjugation, are regular, 
and are conjugated like mlror, § 161; as, 


Abominor, d. to abhor. 

Adulor, d. to flatter. 

A)mulor, d. to rival. 

AncUlor, to be a handmaid. 

kApiicor, to bask in the 
sun. 

Arbitror, r. d. to think. 

Aspemor, d. p. to despise. 

Aucupor, r. p. to hunX 
after. 

Auxilior, p. to help. 

Aversor, d. to dislike. 

Bacchor, p, to revel. 

Calumnior, to censure un¬ 
fairly. 


Causor, to allege. 

^Comissor, m. to revel. 

Comitor, p. to accompany. 

Concionor, to harangue. 

*Confiabulor, m. to con¬ 
verse together. 

Conor, d. to endeavor. 

■^Conspicor, to see. 

Contemplor, d. p. to view 
attentively. 

Criminor, m. p. to com¬ 
plain of 

Cunctor, d. p. to delay. 

Deprecor, m. r. d. p. to 
deprecate. 


*tDigladior, to fence. 
Dignor, d. p. to deemwor- 
tiiy. 

Dominor, p. to rule. 
Epulor, r. d. to feast. 
*F:imulor, m. to wait on, 
Fatur, (defect.) n. d. p 
to speak. See ^ 103. 6. 
fFerior, r. to keep hoUday, 
^Fruinentor, m. to f&>\ 
age. 

Furor, m. to steal. 
Glox'ior, r. d. to boast. 
Gratulor, m. d. to con 
graiulate. 


§ 167. 


VFRBS.- 


SECOND AND THIRD RC,>rS. 


12? 


Hariolor, o practise sooth¬ 
saying. 

Hortor, d. to encourage. 
[unitor, u. r. d. to imitate. 
Indignor, d. to disdain. 
Inl’itior, d. to dtny. 
Insector, to pursue. 
lr.8idior, r. d. to lie in 
Knit for. 

Interpreter, p. to explain. 
Jaculor, p. to hurl. 

Jocor, to Jest. 

Lsetor, r. d. p. to rejoice. 
Lamentor, d. p. to bewail. 
Lienor, m. to gather 
wood. 

Luctor, d. to tvrestle. 
Medicor, r d. p. to heal. 
ilcdltor, p to meditate. 
Mercor, m. r. d. p. to buy. 
Mi nor, to threaten. 

Minor, n. r. d. to admire. 
Miseror, d. to pity. 
Moderor, u. d. to govern. 


^lodulor, d, p. tomodt^:de. 
]yi6ror, r. d. to delay. 
tMutuor, p. to bori-ow. 
Netjotior, r. to traffic. 
=^^tXugor, to trijle. 
Obsoiior, m. to cater. 
Obtestor, p. to beseech. 
Operor, to uxtrk. 

Oldnor, u. r. d. to think. 
Oj)itulor, m. to help. 
fOtior, to be at leisure. 
Pubulor, m. d. to graze. 
I’Jilor, to wander about. 
Percontor, m. to mquire. 
Periclitor, d. p. to try. 
tPiscor, m. to fsh. 
Popiilor, r. d. p. to lay 
waste. 

Prjedor, m. p. to plunder. 
Precor, m. u. r. d. to pray. 
Prcelior, to fight. 
Recorder, d. to recollect. 
Rimor, d- to search. 
Rixor, to quarrel. 


*Rusticor, to live in the. 
country. 

Sciscitor, ra. p. to inquire, 

*Scitor, m. to ask. 

Scrutor, p. to search. 

Sblor, d. to comfort. 

Spiitior, to walk about 

Spec n lor, m. r. d. to 
out. 

tStij)ulor, p. to bargam^ 
stipulate. 

tSuavior, d, to kiss. 

Sus])lcor, to suspect. 

Testificor, p. to testify. 

Tester, d. p. to testify. Sc 
detestor. 

Tutor, to defend. 

V agor, to wander. 

Veneror, d. p. to venerate, 
worship. 

Venor, m. p. to hunt. 

Versor, to be employed. 

Vociferor, to bawl. 


Note. Some deponents of the first conjugation are derived from nouns, 
and signify being or j)ractising that which the noun denotes; as, ancillairi, to be 
a hanmnaid; haHoldri, to practise soothsaying; from ancilla and hariolus. 


SECOND CONJUGATION. 


§ 107. Verbs of the second conjugation end in eo, and form 
tiieir second and third roots in u and U; as, moneo, monm’, 
inomtMm. 

The following list contains most of the regular verbs of this conju- 
)^Ation, and many also which want the second and third roots:— 


*Aceo, to be sour. 

—, to be sick. 

(“f Albeo, —, to be white. 
*Aiceo, d. to dnve away; 
part. adj. arctus or ar- 
tus. I he compounds 
change a into e; as, 
coerceo, d. to restrain. 
oxeroco, r. d. to exer¬ 
cise. 

'►Areo to be dry. 

*A veo —, to covet. 
*Caleo, r. to be warm. 

♦ Calleo, —, to be harden¬ 
ed. *percalleo, to 
well. 

Calveo, —, to be bald. 

♦ Candeo. to be white, 
*Caneo to be hoary. 

"f (iareo, r. d. to want.- 
’ Ceveo —, to fawn. 


*Clareo, —, to be bright. 

*Clueo, —, to be famous. 

*Denseo, —, to thicken. 

*Dinbeo, —, to sort the 
voting tablets. 

*Dbleo, r. d. to grieve. 

*Egeo, r. to want. 

*Emineo, to rise above. 

*Elacceo, to droop. 

*Elaveo, —. to be yellow. 

*Elorec, to olossom. 

*Eoeteo, —, to be fetid. 

*PMgeo, —, lo be cold. 

*Frondeo, —, to bear 
leaves. 

Habeo, r. d. to have. The 
compounds, except post- 
habeo, change a into 1; 
as. ad-, ex-, pro-hibeo. 
cohibeo, d. to restrain. 
inhlbeo, d. to hinder. 


*tperhibeo,d. toreport 
tposthabeo. to postpone. 
prtebeo, {for prsehlb- 
eo), r. d. to affoid, 
*prsehibeo, —. deboo, 
{for dehabeo), r. d. to 
owe. 

*Hebeo, —, to he dull. 

^Horreo, d. to be rough. 

*Hilrneo, —. to be nuiist. 

*.Jaceo, r. to He. 

*Lacteo, —, to suck. 

*Langueo, —, to be fain., 

*Lateo, to lie hid. 

*Lenteo, —, to be slew. 

*Liceo, to be valued. 

*Liveo, —, to be livid. 

*Maceo, —, to be lean, 

*Madeo, to be wet. 

*M8ereo, —, to grieve. 

Mereo, r. to deserve 


130 


VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


§168 


tcommSreo, to fully de- 
aej've. tfleinereo, d. to 
earn, femereo, ^oserre 
out one's time, ^fper- 
niereo, —, to yo through 
senice. promereo, to 
deserve. 

Moneo, r. d. to advise. 
admoneo, m. i\ d. to re¬ 
mind. commoiieo, to 
impress upon, prcemo- 
noo, to forewarn. 

*!Muceo, to be mouldy. 

*Nigreo, —, to be black. 

*Xiteo^ to shine. 

Nocco, m. r. to hurt. 

"^Oleo, to smell. 

•*^Palleo, to be pale. 


^Pareo, in. r. d. to obey. 
*Pateo, to be open. 
Placeo, to please. 

*Polleo, —, to be able. 

* Puteo, to stink. 

*Putreo, to be putrid. 
*Roiiideo, —, to glitter. 
*^Ri 2 :eo, to be sti_f. 
*Rubco, to be red. 
*Scateo,—, to gush forth. 
*Seneo, —, to be old. 
*SIleo, d. to be silent. 
^Sordeo, —, to befdthy, 
*Splendeo, —, to shine. 
^Sqnaleo, —, to be foul. 
*Stndco, —, to creak. 
*Studco, d. to study. 
♦Stupeo, to be amazed. 


*Sueo, —, te be wont. 

Tilceo, r. d. to be silent. 

*Tepeo, to be warm. 

Terreo, d. to terrify. Sd 
(\q\.qvvco, to deter, fab- 
sten CO, <0 (/e<er. tcon- 
teiTCO, texterreo, 
terreo, to ftighten. 

*Tiineo, d. to fear. 

*Torpeo, —, io be stif'. 

*Tumeo, to swell. 

*^Vrileo, r. to be able. 

*Vegoo, —, to arouse. 

*Vieo, —, to plait. Pa, 
vietui, shriveled. 

^Vlgco. to flourish. 

^Vlreo, to he green. 

*Uveo, —, to be moist. 


§ The following verbs of tlie second conjugation are ir¬ 

regular in their second or third roots or in both. 

Note 1. As the proper form of verbs of the first conjugation is, o, on, atum, 
of the fourth lo, in, Uum, so that of the second would be eo, en, Hum. Very 
few of the latter conjugation, liowever, retain this form, but most of them, as 
noticed in § 1G5, Rem. 1, drop in the second root the connecting vowel, e, and 
those in veo drop ve; as, caveo, (cdwevi) cdvi, (edvetum or cdvllum) cautum. 
Others, imitating the form of those verbs of the third conjugation whose gen¬ 
eral root ends in a consonant, add s to form the second and third roots. Cf. 
§ 165, Rem. 1, and § 171. 

Note 2. Four verbs of the second conjugation take a reduplication in the 
parts formed from the second root, viz. rnordeo.^ pendeo, ^ndeo, and tondeo. 
See § 163, Rem. 


Aholeo, -evi, -itum, r. d. to efface. 

*Algeo, alsi, to be cold. 

Ardeo, arsi, arsum, r. to burn. 

Audeo, ausus sum, {rarely whence 
ausim, § 183, R. 1,) r. d. to dare. 

Augco, auxi, auctum, r. d. to increase. 

Caveo, cavi, cautum, m. d. to beware. 

Censeo, censui, censum, d. to think. 
recenseo, -ui, -um or -Itum. *per- 
censeo, -ui. *succcnseo, -ui, d. 

Cieo, civi, citum, to excite. There is 
a cognate fnan, cio, of the fourth 
conjugation, both of the simple verb 
and of its compo^mds. The penult of 
the participles excitus and concitus 
is common, and that of accitus is aU 
toays long. 

*Connivco, -nivi, to tcink at. 

“leieo, -evi, -etum, d. to blot out. 

boceo, docui, doctum, d. to teach. 

♦Faveo, favi, fauturus, to favor. 

»l?erveo, ferbui, to boil. Sometimes 
fervo, vi, of the third conjugation. 

Fleo, flevi, fie turn, r. d. to weep. 

Foveo, fbvi, f otum, d. <0 cherish. 


*Fulgeo, fulsi, to shine. Fulgo, of the 
third conjugation, is also in use. 

Gaudeo, gavisus sum, r. io rejoice. 
§ 142, 2. 

^lia^reo, hoesi, hcesurus, to stick. So 
ad-, CO-, in-, ob- haereo; ^ubhae- 
reo, —. 

Indulgeo, indulsi, indultum, r. d. to in- 
dulge. 

.Tubeo, jussi, jussum, r. d. to order. 

*Lucco, lux/, to shine, polluceo, -luxi, 
-luctum. 

*Lugeo, luxi, d. to mourn. 

*^i\laneo, mansi, mansum, m. r. d. to 
remain. 

Misceo, miscui, mistum or mixtum, 
misturus, d. to mix. 

Mordco, momordi, morsum, d. to bite. 
remordeo, -di, -morsum, r. 

Jloveo, muvi, mutuin, r. d. to move. 

LIulceo, mulsi, mulsum, d. to soothe 
pcrmulcco, permulsi, pernmlsum anc 
pcrmnlctum, to rub gently. 

*Mulgeo, mulsi or mulxi, to milk 
emulgeo, —, emulsum, to milk oui 


§ 169-171. VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


131 


Neo, nevi, netum, to spin. 

*Paveo, pavi, d. to fear. 

*Pcndeo, pependi, to hang. *impen- 
deo, —. propendeo, —, propensiim. 

Pleo, (obsolete), coinpleo, -evi, -etam, 
to fill. So the other compounds. 

Prandeo, prandi, pransum, r. to dine. 

Rideo, risi, risum, m. r. d. to laugh. 

•■Sedeo, sedi, sessum, m. r to sit. 
The cvm 2 )ounds with monosyllabic pre¬ 
positions change 6 into I, in the frst 
ooot; as,, iiipideo, insedi, insessum. 
*dissideo, -sedi. So prajsideo, and 
rarely circumsideo. 

F61eo, solitus sum, and rarely solui, to 
be xccustomed. § 142, 2. 

♦Sorbeo, sorbul, to suck in. So *cx- 
sorbeo: but *resorbeo, —. *absor- 
beo, -sorbui or -sorpsi. 


Spondeo, spopondi, sponsum, to pro¬ 
mise. Sec § 163, Rem. 

’•'Strideo, Idi, to whiz. 

Suadeo, suasi, suasum, r, d. to advise. 

Teneo, tenui, tentum, r. d. to hold. The 
compounds change e into I in the frsi 
and second roots; as, detineo, detl- 
nui, detentum. ^attlneo, -tinui. So 
pertineo. 

Terfjeo, tersi, tersum, to wipe. Tergo, 
of the third conjugation, is also in use. 

Tondeo, totondi, toiisum, to shear. The 
compounds have the perfect tondi. 

Torqueo, torsi, tortum, d. to twist. 

Torreo, torrui, tostum, to roast. 

*Turgeo, tursi, to swell. 

*Urgeo or urgueo, ursi, d. to urge. 

Video, vidi, visum, m. u. r. d. to see. 

Voveo, vovi, votum, d. to vow. 


§ S69. Impersonal Ver\ 

D(>cet, decnit, it becomes. 

Libet, libuit or libitum est, it pleases, 
is agreeable. 

Lieet, licuit or licitum est, it is lawful, 
<jv permitted. 

1 iquet, liquit, it is clear, evident. 
Miseret, miseruit o?’ miseritum est, 
it moves to pity; miseret me, I pity. 
Oportet, oportuit, it behooves. 

Note. Lubet is sometimes written f 


of the Second Conjugation. 

Piget, piguit or pigitum est, d. it trou* 
bles, grieves. 

Pcenitet, pcenituit, poeniturus, d. it re¬ 
pents; pcenitet me, / re5'7’e^. ‘ 

Piidet, puduit or puditura est, d,; it 
shames ; pudet me, 1 am ashamed. 

Taedet, taeduit or tassum est, it disgust* 
or wearies, pertaedet, pertaesuni est. 

libet, especially in the comic writers. 


§ 1*^0. Deponent Verbs 

Fateor, fassus, r. d. p. to confess. The 
compounds change a into i in the frst 
root, and into e in the third; as, con- 
fiteor, confessus, d, p. to acknowl¬ 
edge. diiTiteor, to deny, profi¬ 
teer, professus, d. p. to declare. 

Liceor, licitus, to bid a price. 


of the Second Conjugation. 

^^Tedeor, d. to cure. 

Mereor, meritus, to deserve. 

Misereor. miseiitus or misertus, topnty. 
Polliceor, pollicitus, p. to pi'omise. 
Reor, ratus, to think, supjwse. 

Tueor, tuitus, d. p. to protect. 

Vereor, veritus, d. p. to fear. 


THIRD CONJUGATION. 

In the third conjugation, when the first root ends with 
a consonant, the second root is regularly formed by adding s; when 
it ends with a vowel, the first and second roots are the same : the 
third root is formed by adding t; as, carpo, carpsi, carpttm; arguo, 
argut, argutum. 

In annexing s and t, certain changes occur in the final consonant of 
the root: — 

1. The palatab c, g, qu, and also h, at the end of the first root, fonn with t 
the double letter a; in the second root; in the third root, c remains, and the 
others are changed into c before t; as, dico, (dicsi, i. e.), dixi, dictuix; rego^ 
fregsi, i. e.), rexi, rectum; v&ho, vexi, vectum; cdquo, coxi, coctum. 


132 VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. § 171 


Noth. Fluo and strvo form their second and third roots after the analogy ot 
rerhs whose first root ends in a palatal or h. 

3 . B is changed into p before s and t; as, scrlho^ scripsi, scriptmn. 

3. D and before s, are either dropped, or changed into s; as, clnudo, cla'usi 
cetfo, cessi; miito, mUi. Cf. § 56, I, Rem. 1. After to, p is sometimes inseiled 
before s and t; as, sumo, sumpsi, sumptum. R is changed to s before s and .{in 
giro and uro. 

4 . Some other consonants are dropped, or changed into s, in cei’tain verbs. 


Exc. 1. Many verbs whose first root ends in a consonant, do not 
add s to form the second loot. 


(a.) Of these, some have the second root the same as the first, but the vowel 
of the second root, if a monosyllable, is long; as, 

Bibo, Excudo, Ico, Mando, Scabo, Solvo, Verro, 

Edo, Fodio, Lambo, Prehendo, Scando, Strido, Verto, 

Emo, Fugio, Lego, Psallo, Sido, Tollo, Volvo; 

to which add the compounds of the obsolete canch, fendo, and nuo. 

(b,) Some make a change in the first root. Of these, some change a vowel, 
some drop a consonant, some prefix a reduplication, others admit two or more 
of these changes; as. 


Ago, egi. 
Findo, fldi. 
Jacio, jeci. 
Scindo, scidi. 


Capio, cepi. 
Frango, fregi. 
Linquo, liqui. 
Sisto, stiti. 


Facio, feci. 
Fun do, fudi. 
Rumpo, rupi. 
Vinco, vici. 


Those which have a reduplication are 

Cado, ci^cidi. Csedo, cecidi. 

Curro, ciicurri. Disco, didici. 

Pago, {obs.) pepigi Parco, peperci. 

and pegi. Pedo, pepedi. 

Pendo, pependi. Posco, poposci. 

Tango, tetigi. Tendo, tetendi. 


Cano, cScini. 
Fallo, fefelli. 
Pario, pep&ri. 
Pello, pepuli. 
Pirngo, pupugi. 
Tundo, tutudi. 


Exc. 2. Some, after the analogy of the second conjugation, add v 
to the first root of the verb; as, 

Alo, alui, etc. Consulo, G6mo, R^pio, Trgmo, 

Colo, Depso, Geno, {obs.) Strepo, Volo, 

Compesco, Fremo, Molo, Texo, Vomo. 

MeU>, messui; and pdiw, pdsui; add su, with a change in the root. 

Exc. 3. The following, after the analogy of the fourth conjugation, 
add Iv to the first root:— 


Arcesso, Cupio, Lacesso, Rudo, Tero, droppina g. 

Capesso, lucesso, Peto, Quajro, v^th a change of r into s. 

Exc. 4. The following add v, with a change in the root; those in 
loO and SCO dropping n end sc, and those having er before n chano-Ino 
t to re or rd :— ® ® 


Cresco, Pasco, Scisco, Spemo, Lino, Sero, 

Nosco, Quiesco, Cemo, Stemo, Sino, tosme. 

Exc. 5. (a.) The third root of verbs whose first root ends in d or t, 
and some in g, add s, instead of t, to the root, either dropping the d, t 
and^r, or changing them into 5 ; as, claudo, clausum; defendo, de- 
fensum; cedo, cessum ; Jiecto, Jiexum; figo, jixum. But the com- 
pounds cf do add \t; as, perdo, perditum. 


S 172. 


VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


188 


(6.) The following, also, add s, with a change of the root — 

Encello, Fallo, Pello, Spargo, Veiro. 

Perceilo, !Mergo, Premo, Velio, 

Exc. 6. The following add t, with a (jhange of the rod; (hose 
having n, nc, r?//, ntju^ or inp at the end of the first root dropping n 
i.nd rn in the third :— 

Cemo, Fingo, Gero, Sero, Sperno, Stringo, Uro, 

Colo, Fraiigo, Rumpo, Sisto, Stenio, Tero, Viuco; 

to whit.h add the compounds of Ihiquo, and verbs in sco with the second root 
m V; the hitter drop sc before as, iwsco, mvi, notum; except pasco^ which 
di )ps c only. 

Exc. 7. (a.) The following have : — 

Bibo, Fllcio, Molo, Pono, tiyiOi a change of on into 6s. 

Geno, (ois./bj-Hi (^gigno,) Vomo, SinOy dropping n. 

(6.) The following, like verbs of the fourth conjugation, add it to 
the first root:— 

Arcesso, Ciipio, Peto, Tero, dropping e. 

Facesso, L&’esso, Qnaero, mth a change <f r into s. 

For other irregularities occurring in this conjugation, see § 172-174. 

§17^. The following list contains most of the simple verbs, 
both regular and irregular, in the third conjugation, with such of 
their compounds as require particular notice:— 


Acuo, acui, acutum, d. to sharpen. 

Ago, egi, actum, r. d. to drive. So cir- 
cumago, cogo, and p6rago. *ambl- 
go, —, to dovbt. & satago. The 
other compounds change a into I, in 
the frst root; as, exigo, exegi, ex- 
actum, to drive out. ^prodigo, -egi, 
fo squander. See § 189, 2. 

Alo, alui, altum, and later alitum, d. 
to nourish. 

Ango, anxi, to strangle. 

Arguo, argui, argutum, d. to convict. 

Arcesso, -cessivi, -cessituin, r. d. to 
call for. Pass. inf. arcessiri or ar- 
cessi. 

•"Batuo, batui, d. to heat. 

Bibo, blbi, blbitum, d. to drink. 

*Cado, cecldi, casurus, to fall. The 
compounds change a into 1, in the frst 
root, and drop me reduplication ; as, 
occido, -cldi, -casum, r. to set. 

O^ndo, cecldi, cfesum, r. d. tocid. The 
compoumls change ai into 1, (md drop 
the reduplication; og, occido, -cidi, 
-cisurn. 

Cando, (obsolete^) synonymous icith can- 
deo of the second conjugation. iJence 
accendo, -cendi, -censura, d. to kindle. 
(S.i incsndo, succendo. 

*Cano, ceclni, d. to sing. The com- 
v*mnds change ^ into i; as, *concino, 
12 


-cinui. So occlno, praecino. *^accl- 
no, — . So inclno, intercino, succi- 
no, reclno. 

*Capesso, -ivi, r. d. to undertake. 

Capio, cepi, captura, r. d. to take. So 
antecapio. The other compounds 
change a into 1, in the frst root, and 
into e in the third; as, declpio, dece- 
pi, deceptum. 

Carpo, carpsi carptum, d. to pluck. 
The compouiids change a into e; as, 
dScerjio, decerpsi, decerptum. 

Cedo, cessi, cessum, r. to yield. 

CeUo, {obsolete.) excello, -cellui,-col- 
sum, to excel. *aiitecello, — . So 
prsecello, recello, perceilo, -cull, 
-culsum, to strike. 

Cenio, crevi, cretum, d. to decree. 

*Cerno, —. to see. 

Cihgo, cinxi, cinctum, d. to gird. 

*Chingo, —, to Clang. 

Claudo, clausi, clausum, r. d. to sAirf. 

The compounds change an tntou; 
occludo, occlusi, occlusum, to shxA 
up. 

Claudo, —, to limp. 

*tClepo, clepsi, rarely deni, to steah 

Colo, colui, cultum, d. to till. tocc<llC\ 
-cului, -cultum, d. to hide. 

Como, compsi, comptum, to deck. 

♦Compesco, -pescui, to restrain. 


VERBS.—SECOND AND ^HIRD ROOTS. 


§172 


ib4 


Consulo, -siilui, -sultum, m r. d. to 
consult. 

Coquo, coxi, coctiim, m. d. tc cook. 

Credo, CredJdi, credJturn, r. d. to b&- 
litve. 

•fCresco, crevi, to grow, concresco, 
-crevi, -cri^tiim. 

Cubo is of tht frst conjugation. Cf. 
^ 160. ^accuinbo,-culiui, tolitchivn. 
St' the other compoujuls which insert in. 

*Cfido, —, to forge, excudo, -cudi, 
-cusism, d. to stamp. 

CdpiOj ciipivi, cupltum, d. to desire. 
Milg. imperf. cujdret. Lucr. 1, 72. 

♦Curro, cucurri, cursurus, to run. 
coiiciirro, succurro, and transciin'O, 
drop the reduplication; the other com- 
ptnimls sometimes drop^ and sometimes 
retain it; as, decurro, decurri, and 
decucuiri, decursum. *aiit6cun'0, 
—. So circiuncurro. 

♦ Dego, degi, d. to live. 

Demo, dempsi, demptum, r. d. to take 
away. 

fDepso, depsui, depstum, to knead. 

Dico, dixi, dictum, u. r. d. to say. 
Disco, didici, disciturus, d. to learn. 

♦ Dispesco, —, to separate. 

Divido, divisi, divisum, r. d. to divide. 

Do is of the first conjugation, abdo, 
-didi, -ditum, d. to hide. So condo, 
indo. addo, -dIdi, -ditum, r. d. to 
add. So dedo, edo, prddo, reddo, 
trado, vendo. fdido, -didi, -ditum, 
to distribute. So abdo, subdo. perdo, 
-didi, -ditum, m. r. d. abscondo, -di 
or -didi, -ditum or -sum. 

Duco, duxi, ductum, m. r. d. to lead. 

Edo, edi, esum, m. u. r. d. to eat. 

Exuo, exui, exutum, d. to strip off. 

Emo, emi, emptum, r. d. to buy. So 
coemo. The other compounds change 
e to I; as, eximo, -emi, -emptum. 

Facesso, -cessi, -cessitum, to execute. 

Facio, feci, factum, m. u. r. d. to do. 
Compounded with a pre^wsition, it 
changes a into i in the first root, and 
into e in the third, makes -fice in the 
imperative, and has a regidar passive. 
Compounded with other words, it re¬ 
tains a when o f this cimjugation, makes 
lac mike imperative, and has the pas- 
»ive, fio, factum. See (j 180. 

Fi llo, fcfelli, falsum, d. to deceive. 
^refello, -felli, d. to refute. 

/endo, {obsolete.) defeiido, -feinti, -fen- 
sum, m. u. r. d. to dej'end. oli'endo, 
-tendi, -f^nsum, d. to offetul. 

f'ero, tiili, latum, r. d. to bear. See 
§179. A perfect Utuli is rare. Its 
compounds we aifero attuli, allatum: 


aufero, abstuli, ablatum; difftro, 
distuli, dilatum; confero, contuli 
collatum; infero, intuli, illatum, 
offVro, obtuli, oblatum; effero, ex- 
tuli, elatum; suffcro, sustuli, sublA 
turn; ami circum-, per-, trans-, de-, 
pnV, ante-, prajfcro, -tiili, -latum. 

*Fervo, vi, to boil. Cf. fcrveo, 2d conj 

F'ido, — , fisus, to tnist. See § 162, 18. 
confldo, confisus sum or confiJi, to 
rely on. dilfido, difl'isus sum, to 
distmist. 

Figo, fixi,fixum,r. rere??/fictum, tojix. 

Fiudo, fidi, fissum, d. to cleave. 

Fingo, finxi, fictum, d. to feign. 

Flecto, flexi, flexum, r. d. to lend. 

*Fligo, flixi, to dash. So confligo, 
affligo, -flixi, -flictum, to afflict. Sc 
infiigo. prolligo is q/'</<e first conjm- 
gat ion. 

Fluo, tluxi, fluxum, (fluctum, obs.) r. 
to fiow. 

Fodio, fodi, fossum, d. to dig. Old 
pres. inf. pass, fodiri: so also ef- 
fodiri. 

Fran go, fregi, fractum, r. d. to break 
The compounds change a into i, in the 
first root; as, infringo, iiifregi, iu- 
fractum, to break in ujxm. 

*Fremo, fremui, d. to roar, howl. 

Frendo, —, fresum or fressum, to gnash. 

Frigo, frixi, frictum, rarely frixum, to 
I'oast. 

*Fugio, fugi, fugiturns, d. to fiee. 

*Fulgo, —, to fiash. 

Fundo, fudi, fusum, r. d. to pour. 

*Furo, —, to rage. 

*Gemo, gemrri, d. to groan. 

Gero, gessi, gestum, r. d. to bear. 

Gigno, {obsolete ghno,) genui, genitom 
r. d. to beget. 

*Glisco, —, to grow. 

*Glubo, —, to peel, deglubo, —, 
-gl upturn. 

Gruo, {obsolete.') *congruo, -grui, to 
agree. So ingruo. 

Ico, ici, ictum, r. to strike. 

linbuo, imbui, imbiitum, d. to imbue. 

*Incesso, -cessivi o?* -cessi, to attack. 

tlnduo, indui, indutum, to put on. 

Jacio, jeci, jactum, d. to cast. The 
conijjounds change a into I m the first 
root, ami into e" ia the thud. (§ 163, 
Exc. 3); as, rejicio, rejeci, rejectum, 

Jungo, junxi, junctuin, V. d. to join. 

Laccsso, -cessivi, -cessitum, r. d. to pro¬ 
voke. 

Lacio, {obsolete.) The compounds change 
a twtoi; as, allicio, -lexi, -lectuin, d 
to allure. So iliicio, pellicio. elicio 
-licui, -licltum, to draw out. 


§172. 


VERBS.—SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


135 


Lsedo, Isesi, liesum, m. r. to hurt. The 
vuvipotmrls chnnfle ae into I; as, illido, 
ill5si, illisum, to dash against. 

O^Lambo, Iambi, to lick. 

L6go, legi, lectum, r. d. to read. So 
allego, pcrlego, prrelego, relego, sub¬ 
lego, and traiislego; the other conir- 
jxmnds change e into i; as, colli go, 
collogi, collectum, to collect. Bat the 
following add s to form the second 
root; ^ 171, 1; diligo,-lexi,-lectum, 
to love, iutelllgo, -lexi, -lectum, u. 
r. d. to tinder stand, negligo, -lexi, 
-Icccum, r. d. to neglect. 

Liitgo, —, linctum, d. to lick. *delin- 
go, —, to lick up. 

Lino, livi oi' levi, litum, d. to daub. 

^•fLinquo, llqui, d. to leave, relinquo, 
-liqui, -lictum, r. d. delinquo, -liqui, 
-lictum. (So dereliiiquo. 

Ludo, lusi, lusum, m. r. to play. 

^•fLuo, iui, luiturus, d. to atone, abluo, 
-lui, -lutum, r. d. diluo, -lui, -lu- 
tum, d. So eluo. 

Mando, mandi, mansum, d. to chew. 

Mergo, mersi, mersura, r. d. to dip. So 
immergo; but pres. inf. pass, im- 
mergeri. Col. 5, 9, 3. 

Meto, messui, messura, d. to reap. 

Metuo, metui, metutum, d. to fear. 

i*fMingo, minxi, mictum, {sup.) to make 
water. 

Mlnuo, minui, minutum, d. to lessen. 

Mitto, misi, missum, r. d. to send. 

Mblo, molui, molitum, to grind. 

Mungo, {obsolete.) emungo, -munxi, 
-munctum, to wipe the nose. 

Necto, nexi, nexum, d. to knit, innec- 
to, -nexui, -nexum. So annecto, 
connecto. 

^IfNingo or -guo, ninxi, to snoio. 

Nosco, nbvi, notum, d. to learn, ag- 
nosco, -uovi, -nitum, d. to recognize. 
cognosce, -novi, -nitum, u. r. d. to 
hnmo. So recognosco. *internosco, 
novi, to distinguish betioeen. praecog- 
nosco,—, praecoguitum, to fore-know. 
*dignosco, —. So priunosco. ignos- 
co, -novi, -notum, d to pardon. 

Zlubo, nupsi, err nupta sum, nuptum, 
m. r. to marry. 

Nuo, {oljsolete,) to nod. i<fabnuo, -nui, 
-nuitiirus, d. to refuse, i^annuo, -nui. 
So innuo, renuo. 

I^Olo, olui, to smell. 

Pando, —, passum or pansum, to open. 
Bo expando. dispando, —, -pansam. 

Pago, (<&. tJic samo as paco whence pa- 
ciscor,) pepigi, pactum, to bargain: 
hence 

Pungo, panxi or pegi, pactum, panctu- 


rus, d. to drive in. compingo, -pegi, 
-pactum. So impingo. "^oppango, 
-pegi. *depango, —. So repango^ 
suppingo. 

*Parco, peperci parsi, parsfinas 

to spare. Sane of the coiiijjounds 
change a e; as, *comparco or com- 
perco. *imperco, —. 

Pario, pej)eri, pertum, parlturus, d. tc 
bring forth. The compounds are of 
the fnirth conjugatum. 

Pasco, pavi, pastum, m. r. d. to feedi 

Pe^to, —, pexuru, ami pectllum, d. to 
coirib. So depecto. repecto. 

*Pedo, pf*j)edi. *<»ppGdo, —. 

Pello, pepuli, pulsum, d. to didve. Its 
compounds are not reduplicated. 

Pendo, pependi, pensum, r. to weich. 
The compounds drop the reduplication. 
See § 163, Bxc. 1. 

Peto, petivi, petitum, m. u. r. d. to ask. 

Pingo, pinxi, pictum, to paint. 

Pinso, pinsi, pinsitum, pinsum or pis- 
tum, to pound. 

*Plango, planxi, plancturus, to lament. 

Plaudo, plausi, plausum, d. to clap, ap¬ 
plaud. So ajmlaudo. *tcircum- 
plaudo, —. The other compounds 
change au into 6. 

Plecto, —, plexum, d. to twine. 

*Pluo, plui or pluvi, to rain. 

Pono, posui, {anciently posivi), pcsl- 
tum, r. d. to place. 

*tPorricio, —, to offer sacrifice. 

*Posco, poposci, d. to demand. 

pjSdS,'^''’ i ^ 

Premo, pressi, pressum, r. d. to press. 
The compounds change 6 into I, in the 
first root; as, imprimo, impress!, 
impressum, to imjiress. 

Promo, prornpsi, promptum, r. d. to 
bring out. 

^Psalio, psalli, to play on a stringed in¬ 
strument. 

Pungo, pupugi, punctum, to pneh. 
com pungo, -punxi, -punctum. Bo 
dispungo, expungo. Lnterpungo,—, 
-punctum. *rep’ingo, —. 

Qua'ro, qua'sTvi, qiiJEsituin, ni. r. d. to 
seek. The compounds change ae into 
i; as, reejuTro, requi.sivi, requisitum, 
to seek again. 

Quatio, —, quassum, to shake. ITie 
compounds change qua into cti; aSj 
concutic, - cussi, -cussum, d. dis* 
ctitio, -cussi, -cussum, r. d. 

Quiesco, quievi, nuietum, r. d. to resL 

Rado, rasi, rasum, d. to shave. 

Kamo, r^)ui, raptum, r.d. to snatch. 
The compounds change a into I in the 


136 


VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS 


§172 


Jir$t and second roots, and into e in 
the third; ns, diripio, -rTpni, -reptura, 
m. r. So eripio and praeiipio. 

Kego, rexi, reftiun, r. d. to rule. The 
comjxmnds chniif/e e into I, m the first 
root ; as, dirigo, direxi, directum. 
*perco, { for perrigo), perrexi, r. to 
go forward, surgo {for surrigo), 
surrexi, surrectum, r. d. to rise. So 
porrigo {for prorigo), to stmtch out. 

fflvepo, repsi, to rretp. 

Rodo, rdsi, rusum, r. to gnmo. ab-, ar-, 
e-, ob-, praj-rodo, want the perfect. 

^'Rudo, nidlvi, to bray. 

Rumpo, rupi, ruptum, r. d. to break. 

Kuo, rui, rutum, ruiturus, to fall. 
diruo, -rui, -riitum, d. So obruo. 
*con'uo, -mi. So irruo. 

^^^Siipio, sapivi, to be wise. The com¬ 
pounds ctiange a into I; as, ^resipio, 
-slpivi or -si'pui. *desipio, —, to be 
silly. 

♦fScfibo, scabi, to scratch. 

Scalpo, scalpsi, scalptum, to engrave. 

Sale or sallo, — salsum, to salt. 

*Scando, —, d. to climb. The compounds 
change a into e; os, ascendo, ascendi, 
asceiisum, r. d. desceudo, desceudi, 
{anciently descend!di,) descensum. 

Scindo, scidi, {anciently sciscidi), scis- 
sum, d. to cut. 

Scisco, scivi, scitum, d. to ordain. 

Scribo, scripsi, scriptum, r. d. to write. 

Sculpo, sculpsi, sculptum, d. to carve. 

Sero, sevi, satum, r. d. to sow. conse- 
ro, -sevi, -situm. So insero, r., and 
obsero. 

(Sero, —, sertum, to entwine. Its com- 
poundshave -serui; as, ass6ro, -serui, 
-sertum, r. d. 

♦ Serpo, serpsi, to creep. 

^Sido, sidi, to settle. Jts compounds have 
generally seili, sessura, from sedeo. 

<^Sino, sivi, siturus, to peimiit. desino, 
desivi, desitum, r. § 284, II. 3, Exc. 2. 

Sisto, sUti, statum, to stop, ^absisto, 
-stiti. So the other com/mmds ; but 
circumsisto wa7its the pterfect. 

Solvo, solvi, soliitum, r. d. to /oose. 

Spargo, sparsi, sj)arsum, r. d. to spread. 
The compininas change a into e; as, 
res])erg(), -sj)ersi, -spersum; but with 
ciroum and in, a sometimes remains. 

Spf'cio, {obsolete.) The compounds 
change e into i, in the first root; as, 
aspicio, aspexi, aspecturn, d. to look 
at. iiispicio, inspexi, inspectum. 
r. d. 

Sperno, sprevi^ spretum, d. to despise. 
tSpuo, spui, to spit. *respuo, res- 
pui, d. 


Statuo, statui, statutum, d. to ptac^ 
The compounds change ii into i; ai 
instituo, iustitui, institutum, to in¬ 
stitute. 

Stenio, stravi, stratum, d. to strew. 

*Stenmo, sternui, to sneeze. 

*Sterto, —, to snore, ^tdesterto, da* 
stertui. 

^Stinguo, —, to eittinguish. distirgno, 
distiuxi, distinctum. So exotinguo 
r. d. 

*Strcpo, strepui to make a noise. 

*Stri(io, stiidi, k creak. 

Stringo, strinxi, strictum, r. d. to Innd 
or tie tight. 

Stmo, stmxi, structum, d. to build. 

Sugo, suxi, suctum, to suck. 

Sumo, sumpsi, sumptum, r. d. to take. 

Suo, —, sutura, d. to sew. So consuo, 
dissuo. in suo, -sui, sutum. *as- 
suo, —. 

Tago, {very rare), to touch. Hence 

Tango, tetigi, tactum, r. d. to touch. 
The compounds chanqe a into i in the 
first root, ami drop the redtiplication ; 
as, contingo, contigi, contactum, r. 

Togo, texi, tectum, r. d. to cover. 

*Temno, —, d. to despise, contemno, 
-tempsi, -temptum, d. 

Teudo, tetendi, tentum or tensura, to 
stretch. The coinjumnds drop the re¬ 
duplication ; as, extendo, -tendi, -ten¬ 
tum or -tensum. So in-, os-, and re- 
tendo. detendo has tensum. The 
other co7npounds have tentum. 

^fTergo, tersi, tersum, to wipe Ter- 
geo, of the second conjugation nos ilie 
same second and third roots. 

Tero, trivi, tritum, d. to rub. 

Texo, texui, textum, d. to weave. 

Tingo or tinguo, tinxi, tinctum, r. d. 
to moisten^ tinge. 

*Tollo, ancnently tetuli, rarely tolli, d. 
to raise. The perfect and supine 
tuli and sublatum from suOcro take 
the place of the perfect and supine oj 
tollo and sustollo. *sustollo, —, r. 
to raise up, to take away. *attoiio, 
—. So extollo. 

Traho, traxi, tractum, r. d. to draw. 

*Trcmo, tremui, d. to tretnble. 

Tribuo, tribui, tributum, r. d. to as¬ 
cribe. 

Truilo, tmsi, trusum, to thrust. 

Tundo, tutudi, tunsum or tusum, to 
beat. The compmnds di’op the redu- 
])licatum, ami hare tusum. Yet con- 
tunsum, detunsum, obtunsum, and 
retunsum, are also found. 

Ungo, (or -guo), unxi, unctum, i- ti 
anoint. 


173. 


VERBS. —SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. 


187 


Uro, ast i, nstum, d. to bum. 

••fVado, —, <0 ^ 0 . /So supervado. The 
other compounds have va-si; as, *eva- 
do, avasi, r. So pervado; also iuv^ 
do, r. d. 

Vfho, vexi, vectum, r. to carry. 

Ve'lo, velli or vulsi, \’iilsum, d. to pluck. 
So avello, d., divello, evello. d., re- 
vello, revelli, re\ailsura. The other 
comp<mruls have velli only^ except iu- 
tervello, which has v^llsi. 


*Vergo, versi, to incline. 

Verro, —, versum, d. to brush. 

Verto, verti, versum, r. d. to turn. Set 
^174, Note. 

Vinco, vici, victum, r. d. to conquer. 
*VTso, —, d. to visit. 

*Vivo, vixi, vicfurus, d. to live. 

*Vdlo, volui, velle {/or vOlere), to bt 
willivfj. See ^178. 

Volvo, volvi, volutum, d. to roll. 

Voiiio, vomui, vomitum, r. d. to vomit 


Remark. Those verbs in io (and deponents in tor), of the third conjugation, 
which are conjugated like caj/io (page 115) are. capio, cupio, /dcio, fOdio^ fiigio^ 
idcio, pdrio, qudtio, rapio, sdpio, compounds of Idcio and spicio, and yi adior, mi¬ 
nor, potior, and indnor: but compare mdnor in ^ 174, and drior, and pdtioT 
m ^ 177. 


Inceptive Verbs. 


§ Inceptive verbs in general either want the third roo':, 

or adopt that of*their primitives: (see § 187, II, 2). Of those derived 
from nours and adjectives, some want the second root, and some form 
it by adding u to the rool^of the primitive. 

In the following list, those verbs to which s is added, have a simple verb in 
nse from which they are formed:— 


♦Acesco, acui, s. to qrow sour. 
*iEg\’esco, to grcrw sick. 

♦Albesco, —, s. to grow white. 

*Alesco, —, s. to grow, coalesce, -alui, 
-alitum, to grow together. 

*Ardesco, arsi, s. to take /re. 

*Aresco, —, s. to grow dry. ^exares- 
co, -arui. So Lnaresco, peraresco. 
*Augesco, auxi, s. to increase. 
*Calesco, calui, s. to grow worm, 
*Calvesco, —, s. to become bald. 
*Candesco, candui, s. to grow white. 
*Canesco, canui, s. to become hoary. 
*Claresco, clarui, s. to become bright. 

♦ Condormisco, "dormivi, s. to go to 
sleep. 

♦ Contlcesco, -tlcui, to become silent. 

♦ C'ebresco, crebui and crebrui, to in¬ 
crease. 

tCniilesco, crudui, to become violent. 

♦ Ditf^co, —, to grow inch. 

♦ Dnlcesco, —, to grow sweet. 

Duresco, dfirui, to groio hard. 

♦ FAilesco, evi'ni, to become worthless. 
iifKxtimesco,-ilmui, to fear greatly. 
*Va\.\^qo, to gape. 

Fliircesco, flaccui, s. to icilt. 

1'ervesco, ferbui, s. to grow hot. 
WM.'.resco, fiurui, s. to begin to Jlouiish. 

♦ Fracesco, fracui, to grow rancid. 

♦ Frigesco, —, s. to grow cold, ^per- 
frtgesco, -frixi. So refrigesco. 

12* 


*Frondesco, —, s. to put forth leaves. 
*Frutlcesco, —, to put forth shoots. 
*Gelasco, —, s. to freeze. So *cong6- 
lasco, s. to congeal. 

*Gemisco, —, s. to begin tc sigh. 
*Gemmasco, —, to begin to bud. 
*Generasco, —, s. to be produced. 
*Grandesco, —, to groio Large. 
*Gravesco, —, to grow heavy. 
♦Hasresco, —, s. to adhere. 

*Hebesco, —, s. to grow dull. 
*Horresco, hormi, s. to grow rough. 
*Humesco, —, s. to grow moist. 
*Ignesco, —, to become inflamed. 
*Ind61esco, -dolui, d. to be grieved 
*lns61esco, —, to become haughty. 
*Intcgrasco, —^ to be renewed. 
*.Iuv{‘nesco, —, to grow yimng. 
*I.Htignesco, langui, s. to grow languid. 
*Lapi(lesco, —, to become stone. 
*batesco, — to grow broad. 

*Latesco, to be anicealed. s. *delIte3C0 
-litui; *obliiesco,-litui. 

*Lentesco, —, to become soft. 
*Liquesco, —, s. to become liquid 
*dC*liquesco, -llcui. 

*hucesco, —. s. to grow light, to dawn. 
*Lutesco, —, ». to become muddy. 


^Macresco,- ‘ 9 row lean. 

*remacresco, -macrui. 
*Madesco, madui, s. to grow moist 


138 


VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS. § 174 


l*f]Marcesco, —, s. to pine away. 
^•fMatiiresco, matunii, U) ripen. 
^^fMlseresco, miserui, s. to pity. 
<*^Mitesco, —, to grow mild. 

*M()llesco, —, to grow soft. 

^•fMutesco, —, to become dumb, ♦ob- 
mutesco, obmutui. 

^'fNigresco, nigrui, s. to grow black. 
♦^Nltesco, nftiii, s. to ip-inv bright. 

^Nr •tesco, nbtui, to become known. 
^<fObbrutesco, —, to become brutish. 
^•fObJt'nnisco, —, s. to Jail asleep. 

♦ Obsuniesco, -surdui, to grow deaf. 

♦ Occallesco, -callui, to become cations. 

♦ Olesco, (scarcely used.) *;ibblesco, 
-(V.evi, s. to cease, adolesco, -blevi, 
-ultum, 8. to grow up. exblesco, 
-blevi, -b)letum, to grow out of date. 
So obsblesco. Iiiblosco, -blevi, -bli- 
tiim, d. to grino in or on. 

^Pallesco, pallui, s. to gi'ow pale. 
♦Patesco, patui, s. to be opened. 
*Pavesco, pavi, s. to grow fearful. 
■^Pertiraesco, -timui, d. to fear greatly. 
^ Pinguesco, —, to grow Jett. 

♦Pubesco, —, to come to mattirity. 
^Puerasco, —, to become a boy. 

J -“s-1 

*Raresco, —, to become thin. 
*ResTpisco, -sipui, s. to recover one’s 
senses. 

^Rlgesco, rTgui, s. to grow cold. 
'<*fRubesco, rubui, s. to grow red. *eru- 
besco, -rubui, d. 


§ 17 -^. Deponent Verbs 

Apiscor, aptus, to get. The compounds 
change a into I in the first root, and 
into e m the third; as, adipiscor, 
adeptus. So indlpiscor. 

Expergiscor, experrectus, to atoake. 

<*Fatiscor, to gape or crxuk open. The 
compimm/s change a into e; as, def e- 
tiscor, -fessus. 

Fruor, fruitus or fructus, frulturus, d. 
to enjoy. 

Fungor, functus, r. d. to perform. 

Gradior, gressus, to walk. The com- 
poumls c/iange a iiito e; as, aggredior, 
aggressus, r. d. Jnf. 2 )res. aggrodi 
om/aggr(*(iiri; so, progi'edi and progre- 
diri; and pres. hul. egreditur. Plant. 

*Tr as cor. to be a ngry. 

Labor, lapsus, r. to fall. 

Liquor, to melt, fiow. 

Lbqu( r, Ibcutus, r. d. to speak. 

Miniscor, (obsolete. ) comininiscor, com- 
mentus, p. u» invent, ^rerainiscor, 
to rememoer. 


*Sanesco, —, to become souna. *oon 
sanesco, -sanui. 

*Seiiesco, seiiui, s. d. to grow c^d. Sn 
consenesco. 

*Seiitisco, —, s. to j)erceive. 

*Siccesco, —, to become dry. 

*Silesco, sllui, s. to grow silent. 

*Sblidesco, —, to become solid. 

^Sordesco, sordid, s. to become filtliy. 

*Splendesco, spleudui, s. to beceoM 
bright. 

=^t^Spiimesco, —, to begin to foam. 

*Sterflesco, —, to become barren. 

=^Stupesco, stupui, s. to become custon 
ished. 

Suesco, suevi, suetum, s. to become ac¬ 
customed. 

♦ Tabesco, tabui, s. to waste awau. 

^Teneresco and -asco, —, to become 
tender. 

*Tepesco, tepui, s. to grow warm. 

^Toi’pesco, torpui, s. to grow torpid. 

*Tremisco, —, s. to begin to tremble. 

*Uvesco, —, to become moist. 

♦Vfilesco, —, s. to become strong. 

*Vanesco, —, to vanish. *evanesco, 
evanui. 

*Veterasco, vetgravi, to grow old. 

*Vlresco, virui, s. to grow green. 

*Vivesco, vixi, s. to come to life. *r6- 
vivisco, -vixi. 


of the Third Conjugation. 

Mbrior, (mori, rareZi/moriri,) mortuus, 
lubiiturns, d. to die. So emoriri. Plant, 
for embri. 

Nanciscor, nactus or nanctus to obtain. 

Nascor, natus, nasciturus, u. to be bom. 

Kitor, iiixus or iiisus, nisurus, to lean 
uj)on. 

Obliviscor, oblitus, d. p. to forget. 

Paciscor, pactus, d. to bargain. Sc 
depaciscor. 

Patior, passus, r. d. to suffer, perpbtior 
-pessus. 

Fi'om plecto, to twine, come, ampleo 
tor, amplexus, d. p. complector, com- 
plexus, p. So circumplector. 

Prbficiscor, prbfectus, r. to depart. 

Queror, questus, ra. u. d. to complain. 

^Riiigor, to snarl. 

Secpior, secutus, r. d. to follow. 

Tuor, tutus, to protect. 

*Vescor, d. to eat. 

Ulciscor, ultus, m. d. p. to avenge. 

Utor, usus, r. d. to me. 


§ 175, 176. VERBS.-SECOND AND THIRD ROOTS, 


139 


Note. Deverior^ praivertor, r^verior^ compounds of uerto, are used as depo< 
Dents in the present and imperfect tenses; reverwr also> sometiines, in the 
perfect. 


FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

§ Verbs of the fourth conjugation regularly form their 

second root in iv, and their third in it; as, audio, audivfj au- 
ditiim. 

The following list contains most regular verbs of this ccnjiiga* 
don :— 


Audio, -ivi or -ii, m. u. r. d. to hear. 
*Cio, civi, to excite. Ct. cieo, § 168. 
Coiulio, -ivi tr -ii, to season. 

Custodio, -ivi or -ii, d. to guard. 
*I)onnio, -ivi or -ii, m. r. d. to sleep. 
F.rudio, -ivi o/' -ii, d. to instruct. 
Expedio, -ivi or -ii, d. to disentangle. 
Fiiiio, -ivi or -ii, r. d. to Jinish. 
*Gcstio, -ivi or -ii, to exult; desire. 
Impedio, -ivi or -ii, r. d. to entangle. 
Insanio, -ivi or -ii, to be mad. 

Irretin, -ivi or ii, to ensnare. 

Lenio, -ivi or ii, d. to mitiaate. 

MoUio, -ivi or -ii, d. to soften. 


*Mugio, -ivi or -ii, to helUno. 
Muiiio, -ivi w -ii, r. d. to fortify. 
Jlutio, -ivi, to mutter. 

Nutrio, -ivi oi' -ii, d. to nmirish. 
Piirtio, -ivi o?’ -ii, r. to divide. 
Polio, -ivi, d. to polish. 

Punio, -ivi or -ii, d. to jmnish. 
Redimio, -ivi, to crown. 

Scio, -ivi, u. r. to know. 

Servio, -ivi or -ii, m. r. d. to serve. 
Sopio, -ivi or -ii, to lull asleep. 
Stilbilio, -ivi or -ii, to establish. 
Tinnio, -ivi or -ii, r. to tinkle. 
Vestio, -ivi or -ii, to clothe. 


§ 176 . The following list contains those verbs of the fourth con¬ 
jugation which form their second and third roots irregularly, and 
those which want either or both of them. 

Remark. The principal irregularity in verbs of the fourth conjugation 
arises from following the analogy of those verbs of the third conjugation whose 
first root ends in a consonant; as, sipio, sepsi, septum. A few become irregizlar 
by syncope; as, t'wio, veni, ventum. 


Amicio, -ui or -xi, amictum, d. to clothe. 

*Balbutio, —, to stammer. 

Bullio, ii, itum, to bubble. 

^Csecutio, —, to be dim-sighted. 

*Cambio, —, to exchange. 

*l)ementio, —, to be mad. 

Efl’utio, —, to babble. 

JCo, ivi 07’ ii, itum, r. d. to go. The 
compimnds have only ii in the perfect^ 
except oben, praeo, and suheo, which 
have ivi or ii. All the compounds tcant 
the supine and perfect participles, 
ex^'ept adeo, ambio, ineo, obeo, pras- 
tereo, subco, circumeo or circueo 
redeo, transeo, and *tveneo, venii 
r. {from venum eo), to be sold. 

Farcio, farsi. fartum or farctum, to 
cram. The compounds generall'j 
change a to e; as, n'fercio, -fersi, 
-fertum, but con- ayid ef-, -larcio and 
-fercio. 

Fastidio, -ii, -itum, d. to loathe. 

*F6rio, —, d. to gtHke. 


*Ferocio, —, to be fierce. 

Fulcio, fulsi, fultum, d. to prop up. 

*Gannio, —, to yelp, bark. 

*GIbcio, —, to duck as a hen. 

*Glutio, ivi, 07’ glutii, to sioallow. 

Grandio, —, to make great. 

*GruTinio, grunnii, to gz-unt. 

Haurio, luiusi, rar. liaurii, haustum, 
rar. hausitum, hausturus, hausurus, 
u. (1. to d)'aw. 

^Ilinnio, —, to neigh. 

*lneptio, —, to trifle. 

*Lascivio, lascivii, to be wanton. 

*Llgurio, llgurii, to feed delicately. 

*1 ippio, —, r. to be blear-eyed. 

*Obedio, obedii. r. to obey. 

Pario is of the tfii/'d covjugatMn, but its 
compounds are of the fourth, changing 
a to e; as, aporio, a))erui, apertim, 
r. d. to open. So op or\o, d. comperio, 
comperi, compertum, rarely dep. 
comperior, to find out. So repcrio, 
r. d. 


140 


’ IRREGULAR VERBS. 


177, 178. 


Pavio, —, pavJtnm, to heat, 

^^Prurio, —, to itch. 

Queo, quivi or quii, quitum to be able. 
Ho *iiequ30. 

^•fRaucio, —, r. to be hoarse. 

*Rugio, —, to roar as a lion. 

Ssevio, ssevii, itum, r. to rage. 

♦ Sagio, —, to perceive keenly. 

*Salio, galui or salii, to teap. The 
aanpauiuls change a into i; as, "^absi- 
lio, —. So circuiiisilio. *assilio, -ui. 
Sodisslliu, insilio. ♦desilio, -ui or -ii. 
/So exsilio, resilio, subsilio. *trausll- 
10 , -ui or -Ivi, d. So prusilio. 

Saiio, —, ituni, r. d. to salt. 

Sancio, sauxi, sancitum or sanctum, d. 
to ratify, sanction. 


Sarcio, sarsi, sartum, d. to patch. 
SaiTio, -ivi or -ui, sarritum, d. to weed, 
hoe. 

^/Scaturio, —, to gush out. 

Seutio, sensi seiisum, r. to feel. 
S{‘j)tdio, scpflivi or -ii, rar. sSpSli, bS 
pultinn, r. d. to bury. 

Sopio, sepsi, septum, d. to hedge in. 
*Siiigultio, - -, to sob, hiccup. 

*Sirio, sitii, to thirst. 

Sulbo, -ii, -itum, d. to fumigate. 
*Tussio, —, <o cough. 

*\’agio, vagii, to cry. 

Veuio, veiii, veutum, r. to come. 
Viucio, vLuxi, viuctum, r. d. to bind. 


Note. Desiderative verbs want both the second and third roots, except 
these three;— *esurio, —^ esuritzis, r. to desire to eat; *nupturio, -ivi, to desire 
to marry; *partui-io, -Im, to be in travail. See § 187, II. 3. 


§ Deponent Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation. 


Assentior, assensus, r. d. p. to assent. 

Blandior, blanditus, to flatter. 

Largior, largitus, p. to give, bestow. 

Mentior, mentitus, r. p. to lie. 

Metier, mensus or metitus, d. p. to 
measure. 

Mblior, rnohtus, d. to strive, toil. 

Ordior, orsus, d. p. to begin. 

Orior, ortus, oriturus, d. to spying up. 
Except in the present infinitive, this 
verb seems to be of the third conjugcv- 
tion. 


Perior, {obs. whence p^ritus.) ex- 
perior, expertus, r. d. to try. opp§- 
rior, oppeitus or opperitus, d. to 
wait for. 

Partior, partPus, d. to divide. 

Potior, potitus, r. d. to obtain, enjoy. 
In the poets the present indicative and 
imperfect subjunctive are sometimes 
of the thira conjugation. 

Sortior, sortitus, r. to cast lots. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 

§ 178 . Irregular verbs are such as deviate from the com¬ 
mon forms in some of the parts derived from the first root. 

They are sum, volo, fero, Mo, f lo, eo, queo, and their compounds. 

Sum and its compoimds liave already been conjugaied. See ^ 153. In the 
conjugation of tlie rest, the parts which are irregular are fully exliibited, but 
a svnopsis only, of the other j/arts is, m general, given. Some parts of coto 
and of its compounds are wanting. 

1. Vclo is irregular only in the present of the indicative and infin¬ 
itive, and in the present and imperfect of the subjunctive. 

Rhmakk. It is made irregular partly by s^/ncope, and partly by a change in 
the vowel of the root. Iii the present infinitive also and in the imperfect sub* 
mnctive, after e was dropped, r following I was changed into /; as, veHSrt 
(vehe) vtlle ; velvrem (velrem) vcllem. 

f'reo. Indie. Pres. Infln. Perf. Indie. 

"vS'-lS, vel'-le, vol'-u-i, to be willing, to wish. 


§178. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


14] 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres. S. v6'-!o, vis, vult; 

P. vol'-u-mus, vul'-tis, vo'-lunt. ' 

Tmperf. v6-le'-bam, v6-le'-bas, etc. 

Put. v6'-lam, v6'-les, etc. 

SUB.nJNCTlVE. 

Pres, S. ve'-lim, ve'-lis, ve'-lit; 

P. v6-li'-mus, ve-li'-ti8, v6'-lint. 

Imperf. S. ver-lem, vel'-les, vel'-let; 

P- vel-le'-miis, vel-le'-tis, vel'-lent. 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Pres, vel'-le. Pres, vo'-lens. 

Per/. v6l-u-is'-se. 

Note. Volt and wlHs, for vuU and vultis, and rm’, for visne are found in Plau¬ 
tus and other ancient authors. 


Per/. vOr-c-i 

Plup. v6-lu'* e ram 

Put. perf. v6-lu'-e-r3. 


Perf. vo-lu'-€-rim. 
Plup. vol-u-is'-sem. 


2. Nolo is compounded of the obsolete ne (for non) and volo. The 
V of volo after ne is dropped, and the vowels (e o) are contracted 
into 0 . 

Pres. Indie. Pres. Injin. Perf. Indie. 

no'-lo, nol'-le, nbl'-u-i, to he unwilling. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres. S. no'-lo, non'-vls, non'-vult; P^vf. n5l'-u-i. 

P. nol'-ii-mus, non-vul'-tis, no'-lunt. Plup. nO-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf. no-le'-bam, -bas, -bat, etc. Put. perf. no-lu'-e-ri$. 

Put. no'-lam, -les, -let, etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. S. no'-lim, no'-lis, no'-lit; Perf. no-lu'-e-rim. 

P. no-li'-mus, no-li'-tls, n5'-lint. Plup. nbl-u-is'-sem. 
Imperf. S. nol'-lem, nol'-les, nol'-let; 

P. nol-le'-mus, nol-le'-tis, nol'-lent. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Present. Future. 

Sir»g. 2 no'-li; Plur. no-li -te. Sing. 2. n5-li'-t0, Plur. nbl-i-to' te, 

3. no-li'-to; no-lun'-t5 

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Pres. nol -Ie. Pres. nO'-lens. 

Perf. nol-u-is'-se. 

Note. In ncyn-m, rur^^wU, etc. of the present, non takes the place of ne, but 
1^ and r^voU also oocur in Plautus. 


142 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


§ J79 


3. M(do is compounded of magis and volo. In composition m^gis 
diops its final syllable, and volo its v. The vowels (a o) are tlien 
contracted into a. 


Pres. Indie. 
ma-lo, 


Pres. In jin. 
mal'-le, 


Perf. Indie. 
mal'-u-i, to prefer. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres. S. ma'-lo, ma'-vis, ma'-vult; 

P. mal'-u-mus, ma-vul'-tis, ma'-lunt. 
Imperf. ma-le'-bam, -bas, etc. 

Fut. ma-lam, -les, etc. 


Perf. mal'-u-i. 

P-up. ma-lu'-e-ram. 

Fut. perf. ma-lu'-e-r5. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. S. ma'-lim, ma'-lls, ma'-lit; P^'>f ma-lu'-e-rim. 

P. ma-li'-mus, ma-li'-tis, ma'-lint. PLup. mal-u-is'-sem. 
Imperf. S. mal'-lem, mal'-les, mal'-let; 

P. mal-le'-mus, mal-le'-tis, mal'-lept. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres, mal'-le. P<^rf. mal-u-is'-se. 

Note. Mdvdlo, mdvdlunt; mdvdlet ; mdvelim, mavUis^ mdvelit; and maveUem ,• 
for mdZo, indlunt, etc., occur in Plautus. 


§ 170. Fero is irrepfular in two respects:—1. Its second and 
third roots are not derived from the first, but from otherwise obsolete 
verbs, viz. tulo for fo//o, and i/ao, sup. tldtum, by aphaeresis, latum :—• 
2. In the present infinitive active, in the imperfect subjunctive, and 
in certain parts of the present indicative and imperative, of both 
voices, the connecting vowel is omitted. In the presept infinitive 
passive, r is doubled. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pres. Indie, fe'-ro, (to hear.') Pres. Indie, fe'-ror, (to he borne.) 

Pres. Infn. fer'-re. Pres. In fin. fer'-ri, 

Perf. Indie, tu'-ll, Perf. Part, la'-tus. 

Supine. la'-tum. 

' INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

S f5'-ro, fers, fert; fe'-ror, fer'-ris or -re, fer'-tur; 

P fer'-i-mus, fer'-tis, fe'-runt. fer'-i-mur, fe-rim'-i-ni, fe-run'-tur 


Imperj. fe-re'-bam. 

Fut. fe'-ram, -res, etc. 

Perf. tii'-li. 

VLup. tu'le-ram. 

Fut. perf. tu'-le-ro 


Imperf. fe-rc'-bar. 

F'ut. fe'-rar -re' -ris or -re'-re, etc. 

Perf. la'-tus sum or fu'-i. 

Plup. la'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e-ram. 

F'ut. perf. la'-tus e'-r5 or fu'-e-r8. 


1180. 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


14.' 


.riUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. fe'-rar, -ra'-ris or -rl'-re, etc. 
Jynperf. fer'-rer, -re-ris, etc. 

Perf. la' tus sim or fu'-e-rim. 

PLup. la tus es'-sem or fu-is'-scm. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres. S. fer ; P. fer'-te. Pres. S. fer'-re; P. f e-rim'-l-ni. 
pui. S. fer -to, P. fer-to'-te, 

fer'-to; fe-run'-to. Fut. S. fer'-tor, F. (fe-rem'-I-ni,) 

ler'-tor; fe-run'-tor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres, fer'-re. Pres, fer'-ri. 

Perf. tu-lis'-se. Perf. Ia'-tu8 es'-se or fu-is'-se. 

Fut. l^.'-u'-rus es'-se. Fut. la'-tum i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres, fe'-rens. Perf. la'-tus. 

Fut. la-tu'-rus. Fut. fe-ren'-dus. 


Pres. fe-nirn, -ras, ere. 
Imperj fer'-rem, -res, etc. 
Perf. tu'-le-rim. 

Plup. tu-lis'-seiu. 


GERUND, 
fe-ren'-di, etc. 

SUPINES. 

Fcftmer. la'-tum. Latter, la'-tu. 

Note. In the comic writers the following reduplicated forms are found in 
parts derived from the second root, viz. tetUi, ieluluti, tetulit, tetulerunt ; ittuUro^ 
ietulerit; letulissem, and tetulisse. 

§ 180 . FlOy ‘ to become,’ is properly a neuter verb of the third 
conjugation, having only the parts derived from the first root; but it 
is used also as a passive of /dcio, from which it takes those parts of 
the passive which are derived from the third root, together with the 
participle in dus. The infinitive present has been changed from the 
regular form fere to feri. 

Pres. Iridic. Pres. Infin. Perf. Part. 

fi'-d, fi'-e-ri, fac'-tus, to he made or to become, 

INDICATIVE. 

Pre5. 5. fi'-o, fis, tit; Perf. fac'-tiis sum or fu'-i. 

P. fi-mus, fP-tis, fi'-unt. Plup. fac'-tus e'-ram or fu'-e- ram 

impcrf. fi-e'-bam, fi-e'-bas, etc. jPuL/»er/. fac'-tus e'-r6 or fu'-^r5. 
Fut. fi'-am, tl'-es, etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Perf. fac'-tus sim or fu'-e-rim. 
Plup. fac'-tus es'-sem or fu- 


Pres. ii'-am, fi'-as, etc. 
imp. ll'-e-rem, -e -res, etc. 


144 


IRREGULAR VERBS. 


§181 


IMPERATIVE. 

Pres. Sing, fi; Plur. fi'-te. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Per/, fac'-tus. 

Fut. fa-ci-en'-dus. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres, fi'-e-ri. 

Per/, fac'-tus es'-se or fu-is'-sS. 
Fut. fac'-tum i'-ri. 

SUPINE. 

Latter, fac'-tu. 


Note. The compounds of fado which retain a, have also flo in tne passive 
ee, cakfado, to warm; passive, cakflo; but those which change a into t forn. 
the passive regularly. (Cf. fado in the list, § 172.) Yet confit^ defil, and infit 
occur. S>3 § 183, 12, 13, 14. 

/ 

§ 381. Edo^ to eat, is conjujratcd regularly as a verb of the 
third conjugation ; but in the present of the indicative, imperative, 
and infinitive moods, and in the imperfect of the subjunctive, it has 
also forms similar to those of the corresponding tenses of sum.'"— 
Thus. 


INDICATIVE. 

Present 

S. e'-do, e'-dis, e'-dit, 

(or es, est); 

P. ed'-i-mus, ed'-i-tis, e'-dunt. 

(or es'-tis), 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Imperfect. 

S. ed'-e-rem, ed'-e-res, 

(or es'-sem, es'-ses, 

P. M-e-re'-mus, od-e-re'-tis, 
(or es-se'-mus, es-se'-tis, 


ed'-e-ret, 
es'-set) ; 
ed'-e-rent, 
es'-sent). 


IMPERATIVE. 

PreSf S. e'-de, P. ed'-T-te, 

(or es; es'-te). 

Fut. S. ed'-i-to, P. ed-i-to'-te, e-dun'-tC. 

(or es'-to, es-t5'-te). 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres, ed'-e-re, (or es'-se). 
PASSIVE. 

Pres. ed'-i-tur, (or es'-tiir). 

Imperf. ed-e-re'-tur, (or es-se'-tur). 


Note, (a.) In the present subjunctive. Him, His, etc., are found, for Mam 
das, etc. 

(6.) In the compounds of ido, also, forms resembling those of smto occuj 
Amhido has the participles ambens and ambesus ; comido has comesus, comesurus 
and rarely comestuss and adedo and ex^do have adesus and exesm. 


§ 182, 183. 


DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


145 


§ 18S. Eo is in egular in the parts which, in other verbs, are 
formed from the first root, except the imperfect subjunctive and the 
present infinitive. In these, and in the parts formed from the second 
and third roots, it is a regular verb of the fourth conjugation 

Note, Eo has no first root, and the parts usually derived from that root, 
consist, in this verb, of terminations only. 

Pres. Iridic. Pres. Injin. Perf. Indie. Per/. Part. 

e'-6, i'-re, i'-vi, I'-tum, to go. 


INDICATIVE. 


Ff<es. S. e'-o, is, it; 

P. i'-mus, i'-tis, e'-unt. 
Impeif. S. I'-bam, i'-bas, i'-bat; 
P. i-ba'-mus, etc. 


Fut. i'-bo, i'-bis, i'-bit, etc. 

Perf. i'-vi, i-vis'-ti, i'-vit, etc. 

Plup. iv'-e-ram, iv'-e-ras, etc. 

Fut perf. iv'-e-ro, iv'-e-rfs, etc. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres. e'-am, e'-as, e'-at, etc. 
Imperf. i'-rem, i'-res, i'-ret, etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres. S. I \ P. i'-te. 

Fut. 2. i'-t5, i-to'-te, 

3. i'-t5; e-un'-to. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres, i'-ens, {gen. e-un'-tis.) 
Fut. I-tu'-rus, a, um. 


Perf. iv'-e-rim, iv'-e-rls, etc. 
Plup. i-vis'-sem, i-vis'-s^, etc 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres, i'-re. 

Perf. i-vis'-se. 

Fut. i-tu'-rus es'-se. 

GERUND, 
e-un'-di, 
e-un'-do, etc. 


Remark 1. In some of the compounds the forms earn. ieSj iet occur, though 
rarely, in the future; as, redenm^ redies, abiet, exiet, proaient. Istis, issem, and 
isse, are formed by contraction for ivistis, ivissem, and ivisse. See § 162, 7. 

Rem. 2. In the passive voice are found the infinitive iri, and the third per¬ 
sons singular itur, ibdtur, ibltur, Hum est, etc.; edtur, iretur, eundum est, etc., 
which are used impersonally. See § 184, 2, (a.) 

Rem. 3. The compounds of eOj including veneo, are conjugated like the sim- 

! )le verb, but most of them have li in the perfect rather than m. See under oo 
n ^ 176. Adeo, anteeo, tneo, praetor eo, svbeo, and transeo, being used actively, 
are found in the passive voice. InieUir occurs as a future passive of ineo. 
Ambio is regular, like audio, but has either anibibat or amliebai. 

Note. Queo, I r an, and nequeo, I cannot, are conjugated like eo, but they 
want tlie imperative mood and the gerund, and their participles rarely occur. 
They are sometimes foimd in the passive voice, before an motive passive. 


DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

§ 183 . (1.) Defective verbs are those which are not used 

in certain tenses, numbers, or persons. 

Remark. There are many verbs which are not found in all the tenses, numbers, and 
persons, exhibited in the paradigms Some, not originally defective, are accounted so, 
because they do not occur in the classics now extant. Others are in their nature defeo- 
tlve. Thus, the first and second persons of the passive voice must be wanting in many 
verbs, from the nature of their signification. 

13 


146 


DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


§ m 


(2.) The following list contains such verbs as are remarkable foi 
ivantin^' many of their parts: 


1. Odi, I hate. 

2. Coepi, I have begun. 
8. Meinlni, I remember. 

^qiam, j 


6. Fari, to spealc. 

7. Quaeso. J pray. 

8. Ave, ) hail, or 

9. Salve, j farewell. 
10. Apage, begone. 


11. C?do, teU, cr give me 

12. Confit, it is dmie. 

13. Defit, a is wanting. 

14. Infit, he begins. 

15. Ovat, he rejoices. 


1. Odi, coepi, and memini are used chiefly in' the perfect and in 
the other parts formed from the second root, and are thence called 
preferilive verbs. Odi has also a deponent form in the perfect 
Thus, 

Inb. perf. o'-di or o'-sus sum; plup. od'-S-ram; fut. perf. od'-€-ro. 

SuBj. perf. 6d'-e-rira; plup. o-dis'-sem. 

Inf. perf. 6-dis'-se; fut. o-su'-rum es'-se. 

Part. 6-sfi'-rus; o'-sus. 

Note 1. ExOsus and perd.^us, like dsus, are used actively. Odimt, for odit, oc¬ 
curs, M. Anton, in Cic. Phil. 13, 19: and odiendi in Appuleius. 


2. Ind. perf. coe'-pi; plup. ccep'-€-ram; fut. perf. coep'-e-ro. 

SuBj. perf. coep'-e-rim: plup. cce-pis-sem. 

Inf. perf. ccE-pis'-se; fut. coep-tu'-rum es'-se. 

Part. fut. coep-tu'-rus; perf. coep'-tus. 

Note 2. In Plautus are found a present, cccpuo, present subjunctive, 
and infinitive, ccepere. Before an infinitive passive, cceptus est, etc., rather than 
oogw, etc., are commonly used. 


8. Ini). perf. mem'-i-ni; plup. me-mIn'-6-ram; fut. perf. mS-min'-S-ro. 

SuBj. petf. me-mln'-e-rim; plup. mem-i-nis'-sem. 

Inf. perf. mem-i-nis'-se. 

Lmperat. 2 pers. S. me-men'-to; P. mem-en-to'-t6. 

Note 3. Odi and memini have, in the perfect, the sense of the present, and, 
la the pluperfect and future perfect, the sense of the imperfect and future, aa, 
fugiei atque oderit. Cic. In this respect, nbvi, I know, the perfect of nesco, to 
learn, and consuevi, I ara wont, the perfect of cotisuesco, 1 accustom myself, agree 
with odi and memini. 


4. Ind. pres, ai'-o,* a'-is, a'-it; -,-, ai'-unt.* 

- imp. ai-e'-bam, ai-e'-bas, ai-e'-bat; ai-e-ba'-mus, ai-e-ba'-tls, ai-e'-banL 

Sub J. pres. -, ai'-^, ai'-at; -,-, ai'-ant. 

Imperat. pres. a'-i. Part. pres, ai'-ens. 

Note 4. Ais with ne is contracted to ain’; like iiden\ dbin\ for vuteana, 
abisne. The comic writers use the imperfect albas, albat and aibant, which ait 
dissyllabic. 

5- Ind. pres, in'-quam, in'-quis, in'-quit; in'-qui-mus, iir'-qul-tls, in'-qui-unt, 

- ^tmp -,-, in-Hjui-e'-bat, aat/in-qui -biit;-,-,in-qni-c'-bant 

- fut. -, in'-qui-es, in'-qui-et; -,-,-. 

- jterf. -, in-quis'-ti, in' quit;-,-,-. 

Subj./ ires.-j^in'-qui-as, in'-^ui-&t; -, in -qui-a'-tls, in'-qui-anL 

Imperat. in'-que, in'-qui-to. 

0. IsD. pres. -,-, fa'-tur; fut. fa'-bbr,- fabM-tur. 

- perf. fatus est; plup. fatus eram. 

Ihperat. fa'-re. Part. /^res. fans; peyf. fa'- iis; fut. fan'-dus. 

IsFiN./>res. f a'-ri or fa'-ri-er. Gerund, gen fim'-di; abl. fan'-do. 
Supine, la'-tu. 


• l*ronounced a'-yo, a'-yunt, etc., wherever the diphthong ai is followed by a vowe 
Bee § 9, 1. 



\ 184. 


IMPERSONAL VERBS. 


u: 


Inierf ari has the forms vnterf dtur, inter/dta est, inter/dri^ inter/ans^ and 
'inter/dtus. — Ej/dri has effdbor. effabcre, effdtus est, effdtt sunt; imperat. 
effare ; effdri, effdtus, effanaus, ejfhndu; ejj'dtu. — Free/dri occurs in 
the following fonns, pne/dtur, prvt/dmur; jrree/ahantur; pra/drer; 
pra/arentur; pree/dti sumus ; pro"/dtus /uero; imperat. prat/dto, pr(B/(i> 
mino ; pree/ans, prm/dtus, jrree/andus; prce/arido. — Fr6f dri ha.S 2 rrofjtur 
pro/dta est, pro/dta sunt, pro/dlus and j/rd/ans. 

T. Ind. pres, quse'-so,-, quae'-sit; quses'-u-mus,-,-. 

Inf. pr'es. quoes'-e-re. 

8- Imperat. a'-ve, a-ve'-te; a-ve'-to. Inf. §,-ve'-re. 

Note. Aoere and salvere are often used with jubeo. 

9 Ind. pres, sal'-ve-o; /ut. sal-ve'-bis. Inf. pres. sal-ve'-rS. 

Impkrat. sal'-ve, sal-ve'-te; sal-ve'-to. 

10. Imperat. ap'-a-ge. So age with a subject either singular or plural. 

11. Imperat sing. c6'-do; pi. cet'-te/hr ced'-I-tg. Hence efidodum. 

12. Ind. pres, con'-flt; /ut. con-fl'-et. 

SuBj. 2 »'cs. con-fi'-at; imper/. con-fi'-g-ret. Inf. pyres, con-fl'-g-rl. 

18. Ind. pres, de'-fit; pi. de-fi'-unt; /ut. de-fl'’-gt. Subj. jrres. dg-fl'-&t. 

Inf. pres, de-fi'-e-ri. So ef-fi'-e-ri, a/nd in-ter-f I'-g-ri. FlaiU.; and in-ter- 
fi'-at. Lucr. 

14. Ind. pyres, in'-fit ; pi. in-fi'-unt. 

16. Ind. pyres. 6^-vat. Subj. pyt'es. o'-vet; imper/. 6-va'-rgt. 

Part, pyres, o'-vans; per/. 6-va'-tm; /ut. ov-a^tu'-rus. Gerund, 6-van'-dL 

Remark 1. Among defective verbs are sometimes, also, included the follow¬ 
ing:— Fdrem, /Ores, etc., /'ri, (see § 154, R. 3.) Ausim.ausls, ausit; ausint. Faxa 
and /axirn,/axis,/axlt; /aximus, /axitis, /nxint. Faxem. The form in o is 
an old future perfect; that in im a perfect, and that in em a pluperfect sub¬ 
junctive. See ^ 162, 7, (c.), and 9. 

Rem. 2. In the present tense, the first person singular, /tiro, to be mad, and 
dor and der, from do, to give, are not used. So in the imperative sci, cupte and 
poUe, from scio, cupno, and polleo, do not occur. 

Rem. 3. A few words, sometimes classed with defectives, are formed by 
contraction from a verb and the conjunction si; as, sis for si vis, suHis for si 
nUtis, sodes for si audes (for audies.) 


BIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ J84r. (ci.y Impersonal verbs are those which are used 
Idly in the thii'd person singular, and do not admit of a personal 
subject. 

(b.) The subject of an impersonal verb in the active voice is, for the most 
part, either an infinitive, or an infinitive or subjunctive clause; but in English 
the neuter pronoun, it, commonly stands before the verb, and represents such 
clause; as, me delectat scribere, it delignts me to m-ite. Sometimes an accusa¬ 
tive depending on an impersonal verb takes, in English, the place of a sub¬ 
ject; as, me miseret tui, I pity thee. 

1. Impersonal verbs in the active voice are conjugated in the sev¬ 
eral conjugations ]jk.e delectat, it delights; decet, it becomes; coniingit 
t happens; evenit, it happens; th is:— 


48 IMPERSONAL VERES. § 184 



1st Conj. 

2d Oonj. 

3d Conj. 

ith Conj. 

Ind. Pres. 

delectat. 

decet. 

contingit. 

evenit. 

Imp. 

delectabat. 

decebat. 

contingebat, 

eveniebat. 

Put. 

delectabit. 

decebit, 

con tin get, 

eveniet. 

Per/. 

delectavit. 

decuit. 

contigit. 

evenit. 

Plup. 

delectaverat. 

docuerat, 

contigerat, 

even€rat, 

Put. pcrf. 

delectaverit. 

docuerit. 

contigerit. 

evenerit 

Sub. Pres. ^ 

delectet. 

deceat. 

contingat. 

eveniat. 

Imp. 

delectaret. 

deceret. 

contingeret, 

e venire t. 

Perf. 

delectaverit. 

decuerit. 

contigerit, 

evenerit, 

Plup. 

delectavisset. 

decuisset. 

contigisset. 

evenissct. 

Inf. Pres. 

delectare. 

decere. 

contingere. 

e venire. 

Perf. 

delectavisse. 

decuisse. 

contigisse. 

evenisse. 


2 (a.) Most neuter and many active verbs may be used imperson¬ 
ally in the passive voice, by changing the personal subject of the ac¬ 
tive voice into an ablative with the preposition a or ab; as, 

Illi pugnant; or piigndtur ah Hits, they fight. lUi quceruni, or quaeritur ai 
Ulis, they ask. Cf. § 141, Rem. 2. 

(h.) In the passive form, the subject in English is, commonly, either 
the agent, expressed or understood, or an abstract noun formed from 
the verb; as, 

PugnMum est, we, they, etc. fought; or, the battle was fought. ConcurriUir, 
the people run together; or, there is a concourse. 

(c.) Sometimes the English subject in the passive form is, in Latin, an ob 
lique case dependent on the verb; as, .favetur tibi, thou art favored. 

The following are the forms of impersonal verbs in the several conjugations 
of the passive voice:— 

Indicative Mood. 


Pres. 

pugnatur. 

favetur, 

cuiritur. 


venitur. 


Imp. 

pugnabatur. 

favebatur. 

cuivebatur, 


veniebatur, 


Put. 

pugnabltur. 

favebitur. 

curretur. 


venietur. 


Perf. 

pugnatum est or 

fautum est or 

cursum est 

or 

ventum est 

or 


niit. 

fuit. 

fuit. 


fuit. 


Plup. 

pugnatum erat or 

fautum erat or 

cursum erat 

or 

ventum erat or 


luerat. 

fuerat. 

fuerat. 


fuerat, 


Cut.p. 

pumatnm erit or 

fautum erit or 

cursum erit 

or 

ventum grit 

or 


merit. 

fuerit. 

fuerit. 


fuerit. 




Subjunctive 

Mood. 




Pres. 

pugnetur. 

faveatur. 

curratur. 


veniatur. 


mp. ■ 

pugnaretur. 

faveretur. 

curreretur. 


venire tur 


Perf. 

pumiatum sit or 

fautum sit or 

cursum sit 

or 

ventum sit 

or 


merit, 

fuerit. 

fuerit. 


fuerit. 


Plup. 

pugnatum esset or 

fautum esset or 

cursum esset 

or 

ventum esset or 


luisset. 

fuisset. 

fuisset. 


fuisset. 




Infinitive ^Iood. 




Pres 

pugnari, 

faveri, 

curri. 


veniri, 


PerJ 

puynatum esse or 

fauttxm esse or 

cursum esse 

or 

ventum esse 

o» 


fuisse. 

fuisse, 

fuisse. 


fuisso. 


Put. 

pugnatum iri. 

fautum iri. 

cursum iri. 


ventum iri. 



§184 


IMPEKSONAL VERBS 


14^ 


3. In like manner, in the periphrastic conjugation, the neuter gen¬ 
der of the participle in dus, both of active and neuter verbs, is used 
impersonally with est^ etc., and the dative of the person; as, 
scriberidum fiiit, I have been obliged to write ; moriendum est omnihm, 
all must die. See § 162, 15, H. 5. 

liKMAKK 1. Grammarians usually reckon onlv ten real impersonal verbs, all 
cf which are of the second conjugation, viz. decei, libel, licet, liquet, rms&'i ct 
opcn-tei, pin«t, imnitet, pudet, and kedet. (See ^ 169.) Four of these, Mcei, libet, 
licet, an I liquet occur also in the third person plural, but without personal sub¬ 
jects. There seems, however, to be no good reason for distinguishing the 
verbs above enumerated from other impersonal verbs. The following are such 
other verbs as are most commonly usea impersonally:— 


(^a.) In the first conjugation:— 


Constat, it is evident. 
Juvat, it delights. 
Praestat, it is better. 
Restat, it remains. 

Stat, it is resolved. 

(h.) In the second 

Apparet, it appears. 
Attinet, it belongs to. 
DispUcet, it disjdeases: 
Dolet, it grieves. 
Miseretur, it distresses. 
Patet, it is plain. 


Vacat, there is leisure. 

Certatur, there is a con- 
tentum. 

Peccatur, a fault is com¬ 
mitted. 

conjugation:— 

Pertinet^ it pertains. 

Placet, it pleases. 

Fletur, we, etc. weep, or, 
there is weeping. 

Nocetur, injury is in¬ 
flicted. 


(c.) In the third conjugation :— 

Accldit, it happens. Miserescit, it distresses. 

Conducit, it is useful. Sufficit, it suffices. 
Contingit, it happens. Creditur, it is believed. 

Fallit, or ) it escapes me; Curritur, people run. 
Fugit me, j I do mt know. 

(d.') In the fourth conjugation:— 

ConvSnitj it is agreed Expedit, it is expedient. 

upon; it is ft. Dormitur, we, they, etc. 

Evenit, it happens. sleep. 


(e.) Among irregular verbs:— 

Fit, it happens. Praeterit me, it is un- 

Interest, it concerns. knoitm to me. 

Dbest, it is hurtful. Prodest, it avails. 


Pugnatur, a battU, is 
fought. 

Statur, they stand Jirm. 


Persuadetnr, he, they, etc. 

are persuaded. 
Pert«sum est, he. they, 
etc. are disgusted with. 
Sileto, silence is main¬ 
tained. 


Desinltur, there is cm end. 
Scribltur, it is written. 
Vivltur, we, etc. live. 


Scitur. U is known. 

Itur, they, etc. go. 
Venitur, they, etc. come. 


Refert, it concerns. 
Subit, it occurs. 
Supgrest, it remains. 


(f) To these may be added verbs signif 3 dngthe state of the weather, or the 
I pcrations of nature. The subject of these maybe Jupiter, deus, ox ccelum 
which are sometimes expressed. Ci this kind are the following;— 


Fulgurat, > it lightens. 
Fuhninat, ) 

Felat, it freezes.^ 
Frandinat, it hails. 


Lapidat, it rains stones. 

Ningit, it snows. 

Pluit, it rains. 


Tonat, it thunders. 
Vesperascit, 1 evening 
Adv^esperascit, > ap- 
Invesperascit, j proachce. 


Lapidat, ningit, and pluit are also used impersonally in the passive voice. 

18* 


150 


REDUNDANT VERBS. 


§185 


Rem. 2. Impernonal verbs, not being used in the imperative, take_ tt e sub¬ 
junctive in its stead; as, delectet, let it delight. In the passive voice, their 
perfect participles are used only in the neuter. 

Rem. 3. JiDst of the impersonal verbs vant participles, gerunds, and su 
pines; but jnenltel has a present participle, futures in rus and and the ge¬ 
rund. Pudtt and pUjct have also the gerund and future passive participle. 

Rem. 4. Most of the above verbs are also used personally, but frequently in 
a .somewhat dilVerent sense; as, ?<< TibHris inter cos et puns interessct, bo that 
the Tiber and bridge were between them. 


REDUNDANT VERBS. 


§ 185. Redundant verbs are those which have different 
forms to express the same meaning. 

Verbs may be redundant in termination; as, fahrico and fahrlfcor^ 
to frame ;—in conjugation ; as, Idvo, -are, and Idvo, -ere, to wash ;— 
or in certain tenses ; as, odi and dsus sum, I hate. 

1. The following deponent verbs, besides their passive form, have 
an active form in o, of the same meaning, but "which is, in general, 
rarely used. A few, however, which are marked r., occur more rare¬ 
ly than the corresponding forms in o. 


Abomlnor, to abhor. 
Adulor, to flatter. 
Altercor, to disjmte. 
Amplexor, to embrace. 
Arbitror, to supjme. 
Argutor, to jmate. 
Asseutior, to assent. 
Aucupor, to Imnt after. 
Auguror, to foretell. 
Aurigor, to drive a chariot. 
Auspicor, to take the aur- 
spices. 

Cachinnor, r. to laugh 
aloud. 

Comitor, to accompany. 
Commentor, to deliberate. 
Convivor, to feast together. 
Cunctor, (cont.), to delay. 
Dignor, to deem worthy. 
bepascor, to feed upon. 
tflucubror, to elaboi'ate. 


Fabricor, to frame. 
Feneror, to lend on iur- 
ierest. 

Fluctuor, to fluctuate. 
Frustror, to disappoint. 
Fruticor, to spirout. 
Impertior, r. to impart. 
Jurgor, to quarrel. 
Lacrimor, r. to weep. 
Ludificor, to ridicule. 
Luxurior, r, to be rank. 
!Medicor, to heal. 

^Icreor, to deserve. 

Motor, to measure. 
!Mis^reor, to commiserate. 
Moderor, to moderate. 
Muneror, r. to bestow. 
Kictor, r. to wink. 
Nutrior, r. to nourish. 
Obsunor, to cater. 

Opinor, to sujqwse. 


Oscitor, to gape. 
Pacificor, r. to make a 
peace. 

Palpor, to caress. 

Partior, to divide. 
Populor, to lay waste. 
Punior, to punish. 
Rumlnor, to ruminate. 
Sciscitor, to inquire. 
Sortior, to cast lots. 
Stabulor, to stable. 

Tueor, to defend. 
Turaultuor, to be in con> 
fusion. 

Tutor, to defend. 

Utor, to use. 

Urinor, to dive. 

Velificor, to set sail. 
Veneror, to reverence. 
Vociferor, to bawL 


2. The following verbs are redundant in conjugation:— 


Boo, -are, 1 
Boo, re, r.) 
Bullo, -are, ) 
Bullio, -Ire, j 
Cleo, -ere, ) 
Cio, -Ire, r. ' 
Denso, -are, 
Denseo, -ere, 
Ferveo, -ere, 
Fervo, -ere, 
Fodio, -ere, 

I Mio, -Ire, r. 


to roar, 
to boil, 
to excite. 

I to thicken. 
I to boil. 

I to dig. 


Fulgeo, -ere, 
Fulgo, -ere, r. 
Lavo, -are, 
Lavo, -ere, r. 
Lino, -ere, | 
Linio, -Ire, r. j 
Kioto, -are, 
Kic-to, -ere, 
Salo, -ere, | 
Salio, -ire, ) 
Scateo, -ere, 
Scato, 


to shine, 
to wash, 
to anoint. 


to wink, 
to salt. 


S6no,-are,K ^ 
Sono, -ere, ) 

Strideo, -ere, ) . , 

c. -1 - ’ > to creak. 

Stndo, -ere, j 

Tergeo, -ere, | , 

TerSo,-fre, j 
Tueor, -eri, ) . 


Those marked r. are rare 
ly used. 


§ 186 . REDUNDANT VERBS. 151 

Mdrior, drier , and pdtior, also, are redundant in conjugation in certain parta 
Bee in lists §§ 174 and 177. 

. ? 1. Some verbs are spelled alike, or nearly alike, but 

dider in conjugation, quantity, pronunciation, or signification, or in 
two or more of these respects. 

Such are tbs followintr:— 


Abdico, -are, to abdicate. 
Abdico, -ere, to refuse. 
Accldo, -ere, to full upon. 
Accido, -$re, to cut down. 
\ddo, -ere, to add. 

Adeo, -ire, to go to. 

Ag g€ro, -are, to heap up. 
Aggero, -ere, toheap upon. 
Allego, -are, to depute. 
Allego, -ere, to cl^se. 
Appello, -are, to call. 
Appello, -ere, to drive to. 
Ciidb, -^re, to fill. 

Caedo, -ere, to cut. 

Cedo, -ere, to yield. 

Caleo, -ere, to be hot. 
Oalleo, -ere, to be hard. 
Cano, -ere, to sing. 
Caneo, -ere, to be gray. 
Careo, -bre, to want. 

Caro, -<5re, to card wool. 
Celo, -are, to conceal. 
Caelo, -^e, to carve. 
Censeq -ere, to think. 
Sentio, -ire, to feel. 
Claudo, -ere, to shut. 
Claudo, -ere, to be lame. 
Colligo, -^e, to bind to¬ 
gether’. 

Co’iligo, -6re, to collect. 
Colo, -are, to strain. 

Colo, -ere, to cultivate. 
jJompello, are, to accost. 
Coinpello, -ere, to force. 
Concido, -ere, to cut to 
pieces. 

Concido, -drCj^ to fall. 
ilonr.cendo, -ere, to em- 
bar k. 

Conscindo, -ere, to tear 
to pieces. 

Constemo, -are, te terrify. 
Constenio, -ere, to strew 
aver. 

Decide, -ere, to fall dovm. 
pecido, -ere, to cut off. 
,i)eclpio, -ere, to deceive. 
tiesipio, -ere, to dote. 
Deligo, -are, to tie up. 
Deligo, - ere, to choose. 
Diligo, -ere, to love. 

Dico, -6re, to say.^ 

'^Ica -M8, to dedicate. 


Edo, -?re, to eat. 

Kdo, -ere, to jjublish. 
Educo, -are, to educate. 
Educo, -ere, to draw out. 
Eff ero, -are, to make wild. 
Eff ero, -re, to carry out. 
Excido, -ere, to fall out. 
Excido, -ere, to cut off. 

Fcrio, -ire, to strdke. 

Eero, -re, to bear. 

Ferior,-ari, to keep holiday. 
Frigeo, -ere, to be cold. 
Fiigo, -ere, to fry. 

Fiigo, -are, to put to flight. 
Fugio,-ere, to fly. 

Fundo, -are, to found. 
Fundo, -ere, to jxnir out. 
Incido, -ere, to fall into. 
Incido, ere, to cut into. 
Indico, -are, to show. 
Indico, ere, to proclaim. 
Inficio, -ere, to stain. 
Infitior, -ari, to deny. 
Intercido, -6re, to happen. 
Intercido, -ere, to cut 
asunder. 

Jaceo, -ere, to lie. 

Jacio, -ere, to throw. 
Labo, -are, to totter. 
Labor, -i, to glide,. 

Lacto, -are, to suckle. 
Lacto, -are, to deceive. 
Lego, -are, to depute. 
Lego, -ere, to read. 

Liceo, -ere, to be lawful. 
Liceor, -eri, to bid Jor. 
Liquo, -are, to melt. 
Liqueo, -ere, to be mani¬ 
fest. 

Liquor, -i, to melt. 

]\Iano, -are, to flow. 
Maneo, -ere, to stay. 
Mando, -are, to command. 
Mando, -ere, to eat. 

Meto, -ere, to reap. 

Metor, -ari, to measure. 
Jletior, -iri, to measure. 
Metuo, -ere, to fea'<^. 
]\Iiseror, -ari, to jrity. 
Misereor, -eri, to pity. 
!M6ror, -ari, to delay. 
Morior, -i, to die. 

Niteo, -ere, to glitter. 


Nitor, -i, to strive. 
Obsero, -are, to lock up 
Obsero, -ere, to souk 
Occido, -ere, to fall. 
Occido, -ere, to kill. 
Operio, -ire, to cover. 
Opercr, -ari, to work. 
Opperior, -iri, to wail for 
Pando, -are, to bend. 
Pando, -ere, to exterul. 
Paro, -are, to prepare. 
Pareo, -ere, to appear. 
Pario, -ere, to bi’ing foi'th 
Pario, -are, to balance. 
Pendeo, -ere, to hang. 
Pen do, -ere, to weion. 
Percolo, -arCj to fliter. 
Percdlo, -ere, to adorn. 
Permaneo, -ere, to re¬ 
main. 

Permano, -are, to flout, 
through. 

Praedico, -are, to publish. 
Praedico, -ere, to foretell 
Prbdo, -ere, to betray. 
Prodeo, -ire, to come forth. 
Recede, -ere, to retire. 
Recido, -ere, to fall back 
Recido, -ere, to cut off. 
Reddo, -ere, to restore. 
Redeo, -ire, to return. 
Refero, -re, to bring hack 
Referio, -ire, to strike back 
Relego, -are, to remove. 
Relego, -ere, to read over 
Sedo, -are, to allay. 
Sedeo, -ere, to sit. 

Sido, -ere, to sink. 

Scro, -ere, to sow. 

Sero, -ere, to entwine. 
Succido, -ere, to fall un¬ 
der. 

Succido, -ere, to cut down 
Vado, -ere, to go. 

Vador, -ari, to bind ovei 
by bail. 

Veneo, -ire, to he sold. 
Venio, -ire, to come. 
Venor, -ari, to hunt. 
Viiicio, -ire, to bind. 
Vinco, -ere, to conquer. 
Volo, -are, to fly. 

Volo, velle, to be willing. 


152 


DERIVATION OF VERBS. 


§187 


2. Different ver js have sometimes the same perfect; as, 


Aceo, acui, to he sour. 
Acuo, acui, to sharpen. 
Cresco, crevi, to aroio. 
Cernt, crevi, to decree. 
Fulgeo, fulsi, to shine. 


Fulcio, fulsi, to prop. 
Luceo, luxi, to shine. 
Lugeo, luxi, to mourn. 
!Mulceo, mulsi, to soothe. 
Mulgeo, mulsi, to milk. 


Paveo, pavi, to fear. 
Pasco, pavi, to feed. 
Pendeo, pcpenai, tolmc 
Peudo, pependi, to wcig} 


To these add some of the compounds of sto and sisto. 


8. Different verbs have sometimes, also, the same supine or perfect 
participle; as, 

Frloo, frictum, to rub. Pango, pactum, to drive Patior, passus, to suffer. 

I'rlgo, frictum, to roast. in. T&neo, tentum, tmhold. 

M^eo, mansum, to r&- Paciscor, pactus, to bar- Tendo, tentum, to stretch, 
main. gain. Verro, versum, to brush. 

Mando, mansum, to chew. Pando, passum, to extend. Verto, versum, to turn. 


DERIVATION OF VERBS. 


§ 18T. Verbs are derived either from nouns, from adjec¬ 
tives, or from other verbs. 


I. Verbs derived from nouns or adjectives are called denomina- 
lives. 


1. (a.) Active denominatives are generally of the first conjuga¬ 
tion ; those which are neuter, of the second. They are usually formed 
by adding respectively o and eo to the root; as. 


From Nouns. 

Actives. Neuters. 


Armo, to arm., (arma.) 

Fraudo, to def raud, (fraus.) 
Nomino, to name, (nomen.) 
Numero, to number, (numerus.) 


Floreo, to bloom, (flos.) 

Frondeo, to produce leaves, (frons.) 
Luceo, to shine, (lux.) 

Vireo, to flourish, (vis.) 


From Adjectives. 

Albo, to whiten, (alhus.) Albeo, to be white, (albus.) 

Celebro, to frequent, (celfiber.) Calveo, to be bald, (calvus.) 
Libero, to free, (liber.) Flaveo, to be yeHow, (flavus.) 


(ft.) Sometimes a preposition is prefixed in forming the deriva- 
Uv’e; as, 

Coacervo, to heap together, (acervus.) Exstirpo, to extirpate, (stirps.) 

Excavo, to excavate, (cavus.) Illaqueo, to insnare, (laqueus.) 

2. Many deponents of the first conjugation, derived from nouns, expresi 
Qie exercise of the character, office, etc., denoted by the primitive; as, arcft> 
hector, to build; comitor, to accompany; furor, to stesd; from architectut, 
cdmes, and fur. 

3. Such as denote resemblance or imitation are called imitatives ; as, cor»J* 
cor, to imitate a crow, from cornix; Ch’cecor, to imitate the Greeks. Some o! 
ihese end in isso ; as, patrisso, to imitate a father. 


n. Verbs derived from other verbs are either frequentativeSf in, 
teptives, desideratives, diminutives, or intensives. 


1187 


DERIVATION OF VERBS. 


153 


1. Frequentatives express a repetition, or an increase of the action 
Expressed by the primitive. 

(a.) They are all of the first conjugation, and are formed by adding 
0 to the third root; as, domo, (ddmit-) ddmito. So adjuvo, adjuto , 
dlco^ dicto; gero^ gesto. In verbs of the first conjugation, at of the 
root is often changed into it ; as, cldmo, to cry, (clamdt-') clamito, to 
cry freciueiitly. 

(6.) A few frequentatives are formed by adding tf.n to the first 
root of the primitive; as, ago (%-) dglto. So Ldleo, Idtito; nosco 
%i,scXto; quoero, qucerito. 

(c.) Frequentatives, from primitives of the second, third, and fourth conju* 
gntions, sometimes serve again as primitives, from which new frequentatives 
are fonned; as, dlco, dicta, diciilo; cuvro, curso, curslto; venio, venio, vcntlto. 
Sometimes the second or iutennediate fonii is not in use. 

(d.) Some frequentatives are deponent; as, minitor, from minor {mindU)\ 
versor, from vertu {vers-). So amplexor, sector, Idquitor, from amplector, seguor, 
and Idquor. 

{e.) ^Vllen verbs of this class express simply an increase of the action de¬ 
noted by the primitive, they are, by some grammarians, called intensives. 

2. Inceptives, or inchoatives mark the beginning of the action or 
state expressed by the primitive. 

(a.) They all end in sco, and are formed by adding that termina¬ 
tion to the root of the primitive, with its connecting vowel, which, in 
the third conjugation, is i; as, cdleo, to be hot; calesco, to grow hot. 

So Idbo, (lire), tabasco: ingemo, (ere), ingemisco; obdormio, (ire), obdormisco. 
Hisco is contracted for liiasco, from liio, (are). 

(b.) ^lost inceptives are formed from verbs of the second conjugation. 

(c.) Some inceptives are formed from nouns and adjectives by adding cuco 
or esco to the root; as, pucrasco, from puer ; juvenesco, from juvt>nis. 

Note. Inceptives ai*e all neuter, and of the third conjugation. See § 173. 

Some verbs in sco, which are not inceptives, are active; as, disco, posco. 

3. Desideratives express a desire of doing the act denoted by the 
primitive. 

(a.) They are formed from the third root, by adding urio ; as, 
coeno, to sup, (coendt,) coendturio, to desire to sup. 

(b.) Desideratives are all of the fourth conjugation. See § 176, Note. 

(c.) Verbs in iirio, having u long, are not desideratives; a.s, prurio, ligiirio. 

4. Diminutives denote a feeble or trifling action. They are formed 
by adding illo to the root of the primitive; as, conscribillc, to scribble, 
ti’om conscribo. 

They are few in number, and sre all of the first conjugation. 

5. Irdensives denote eager action. They are usually formed by 
adding so, esso, or isso to the root of the primitive; as, fdee^o, to act 
earnestly—from fdcio. 

So cdpesso, incesso, from cdpio and inceda Concfipisco, to desire greatly, though 
In form an inceptive. Is in its significatioc, an intensive. 

Note. Verbs of al] these classes have sometimes simply the meaning of theii 
orinaitives. 


154 


COJIPOSITION OF VERBS. 


§ 188 , 189 . 


COMPOSITION OF VERBS. 

§ 188 . Verbs are compounded variously":— 

1 . Of a noun and a verb; as, (e.l>fico, helJUjero^ lucrif dcio. See § 103, R. 1. 

2. Of an a'Jjective and f. verb; as, ompUfico, multipLico. 

8. Of two verbs; as, cakfdcio, made/dcio, patifdicio. 

Rem. In verbs of this class, the first part, Avhich is a verb of the second con¬ 
jugation, loses its final o; the second part is always the verb fdcio. 

4. f)f an adverb and a verb; as, benefdcio^ mdledlco^ sdtdgo^ nolo, negllc^o. 

6. Of a preposition and a verb; as, adduco, excdlo, std/repo, discerno 

scjiingo. 

6. Of a preposition and a noun, as, pernocto, irretio. 

§ 180 . In composition with particles, the vovrels a and e and 
the diphthong ce in the radical s}'llable of the simple verb are often 
changed in the compound. 

1. The following simple verbs in composition change a into e :— 

Arceo, Carpo, Farcio, Jacto, Pario, Patro, Spargo. 

Candeo, Damno, Fatiscor, Lacto, Partio, Sacro, Tracto. 

Capto, Fallo, Gradior, Mando, Patior, Scando, 

Exc. A is retained in amando, preemando, desnero, and retracto ; pradamno, 
and pertraclo sometimes also occur. A is also changed into e in occenio from 
canto, and anhelo from halo; comperco also is found. 

2. The following, in the first root, change d and e into X; viz. 

ago, cado, egeo, emo, frango, pango, premo, rego, sedeo, specio, tango. 

3. These change d and e, in the first and second roots, into X; viz. 

salio, to leap, sapio, taceo, and tenec. 

4. These change d into X, and ce into I, in all the roots; viz. 

habeo, lacio, lateo, placeo, statuo; csedo, hedo, and quasro. 

5. The following change d, in the first root, into i, and in the third 
root into e; viz. 

cano, capio, fateor, jacio, rapio, and apiscor. 

Exc. (a.) A is retained m cirmmdgo, perdgo, satdgo; antehdheo, posfJdbeo 
Upnngo, repango,^ compldceo, and jierpldceo. Ocedno and reedno also sometimes 
jeeur. E is retained in coemo, circtimsedeo, and superskleo. Anteedpio and an- 
\lcipo are both used; so also ai*e superjdcio and sipeijicio. 

(6.) Cdgo and dego are fonned, by contraction, from con, de, and dgo; demo 
pi'dmo and sumo, from de, 2 )ro, sub, and hno; 2 >rcebeo, and perhaps debeo, from’ 
pres, de, and hdbeo; 2 ^ergo and surgo, from per, sub, and rego. 

Note 1. Fdcio, compounded with a prepnsiticn, changes d into i in the first 
‘octj and into e in the third; as, ojf'icio, nffeci, affectum. Some corrpounds of 
fdevo v;itb nouns and adjectives, cliange d into f, and also drop i before o, and 
are cf the first conjugation; as, significo, UeU/ico, magnlfico. S 2 Jecio f rms 
some compounds in the same manner; as, conspicyn^ and suspicor. 

Note 2. Lego, compounded with con, de, di, e, inter, nec. ar. i se, changes i 
foto f, in the first root; as, colli go, negligo, etc.; ()ut with cut, 2 >t(B, 2 ^er, rc, sub 
fttid irnns, it retains e; as, allego. 

Note 3. Caico and salto, in composition, change a into u ; as, inculco, insnlto 
Plaudo changes au into 6; as, ex 2 )lddo; except cp>plaudo. vlWio changes ax% 
into e in obedio ^ Cauio, clawl.o, and qwltio, (b'op a • as, accuso, recludo, percutio 
/wro changes a into e in dcj6'’o and pejSro, but dejuro, also, is in use. 


h 190 , 191 


ADVERBS. 


155 


Note 4. In the compounds of cdveo, mdneo, and trdho, & remains unchano-ed 
and so also does ce in the compounds of hcei'eo. ' . ” 

Note 5. The simple verbs with which the following are com 
pounded arc not used:— 


Defendo, Irapedio, 
Offendo, Imbuo, 

Experior, Compello, (-are,) 
Expcdio, Appello, (-are,) 


ConfQto Instigo, 
Refuto, Impleo, 
Ingruo, Compleo, 
Congruo, Renideo, 


Connlveo, 

Percello, 

Induo, and some 
Exuo, others. 


For the changes produced in prepositions by composition with verts see 
^ 196. 


PARTICLES. 

§ 190. 1. Particles are those parts of speech which are 

neither declined nor conjugated. They are divided into four 
classes— adverbs^ jprexpositions, conjunctions, and interjections. 

Note. A word may sometimes belong to two or more of these classes, ac¬ 
cording to its connection. 


ADVERBS. 

2. An adverb is a particle used to modify or limit the mean¬ 
ing of a verb, an adjective, or another adverb; as. 

Bene ei sapienter dixit, he spoke well and wisely; Canis egregie Jidelis, a re- 
mc-^kably faithful dog; Nimis valde lauddre, to praise too much. Compare 
S 277,R. 1. 

3. Adverbs, in regard to their signijication, are divided into va¬ 
rious classes; as, adverbs of place, time, manner, etc., and some be¬ 
long to either class according to their connection. 

4. In regard to their etymology, adverbs are either primitine or 
derivative. 

Remark. Among primitive adverbs are here classed not only such as can¬ 
not be traced to any more remote root, but also aU which are not inc udod in 
the regular classes of derivative adverbs hereafter mentioned. 

PRimilVE ADVERBS. 

§ 101 . The primitive adverbs are few in number, when com¬ 
pared with the derivatives, and most of them are contained in the 
tbllowing lists marked I, II, and Ill. 

I. Adverbs of Place and Order. 

&deo, so favj us far. alicubi, somewhere. ahquoversum, towards 

4dhuc, to tills place. alicunde, from some some place. 

adversus, ) opposite, place. aliunde, frcm (mother 

idversum, \ over against, alio, to another place. place. 

exadversus,—urn, ) towards. aliqua, in some way. circa, j 

^\[^, by ana her way. ^liorsvcm, toioards a noth-(^ircum, ) 

WiAS, in another place. - er place. ciicVceT, on every side, 

elsewhere. to some place. c\rcwmc\x<ib,allaround. 


156 


ADVERBS. 


§19L 


citra, on t'iw fid* 
citro, hither. 
contra, over affoinst. 
coram, hefoi'e. 
dehinc, henceforth. 
deinceps, sticcessively. 
deinde, after that. 
denique, finally. 
denuo, again. 
deorsum, downward. 
dextrorsum, toward? the 
rifiit. 

«5, mat way. 
aadem, the same way. 
eo, to mat place., thither. 
eodem, to the same jdace. 
exinde, after that. 
extra, vnthout. 
extrins?cus,^ro7n without. 
f eras, out of doors. 
fons, without. 
hac, this way. 
hactenus, thus far. 
hie, here. 
hinc, hence. 
hue, hither. 
htieusqug, thus far. 
horsura, hithei'ward. 

Ibi, there. 

Ibidem, in the same place. 
illae, that way. 
illie, there. 
illine, thence. 
illo, thither. 

Ulorsum, thitherward. 
illue, thither. 
inde, thence. 

indidem, from the same 
place. 

Remark 1. (a.) The 


quersutr ? whitherward? 


infi’a, beneath. 

inibi, in that place. 
mtrinfiecus, from within. 
intra, intro, I 
introrsum, > within. 
intus, ) 
istac, that way. 
istie, there. 
istine, thence.^ 
isto, istue, thither. 
juxta, near, alike. 
necubi, lest any where. 
neutro, to neither side. 
neutriibi, to neither place, turn, then, in 
to neither side. place 

I no where. 
nusqnam, ) 

penitus, within. 
pone, post, behind, back 
porro, onward. 


to every place. 
I backward, 


quovis, 
quolibet 
retro, 

reti-orsimi, > 
rursum,_ } 
sieubi, if any where. 
sieunde, iffrom any place 
sinistrorsum, toward the 
left. 

snbter, beneath. 
super, supra, alHyo€,ontcp. 
sursum, upward. 

the next 


uspiam, 

usquam. 


proeul, far. 
prope, proptSr, near. 
prorsum, forward. 
prbtinus, onward. 
qua V in which way ? 
quaqua, ) what way 
quacumque, ) soever. 
quaque, wheresoever. 
qnalibet, j; 
quavis, ) an 

quo? whither? 

quoquo, ) whither- 
quoeumque, ) soever. 
quoqubversus, toward 
every side. 

inten-OKative adverbs of plaee. 


et, 1 

^ ’ I any i 
I every 

ultro, ' 
when 
elibet, I 
evis, >' 
Ique, ) 


wherever, 
j wheresoever 


where, 

where. 


ubicuinque, | 
tibiubi, 
ubillbet, 
ubique 
ublvis_ 

ultra, ultro, beyond. 
unde? whence? 
undelibet, 
undevis 
undlqu 
undeunde, ) whence- 
undeeumqu§, ( soever. 


from every 
where. 


somewhere, 
any where. 
usque, all the way. 
usquequaque, in all ways 
utrimquCj on both sides. 
utru? which way? 
utrobi ? in whim jdace ? 
utrobique, in both places. 
utroque, to both sides. 
utrbquevei'sum, Urnard 
both sides. 

uhi ? where ? und^ 1 


whenee ? quo ? whither ? and qua f in what way ? have relation to other ad¬ 
verbs formed in a similar manner, thus constituting a svstein of adverbial cor* 
relatives similar to that of the pronominal adjectives. J:ee § 139, 5, (3.) 

(A.) As in the case of the pronominal correlatives, the interrogative and 
relative forms are alike, beginning with u or qu. The demonstratives are formed 
from is, which is strengthened by dem, and the indefinite from dliquls. The 
general relatives and the general indefinites or universa'ls, like those of the pro. 
nominal adjectives, are made, the former by doubling the simple relatives oi 
by appending to them the termination cumque, ‘ soever,’ and the latter by ad¬ 
ding qu^, vis, or Ubet. Thus : 


Interrog. 

Demonstr. 

Relat. 

Gen. Relat. 

Indefin. 

Gen. Indefin. 

tibi? 

ibi, 

ibidem, 

ubi. 

ubi ubi, 
ubicumque. 

alicubi, 

ubique, 
ubi vis, 
ubilibet. 

xindS? 

indC, 

indidem, 

unde. 

undeunde, 

undecumque. 

aJicunde, 

undiquS, 

undevis, 

undelibet. 

quo? 

eo, 

eodem. 

quo. 

quoquo, 

quoeumque. 

aliquo. 

quovis, 

quolibet, 

qua? 

ea, 

eadem. 

qua. 

quaqua, 

quacumque. 

ahqug.. 

quavis. 

qualib^t 




§191. 


ADVERBS 


151 


(c.) To thfse answering .0 vMf maybe added nulUbi, and inibi^ th! 
latter being a strengthened fonn of ibi. In like manner aliunde^ utrimqui^ in 
Irimicus, and extrinsecus may be added to those answering to undif and dlu, tf 
those answering to ywo? So also to utro f answer utroque and neutro. 

id.) The demonstratives ibi, inde, and to are used only in reference to rela¬ 
tive sentences which precede; but more definite demonstratives are formed 
fion the pronouns uic, iste, and ille, answering in like manner to ubif iindii 
and qixH These together with the ])receding correlatives are, in the following 
table, arranged respectively under their several uiterrogatives ubil undef qttbi 
^ud ? and qmrsam s —'I'hus : 


iibiV 

unde ? 

QUO? 

qua? 

quorsura ? 

liic. 

bine. 

hue. 

liac. 

liorsum. 

istic, 

istinc, 

istiic, 

istac, 

istorsuin, 

i'lic. 

illinc, 

illuc, 

iliac, 

iliorsuin. 

ibi. 

indr*. 

ed. 

ed. 


ibidem, 

indhlera, 

ernlera, 

eadem, 


alibi, 

aiicLibi. 

aliunde, 

alio. 

alia. 

aliorsum. 

aUcuudS. 

ahquo. 

all qua. 

aliquuversum. 


(e.) Hie, hinc, hue, refer to the place of the speaker; istic, istinc, istuc, to the 
place of the second person or person addressed; and illic, illinc, illuc, to that of 
the third person or the person or thing spoken of. Cf. § 207, R. 23, (a.) and (d.) 

if.) The inten'ogative adverbs ubi, unde, quo, qua, etc. are often used with¬ 
out a question, simply as adverbs of place; as, In earn partem ituros, atque ibi 
futuros Ilelvetios, ubi eos Qesar constitaisset. 

{(/.) In consequence of a transfer of their meaning, some of the adverbs of 
place, as, hlc, ibi, uU, liinc, inde, hactenus, etc., become also adverbs of time 
and some of them are used also as conjunctions. 

n. Adverbs of Time. 


actutum, immediately. 
abhinc, from this time. 
aded, so long (as). 
adhuc, until now, still. 
alias, at another time. 
aliquamdiu, for awhile. 
aliqiumdo, at some time. 
allqudties, several times. 
ante, | before, 
antea, \ jn-erioitsly. 
a • t c 1 1 a c, formei h/. 


bis, twice, (see § 119). 
circitcr, about, near. 
eras, tomorrow. 
cum cr quum, when. 
deinceps in succession. 
deindear ieni, ) thereupon, 
exini.e or exin, ) afterward. 
clehinc, frimi this time. 
demum, at length. 
denique, lastly. 
did, long. 

dudum, jrreriously. 
eousqu'e, so long. 
here or heri, yesterday. 
hie, here, hereupon. 
bine, from this time, since. 
aodie, to-day. 
hi, then, thereupon. 
isntidem. now and then, 
repeatedly. 


illico, immediately. 
hide, after that, then. 
interdiun, sometimes. 
interim, meanwhile. 
iterum, again. 
jam, now, already. 

I long ago. 
uiTicliiclviTn^ J 

jam jam, presently. 

j:impridem, long since. 

mOdo, just now. 

mox, soon after. 

nondum, not yet. 

nonnumquam, sometimes. 

nudius tertius, three days 

ago. 


nunc, now. 
numquam, never. 
nfqier, lately. 
ohm, formerly. 
parum[)er, \fyr a short 
paulisp' r, ) time. 
p'.rendie, two days hence. 
porro, hereafter, in fu¬ 
ture. 

post, postea, afencards. 
postliac, hereafter. 
postridie, the day after. 
pildem, long since. 
pridie, the day before. 
protinus, instantly. 


quamdiu ? haio long f 
quandd? when! 
quandocvnnque, lohen- 
ever. 

quandoq le, at some time. 
quiiter, four times. 

.J how long? 
quousque r j ^ 

quomlam, formerly. 
quotidie, daily. 
quotiesV how often f 
quum or cum, when. 
rursus, again. 

S£epe, often. 
semel, once. 
semper, always. 
statim, immediately. 
sub inde, immediately, now 
and then. 
tamdiu, so long. 
tamlem, at length. 
tantisper, for so long. 
ter, thrice. ■ 
toties, so often. 
turn, tunc, then. 
ubi, when, ns soon as. 
umquam, ever. 
usque, until, ever. 
ut or uti. as, aet mon as 
when. 


14 




ADVERBS. 


le')8 


§ 191 


HI Adverbs of Manner^ Quality^ Degree, etc, 


&doo, 80 , tx) that degree. 
adinuduin, very 7iiuch. 
uliter, otherwise. 
ceu, like as, 
curV wliyf 

duritaxfit, only, at least. 
fetium, also, tru.y, yes. 
feliamnunc, { , , „• 7 „ 

6ti.mtum, I 

I almosL nearly. 
fcrrno, ) ’ ^ 

forlas.se, perhaps. 

fnistra, in cam. 

patis, freely. 

ham I, nut. 

hamlquaquam, by no 
means. 

hucusque, so far. 
Identidem, constantly. 
immo, nay, on the con¬ 
trary. 

Ita, so. 

Item, jnst so, also. 

Itidem, in like manner. 
juxta, equally, alike. 
rnagis, more. 
modo, 07ily. 

050 or ne, truly, verily. 
ue, not. 

Dediim, much less. 
nempe, ti'uly, forsooth. 
neqiulquam, ) by no 
neutuiiiam, ) means. 
nimlrum, certainly, to be 
sure. 


n'mis, ) 


too much. 


Illinium, j 
non, not. 

omniiio, altogether, only. 
pa 0 iie, almost. 
pal am, openly. 
pariter, equally. 
pariim, too Utile. 
paulatim, by degrees. 
peiiitus, toholly. 
ptn'inde, / just as, 
proinde, j as though. 
perquam, verg much. 
plerutuque, fur the most 
jxirt, commonly. 
potius, rather. 
porru, moreover, then. 
prseter, beyond, except. 
prsesertim, particularly. 
profecto, truly. 
prope, almost, tiear. 
IDrdpemodum, almost. 
provsus, wholly. 
quam, how much, as. 
quamobrem, wherefore. 
quare? whyj whereforef 
quasi, as if, as it were. 
quemadmodum, as. 

quomddo V how f in what 
manner f 
qnoque, also. 
rite, duly. 
saltern, at least. 


separatdy. 


so as, as. 


sane, truly. 

Sirs, 1 

Siltius, rather. 
scdicet, truly, to uM. 
s< cus, otherwise. 

Scor.'sum, 
seorsus, 
sic, so. 
sic lit, \ 
sicuti, ’ 
simul, together. 
suigillatim, one by one 
solum, only, alone. 
tarn, so, so much. 
tamquam, like, as if. 
tantopert', so greatly. 
tantum, so mvLch, only. 
taiitummodo, only. 
temere, at random. 
una, together. 
usguequaque, in allpoiKts 
in all ways. 

su- 

utique, at any raU, cer- 


utpote, as, inasmuch cw. 
valde, vet'y much. 
v«"'l, even. 

velut, ) as, Uke as, fen 
voluti, ) example. 
vicissim, in turn, again. 
videlicet, clearly, to wit. 
vix, scarcely. 


Rem. 2. Adverbs denoting quality, manner, etc., are sometimes divided into 
those of, 1. Quality; as,, bene, nude. 2. Certainty; as, certe, plane. 3. Con- 
tingence; as, forte. 4. Negation; as, haud, non, ne, iinmd. 5. Atlinnation; as, 
ncB, qnidem, utique, nempe. 6. Swearing; as, hercle. 7. Explaining; as, videli¬ 
cet, utpote. 8. Separation- as, seoi’sum. 9. Joining together; as, simul, una. 
10. Interrogation; as, curf qudref 11. Quantity or degree; as, sutls, dded. 
12. Excess; as, perquam, maxi me. 13. Defect; as, par um, pvene. 14. Prefer¬ 
ence; as, potius, sdtius. 15. Likeness; as, lid, sic. 16. Unlikeness; as, dlitir. 
17. Exclusion; as, tarHm, solum. 

Ri .M. 3. A^on is the ordinarv Latin negation. TTaud signifies either ‘ not at 
all,’ or ‘ not exactly.’ It is used by the comic ana later writers in all combina¬ 
tions, but in the authors of the best age its use is more especially limited to its 
eonnection with adjectives and adverbs denotiim a measure; as, hawi multum, 
hiud magnum, haud parvus, haud mediocris, haud paulo, haud prOcul, haudlonge. 
especially/uutc? sdwe in connection witli other words; as, haud sdne facile, res 
kaiul sdne dijticilis, haud sdne intelligo ; also haud quisqnam, haud umquam, haud 
quiiquam. >Vith verb« hand is scarcely used until Livy and 'I'acitus, except in 
the common phrase haud seio an, which is equivalent to nescio an. — Ne , (or ni ) 
is the i)rimitive Latin negative particle, signil'ying m> or not. It is used hi this 
Sense aiuLas an adverb, (a) with quldem to make an emphatic negation f tlie 
word standing between them ^ as, ne in oppidis quidem. not even in the towns 
i) in composition as in nescio, nlfas, neuter etc.; (c) with imperatives auc. 


§191. 


ADVERBS. 


159 


Bub’unctivC5> used as imperatives; as, Ne pueri, ne tanta animu Tjunieadte betta 
y rjp So, also, in Avishes and asseverations; as, Ne id Jiiplter Sin^ret, may Ju¬ 
piter forbid it. Liv. Ne rlvain, si seio, inav I die, if I know. Cic.; and in con- 
cessiAe and restrictive clauses; as, Ne J'aevit, suppose tliere was not. Cic. 
8mi miseru ordes in j uribus ierdrii, ne Hits sanyuineni nostrani laryinntur, only 
let them not, etc. Cic. So duni ne^ dunmwdo ne, vibdo ne, dum qttideni ne ; and in 
intentional clauses Avitli ut. — Imnio, as a negatiA’e, substitutes something 
Etronger in the place of the preceding statement, Avliich is denied; as. Causa 
iyilur non bona est f Inuno optima, sed, etc. Cic. It may often be transiited by 
‘ nay,’ or ‘ nay even.’ 

Kem. 4. Cluldeni giA^es particul.ar emphasis to a Avord or an idea, and the;i 
answers to our ‘certainly’ or ‘indeed,’ but frequently, especially Avith a pio* 
Eoun, it merely adds emphasis. Kquldem, Avhich is considered as a CGm-- 
uound of e<jo ‘Am\ (luidem, is used exclusi\'ely in this sense by Cicero, Virgil, imd 
llorace, but by otlier and particularly by later Avriters it is used like 
Nevipe, ‘ S' rely,’ is cfteu used ironically, Avdien A\'e refute a person by com 
cessions AA'hi.h he is obliged to make, or by deductions. In other connecticns 
it may be translated ‘ namely.’ 

Rem. 5. Sic, ltd, tarn, as also tanidpere, and dded signify so.’ 
Sic is more particAilarjy the demonstratiA’’e ‘so,’ or ‘thus’; as, sic se res hiibet. 
Jta defines or limits more accurately, and is equivalent to our ‘in sxich a man¬ 
ner,’ or ‘ only in so far’ ; as, ita defendito, ut nemlnern Icedas. Frequently, how- 
eA'er, ita has the signification of sic, but sic has not the limiting sense of ita.— 
Tam, ‘so much,’ generally stands before adjectiA’^es and adverbs, and in¬ 
creases the degi'ee ; before A'OAvels tantopere is generally used instead of tani .— 
A.deo, ‘to that degree’ or ‘point,’ increases the expression to a certain end or 
result. Hence it foi'ms the transition to the conclusion of an argument or to 
the essential part of a thing; and Cicero employs it to introduce the proofs of 
what he has preA’iously alleged; as. Id adeo ex ipso sendtus consulto coynoscite, 
and ahvays in such case puts adeo after a pronoun. 

Rem. 6. Umquam, ‘ever,’ and ‘■usquam, ‘somewhere,’ like qmsquam, 
require a negation in the sentence, and thus become equivalent to nuniquam 
and nusquoni. A negatiA'e question, hoAvever, may supply the place of a nega¬ 
tive proposition; A?,, nuin tu eum umquam mdisti^ — Usjiiani, like quispiam, is 
not negative, but is the same as dlicubi, but strengthened, just as quispiam is 
the same as aliquis. So, also, qudpiam is used afiirmatively, and i^ndquam nega¬ 
tively.— .lam, AA’ith a negatiA’e, ansAvers to our ‘longer’; as, Ntidl Jam spiro, 
I no longer hope for an A’tiling. When used to connect sentences it signifies 
‘further,’ or ‘ noAV.’— tlsque is commonly accompanied by the prejiositions 
ud, in, ab, or ex. It rarely signifies ‘ ever and anon ’; as, Naturam expellas 
fared, tdmen usmie recurrel. Hor.— Nuper, mddo, and mox are relative 
and inlefinite.— Diidum, ‘ previously,’or ‘ before,’ in relation to a time Avhich 
has just passed aAA'ay, may often be trans.ated ‘just before.*— Jamdudum 
signifies ‘ long before,"’ .or ‘long since.’ With the poets jamdudum contains the 
idea of impatience, and signifies ‘Avithout delay,’ ‘ fortlnvith ’; as, .Jamdudum 
vumlte panas. Virg.— Tandem, ‘at length,’ also expresses the impatience 
with Avhich a question is put. 

Rem. 7. Tunc is ‘then,’ ‘at that time,’ in opposition ton««c, ‘noAv’; 
Til m is ‘then,’ as the correlative of quum, ‘Avhen ;’ as, quum omnes adecsent, 
turn ille exorsus est dicere, Avhen all Avere present, then he began to speak. 
Witheut a relative sentence ium signifies ‘ hereupon,'or ‘thereupon’; but a 
relative sentence may always be supplied. The sa-ne difierence exi.jts I etw iea 
etiam nunc and etiavi turn, ‘still,’ o. ‘yet’; and betAvecn nunc ipsuni ni)d;w/n tT>- 
$um; quummcMme And tummaxime, ‘just,’ or ‘even then’; for etiam nunc, nunc 
psum and quum maxi me refer to the present; but etiamtum, tumipixm, mid 
lummaxime, to the past. 


160 


DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 


§ 192 


DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 

f IAclvei'bs are derived from nouns, adjecdves, pro 
aouns, and participles. 

L From Nouns. 

1. Of these a few end in hn (generally citini), and denote mannei 
as, 

grfq^lirn^ in herds; memhrdtim^ limb by limb; vicissdtim, or more frequently 
iicuiun, by turns; from grex, inemOruni, tuid vicis. 

2. Some end in i/u.s, and denote origin or manner; as, 

cmUt'is, fnnn lieaven; funditas, from the bottom; rddicitus, by the rootsffrorn 
ccdun^ J’lmdus, and radix. 

3. Some are merely the different cases of nouns used adverbially; 
as, 

(a.) Some advei'bs of time; as, noctu, ctiu, tempdrS or temp6i% initio, 

py'incipid, mddo. — (b.) Adverbs of place; as, fdrls, fdrds. —(c.) Adverbs ol 
maimer; as, sponte, jf'orte, grdtis or grdtiis, ingrdtils, vulgd, partim. 

11. From Adjectives and Participles. 

By far the greater number of derivative adverbs come from adjec 
tives and participles (present and perfect), and end in e and lev. 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of the second 
declension, are formed by adding e to the root; as, 

(xgre, scarcely; alls, high; llberp, freely; longe, far; mlsere, miserably; plxnc, 
fully; learnedly; elegantly; from mger, altus, liber, longus, miser, 

pliniis, docius, and orndtus. Bend, well, is from bonus, or an older form benus. 

Remark. A few adverbs in e differ in meaning from their adjectives; as, 
tdne, certainly; valde, very; from sdniis, sound, well; and vdlidus, strong. 

Exc. 1. A few adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of 
the^econd declension, add iter, itiis, hn, or dtini to the root; as, 

ndriter, actively; ant'K/uitiis, anciently; dlvinitus, divinely; jirivdtim, privately; 
ttidfim, after vonr manner; singiddtim, singilldtim, sigilldtim, or singnltim, sever¬ 
ally; ciesim, carpthn, sensim, sldtim, etc. from ndvus, antapius, dlcinus, privdtus, 
tuiis, singuli, rcesus, carptus, etc. 

Exc. 2. Some adverbs are formed with two or more of the above termina¬ 
tions with the same meaning; as, dure, diiriter ; jirme, fir miter; nave, ndvitdr; 
large, hirgiter ; luculente, luculenter; iurbfdtntd, tin-hidenter: &o caute emd cautim; 
hdmiine, huindniter, and humdnitus ; and jniblicitus. 

2. Adverbs derived from adjectives and participles of the third de¬ 
clension, are formed by adding iter to the root, except when it ends 
in t, in which case er only is added; as, 

c-crilSr, fihi\r])]y; fiidlciter, happily; (urpiter, basely;— eleganfer, elegantlv 
prudcntdr, prudently; dmanier, lovingly; hastily; from deer, fieilx 

iu7pis, elegnns, prudevs, dmc ns, and prdperans. So also from the obsolete dUi 
for alius, and pi’dpis, (neuter jn'dpe), come dliter and projMr for jn^Ojntdr. 

Exc. From audax comes by svncope audacter ; from fioi'ils comes foriitir 
^rom omni$, ornnino; from uber, ubertim; and from neguam, ncquiter. 


192. 


DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 


161 


3. From tlie cardinal numerals are formed numeral adverbs in 
tes; as, 

quinquifs, c’icies, from quinqu^ and dcceni. So tdties and qudtiis, from tdt and 
qadt. See § 119. 

4. Some adverbs are merely certain cases of adjectives. Such 
are, 

(a.) Ablatives in o, from adjectives and participles of the second declension; 
as, dW, quickly; continuo, iminediately; falsa, falsely; cribro, frequently ; 
m^riW, deservedly; unexpectedly; ybdwitd, by chance; auspiaato, 

auspiciously; ojnsuUo, designedly; and a few in d from adjectives of tlie first 
declension; as, rec^d, straight on; und, together. In like manner, sud¬ 

denly, frora 7’e/ieHs; and jjerepre or pereyri, from pereyer. 

(6.) Nominatives or accusatives of the third declension in the neuter singu¬ 
lar; as, facile, difficile, recens, sublime, and impuue ; and some also of the 
second declension; as, ccierum, plerumq'ue, miUtum, plurlinum, pdtissimum, pau- 
lw;i, nimium, pdriiin, and the numeral adverbs, j)rlmum, ileruvi, tertium, quav' 
ittm, etc. which have also the tennination in 6 , and so also postremum ( 6 ), and 
ultimum ( 6 ). The neuter plural sometimes occurs also, especially in poetry; as, 
multd yeniere; tristid ululdre; crebrd ferlve. 

(c.) Accusatives of the first declension; as, hlfariam, trifariam, multifanam, 
omnifai'iam, etc. sell, partem. 

Note 1. The fonns in e and o from adjectives of the second declension have 
generally the same meaning, but vere and vero have a somewhat different 
sense. Vere, truly, is the regular adverb of verus, true; but vero is used in 
answers, in the sense of ‘ in truth ’ or ‘ certainly.’ In this use it is added to the 
verb used in the question; as, adfmstlne herl in convivio ? The affirmative an¬ 
swer is eyo vero adfui, or without the verb, eyo vero, and negatively, minima 
vero; and as vero thus merely indicates a replv, it is often untranslatable into 
English.— Certo, on the other hand, usually talces the meaning of the adjective 
certiis, Avhile certe often signifies ‘ at least ’; as, victl sumus, aut, si diynitas vinci 
non 2 ) 6 test, fracti certe; but certe is frequently used in the sense-of ‘ certainly,’ 
especially in the phrase certe scio. 

Note 2. Some adjectives, from the nature of their signification, have no 
corresponding adverbs. Of some others, also, none occur in the classics. Such 
are dmens, dlriis, discors, yndrus, rudls, trux, imbellis, immdbiUs, and similar com¬ 
pounds. In place of the adverbs formed from vetus and fidus, vetuste and an- 
tlque are used for the fonner, and fideliier for the latter, from velustus, antiquua, 
and fldills. 

m. From the adjective pronouns are derived adverbs of place, 
etc (See § 191, Kern. 1.) 

Remark. The terminations d and uc denote the place icliitJier, instead of the 
accusative of the pronoun with a preposition; a?, ed for ad eum Idcum; hue for 
nd hunc Idcum; the terminations ae and me denote the place which j 

? and ic, the place in ichicli; and d and dc, the place by or ihrouyli which; as, 
Bd; rid or pa/ie being understood. 

IV fa.) A.few adverbs are derived from prepositions; as, suhfus, beneath; ft-om 
eai • propter, near; from pvCqyd. if.) Mordicus and versus are derived from th€ 
rorbs mordeo and verto. 

F.kmark. Diminitives arc formed from a few adverbs- as, clam, clanallum; 
p'imulum ; celirids, celeriuseiiLe; soepiiis, scepiuscide ; bene, belle, bellis- 

sime, 


14* 


169 


COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. 


§i9a 


COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. 

§ 193. Adverbs are compounded variously : — 

1. Of ai. adjective and a nonn; as, postrldie, qndtuJli’, mngndpi^r^^ m^xtrrd^ihH 

evm',ndp^ UmiOpere, taiituiiimOdo, soluiiiiiiOdo^ multiniddiSy quCtc^iTHS— 

of po$terd die, via grid ojiere, etc. 

2. Of a pronoun and a noun; as, hddie, quare, qvdm6d6 —of hoc die, >^d re, cto. 

8. Of an adverb and a noun; as, nudius, sa’peiium^ro —of nunc dies, etc. 

4. Of a preposition and a noun; as, covuiiinus, eminus, illico, dbiter, e^tiemplS^ 
f^xnam, postuu^dd, adviOdwn, prdpedievi —of con, e, and maims ; in and Idci*; etc. 

6. Of an adjective and a pronoun; as, dlidqui or dlidquin, ceteroqui or 
quin —of alius and qui, i. e. dlid quo {mddo), etc. 

6. Of a pronoun and an adverb; as, aliquamdiu, alicuhi —of dliquis, did, and 
iibi ; nequdquam and nequicquam —of ne and quisquam. 

7. Of two verbs; as, lllcet, scilicet,vidrlicel —of i?’e, scire, videre, and licSt. 

8. Of an adverb and a verb; as, qudlibet, ubivis, undelibet. So deinceps —from 
dein and cdprio; duntaxat —from dum and taxo. 

9. Of a participle with various parts of speech; as, deorsum, dextrorsum, 
horsum, retrorsum, sursum —of de, dexter, hie, retro, super, and vorsus or versus. 

10. Of two adverbs; as, jamdudum, quamdiu, iamdiu, cummaxime, tummaxime 
quousque, sicut. 

11. Of a preposition and an adjective; as, denuo, imprimis, cumprimU, ap- 
prime, incassum —of de ndvd, in primis, etc. 

12. Of a preposition and a pronoun; as, quapropter, posted, intered, jyroetired, 
hactenus, qudtenus, dliqudtenus, edtenus —of propter quoe, post ea or earn, etc. 

13. Of a preposition and an adverb; as, dbhinc, ddhuc, derepente, intiribi, in- 
terdiu, interdum, perscepe. 

14. Of two or three prepositions; as, insdpir, pi'otinus, iride, dein, deindi, 
perindS. 

15. Of a conjunction and an adverb; as, necubi, sicubi —of ne, si, and dUcibi, 

16. Of an adverb and a termination scarcely used except in composition 
as, ibidem, pdrumper, quanddcumque, ubique, utcumque. 

17. Of three different parts of speech; as, forsttdn —of fors, sit, dn, quenwd- 
mddum, quamobrem, etc. 

18. Of an adverb and an adjective; as, nimlrum, xitpdti. 

19. Of an adjective and a verb; as, quantumvls, quantumlibit. 

Signification of certain Compound and Derivative Adverbs. 

1. The adverbs continuo, protinus, stdtim, confestim, sublto, rSpente and der^ 
pente, actutum, illico, llicet, extemplo, signify in general ‘directly’ or ‘imme¬ 
diately’; but, strictly, cmih'nwo means, ‘immediately after’; stdtim, ‘without 
delay’; confestim, ‘directly’; sublto, ‘suddenly, unexpectedly’; protlnut, ‘far¬ 
ther/viz. in the same direction, and hence, ‘with(»ut interruption’; ripenU 
and deripente, ‘at once,’ opposed to sensim, ‘gradually,’ (see Cic. Off. 1, 33); 
acifdum, ‘ instantaneously,’ i. q. edilem actn; illico, and more rarely ilicet, ‘ forth¬ 
with, the instant,’ (Virg. yEn. 2, 424, Cic. Mur. 10); so also extemplo, (Liv. 41,1), 

2. Pr<r.sertim, prmipne, imprimis, enmprimis, opprhne, are generally trans- 
la tC’,! ‘ princii)ally,’ but, properly, y)7-ceiyrt<m is ‘ particularly,’ and sets forth a 
aanicular circumstance with emphasis; pnecipue, from pn'tcdpio, has reference 
X) privilege, and signifies ‘ especially ’; imprimis and cumprimis, signify ‘ prin¬ 
cipally,’ or ‘ in preference to others ’; and apprlme, ‘ before all,’ ‘ very.’" is uae(i 


§ 194, 195. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.—PREPOSITIONS. 163 


In pnro Latin to qualify and strengtlien only adjectives, properly 

Bignifies ‘ according to measure,’ tliat is, ‘ in as great a measure as can bo,’ 
‘very, exceedinely.’ With numerals it denotes a})proximation, ‘about.’ Ad 
mCkium nihil and admddum nullus signify ‘notliing at all’ and ‘no one at all.’ 

3. Modo is the usual equivalent for ‘only.’ Sohjm, ‘alone,’ ‘merelv,’ points 
to something higher or gi'eater. Tnntnin, ‘only,’ ‘merely,’ intimates that some¬ 
thing else was expected. 'I'he significations of solum and ((iiitum are strei gth- 
ened by ni6do, forming sohimmddo and UmtummOdo. luntaxot, ‘ only, solely,’ is 
net joined with verbs, h ahso signifies ‘at least,’ denoting a limitation to a 
particular point. S(dfe7ii al§o signifies ‘ at least,’ but denotes the 'eductiou of a 
demand to a minimum; as, Evipe, mihi hunc dulortm, aut minue saltern. 

Frustrd implies a disappointed expectation; as in frustra smeipere labdres. 
Keqvicquam denotes the absence of success, as in llor. C;u*m. 1, 3, 21. IncoB- 
Bum, composed of in and cassum, ‘ hollow ’ or ‘ empty,’ signifies ‘ to no purpose ’; 
03, tela incassum jacere. 

COIMPAIIISON OF ADVERBS. 

§ 104:. 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives with the termi¬ 

nations e and ter^ and most of those in o, are compared like their 
primitives. 

2. The comparative, like the neuter comparative of the adjective, 
ends in ius ; the superlative is formed from the superlative of the ad¬ 
jective by changing us into e ; as, 

diirey du'rius, durisslme ; facile, facilius, f aciMmb; acriUr, dcnHs, dcerrlmd; 
rdrd, rdrius, rdrissime; mdture, mdturius, mdturisslme or nidturi'xme. 

0. Some adverbs have superlatives in d or um; as, meritissirnd, pluHmum, 
pi'imd or prlmum, pdtissimum. 

i. K the comparison of the adjective is irregular or defective, (see 
§§ 125, 126), that of the adverb is so likewise; as, 

bend, melius, optime; mdU, pejus, pessime; pdrum, minus, minlme; muitum, 
plus, pluidmum; —, prius, primd or primum; —, dcius, dcissime; —, detenus, 
deternme; —, pdtiiis, pdtisslme or qjdtissimum ; meritd, —, meritissimo ; satis, sd- 
tius, —. Mdqls, maxime, (from magnus,) has no positive; nupdr, nuperrime, has 
no comparative. Prdpe, prdpius, proxime: the adjectiveha.s no posi¬ 
tive in use. The regular adverb in the positive degree from uber is wanting, 
its place being supplied by ubertim, but uberius and uberrime are used. So in- 
Btcad of tristiier, triste, the neuter of tristis, is used, but the comparative tiistida 
13 regular; and from sdcvis only socordius, the comparative, is in use. 

6. Z>/m and though not derived from adjectives, are yet compared;—■ 
din, diuiins, diutisslme; siepe, scepius, saepissime. A comparative tempenus, from 
ttmpdri or tempdrl, also sometimes occurs. So seeds, secius. 

6. Adverbs, like adjectives, are sometimes compared by prefixing 
mdgXs and maxime ; as, mdgis dperte, maxime accomrnoddLS. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

1. A preposition is a particle which exprer,.ses the 
relation between a noun or pronoun and some preceding word. 

Vs. Prepositions express the relations of persons or things, either to ona 
another, or to actions and conditions; as, dmor mens erga te, my love to vard 
Jiee; eo ad te, i go to tnee 


164 


PE .^POSITIONS. 


§195 


3. Some prepositions have the noun or pronoun which followfi 
Ihem in the accusative, some, in the ablative, and some, in either the 
accusative or the ablative. 

4. Twenty-six prepositions have an accusative after them:— 


ad, to, {owar-ds, at, for. 
adversus, ) against, 
adversuin, ) totvards. 
ante, btfore. 

apful, at, mth, near, be¬ 
fore, in presence of. 

circa, ) around, about. 
circum, 1 

circiter, abouU near. 

1 on this side, within. 
citra, ) ’ 

contra, against, opposite. 

erga, towards, opposite. 


extra, wiihtmt, beyond. 
iniVti, under, beneath. 
inter, between, among, 
during. 
intra, within. 

^uxta. near to, next to. 
ob, for, on account of, 
before. 

penes, in the power of, 
with. 

per, through, throughout, 
by, during. 
pone, behiiid. 


post, after, since, behind, 
praeter, jnist, before. 

against, beyimd, beskUti 
prope, near by, nigh. 
propter, near, on accowoi 
of. ^ , 

sfeciuidum, after, behiad, 
along, next to, accord¬ 
ing to. 

supra, above, over. 
trails, over, beyond. 
ultra, beyond. 


5. Eleven prepositions have after them an ablative:— 

a, 'i de, from, dorm from, of- prae, before, for, on nc- 

&b, > from, after, by. ter, of, concerninq. count of, in comparison 

abs, j e, ) out of from, of by, with. 

absque, unthout, but for. ex, ) after. pro, before, for, instead 

ccram, before, in pres- palam, before, in pres- of according to. 

ence of. ence of sine, unthout. 

cum, until. tenus, as f ar as, up to. 

6. Five prepositions take after them sometimes an accusative, 
and sometimes an ablative:— 

clam, without the knowl- sub, under, about, near. siipSr, above, over; upon 

edge of subter, under, beneath. concerning. 

In, in, on; to, into, against. 

Remark 1. Prepositions are so called, because they are generally placed be¬ 
fore the noun or pronoun whose relation they express. They sometimes, how¬ 
ever, stand after it. Cf. ^ 279, 10. 

Rkm. 2. A is used only before consonants; db before vowels, and frequently 
before consonants, though rarely before labials: aZis is obsolete, except in the 
phrase abs te. 

E is used only before consonants, ex before both vowels and consonants. 

Rem 3. rt;rs?/.s, which follows its noun, (cf. § 235, R. 3), usque, and exndb- 
versus ( um), sonietinies take an accusative, simul and prOcul, an ablative, and 
are tlien by some called prepositions. Hecus, with an accusative, occurs iu 
Pliny and Cato. 

Rem. 4. Many of the prepositions, especially those which denote place, ara 
also used as adverbs. Cf. ^ 191. 


Signification and Use of certain Prepositions. 

Reit. 6. {a.) Ad denotes direction, and answers to the questions WhitherV 
and Till when? as, Venio ad te. Sophocles dd stimmam senectutem trageedias 
fecit. Cic. Ii also denotes a fixed time; as, adhdram, at the hour; ad tenipiu 
illiquid ficere ,—at the right time. But sometimes ad temjms denotes ‘ for a 
time.’ Sometimes, also, dd denotes the approach of time; as, dd lucem, dd t?ca. 
pZ'i'am, dd extriimum, towards day-break, etc.; and also the actual arrival of a 
wime; as, dd prlma signa veris profectus, at the first sign of Spring. 


195. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


165 


(fc ) In answer to the question T<here? signifies ‘near’ a place; ns, orf 
^he:n esse ; dd porias urhis; purjna navdlis dd TenMum. It is used like fi*, ‘ at,’ 
In such phrases as dd (edem Bellnme, or, witliout dd Opis; negotium hubere 

ad pyrtimi. — With numerals it may he rendered ‘ to the amount ol ’ or ‘ nearly 
dd ducentds. It is also used like ciriiter without any case, as, Occisis da 
bominnm millihus qwituor. —The phrase omnes dd utiuiii signifies, ‘ all without 
exception,’ ‘ every one.’ 

(c.) Ad often denotes an object or purpose, and hence comes its signification 
of ‘ in respect to ’; hdmo dd labores belli implyer. It is also used in figura¬ 
tive relations to denote a model, standard, or object of comparison, where wc 
say ‘ according tOj’ or ‘ in comparison with ’; as, dd modum^ dd eJ)i(jiem^ dd siuvhr- 
itudinem, dd speciern alicujus rei; dd normavi, etc. dd voluntdtem alicujns fnc^re 
aliquid. Ad verbuvi signifies, ‘ word for w'ord ’; nihil dd hanc rera, ‘ nothing in 
comparison with this thing.’ 

Rem. 6. A pud expresses nearness to, and was primarily used of persons as 
dd was applied to things. Aimd also denotes rest, and dd direction, motion, etc. 
Hence it signifies ‘with,’ both literally and fignrativelv. With names of places 
It signifies ‘near,’ like dd; as, Male pitf/ndfum est dpiid Onidium. Hut in early 
writers, is used for in,’ as, Auyudas di)iul urbetn NOlavi extlaetus est, —at 
Nola.— With 7ne, te, se, or the name of a person, it signifies ‘at the house’ or 
‘ dwelling of’; as, Fuisti dj/ud Lcecam ilia node. —Before appellatives of persons 
having authority in regard to any matter, it is translated ‘ before,’ ‘ m the pres¬ 
ence ol ’; as, dpud judices, dpud proetdreni, dqmd populum. —It is also used with 
names of authors, instead of in with the name of their works; as, Apud Xeno- 
phontem, but we cannot say in Xenophonte. 

Rem. 7. Adv ersus, contra, and era a signify ‘ opposite to.’ Chnfrd de¬ 
notes hostility, like our ‘ against ’; ergd, a friendly disposition, ‘ towards ’; and 
adversus is used in either sense. But ergd sometimes occurs in a hostile sense. 

Rem. 8. Intrd signifies ‘ wfithin,’ in regard both to time and place. In re¬ 
gard to place itjs used in answer to both questions W’hereV and Whither V It 
denotes time eiflier as an entire period, when it is equivalent to ‘during,’ or as 
unfinished,’ when it corresponds with ‘ under,’ or ‘ before the ex})iration of.’ 

Rem. 9. PSr, denoting place, signifies, ‘through,’ and also ‘in,’ in the sense 
of ‘ throughout.’—With the accusative of persons it signifies ‘ through,’ ‘ by the 
instrumentality of.’ It often expresses the manner; jjer litet'as, by letter; 
per injuiiam, pd'scelus, with injustice, criminally; pd' h’arn, from or in an¬ 
ger; per simulatidnem, 2 )€r speciejn, jjer causavi, under the pretext; occo- 
eidnem, on the occasion; jt»er in a ridiculous manner.—It sometimes 

signifies ‘ on account of ’; 2 )er valetudinem, on account of iUness.— Per me 
licet, —so far as I am concerned. 

Rem. 10. .4 or db, denoting time, is used with nouns, both abstract and 
concrete, with the same general meaning; as, d prvnd estate, db ineunte cetdte, 
db initio cetdtis, db infantid, d pueritid, db adolescentid ; and, d puiro, d pueris, 
ah cuMescentulo, db wfante, all of which signify ‘from an early age.’ So also 
d parvis, d qnu'VidOj d tenero, d teneris ungiaculis, which expressions are 
Greek origin.— Ab xnitio, d principio, d prlvvo, properly denote the space of time 
from the beginning down to a certain j)oint; as, Urbem Jtdmam a principio re- 
ges habuere, i. e. for a certain period after its foundation. But frequently db 
nitio is equivalent to initio, in the beginning.—The adherents or followers of a 
school are often named from its head; as, d Plntone,db Arhtotde, etc.—In comic 
writers di is sometimes used instead of the genitive; as, an:illa db Amlrid.-^ 
Ina fi gurative sense it signifies ‘with regard to’; as, db equitdtu Jirmus. — With 
names of persons it also denotes relationship, and signifies ‘on the side of’; 
«,s, Augiistus d matre ^fngnum Pompeium artissimo contingrbat grddu, —on hifi 
mother’s side.— Sldtini, cwifestim, recens db alupid re, ‘ immediately after.’— 
Ab itinere aliquid facere, to do a thing while on a journey. 

Rem. 11. Cum is used not only to designate accompanying persons but also 
accomi'Hnying circumstances; as, cum aliquo Ire; hastes cum detnmeuto sunt 


166 


PREPOSITIONS. 


§195 


dcpulsi. It si^ifies also ‘ in,’ i. e. ‘ dressed in ’; as, cum tunica puUd sedera 
With verbs implyino; liostility, it sifjpiifies -with,’ in the sense of ‘ against’; aa. 
cum (Ulquo btlluni yerert; cuvi aliquo quhi to complain of or against. 

Rem. 12 . De commonly signifies ‘ concerning,’‘ about.’ Hence traditur di 
Bomcro is very dill'erent from hutdltur ab Homh'o ; in the fonner, Horner is the 
object, in the latter the agent.—In the epistolary style, when a new subject 
is touched upon, de signifies ‘ in regard to,’ ‘ as respects ’; as, de frdt.'c^ conjick 
Ua esse, ut semper volui. —It often signifies ‘down from’; and also ‘cf,’ in a 
partitive sense; as, hlimo de pirbe, unus de popido. —From its partitive signifioa- 
tion arises i.s use in denoting time; as, in comitium denocle venire, i. e. even bj 
night, or spending a part of the night in coming; hence nndtd de nocte, medid 
de nocte, ‘ in the depth of night,’ ‘ in the middle of the night.’—In other cases, 
also, it is used for ex or db; as, Audivi iioc de parente rneo puer. Cic.; especially 
in connection with emere, meredri, comhicere. Trinmpbum nyh'e de Gatlis and 
ex Gnllis are used indiscriminately—Sometimes, like secundum, it signifies ‘ in 
accordance with,’ ‘after’; as, de consilio meo: —sometimes it denot(!S the man¬ 
ner of an action ; n?,, denuo, de inteyro, afresh; de mpruviso, unexpectedly; di 
industHd, purposely:— (pid de re, qua de causa, qulbus de causis, for which reason 
or reasons. 

Rem. 13. Bx. 'from,’ ‘out of.’ Ex equo jniyndre, to fight on horseback; 
BO ex itinere scriwre: ex adverso, e reyidne, opposite; ex omni pai'te, in or from 
all parts.— Ex vino or ex aqua coquere or bibere, i. e. ‘ with wine,’ etc. are medi¬ 
cal expressions.—It sometimes denotes manner; as, ex animo lauddre, to praise 
heartily; exsententid and ex voluntdte, according to one’s wish.—It is also, like 
de, used in a partitive sense; as, unus e plebe, unus e miiliis. 

Rem. 14. In , with the accusative, signifying ‘ to ’ or ‘ into,’ denotes the 
point towards which motion proceeds; as, in cedem ire; or the direction in 
which a thing extends; as, decern q^edes in oltitudlnem, in height; so, also, it 
denotes figuratively the object towards which an action is directed, either 
with a friendly or a hostile design; as, amor In patrinm, odium in vinlos cives, 
in milites liberdlis ; oratio in oliqutm, a speech against some one.—It also de¬ 
notes a purpose; as, pecuinn data est in rent miUtdrem. Pax data Fiiilippo In 
has Icyes est, on these conditions.—With Avords denoting time, it exjjresses a 
predetennination of that time^ like ‘for’; as, invitdre aliquem in posterum diem, 
for the folloAving day. In diemvivere, to live only for the day; in futurum, 
in postdrum, in reliquum, for the future; in ceternum, in perpetuum, forever; 
f7t preesens, for the ])resent: with all these adjectives ienipus may be supplied. 
In with sinyuli, expressed or understood, denotes a distribution, and may be 
translated ‘to,’ ‘for,’ ‘on,’ ‘over.’— In sinyulos dies, or simply in dies, Avith 
comparatives and A^erbs denoting increase, sigjufies ‘ from (lay to day.’— 
In some phrases it denotes the manner of an action; ns, servilem in mSdum, 
yi'irum in modum ; so in universum, in general; in commune, in common; 
In vicem, alternately, or, instead of; in alicujus Idcum aliquid petcre, in tlic 
place, or, instead of. 

Rem. 15. In, Avith the ablative, signifies ‘in,’ ‘on,’ ‘upon,’ and answers to 
the qu88>-ion. Where? When a number or quantity is indicated, it signifies 
among,’ and is equiA'alent to inter. It may sometimes be translated ‘ with,’ 
or ‘ notAvithstanding ’; as. In summu copidt oratdrum, nemo tdmen (Jcerdnis 
laiidem (Bqndvit .— With nouns AA'hich by themselves denote time, such as 
wculum, annus, rnensis, dies, nox, vesper, etc., the time, in ansAver to the ques¬ 
tion When? is expressed by the sim{)le ablatiA’e; but in is used AAdth Avordo 
which acquire the signification of time only by such connection; as, in cor^ 
wldtu in principio, in bello; but eA^en AAnth these in is sometimes omitted, but 
IS usrallv retained in connection Avith the gerund or gerundive; as, in leyendo, 
in leyendis libns. In preesenti, or in pruesentid, signifies ‘at the present mo¬ 
ment,’ ‘ for the present.’ —Est in eo, ut aliquid jiai signifies that som.‘thing is or 
the point of happening. 


§196. 


PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 


167 


PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

§ 10^. Most of the prepositions are used also in forming com 
pound words. In composition, they may be considered either in 
reference to their form, or their force. 

I. (a.) Prepositions in composition sometimes retain their final 
consonants, and sometimes change them, to adapt them to the soumla 
of the ini ial consonants of the words with which they are compound¬ 
ed. In some words, both forms are in use; in others, the final con¬ 
sonant or consonants are omitted. 

1. J, in composition, is used before m and v; as, dmdveo, dvello, and soma- 

times before/ in dfui and dfdrt^ for abfai and abfore. Ah is used before 
vowels, and before </,/ /j, / l, n, and s; as, nbjuru, abrOrjo, etc. occurs 

only before c, q, aiul ^; as, abscundo, absque, abslineo. In asptllo, asptrnor, and 
asporto, the b of abs is dropped; in aufero and aufiujio, it is changed into u. 

2. Ad remains unchanged before vowels and before 6, d, /<, m, v. It oftcu 

changes d into I, n, r, s, t, before those letters respectively; as, r.c- 

ce(h, affero, aggredio7', alleyo, annitor, appOno, arrigo, assequor, atlollo. Its d is 
usually omitted before s followed by a consonant, and before gn; as, cwper^o, 
asplcio, agnosco^ agndtus. Before g, the d is changed into c ; as, acqulro. 

3. _ Ante remains unchanged, except iu antidpo and antisto, where it changes 
e to »; but antesto also occurs. 

4. dr cum in composition remains unchanged, only in circumeo and its do* 
rivatives the m is often dropped; as, circueo, circuitus, etc. 

6. Cum (in composition, com), retains m before b, m, p; as, combibo, comn 
miUo, cmnpdno: before /, n, r, its m is changed into those letters respectively; 
as, colligo^ comutor, conipio: before other consonants, it becomes n; as, con- 
duco, conjungo. Before a vowel, gn or m is commonly omitted; as, co^^o, 
coopto, cognosco, cohabito; but it is sometimes retained; as, comedo, cdmes, c6mi- 
Ur. In cogo and cdgito a contraction also takes place; as, cddgo, cdgo, etc. In 
(omburo, b is inserted. 

6. Ex is prefixed to vowels, and to c, h, p, q, s, t; as, exeo, exigo, excurro, ex~ 
hibeo, expedio. Before /, x is assimilated, and also rarely becomes ec; as, eff'S- 
ro, or ecfero. S after x is often omitted; as, exequor, for exsequor; in excimum 
(from exscindo), s is regularly dropped. E is prefixed to the other consonants; 
as, 3ibo, edlco, except in eclex. Before these however, with the exception of n 
and r, ex is sometimes used; as, exmdveo. E is sometimes used before p; as, 
epdto. 

7. In remains unchanged before a vowel. Before h, m, p, it changes n into 
m; as, vnbuo, immitto, hnpdno: before I and r, n is assimilated; as, illigo, irretio'. 
before on, n is omitted; as, igndrm. Before the other consonants m is un¬ 
changed. In some compounds, in retains d before a vowel, from an ancient 
form indu; as, indigena, indigeo, indolesco. So ahciently induperdtor, for tj?i- 
mrd'jor. 

8. Inter remains unchanged, except in intelligo and its derivatives, in which 
r belbre I is assimilateJ. 

9. Ob remains unchanged before vowels and generally before consonants. 

Its b is assimilated before c, / ; as, occm/to, officio, oggnnnio, oppito. Id 

&tniW), b is dropped. An ancient Ibrm obs, analagous to abs for cd), is implied 
hi obioltsco, from the simple verb oko, and iu osttndb, for obstendo. 

30. Per is unchangea in composition, except in pdlicio and sometimes hj 
velluceo, in which r is assimilated before 1. In pejero, r is dropped. 

'.1. Post remains unchanged, except in potneerium and pomerididnua, ic 
which st is droDoed. 


169 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. . § 1&7 

12. P;tE and prceter in composition remain unchanged, except that pr<B is 
shortened before a vowel. Ci. ^ 283, II Exo. 1. 

13. Pro has sometimes its vowel sliorter ed, (cf. ^ 285, 2, Exc. 5) and, to avoid 
hiatus, it sometinw)s takes d before a vowel; prodeo, p7-ddesse, }n’ddlgo. 
Before verbs beginning with r and I, jjrc sometimes becomes por and poi; na, 
pcrriiyo, polliceor. 

14. Sab in composition remains irnchanged before a vowel and before 6, d, i 
I, n. s, t, V. Before c, J\ g, w, ?■, its b is regularly assimilated; as, succcM, 
mperOy siuifpiv, suminoceo, supplito, s7irinpio. Before c, and t, it sometimaa 
takes tlie form sus from stibs^ analogous to abs and obs; as, susdpio, siisperido, 
mf:ollo: b is omitted before s, followed by a consonant; as, STispicw. 

15. Subier and siiper in composition remain unchanged. 

16. Trnns remains unchanged before a vowel. It omits s before s; as, 
transceiido: in trudo, trudaco, trdjicio, and trdno, ns is commonly omitted. 

(/>.) The followinpr -words are called inseparable prepositions, be* 
cause they are found only in composition:— 

AmbI or amb, (Greek around, cibout. Red o?’ re, again, back. Ve, not. 

Dls 01 ' dl, asunder. Se, apart., aside. 

1. Amb is always used before a vowel; as, ambages, ambarvdlis, ambedo, amr 
tngo, ambio, ambui'O: except ainpulla, umicio, and dnhelo. Before consonants it 
has the forms ambi; as, anihidens, amh^fdriam, ambwium: am; as, amplector, 
amjMto : or an; as, anceps, anfractus, ampuro. 

2. i)ts is prefixed to words beginning -with c, p, q, s before a vowel, t, and h; 
as, disctdio, dispono, disquiro, distendo, dishiasco: but disertus is formed from dis~ 
sero; before/, s is changed into /; as, differo: in dirimo, nnd diidbeo {from 
dis hdbeo), s becomes r. 1)1 is prefixed to the other consonants, and to s when 
followed by a consonant; as, aiduco, dlniitio, distinguo, displcio. But both dls 
and d\ are used before j; as, disjungo, dijudico, and before r in rumpo. 

3. ]iM is used before a vowel or h; re before a consonant; as, rhbhno, redeo, 
rSdhlbeo, rediyo, r^dbleo, red undo; — rejicio, repono, rererlor. But red is used be¬ 
fore (/o; i\s, reddo. The connecting vowel « is found in redivlrus; and in the 
poetical forms relligio, relliqiuce, and sometimes in reccldo the d is assimilated 
In later writers re is sometimes found before a vowel or h. 

4. Se and ve are prefixed without change; as, secedo, securus; vegrandis, 
vecoi's. 

II. Prepositions in composition usually add their own 
gignification to that of the word with which they are united; but 
Bometimes they give to the compound a meaning ddferent from that 
of its simples. The following are their most common significations:— 

1. A, or a/;, away, from, down; entirely; un-. With verbs it denotes re¬ 
moval, disappearance, absence; ns, aufero, abutor, absurii. With adjecti'ves it 
denotes absence, j)rivation; as, dnaens, absoniis. 

2. AfZ, to, toward; at, by. In coinposition Avith verbs dd denotes (a) metion 
Ic, (not Vito), as, accedo; {b) addition, as, ascribo; (c) nearness, as, assideo; 
(d) assent, favor, as, annuo, arrideo; (e) repetition and hence intensity, as, accl'- 

; (/) at, in consequence of, as, arrigo. It is sometimes augmentative, rarelv 
Inchoative. 

3. Ambi, around, about, on both sides. 

4. Circum, around, about, on all sides. 

6. Cdm or c6n, together, entirely. In composition with verbs it denotes (a' 
union, as, concurro, consulo; {b) completeness, as, comburo, conficio; (c) witHi 
effort, ^s, conjicio, conclamo; {d) inliarnwny, as, consono, consentio; (e) ox or 
ctw, like the English 6e— , as, colli no, to bssmear. 


§197. 


PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 


169 


6. Contra^ against, opposite. 

7. D<\ off, away, tlirougli, over, down; entirely; very, extremely. With 
verbs rf/'denotes (n) as, deniitto; {b) reniacal; as, detondeo; (c)«ii<n<‘ej 
RS, desuni, oeluibeo; {d) prevention; as, dehortor; (e) unfnendly feeling; as, 
despicio, derideo.—With adjectives de denotes {a)d(nm; as, declivis; (6) without} 
as, deinens. 

8. asunder, apart, in pieces, in two; dis-, un-; very greatly. With 

verbs dis denotes {a) division; as, divido, dllabor ; (6) ; as, discrSpo, 

dissentio; (c) the reverse of the simple notion; as, dlspliceo, diffido; (d) intensity; 
as, dilaudo.—With adjectives dis denotes difference; as, discolor, discors. 

9. or ex, out, forth, away, upward, without, -less, un-; utterly, com¬ 
pletely, very. With verbs it denotes (a) out; as, exeo, eximo, elaboro; (6) re- 
Kvovalof something; as, edonnio; (c) publicity; as, edico; (c/) ascent; as, exsisto; 
{e) completeness; as, Gdisco, exuro; {f) with denominative verbs, change of 
character; as, expio, effero (are); (y) removal of what is expressed by the noun 
whence the verb is deiived; as enodo; [h) the reversal of the fundamental idea; 
as, explico; (i) distance; as, exaudio.—With adjectives formed from substan¬ 
tives it denotes absence; as, exsomnis. 

10. /n, with verbs, signifies in, on, at; into, against; as, inhabtto, induo, ing§- 
mo^ ineo, illido. With adjectives, un-, in-, im-, il-, ir-, not; as, ignotus, inhosjA- 
^lis, imnun-tCdis. Some of its compounds have contrary significations, accord¬ 
ing as tliey are participles or adjectives; as, intectus, part., covered, adj., un¬ 
covered. 

11. Inter, between, among, at intervals. 

12. Ob, with verbs, signifies to, towards; as, 6 beo, osfendo; against; as, dbluo 
tor, (djnuntio; at, before; as, dbambulo, obversor; upon; a.s, occulco; over; as 
obduco. 

13. Per, with verbs, denotes, through, thoroughly, perfectly, quite; as, per- 
duco, perficio, perdo: with adjectives, through, very; as, pernox, pei'levis. 

14. Post, after, behind. 

15. Prce in composition with verbs denotes (a) befoi'e in place; as, praemitto; 
(6) by or past; as, prsefluo; (c) in command; as, prajsum, prseficio; {a) superior¬ 
ity ; as,prsesto; (e) before in time; as, prjedico, prascerpo; at the extremity; as, 
prseuro.—With adjectives, (a) before in place or time; as, praeceps, praescius; 
(b) very; as, praealtus, praeclarus. 

16. Prceter, past, by, beyond, besides. 

17. Pro, before, forward, forth, away, down; for; openly; as, prdludo, por- 
rtgo, proterreo, jn'otero, 2 >r 6 curo, prdfiteor. 

18. Re, again, against, back, re-, un-, away; greatly; as, rSfloresco, ripendo^ 
r^ferio, refigo, recondo. 

19. Se, without, aside, apart; as, securo, sepono, secedo, securus. 

20. Siib up, from below upwards, under. With verbs sub also signifies (a) 
assistance; as, subvenio; (b) succession; as, succfno; (c) in place of; as, sufficio; 
(</) near: as, subsum; (e) secretly, clandestinely; as, surripio, subduco; {f) some- 
fshat, a little; as, subrideo, subaccus^D.—With adjectives_it signifies, 
radiev; as, subobscurus, subabsurdus, subacfdus. 

21. Subter, beneath, under, from under, secretly, piivately. 

22. Super, above, over, left ovei; remaining, super-; as, supersSdeo, supersum, 
supersies, supei'vdcdneus. 

23. Trans, over, across, through; beyond; as, irddo, iranseo, trantfigo, 
transalpinus. 

24. Ve, not, without; very; as, vegrandis, vecors vepalUdus. 

Remark. In composition the preposition seems often add nothing to the 
signification of the word with which it is compounded. 

16 


170 


CONJTJNCTIONt}. 


§198 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§ i08. A conjunction is a particle which connects words oi 
propositions. 

The most usual conjunctions are, 


fitque, I than. 

ac 81 , as if. 

Jideo, so that^ so. 

I whether. 
aniie ) 

aiinon, whether or not. 
antequam, before. 
at, ast, but. 
at eiiim, but indeed. 
atqiil, but. 
attani^n, but yet. 
aut, either^ or. 
aut...aut, either...or. 
autem, but. 
ceterum, butj however 
ceu, as like as, as if. 
cum or quum, since. 
donee, as long as, until 
dum, provided, while, as 
long as, until. 
duminodo, ifb^ut, if only. 
enimvero, in very deed. 
enim, / 
etenim, y 
eo, therefore. 
equidem, indeed. 
ergo, therefore. 
et, and. 

et...et ) both...and; 
et...que, j as well...as. 
et...neque err nec, on the 
erne hand, but not on the 
other. 

etiam, also. 
etiamsi, | although, 
etsi, j though. 
iccirco, ] 

’|«r, 

Itaque, j 

licet, though, although. 
niodo, provided. 
nam, namque, for. 


neither, 

...nor. 


ne, lest, that not. 

-ne, whether. 
neque or nec, neither, nor. 
neque...neque,' 
nec...nec, 
neque...nec, 
nec...neque, 
necne, or not. 
neque, neither, nor. 
neque or nec...et, )not 
neque or nec...que, j on 
the one hand, but on the 
other. 

neve or neu, nor, and not. 
neve...neve, ( neither... 
neu...neu, ) nerr. 
nl, nisi, unless. 
num, whether. 
prasut, in comparison with. 
prout, according as, just 
as, as. 

proinde, hence, therefore. 
propterea, therefore, for 
that reason. 

postquam, after, since. 
priusquam, before. 
quam, as, than. 
quamvis, although. 
quando, quandoquidem, 
whereas, since. 
quamquam, although. 
quapropter, 
quare, 
quamobrem, 
quocirca, 
quantumvis, 
quamllbet. 


wherefore. 


although, 
however. 
quasi, as if, just as. 
-que, and. 

-que...et, ) both...and; 
-que...-que, ) as well...as. 
quia, because. 
quin, but that, that not. 
quippe, because. 


quo, in order that. 
quoad, as long as, until. 
quod, because, but. 
quodsi, but if. 
quoinimis, mat not. 
quoniam, since, because. 
quoque, also. 
quum or cum, when, since 
because. 

quum...turn, both.. and. 
sed, but. 

\ so as, just as, as. 
sicut], ) ’ 

si, if. 

si modo, if only. 
simtil, ) as soon 

simidac (-atqu?) I as. 
sin, but if, ij however. 
sive or sen, or if. 

siquidem, if indeed, since. 
tamen, hmeever, still. 
tametsi, although. 
tainquam, as if. 
turn...turn, both...and. 
unde, whence. 
ut, I that, as that, so that, 
uti, ) to the end that. 
ut si, as if. 
utrum, whether. 

v^^’ I 

vel...vel, either...or. 
velut, i even as, just as, 
veliiti, I like as. 
vero, truly, but indeed. 
verum, but. 

veruntsimen, yet, notwith. 
standing. 

verum-enim vero, but in¬ 
deed. 


Conjunctions, according to their different uses, are divided into 
two general classes,—coordinate and subordinate. 

I. Coordinate conjunctions, are such as join coordinate or similar 
constructions; as, 

Luna etstellce fidgebant. The moon and the stars were shining. Conciduni 
tenti, fugiuntcpxe nubes. The winds subside, and the clouds disperse. Difficile 
"^actu est, sed conaboi' tamen. It is difficult to accomplish but still I will try. 




198. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


171 


Coordinate conjunctions include the following subdivisions,'/iz. 

Hajunctive, adversative^ illative^ and most of the causal conjunctions. 

II. Subordinate conjunctions are such as join dissimilar construc¬ 
tions ; as, 

Edo, ut livam, I eat that I may live. Pyrrhus rex in itinere incidit in cansm, 
interfecti hoininis coipiis custvdicbat. Mergi jJullus in aquavi jussit^ ut bib^~ 
rent, quoniam esse nulltnt. 

Subordinate conjunctions include all those connectives which unite sub¬ 
ordinate or dependent clauses. These are the concessive, illative, final, condi¬ 
tional, mta"'ogative, and temporal conjunctions, and the causals quod, quur\, ^uo- 
rnatn, etc. To these may be added also the relatives whether pronouns, adjec¬ 
tives, or adverbs. 

Tha following paragraphs contain a specification of the several conjunctions comprised 
In each of the preceding subdivisions, and remarks respecting their particular import 
fcnd use as connectives. 

1. Copulative conjunctions connect things that are to be considered joint¬ 
ly; n?., el, dc, atque, the enclitic , which, combined with the negation 
belonging to the verb, becomes neque or ne c, and, the negation being doubled, 
nec non or neque non, it becomes again affirmative and equivalent-o e<. 
To these are to be added Hi am and quoque, with the adverbials item and 
Hid tin. 

Remark, (a.) Et and que differ in this, St connects things which are con¬ 
ceived as different, and que adds Avhat belongs to, or naturally flows from them. 
Et, therefore, is copulative and quS adjunctive. Hence, in an enumeration of 
words, que frequently connects the last of the series, and by its means the pre¬ 
ceding idea is extended without the addition of any thing which is generically 
different. In connecting propositions que denotes a consequence, and is equiv¬ 
alent to ‘ and therefore.’ 

{b.) Ac never stands before vowels, atque chiefly before vowels, but also be¬ 
fore consonants.— Atque, being formed of ud and que, properly signifies ‘ and 
also,’ ‘and in addition,’ thus putting things on an equality, but giving emphasis 
to the latter. In the beginning of a proposition, which is explanatory of that 
which precedes, atque or dc introduces a thing with great weight, and may be 
rendered ‘ now ’; and in answers; as, Cognostlne hos versus ? Ac menumter, it 
is rendered ‘ yes, and that.’ Ac being an abridged form of atque loses some¬ 
what of its power in connecting single words, and its use alternates with that 
of et; it is preferred in subdivisions, whereas the main propositions are con¬ 
nected bv et. 

(c.) lieque, compounded of the ancient ne for non and que, is used for U non. 
Et non itself is used, when only one idea or one word of a proposition is to be 
negatived; as, patior et non moleste fero; and also when our ‘and not’ ia 
used for ‘ and not rather ’ to correct an improper supposition; as. Si quam Ru- 
krius injuriani suo nomine ac non impulsu tuo fecisset. Clc. Et non is commonly 
found also in the second clause of a sentence when et precedes, but neqvA, 
also, is often used in this case. Nec non or neque non, in classical prose, is not 
used like et to connect nouns, but only to join propositions, and the two words 
lire separated. Li later writers, however, they are not separated and are 
»quivaient to St. 

"((/.) has a wider extent than qridquS, for it contains the idea of out 

even,’ and it also adds a new circumstance, whereas quoquS denotes the ad¬ 
dition of a thing of a similar kind. Hence Stia7n is properly used to connect 
♦entenccs, while qudquS refers to a single word Etiam signifies ‘and further, 

{ ■udque, ‘ and so,’ ‘ also.’ QudquS always follows the word to which it refers, 
tiiim in similar cases is usually placed'before it, but when it connects proposi¬ 
tions its pla(;e is arbitrary. Et, too, in clas<5ica’ prose, is sometimes used in 
Ihe sense of ‘ also.’ So often ie non mdrlo — se.d Si, *uot only—but also,’ or ‘ but 
even.’ 


t72 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198 


(c.) Copu’iative conjunctions are often repeated in the sense of‘both—and, 

* as well—as,’‘ not only—but also’ Et — H is of common occurrence; so, iu 
later writers, but rarely in Cicero, H—, que—H connect single words, but 
not in Cicero; qu6 — qxle, occur for the most part only in poetry, or in connec¬ 
tion with the relative.—Negative propositions are connected in English by 
‘neither—nor,’ and in Latin by neqxie — ncqiie^ me —«ec, neqm — nee, and rarely 
by nee — neque. Propositions, one of which is negative and the otluir affirma¬ 
tive ‘ on the one hand—but not on the other,’ or, ‘ not on the one hand—biit oa 
the other,’ are connected by —neque or nee, neqm or nee —e<, and occasi nally 
by nee or neque — que. 

2. Disjunctive conjunctions connect things that ai'e to be considered sepsr 
rately; as, aut, vel, the enclitic ve, and sive or seu. 

Remark, (a.) and diller in this; aut indicates a difference of the 
object, vel, a difference of expression, i. e. aut is objective, vel, subjective. 
Vel is connected with the verb vtlle, and is generally repeated, vel —re/, ‘ choose 
this or choose this,’ and the single re/ is used by Cicero only to correct a pre¬ 
ceding expression, and commonly combined with dieani, q^fOtius, or etiam .— 
Hence by ellipsis vel has acquired the signification of the adverb, ‘ even,’ 

BO enhances the signification of the word modified by it; as, Quum Sophdelei 
vel optime scripserit Eleetram, where bene is to be supplied before vel, and the 
latter is used for the purpose of coiTectingthe preceding expression. Cf. ^ 127,4. 
By means of its derivation from velle it has, also, the signification of ‘ for ex¬ 
ample ’ or ‘ to take a case,’for which vehit is more frequently used.—(/».) I’?, 
the apocopated re/, leaves the choice free between two or more things, and iu 
later out good prose vel is used in the same manner. 

(c.) (Sire commonly retains the meaning of si, and is then the same as re/ si, 
but sometimes loses it, and is then equivalent to re/, denoting a difi'erence or 
name; as, Voeahidum sive appellatio. Quint. The form seu is rarely used by 
Cicero except in the combination seu potius. —(c?.) Aut and re serve to continue 
the negation in negative sentences, where we use ‘nor’; as, non — axit, where 
non—neque also may be used. They are used also in negative questions; as, 
Nuxn leyes nostras moresve n&vit ? Cic.; and after comparatives; as, Doetrina 
pauto asperior, quaxn verltas aut natura patiatur. Cic. It is omy when both 
ideas are to be united into one that a copulative is used instead of aut and ve .— 
(e.) ‘ Either—or’ is expressed in Latin by aut — aut, denoting an opposition I)e- 
tween two things, one of which excludes the other, or by vel —rr7, denoting 
that the opposition is immaterial in respect to the result, so that the one need 
not exclude the other; as, Vei imperatbi'e vel niilite me utimini. Sail.— Sive — 
nvi is the same as re/ si—vU si, and retains the meaning of vel —re/. If nouns 
only are opposed to each other, an uncertainty is expressed as to how a thing 
is to be called; as, Cretum leges, quas sive Jupiter sive Minos sanxit; i. e. I do 
lot know whether I am to say Jupiter or ilinos. 

3. Comparative conjunctions express a comparison. These are, ut or uti 

sicat, re/M/,7^ro«/, the poetical cew, quam, tamquam, {viith. 

and without si), quasi, ut si, dc si, with d c and at que, wlic n tin y sig- 
Difv ‘ as.’ ^ 

flEMARK. and o/(7«e signify ‘ as ’ or ‘ than’ after adverbs and adjectives 
which denote similarity or dissimilarity; as, ceque, juxid, par and puriler, 
p^rirule and qxrolnde, pro eb, similis and similiter, dissimilis, tdlis, totidem, dlim 
and dliter, contra, seais, contrurius .— Quaxn is rarely used after these ivords 
except when a neptive particle is joined with alius; as, Virtus nihil aliud est, 
quam,.etc.; and and ywe do not occur in this connection.—^Ic is used for 
fuam, after comparatives, in poetry and occasionally by late prose writers; as. 
Artlus atque hedera. Hor. Jnsdnius ac sL Id. 

4. CoNC KSsivE conjunctions express a concession, with the general signifi 
cation ‘although.’ These ai-e e/si, etiam si, Idmetsi, or tame netsi 
quamquam, quamvis, quantumvis, quamlibet, Hcbi, ui in the 
lense of ‘even it ’ or ‘although,’ ana quum when it signifies ‘although.’ 

Remark. Tdmen and other particles signifying ‘yet,’ ‘still,’ are the correl¬ 
atives of the concessive coiyunctions; as, \5i desint vires, taiuen est laudanda 


1198. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


173 


9olunta$. Ovid. The adverb quidem becomes a concessive conjunction, when it 
is used to connect urojwsitions and is followed by sM .— UvamqiKim, in absolute 
lentences, sometimes refers to something preceding, which it limits and partly 
nullifies: as, Quainquam qiikl loquoi't \et why do I speak? 

5. Conditional conjunctions express a condition, their fundan «nta] signi¬ 
fication being ‘if.’ These are si, sin, nisi or ni, si m6do, dummddCi^ 
‘if only,’ ‘if but,’ (for which du7n and mddo are also used alone), dunt» 
mid6 ne, or simply mddo ne or durnne. 

Kemakx. (a.) In order to indicate the connection Avith a preceding proposi¬ 
tion, the relative qu6d, which in such case loses its signification as a pronoun, 
and may be rendered, ‘ nay,’ ‘ noAV,’ ‘ and,’ or ‘ then,’ is frequently put before 
si and sometimes before 7iisi and etsi, so that quodsl may be regarded as ono 
word, signifying ‘now if,’ ‘ but if,’ or ‘if then.’ It serves especial Iv to intro¬ 
duce something assumed as true, from which further inferences may be drawn. 
If 'sometimes signifies ‘although.’ Quodnisi signifies ‘if then—not,’ and jworf. 
etii, ‘ n:iy, even if.’ Qudd is found also before quum, ubi, quid, qu&niam, ne, fi({. 
uani, and 2 Vin before the relative pronoun. 

(6 ) Ni and nisi limit a statement by introducing an exception, and thus dif¬ 
fer from si non, wdiich introduces a negative case. It is often immaterial 
whether nisi or si non is used, but the difference is still essential. Si n&tt is 
used Avhen single words are opposed to one another, and in this case si minus 
may be used instead of si non .—If after an affirmative proposition its negative 
opposite is added without a verb, our ‘but if not’ is commonly expressed in 
prose by si minus or sin minus or sin dliier ; as, Educ tecum etiam omnes iuos f 
8i minus, quam plunmos. Cic.; rarely by si non. 

6. Illatia'e conjunctions express an inference or conclusion, with the gen¬ 
eral signification of ‘ therefore,’ ‘conseuuently.’ These are ergo, Igiiur, 

toque, eo, Ideo, iccirco, proinad, proptSred, and the relative con¬ 
junctions, quaqjropter, qudre, quamohrem , judcirca, ‘where¬ 

fore.’ 

Remark. Ergo apd igltur denote a logical inference.— Itdqxi^, ‘ and thus,’ 
expresses the relation of cause in facts.— Ideo, iccirco, and q^i'Opteref , ‘ on this 
account,’ express the agreement betAveen intention and action.— Ed, ‘ on this 
account,’ or ‘ for this purpose,’ is more frequently an adverb of place.— 
Pt'ohule, ‘consequently,’ implies an exhortation.— ‘Avhence,’ is propeily 

an adverb of place.— Adeo, ‘ so that,’ or simply ‘ so,’ is also properly an adverb. 
Bine, ‘ hence,’ and inde, ‘ thence,’ continue to be adverbs. 

7. Causal conjunctions express a cause or reason, Avith the general signifi¬ 
cation of ‘ for ’ and ‘because.’ These are nam, nnmque, enim, etenim, 
quid, qudd, qudniam, quippe, quum, quando, quanddqvldem 
siquiaem; and the adA’erbs nimirum, nempe, scilicet, and videiicSt. 

Remark, (a.) Nam is used at the beginning of a proposition, enwi, after the 
first or second Avord. Nam introduces an objective reason, and enim merely a 
'ubjective one. There is the same difference betAveen namque and etenim. 
\amque, hoAvever, though constantly stand.ing at the beginning of a proposi- 
lon in Cicero, Caesar, and Nepos^ is in later AVTiters often put after the begin¬ 
ning. Enhn in the sense of at enim or sed enim is sometimes, by comic Avriters, 
put at the beginning of a pi’oposition.— Nam, enim, and Henim are often used 
In the sense of ‘ namely,’ or ‘ to A\dt,’ to introduce an explanation of seme- 
Ihinc' before. Nimirum, vUlHlcH, and scillcU likeAvise ansAver to our 

‘namely’ or ‘viz.’ Almlrww, compounded of ni and minim, and signifying 
‘a wonder if not,’ is used as a connectiA'e in the sense of ‘undoubtedly’ or 
‘surelv,’and implies strong confidence in the truth of the proposition Avith 
Avhicir it is connected.— Videlicet and scilicet introduce an explanation, Avith 
tlws difference that videlicet generally indicates the true, and scilicet a wrong 
2 xplanation. Sometimes, however,* nam, enim, etenim, nimirum, and videlicet 
are used in an ironical sense, and scilicet introduces a true reason.—AT 
surelv ’ often assumes a sarcastic meaning when another person’s concession 
s taken for the purpose of refutmg hun.—(6.) Quid and indicate a defi- 
16 * 


174 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198 


nitc and conclusive reason, qudniam, fi. e. quum jam), a motive.tcctrco, 
ori/ptirta qvM, and quia, are used without any essential difference, except that 
quul introduces a more strict and loj:;ical reason, whereas qudninia, siirnifying 
‘now as,’ introduces important circumstances.— Quando, qiianddquvlem, ana 
mquidem approach nearer to qiUiniam than to quia, as they introduce only sub 
jective reasons. Quaiuldquidem denotes a reason implied in a circumstance 
previously mentioned; siquidem, a retison implied in a concession. In siquidem 
the meaning of si is generally dropped, but it sometimes remains, and then ^ 
and should be written as separate words; as, 0 furtuiudmn remqrubU- 

cam, si quidem hanc sentmnm ejech'it. Cic.— Quippe, with the relative pronoun 
or with quum, introduces a subjective reason. When used elliptically without 
a verb it signifies ‘ forsooth ’ or ‘ indeed.’ Sometimes it is followed bv a sen¬ 
tence with and in this way gradually acquires the signification of nam. 

8. Final conjunctions express a purpose, object, or result, with the signifi¬ 
cation of ‘ in order that,’ or ‘ ill order that not.’ These are ut or utl, qu5 
ne or u I ne, neve or neu, quin and quomtnus. 

Remark. Z7f, as a conjunction indicates either a result or a purpose, ‘so 
that,’ and ‘ in order that.’ Vvlien indicating a result, if a negative is added to 
it, it becomes ut non; when indicating a purpose, if the negative is added, it 
becomes ne or ut ne, but ut non also is very rarely used for ne.—Neve (i. e. vel ne) 
signifies either ‘ or in order that not,’ or ‘ and in order that not.’ Ut ne is a 
pleonasm, not differing perceptibly from ne. It is used more frequently by 
Cicero than by other writers. Quo ne for ne occurs once in Horace. 

9. Adversative conjunctions, express opposition, with the signification of 
but.’ These are sed, autem, verum, vero, at (poetical ast), di 

inim, atqui, tdmen, attdmen, sedtdmen, veruntdmen, dt vero, 
(inimvero), verumenim, verum vero, ceterum. 

Remark, (a.) Sed denotes a direct opposition, and interrupts the narrative or 
arfpiment; autem marks a transition, and denotes at once a connection and an 
opposition. Porro, ‘ further,’ denotes progression and transition but not oppo¬ 
sition, except in later authors.— Verum has a similar relation to vero as sea to 
antem. Verum, while it denotes opposition, contains also an explanation. Verc 
connects things which are different, but denotes the point in favor of which the 
decision should be. It thus forms the transition to something more important, 
as in the ptu’ase, Illud vero plane non est ferendum, i. e. that which I am about 
to mention. In affirmative answers vero is often added to the verb; as, Dasne f 
Do vero. Hence, when the protasis supplies the place of a question, it is some¬ 
times introduced into the apodosis merely to show that it contains an answer. 
Hence also vero alone signines ‘ yes,’ like sane, ltd, and Hiam. — Enimvero, ‘ yes, 

ily,’ ‘ in truth,’ does not denote opposition. It sometimes, like vero, foVms 
.e transition to that which is most important. The compound verum eninu- 
vero denotes the most emphatic opposition. 

(b.) At denotes that that which is opposed is equivalent to that which pre¬ 
cedes. _ It frequently follows si, in the sense of ‘ yet,’ or ‘ at least ’; a.s, etsi non 
\jpientisstmus, at aniicissimus. It is especially used to denote objections whether 
of the speaker himself or of others. At enim introduces a reason for the objec¬ 
tion implied in at .—By atqui, ‘but still,’ ‘but yet,’ or ‘nevertheless,’ we admit 
what precedes, but oppose something else to it; as, Maynum narras, vix credir- 
Me. Atqui sic habet. Hor. So, also, when that which is admitted, is made 
use of to prove the contrary. Finally, atqui is used in syllogisms, when a thing 
IS assumed which had before been left undecided; in this case it does not de¬ 
note a direct opposition of facts, and may be translated by ‘ now,’ ‘ but,’ ‘but 
DOW.’— Cith'um, projterlv ‘ as for the rest,’ is often used by later writers for 
Contra ea, in the sense of ‘ on the otlnr hand,’ is used as a conjunction, 
fio ddeo with a pronoun, when it may be translated ‘just,’ ‘precisely,’ ‘even,’ 
indeed,’ or an intensive ‘ and.’ 

10. Temporal conjunctions, express time. These are quum, quum pr% 
mum, ut, ut prlmum, ubl, pottquam, ant^quam, and prius 
quam, quando, Simula c or simulatque, or si mu alone, dum 
usqui <kum, ddnic, quoad. 


$198. 


CONJUNCTIONS 


175 


Remark. Vi and Hbl^ as particles of time, signify ‘ when.’ Dum, cUmSc, and 
^tond signify either ‘ as long as,’ or ‘ until.’ Dum often precedes irUired or irh 
Vrim, and both dum aud donee are often preceded by the adverbs usqui, usque 
to or usque adeo. 

11. INTERROGATIVE conjunctions indicate a question. These are, num^ 
utrum, an, and the enclitic ne. This, when attached to the three preced¬ 
ing particles, forming numne, utrumni, and anne, does not aflect their 
meaning. With non it fonns a special interrogative particle nonne. To 
these add ec and en, as they appear in ecy« is, ecquando, and ennm~ 
quam, and numquid and ecquid, when used simply as interrogative 
particles. 

Remark, (a.) The interrogative particles have no distinct meaning by 
tliemselves in direct questions, but only serve to give to a proposition the form 
of a question. In direct speech the interrogative particles are sometimes 
omitted, but in indirect auestions they are indispensable, except in the case of 
a double question, where the first particle is sometimes omitted.— Ecquid and 
numquid, as interrogative particles, have the meaning of mim, quid in this case 
having no meaning, but they must be carefully distinguished from the inter 
rogative pronouns ecquid and numquid. En, or when followed by a q, ec is, 
like num, ne, and an, an interrogative particle, but is always prefixed to some 
other interrogative word. 

(b.) In direct questions, nwwi and its compounds numne, numnam, numquid, 
vumquidnam, and the compounds with en or ec suppose that the answer will be 
no ’; as, Num putas me tarn dementem fuisse ? But ecquid is sometimes used 
in an affirmative sense. In general the negative sense of these particles does 
not appear in indirect questions. 

(c.) Ne properly denotes simply a question, but it is used sometimes affirma¬ 
tively and sometimes negatively. When ne is attached, not to the principal 
verb*but to some other word, a negative sense is produced; as,mene i$tudpotiu- 
isse facere jmtas? Do you belie'^e that I would have done that? The answer 
expected is ‘ no.’ When attached to the principal verb ne often gives the af¬ 
firmative meaning, and the answer expected is ‘ yes.’— Nonne is the sign of an 
affirmative question; as, Canis nonne lupo similis est f — Utrum, in accordance 
with its derivation from uter, which of two, is used only in double questions 
whether consisting of two or more. It is sometimes accompanied by ne, which 
is usually separated from it by one or more words; as, Utrum, taceamne an 
preedieem ? In later writers, however, utrumne is united into one word. Ne is 
rarely appended to inten-ogative adjectives, but examples of such use are some¬ 
times found in poetry; as, uterne; quone malo; quantane. In a few passages it 
IS even attached to the relative pronoun. 

(d.) An is not used as a sign of an indirect question before the silver ago; 
when so used it answers to ‘whether.’ It is used bv Cicero exclusively in a 
second or opposite question, where we use ‘ or ’; as, &i s^^iis, nihil interest utrum 
aqua sit, an vimim; nec refert, utrum sit aureum pocvlum, an 'oitreum, an manus 
ronedva. Sen. 1 n direct interrogations, vdien no interrogative clause precedes. 
In, anne, an vero are likewise used in the sense of ‘ or,’ that is in such a man- 
ler that a preceding interrogation is supplied bvthe mind; as, Invitus te offendi, 
an putas me dtlectam Icedtndis hominibus? Ilere we may supply before an 
putas, etc. the sentence, ‘ Do 3 'ou believe this ? ’— An, after a preceding ques¬ 
tion, i? rendered by ‘not,’ and it then indicates that the answer cannot be 
ioubtful; as, A rebus gerendis senectus abstrdhit. Quibus f An his, qiuB geruntur 
juventiite nc viribus ? Is it not from those kinds of business, which? etc. Here 
W 3 /nay suppose aliisnef to be supplied before an hist Is it from other kinds 
ol business, or from those? etc. Such questions may be introduced by Twnni, 
bat without allusion tu an opposite ques‘L‘on, which is implied in dn. 

(e.) To the rule that dn, in indirect questions, is used exclusively to indicate 
% sjcond or opposite question, there is one great exception, for it is employed 
21 single indirect questions after such expressions as aubl^, dubiumest, incertum 
delibero, hmlto, and especially after nescio or hand sdo, all of which denote 
iiicertainty, but with an inclination to the affirmative; as, 3i per se virtus stns 


176 


INTERJECTIONS. 


§199 


fortiina ponderanda sit dubiio an hunc primnm omnium ponam, If virtue is to 
oe estimated without leference to its success, I am not certaui whether I should 
not prefer this man to all others. Nep. It is not Latin to say dvhlto annon for 
dubito an.—Nescio an, or hand scio an are used quite in the sense of ‘ perhaps,’ 
80 that they are followed by the negatives nullus, nmM, numquam., instead of 
ulUis, quisquam and uniquam. When the principal verb is omitted, an is often 
used in the sense of aut; as, Themistodes, quuni ei Simonides, an qvis alius, 
artem memorias jyollicerdur, etc. In such cases incertum est is understood, ana 
in Tacitus is often supplied.—The conjunction si is sometimes used in indirect 
interrogations instead of num, like the Greek ti, and it is so usod by Cicero 
after the verb exph'wr. 

Note 1. The conjunctions -ne, -que, -^e, are not used alone, but are always 
affixed to some other word, and are' hence called enclitics. 

Note 2. Some words here classed with conjunctions are also used as ai 
verbs, and many classed as adverbs are likewise conjunc^^ions; that is, they at 
the same time qualify verbs, etc., and connect propositions; as. Ceteris in rebut^ 
quum venit calamitas, turn aetrimentum accipUur, In other concerns, when mi»- 
lortune comes, then damage is received. 

Note 3. Conjunctions, like adverbs, are variously compounded with other 
parts of speech, and with eacli other; as, aique, (i. e. adque), iccirco or idcirco, 
(i. e. id-circa), idea, namque, etc. In some, compounded of an adverb and a 
conjunction, each of the simple words retains its meaning, and properly belongs 
to its own class; a;’, etiam {et jam) and now; itdque, and so; neque or nec, and 
not. 


INTERJECTIONS. 


§ 190 . An interjection is a particle used in exclamation, 
and expressing some emotion of the mind. 

The most usual interjections are, 


ah! ah! alas! 

aha! aha! ah! haha! 

apage! away ! begone ! 

atat! or atatte! oA ! ah ! alas ! lo I 

au! or hau! oh! ah! 

ecce! lo ! see! behold ! 

ehem! ha! what! 

eheu! ah! alas! 

eho! ehodum! ho! soho! 

eia! or heia! ah ! ah ha ! indeed! 

en! h! see! behold! 

eu! well done ! bravo ! 

euge! well done ! good ! 

I huzzah! hurrah! 

ha! hold! ho! 
ha! ha! he! ha! ha! 
hei! ah! wo! alas! 


hem! oho ! indeed! well! hah ! alas ! alack f 

heu! oh ! ah ! alas ! 

heus! ho ! ho there ! hark! halloa 1 

hui! hah ! ho ! oh ! 

io! ho! hurrah! huzzah! 

6! 0 ! oh! ah! 

bh! oh! o! ah! 

ohe! ho ! halloa ! ho there ! 

oho! oho! aha! 

oi! hou ! alas! 

papae! strange! wonderfvdf 

phui! foh ! fugh ! 

phy! pish! tush! 

pro! or prbh! oh /ah! 

st! hist! tchist! hush! 

tatse! so! strange! 

vse! ah! alas! vx)e! 

vah! vaha! ah! alas 1 oh? 


Remark 1. An intellection sometimes denotes several different emotions, 
thus vah is used to express wonder, grief, joy, and anger. 

Rem. 2 . Other parts of speech may sometimes be regarded as interjections; 
as, jooa;/ be still! So indigmtm, infandujn, nudum, miserum, miserabile, nefas. 
when used as expressions of astonishment, grief, or horror; and macte ancl 
macti, as expressions of approbation. In like manner the adverbs me, profedo 
cifo,bSne, bale; the verbs guceso, jjricor, bro^ obsecro, amdbo, age. dgite, ddo 
fades, (for si aiides), sis, sultis, (for si vis and si vidtis), dgesis, dgMum, and dgite 
imn,and the interrogative quid? what? used as exclamations. 


i 200 , 201 . 


SYNTAX.-PROPOSITIONS. 


177 


^ Rkm. 3. With the interjections may also be classed the following invoca¬ 
tions of the gods : hercules, hercule, liercle; or mehercules, mehercCle, mehercle; 
ntdkis fidim, mecastor, ecastor, ece/’e, pol, edepol, equirine, per deum, per 
ieum inumrialem, per aeos, per Mvem, pi'b (or proh) Jupiter, pi'O dii immor^ 
tdlea, pro deum /idem, pro deum atque hominum /idem, prO deum immortdlium 
(scil. fidtm), etc. 


SYNTAX. 

§ SOO. 1. Syntax treats of the constmctiou of sentences. 

2. A sentence is a thought expressed in words; as, Cane* 
latrant, The dogs bark. 

3. All sentences are either 

(1.) Declarative; as, Venii spirant. The winds blow:— 

(2.) Interrogative; as, Splrantne vend? Do the winds blow?— 

(3.) Exclamatory; as, Quam vehementer spirant vend I How 
fiercely the winds blow!—or 

(4.) Imperative ; as. Vend, splrdte. Blow, winds. 

4. The mood of the verb in the first three classes of sentences is either the 
indicative or the subjunctive; in imperative sentences it is either the impera¬ 
tive or the subjunctive. 

5. A sentence may consist either of one proposition or of two or 
more propositions connected together. 

/ 

PROPOSITIONS. 

§ 301* 1. A proposition consists of a sulject and a pre-' 

dicate. 

2. The subject of a proposition is that of which something ia 
iffirmed. 

3. The predicate is that which is afl^-med of the subject. 

Thus, in the proposition, Equus currit, The horse runs, equns io the 
subject and currit is the predicate. 

Note. The word affirm, as here used, includes all the various significations of the 
rcrb, as expressed in the several moods. 

4. Propositions are either principal or subordinate. 

5 . A principal proposition is one which makes complete senso b}- 
tself; as, 

Phocion fuit perpctuo pauper, quum ditisdmm esse posset, Fhocton was always 
voor though he m'*ght have been very rich. 



178 


SYNTAX.-SUBJECT. 


§ 202 . 


6 . A jubordinate proposition is one which, by means of a subordi 
Date conjunction, is made to depend upon or limit seme part of 
another proposition; as, 

Phocion fidt pei-pMuo pauper, quum ditissiraus esse posset, Phocion was al¬ 
ways poor, Uiouyh he miyhi have been very rich. 

7. Subordinate propositions are used either as substantives, adjec¬ 
tives, or adverbs, and are accordingly called substantive, adjective or 
adverbial vrovositions or clauses. 

8. Substantrve clauses are connected with the propositions on which they 
depend by means of the final conjunctions ut, ne, quo, quin, etc., sometimes by 
quoil, and in clauses containing an indirect question, by interrogative pronouns, 
adjectives, adverbs and conjunctions. See 262 and 265. 

Remark. A dependent substantive clause often takes the form of the accusative with - 
the infinitive and in that case has no connective; as, Gaudeo te valere. 

9. Adjective clauses are connected by means of relatives, both pronouns and 
pronominal adjectives; as, qui, qudlis, quanius, etc. Adverbial clauses are con¬ 
nected either by relative adverbs of place and time, (§ 191, R. 1, (6.), or by 
temporal, conditional, concessive, comparative, and sometimes by causal con¬ 
junctions. 

10. A sentence consisting of one proposition is called a simple sen- 
t^'nce; as, 

Cddunt fdlia. The leaves fall. Semiramis Babylonem condidit. 

11. A sentence consisting of a principal and one or more subordi¬ 
nate propositions is caliea a complex sentence; as, 

Qui Jit, ut nemo contentus vlvat f How happens it, that no one lives content? 
Quis ego sim, me rogltas, You ask me, who 1 am. 

12. A sentence consisting of two or more principal propositions, 
either alone or in connection with one or more subordinate proposi¬ 
tions. is called a compound sentence; as, 

Spirant venti et cddunt f 6lia, The winds blow, and the leaves fall. 

13. The propositions composing a complex or a compound sen¬ 
tence are called its members or clauses ; the principal proposition is 
called the leading clause, its subject, the leading subject, and its verb, 
the leading verb. 


SUBJECT. 

§ 202. 1. The subject also is either simple, complex, or 

compound. 

2. The simple subject, which is also called the grammatical sub¬ 
ject, is either a noun or some word standing for a noun; as, 

Aves vdlant. Birds fly. Tu legis, Thou readest. A est v'cdlis, A is a vowel 
Uentiri est turpe, To he is base. 

3. The complex subject, called also the logical subject, consists of 
the simple subject with its modifications ; as, 

Conscientia bene actae vitae est jucundissima. The consciousness of a well spent 
f^fe is very pleasant. Here conscientia is the grammatical, and conscientia bene 
ache vUcB the complex subject. 


I 202. STNTAX.— SUBJECT. 172 

4. The compound subject consists of two or more simple or com¬ 
plex subjects to which a single predicate belongs; as, 

Luna et stell* fulypbant^ The moon and stars were shining. Grammatice ac 
tnxisicse jnnotis juerunt. Grammar and music were united. Semper honos no* 
m^iiique tuum laudes^'we munebunt. 

Remark. Words are said to modify or limit other words, when they serve 
to exjdain, describe, define, enlarge, restrict, or otherwise qualify their mean- 
ing. 

5. Every sentence must contain a subject and a predicate, called 
iU principal or essential parts: any sentence may also receive addi¬ 
tions to these, called its subordinate parts. 

Complex or Modified Subject. 

6. The complex subject is formed by adding other words to the 
simple subject. All additions to the subject, like the subject itself, 
fcre either simple, complex, or compound. 

1. Simple additions. The subject may be modified by adding:— 

1. A single word :— 

(1.) A noun in the same case; as, 

Nos consules desumus, We consuls are remiss. Mucitis augur muita narrdvit, 
Mucius the augur related many things. 

(2.) A noun or pronoun in an oblique case, modifying or limiting 
the subject; as. 

Amor multitudinis commdvetur, The love of the multitude is excited. Cura mei, 
Care jor me. Viribus usus. Need of strength. 

(3.) An adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle; as, 

Fugit invida cetas. Envious time flies. Mea mater est benigna. Duxit agndna 
Penthesilea furens. Litera scripta mdnet. 

2. A phrase consisting of a preposition and its case; as, 

Sdpor in gramlne. Oppida sine prsesidio. Receptio ad te. 

3. A dependent adjective clause introduced by qui, qualis, quan- 
us, etc.; as, 

Lice ft, quod bene fertur, 6nus, The burden, which is borne well, becomes 
light. Llterte^ quas scripsisti, acceptce sunt. Ut, qualis (ille) haberi vellet, 
tdlis essct. Tanta est inter eos, quanta maxima esse potest, mbrum distantia. 

II. Complex additions. The subject may be modified ;— 

1. By a ivord to which other words are added. 

(1.) When the word to which other words are added is a noun oi 
prv'noun, it may be modified in any of the ways above mentioned. 

(2.) When it is an adjective it may be modified:— 

(a.) By an adverb either simple or modified; as, 

Erat exspectdtio valde magna. Presidium non nimis firmum. 

\b.) By a noun in an oblique case ; as, 

Major pietdte, Superior in piety. Contentionis citpidiu. Fond of contentnon 
^’atri simllis, Like his father. Nfiidus membra. Juvines patre tiigm. 


180 


SYNTAX.-SUB JEC T. 


§ 202 . 


(c.) By an infinitive, a gerund, or a supine; as, 

vinci. Not accustomed to be conquered. Venandi «WcK(5m. Fondq/ 
hunting. Mlrdblle dictu. Wonderful to tell. 

(d.') By a phrase consisting of a preposition and its case; as, 

in republica, Unskilled m cimY a^airs. Ab equitatu^^rwl^^^. Celer in 
pugnam. Pronus ad fidem. 

(e.) By a subordinate clause; as, 

Melior esi certapax, quam sperata victoria, A certain peace is better than an 
expected victory. Dubius sum, quid faciam. 

(3.) 'VVTien it is a participle, it may be modified like a vero. See 
§ 203. 

2. By a phrase consisting of a preposition and its case to which 
other words are added; as, 

De victoria Caesaris fdma perfertur, A report concerning Cces(M''s victory is 
thought. 

Remark 1. As the case following the preposition is that of a noun or pro¬ 
noun, it may be modified like the subject in any of the foregoing ways. 

Rem. 2. The preposition itself may be modified by an adverb, or 
by a noun or adjective in an oblique case; as, 

liOnge ultra, Far beyond. Multo ante noctem. Long before night. Sexennio 
post vHos captos. Six years after the capture of Veii. 

3. By a subordmate clause, to whose subject or predicate other 
words are added. 

Remark. These additions may be of the same fonn as those added to the 
principal subject or predicate of the sentence. 

m. Compound additions. The subject may be modified:— 

1. By two or more nouns in the same case as the subject, connect¬ 
ed by a coordinate conjunction; as, ^ 

Comules, Brutus et CoUatinus, The consuls, Brutus and Collatmm. 

2. By two or more oblique cases of a noun or pronoun connected 
coordinately; as, 

Yitseque necisg'jte pdtestas. Periciilorum et laborum indtdmentum. 

3. By two or more adjectives, adjective pronouns, or participles, 
connected coordinately; as. 

Grave bellum perdiuturnumjue. Antmi teneri atque molles. 

4. By two or more adjective clauses connected coordinately; as, 

Et qui fecere, et qui facta aliorum scripsere, multi laudantur. Sail. 

5. By two or more of the preceding modifications connected cobr- 
ilinately; as. 

Genus hominum agreste, sine legibus, sine imperio, liberum, atque solutum. 

Rem. 1. A modified grammatical subject, considered as one com¬ 
plex idea, may itself be modified;, as, 

Omnia tua c^iistUa, All thy counsels. Here omnia modifies, not catdlia., but 
the complex idea expressed by tua condlia. So Triginta ndves longcs. Pra?u6- 
tens re^ 


b203. 


SYNTAX.—PREDICATE. 


181 


Rem. 2. An infinitive, with the words connected with it, may be 
the logical subject of a proposition ; as, 

Virtm est vitium fugere. To shun vice is a virtue. 

Rkm. 3. A clause, or any member consisting rf two or more clauses, 
may be the logical subject of a proposition; as, 

E ccelu dcscendit ‘ llosce te ipsum.’ EEquum est^ ut hoc f acirs. 

Rkm. 4. The noun or pronoun which is the subject of a proposi¬ 
tion is put in the nominative, when the verb of the predicate is a 
finite verb; but when the verb is in the infinitive, the subject as put 
in the accusative. 

Note 1. A verb in any mood, except the infinitive, is called a finite verb. 

Note 2. In the following pages, when the term subject or predicate is use> alone, the 
grammatical subject or predicate is intended. 

PREDICATE. 

§ S03. 1. The predicate, like the subject, is either simple^ 

complex, or compound. 

2. The simple predicate, which is also called the grammatical pre- 
iicate, is either a single finite verb, or the copula sum with a noun, 
adjecdve, and rarely with an adverb; as, 

fiitl licet. The sun shines. Multa animdUa repunt, Many animals cre^ 
Brb f is est vd ujHas, Blcusme is brief Europa est peninsula, Europe is a pe¬ 
ninsula. Rectissliue suut apud te omnia. 

3. The complex predicate, called also the logical predicate, con¬ 
sists of the simple predicate with its modifications; as, 

Sclpio fudit Annibalis copias, Scipio routed the forces of Hannibal. Here 
fudit is the grammatical, and fudit AnnibCdis copias the logical predicate.— 
So, Romulus Kuinaiiai coiiditor urbis fuit. 

4. The compound predicate consists of two or more simple or com¬ 
plex predicates belonging to the same subject; as, 

PrObltas laudatur et algeh Honesty is praised and neglected. Let! vis mpiiit 
rapictque gentes. Lucius Catlllna fuit magua vi et aoimi et corporis, sed iu- 
gcuio malo pravoque. 

Complex or Modified Precncate. 

5. The complex predicate is formed by adding other words to the 
simple predicate. All additions to the predicate, like the predicate 
tself, are either simple, complex, or compound. 

I. Simple additions. The predicate may be modified by adding;— 

1. A single word', — 

(1.) A noun or adjective in the same case as the subject. This 
occurs after certain neuter verbs and passive verbs of naming, call¬ 
ing, etc. (See § 210, R. 3.) ; as, 

E mms fit lTl)ertInuSj The slave becomes a fTeedman. Servitis Tullius reyi est 
iecUv dtus. Justus est appellaUis. /wcoeZo regina. 

(2.) A noun or pronoun in an oblique case; as, 

Spe viviinus, We live by hope Dots r^yit ^luudum, God rules the world. 


182 


SYNTAX.-PREDICATE. 


§2U8. 


(3.) An adverb either simple or modified; as, 

Ssepe vrnii, He came often. Festlna lente, Hasten slouly. Literce facile dis- 
ountur. Ckremes iiiinis graviter crucial addltscmiulum. 

(4.) An infinitive mood ; as, 

Ciipii discere, He desires to learn. Audeo dicere. T^er esse coepirat. 

2. A phrase consisting of a preposition and its case; as, Venit ad 
urbem, lie came to the city. 

8. A dependent substantive or adverbial clause ; as, 

Vereor ne rcprtdiendar, I fear that /shall be blamed. ZenCnem, qiium Athenis 
essem, audiebam frequenter. Fdc cogites. 

II. Complex additions. The predicate may be modifiefi •— 

1. By a word to which other words are added. 

Remark. These words are the same as in the corresponding cases of com¬ 
plex additions to the subject. See ^ 202, II. 

2. By a phrase consisting of a preposition and its case, to which 
other words are added. See complex additions to the subject, § 202. 

3. By a subordinate clause., to whose subject or predicate other 
words are added. See complex subject, § 202, 11, 3. 

Rkm. 2. Each of the words constituting a proposition may be modified by 
two or more additions not dependent on, nor connected with each other, and 
consisting either of single words, phrases, or dependent clauses; as, Agamem- 
nonis belli gloria. Pa.ternum ddium erga Romanos. Mens sibi conscia recti. 
.Mea maxime interest, te valere. Ago tibi giAtias. Meipsum inerti® condemno. 
Eos hoc moneo. In quo te accuso. Mdnet eurn, ut suspiciones vitet. 

m. Compound additions. 1. The predicate may be modified by 
two or more words, phrases, or clauses, joined together by a coordi¬ 
nate conjunction. See Compound additions to the subject, § 202, III 

2. The leading verb is usually either in the indicative or impera¬ 
tive mood, but sometimes in the subjunctive or the historical infin- 
itive. 

3. The members of a compound sentence are connected by coordi¬ 
nate conjunctions; those of a complex sentence by some relative 
word, or by a subordinate conjunction. 

4. Instead of a dependent clause connected by a conjunction, a 
noun and participle, or two nouns, sometimes stand as an abridged 
proposition; as, 

Bello confecto discessit, i. e. quum bellum confectum esset, discessit, The war 
being finished, or when the war was finished, he departed. Nil desperandum 
Teucro duce. 

5. An infinitive may be modified like the verb of a predicate. 

6. A greement is the corresjiondence of one word with another in 
gender, numbsr, case, or person. 

7. A word is s?id to govern another, when it requires it to be put 
n a certain case or mood. 

8. A word is said to depend on another, when its case, gender, 
number, mood, tense, or person, is determined by that word. 

i). A word is said to follow another, when it depends upon it in 
•^onstructicn, whatever ma} be its position in the sentence. 


§ 204. 


SYNTAX.—APPOSITIC N. 


188 


APrOSITION. 

§20^1. A noun, annexed to another noun or to a pronoun, 
and denoting the same person or thing, is put in the same case; 
as, 

Urbs Roma, Tlie city Rome. Nos consules, We consuls. SoApudBerodofum., 
patrem histOriiB, sunt innumernblle^ fabulce, In Herodotus, the father of history', 
etc. Cic. Lapides silices, Jtint stones. Liv. Ante vu cousulem, Before I was 
wiuml. Fans cui nbmen Ai’ethusa est. Cic. 

Rkmatik 1. (a.) A nonn, thus annexed to another, is said to ue m appoFitian 
to it. It is generally added for the sake of explanatijn, identification, or de- 
BCriution; sometimes it denotes character or purpose; as. Ejus fufpe comitem 
me adjunxi, I added myself, as a companion of his flight; and sometimes the 
time, cause, reason, etc., of an action; as, Alexander puer, Alexander when a 
boy. Cato senex scribere histdriam instituit. Suet. 

(h.) A noun in apposition, like an adjective used as an epithet, (§ 205, N. 2,) 
assumes the attribute denoted by it as belonging to the noun wdilch it limits, 
while the predicate-nominative affirms it. Hence both nouns belong to the 
same part of the sentence, whether subject or predicate. In cases of apposi¬ 
tion, there seems to be an ellipsis of the ancient participle ens, being; qui est, 
who is; qui vocatur, who is called; or the like. 

Rem. 2. If the annexed noun has a form of the same gender as the ether 
noun, it takes that form; as, Usus magister egregius. Plin. Phihsdphia magis- 
tra vltce. Cic. If the annexed noun is of the common gender, the adjective 
qualifying it takes the gender of the preceding noun; as, Laurus fidisslma 
custos. 

Rem. 3. The annexed noun sometimes differs from the other in gender or in 
number; as, Duo fuluuna belli, Scipiddas, cladem Libyce. Virg. Mitylence, urba 
nobilis. Cic. Tullidla, delJcise nostree. Id.;—and sometimes in both; as, Nate, 
mece vires. Virg. Nos, anirase viles, inhumdta injletdque turba. Id. 

Rem. 4. The substantive pronoun is sometimes omitted before the word in 
apposition to it; as. Consul dixi, scil. ego; (I) the consul said. And instead of 
the substantive pronoun, a possessive adjective pronoun is sometimes used; as, 
Tua domus, tails viri. Cic. See § 211, R. 3, (b.) 

Rem. 5. A noun may be in apposition to two or more nouns, and, in such 
case, is usuallv put in the plural; as, M. Antonius, C. Oissiics, tribuni plebis, 
M. Antonius, C. Cassius, tribunes of the people. Cies. Publius et Serviut Sullae, 
Servi fllii. SaU. Tib. et Gains Gracchi. Cic. Oraiidnes L. et C. Aureliorura 
Orestarum. Id. But sometimes in the singular; as, Cn. et L. Domitius. Cic. 

(1.) So when the nouns are connected by cum, the annexed noun taking 
the case of the former; as, Diccearchum vero cum Aristoxeno, doctos sane hom¬ 
ines, omittdmus. Cic. 

f2.) If the nouns are proper names of different genders, a mascxiline noun is 
annexed rather than a feminine, when both forms exist; as, Ad Ptoiemaum 
Cleopatramque reges legdti missi sunt. Liv. 

Rem. 6. The annexed noun is sometimes in the genitive; as, Urbem Patavi 
locdnt. The citv of Patavium. Virg. Plnrlmus Eridani amnis. Id. Arhbrem 
f ci numquam vlderat. Cic. Jn oppido Antiochiie. Id. Rupili et PersI qmr. Her. 

Rem. 7. The name of a town in the genitive occurs with an ablative ia ap- 
pO'ition to it; as, Cornithi Achaice \»rbe; At Corinth, a city of Achaia. Tac. 
%iliochloe, celebri urbe. Cic. S^e 4 221, Note, and § 254, Rem. 3. 

Rem. 8. (a.) A proper name, after r^omcn or cognomen, with a verb followed 
by a dative, is put in a])[)Osition either to nbmen, etc., or to the dative, the lattot 
bv a species of attraction; as, Fons, cui nbmen Arethusa est. Cic. Stirps virilU, 
sui Aficanium parentes dixere nbmen. Liv. Nbmen Arcturo est mihi, I have the 


184 


SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVES. 


§ 205. 


name Arcturus. Plaut. Ckd nunc cofjnomen lulo ndditur. Virg Cki Egerio indi- 
turn n&men. Liv.— (b.) The name may al«o be put in the genitive; as, Ncijun 
Mercurii tst mihi ria-a*;. Q.. J/e/j'/Z/w, cni Macedonlci ndintn iwlitum eral. Veil. 
Cf. R. 6.—(c.) In Illn aias, cui fu imus Aurea nomen, Ov. Met. 15, 96, Au, ea 
is used as an iudeclUiable noun, instead of (scil. teZdZem); or Aurtce; 

dat. (sell, ceiciti.) 

Rkm. 9. A (inuse may supply the place of one of the nouns; as, Cbgitet ora- 
lorem instUui— rem (trdutun, Let him reflect that an orator is training—a diffi¬ 
cult tiling. Quint.—So also a neuter adjective used substantively as, Triste 
lujms sfabfdis, The wolf, a sad thing to the folds. Virg. Varium ft inutallle 
semper feminn. Id. 

R'iM. 10. Sometimes the former noun denotes a whole, and its parts are ex¬ 
pressed by nonug in apposition to it; as, Onerdrue^ pars mavamn ad Aiifiiwl'i \tm, 
—aliae odrersiis urbem ipsnm deldtie sunt^ The shijis of burden were carried, the 
gi latest part, to Algimurus,—others opposite to the city itself. Liv. Fictmes 
el paiUe suum quisque u 2 )us a vidgo considtrdri vult. Cic. In the construction 
of the ablative absolute, quisqtie remains in the nominative, though the word 
to which it is in apposition is in the ablative; as, Midtis sibi quisque imp^rium 
petentlbus. Sail. J. 18. So also, in Liv. 26, 29, qidsque remains in the nomina¬ 
tive although the word to which it is in apposition is in the accusative with 
the infinitive. 

To this nile may be subjoined that which relates to the agreement of inter¬ 
rogative and responsive words. 

PtEM, 11 . The principal noun or pronoun in the answer to a ques¬ 
tion, must be in the same case as the corresponding interrogative 
word; as, 

Quis Mims esiiddf Amphitmo, scil. est Who is your master? Amphitruo 
(is.) riaut. Quid Libnim, sciL queero. What are you looking for? 

A book. Quota hdrd venisii t Sexta. At what hour did you come ? At the 
sixth. 

Note 1. Instead of the genitive of a substantive pronoun, the corresponding 
possessive pniiioun is often used, agreeing with its noun; as, Ciijus t-s/Z/te/’f 
Mens, (not Met.) (See ^ 211, Rem. 3, (b.) So cti/urn for genitive cuj us f Oujum 
p^cusf an Mtlibceif Nun; verum ^gdids. Virg. 

Note 2. Sometimes the rules of syntax require the responsive to be in a 
different case from that of the interrogative; as, Quanti emistif Viginii minis. 
JJamnatusne ds furti? Jmo alio crimine. See 214, R. 1, and 217, R 2. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§ 20*1^. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, 
agree with their nouns, in gender, number, and case; as, 

Bdnus vir, A good man. Bdnos tiros, Good men. 

Benhjna mdter, A kind mother. Vdnte b'f/es, Useless laws. 

Triste bellum, A sad war. Mindcia rerba, Threatening words. 

8j> 6 amissd, Hope being lost. Jlcec res, This thuig. 

So, Mea mdter est benigna. 
lluec leges vdnee sunt. 

Note 1. Adjoctiyes, according to their meaning, (^ 104), are divided into 
two clr.sses —(junlifyiug and limiting —the former denoting some property or 
quality of a noun; :xs, a wise man, lead is heavy; the latter dejrning •r restricting 
ts meaning; as, ZZ/Z.s man, few cities. To the fonner class belong sue » adjexi- 
tiyes as denote a property or quality, including all participles and ptciticipia. 
adjectives; to the latter, the adjective pronouns ' pronominal adjectives, and 
numerals. 


§ 205. 


SYNTAX.-ADJECTIVES. 


185 

Note 2. An adjective, participle, or pronoian, may either be used as an epi¬ 
thet to modify a noun, or, with tlie copula sum, may constitute a predicate. 
In the former case the quality is assumed, in the latter it is asserted. In both 
cases, the nile for their agreement is, in general, the same. See ^ 210, R. 1. 

Note 3. Any word or combination of words added to a noun to modify or 
limit its meaning is of tlie nature of an adjective. 

Note 4. In the following remarks, the word adjective is to be considered as including 
participles, either alone or combined with the auxiliary sum, and also adjective pro¬ 
nouns, unless the contrary is intimated. 

Remark 1. An adjective agrees also with a substantive pronoun, taking its 
gender fi\»m that of the noun for which the pronoun stands; as. Ipse capellas 
reterdf/o, soil, er/o, MeUbtrus; Virg. Furtundte puer, (u nunc eris alter ab ilia. Id. 
Ut se totum ei trdderet. Nep. 0 me miserum (spoken by a man), misi^ram me 
(spoken by a woman). So s(di'i sumus, salvce sumus, soil. 7ws, masculine or 
feminine.—In general propositions whicli include both sexes, the pronouns are 
considered masculine; as. Nos fruyes consumere nati. Hor. 

Rem. 2. An adjective may belong to each of two or more nouns, 
and in such case is put in the plural. If the nouns are of the same 
gender, the adjective agrees with them in gender, as well as in num¬ 
ber; as. 

Lupus et aynus slti compulsi, A wolf and a lamb, constrained by thirst. Phsed. 
Sicilia Sardiniaque amissae. Liv. 

\Vhen the nouns are of different genders, 

(1.) If they denote living things, the adjective is masculine rather 
I ban feminine; as. 

Pater milii et mater mortui sunt, My father and mother are dead. Ter. So 
also uterque in the singular. Procumbit uterque, scil. Deucdliun et Pyrrha. 
Ovid. 

(2.) If they denote things without life, the adjective is generally 
neuter; as, 

Ilis genus, cetas, eloquentia prdpe ajqualia fuore, Their family, age, and elo¬ 
quence, were nearly equal. Sail. Regna, imperia, nobilitates, hondres, dlvltice in 
cdsu sita sunt. Cic. Iluic belln, rapince, discordia civllis, grata fucie. Sail. 
Anlma atque animus, quamvis integi'a recens in corpus eunt. Lucr. 

Note. When nouns denoting things without life are of the satne gender 
(either masculine or feminine), but of different numbers, the adjective is some¬ 
times neuter; as, Croeso et vita ei patrimonii partes, et tirbs Barce concessa 
sunt. Just.; sometimes also when both nouns are in the singular number; .as, 
Plerosque velocilas et regia hostibus igndra tutata sunt. Sail. Nox atque proeda 
remorata sunt. Id. 

(3.) If one of the nouns denotes an animate, and another an inan¬ 
imate thing, the adjective is sometimes neuter, and sometimes takes 
the gender of that which has life ; as, 

Numidce atque signa miUtdria obscurati sunt, The Numidians and the unlit 
standards were concealed. Sail. Ramdni regem regnumque Maceddnioe sua 
futdra sdunt. Liv. Jane, fdc ajternos pdcem piucisque ministros. Ovid. 

E.'fC. to Rem. 2. The adjective often agrees with the nearest noun, 
and is understood with the rest; as, 

Sdciis et rfge rccepto. Our companions and king having been recovered. 
Viro'. Agri omnes et maria. Cic. Caynitum est sdlutem, Iwei'cs, fdiiiam, for- 
tunas esse cai’issimas. Cic. 

36 * 


186 


SYNTAX.—ADJECTIVES. 


§205. 


NofE. A noun in tbp smg;ular, followed by an ablative wilb cum, has some- 
b'mes a plural adjective, the gender being the same as if the nouns were con- 
oectedi Dy t;t; as^ Ftliam ciivi l(to nccMofi. Liv. Jlia cum Louso dc A uinlt 're 
siiti. Ovid. Filiutn Altxandri cum mdlre in arcem enstvdiendos mUiit. Just. 

Rkm. 3. (1.) An adjective qualifyinjr a collectiA'e noun is oflec 
put in the plural, taking the gender of the individuals Avhich the noun 
denotes; as, 

Pots certdre parati, A part, prepared to contend. Virg. Pars per aproe 

dilapsi. sufim <ptis(/ue spein exsequeutes. Liv. Supplex turbn ernnt sine judlct 

tuti. Ovid. 'I'liis construction always occurs when the collective nouu la ..lie 
snb.'ect of a plural verb. See ^ 209, K. 11. 

t,2 ) Sometimes, though rarely, an adjective in the singular takes the gender 
of the individuals; as. Pars arduus aids pulverulentus e-'/uis furit. Virg. Pars 
fma ducum —fractus morbo. Ovid. 

(3 ) Sometimes other nouns, Avhich only in a figurative sense denc te human 
bel igs, have by synesis an adjective of a different gender from their own, refer¬ 
ring to the words which they include; as, Ludwn (Xipudque ayro mulctati 
Latium and Capua were deprived of their land. Liv. (Xtpiia conjurdddnis vir- 
gis ccesi ac securi percussi sunt. Id. Auxllia irati. Id. So after millia; as, 
Dtio millia Tyriorum, cruclbus aflixi. Curt. Cf. § 323, 3, (4.) 

Rem. 4. Two adjectives in the singular are sometimes joined to a plural 
noun; as, Maria Tyn'henum atque Adriatlcum, The Tuscan and Adriatic seas. 
Liv. Cum legionlbus secunda et tertia. Liv. Cit'ca portas Colllnam Esquili- 
namque. Id. But sometimes the noun is in the singular; as. Inter Esqultlnam 
Oillinamqtie portam. Id. Legio Martia et quanta. In comic writers, an adjec¬ 
tive or participle in the singular is sometimes used with a plural pronoun; as, 
Nobis prtxsente. Plaut. Absente nobis. Ter. 

Rkm. 5. A participle which should regularly agree with the subject of a 
proposition, when placed after the noun of the predicate, {a) sometimes takes 
the gender and number of the latter; as, Non omnis error siultida est dicenda, 
Not every error is to be called folly. Cic. Cens unlversa Veneti appellati. l,iv. 
(b.) Sometimes also it agrees with a noun folloAving the subject and in apposi¬ 
tion to it; as, Cdrinthum, patres vestri, idtius Grcecice lumen, exstmctiim esse 
vdluertint. Cic.; or (c) with the noun of a subordinate sentence; as, lllorum 
urbem ut prbpugnaculum oppositum esse barbdris. Nep. 

Rem. 6 . When the subject of an infinitive is omitted after a dative of the 
same signification, 239, R. 1,) an adjective in the predicate, belonging to 
that subject, is sometimes put in the dative; as, Mihi negligenti esse nan llcuit, 
i. e. me neyligentem esse mini non llcuit. Cic. JDa mihi juste sanctujMe vidrri. 
Hor. A noun is sometimes expressed with the adjective; as, Vobis rdeesse est 
fortibus esse vlris. Liv. But the adjective often agrees with the omitted sub¬ 
ject; as, Kxpjedit bonas esse vobis, scil. vos. Ter. Si clvi Rdmdno licet esse 
Gadi'.anum. Cic. , 

Rkm. 7. (1.) An adjective is often used alone, especially in the 
fhiral, the noun, with which it agrees, being understood; as, 

B )ni sunt rctri, scil. hdmines, Good (men) are rare. Gesar sues 7 nisil. scil. 
kilties, C*sar sent his (soldiers). Dexira, scil. mdnns, The right (liainl). lm~ 
phninr pinguis ferinic, scil. carnis. Virg. Iltberna, scil. casfra. Altum scil. 
mdre. (iuartdnn,sQ\\. ftbris. Jnunortdlts, scW. Dii. Lucr. scil idtnl- 

num. I'e*' Jllum indignanti similem, similemqne minanti asj.'itires, scil. hivuni. 
Virg. Tibi \)YmvA% dr)ero, partes. Cic. Ae.'-yy/( e prajteri turn, scil temp'is 
which is often omittc.l, as in ex quo, ex eo, anil ex illo, scil. ietiqtdre. Otyndvt 
C.T meuruiu oiunium literis, scil. dmudruvi. Cic. So patriul ailjectives; as 
Missi ad Parthum Armeniumque legdU acil. regem. In Tusculdno, scil. 
vreedio. 


§205 


SYNTAX.-ADJECTIVES. 


187 


Note 1. The noun to be supplied with masculine adjectives is commonly 
hdmines, but when they ai'e possessives, it is oftener amici, mllUes, elves, or pro- 
pinqui. 

Note 2. The noun to be supplied is often contained in a preceding clause. 

(2.) An adjective in the neuter gender, without a noun, is cftCD 
used substantively, where, in English, the word tJdny or thinys is to 
be su[)j)lied; as, 

Bdnum, a good thing; malum, a bad thing, or, an evil. So hdnestum vervm., 
iurpe ; and in the plural, hOna, mala, tiirpia, Uvia, ccelestia, etc. Labor omn'm 
Labor overcomes all things. Viry:. 

Note 1. The Latins generally prefen-ed adding res to an adjective, to using 
its neuter as a substantive. But sometimes, when res is used, an rdirctive or 
pronoun referring to it is i)ut in the neuter instead of the feminine; Edrum 
re/utrumque. Cic. llumdndrum rerum forluna \Acv\v\\ie reyit. Sail. 1 llii l 
te rOyo, sumj/tui ne parcas ulld in re, quod ua vdletudXnem Opus sU. Cic. Omnium 
rerum mors esl extremum. Cic. 

Note 2. Instead ot thing or things, other words may sometimes be supplied, 
as the sense requires. With a preposition, neuter adjectives form adverbial 

E hrases; as, A prlmo. At first. Plant. Per miitua, IMutually. Virg. In primis, 
1 the first place. Ad hoc, or Ad hiec, IMoreover, besides. 

(3.) Adjectives used substantively often have other adjectives agreeing wnth 
them; as, Ah’a omnia. All other (things.) Plin. Inlguissumi mei, Mv greatest 
enemies. Fdmilidris mens. Cic. Inlquus noster. Id. Justa funthria. Liv. 
Joris omnia plena, scil. sunt. Virg. 

Kem. 8. (a.) Imperatives, infinitives, adverbs, clauses, and words considered 
merely as such, may be used substantively, and take a neuter adjective in the 
singitlar number; as, Supremum vale dixit, lie pronounced a last farewell. 
Ovid. Dulce et dccta-um est pro patria mori. Hor. Velle suum cuique est. Pers. 
Cras istud qunndo venit f INiart. J. Redibo actutum. A. Id actutum diu est. 
Plant. Excepto qxiod non simul esses, cetera ketus. Hor. (i.) In the poets and 
later prose writers the adjective, as in Greek, is sometimes iu the neuter plural; 
as, Ut uEneas 2 >^ldgo jactetur —nbta Virg. 

Rem. 9. {a.) Adjectives and adjective pronouns, instead of agreeing with their 
nouns, are sometimes put in the neuter gender, with a partitive signification, 
and their nouns in the genitive; as, Multum tempOris, for multum tempus ; much 
time. Id ?’ei, for ea res; that thing. So, plus ddquentia, the other form not 
being admissible with plus. (See § 110, (6.) Neuter adjectives are used in 
like manner in the plural; as, Viina rerum, for vancB res. Hor. Pleraque huma^ 
ndrnm rerum. Sail. Cf. § 212, R. 3, N. 4. But in some such examples, t):e ad¬ 
jective seems to be use<l substantively, according to Rem. 7, (2); as. Acuta 
oelU. Hor. Tellaris operta. Virg. Summa peitOris. 

Note. The adjectives thus used partitively in the singular, for the mos 
part, signify qiuintity. See § 212, Rem. 3, Note 1. 

Rem. 10. A neuter adjective is sometimes used adverbially in the nomina¬ 
tive or aimusative, both singular and plural; as, Dulce rldentem lAh'iy n am xbo, 
dulce loquentem. Hor. ^higmim sfrlaeus. Virg. Anna horrenduiri sOnuere. Id. 
Multa deos vemlrdti sunt. Cic. llOdie aut summum cras. Id. See ^ 192, II. 4, (6.) 

Rem. 11. [a.) A noun is sometimes used as an ailjective; as. Nemo ?///(£« 
Rimwnns, No Roman soldier. Liv. 'Eicmo fere ddoleseen.s. Cic. !'//• nr*mo//O/o/s. 
Id. Cf. § 207, R. 31, (f.) Tlberim accblis Jiuriis orbdtum. I’ac. Incbla (urba. 
Ovid. 'I he poets use in this maimer the Greek jiatronymics in as and is; 
as, Piiias hnsla. Ovid. Lauras J^aruusis. 11- Crsa Libystu. Virg. Cf. also 
\ 129, 8. 

[b.\ An adverb is i Iso sometimes used as an adjective; as, Neq-.:e enim 
igiuH sumus ante malorum; i. e. antiquorum or p^'ceieritorum. Virg. Nunc 
huminum mores Plaut. 


188 


SYNTAX.-ADJECTIVES. 


§ 205 


Rem. 12. (a.) An adjective or adjective pronoun, used puditively, stands 
alone, and (iommonly takes tlie jjeiider of the genitive plura., whicl depends 
upon it; but when ft is preceded by a noun of a dillerent gender, to which it 
rofer-i, it usually takes that gender, but sometimes that of the genitive; a.s, 
Klephanto htUuaruia nulla tst jjru</cu.fiur, No beast is wiser than tlie f>i<‘’^hant. 
Cic. Jik/us, </iii omiiiinn jlumlnuni maximus. Cic. Velbcissimum omnium 
mimalMin tst deljjJumts. i’lin. See ^ 212, Mem. 2.—(6.) So also with de, ex, in, 
apud, inttr, etc., with the ablative or accusative instead of the partitive geni¬ 
tive See § 212, h. 2, N. 4. 

{r.) When a culltctire noun follows in the genitive singular, (§ 212, R. 2.) thfl 
adjective takes the gender of the iirdiviiluals which comiiose it; as, Vir for- 
tii^'innis TwslriB cicildtis, The bravest man of our state. Cic. Maximus 
Lir. 

Kf.m. 13. {^ ) When a possessive pronoun or adjective is used instead of tha 
genitive of its p.-imitive or of its corresponding noun {see § 211, R. 3, (b.) and 
(c.) and R. 4), an adjective agreeing with that genitive is sometimes joined 
with such possessive; as, Solius meum peca'dum torrUji non potest, The fault 
of me alone cannot be corrected. Cic. Nostcr dubrum evtntus. Liv. Tuum 
ipsius stadium. Cic. Puyna Koinana stdhiUs suo pondere incumbentium in ho»‘ 
tern. Liv. 

(6.) Sometimes a noun in the genitive is expressed, in apposition to the sub¬ 
stantive pronoun for which the possessive stands; as, Pectus tuum, hominis 
simpllcis. Cic. 

Re:m. 14. An adjective, properly belonging to the genitive, is sometimes 
made to agree with the noun on which the genitive depends, and vice versa ; 
as, jEdifUdtionis tuaj consilium for tman, Your design of building. Cic. AccQr- 
santes violati hospUii fcedtis, tor ridldtiun. Liv. Ad majbra Inltia rerum ducentlbus 
f dtis, for vuljurum. Id. lis nominlbus eleltdtum, qulbus ex clcitdtlbus, Qtc., for 
edrum civitdtum. Ca?s. 

Kem. 15. (n.) An adjective agreeing with a noun is sometimes used, instead 
of an adverb qualifying a verb, especially in jioetry; as, Pcce vend TeUimon 
prbperus, Lo, Telamon comes in haste. U'vid. La;ti pdeem dtjitdbdmus, for Uete. 
Sail. Aidin'(IS se matutinus dfjebat, for mdne. VTrg. Nec lupus prepibus uoctur- 
nus dbambulut, i. e. by night. Id. 

{b.) nullus is used for 7iu7i; as, Mcmlni idmetsi nullus mdneas, Though 
you do not suggest it. Ter. Sextus ab aimiis nullus discedit. Cic. Prior, p>'l- 
mus, princeps, prdpior, proxwius, solus, unus, ultlmus, jmdtus, iotus, and some 
others, are used instead of their neuters, adverbially; as. Priori liCmo aupurium 
venisse fertur. Liv. Jlispdnia postrema omnium prbrincidmim perdomlta est. 
Liv. &cm'dln s,o\o's ndvem vmises Asue jnxefuit, Only nine months. Cic. Unuro 
hoc d'lco, 'fills oidy I say. Id. 'fhis is .sometimes done, for want of an ad* 
verb of appropriate meaning; as, Prunus edeidit. Ovid. Frequentes comc'nS- 
raid. Sail. 

(f.) In such expressions, tu, in the nominative, sometimes takes an adjec¬ 
tive in the vocative, aiul rice verso ; as. Sic veiuas hodierne. TibuU. Salve, 
primus omniuni parens jHitrue apiiellate. Plin. 

Kem. 16. (n.) A noun is often qualified by two or more adjectives; and 
BCrnetimes the complex idea, formed by a noun with one or more'adjectiv( 4 , is 
itself qualified by other adjectives, which agree in gender, etc. with the nenu. 

(6.) When several adjectives, each independently of the other, qualify a 
noun, if they precede it, they are almost always connected by one or more co.i- 
junctioiis; as, Malta et vdrid et copibsd brdtidne. Cic. If tliey follow it, tlie 
CDiijunction is sometimes expressed, and sometimes omitted; as, Vir altus et 
ixcdlens. Cic. Actio, vdria, vebemens, plena veritdtis. Id. 

(c.) Rut when one of the adjectives qualifies the noun, and r.nother the 
complex idea formed by the first with the noun, the conjunction is always 
nniilted; as, Pcriculbsissimum ciri/e A most dangerous civii war. Cio, 

MWam avmesticam discipllnam. Id. So with three or more adjectives; E} temos 
niultos cldros virus nbtnindi'ejn. Cio. Cf. 4 202, III., K. 1. 


§ 206. 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS—RELATIVES. 


189 


Rem, 17. The first part, last part, middle part, etc., of any place 
or time are j^enerally expressed in Latin by the adjectives primuti, 
medius, u/nnius^ extreuius, inllmus, infhnus, imus, siuiunus, suprernus, 
relu/uuSy and ce/era; as, 

nox, The rnulJIe of the night. Summa arbor^ Tlie top ' f a tree. 
^(prhnos montesy 'n\Q summits of the mouiitiiiiis. Ihit these ;u!jectives fre- 
Queutly occur without '^his signification; us. Ah extriom) coniplexu, From the 
liist embrace. Cic. Inf imo lOco nCitus, Of the lowest rank. Id. 

Ke»i. 18. The participle of the compound tenses of verbs, used impersonahy 
in ll^e passive voice, is neuter; as, Ventum est. Cic. Itum est in visce 7 'a tei’roR. 
Ovid. Scribendum esi mlhi. See § 184, 2 and 3. 

PRONOUNS. —RELATIVES. 

§ SOG. Rem. 19. («.) Relatives agree with their antece¬ 
dents in. gender, number, and person, but their case depends on 
the construction of the clause to which they belong; as, 

Puer qui leyit, The boy who reads. ^(Ilflcium quod exstruxit, The house 
wliich he built. LUerie quas dedi, The letter Avhicli I gave. Non sum (pialis 
iram, I am not such as 1 was. Hor. So Deiis cujus mfuiere vlvimns, cui nullas 
est si7nilis, quern (ulimus, a quo facta sunt oinnia^ est wternus. Addictiis lltr~ 
mippo, tt ab hoc ductus est. Aipiilo^ quantus franyit llicts. llor. 

Note 1. This rule includes all adjectives and adjective pronouns Avhich re¬ 
late to a noun in a preceding clause. Its more common application, however, 
is to the construction of the demonstrative pronouns and the relative qui. 

Note 2. When a pronoun refers to the mere Avords of a sentence, it is said to 
be used hyicalUj. Q,ui and is ai’e so used, and sometimes also hie and ille. 

(6.) The relatiA'e may be considered as placed betAveen Iavo cases 
of the same noun, either expressed or understood, Avith tlie former of 
which it agrees in gender, number, and person, and with the latter in 
gender, number, and case. 

(1.) Sometimes both nouns are expressed; as, 

Ernnt omnino duo itinera, quibus itinerlbus dbmo exlre pi^ssent, There wei'e 
only tAvo 7-outes, by Avhich routes thev could leave home. Cais. Crudelissimo 
bello, quale helium mdla umquam barUdria yessit. Cic. But it is most frequent 
with the Avord dies; as, Fot'e in armis cei'tu die, qui dies futiirus erat, etc. Cic. 
The repetition of the substantive is necessary, Avhen, for any reason, it becomes 
doubtful to Avhicli of tAvo or more preceding substantives the relative refers. 

(2.) Usually the antecedent noun only is expressed ; as, 

Anlmum reqe, qui, nisi pdret, inipirat, GoA'ern your passions, Avhich rule, 
unless they obey. llor. Tanttie miiltitudinis, quanUim cdpit urbs nostra, c( n~ 
cursus est ad me factus. Cic. Quot cdqntuni vlvunt, totidem sludidruin mi.lia. 
Hor. 

(3.) Sometimes the latter noun only is expressed, especially when 
the relative clause, as is frequently the case, precedes that of the an¬ 
tecedent; as, 

Quibus de rebus ad me scripsisti, coi'am videb’vnis; sell, de rebus. In regard to 
the things of Avhich you Avrote to me, Ave Avili consider Avhen Ave meet. Cic. 
Jn cpxeixi qyrinium em'essi sunt locum, Trqja vdedtur; scil, Iocvls. Liv. Quanta 
A'i expetunt, tantd dxjendvmt QuMes^e vlsm ei'am vidisse viros, ex ordtne tales 
Tspicio. Ovid. 


190 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS-RELATIVES. 


§ 206 


(a.) The place of the antecedent is sometimes supplied by a demonstrative 
p’’onoun; a.,, Ad qui\s res erh/m.'i, in iis pOtisslmum HaborCtbimus. Oic. 

But the demonstrative is often omitted when its case is the same as that of the 
relative, and not unfrequently, also, when the cases are different. Wlien tl e 
relative clause precedes that of the antecedent, is is expressed only for the sake 
of emphasis. Hence Ave find such sentences as, Maxlnmm ornanientum amid- 
tioe tullU, qui ex ed tolUt verecundiai.i. Oic. Terra quod accepit, numquam sint 
usurd reddit. Id.—The demonstrative adjectives and adverbs are in like manueJ 
often omitted before their corresponding relatives; tdlis before quails, ianim b©" 
fore quantus, inde before unde, ibi before ubi, etc. 

(6.) Sometimes the latter noun only is expressed, even when the reiaiiva 
clause does not precede; as, Quis non mdldruni quas amor curas lidbet, hcec inter 
oblirUcitur f Hor. 

(4.) Sometimes neither noun is expressed; this happens especially 
■when the antecedent is designedly left indefinite, or -when it is a sub¬ 
stantive pronoun; as, 

Qui bene latidt, bene vixit, scil. hdmo, (He) Avho has well escaped notice^ haa 
lived Avell. Ovid. Sioit quos curridUo pulverem Olympieum collepisse jurat. 
scil. homines, There are Avhom it delights, i. e. Some delight. Hor. Non hdbeo 
quod ie aecusem, scil. id propler quod. Cic. Non solum sdqnens videins, qui hinc 
absis, sed etiam bedtus, scil. tu. Cic. 

(5.^ The relative is sometimes either entirely omitted; as, Urbs aniiqua fuit; 
Tyr\ tenuere cOloni, scil. quam or earn. There was an ancient city (which) 
Tyrian colonists possessed, Virg.; or, if once expressed, is afteiuvards omitted 
even when, if supplied, its case would be different; as, Bocchus cum qjeditibus, 
quos filius ejus adduxerat, neque in priore puynd adfuerant, Momdnos invadunt, 
for et qui non in pridre, etc. Sail. 

(6.) (rt.) The relative sometimes takes the case of the antecedent, instead of 
its ovvn proper case; as, ()uum scr'ibas et aliquid dyas eorum, (judrum coiisuesti, 
for qtuB. Cic. Raptim quibus quisque polerat eldtis, exibant, for iis, qiue quisque 
efferre pOterat, eldtis. Liv. 

(6.) The antecedent likewise sometimes takes the case of the relative, the 
substantive either preceding or following the pronoun; as, Urbem quam statue 
vestra est, for urbs. Virg. Eunuchum quern dedisti nObis, quas turbas dedit! for 
Eunuehus. Ter. Naucriitem quern convenlre vOlui, in navi non erat. Plaut, 
Atque dlii, quorum comcedia prisca virorum est, for atque alii viri, quorum est. 
Hor. IIU, scripta quibus ednuedia prisca viris esi, for illi viri, quibus. Id, Quoa 
pueros tnlseram, epistdlam mihi attulerunt. Cic. 

These constructions are said to occur by attraction. 

_ (7.) (fi.) An adjective, which properly belongs to the t.ntecedent, is some* 
times placed in the relative clause, and agrees with the relative; as, Inter 
^[icos, quos inconditos jdciunt, ^or jdcos incondltvs, jmos, etc. Amidst the rude 
jests which they utter. Liv. Verbis, quai magua vdlant. Virg. Cdldre, quein 
multum kdbet. Cic. 

(6.) This is the common position of the adjective, when it is a numeral, 3 
comparative or a superlative; as, Nocte quam in terris ultimam eyit, 'The last 
night Avhich he s{)ent upon earth. Alsiuldpius, qui primus vuln'us ofdiydvissi 
'llcitur. Cic. Consiliis ]>dre, quie nunc pulcherrima Nantes dat senior. Listen tc 
the excellent advice, which, etc. \'irg. Some instances occur in whicii an 
adjective belonging to the relative clause, is placed in that of the antecedent; 
H.5, Qnum venissent ad vdda Volaterriuia, quae ndminantur, Vfliich are called 
Volaterran- Cic. 

(8.) '\V hen to the relative or demonstrative is joined a noun ex¬ 
planatory of its antecedent, but of a different gender or numbei, the 
relative or demonstrative usually agrees with that noun ; cis, 


1206. 


SYNTAX.—PRON O UNS-REL ATI V 11.S. 


101 


Santdnes non longe a ruldsatinm fhiibus absunt, quae civlta? est in prC-vinK^i 
riie Siuitones are not far distant from the borders of the Tolosates, which 
Itate is «\ the province. Ores. Ante comiiia^ quod tempus hnud huge abirat. 
Ball. Ronue j dnum DUaue p6puli Ldiini cum pdjmh Romano feca'uiit: ea erai 
caput rh'uvi Romam esse; i. e. that thing or that act. L;v. Si cn.nia 
fdciem.la simt, (pm amici velint, n m dmicitke tales, sed conjurationes puinndce 
sunt; i. e. such things or such connections. Cic. So, Ista (piidem vis, Sarely 
this is force. Ea ipsa causa belli /uit, for id ipsum. Hither also may lie refer¬ 
red such explanatory sentences as, Qui mens amor in te est, Such is my love 
for you. Cic. 

(9.) If the relative refers to one of two nouns, denoting the same 
object, but of different genders, it agrees with either; 'hs, 

Flumen est Avar quod in Rhddunum injluit. Caes. Ad jiumen Oxum perv&ntum 
est, qui turbidus semper est. Curt. 

(10.) 'When, in a relative clause containing the verb sun or a verb 
of naming, esteeming, etc., a predicate-noun occurs of a different 
gender from the antecedent, the relative commonly agrees with the 
latter ; but when the preceding noun is to be explained and distin¬ 
guished from another, the relative agrees with the former; as, 

NCdurce vultus quern dixere Chaos, The appearance of nature which they 
called chaos. Ovid. Genus hdmlnum quod IIelates vdedtur. Nep. Animal, 
quern vdedmus homlnem. The animal whom Ave call man. Cic. Ldcus in car- 
cere, quod Tullianum appelldtur. Sail. Pecunidrum conquisUio; eos esse belli 
civilis neryos dictitans Macidnus. Tac. 

(11.) The relative sometimes agrees with a noun, either equiva¬ 
lent in sense to the antecedent, or only implied in the preceding 
clause; as, 

Ahindantin edrum rinnim, qme raortdles prima putant. An abun lance of those 
things, which mortals esteem most important. Sail. Cf. ^ 205, K. 7, (2.) N. 1. 
But sometimes when a neuter adjective used substantively has preceded, res 
with a relative follows; as, Permulta sunt, (pm did jwssunt, qua re inttlligdtur. 
Cic. Fdtdle monstrum, quae, etc., sell. Cledpdtra. Hor. Cf. § 323, 3, (4.) 

(a.) A relative or demonstrative pron'oun, refeiTing to a collective noun, or 
to a noun Avhich only in a figurative sense denotes a human being, sometime\ 
takes the gender and number of the individuals Avhich the noun implies; a«, 
Eguitdtum, quos. Sail. Genus, qui premuntur. Cic. Sendtus —ii. Sail. 

(6.) A pronoun in the plural often follows a noun in the singular, referring 
not only to the noun but to the class of persons or things to which it belongs, 
as, Denidcritum dmittdmus; nihil est enim dpud istos, quod, etc. i. e. with Demo¬ 
critus and his followers. Cic. Didnysius negdvit se jure illo nigro (quod cccnct 
caput erat, dclectdtum. Turn is, qid ilia coxerat, etc. Id. 

(12.) T he antecedent is sometimes implied in a possessive pronoun; as, 
Omnes latuldre fortunas meas, qui ndtum tdli ingenio qnmditum hdberem^ scii. 
md, All were extolling my fortune, who, etc. Ter. Id mea mlnime rej'ert, qai 
%wm ndtu maximns. Id. Nostrum consilium laudandum est, qui ndluejum, etc. Cic.; 
or in a possessive adjective; as, Servlli tumultu, quos, etc. Ca;s. 

tl3.^ (o.) Sometimes the antecedent is a proposition; the relative then is 
commonly neuter; as, Postrnuo, quod dijf'icdlimum inter moridles, gloria in- 
tidviin vicisti, Filially, 3 'ou have overcome envv with glory, ichuh, among men 
is most difficult. Sail. F(quidem exsjjectdbam jam Has lUeras, idque cun multis. 
Cic. 

{b.) In such instances, id is gen3rally placed before the relative prone an, 
referring tO the idea in the antecedent clause; as. Sire, id ipiod constat, PUitdnis 
studidsus audienS fuit. Cic. Diem consumi vdlebant, id cpwa fecemut. 1:1. 

(c.) Sometimes is, referring to a clause, agrees^ wavh a, noun following; as 
telle atque idem nolle, ea demum Jirma dmicitia est. Sail. 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS-RELATIVES. 


§2oa 




(14.) Qtio(l relating to a preceding statement, and serving the purpose of 
transition, is often placed at the beginning of a sentence after a period, where 
it may be translated by ‘ nay,’ ‘ now,’ or ‘ and.’ It is tlms use I especially be¬ 
fore sij et.s/, and rim; as, Quodsi illinc ind)tits prdfiujUses^ hhiiev^ ist(i tud fuga 
nef arm jd(Vndretui\ i. e. and even if you had lied without taking anything 
witii you, still, etc. Cic. Verr. 1, 14. Xluodsi, ‘ il’then,’ is especially used iii in¬ 
troducing something assumed as true, from which further inferences may .lO 
drawn. Sometimes also it is equivalent to ‘ although.’ Quadnisi siguilios ‘ if 
then—not’; as, Quodnisi eyo raco m/reritw illias condtus dliqiatutuliiia rejn-esi^- 
itTii, tain viuKos, etc. Quoaetd is ‘ nay, even if’; as, Quodtld ingdiiis inagnit 
prmliti quidain iticendi rdpinm sine rdtidne ronsequentur, ars tdnien eU dux cer- 
tioi\—Quod is found also before quitin, ubi, quia, quoniam, ne and utrtam, where 
tlie conjunction alone would seem to be sufficiei.t; as, (^uod uilnam ilium, ciijus 
fddnore in has mlserias projeitus sum, eddein laec simtilaidem videam. Sail. 
It is so used even before a relative in Cic. Phil. 10, 4, Jin .— Claod, in such ex¬ 
amples, seems to be an accusative, with q)voq>ter or ad understood. 

(15.) (a.) A relative is always plural, when referring to two or more nonufl 
in the singular. If the nouns are of difTereut genders, the gender of the relative 
is determined by Rem. 2, page 185; as, Ninus et Semlrdmis, qui Bdbyldna car^d- 
dirant, Ninus and Semiramis, who had founded Babylon. Veil. Cribro fdndU 
et tlblcine, qure sibi suinpserat. Cic. Jdx summd lietUid atque lascicid, qiue mil- 
turna quies pipererat. Sail. Ndves et capticos qute ad Chitim capta erant. I.iv. 

{b.) If the antecedents are of different persons, the relative follows the first 
person rather than the second or third, and the second rather than the third; 
as, Ta tt pater, qui in eonvivio erdtis. Ego et tu, qui erdinus. Cf. ^ 200, K. 12, (7.) 

(16.) The relative adjectives qudt, quantus, qudlis, are construed like the 
relative qui. They have generally, in the antecedent clause, the corresponding 
demonstrative words, tot, tantus, tdlis; but these are also often omitteil. Fre¬ 
quently also the order of the clauses is reversed, so that the relative clause 
precedes the demonstrative. 

(17.) at the beginning of a sentence, is often translated like a demon¬ 
strative; as, Qute quum ita sint. Since these (things) are so. Cic. 

(18.) The relative qui with sum and either a nominative or the ablative of 
quality, is used in explanatory clauses, instead ofyn-o,‘in accordance with.’ 
or ‘ according to ’; thus, instead of Tu, pro tud prudentid, quid optimum Jm lu 
cit, ridfbis. Cic., we may say, quw tua est prudeutia, or, qud prudentid es So, 
Velis tautummOdo, qua3 tua virtus, expugndbis. lior. Qua priidentia es, uihil U 
fiigiet. Cic. 

(19.) A relative clause is sometimes used for the purpose of denoting by 
circumlocution the per.-.on of the agent in a definite but not permanent con¬ 
dition; as, El, qui nudiunt, or qui adsunt, i. e. the hearers, the persons present. 
So, also, a relative clause is used for the English expression ‘ above men¬ 
tioned’; as. Ex libris quos dixi or quos ante (supra) lauadvi: and the English 
‘ so called,’ or ‘ what is called,’ is expressed by quern, quam, quod vdcant, or 
qui. quiz, quod vdcatur, da itur,eto.^ as, Aec Ilerirms has, quos vacant, impc'.K, 
(Athenis) lici’bat. Cic. lest/vq qiue dlcitur, vita, mors est. Id. 

(20.) Rekative and demonstrative adverbs (see § 191, R. 1), are fiequentiy 
u-ed instead of relative and demonstrative pronouns with prep.isitions; as, /,<? 
u de tc audisse da is, i. e. a quo. Cic. Divithe npud illos sunt, ant ubi illi cdlunC 
i. e. dpud quos. Sail. IJuic ab ddotesrenlid bella inte.stina, aedes, rdplim, dii 
oordia eivilis, grata j[uere, ibi()ue Juvenlutein exercuit, i. e. in iis, in these things. 
Sail. 

(21.)^ With quam qui and the siiperlative after tarn the verb of the relative 
clause is sometimes omitted; as, Tam mild grdtum id erit, quam ouod qrdtissl- 
murn. Cic. Tam enim sum amicus reipublicm, quam qui maxlme. id. Tam sum 
mitis quam qid lenissimus. Id. So also with ut qui without tarn; as, Te sempei 
sic cdlam et tuebor, ut quern diUgentis^me. Id. 


8 207. 


SYNTAX.-PRONOrNS.-DEMONSTRATIVES. 


193 


DEMONSTRATIVES. 


§ 207 . Rem. 20 . The oblique cases of the personal pronoun of the 
tliird person {him, her, etc.) are cominonlv expressed in prose by the oblique 
cases of is, ea, id. Hie and 'however, being more emphatic, take the piawe 
of is, ea, id, in lyric poetry, and occasionally in prose also, when particular 
emphasis is intended. The cases of ipse, ipsa, ipsuvi, also, are employed for 
this purpose, when the individuality of the person is to be distinctly expressed. 
In reflexive sentences, the oblique cases of the pronoun of the third person, are 
regularly supplied by sui, sibi, se; and it is only when the person of the lead¬ 
ing subject is to be referred to with paiTicular emphasis, that ipse is used in¬ 
stead of sui. 

Rem. 21. The demonstrative pronouns, is and ille, are sometimes used, espe¬ 
cially \n\h quklem, where a corresponding word in English is unnecessary; 
as, Sdjnentice stadium vetus id quidem in nostiis, sed idmen, etc. Cic. 0 homlnem 
semper ilium quidem mild aptum, nunc vero etiam suctvem. Id. Quejii neque fides, 
neque jusjurandum, neque ilium misericordia, rejyressit. Whom neither fidelity, 
nor an oath, nor pity, has restrained. Ter. Is when used for the sake of em¬ 
phasis seems sometimes in English to be superfluous; as, Male se res hdhet, 
quum, quod virtute efflci debet, id tentdtur pecunid. Cic. 

Rem. 22. S>lc, it a, id, hoc, illud, are often used redundantly as a preliminary 
announcement of a subsequent proposition, and are added to the verb on which 
this proposition depends; as, 'Sio a mdjonbus suis accqjerant, tanta pdpuli Rd- 
jn/lni esse beneficia, ut, etc. Cic. Te illud admdneo, ut quotldie meditere, remt- 
endum esse irucundioe. Id. Hoc tlbi persuCideas vUim, me nihil dmisisse, I wish 
you to be persuaded of this—that I have omitted nothing. These pleonastic 
additions have generally no influence on the constmetion of propositions, but 
in a few instances they are followed by«<; as, De cujus dlcendi cdpid sic accepi- 
mus, ut, etc. Cic. Ita enim deflnit, ut perturbdtio sit, etc. Id. In the phrase hoc, 
illud, or id dyere ut, the pronoun is established by custom and is necessary 
See ^ 273, 1, (a.) 

Rem. 23. {a.) Hie ‘this ’ refers to what is near to the speaker either in place 
or time, ille ‘ that ’ to what is more remote. Hence hie sometimes refers to the 
speaker himself, and hie hOmo is then the same as ego. On this account hie is 
sometimes called the demonstrative of the first person. When reference is 
made to two things previously mentioned, hie commonly refers to the latter, 
ille to the former, and the pronouns are arranged in the same order, as the ob¬ 
jects to which they relate; as, Igndvia coipus hebetat, labor Jirmat; ilia mdturam 
zenectutem, hie lonyam dddlescentiam remit. Sloth enervates the body, labor 
strengthens it; the former produces premature old age, the latter protracted 
youth. Cels. 

(b.) But the order is often reversed, so that hie refers to the object first men¬ 
tioned, and ille to the one mentioned last; as, Bic deus et virgo est; hie spe cUer, 
ilia timbre. Ovid. So when alter...alter, ‘ the one...the other,’ refer to two things 
montiored before, the previous order is sometimes observed and sometimes re- 
versce,’ but whei'ever there is ambiguity the order is reversed, so that the first 
alter refers to the last object. Sometimes hie...hie are used instead of hie.. iUe. 
So ille...ille sometimes denote ‘ the one...the other.’ 

( c ,) Hi-.' and ille have the same relation to time present and past as nunc and 
funi- ^ 277; and hence whatever, in speaking of present time, is expressed 
by hie and its derivative adverbs, hie, hinc, hue, and adhiie, is expressed by tU6 
and its derivatives, when it is spoken of as belonging to past time. 

Rem. 24. Jllc, when not in opposition to hie, is Dften used to denote that 
which is of general notoriety; as, Magno illi Alexandra simillimus, Verv like 
Alexander the Great. Veil. Medea ilia. The celebrated Medea. Cic. flence 
Ule is sometimes added to other pronouns, to refer to something discussed be¬ 
fore ; as, Avebant vlsere, quis ille tot annos does nostras spreasset. Tac. lUe 
IS sometimes translated mis ; as, Unum illud dlco. This only I say. Cic. Ille 

17 


I94 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS-DEMONSTRATIVES. 


§207 


lometimes marks a change of jiersons, and may thtn be translated ‘ the other 
»s, Vercing€td7'ix obviam Ca’-snri pi-dficiscUur. Ule (sell. Qesar) oj)pidum A ovio 
dunum ojjpupndre iustltua’ut. Cses. 

Rem. 25. Iste properly refers to the person addressed, and for this reason is 
called the demonstrative of the second person.—///e refers to the person spoki n 
of, and is hence called the demonstrative of the third person. Thus iste lloer is 
thy book, but Ule liber' is the book of which we are speaking. Hence, in let¬ 
ters, hie and its derivatives are used of the writer; iste and its derivatives of the 
iX'.r&on addressed; Ule, etc., of some other person or thing. See'J191,R. 3, (e' 
Jait from its frequent forensic use, and its application to the opponent^ often 
denotes contempt. 

Rem. 26. (a.) Js does not, like Me, Ule, and iste, denote the place or order of 
the object to which it relates, but either refers without particular emphasis to 
dometliing al:eady mentioned or to something which is to be defined by the 
relative yui IJie, is, or Ule, may be used in this way before the relative, but 
only Me or is after it; as, Qui ddeet, is discit, or Me diseit, but not Ule diseit, un¬ 
less some individual is refeiTcd to. 

(b.) Is before a relative or ut has sometimes the sense of iulis, such, denoting 
a class; as, Neque enim hi is es, qui quid sis neseias. Nor are you such a person, 
as not to know what you are. Cic.; sometimes it has the force of Idem; as, voa 
— ii. Cic. JIanil. 12. 

(c ) If the noun to which is refers is to receive some additional predicate, 
we must use et is, atque is, isque, et is.quidern, and with a negative nee is; as, 
Vineulavero, et ea sempiterna, etc. Cic. Und in ddmo, et ea quidem angusta, 
etc. Id. Addleseentes aliquot, nec ii tenui Idea orti, etc. Liv. Bed is is used 
when the additional predicate is opposed to the preceding; as, Severitdtem in 
teneetute pr'obo, sed earn, sleut alia, modieam. Cic. The neuter et id, or idque, 
serves to introduce an addition to the preceding proposition; as, Quamquam te, 
Maree flli, annum jam audientem Crutippum, idque Athenis, etc. 

{d.) Is is not expressed when it would be in the same oblique case as the 
preceding noun to which it refers; as. Pater dmat llberos et tdmen castlgat. 
Multos illustrat fortuna, dum vexat. 

(e.) When in English ‘that’ or ‘those’ is used instead of the repetition ot 
the preceding substantive, is is never used in Latin, and Ule only in later au¬ 
thors. In such cases the noun is commonly not repeated in Latin, and no pro¬ 
noun is used in its place; as, Philippus hostium metnus scepe vitdvit, sudrum effu- 
gire non vdluit, those of his own subjects. Curt. Sometimes the substantive is 
repeated; as, Judieia elvUdtis eum judieiis jmneijns eertant. Veil. Sometimes 
a possessive adjective is used instead of the genitive depending on the omitted 
substantive; as, Terentii fdbulas studidse lego, Flautir.is minus deleetor: and 
sometimes instead of the genitive or a possessive adjective the name of the per¬ 
son itself is put in the case which the verb governs; as. Si eum Lycurgo ri 
Dracone et Sblbne rwstras leges eonferre vdlueHtis. Cic.—In Cicero Me and iUe 
when the preceding substantive is understood, retain their demonstrative ?’g- 
Qincation, and therefore do not merely supply the place of the omitted sab- 
^tautive; as, Nullam enim virtus dliam mereedem desiderat, preeter hanc, i. e. the 
one of which I am speaking. Cic. 

Rem. 27. {a.) Idem, as denoting a subject which stands in equal relations tc 
two different predicates, often supplies the place of Item or dtiam, ‘ also,’ ‘ at the 
same timCj’or of tdmen, ^ yet' if the things are apparently inconsistent; as, 
Musici, qui erant quondam iidem poetce. ^lusicians, who formerly were poets 
also. Cic. Euphrates et Tigris mngno dqudrum dlvoi'tio iter peveurrunt; iidem 
^nd yet) pauldtim in aretius eoeunt. 

(h.) Et ipse, on the other hand, denotes that the same predicate belongs to 
two subjects. It is rendered by ‘too’ or ‘also’; as, Antoninus Commddus nihil 
gdternum hdbuit, nisi quod eontra Germdnos fUleiter et ipse pugndvU, for item 
or ipse qudque. Eutr.—So, also, nec ipse is used in the sense oi ‘ neither ’; as 
Primis repulsis Maharbal cum mdjdre rdbdre virdrum missus nec ipse erupdOntm 
edhertium sustinuii. Liv. 


1207. 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS-INTENSIVE, ETC 


195 


{e.) Idem is sometimes repeated in the sense of ‘ at once,’ denoting the tmion 
of onalities which might be thought incompatible; as, Fuere quldamqui iidem 
donate iiilem ve7-su(e uherent, There have been some who could speak at once 
elegantly and artfully. Cic. 

(d.) ‘ d’he same as ’ is variously expressed in Latin, by idem with qui, ac or 
atque, qunm, quasi, ut or cum; as. Verves idem est qui fuit semper, Verres is the 
same as he has always been. Cic. Vita est eiidem ac fuit. Liv. Disputdtionem. 
ixponirnus iisdetn fere verbis ut actum est. Cic. Eandem coustituit pdtestdtem 
3 uam si, etc. Cic. Eudem Idco res est, qufisi ea qjecunia leqdta non esset. Id. 
Jlunc Ci/o eddem mecum pntre genitum, etc. So also poetically with the dative; 
as, Eudem aliis sbpitu* quvete est. Lucr. Cf. ^ 222, R. 7. 

IPSE, Intensive or Adjunctive. 

Rem. 28. (a.) Ipse, when used with a substantive pronoun taken reflexively 
agrees either with such proiiv/un or with the subject of the proposition, accord* 
ingas either is emphatic; as, Agam per me ipse, I will do it myself. Cic. Non 
igeo medicind (i. e. ut alii me consolentur); me ipse consolor. Cic. Accusando 
eum, a cu/us crmUiltOte vosmet ipsi armis vimlicastis. Liv.— Cn. Pompeium omnt~ 
bus, Lentulum mlhi ipsi antepono. Cic. Fac ut te ipsum custodias. Id. Difyrme 
est de se ipsum j/rcedicdre. Id.—But Cicero often construes ipse as the subject, 
even where the emphasis belongs to the object; as, Quid est negotii continere 
€ 08 , qtcibus jo'cesis, si te ipse contineas ? 

(h.) When ipse is joined with a possessive pronoun used reflexively, it usually 
takes the case of the subject; as, Meam ipse legem negllgo; not meamipsius, 
according to § 211, R. 3, (a). So, Si ex scriptis cognosci ipsi suis pdtuissent. Cic. 
Earn fraudem vested ipsi virtute vntastis. Liv. But the genitive is necessary when 
the possessive does not refer to the subject; as, Tud ipsius causd hoc feci. And 
it is sometimes found where the case of the subject should be used; as. Conjee- 
turam de tuo ipsius studio ceperis, instead of ipse. — <{c.) Ipse is sometimes used 
as reflexive without sui; as, Omnes bdni, quantum in ipsis fuit, Ccesdrem occide- 
runt. Cic. 

(d.) Ipse, with nouns denoting time or number, expresses exactness, and 
may be rendered,‘just,’ ‘precisely’; or ‘very,’ ‘only’; as, Dyrrhdchio sum 
pvdfectus ipso illo die, quo lex est ddta de nobis, on the very day. Cic. Triginta 
dies erant ipsi, quum has ddbam literas, per quos nullas a vobts acci'peram, just 
thirty days. Id. Et quisquam dubitdbit — quam facile impemo atque exercltu 
\;dcios et vectigdlia consei-rdturus sit, qui ipso nomine ac rumdre defendJirit, by his 
very name, or, by his name only. Id. 

General. Relatives. 

Rem. 29. Quicumque, quisquis, and the other general relatives (see§ 139,6, 
R., are, in classical prose, always connected with a verb, and form the protasis. 

is commonly used as an adjective, and qidsquis as a substantive; 
but the neuter quodcumque is used as a substantive with a following genitive; 
as, Quodcumque militum; and, on the other hand, quisquis is rarely an adjec¬ 
tive; as, Quisquis erit vitce cdlor. Hor.; and even the neniev quidqidd is used in 
the same manner; as, Quisquis hdnos tumidi, quichjuid sold men hiitnandi est. Viig. 
Quicumque seems sometimes even in Cicero equivalent to omnis or quivis; as 
sdndri pOteimut, quacumque rdtidne sdndbo. What can be cured, I will cure 
by every possible means. Cic. Yet possum is rather to be supplied;—-‘in 
whatever way I can.’ But in later writers quicumque is frequently used in tlie 
ibsolute sense for quivis or quillbet; as, Cicerdnem cuicumque ehrum fortiter 
ppdsuerim. Quint. Qudliscumqiie and quanPuscumque are likewise used in an 
absolute sense by ellipsis; as, Tu non. conciipisces quanticumque ad liberidtem 
verv^.nire^ At any price, be it ever so .dgh. Sen. So quisquis is occasionally 
jsed, not as a relative, but as an indefinite pronoun.— Siquis often seems to 
stand as a relative, like the Greek tins for tifT/f ‘whoever’; but it always 
contains the idea of ‘ perhaps ’; as, Nuda fere Alpium edeumina sunt, et si quid 
est pdtnili, obrumt naves. Liv. 


196 


SYNTAX.-INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 


207 


Indefinite Pronouns. 

Rem. 30. («.) Allquis quispiam are particular and effirYiat.ve, cirres* 
ponding to the English someone; as, Heredilas esl petunia^ qrae '.mnte alicujus 
tui queinpiam pei'vknit jure^ An inheritance is property whicii, at the death of 
»ome one, falls to some (other) one by law. Cic. Alulli sine doctrlnd allquid 
omnium (jhierum et artium consl^quuntur. Id. 

(6.) Aliqiiis is more emphatic than the indefinite pronoun quis. (See ^ 137,(3.) 
Hence dliquis stands by itself, but quis is commonly connected with certain 
conjunctions or relative words, but these are sometimes separated from it by 
one or more words. Sometimes, however, quis is used without such conjunc¬ 
tions or relatives; as. Morbus aut egestas aut quid ejusmOdi. Cic. LHruhere 
quid de dliquo. Id. InjuHam cui fdcere. Id. So, Dixerit quis. Some one might 
•ay. But even after those conjunctions which usually require quis^ dJ^uis is 
used when employed antithetically and of course emphatically; as, Tlmebat 
Vompeius omnia, ne aliquid vos iimerHis. Cic. In English the emphasis of dlu/uis 
Is sometimes expressed by ‘ really ’; as, Sensus manendi, si allquis esse pdtest, is 
ad exiguum tempus durat. Cic.— Quispiam, also, is sometimes used like quia 
after St, etc., and sometimes stands alone; as, Quceret fortnsse quispiam. 

Rem. 31. (a.) Ci wisgttrt m,‘any one,’andM/^Ms,‘any,’are universal. Likewm- 
qtiam and usquam they are used in propositions which involve a universal nega¬ 
tive, or which express an interrogation with a negative force, or a condition 
(usually with si or quasi) ; also, alter comparatives, after the adverb vix, and 
the preposition sine; as, Neque ex castris quisquara omnium discesserat 

Nor had any one departed from the camp of Catiline. SaU. Nec ullo cdsu pd¬ 
test continget'e, ut ulla iniermissio fiat offcii. Cic. An quisquam ^test sine qjer- 
turbditidne mentis irascif Id. THrior nic tyrannus Syrdcusdnis fuit, quam 
quam superiorum. Id. Vix quidquam spei esi. Sen. But after the dependent 
negative particles ne, neve, and the negative interrogative particle num, quis and 
not quisquam is used. 

(('.) But quisquam and ullus after si are often used not in a negative sense, 
but instead of dliquis or quis, serving only to increase the indefiniteness which 
would be implied in the hitter pronouns; as, Aut enim nemo, quA>d quidem mdgia 
credo, aut, si quisquam, ille sapiens fait, if any man. Cic. Hence, ultimately, 
even without si, where the indefiniteness is to be made emphatic, quisquam, 
ullus, umquam and usquam Avere used; as, Quamdiu quisquam erit, qui ie de¬ 
fender e audeat, vines. Cic. Bellum maxlme omnium memdrdbile, qiue mnquam 
qesta sunt, scripturus sum. Tac. 

(c.) Ullus is properly an adjective, but quisquam is commonly used without 

noun, except it is a Avord denoting a person; as, Cidquam civi, To any citizen. 
^njusquam drdtdris eldquentiam. Hence quisquam corresponds to the "substan¬ 
tive nemo and ullus to the adjective nullus. Nemo is often used Avith other 
substantives denoting male persons so as to become equivalent to the a yective 
nullus; fis, nemo pietor, nemo dddlescens, and eA'en Ii07no nemo. Cic. Quisquam 
Is sometimes used in a similar manner: as, quisquam himo, qtiisqiiam civis. On 
the other hand nrdlus and ullus are used as substantives instead of mnvo and 
misquam, especiallv the genitive nullius and the ablative nnllo. 

Rkm. 32. (a.) Alius, like ullus, though properly an adjectiA’^e, is somstimes 
used 'ike a pronoun. It is often rejAeated, or joined Avit'h an adverb derived 
from it, in the same proposition, Avhich may be translated by two separate 
propositions, commencing respectively Avith ‘ one...another ’; as, Aliud aids 
oUet ir optimum. One thing seems best to one, another to another. Cic. Aliis 
B.iiuude periaUum est. Danger threatens one from one source, another from 
another; or, Danger threatens difierent persons from diflerent sources. Ter. 
DiOuysium a’xtcr cum aliis de nobis Ideutum audiebarn. Cic.— Alter is used in the 
lame manner Avhen only two persons are spoken of, but there are no ad\mrlM ile- 
rived from it; as. Alter b> alterum causam conferunt. They accuse each other. 

(i.) Alius, repeated in different propositions, is also translated ‘ one...another ’ 
as, Aliud d(7i7ur, aliud simuldtur, One thing is done, aiother pretended. Cic, 
Allter aliter scri6i7, like dZiTer ac or atque, He speaks othei’wise than 

he writes. So Aliud Idquitur, dliud scribit. 


1207 . 


STNTAX.-POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, 


197 


(c.) Uterque, ‘ each of two,’ is always used by Cicero in the sins^lar uurn- 
ber, when only two individuals are spoken of. Its plural, utrlnue, is use! only 
when eacli of two parties consists of several individuals; as, Jmckldnes—Tyri'i, 
Ktri(/ue. But in other good prose Avriters tlie plural utrlque is occasionally used 
In speaking of only two; as, Utrlque DiOnysii. Nep. Cf. § 209, R. 11, (4.) 

Rem. 33. (n.) Quldam differs from cViquis by implying that a person or 
thing, though indefinitely described, is definitely known; as, Quidam de colie- 
7ivstris, A certain one of our coUeagues. Cic. Scis me quodam tempore Mitr 
ntum verJsse tecum. Id. 



(b.) Quldam is sometimes used for some, as opposed to the whole, or to others, 
as, Excesserunt ui’be ijuidam, alii viortem sibi consclvemint. Some departed from 
the city, others destroyed themselves. Liv. Hence it is used to soften an ex¬ 
pression, where in English we say ‘so to speak,’ etc.; as, Afilvo est quoddam 
helium ndturdle cum corvo, A kind of natural warfare. Cic. Fuit enim illud quod¬ 
dam c(£C7im tempus servitutis. Id. Etenim omnes ai'tes qum ad humdnitdtem periV- 
rent, hdbent quoddam commune vinculum et quasi coyndtidne quadam inter se con- 
tlnev.tur. Id.— Tanuquam is used for the same purpose, and also ut Ita dlcarn. 

Rem. 34. Q24iris and‘anyone,’ and unusquisque,^osich,'' areimi- 
versal and absolute; as. Omnia sunt ejusmodi quivis ut pei'spicere possit. All are 
cf such a natuie that aiiATone can perceive. Cic. llic dpud mdjores nostros adnib- 
ebdtur perltus, mine quilibet. Id. Ndtura unumquemque ti'dhit ad discendum. 
A negative joined with them denies only the universality Avhich they imply; 
as. Non cuivis hdmini contingit ddlre Cdrinthum, i. e. not to every man without 
distinction. Hor. Cuiquam would have made the negation universal. 

Rem. 35. (a.) Quisque signifies each, every one, distributively or relatively, 
and generally stands without a noun; as. Quod cuique obtlgit, itZ quisque teneai, 
Let each one keep what has fallen to each. Cic. Hence it is used particularly 
after relative and interrogative pronouns and adverbs; as, Sclpio polllcetur sioi 
magnee curoe f6re, ut omnia clvitdtibus, quae cujusque fuissent, restUuerentur. 
Cic. Ut prcedlci posset, quid cuique eventurum, et quo quisque fdto ndtus esset. 
Id. Cur flat quidque queeris: recte omnlno. Id. Quo quisque est sollertior, 
hoc ddeet uibdi'iosius. Id. Ut quisque optime dlcit, ita maxime dlcendi difficultdtem 
timet. Id. And hence the expression qudtusquisque in the sense of ‘ how few 
among all.’ It is also used distributively after numerals; as, Decimus quisque 
iorte Tectus, Every tenth man. Quinto quoque anno. In every fifth year. So 
also afterSMMs; as, Sui cuique llberi cdrissimi: suum cuique placet. '(Respect¬ 
ing the order of the words, cf. § 279, 14: and respecting quisque in the nomina¬ 
tive in apposition to a noun or pronoun in the ablative absolute or in the ac¬ 
cusative with the infinitive, see § 204, R. 10.) 

(6.) Quisque with a superlative, either in the singular or the plural, denotes 
Universality, and is generally equivalent to omnes with the positive; as, doctis- 
rimus quisque. Every learned man, i. e. all the learned; but often, also, in con¬ 
nection Avith the verb, it retains the idea of a reciprocal comparison, and is to 
be rendered by the superlative; as. In omni arte optimum quidque rdrissimunty 
The best is the rarest. Cic. Altissima quseque minimo s6no IdbunUir 

The deepest rivers Aoav Avith the least sound. Curt. With pi'lmus, it denotes 
the jii'st possible; as, Prlmo quoque iempdre. As soon as possible. Cic. 


POSSESSIVES. 


Rem, 36. (a.) The possessive pronouns meus, tuns, suus, noster, and vesier 
ire jeir.ed to nouns, to indicate an action or possession of the persons de ictea 
i)'their ])rimitives; as, Tutus dmo7' meus est tibi, ^ly love is secure to you. 
Ovid. Tuam I'icem ddlere sdleo. Cic.—These pronouns, as in English, Avhen 
belonging to tAvo substantives, are generally expressed but once, even when 
the subsPantives are of different genders; as, amor tuus ac judiciun de me. 

(b. ) But these pronouns are sometimes used when the persons to Avhich they 
refer are the o^ects of an action, feeling, etc.; as, Nam ndque tua negligentid 
teque (Ww id fecit tuo, For he did it neither through neglect nor Laisred of you. 
I'er. See^2n, B. 8. 


17 * 




SYNTAX.—PRONOUNS—REFLEXIVES. 


?f208 


(c ) Th'» possessive pronouns, especially when used as reflexives, are often 
Dmitted; aj, Quo rh'ertarf in patrlam? scil. meanij VV'hitlier shall T return ? 
lo (my) country? Ovid. Dtxtrd munera jm'i'exit, sud. Id. lUit they are 
expressed when emphasis or contrast is intended, where in English. ‘ own ’ 
might be added to the pronoun; as, £yo non dicain, tdmen id pdlerltis vuni diit- 
mis vestris edyUdre. Cic. 

(rf ) When besides the person of the subject, that of a remote object also 
occurs in the proposition, the possessive pronoun will refer to the latter; as. 
I'atris dnlmuni nuhi reconciliasti, i. e. patrls niei dnimum ’••ither than tui. 

(e ) As reflexives, metis, etc., are translated my, thy nis, her, its, our, your 
thiir; or my own, thy own, his own, etc. 

THE REFLEXIVES 5Z7/AND SUUS. 

§208. E-e:m. 37 . (a.) Sui and sum properly refer to the 
subject of the proposition in which they stand; as, 

Oppidanl facinus in se ac snos feedum consciscunt, The citizens decide on a 
foul crime against themselves snd their friends. Liv. 

(6.) They continue to be used in successive clauses, if the subject 
remains the same; as, 

hse se guisque dlUyit, non ut dllquam a se ipse mercedem exlyat cdrttdiis suas, 
sea quod j)er se sibi quisque edrm esL Cic. 

(1.) In dependent clauses, in which the subject does not remain 
the same, the reflexives are commonly used in references to the lead¬ 
ing subject, when the thoughts, language, purposes, etc., of that sub¬ 
ject are stated; as, 

Atrdvislus preediedvit, non sese Gcdlis, sed Gallos sibi helium int&lisse, Ariovistus 
declared that he had not made war upon the Gauls, but the Gauls upon him. 
Caes. ndmeimm Cdldphonii civem esse dicunt suum,' The Colophonians say that 
Homer is their citizen. Cic. Tyrannus petlvit ut se ad dnilcitiam tertium ascrlbS- 
rent. Id. But sometimes, to avoid ambiguity, the cases of is or ille are used in 
such clauses in references to the leading subject; as, Helvetii sese Allobrdyes vi 
coacturos exislimdbant, ut per suos fines eos Ire pdterentur. Cses. Here suos 
refers to the subject of the dependent clause, and eos to Helvetii, the subject of 
the leading clause. And sometimes, even in the same dependent clause, two 
reflexive pronouns are used, referring to diflerent persons; as, IScythce jjetebant 
ut reyis sui f lliam mdli'imonio sibi janyerct. Curt. 

(2.) If, however, the leading subject, whose thoughts, etc., are ex¬ 
pressed, is indefinite, the reflexives relate to the subject of a depend¬ 
ent clause; as, 

Medoam prcedlcnnt (scil. hdmtnes) in fuyd, frdtris sui membra in iis I5cis, qua 
se parens persequeretur, dissipdvisse. Cic. Ipsum regem trddunt dperdtum hit 
tacris se abdidissc. Liv. 

(3.) (a.) When the leading verb is in the passive voice, the re¬ 
flexive often refers not to its subject, but to that which would be its 
lubject in the active voice; as, 

A Qtmre inrltor ut sim sibi leydtus, i. e. Ccesar me invitat, I am mvited by 
Csenar to become his lieutenant. Cic. 

(/>.) So when the subject is a thing without life, the reflexive may 
relate to some other word in the sentence, which denotes a thing hav- 
ng life; as, 

Cmium tarn flda custddia quid significat aliud, ntsi se ad hdmtnum commdcA 
idles esse genirdtos Cic. 


s 


SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS—REFLEXIVES. 


m 


(4.) Instead of sm and suus, whether referring to a leading or a 
Fnbordlnate subject, ipse is sometimes used, to avoid ambiguity from 
the similarity of both numoers of sui, and also to mark more emphat¬ 
ically than suus, the person to whom it relates; as, 

Jiiffiirtka legatos mlsit, qui ipsi llberisque ritam peterent^ Jugartha sent ambas¬ 
sadors to ask life for himself and his children. Sail, ^'a viClestisslme fen't 
idiiilnes debenC, qtice ipsorum ctdpd contracta stmt. 

(5.) In the plural number, with inter, se only is used, if the person 
01 thing referred to is in the nominative or accusative; se or ipse, if 
in any other case; as, 

Friitres inttr se quum forma, turn mdi'ibus similes, Brothers resembling each 
other both in person and character. Cic. Feras inter sese conciliat ndtura. Cio. 
Incidunt dliqua a doctis ^tiam inter ipsos mutuo reprehensa. Quint. 

(6.) (n.) "When reference is made not to the subject of the propo¬ 
sition, but to some other person or thing, hie, is, or ille, is generally 
used, except in the cases above specified; as, 

Themistdcles servum ad Xerxem mlsit, ut ei nuntidret, suis verbis, adversdtnos 
?ius iti fugd esse, Themistoclcs sent his servant to Xerxes, to inform him 
(Xerxes), in his (Themistocles’) name, that his (Xerxes’) enemies were upon 
the point of flight. Nep. 

{h.) But when no ambiguity would arise, and especially when the 
verb is of the first or second person, sui and suus sometimes take the 
place of the demonstrative pronouns; as, 

Suam rem sibi salvam sistam, I will restore his property entire to him. Plant, 

(c.) On the contrary, the demonstratives are sometimes used for 
the reflexives; as, 

Ilelvctii persuddent Raurdcis, ut und cum iis prbficiscantur. The Helvetii per¬ 
suade the Rauraci to go with them. Gees.—In some instances, a reflexive and 
a demonstrative are used in reference to the same person; as, Ita se gessii 
(scil. Ligdrius) ut ei pdeem esse expediret. Cic. C. Claudii drantis per sui frd- 
tris pdreniisque ejus mdnes. Liv.—Sometimes the reflexives refer to different 
subjects in the same sentence; as, Atnovistus respotidit, neminem secum ^ne 
Bua, pernicie contendisse (Caes.); where se refers to Ariovistus, and sud to 
neminem. 

’ (7.) (a.) Suus often refers to a word in the predicate of a sentence, 

and is then usually placed after it; as, 

Hunc elves sui ex urbe ejecerunt. Him his fellow-citizens banished from the 
^ity. Cic. Titurius quum prdcul Ambiorigem, suos cdhortantem, conspexisset. Caes. 

(6.) Suus, and not hujus, is used when a noun is omitted; as, 

Octavius quciu oui (scil. amici) Ccesdrem sdlutdbant, Octavius, whom his fol¬ 
lowers fi;iluted as Caesar. 

(r-.) Suus is also commonly used when two nouns are coupled by 
£U?n, but not when they are connected by a conjunction; as, 

Ptdlfmmis dmlcos Demetrii cum suis rebus dimlsit, Ptolemy dismisced the 
Trieuds of Demetrius with their effects. Just. 

(8.) Suus sometimes denotes Jit, favorable ; as, 

Suni et sua dona pdrerti. There are likewise for my father suitable presents. 
V irg. JJt llblrdlor ille pdpuli Romani opperlretur temqdra sua. Liv. Alpihenus 
uWtdtur pdpmlo sane %uo. Cic. Sometimes it signifies _peculiar; as, Moltes sua 
iura Sdbesi, scil. mittunt, i. e. the frankincense for which their country was fa¬ 
mous. Virg. Fessosque sdpor suus occupat artus. Id. 


200 


SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


S!J09. 


NOMINATIVE. 

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE AND VERB. 

§ 300. (a.) The noun or pronoun which is the subject of 

a finite verb is put in the nominative. 

Note 1. (a.) A verb in any mood except the infinitive is called a finite verb, (b.) In 
hittorical writing the nominative is sometimes joined with the present infinitive instead 
ot the imperfect indicative. Cf. R. 6. 

(h.) A verb agrees with its subject-nominative, in number 
and person; as, 

^0 Ugo, I read. Nos Ugimus, We read. 

scribis, Thou writest. Vos sci'lbitis^ You wTite. 

Nquus currit, The horse runs. Equi currimt, Horses run. 

Note 2. The imperative singular is sometimes used in addressing several 
persons; as, Hue ndtas adjice sejjtem, scil. vos, Thebaides. Ovid, jlilet. 6, 182. 
So Adde defectidnem Itdlice, scil. fos, mllltes. Liv. 26, 41. 

Hem ARK 1. (a.) The nominatives ego, tu, nos, vos, are seldom ex¬ 
pressed, the termination of the verb sufficiently marking the person; 
as, 

Cupio, I desire; vlvis, thou livest; Mbemus, we have. See § 147, 3. 

(&.) But when emphasis or opposition is intended, the nominatives of the 
first and second persons are expressed; as. Ego reges eject, vos tyrannos intrd- 
ducitis, I banished kings, you introditce tyrants. Auct. ad Her. Nos, nos, dico 
aperte, consules desumus. Cic. Tu es patronm, tu jpater. Ter. In indignant 
questions and addresses tu is expressed; as, Tu in fdrum prodlre, tMiucem 
consjyicere, tu in horum conspectum venire condris ? Auct. ad Her. 

Rem. 2. The nominative of the third person is often omitted:— 

(1.) When it has been expressed in a preceding proposition 

(a.) As nominative; as, 3fdsa projluit ex monte Vbsego, et in Ocednum injluit. 
Cses.; or (6) in an oblique case; as, Cursdrem mlserunt, ut id nuntidret, scil. 
\yursor. Nep.: or (c) in a possessive adjective; as, Et vereor quo se Jiinonia 
rertant Hospitia; hand tanto cessabit cardine rerum, scil. ilia, i. e. Juno. Virg 
.En. I. 672. 

(2.) When it is a general word for person or thing :— 

Thus Mmines is often omitted before aiunt, dlcunt, ferunt, etc.; as, Uiaiunt, 
As they say. Cic. Maxime admirantur eum, qui pdeunid non mCvetur. Id.— 
Soigne est, Mne habet or bene agltur. It is well; as. Si vales, bene est, egc valeo. 
Cic. Quum melius est, grdtulor dis. Afran. Optume habet. Nothing' can be 
better. Plant. '^eneYiWaetx jacta mnt funddmenta defensionis. Cic. B6ue agl¬ 
tur pro noxia. Plant. 

Note 3. This omission of the nominative is common in the clause prcced- 
jig a relative; as, Qui Bdvium rum odit, dmet tua earrmna, Mcevi, scil. hdmo, Let 
aim who hates not Bavins, love your verses, Maevius. Virg. Vnstdtur agri quod 
inter urbem ac Fidenas est, scil. id spdtium. Liv. Sunt qnos jwr«u...scil. lu’Hiunes^ 
There are (those) whom it delights. Hor. Est qui nec veteris poeuln JJassici 
•pernlt, BcU. hdmo. Hor. Here o«os and est qui are equivalent to 
aliquU, or dliqui. So, Est quod qaudeas. There is (I'eason) w} y vou sliould re- 
ioice. Cic. Negue Srat cur fallere vellent. Ovid. Est ubi id valent. Cic. Est 
quum non est sdtius, etc. Auct. ad Her. In the latter cases the adverb* are 
squivalent to in quo, scil. &Sco, tempdre 


§209 


SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


201 


Rem. 3 (1.) The nominative is wanting before verbs denoting the 
state of the "cj^eather, or the operations of nature; as, 

Fuhjurat, It lightens. Plin. Ningit, It snows. Virg. Lucescebat, It was 
growing light. Liv. Jam advesperascit. Cic. 

(2.) The nominative is also wanting before the third person singti* 
lar of the passive of neuter verbs, and of active verbs used imper» 
sonaliy; as, 

Fiivetur tibi a me, Thou art favored by me. Fjus ordtioni vehementer ab onwl^ 
bus reclamatum est. Cic. Proinde ut bene vlvitur, diu vicitur. Plant. Ad Mci- 
tvm ventum est. Sen. Actum est de imperio. See § 184, 2: and cf. ^ 229, 
B. 5, (6.) 

Note 4. A nominative, however, is expressed before the passive of some 
neuter verbs, which, in the active voice, are followed by an accusative; as, 
Puyna pugndta est. Cic. See § 232, (1.) 

(3.) It is wanting also before the neuter of the future passive parti¬ 
ciple with est; as. 

Si vis me jlere dolendum est prlmum ipsi tlbi, If you wish me to weep, yon 

J ourself must first grieve. Hor. Orandum est, ut sit mens sdna in coi'jydre sd.no. 
uv. Ad villam revertendum est. Cic. 

(4.) The nominative is also wanting before the impersonal verba 
miserety pcemtet, pudet, tcedet, and piget; as, 

Eos Ineptidrum pcenltet. They repent of their follies. Cic. Mls^ret te dlidrum, 
tui te nec miseret nec pudet. Plant. Me civitdtis mdrum piget tcedetque. Sail.— 
In such examples, the sense will sometimes pennit us to supply fortuna, condi¬ 
tio, memdria, etc. So in the expression, Venit in mentem. It came into mind 
as, In mentem venit de specula, scil. cdgltdtio, etc. Plant.—An infinitive or a sub¬ 
junctive clause sometimes forms the subject of these verbs; as, Te id nullo 
mddo puduit fkcdre. To do that by no means shamed you. Ter. Non pcenltet 
me, quantum profecerim. Cic. 

(5.) The subject of the verb is sometimes an infinitive or a neuter 
participle (either alone or with other words), one or more proposi¬ 
tions, or an adverb. (Cf. § 202, R. 2 and 3 ; and § 274, R. 5, (6.) The 
rerb is then in the third person singular; as, 

Vacare culpa magnum est solatium. To be free from fault is a great consola¬ 
tion. Nique est te fallere quidquam. To deceive you in any thing is not (possi- 
Dle.) Virg. Mentiri non est meum. Plant. Te non istud audivisse mlrum est. 
That you have not heard that is wonderful. Cic. ‘ Summum jus, summa in¬ 
juria,’ factum est jam tritum sermdne prwerbium. Id. Ni degeneratum in aliia 
wic qudque dec&ri offecisset. Liv. (Cf. § 274, R. 5, (6.) Sin est ut velis manere 
tllrm apud te. Ter. Nec prdfuit IJydrce crescere per damnum, geminasqua 
resum ere vires. Ovid. Die mihi, eras istud, Postume, quando venit? Tell me, 
Postumus, when does that to-moiTOW come? Mart. Parumne campis atqut 
'^eptuno super fusum est Lutini sanguinis ? Hor. 

(a.) This construction is especially common with impersonal verbs; as, Or^ 
tirera irasci 7io» rfecei. That an orator should be angry, is not becoming. Cic. 
Hoc fieri et dportet et opus est. Id. Me pedibus diieciat claudere verba, Hor. 
Interest omnium recte facere. Cic. Cdsu accidit, ut, id quod Romse audierat 
orimus nuntiaret. Id. Sometimes a neuter prou un is interposed between a 
proposition and its verb; as, Imqmne f deere qua libet, id est regem esse. Sail 
Cf. § 203, (13,) (a.) 

(G.) The nominative is also wanting before potest, coepit or coeptum 
est, incipit, desinit, dehet, sdlet, and videlur, when followed by the in¬ 
finitive of an impersonal verb; as, 


202 


SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. 


§209 


Plgh'e eumfacti capit, It began to repent him (i. e. he jegan to rewnt) ot 
his conduct. Just. Sapientia est una, gud proeceptrlce, in iranquilUlLte tnvi p6 
test. Cic. Tcedere sdlet dvaros impenau. Quint. 

Rem. 4. The verb is sometimes omitted; as, 

Di melioi'a p'.is, scil. dent or vilint, IMay the gods grant better things to the 
pious. Virg. Verum hoec hacienus, scil. dixlmus. Cic. Perllneo is ruiderstood in 
such expressions as nihil ad rem; Quid hoc ad Eplcurumf What 

does this concern Epicurus? Quorsus hcec f i. e. qmrsus ha>c q^^irtinent? AVhat 
is that for?— Pdrdbo is to be supplied, in Quo mihi hanc remf Of what use 
is this to me? and. Unde mihi dtiquam renif Whence am I to get any thmg? 
as, Quo 7nihi bibliothecas f Sen. Unde mihi Idpldem f Hor. A tense o( j'dcio ia 
often to be supplied, as in Recte ille, melius hi; Bene Ch-ysippiis. qui dCcet. Cio- 
Nihil per vim uviquam Clddius, omnia per vim ]\[llo. Id. Quoe quum dixisset 
Cc’tta jfinem. Id. So, also in the phrases nihil dliudquam; quid dliud quam; 
nihil pvadei'miam^ Avhich signify ‘merely’; as, Tisopheimes nihil dlitul quam 
helium compurdvit. Nep. This verb is in like manner omitted with nihil amplius 
quam; nihil minus quam^ and in the phrase si nihil dliud.—Ait or inquit is some¬ 
times omitted in introducing the direct words of another, and more frequently 
in relating a connected conversation; as, Turn ille; hie ego; hide igo. JJicit is 
sometimes omitted in quoting a person’s words; as, Sclte Chrysippus: ut glddii 
causa vdglnam., sic preeter mundum cH^ra omnia dlibrum causa esse genei'dta. Cic. 
—After per vi adjurations d/’O, rdgo or pricor is often omitted; as. Per igo vos 
deos p>(drk . vindiedte ab ultimo dedeedre ndmen gentemque Pei'skmim ; i. e. per 
deos patrws vos oro, vindiedte. Curt. This omission is most common with the 
copula sum; as, Nam Pdlyd^rus ego, scil. sum, For I am Polydoms. Virg. And 
so est and sunt are often omitted with predicate adjectives, and especially in 
proverbial phrases; as, Quot hdmines tot sententice. Ter. Omnia qv'cecldra vara, 
scil. sunt. Cic. So also est and sunt are often omitted in the compound tenses 
of the passive voice; as, Agi’o mulctdti, scil. sunt. Liv. Cf. § 270, K. 3. 

Note 5. In Latin, as in English, a verb is often joined to one of two con¬ 
nected nominatives and understood with the other, and that even when the 
persons are different; a,s, mdyis ego te dmo, quam tu me, scil. dmas. After a 
negative verb a corresponding positive verb is sometimes to be supplied; as. 
after nego, dico, after veto, jubeo, and in this case et takes the signification of 
sed. Cf. ^ 323, 1, (2.), (b.) 

Note 6. Sometimes, when the verb of an appended proposition is omitted, 
its subject is attracted to the case of a noun in the leading proposition with 
which is joined a participle of the omitted verb; as, Hannibal Mlnucium, md- 
gistrum dquitum, paid ac dictatorem dolo productum in proelium, fugdvit, i. e. 
pdri ac dictator Mo productus fuerat. Nep. Hann. 5. So Liv. 34, 32. 

Rem. 5. In the historic style the nominative is sometimes found 
T/ith the present infinitive; as. 

Interim qudtldie Ccesar JBduos J'rumentum flagitare, ^leaiiAvhile Caesar was 
faily demanding corn of the Jsdui. Caes. Nos pdvidi trepliai'e metu. Virg. 
Id hon'endum ferri. Id. 

Note 7. The infinitive in this construction is called \.\\q historical infiritire 
ind is used instead of the imperfect imlicative to express in a lively manner a 
continued or repeated action or condition. 

Rfm. 6. The relative qui may refer to an antecedent either of the 
first, second, or third person; and its verb takes the person of the 
imtecedent; as, 

^ E^c qui lego, I who read. Tu qid senbis. Thou who writest. Equus qui cup 
\it, The horse which runs. Vos qui quaeritis, You who ask. 

Rem. 7. (a.). Verbs in the first person plural, and the second peF 
son singular, ave sometimes used to express general truths; as, 


§ 209 SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-N0MINATIV3. 203 

Quam mulia f ddmus eausd dmlcorum ! How many things we do (i. e. men do) 
for the sake of friends! Cic. Si vis me Jlere, ddlendum est primttrx ^si Ubi, 
Whoever wishes me, etc. Hor. 

(i.) Xgs is often used for ego, and noster for meiis; and even when the pro* 
noun is not expressed, the verb is frequently put in the first person plural in¬ 
stead of the first person singular. The genitive nostri is used for mei, but nos 
irum always expresses a real plurality. 

Kem. 8. The accusative is sometimes used for the nominative by attraction. 
See § 206, (6.) (6.) 

Rem. 9. The verb sometimes agrees with the predicate-nominative, espe(ially 
if it precedes the verb; as, Amanlium woe dmdris integratio est, The quarrofe 
of lovers are a renewal of love. Ter. Ldca, quce proxima Carthdginem, Niimld- 
ia appellatur. Sail. And sometimes it agrees with the nearest subject of a sub¬ 
ordinate sentence; as, Sed ei cdridra semper omnia, quam decus aique pudlcitia 
/vit. Sail. Cat. 25. 

Rem. 10. In cases of apposition, the verb commonly agrees wivh the noun 
which is to be explained; as, TulUdla, deWciae Twstrce, Jidgitat. Cic. But some¬ 
times the verb agi'ees, not with the principal nominative, but with a nearer 
noun in apposition to it; as, Tungri, civltas Gallice, fontem habet insignem, 
The Tungi'i, a state of Gaul, has a remarkable fountain. Plin. Cdindli oppidum 
captum (est). Liv. 

Rem. 11. A collective noun has sometimes, especially in poetry, a 
plural verb; as. 

Pars ep&lis onSrant mensas, Part load the tables with food. Virg. Turba 
ruunt. Ovid. Atria turba t^nent', leve vulgiis Qxxntque. Id. 

(1.) (a.) A plural verb, joined to a collective noun, usually expresses the 
action, etc. of the individuals which that noun denotes. In Cicero, Sallust, 
and Cajsar, this construction scarcely occurs in simple sentences; but it is 
often used, when the subject of the verb is expressed not in its own, but in a 
preceding clause; as, IIoc idem generi humdno evenit, quod in terra collocati sint, 
uecause they (sell, homines) live on earth. Cic. In Livy it occurs more fre¬ 
quently ; as, Ijocros omnis multitudo abeunt. 

(A) Abstract nouns are sometimes used collectively, instead of their con¬ 
cretes; as, ndbilitas for iwblles, juventus juvmes, vlcinia for vie ini, servitium 
for servi, leviit armdtura for levlter armdti, etc. (c.) Miles, eques, pMzs, and 
similar words are sometimes used collectively for the soldiery, the cavalry, etc. 

(2.) When two or more clauses have the same collective noun as their sub¬ 
ject, the verb is frequently singular in the former, and plural in the latter; as, 
Jam ne node quidem turba ex eo Idco dilabebatur, refracturosque cardrem mlna- 
bantur. Liv. Gens eudem, quae te crudUi Daunia bello insequitur, nos si pellant, 
nihil abfdre credunt. Virg. 

(3.) Tantum, followed by a genitive plural, has sometimes a plural verb, like 
n collective noun; as. Quid hue tantum hdminum inceduntf Why are so many 
men coming hither V Plant. 

(4.) A plural verb is sometimes used, though not by Cicero, after 
and quisque, qyars.-.pars, alius...I'dium, and alter...altd-um, on account of the 
idea of plurality which they involve; as, Uterqiie eorum ex castris exercitum 
educunt. Each of* them leads* his army from tlie ciimp. Caes. Jntimus quisque 
libertorum vincti abrepti^te (sunt.) Tac Alius dlium, ut preelium incipiaut, 
circumspectant. Liv. Ci. § 207, R. 32, (c.) 

Note 8. This construction may be explabea by passages like the following, 
in which the plural is placed first, and then the singular, denoting its parts; 
Cetim, suo quisque tempdre, aderunt. Liv. Decemvln perturbgti dlitu in ilintn 
vartem i astrdrum discurrunt. Id. See ^ 204, R. IQ. 


204 SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE. § 209 

Rem. 12. Two or more nominatives sinj^ular, not in Apposition^ 
generally have a plural verb ; as, 

Furor ira^'we mentem prascipitant, Fury and rage hurry to (my) mind. Virg 
J)uni cetas, rn^tus^ Tnagister, prohibebant. Ter. 

(1.) If the predicate belongs to the several nominatives jointly, the verb is 
always plural; as, Grammatice qmndam ac musice junctae fueruiit. Quint. 

(2.) A verb in the singular is often used after several nominatives 
singular, especially if they denote things without life; as, 

Mens enim, et ratio et consilium in senihus est. Cic. Beneficentia, llb^ralltcu^, 
bdnitas^ jusiitia fundltus toUitur Id 

Note 9. This construction is most common when the several nominatives, 
ns in the preceding examples, constitute, as it were, but one idea. So also the 
compound subject Sendtus pdpulusque Monidnus has always a predicate in the 
singular. The same construction sometimes, especially in the poets, occurs 
with names of persons; as, Gorgias, Thrds^dchus, P7'6tdgdras, PrOdlcus. Uip- 
pias in h^ndre fuit. Cic. Quin et Prdmetneus et Peldpis parens dulci Idoorum 
decipitUx s5no. Hor. Wlien the nominatives denote both persons and things, 
the verb is commonly plural; as, Coitio consulum et Pompeius obsunt. Liv. 

(3.) When one of the nouns is plural, the verb is generally so; but some¬ 
times it is singularj when the plural noun does not immediately precede it; as, 
Dii te pdndtes patrilque, et patris imago, et domus regia, et in ddmo I'egdle so¬ 
lium, et nomen Tarqulnium creat v6cat/«e regem. Liv. 

(4.) When each of the nominatives is preceded by et or turn, the verb agrees 
with the last; as, i/bc ratio (Zoctis, e< necessitas hai'bdris, et mos gentibus, ei 
feris nattira ipsa praescripsit. This, reason has dictated to the learned, and ne¬ 
cessity to barbarians, and custom to nations, and nature itself to wild beasts 
Cic. Et ego, et Cicero mens flarftabit. id. Turn getas vlresj^e, turn dvlta gloria 
animum stimulabat. Liv. So vmen the subject consists of two infinitives; as, 
Et facere, et pati fortia, Rdmdnum est. Cic. Unmet alter always takes a singu¬ 
la. verb; as, Dicit unm et alter brdviter. Cic. Unm et alter assuitur pannm. 
Ilor. 

(5.) When tbe nominatives are connected by aut, sometimes the 
plural, but commonly the singular, is used; as. 

Si Socrates aut Antisthenes diceret. If Socrates or Antisthenes should say. Cic 
Ut quosque stadium prlvdtim aut greitia occupavemnt. Liv. 

(a.) The plural is necessary with disjunctives, if the subject includes the 
first or second person; as. Quod in Decemviris neque ego neque (jeesar habiti es 
semus. Cic.—(o.) With aut...aut and nec...nec the singular is prefeired, bu 
with seu...seu and tam...quam the verb is in the plural. 

(6.) A nominative singular, joined to an ablative by the preposition cum 
Bomatimes has a singular but more frequently a plural verb; as, Domitius cum 
Messfila certus esse videbatur. Cic. Bocchus. cum peditibus, posti-emam Riy 
mdndrum dciem invMunt, Bocchus, with his foot-soldiers, attacks the rear of 
Jha Soman army. Sail. Ipse dux, cum aliquot principibus, capiuntur. Liv. 

(7.) If the nominatives are of different persons, the verb is of the 
fit St person rather than the second or third, and of the second rather 
tlian the third; as. 

Si iu et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. If vou and Tullia are weh 
Cicero and I are wZ/. Cic. Iliec neque bgo neque tu fecimus. Ter. Egopopiy 
hsque Rdmdnm bellum judlco faciojae. Liv. 

(a.) Yet sometimes the verb a^'ees in number and person with fhe nearest 
nominative, and is understood with the other; as, Vos ipsi et senduui frequms 
restitit. Ihis is always the case when the action of the verb is qualified with 
’•eference to each nommative separately ; as. Ego mlsere tu. felldter vlvis. 


§ 210 . 


SYNTAX.-PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE. 


205 


Rem. 13. The interjections en, ecce, and 0, are somelimes followed 
by the nominative; as, 

En Priamtis! Lo Priam! Virs;. En ego, vester Ascanius. Id. Ecce lidmo 
Oitiemis ! Cio Ecce tuce llte.rce. Id. 0 vir joriis atque amicus ! Ter. 

PREDIC ATF-NOMINATI VE. 

§ 210 . A noun in the predicj.te, after a verb neuter or pas* 
sive, is put in the same case as the subject, when it denotes the 
tame person or thing; as, 

(a.) When the subject is in the nominative; Ira ftiicr hrhis est, A^ger ia a 
short madness. Hor. Ego vdcor Lvconides, I am called Lyeonides. Fiavit 
Ego incedo regina, I walk a queen. Virg. Cahiset Lucius fratres fah'unt. Cic.— 
So (i.) when the subject is in the accusative with the infinitive; Judiccm me 
esse v6lo. Cic. 

(c.) Sometimes also a dative, denoting the same object, both precedes and 
follows a vero neuter or passive. See ^ 227, N.—And {d.) a predicate abla¬ 
tive sometimes follows passive participles of choosing, naming, etc.; as, ConsuU- 
bus certioribus factis. Liv. See ^ 257, R. 11. 

(e.) If the predicate noun has a form of the same gender as the subject, it 
takes that form; as, Llcentia corruptrix est monmi. Cf. § 204, R. 2 .—{/.) But 
if the subject is neuter, the noun of the predicate, if it has both a masculine 
and a feminine form, takes the former; as, Tempus vlke magister est. 

(g.) An infini tive may supply the place of a predicate nominative. See § 269, 
R. 4. 

Remark 1. (a.) Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, 
standing in the predicate, after verbs neuter or passive, and relating 
to the subject, agree with it in gender, number, and case. 

(b.) When the subject consists of two or more nouns, the gender and num¬ 
ber of such predicate adjectives are detennmed by § 205, R. 2. 

Rem. 2. (a.) The noun in the predicate sometimes differs in gender and 
number from the subject; as. Sanguis erant Idcnnue, Her tears were blood. 
Ovid. Captivi vilUium prseda fuerunt. Liv. 

{b.) So when a subject in the singular is followed by an ablative with cum, 
the predicate is plural; as, Exsules esse jubet L. Tarquinium cum conjuge et 
liberts. Liv. 

Rem. 3. The verbs which most frequently have a noun, etc., in the 
perJicate agreeing in case, etc., with their subject, are:— 

(1.) The cop til a sum; as. Ego Jorjs swm filius. Plaut. Disce esse pater. 
Ter. The predicate with sum maybe an adverb of place, manner, etc.; as, 
Quad est longe aliter. Cic. Rectissime sunt dpud te omnia, Every thing with 
you is in a very good condition. Id.; or a noun in an oblique case; as, Numen 
sine tiire sst. Ovid. Sunt nobis mltia porna. Virg. 

f2.) Certain neuter verbs denoting existence, position, motion , eie.\ 
as, rivo, eosisto, .appOreo, cadn, eo, eviido, fiigio, inccdu, j Cic to, mdneo, sedw, sto, 
Vtiiio, etc. Tims, Hex circuibat j)cdes, I'iie khig wer.t round on foot. IMin. 
Quos Judiccibat non posse oratores evddere. Cic. Eyo huic causae patrenus exstiti. 
Cic. Qui Jit, ul nemo contentus vival? 

(3.) The passive of verbs denoting, 

(a.) To name or call; as, appelhr, dicor, ndminor, nunenpor, perhiheor 
sahiUrr, scribor, inscribor, vdcor. Tims, Cogndmine Justus est apptUuius, He was 
lallcd by the surname Just, Nep. Ariskeus dliva dicitur inxentov Cic. 


206 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS. 


§211 


f^).) To choose, render, appoint, cr constitute: as, constUtior,C7'eor 
ircloror, desiynnr, Htgor, fw, I'eddor, rmuncior. Thus, Dux a Rmndnis Hectus 
est Q. Fubius. Postgunui (‘\i\\c\nis faitus est. Nep. Certior fnt fits sum. 

(<■.) To esteem or reckon; as, lenseiyr, cognoscor, credor, di'’prehirii$r 
ixisfimto-, ducor, feror, lidbtor, judhor, memdror, nuiiiAror, pufor, r^ph’ior, vidcor 
Thus, Credcbar sanguinis auctor ego. Ovid. Mulini vlderi Hnildus quam pdrun% 
pinidens. Cic. 

Note 1. With several passives of the last class, when followed by a 
cate-noininative, etc., an infinitive of sum is expressed or undcistooa; aa, 
Aniens nilhi fuisse vldeov, I think 1 was beside myself. Cic. Ilut the dative 
of the first person is sometimes omitted after videor; as, S'itis ddcuissc vldcor. 
F1,—prudens esse putdbdtur. Id. So with ihcor (to be said), and perht- 
htor; as, Veras patrm dlceris qssq' galev. Mart. Uoc ne locutus sine mercede 
existlmer. Phajt*.. 

Note 2. Audio is sometimes used by the poets like appellor; as, Tu rexjae 
piiterr/Me audisti cbram. Hor. 

Rem. 4. A predicate-nominative is used after many other verbs to denote a 
•purpose, time, or circumstance of the action; as. Comes JEd- 

tides, .L^^olides was added as a companion. Virg. Lupus dbambulat noctur- 
nus. Id. Appdret liquldo sublimis in oethere Ntsus. Id. So with an active 
verb; Audivi hoc puer. Cic. Sapiens nilfacit invitus. Id. Rempublicam de- 
fendi adolescens. Id. Cf. § 204, R. 1. 

Note 3. Instead of the predicate-nominative, a dative of the end or purpose 
sometimes occurs (see § 227); sometimes an ablative with pro; as, auddcin 
pro muro est; and sometimes the ablatives Uco or in numero with a genitive; 
as, ille est niihi parentis loco; in hostium numero hdbetur. 

Rem. 5. The noun dpus, signifying ‘ need,’ is often used as a predicate after 
yim. It is, in such cases, translated by the adjectives needful, necessai'y, etc.; 
as, Dux nobis et auctor opus est. Cic. Multi opus sunt bdves. Varr. {Dixit) 
aurum et ancillas opus esse. Ter. Usus also is occasionally so construed. 

Rem. 6. When the pronoun, which is the subject of an infinitive, is omitted, 
the case of the predicate is sometimes, in the poets, attracted into that of the 
subject of the verb on which the infinitive depends; as. Uxor invicti Jdvis esse 
nescis, i. e. te esse uxdrem. Hor. Retulit Ajax esse Jdvis pronepos. Ovid. 

GENITIVE. 

GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS. 

§ 211 . A noun whicli limits the meaning of another noun, 
denoting a different person or thing, is put in the genitive; as, 

Amor gldricB, Love of glory; Arma Achillis, The arms of Achilles; Pater pa- 
trice, The father of the country; VUium tree. The vice of anger; Nirndrum dis¬ 
k's, The guardian of the groves; Amor hdbendi. Love of possessing. 

Ncr3 1 In the first example, amor denotes love in general; glorice limits the affection 
tc tbJ} particular object, glory. Such universally is the effect of the genitive, depending 
OpoTi a noun. Hence the limitation of a noun by a genitive resembles that which ifl 
ifljcted by an adjective. In each the noun limited constitutes with its limitation only 
t eingle idea. 

Remake 1. The genitive denotes various relations, the most common of 
which are those of Source; as. Radii sol is. The rays of the sun;— Cause; as, 
Ikdor pddagree. The pain of the gout;— Effect; as, Artifex mundi. The Cro- 
dtor of Ihe v/orld;— Connection; as, Pater considis. The father of the con- 
H.1;— Possession; a?,, Ddmus Ccesdris, The house of Cojsar;— Object; as 
CogVdSp dliciijus 7'ei, A thought of something;— Purpose; as, Ajjpdrdtia 
iriuinphi. Preparation for a triumph;—A whole; as, Pai's hdininum. Apart 


§ 211 . 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS. 


207 


of men; this is called the partitive genitive;— Character or Quality; as, 
Addlescens swniTue anddcuB, A vouth of the greatest boldness; —Material or 
Component Parts; as, Mountains cf gold; Acerriis smt6':ntm^ 

A heap of shields;— Ti in e; as, Frumentum dieruin decein, Corn for ton days 
Sail. 

^ Rem. 2. The genitive is called subjective or active^ when it denotes 
either that to tchich a thing belongs^ or the subject of the action, feel¬ 
ing, etc., implied in the noun which it limits. It is called objectue or 
passive, when it denotes the object affected by such action, or towards 
which such feeling is directed; as, 

Subjective. Objective. 

Facta vtrdrum, Deeds of men. Odium vttii, Hatred of vice. 

Ddlor dnimi, Grief of mind. Amor viridtis, Love of virtue. 

Jundnis ira, The anger of Juno. Deslddrium dtii, Desire of leisure. 

(a.) Whether a genitive is subjective or objective is to be determined by 
the meaning of the words, and by their connectior Thus, provldentia Dei 
signifies God’s providence, or that exercised by him tlmor Dei, the fear of 
God, or that exercised towards him. The same or similar words, in dift'erent 
connections, may express both significations. Thus, metus hostium, fear of the 
enemy, may mean, either the fear felt by the enemy, or that felt by their oppo¬ 
nents. So minus Ulixis (Virg. ^En. 2, 436.) denotes the wound which Ulysses 
had given; minus .^neae, (Id. .^n. 12, 323.) that which ^neas had received. 

(6.) The relation expressed by the English possessive case is subjective, while 
that denoted by of with its case is either subjective or objective. 

(c.) The objective genitive is of very extensive use in Latin in the limitation 
of verbal nouns and adjectives, whatever may be the construction of the verbs 
from which such nouns and adjectives are derived, whether they take an ac¬ 
cusative or some other case or even a preposition. 

{d.) When ambiguity would arise from the use of the objective genitive, a 
preposition with an accusative or ablative is commonly used; as. Amor in 
rempubllcam, for reipiiblicce, Love to the state. Cic. Odium erga Romanos, for 
Romdndmm. Nep. Cura de salute patrue, for sdliiiis. Cic. Preedator ex sdciis, 
for sdcidrum. Sail. Sometimes both constructions are combined; as, Revereniia 
adversus hdmines et optlmi cujusque et rellquorum. Cic. Off. 1, 28. 

Note. A limiting genitive is sometimes used instead of a noun in apposition, 
especially with vox, nomen, verhum, etc.; as, vox voluptatis, the word pleasure; 
ndmen amicitias, the word dmicitia; dornini appelldiio. This is usual when the 
genus is defined by the species; as, arbor flci, a fig-tr<>e; flos vidlas, a violet; 

contlnentiae, the virtue of abstinence: and in geographical names; as, 
qppldum Antiochise. Cf. § 204, R. 6.—Cicero frequently uses a genitive in this 
manner with genus and causa; as, Unum genus est eonim, qui, etc. Diur surd 
causes, una pudoris, altera sceleris.—So, also, the genitive of gerunds; as, Triste 
est ndmen ipsum carendi. The very word to want is sad. Cic. 

Re:m. 3. (a.) A substantive pronoun in the genitive, limiting the 
meaning cf a noun, is commonly objective ; as, 

Cura rnei, Care for me. Ovid. Pars tui, Part of thee. Id. Vestri ciirnm dgtte. 
Curt. This genitive is used especially with verbal substantives in or tx audio; 
as, Accusdtor met. Cic. Nirnia vestimdtio sui. Id. Rdtidnem et sui et dlidrum 
habere. Id. 

(J.) Instead of the subjective or possessive genitive of a substantive 
pronoun, the corresponding adjective pronoun is ccmmonly used; as. 

Liber mens, not liber mei, My book Cura mea. My care, i. e. the care exer¬ 
cised by me. Cic. 7'uas I'Mras exspecto. Id. Yet the su jjective genitive of a 
inbstantive pronoun sometimes occurs; as, Tui itilus st'idio, By the zeal of 
youineif alone. Cic. 


208 


SYNTAX.—gj:nitive after nouns. 


(C-) And not unfrequently, also, an adjective pronoun occurs instead of the 
Dbjfttive genitive; as, Mea injui-ia, Injury to me. Sail. So, Jnvid'm Envy 

ef thee. Fhlucia tua, Confidence in thee. Plaut. Spes mea, The hoj )0 placed 
in me. With the adjective pronoun, and never the genhivo, is used; 

as, ^fed causa, For my sake. Plant. 

R?:m. 4. {a.} Instead, also, of the subjective genitive of a noun, a possessive 
adjective is often used; as, Causa regia, for causa reyis. Cic. Herilis fluus, for 
heri Jilius. Id. Evandrius ensis, for Evandvi. Virg. Herculeus labor, for ller- 
ciilis. Hor. Civilis f iiror, (ov clvium. Hor. So, also, for the genitive, 

Metus hostilis. Fear of the enemy. Sail. 

(6.) The genitive of the per.son implied in the adjective pronoun or possessive 
adjective, or an adjective agreeing with such genitive, is sometimes added as 
an apposition; as, ipsbrum causa hoc feci. In the poets and later prose 

writers a participle also is found agreeing with such implied genitive; as, Mea 
tcripta vulyo recitdre timentis. tior. Cf. ^ 204, R. 4, and § 20o, K. 13. 

Eem. 5. In the predicate after sum, and sometimes after other 
verbs, the dative is used like the objective genitive; as. 

Idem amor exUium pecori (est), magistro. Virg. Vitis ut arhdHhui 

dicOri est, ut vitlbus ucob — Tu decus omne tuis. Virg. In this passage the dative 
decOri and the nominative decus are used with no difference of meaning. 
Cf. § 227, R. 4. Auctor fui senatui. Cic. Muroena legdtus Lucullo fuit. Id. 
Eiit ille mfhi semper deus. Virg. lluic causse patroniis exstiti. Cic. Huic ego 
meheWo ducem prdfiteor. Id. Se tertium (esse) cui fdtum fdret urbis pdtiri. 
Id.— Cum P. Afrlcano senatus egit, ut legdtus fratri proficisccretur. Id. Ccesar 
tegimenta gfileis inllites ex viminibus facere jubet. Caes. Trinobantlbus Ccesar 
imY)hvat—frumentum exercitui. Id. Quod neque insidice consuli procedebant. 
Sail. Quem exltum tantis malis sperarent? Id. Sanctus vir et ex sententia 
ambobus, soil, qui fuit. Id. See § 227, R. 4. 

Note. The dative in the preceding examples has been thought by some grammariana 
to depend on the nouns connected with it; as, exitium, dScus, auctor, legatus, deus, 
patronus, etc.; by others it has been held to depend on these nouns in connection ^ith 
the verbs, and not upon either separately; but the better opinion seems to be that, which 
makes such datives grammatically dependent upon the verbs only, though logically con¬ 
nected also with the nouns. 

(1.) Instead, also, of the possessive genitive, a dative of the person 
may follow a verb, when its act has relation to the body or possessions 
of such person ; as, 

Sese omnes flentes Csesari ad pedes prdjecerunt. They all, weeping, cast 
themselves at the feet of CfEsar. Cats. Cui coipus poi-riyitur. For whom the 
body, i. e. whose body, is extended. Virg. Tumvero exarsit'^xxvhm dolor ossibus 
ingens. Id. Transflyitur scutum Pulfioui. C»s. 

Rem. 6. When the limiting noun denotes a property, charac¬ 
ter, or quality, it has an adjective agreeing with it, and is put 
either in the genitive or the ablative ; as, 

Ftr exempli recti, A man of correct example. Eiv. Addlescens summat atuldcm, 
\ youth of the greatest boldness. Sail. Fossa pedum vlginti, A ditch of twenty 
feet, (i. e. in width). Ca?s. Ilamilcar secum duxit f Ilium Hanmbdlem annoi-ura 
novem. Nep. Athenienses drligunt Periclem, spectatce virtutis vlrum. Just. 
Quinqndginta annorum 'trrpermm. Id. Iter unius diei. Cic. Pulchritudlne ex- 
imia fnnlna, A Avoinar of exquisite beauty. Cic. Maximo naiu f\lius, The 
3ldest son. Nop. L. Gitilhia fuit rnagna vi et dnimi et corqtdns, se^i ingenio 
inalo privoquo. Sail. SpHunca infiirita altitudine. Cic.—Sometimes both con. 
structions occur in the same proposition; as, Lentulum nostium, e^mia spe 
summjB virtutis dclblesc.entem. Cic. 


§ 211 . 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS. 


2C9 


(1.) A ganitive sometimes supplies the place of the adjective; and the noun 
denoting the property, etc., is then always put in the aolativc; as. Eat ba 
cervi figuril, ..of the form of a stag. Ciss. Uri specie el colure tauri. Id. 
Frutex pahni aUitudine. Plin. Cldvi digit! polllcis cr-assitudiue. Caes. 

(2.) All t_e qiialities and attribiites of persons and things, whether inherent 
or acc.dental, may be thus expressed by the genitive and ablative of quality, 
provitled the substantives are immediately connected; as, /bssa 'niind^cim jxdvm; 
Mvu) antiqud virtute. It hence follows that such genitives and ablatives, whet 
used to express duration of time or extent of space, are distinguished from the 
cases in which the accusative is required, since the latter case always follows 
adjectives or verbs; as, ybssa quindecim pedes lata; decern annus nat'oa. 
Cf. § 236. 

(3.) Whether the genitive or the ablative of quality is preferable in particu¬ 
lar cases, can frequently be determined only by reference to classical authority; 
but, in general, the genitive is used more frequently to express iidieretit quali¬ 
ties than such as are merely accidental, while the ablative is used inditfereiitly 
for either purpose. In speaking of transitory qualities or conditions the abla¬ 
tive is alwavs used; as, Mayno tlmore siun^ I am in great fear. Cic. B6no animo 
turn. Id. Cliumto fuerim dOldre menilnisti. Id. Maximo hdndre Servius Tullius 
Srat. Liv. With plural s’abstantives the genitive is rare; while iu expressions 
of measure it is used rather than the ablative. 

(4.) An accusative instead of a genitive of quality is used with sScus (sex), 
genus and q^ondo; as, Llberomim cupltum virile secus ad decern millia capta, i. e. 
of the male sex, instead of sexus virilis. Liv. So genus, when joined w'ith a 
pronoun, as hoc, id, illud, quod, or with omne, is used for hujus, ejus, omnia, etc., 
generis; as, Ordtidnes aut dllquid id genus scribere ,—of that kind. Cic. (joncre» 
dere nugas hoc genus. Hor. So poiulo is joined as an indeclinable word to the 
accusatives libram and libras; as. Dictator cdrmam awream libram pondo in 
Cdpitolio Jdvi donum pdsuit,...Q. pound in weight. Liv. Cf. § 236, R. 7. 

(5.) The genitive mddi with an adjective pronoun supplies the place of a 
pronoun of quality; as, cujusmddi libn, the same as qudles libri, what kind of 
books; hujusmddi lihri, i. e. idles libri, such books. So, also, generis is used, 
but less frequently. 

(6.) With the genitive of measure are often connected such ablatives as 
longltudine, Idtitudine, etc., or in longitudtnem, etc.; as, fossa decern pedum Idtl- 
tumne; but the genitive does not depend on these words. 

(7.) Sum may be followed by either the genitive or the ablative of quality 
wnth an ellipsis of the word limited, wdiich, with the genitive, is hdmo, res, negd^ 
tium, prdprium or ])rdp7dus, etc., and with the ablative, proedltus, insirucius, 
omdtus, etc. Cf. Rem. 8,-and ^ 244, and 249, L. 

Rem. 7. (1.) The limited noun is sometimes omitted; as, 0 misdrce soi'tis! 
soil, hdmlnes; 0 (men) of wretched fortune! Lucan. Ad Didnce, scil. (edem. 
Ter. llectdris Andrdmdche, scW. uxor. Virg. Suspicimis vUandie, scil. caiwd. Tac. 
So filius or filia; as, Hannibal Gisgdnis. 

(2.) The omitted noun may sometimes be supplied from the preceding words; 
as, Cnjum pdcusf an Melibaif Non; verum jFlgdnis, scil./jecws. Virg. An 
adjective is often expressed refeiTing to the noun omitted' as, Nullam virtua 
dllar.i mercedem desiderat, prceter hanc (scil. rnercMem) laudls. Cic. 

Rkm. 8. The limited noun is often wanting in the predicate of a 
sentence after sum. This usually liappeus. 

(1.) When it has been j)reviously expre«sed; as, 

Jlcec ddmus esi Ciesdris, This house is Cfcsar’s. Non en aurce tarn S(e})e rdcd- 
tum esse jn'itans Nymplae. Ovid. Ndres dnerarias, qndr vn minor nulla erat duuTA 
ViiUiuin umpkuruin, i. e. qudrum minor nulla erat quam i avis duum, etc. Cic. 

(2.) When it is a geneial word denoting a person, an animal, 
ttc. as, 


18* 


21U 


SYNTAX.—G3NITIVE AFTER NOUNS. 


§211 


Thucydides, qui ejusdem cetdtis fuit, scil. hdmo, Thucydides, who was of the 
fiame age. Nep. luuhum ei detraxit, quod alienee erat clritdtis, scil. hdmo or dr/s. 
Id. Pnmuvi stlpendium meruit annonim decern septevique, scil. ddolesv.us. Id. 
Sumini lit sint IdUiris ejf'iiiunt, scil. dnlmillin. Cces. ( Claudius) svmni brevissimi 
irnt. Suet. Mlrd sum dlacritalt. Cic. Culyus inyenio mohili erat. S:ill. Non 
est Jfiri.-i sui, Me is not his own master. Lucan. Potestatis suve esse. Liv 
SudruuKpie rerum 6rant. Id. Cf. Rem. 6, (7.) 

(3.) 'When it is a general word denoting thing, for which, in Eng 
lish, the words part, property, duty, office, business, characteristic, eto. 
are commonly supplied ; as, 

Thneritas est jldrentis cetdtis, jji'udentia senectutis. Rashness is (the character¬ 
istic) of youth, prudence of old age. Cic. Ksl hoc Gallicce consuetudlnis. Cfics. 
So, stultilue est; est levitdtis, etc., which are equivalent to stultitia est, liviUiS eat. 
Omnia hostium erant. A paucis emi, quod multdrum esset. Sail. 

(a.) This happens especially when the subject of the vei'b is an infinitive, or 
an endre clause, in which case, instead of the genitive of the pei'sonal pronouns, 
tnd. tui, etc., the neuters of the possessives, meum, tuum, etc., are used; as, 
Addlescentis est uwjores ndtu revereri. It is (the duty) of a youth to reverence 
the aged. Ovid. Cuiusvis hdminis est errdre, nullius 7itsi insipientis in ei'i'Ore 
pei'severdre. Cic. Pauperis est numerdre peais. Ovid. So esfjecially est; 
as, Neydcit moris esse Grceedrum, ut in convivio virdi'um accumherent mulidres, the 
same as mdrem esse Gresedrum. Cic. Nihil tarn eequandee llbertitis esse. Liv. 
So when the verb is omitted; Tamen officii duxit, exdrdre piatrem, scil, esse. 
Suet. Non est mentlH meum. Ter. Tuum est, M. Cato, viclere quid dydtur. 

(b.) Instead of the genitive of a substantive, also, the neuter of a possessive 
adjective derived from it is sometimes used; as, Humanum est errdre, To err 
is human. Ter. Et fdcereetpdti ybrtia Romanum est. Liv. 

(4.) The same construction sometimes occurs after ffdcio, and some other 
verbs mentioned in § 230, esse being understood; as, Asia Rdmdndrum facta est, 
Asia became (a possession) of the Romans. Just. Aginim sues ditidnis fecisse. 
Liv. 

(5.) The limited noun is sometimes w'anting, when it is a general word, 
though not in the predicate after sum; as, Mayni formica Idbdris, scil. animal, 
The ant (an animal) of gi*eat labor. Hor. So Ei venit in mentem pdtestdtis tuce 
scil. memdria, or the like. Cic. 

Note. "When the noun which is wanting denotes a thing, grammarians sometimes sup¬ 
ply nSgdtium, offtcium, munus, dpus, res, causa, etc. It is an instance of a construo- 
Uon common in Latin, to omit a noun when a general idea is intended. See J 2C6 
Rem. 7, (2.) 

Rem. 9. The limiting noun also is sometimes omitted; as, 

Tria millia, scil. passuum. In most cases of this kind, an adiective, adjec¬ 
tive pronoun, or participle, is expressed in the genitive. 

Rem. 10. Two genitives sometimes limit die same noun, one of 
which is commonly subjective, and the other objective; as, 

Agamemnonis belli ytdnn, Agamemnon’s glory in war. Nep. Illius admini^ 
ydti'J prOviiicue. Cic. Eorum dierum consuetudine itlneris luistri exercitus per- 
tpeetd. Ctes. Orbitas reipublicie talium virorum. Cic. Pro veteribus ilelvetio- 
rum ircjuriis pbpuli ROmaiii. Caes. 

Re.ai. 11. Opns and usu.<i are rarely limited by a genitive or accusa¬ 
tive, but generally by an ablative, of the thing needed; as. 

Argent! dpus fuit. There was need of money. Liv. Ad consilium pensandum 
temporis dpus esse. Id. Prooemii non semper iisus est. Quint. Si quo 6p6ra 
pdrujrt usus est. Liv. Puero dpus est cibum. Plaut. Usus est homiuem aelutuTJi 
Id. See ^ 243 


§ 212 . 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVfe AFTER PARTITIVES. 


211 


Kem. 12 The relation denoted by the genitive in Latin, is gener¬ 
ally expresRsd, in Eng 'sh, by o/’, or by the possessive case. Cf. II. 2, (&.) 
The objective genitive may often be rendered by some other prepo¬ 
sition ; as, 

RnaMium (Woris, A remed'^ for pain. Jnjurin patris., bijury to a father. 
Descensus Aver7ii, The descent to Avenms. Jru belli, Anger ou account of th.6 
war. Fotestas rei, Power in or over a tiling. 

Note. Certain limitations of nouns are made by the accusative >vith a preposition 
and by the ablative, either with or without a preposition. Cf. § 202, 6, I. and II. 

GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. 

§ 1^19. Nouns, adjectives, adjective pronouns, and adverbs 
denoting a part, ai'e followed by a genitive denoting the whole; 
as. 

Pars chiiafis, A part of the state. Nulla sdrorum, No one of the sisters. 
AlUpiis phllOsOphbvutn, Some one of the jrnilosophers. Q.iiis mortalium f Who of 
mortals ? J/ djor juvenum, The elder ot the youths. Doctissimus Ruuwnonnn, 
The most learned of the Romans. Mullum pecuniae, l\Iuch (of) money. S>(dis 
ibquentice, Enough of eloquence. Ubinam gentium sumusf ^\^here on earth 
4re we V 

Note. The genitive thus governed denotes either a number, of which the partitive de* 
Bignates one or more individuals; or a whole, of which the partitive designates a portion. 
In the latter sense, the genitive of common and abstract nouns commonly follows either 
the neuter of adjectives and adjective pronouns, or adverbs; and that of material nouns 
depends on substantives signifying quantity, weight or measure; as, mMimnum tiltici, 
a bushel of wheat; tibra farris ; jugSrum agri; magna vis auri. 

Remark 1. Nouns denoting a part are pars, nemo, nXhil, etc., and 
also nouns denoting measure, weight, etc.; as, modius, medimnum, 
and libra ; as, 

N emo nostrum. No one of us. Maxima pars hominnm. Nihil huindndrun 
renim. Cic. militum. Liv. MMininum tntic'i. Cic. 

Reim. 2. Adjectives and adjective pronouns, denoting a part of a 
number, including partitives and words used partitively, compara¬ 
tives, superlatives, and numerals, are followed by the geuitive plural, 
or by'" the genitive singular of a collective noun. 

(1.) Partitives (^04. 9.); as. uUus, nulius, solus, alius, titer, itfert^ue, utercum-^ 
que, uterms, uterllbet, neuter, alter, alteruter, edinuis, f^uidam, quispiam, quisquis, 
quisjue, quisquam, qulcurnque, unusquisnue, quis f qui f quot ? quotas f quotusquis- 
quel tSt, dliqudt, nonnulli, plerique, multi, paucLmedius. Thus, Quisquis debrum^ 
Whoc.ver of the gods. Ovid. Consulum alter. One of the consuls. Liv. MulU. 
hdminum, Many men. Plin. Et medius juvenum Ibat; i. e. between. Ovid. For 
the gjniler of adjectives used partitively, see $ 205, R. 12. 

(2.) Words u.sed p.artitively; as, Expedlti mllitum, The light-armed (of the) 
do'ldisjrt Liv. Delccti iquUuin . Iil. Vetbres Rdnidnorum ducum. Veil. Suplri 
dt br^jum,, 'fhe gods above, llor. Sancte deorum. Virg. Pegeneres ednum., Piin. 
PiSCium femime. Id. 

(3.) Comparatives and superlatives; as, Doctior juvenum. Ordtorum praes- 
p,ntissimus. E Idquentissimus Rdmdndrum. Optimus omnium. 

(4.) Numerals, both cardinal and ordlna'.; also the distributive singUdi; as, 
Equituti centum quh\^ujinta inter/ecti, A hundred and fifty of the horsemen 
were killed. Curt. mpterUum octdvus. Hor. Singulos vestrum. Curt. 


2i2 SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. § 212> 


(6.) The meaning is often nearly the same, whether the partitive adjective agrees in 
rase and number with a noun, or takes such noun after it a the genitive; as, Doctii'Si- 
mus Homdndrufn^ OTf doctisslmus Rom&nus: Alter consul m, or alter consul. But the 
Ifenitive cannot be used, when the adjective includes the s me number of things as that 
of which the whole consists; as, VHniamus ad vivos, qui duo supersunt ; not quorum 
duo, since these are all, though we say in English, ‘ of whom two survive.’ 

Note I. {a.) The comparative with the genitive denotes one of tvx> individ- 
nals or classes; tlie superlative denotes a part of a number greater than two; 
as. Major frdtrum, The elder of two brothers. Maximus frdtrum, The eldest 
of three or more. 

( 6 .) In like manner, uler, alter, and neuter, generally refer to two; quit, alim, 
and to a whole consisting of more than two; as, Uter nostrum? Which 

of us (two?) Quis vestrum f Which of you (three or more?) 

Note 2. Nostrtim and vestrum are used as partitive genitives, in preference 
to nostri and vestri, and are always joined with omnium even when the genitive 
is a subjective one; as, Patria, quit communis est omnium nostrum parens. Cic. 
Birt vestrum sometimes occurs in other connections also witheut a partitive 
meaning; as, Quis evil tarn cupidus vestrum. Cic. 

Nt)iE 3. The partitive word is sometimes omitted; as, Fles nohllium tu qu6^ 
yue fontium, scil. unus. Hor. Centies sestertium, scil. centena milha. 

Note 4. The noun denoting the whole, after a partitive word, is often put 
in the ablative, with the prepositions de, e, ex, or in, or in the accusative, with 
apud or inter ; as. Nemo de iis. Alter ex censbribus. Liv. Units ex multis. Cic. 
Acerrlmus ex sensibus. Id. Thales, qui sdpientissimus in septem fuit. Id. 
Primus inter omnes. Virg Croesus inter reges dpulentisslmus. Sen. Apud Hel- 
vetios nobilissltnus. 

Note 5. The whole and its parts are frequently placed in apposition, dis- 
tributively; as, luterfectores, pars in fdtmm, pars Syrdcusas pergunt. Liv. 
See ^ 204, R. 10. 

Note 6 . Cuncti and omnes, like partitives, are sometimes followed by a gen¬ 
itive plural; as, AifdZzis Macedbnum yereomniiws persudsit, Attfilus persuaded 
almost all the Macedonians. Liv. Cundos hominum. Ovid. Cundas provinci- 
arum. Plin. 

Note 7. In the followinjyrassage, the genitive singular seems to be used like 
that of a collective noun: Totius autem injustitioe nulla cdpltdlior est, atz. Cic. 
Off. 1 , 13. The phrase Rem nullo mddo prdbdbilem omnium (Cic. Nat. Deor. 1 , 
27,) seems to be used for Rem nulh omnium mdddrum prdbdbilem. 

Rem. 3. The genitive denoting a whole, may depend on a neuter 
adjective or adjective pronoun. With these the genitive singular is 
commonly used; as. 

Plus eldfjinenticB, IMore (of) eloquence. Tantum fidei. So much fidelity. Id 
iempdris. That time. Ad hoc cetdtis. Sometimes the genitive plural; as, Id 
miseridrum. Ter. Armdrum quantum. Caes. 

Note 1. (a.) Dlost neuter adjectives used partitively denote quantity; as^ 
iantum, quantum, dliquantum, pliis, minus, minimum, dlmidium, multum, nimium, 
paulnm, pliarmum, reliqunm; with the compounds and diminutives, fontTiiynt, 
tantundem, quantulum, quantiilumcumque, etc.; to which add medium, summim, 
uliimuin, dliud, etc. 'I’he pronouns thus used are hoc, id, illud, istud, Idem, quok, 
and quid, with their compounds, d'lquid, quidquid, quiqjpiam, quidqiiam, quod- 
cuniqne. 

(h.) Most of these adjectives a.id pronouns may cither agi-ee with theij 
' no ins. or take a genitive; but the latter is more common. Tantuiu. quantum, 
jli uuhtuth, and plus, when they denote quantity, are used with a genitive only 
as are also quid and its compounds, when they denote a part, sort, etc., ana 
quOd in the sense of quantum. Thus, Quantum erdnt Nllus, tanium spei 14 
annum est Sen. Quid mulieris uxdrem hdbes t What kind of a woman... fet. 


§ 212 . 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. 


213 


AUquid formae. Cic. Quid hoc rei est ? W hat does this mean ? Ter. Qrtod auri, 
quod arf^enti, quod omamentorum fuit, id Verves abstulii. 

Notk 2. Neuter adjectives and pronouns, when followed by a genitive, are 
to be accounted substantives, and iii this construction are found only in the 
nominative and accusative. 

Notk 3. Sometimes the genitive after these adjectives and pronouns is a 
neuter adjective, of the second declension, without a noun; as, Tantum bOni 
So much <:;ood. Si quid habes novi, If yo\i have any thing new. Cic. Quia 
viliqui estl Ter. Nihil is also used with such a genitive; as. Nihil siiuevi, No 
Bin3erity. Cic. This construction occurs very rarely with neuter adjectives in 
i of the tliird declension, and only in connection with neuters of the second 
declension; as. Si quidquam non dico ci\llis sed humdni esset. Liv. 

Note 4. In the poets and in the prose -writers later than Cicero, neuter ad¬ 
jectives in the plural number are sometimes followed by a genitive, either sin¬ 
gular or plural, with a partitive signification; as, Extrema impeidi, The fron¬ 
tiers of the empire. Tac. Pontes et viarum angusta, The bridges and the nar¬ 
row parts of the roads. Id. Opaca Idcorum. Virg. Antlqua J’ccdeimm. Liv 
Cuncta carnporum. Tac. Exercent collts, atque hbruin asperrima pascunt. Virg. 
Cf. § 205, K. 9. 

Rem. 4. The adverbs sat, satis, parum, nimis, almnde, largXter^ 
aj^'dtim, and partim, used partitively, are often followed by a geni¬ 
tive ; as, 

Sat ratidnis, Enough of reason. Virg. Satis eldquentice, parum sapientice, 
Enough of eloquence, (yet) but little wdsdom. Sail. Nimis insldidrum. Cic. 
Terrbris et fraudis dounde est. Virg. Auri et argenti largiter. Plaut. Cbpidrum 
affdtim. Liv. Quum partim illdrum mihi f dmilidrissimi essent. Cic. 

Note 1. The above words, though generally adverbs, seem, in this use, rather 
to be nouns or ailjectives. 

Note 2. (a.) The genitives gentium, terrdrum, Idci, and IdroTnim, with certain 
adverbs of place, strengthen their metining; as, Usquam terrdrum. dust. Esqtuim 
gentium, Any -where whatever. I’laut. ULi terrdrum sumus ? Where in the 
world are we V Cic. Ablre quo terrdrum jmsent. Liv. Ubi sit Idci. ITin. Eo 
Idci, equivalent to eo Idco, In that place. Tac. Eddem Idci res est. Cic. Nescire 
quo loci esset. Id. But the last three examples might perhaps more properly 
be referred to Rem. 3. 

(6.) The adverbs of place thus used are ubi, ublnam, ubicumque, ubiubi, ubivis, 
vbique. unde, usquam, nusquam, quo, qudcumque, quods, qudquo, dlinuo, hie, hue, 
eo, eddem. Ldc% also occurs after ibi and ibidem; gentium after longe; as, Ibi 
Idci, In that place. Piin. Abes longe gentium. Cic. So, minime gentium. By no 
means. Ter. Vicinive in the genitive is used by the comic writers after hie and 
hue ; as, Ilic proximoe vicinice. Plaut. JIue vicinue. Ter. Cf. ^ 221, R. 3, (4.) 

Note 3. Hue, eo, quo, when used figuratively to express a degree, are joined 
also with other genitives; as, Ab insolentije furoris^eie pi'ocessiV, He advanced 
to such a degree of insolence and madness. Plin. Hue enim malorum ventum 
est. Curt. Iluccine venirnusf Have we come to this? Pers. Ab miseria- 

mm vdnire, To such a pitch of misery. Sail. Quo amentiae prdgressi silis. i.iv. 

Note 4. The genitives Idci, Idednim, and tempdris, appear to be reduiidant 
after the adverbs adhuc, inde, interea, poslea, turn, and tune, in ex])ressions de¬ 
noting time; as, Adhuc Idedrum, Till now. Plaut. Inde Idci, After that. Lucr. 
Inlbrea Idci, In the mean time. Ter. Postea Idci, Afterwards. Sail. Turn tem- 
vdris, an - tunc tempdns. At that time. Just. Ldedrum also occurs after id, 
denoting time; as. Ad id locdrum. Up to that time. Sail. Cf. R. 3. 

Notv a. When the genitive ejus occurs after quoad, in such connections as 
vhe fcl owni^g: t,Htoad ejusfdcere pdteris. Cic.; or passively. Quoad ejusjieri 
posit. As far as may be. Cic.; the ejus refers to the preceding clause; literahy, 
as much of it as possible. 


^14 


STN^AX.—GENITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 


§213 


Note 6. Prldie and postridie, though reckoned adverbs, aie followed by a 
genitive, depending on the noun dies contained in t'lem; as, Prldie ejus dici^ 
Ht;. On the day before that day, i. e. Tlie dav befon.. Cic. Prldie insidiarum 
'Ihe day before the ambush. Tac. Posirldle ^Jus difi^ The next day. Cses. 
Wlien tliev are followed by an accusative, ante or jMjst is understood. Cf. 
§ 238, 1, (5.) 

Note 7. Adverbs in the superlative degree, like their adjectives, are follow¬ 
ed by a genitive; as, Gpliine omnium^ Best of all. Ci3. 

GENITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 

§ 213. A noun, limiting the meaning of an adjective, is put 
in the objective genitive, to denote the relation expressed in 
English by of, in, or in respect to ; as, 

Avidus laudis. Desirous of praise. Plena timoris. Full of fear. 

AppUens glorias, Eager ylory. Eyenus aquse. Destitute of water. 

J/gj/ior virtutis. Mindful q/’rbVwe. Docius faudi. Skilful 

So, Nescia mens fati. The mind ignorant in reyard to fate. Virg. Imj)dteTU 
Irae, lit. Powerless in resjyect to anyer, i. e. unable to control it. Liv. Homines 
expertes veritati^ Men destitute of truth. Cic. Lactis Ctbundans, Abounding 
in milk. Virg. Terra ferax arbonxm. Land productive of trees. Plin. Tenax 
propositi vir, A man tenacious of his puipose. Hor. JEyer animi. Sick in mind. 
Liv. LOctis medius juguli summlque lacerti, i. e. between. Ovid. Morum dl- 
versus. Tac. Op^rxim sSlutus. Hor. Liber Idborum. Id. Inteyer vitae sceleris^tw 
purus, Upright in life, and free from wickedness. Hor. Vini pollens Liber. Plant. 

From the above examples, it will be seen that the genitive after an adjective is some¬ 
times translated by other words besides of, in, or in respect to, though the relation Virhich 
it denotes remains the same. Cf. 211, R. 12. 

Remark 1. The follow’ing classes of adjectives, which, as denoting a relation 
to a thing, are called relative adjectives 104, 13), are frequently limited by a 
genitive; viz. (1.) Verbals in ax; as, capax. Max, ferax, f uyax, pervicax 
fenoa:, etc.—(2.) Participials in ns, and a few in tus^ with their cont- 
pounds; as, dmans, appetens, cupiens, efficiens, pdtiens, impdtiens, sUiens; — ccyn- 
eultus, doctus, sOlutus .—(3.) Adjectives denoting desire or aversion; as, 
dvdi'us, dvldus, cupidus, studiosus; fastididsus:—p anticipation; as, particeps, 
affinis, amsors, exsors, expers, inops:—k notoled g e, e xp erience, capac¬ 
ity, and their contraries; ns, callidiis, compos, eonscius, gndrus, iyndrus, pirV 
i%s, imperltus, impos, j)6tens, impOtens, jtrudens, imprudens, expertus, inexpertus, 
consHus, inscius, nescius, insOlejis, insdlltus, insuctus, rudis, sailers:—memory 
and forgetfulness; ns,memor, inwiemor, etc.:—certainty and doubt, 
as, cer’tus, incertus, ambiguus, ddbius, stispeiisus: —c are and negligence; as, 
anxias, sollicitus, provlaus, improvidus, securus :—f ear and confidence, 
as, pdridus, tlmuhis, trepldus, inipdiidus, fidens, interrltus:—guilt and inno¬ 
cence; as, noxius, reus, stispectus, compertus, mdnifestus, innoxius, innOcens, 
i^"tons:—plenty and want; as, dbundans, plenus, dives, sdtus, largus, intpe, 
egsnus indnis, pauper, parcus, sOlutus, vacuus. 

(a.) In the poets and later prose writers, many other adjectives, particularly 
those which express mental emotions, are in like manner limited by a genitive, 
especially by dnimi, ingenii, mentis, irce, mllltice, belli, Idboris, reruif, cevi, f uturi, 
morum, and fidei. 

Rem. 2. The limiting genitive, by a Greek construction, sometimes denotes 
a cause or source, especially in the poets; as, Lassus maris, et viarum, inilitiaB' 
ffut. Hor. Fessus vice. Stat. Fessus mdris. Hor. Attonitus serpentis. Sil. Mem 
wterrita leti. Ovid. 

Rem. 3. Participles in ns, ■c^en zised as such, take after them the same case 
M the verbs from which they aw derived; as, Se dmans. Loving himself. Cio 
Mdre terram appitens. Id. 


§213. 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 


215 


Rem. 4. Instead of the grenitive, denoting q/*, in, or in res^pect to, a 
different construction is sometimes used after many of these adjec¬ 
tives; as, 

(1.) An infinitive or a subjunctive clause; as, Certv^ire, Detenuined to gv. 
Ovid. Cnntare pt’vltL Virg. FHlcior unguere iHa. Id. Anxius quid fact* 
6pus sit. Sail. Vive viemor quam sis a;vi brevis. Hor.—So dlimus, diyid‘;(A, 
cailidm, cupUlus finnus, frequens, gnarixs, impOtens, inops, Uetus, laryui, Wkt, 
pollens, inemor, aubias, etc. 

(2 ) Au accusative with a preposition; as, Adrem dvldior. Ter. Aiidiis in 
direptiones. Liv. Aninms cdpax ad praeceuta. Ovid. Ad casum fortunam^tia 
felix. Cic. Ad fraudem cnllidus. Id. Dlllyens ad custodiendum. Id. NegU- 

? entior in patrein. Just- Vir ad disciplinam pSritus. Cic. Ad bella rudis. Liv. 

^Ctens in res belJicas. Id. Alacer ad maleficia. Cic. Inter beUum et pacem 
nihil rmdium esL Id.—So with '’.d, f ertllis, Jirmus, infirmus, pdtens, sterilis, etc.— 
with in, cupidus, parcus, pdiens, prddiyus, etc. 

(3.) An accusative without a preposition, chiefly in the poets; as, Nudtis 
membra. Bare as to his limbs. Virg. Os, humeros 7 ?ie deo sunilis Id. Cetera 
fulvns. Hor. Cuncta pollens. Sen. Ag. See § 234, II. 

(4 ) An ablative with a preposition; as, Avidus in p?cuniis. Eager in re¬ 
gard to money. Cic. Anxius de fama. Quint. Rudis in jure cmli. Cic. PeH- 
de agricultura Varr. Prudens \n clvili. Cic. Reus de vi. Id. Purus 
ab cuitu Liv. Certior factus do xe. Cic. SolUcttus de re. Id. Super 

scelere suspectus. Sail. Inops ab amicis. Cic. Pauper in sere. Hor. Mddicvs 
in cultu. Plin. Ab aquis sterilis. Apul. Cbpiosus a frumento. Cic. Ab fequltatu 
firmits. Id. So with in, immbdicus, parcus, uber: —with ab dlienus, bedim, ex- 
torris, immunis, inops, liber, nudus, orbus, vacuus. 

(5.) An ablative -vyithout a preposition; as. Arte rudis. Rude in art. Ovid. 
Reyni crimlne insons. Liv. Onnpos mente. Virg. Prudens consllio. Just. ./Eger 

S ejibus. Sail. Prcestans ingt'nio. Cic. Mddicm severltate. Tac. Nihil insl- 
iis vacuum. Cic. Amor et melle et feUe est fecundisslmus. Plaut. Medius Pcl- 
luce et Castore. Ovid. Cf. Rem. 5. 

In many instances, the signification of the accusative and ablative after adjectives dif¬ 
fers, In a greater or less degree, from that of the genitive. 

Rem. 5. As many of the adjectives, which are followed by a genitive, admit of othra 
constructions, the most common use of each, with particular nouns, can, in general, be 
determined only by recourse to the dictionary, or to the classics. Some have, 

(1.) The genitive only; as, beniynus, cdpax, exsors, impos, impdtens, insdiCd' 
bilis, irritus, llberdlis, mddicus, munificus, prizlaryus, and many others. 

12.) The genitive more frequently; as, compos, consors, Syhim, exhercs, 
jxpers, fertilis, indiyus, inops, parcus, particeps, pauper, prbdiyus, proiper, 
sUrilis. 

(k3.) The genitive or ablative indifferently; as, dives, fecundus, fh'ax, im^ 
munis, indnis, immOdicus, jcjunus, laryus, nlmius, dpulentus, peritus, plenus, pd¬ 
tens, qmrus, refertus, s&tur, uber, vacuus. 

(4.) The ablative more frequently; as, dbtindans, dlienus, cassv.s, copiosm, 
extorris, Jirmus, fetus, frequens, grividus, yrdvis, infirmus, liber, Idcuples, Icetus, 
mactus, nudus, Onusius, orbus, pollens, sdtidtus, truneus, vdlidus, viduus. 

(6.) The ablative only; as, bedtus, cr^ber, densus, mutilus, tumidus, turgidm, 
Vor the ablative after many of the preceding adjectives, see J 250. 

Rex. G. Some adjectives usually limited by a dative, sometimes take a gen- 
tive instead of the dative; as, similis, dissimllis, etc. See ^ 222, R. 2. 

Rem. 7. Many adjectives in addition to the genitive or ablative denoting oj 
•>r in respect to, take also another case to express a different relation; as, Mem 
Bibi conscia recti. Cf. § 222, R. 3. Cmscius has also sometimes the dative in¬ 
stead of genitive of the thing; a&,Conscim huic f^lnori. Cic. 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§214. 


tfl6 


GENITIVE AFTER VERBS 

§ S14L. Sum, and verbs of valuing, are followed by a geni¬ 
tive, denoting degree of estimation ; as, 

A me argentum, quanti est, sumlio, Take of me so much money as (he) ia 
W^orth. Ter. Magni phuniam, He valued money greatly. Cic. Agcj 

nunc pliiris est, quam tunc fuit. Id. Tanti est, It is worth so much; and, abso¬ 
lutely, It is worth Avhile. Cic. Hujus non fdcio, I don’t care that for it. 

Remark 1. (a.) Verbs of valuing are joined with the genitive, 
when the value is expressed in a general or indefnite manner by :— 

(1.) A neuter adjective of quantity; as, tanti, quanti, pliiris, minoris, ma^pii 
permafpii, qACinmi, niaximi, minimi, parvi, tantldeni, quantlcumque, quantlvis, 
quantihbet, but only very rarely multi and major is. 

( 2.) The nouns assis, Jlocci, nauci, nlhlli, plli, teruncii, and also pensi and 
hujus. 

(b.) But if the price or value of a thing is a definite sum, or is ex¬ 
pressed by a substantive, other than assis, flocci, etc., it is put in the 
ablative. Cf. § 252. 

Rem. 2. The verbs of valuing are cestlmo, existlmo, duco, fdcio, flo, hdbe(\ 
pendo, puto, deputo, taxo. Thus, Ut quanti quisque se ipse fdciat, tanti flat ah 
dmicis. That as much as each one values himself, so much he should be valued 
by his friends. Cic. Sed quia parvi id duch'et. Id. Hdnores si magni non pute~ 
mm. Id. Non assis f dcis f Catull. Neque quod dixi, flocci existlmat. Plant. 

Note 1. (a.) The ])hm9.e cequi bdni, or (eg ui bdnlque fdcio, or co7isulo, I take 
a thing in good part, am satisfied with it, may be classed with genitives of value; 
as. Nos Kqui boniywe fdcimus. Liv. So, Boni cousuluit Plin.— {b.) A genitive 
of price is joined also to cceno, hdblto, ddceo, etc.; as, quanti hdbitas? what rent 
do you pay for your house or lodging V quanti dOcet f what are his terms in 
teaching? 

Note 2. After cestlmo, the ablatives magno, permagno, parvo, nlhllo, are 
sometimes used instead of the genitive; as. Data magno cestlmas, accepta 
parvo. Sen. Pro nlhllo, also, occurs after duco, hdbeo, and puto; and nihil with 
cestlmo and mdror. Cf. § 231, R. 5. 

Note 3. The neuter adjectives above enumerated, and hujus, may be refer¬ 
red to a noun understood, as pvHii, ceris, jumderis, momenti; and may be con¬ 
sidered ns limiting a preceding noun, also understood, and denoting some per¬ 
son or thing; as, jEstimo te magni, i. e. hdmlnem magni jyretii. Scio ejus oruinis 
au 2 tdritdtem semper dpud te magni fuisse, i. e. rem magni momenti. The words 
assis, etc., may also be considered as depending on an omitted noun; as, pretio 
rem, etc. 

Kp:m. 3. Statements of price, also, when general or indefinite, are 
put in the genitive after verbs of buying, selling, letting, and hiring , 
a-', 

Mercdfdres non tantidem vendunt, quanti emerunt. Cic. Nulla pestis humdno 
glneri pluris stHit, quam Ira. Sen. 

Note 1. Verbs of buying, selling, etc., are emo, vendo, the neutral passive 
veneo, consto, prosto, and liceo, to be exposed for sale. 

Note 2. With verbs of buying, selling, etc., the ablatives magno, permagno 
vluHmo, parvo, mlnlmo, and nlhllo are often used instead of the genitive; as, 
Non pbtest parvo res magna constdre. Sen. Quanti emere possum mirumo? Wha* 
is the lowest price I can buy at? Plant. Sometimes also the adverbs edra 
bine, and mdU taka the place of the genitive or ablative of price. 


§215,216. 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 


217 


(1.) Misereor^ miseresco^ and tne impersonals mis^- 
ret, yoenxtet, pudet, tmdet, and piget, are followed bj a genitive 
of the object in respect to which the feeling is exercised; as, 

Miseremini sdcidrum, Pity the allies. Cic. MisSrescUe regis, Pity the king. 
Virg. ^^ea mater, tui^ me mlseret, mei plgei, I pity yon, and am dissatisfied 
with myself. Acc. Eos ineptiarum./wjnj/ei. Cic. Fratris vie jxudet pigeigue. 
Ter. Me clvitatis morum pi get tcedetque. Sail. So the compound distvsdei; Ham 
qmxl tui me, n^ue domi disicedeat. Plant.; and the passive; Numquam suscepti 
nfigotii euni pertcesum est. Nep. Lentitudmis edmm pertcesa. Tac. Mlseii- 
tum est vie tudruvx forthnarum. Ter. Cave te fratmm misereatur. Cic. Fudet 
{me) deumm hominumqne, I am filled with shame in reference both to gods 
82 id men. Liv. 

Note 1. H/ts^resaMs sometimes used in the same manner as mlsirei; oss, 
Nunc te mtsh'escat mei. Ter. Misirco, as a personal verb, also, occurs with a 
genitive; as. Ipse sui vilsei'ct. Lucr. 

Remark. The genitive after the above impersonals seems to depend on some 
general word constituting the grammatical subject of such verbs, and signify¬ 
ing, matter, business, fact, case, circumstances, conduct, character, etc., cf | 211, 
R. 8, (3) ; and § 209, K. 3, (4.) Instead of the genitive with its omitted noun, 
an infinitive or clause with quod or with an interrogative particle is sometimes 
used as a siibject; as. Nan vie hoc jam dicere pudehit. Cic. Non pcenltet me 
quantum profecerim, I am not dissatisfied with my progress. Id. These verbs 
have also sometimes a nominative ; as. Me quidem hcec conditio non pcenitei. 
Plant. Non te hsec pudent f Ter. 

Noth 2. Mlseret occurs with an accusative of the object, instead of a geni¬ 
tive; as, Menedemi vicem mlseret me. Ter. So, also, Pertcesus iguaviam suain. 
Suet. 

Note 3. (a.) These impersonals, as active verbs, take also an accusative of 
the person exercising the feeling which they express. See § 229, R. 6.— 
(6.) Sometimes also the accusative of the neuter pronouns and of nlkU, 
denoting to what degree the feelings are exercised; as, SequUur ut nihil {sdpievn 
iem,) poenlteat. Cic. Cf. ^ 232, (3.) 

(2.) Sdtago is sometimes followed by a genitive denoting in 
what respect ; as. 

Is sdtdgit rerum sudrum. He is busily occupied with his o-^i affairs. Ter. 
This compound is often written separately, and in either case the genitive 
seems to depend upon sat. See § 212, R. 4. Agito, with sat, in like manner, is 
tbhowed by a genitive; as. Nunc dgitas sat tute tudrum rerum. Plaut. 

§ 23G. Recorder, memini, reminiscor, and ohliviscor, are 
followed by a genitive or accusative of tlie object remembered 
or forgotten; as, 

nagitiorum suat'um rScorddbttur. Cic. Omnes gradus a^tatis rScordor turn, 
I call to mind all the periods of your life. Id. Memlni vivorum, I am mindful 
of the living. Id. Numeros memlni, I remember the measure. Virg. Mmlnisci 
veteris famte. Nep. Dulces m6rien$ remlniscitur Argos. Vh’g. Reminisci ami- 
cos. Ovid. Oblltus sui. Virg. Injuriarum obllviscltur. Nep. Ohllviscor injurias. 
Cic. Obllriscere Graios. Virg. 

Remark 1. (a.) When the thing remembered or forgotten is expressed by 
a neuter pronoun or adjective, it is always put in the accusative. An accusa¬ 
tive cf the person witli these verbs is unusual, except that memlni, when re¬ 
ferring to a contemporary always takes an accusative of the person; as, Cin- 
nam memlni. Cic. 


14 


218 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§217 


(6.) An infinitive or a dependent clause sometimes follows these verbs; as, 
Memento mihi suppetias ferre. Plaut. Esse qudque in fdtis remtniscltnr, affore 
tempus, quo Tnare, etc. Ovid. Obliti quid deceat Hor. Memtni te scribere. 
Cic. Qute sum passura recor'dor. Ovid. 

Rem. 2. Recordor and viemini^ to remember^ arc sometimes followed by an 
ablative with de; as, Petimus ut de suis liberis reco^ dentur. Cic. De palla me- 
tnento. Plaut. 

Rem. 3. signifying to make mention of, has a genitive, or an abla¬ 
tive with rfe; as, Neque hujzis rei meniinit.qjoHa. Quint. de exsuli- 

bus. Cic. With venit mild in mentem, the person or thing may be made the 
subject of vSnit; as, Miserce ubi xenit in mentem mortis metus. Plaut. V^nit hoc 
Twt/ii in mentem; or an infinitive or subjunctive clause may supply the place 
of the subject:—for the genitive with this phrase, as in S6let mini in mentem 
Tinlre illius tempdris, see | 211, R. 8, (5.) The genitive with recordor is very 
rare. 

§ 9IT* Verbs of accusing, convicting^ condemning, and 
quitting, with the accusative of the person, are followed by a 
genitive denoting the crime ; as, 

Arguit me furti, He charges me voith theft. Alteram accusat probri, He ac¬ 
cuses another of villany. Meipsum inertise condemno. Cic. 

Remark 1. (a.) To this rule belong the verbs of 

Accusing; accuso, dgo, arcesso, arguo, dto, defero, incripm, incuso, inAmitlo, 
postulo, and more rarely alllgo, anqulro, astringo, capto, increpito, urgeo, inter^ 
rdgo, ream ago or fado, dlicui diem dico, cum allquo dgo. —C onvicting; con- 
vinco, coarguo,pTenendo, teneor, obstnngor, obligor.—G o n d e m n i n g ; damno, con- 
demno, injamo, and more rarely ?uc?ico, ndto, plector. —A c q u i 11 i n g ; absolvo. 
libero, purgo, and rarely solvo. To the verbs of accusing, etc., may be added 
the adjectives denoting guilt and innocence, which likewise take a genitive. 
Cf. § 213, R. 1, (3.) 

(6.) The genitives which follow these verbs are, audacice, dx'dHtioe, ceedis, 
falsi, furti, iqndvim, impieidtis, injuridrum, levitdtis, mdjestdtis, mdleficii, T7iendd- 
cii, pai'ncidii, pecedti, qjeculdtus, ^ob7'i, p7-dditidnis, rei cdqMdlis, repetanddrum, 
tcderis, stultitice, temd'itdtis, tim67ns, vdnitdtis, veneficii, etc. 

Rem. 2. (a.) Instead of the genitive, an ablative with de is often used after 
accuso, dofero, anqiilro, arguo, postulo, damno, condemno, absolvo, and jiurgo; as, 
Accusdre de negligentia. Cic. De vi conde77i7idti sunt. Id. De repetundis est 
posiuldtiis. Id. Sometimes with in, after accuso, coarguo, convinco, teneor, and 
deprehendor; as, In quo te accuso (Cic.); and after Z/iero, with a or ab; as, 
A scelere I'lbd'dti su77ius. Cic. Accuso and damno with inter occur in the 
phrases inter sicmdos accusdre, etc., to charge with assassination. 

{b ) With some of the above verbs, an ablative Avithout a preposition is often 
used, as, Libh'd7’e culpa. Cic. 0*i/nen quo argid posset. Nep. P7oconsule77i 
postuldxerat repetundis. Tac. This happens especially Avith general Avords de¬ 
noting crime; as, scHus, mdleficium, pecedtum, etc.; as. Me peccato solvo. Liv. 
The ablatives ermine and nd7nine, Avithout a preposition, are often inserted be¬ 
fore the genitive; as, Arccssc7-e dliquem crimine ambitus. Liv Nomine scHe/ds 
conjurdtid7iis(que damndti. Cic.; and when not sc inserted they are to be uuder- 
Btoou. 

(c.) Sometimes a clause takes the place of the genitive; as, Eum accusabant 
quod sbeietatem fecisset. Nep. So the infinitive Avith the accusative. Uuidf 
quod me — arguit sdnim accessisse f Ovid. 

Rem. 3. (a.) The punishment is commonly expressed by the genitive; as, 
capitis, mo7'tis, multce, pec mice, quadrupli, oclupli; but sometimes by the abla¬ 
tive; as, cdplte, moi'te, multd, pecunid: and always by this case when a definite 
sum is mentioned; as, quindecim mUUbus ceris: or the accusative with ad or in 


5 218, 219. 


STNIAX.—GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 


219 


as, ad pcenam^ ad bestias, ad mStalla, in mStallum^ in earpensassometimes 
Ihouch rarely, iii the poets, by the dative; as, Damnalm morti. Lucr.— 
(6.) V'oti or votorum^ and less frequently wto or votis damnari, signifies ‘to be 
condemned to fulfil one’s vow,’ and is consequently eouivalent to ‘to obtain 
uhat one wishes.’ So also in the active voice, Damndois tu qudque votis. Vir^. 
Per'do is used by Plautus as a verb of accusing, Avith capitis; Quern eyo cdpitis 
verdam^ will charge with a capital ofi'ence. So cdplte or capitis p^ilclitari, 
IMaut., signifies ‘ to be in peril of one’s life.’ With vlecto and plectm'. caput is 
used in the ablative only.— (c.) Damni infecti is put in the genitive (depend¬ 
ing upon nomine understood) after sdtisdo, prdmitto^ sHpUldn, repromitio, and 
edveo ; as, Si quis in pdidete denwliendo damni infecti promiserit. Cic. 

Rem. 4. Accuso, incuso, and insimulo, instead of the genitive, sometimes take 
the accusative, especially of a neuter pronoun; as. Si id me non accusas. Plant. 

me incusdveras. Ter. Sic me insimuldre jfaZswTra f acinus. Plaut. See ^ 231, 
Bern. 5. 

Rem. 5. (a.) The following verbs of accusing, etc., are not followed by a 
genitive of the crime, but, as active verbs, by an accusative:— cdlumnior, carpo^ 
coi'iipio, erhninor, culpo, excuso. multo, punio, rSpi'ehendo, suyillo^ taxo, iraduco^ 
viiupero ; as, Cidpdre infecunaitdtem ayrorum. Colum. Excusdre errdrem et 
adolescentiam. Liv. 

(h.) This construction also sometimes occurs with accuso, incuso, aryuo, and 
inaryuo; as, Ejus dvdntiam perfldiamque accusd.rat. Nep. Culpam aryuo. Liv. 
With multo, the punishment is put in the ablative only, without a preposition; 
as, Exsiliis, moi'te multantur. Cic. 

§ S 18 . Verbs of admonishing, with the accusative of the 
person, are followed by a genitive of the person or thing respect¬ 
ing which the admonition is given ; as, 

Mllites temporis mdnet. He admonishes the soldiers of the occasion. Tjw. 
Admdnebat dlium egestatis, dlium cupiditatis smcb. Sail. 

Note. The verbs of admonishing are mdneo, admdneo, commdneo, and commd- 
mf dcio. 

Remark 1. Instead of the genitive, verbs of admonishing sometimes have 
an ablative with de; as, De aede Telluris me admdnes. Cic.—sometimes an ac¬ 
cusative of a pronoun or adjective in the neuter gender; as, Eos hoc mdmo Cic. 
Dlud me admdneo. Id.; and in the passive, Multa admdnemur. Id.—^rarely also 
a noun in the accusative; as. Earn rem nos Idcus adm&nuit. SaU. 

Rem. 2. Instead of the genitive, verbs of admonishing are also often followed 
by an infinitive or clause; as, Sdror alma mdnet succedere Lauso Turnum, His 
sister admonishes Turnus to take the place of Lausu?. Virg. Mdnet, ut susplc- 
iones vitet. Caes. Sed eos hoc mdneo, desinant furere. Cic. Mdnet riitionem fru- 
menti esse habendam. Hirt. Immortalia ne speres mdnet annus. Hor. Discipulos 
d unum mdneo, ut, etc. Quint. Mdneo quid facto opus sit. Ter. See § 273, 2. 

§ SB9. Refert and interest are followed by a genitive of the 
person or thing whose concern or interest they denote; as, 

Ilumdnitdtis refert It concerns human nature. Plin. Refert omnium dnt- 
9 -mdverti in mdlos. Ta j Interest omnium recte fdeere, It concerns all to do 
tight. Cic. 

Remark 1. Instead of the genitive of the substantive pronouns, 
the adjective pronouns mea, tua, sua, nostra, and vestra, are used; as, 

IMea nihil refert. It does not concern me. Ter. Illud mea mayni interest, 
That greatly concerns me. Cic. Tua et mea maxime interest, te talere. Cic. 
Mdyis reipubllcas interest quam mea. Id. Mayni interest Cicferouis, vd mea 
edtius, tel mehercule utriusque, me intervenire dicenti. Id. 


1520 


SYNTAX.—GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§220 


Noth . Refert rarely occurs with the genitive, but often with tht pronouns 
mcrt, tua, etc., and most frequently without either such pronoun or a genitive; 
as, quid rifert ? inayni or mayndpere rcftrt. 

Hem. 2. In regard to the case of these adjective pronouns, p^atrraarians dif¬ 
fer. Some suppose that they are in the accusative plural neutu', agreeing 
with co//tW()(/a or the like understood; JiUertst men. i. e. est mte.r men., It 
is among my Concerns. Ri’ftrt tun, i. e. rifert $e ad tun, It refers itself to 
your concerns. Others think that they are in the ablative singular femi¬ 
nine, agreeing with re, causa, etc., understood, or in the dative. I'he bettor 
opinion seems to be, that they are in the accusative feminine for meam, tuam, 
gvam, etc., that refert was originally rem fert, and that hence the e of refert 
is long. 

Rem. 3. Instead of the genitive, an accusative with ad is sometimes used; 
fts, Ad hbnorem meu,m interest q^iam primum urhem me venire. Cic. Q,uid id ad 
me aut ad meam rem refert. Plaut.—sometimes, tliough rarely, an accusative 
without a preposition; as. Quid te igitur retulit f Plaut—or a dative; as, IHc 
quid rf erat intra nCdurce fines viventi. Hor. 

Rkm. 4. The subject of these verbs, or the thing which is of interest or im¬ 
portance, is sometimes expressed by a neuter ])ronoun; as. Id 77iea niinime 
refert. Ter. Hoc vehementer interest reipvhlicce. Cic.; and sometimes by an in¬ 
finitive with its accusative, or ut, or an interrogative particle with" a sub¬ 
junctive clause; as, multum mea interest te esse diliyentem, or id dlllyens sis, 
or utrum diliyens sis nec ne. When the infinitive alone is used witii refert 
or interest, the preceding subject is understood; 2 iS, omnium interest recte f dr- 
cere, soil. se. 

Rem. 6. The degree of interest or importance is expressed by adverbs or by 
neuter adjectives, etc., in the accusative or genitive; as, mdyis, mayn6pere, «- 
kementer, pdrum, minime, etc.; multum, plOs, pluHmum, nihil, dliquid, etc ; 
tanti, qunnti, mayni, pei'viagni, pluris. But minimo discilmine refert is found 
in Juv. G, 123. 

§ 390. Many verbs which are usually otherwise construed, 
are sometimes followed by a genitive. This rule includes 

1. Certain verbs denoting an affection of the mind; ango, discimcior, excru- 
cio, fallo, qjendeo, which are followed by dnimi; decipior, disipio, fallor, fnsudio, 
inridee, mlroi', vei'eoi'; K?; Absurde fdcis, qui angas te iawlmi. Plaut. J/e aninii 
fallit. Lucr. Decipitur labbrura. Hor. Ideslpiebam mentis. Plaut. Justliice/ie 
priz.6 mlrer belline laborum. Virg. 

2 The following, in imitation of the Greek idiom; abstineo, desino, piirgn. 
Hor ; desisto. Virg.; Inudo, prdldbeo. Sil.; levo, pnrticipo. Plant.; llbero. Liv.; 
iissolvo. Tibull.: oom'porQ liber Idbdrum ; dpei'um vdcuus; j)urus steleris. §213. 

3. Some verbs denoting to fll, to abound, to want or need, to free, which are 
commonly followed by an ablative. Such are dbimdo, edreo, eomplto, e-xjdeo, 
impleo, eaeo, indiyeo, sdtui'o, obsdtui'O, sedteo; ns, Adulesceniem sum tcmCuitatia 
implet. He fills the youth with his own rashness. Liv. Atiimum expksse flam- 
msp. Virg. Rgeo consilii. Cic. Non tarn artis indigent quam labbris. Id. S“e 
§§ 249 and 250, (2.) 

4. Potior, which also is usually followed by an ablative; as, Urbis pdtiri, 
To make oneself master of the city. Sail. Potiri regni (Cic.), hostium 
verum, I'o make oneself master of the world. Cic. ’ P6ti> (active) occurs in 
*'lautus; as, Jvum nunc jidtlvit servitutis, He has made him partaker of slavery 
Li the same writer, pdtUiis tsi hostium signifies, ‘ he fell into the hands of the 
enemy.’ So, also, Aliquem compdtire orledis or vbti. App. So, Kenim ddeptus 
est. lac. Dcmlnatibnis dpisci. Id. Regndvit populbruna. Hor. 


§ 221 . 


SYNTAX.-GENITIVE OP PLACE. 


221 


GENITIVE OF PLACE. 

§ 221 . 1 . The name of a town in which any thing is said 

fo or to he done, if of the first or second declension and sin¬ 
gular immher, is put in the genitive; as, 

Halntat Mlleti, He lives at ^liletus. Ter. Quid Roma faciaml What can 1 
do at IloineV Juv. lltrciiles Tyri maxime cdlitur. Cic. 

Note. For the constmction of nouns of the third declension or plural num¬ 
ber, see ^ 254. The following appears to be the best explanation that has 
been given of this diversity of construction, depending solely on the number 
or declension of the noun. The name of the town ‘ where ’ or ‘ in which ’ is 
probably neither in the genitive nor the ablative, but always, as in Greek, in the 
dative. Since the genitive and dative are alike in the singular of the first des 
clension and the dative and ablative plural are the same in all declensions, 
such examples as Roma and Athenis present no difficulty. In the third de¬ 
clension the dative and ablative singular were anciently alike, and in such ab¬ 
latives as Anxiiri^ Qirihilfjini, Ldced(em6ni, the old fonn remains, see ^ 82, 
Exc. 5, (c.) In the secoiul declension there was an old dative in oi, as in Greek, 
which was commonly changed to o, but sometimes to i: and the latter is still 
found in nulli, uni, etc., see § 107,.and in the adjective pronouns; as, illi, etc. 

Eejiark 1. Names of islands and countries are sometimes put in the geni¬ 
tive, like names of towns; as, Jthdea vivere, To live in Ithaca. Cic. Corcyra 
fuimus. Id. Cdnon plurlmum Cypri vixit, Twidtheus Lesbi. Nep. Qmim Miltiadea 
dOnium Chersonesi hcibuit. Id. Greta jussit consldere Apollo. Virg. Roma Niimid- 
iaque f dd,n6ra ejus memdrat. Sail. 

Kem. 2. (a.) Instead of the genitive, the ablative of names of towns of the 
first and second declension and singular number, is sometimes, though rarely, 
used; as. Rex Tyro decedit, The king dies at Tyre. Just. Et Corintho et Athem$ 
et lAciaarndne nuncidta est victoria. Id. Pons quern ille Abydo feedrat. Id. 
Hujus exemplar Roma nullum hdbemus. Vitruv. Non Libya, non ante Tyro. 
Virg. For the explanation of this apparent anomaly, see the preceding note; 
in accordance with which it may be remarked, that the adverbs of place, vM, 
ihi, ibidem, alibi, dlicubi, hie, illlc, istic, etc., appear from their fonn to be ancient 
datives.— {b.) When the noun is qualified by an adjective, it is put, not in the 
genitive, but in the ablative with in; as. In ipsa Alexandria. Cic. And poeti¬ 
cally without in. Genus Longa nostrum dominabitur Alba. Virg.—(c.) When 
urbs, oppidum, locus, Qtc.. fehow the genitive of place as appositions, they are 
put in the ablative either with, or, more rarely, without, in; as, Archias AntiA- 
\hia ndtus est, cCdebri quondam urbe. Cic. Gives Romanos Nedpdli, in ccle- 
benimo oppido siepe vmmus. Id. But when in urbe, etc., precede the name of 
a town, the latter also is put in the ablative; as. In oppido Citio. Nep.; and 
but very rarely in the genitive; as, Cassius in oppido Antiocliiee est, —in the 
town of'Antioch. Cic., where the genitive depends on oppido. 

Rem. 3. The genitives domi, militice, belli, and liumi, are construed 
like names of towns; as, 

Tenuit se domi. He staid at home. Cic. Vir domi claims. Liv. Spargit hum 
'ussos d.^ntes ,—on the ground. Ovid. Militia and belli are thus used, especially 
when opposed to (/5wii; as, Una semper mlMiiae, et domi yM?7«ws,—both at home 
ind in the camp. Ter. So D&ini mllitiaque. Cic. Et ildmi et militia. Id. Militia 
ddmlque. Liv. Militia et dOrni. Ter. Eelli dOmlque, in war and in peace. Hor. 

(1.) D&rrd is thus used with the possessives mea, tua, sua, iwstra, vestra, 
^_(\ dlb'-ua; as, Domi nostrjB I'mt, He lived at my house. Cic. Aj/ud eum sic 
fui tamguam mese domi. Id. Raciificium, quod aliense domi Jieret invisere. Id. 
But with other adjectives, an ablative, generally with a preposition, is used; as, 
In vidui ddmo. Ovid. Pdternd donw. Id. Sometimes also with the possessives, 
«, Mea in ddmo. Hor. In ddmo $ud. Nep. So, instead of humi, ‘ upon the ground, 

19 * 


222 SYNTAX.—DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. §222 

\umc is soifletimes used, with or without a preposition; as, In Mtnc drertdsd 
Ovid. SSdere humo nudd. Id. 

^2.) When a genitive denoting the possessor follows^ either or in dCmo 
is used; as, Drprehensv^ dorni Ccesdris. Cic. Domi illias fuisli. Id. In domo 
(fcadm. Id. In domo ejiis. Nep. 

(3.) The ablative d/jnvo for domi also occurs, but not in Cicero; as. Ego id 
nunc experim' domo. Plant. Domo se tenere. Nep. Domo abditus. Bust. 
BdU) for belli is found in Livy— Domi belldque. So, also, humo for hu7ni; Strdim 
kdmo. Stat. Figit humo plantas. Yirg.: &nd in hnmo lumen figit. Ovid. 

(4.) Tei'roe is sometimes used like kumi; as. Sacra terrae celdvtmus. Liv. 
PryecUis terras. Virg. Ignes teri'ce condit. Luc. So, also, drerue; Truncum 
riUqvit arenae. Virg.; and vlcinice; Proximee viciniae habitat. Plant. 

(6.) The genitive of names of towns, dbrrd, mlUtice, etc., is supposed by some 
to depend on a noun understood; as, urbe, oppldo, cedibus, solo, l6co, tempbre, 
etc.| out see a different explanation above in Note. 

GENITIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 

n. Certain adverbs are followed by the genitive. See § 212, R. i, 

in. The genitive plural sometimes depends on the preposition 
tenus ; as, 

C&mdrum tdnus, As far as Cumae. Coel. Orurum tenus. Virg. Ldterum td- 
mis. Id. Urbium Coreyrce tdnus. Liv.—For the ablative after and'for the 

place of the preposition, see § 241, and R. 1. 

DATIVE. 

1. The dative is the case of reference, as it denotes 
the object with reference to which the subject acts, or in reference to 
which it possesses any specified quahty ; or, in other -Words, the ob¬ 
ject for which, to the beneft or loss of which, any thing is or is done. 
lienee, in distinction from the dative of the end (§ 227) the dative of 
reference is called dativus commodi et incommddi, the dative of ad¬ 
vantage and disadvantage; as, 

Scribo vobis hunc Ubrum, I write this book for you. Prosum tibi, or Tibi 
Utilis sum, I am useful to you. 

2. Hence the dative of advantage and disadvantage may be used 
(a) with adjectives and particles whose meaning is incomplete unlesw 
the object is mentioned in reference to which the quality exists. 
(b') AVith verbs both transitive and intransitive. K transitive the-y 
taxe an accusative of the nearer and a dative of the remoter object, 
jf intransitive they take a dative only, (c) AVith certain verbs com¬ 
pounded with prepositions, after which the dative is used instead of 
the case which the preposition, if separate, would govern, (d) Aftei 
B few verbal substantives thfrived from verbs which govern a dative. 

DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 

3. A nDun limiting the meaning of an adjective, is pn 
in the dative, to denote the object to which the quality is cL 
reeled; as, 


§ 222 . 


SYNTAX.—DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 


223 


UtiUs, agris, Useful t< the fields. Juv. Jucundm dmlds, Agreeable to his 
fi'iends. Mart, /ramicwsunfriendly to rest. Id. Charta inutilis scribendOf 
Paper not useful for writing. Plin. 

Note. The dative is commonly translated by the prepositions toorfor; but some- 
tines by other prepositions, or without a preposition. 

Kemark 1. Adjectives signifying useful, pleasant, friendly, ft, 
like, inclined, ready, easy, clear, equal, and tlieir opposites, also those 
signifying near, many compounded witli con, and verbals in hills, are 
followed by the dative; as, 

Felix tuis, Propitious to your friends. Virg. Ordtio, ingrata, Gallis, A speecn 
displeasing to the Gauls. Caes. Amicus tyrannidi, Friendly to tyranny. Nep. 
L4bori inhdbilis, Unsuited to labor. Colum. Patri similis. Like Ms father. Cio. 
Nihil tarn est Lysioe diversum, quam Isocrates. Aptum Tempori. Id. ilalo prt^ 
nus. Sen. seditioni. Tac. Cuivis esi. Ter. ISIihi certum est, 

Cic. Par fratri tuo. Id. Falsa veris flnitima sunt. Id. Oculi concdlores corpori, 
Colum. ^lultis bonis flebUis. Hor. Mors est terribills iis, quorum, etc. Cic. 

(fi.) The following are some of the adjectives included in Pern. 1, viz. grdtm, 
acceptus, dulcis, jucundus, Icetus, sudvis; ingrdtus, insudvis, injucundus, mdlestm, 
gravis, dcerbus, ddiosus, tristis; — utUis, inuiilis, bdnus, sdluber, sdlutdris, fructudsus, 
cdldmittdsus, damvosus, funestus, noxius, pestfer, perntcidsus, exitidsus: — amicus, 
henevdl/ts, cdrus, fdmilidris, cequus, fldus, fidelis, prdjMius, secundus; inimlcus, 
adversus, cemulus, dlienus, contrdrius, inftstus, inf ulus, inlquus, Irdtus; — aptus, 
accommdddtus, appdsitus, hdbilis, iddneus, oppoi'lunus; ineptus, inhdbilis, impor- 
tunus, inconvmiens; — cequdlis, par, impar, dispar, simtlis, dissimilis, abslmills, 
discolor :—prdnus, prdcllvis, prdpensus, jyromptus, pdrdtus :—fdcilis, cliff icilis :— 
dpertus, conspicuus, mdnifestus, persprcuus, obscurus, certus, compertus, ndtus, 
ambiguus, dubius, igndius, incertus, i'^titus; — vlcinus, flnitimus, confinis, cow- 
terminus, pi'dpior, prosdmus, cogndtus, concdhr, concors, congruus, consanguinem, 
consentdneus, consdnus, conveniens, contiguus, continuus, continens. 

(b.) Many adjectives of other significations, including some compounds of 
ob, sub, and super, as obnoxius, obvius, subjectus, supplex, and superstes, are also 
followed by a dative of the object, 

(c.) After verbals in bills, the dative is usually rendered by the prepositiop 
by; as, Tibi credibilis sermo, A speech creditable to you, i. e. worthy to be be¬ 
lieved by you. Ovid. 

((7.) The expression dicto audiens, signifying obedient, is followed by the da¬ 
tive; as, Syrdcusdni nobis dicto audientes sunt. Cic. Audiens dicto fuit jussia 
mdgistrdtuum. Nep. In this phrase, dicto is dative limiting audiens, and th«s 
words dicto audiens seem to form a compound equivalent to dbediens, and, like 
that, followed by a dative; thus, Nec plebs nobis dicto audiens atcjfue dbediens 
tit. Liv. So dicto dbediens', as, Futura es dicto dbediens, annon, patri? Plant. 

Pem. 2. (u.) The adjectives cequalis, ajfinis, alienus, cogndminis, communis, 
contrdrius. fideT, insueius, par, dispar, phulidris, ju'oprius, qyrdpinquus, sdcer, 
l^inulis, assimilis, consrmilis, dissimilis, sdcius, vlcinus, superstes, suppled, and some 
pthers, instead of a dative of the object, are sometimes followed by a^geiiitive; 
as, Par hujus. Equal to him. Lucan. Proprium est oratoris ornate clicere. Cic. 
But most of these words, when thus irsed, seem rather to be taken substan¬ 
tively; as, jFqudlis ejus. His contemporary. Cic. 

(b.) Similis, assimilis, consimilis, dissimilis, par and dispar, take the genitive, 
when an internal resemblance, or a resemblance^ in character or disposition, is 
♦o be expressed, and hence we always find mei, tui, sui, nostii, vestri, similis; 
as, Pliires reges Pomiili quam Numte kmiles. Liv. 

' C.) Amicus, inimlcus, and fdmilidris, owing to their character as substan¬ 
tives, take a genitive even in the superlative; Ildmo dmlcissimus nostrm'um 
iiimrnu/w,—very friendly to our countrymen. Cic. On the other hand, hostis, 
Jiough a substantive, is sometimes used like an adiective. being modified by 


224 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 


§ 222 . 


an adverb, and taking an object in the dative; as, Ex^ectantibua omniita 
auisnam esset tarn inipius, tarn admens, tarn diis hominibusg'Me hostis, qui, eto. 
Cf. § 277, R. 1. 

Rem. 8. Some adjectives with the dative are followed by another case de¬ 
noting a different relation; as. Mens sibi conscia recti, A mind conscious to it¬ 
self of rectitude. Virg. See § 213, R. 7. 

Rem. 4. Many adjectives, instead of the dative of the object, are 
often followed by an accusative with a preposition. 

(1.) Adjectives signifying useful, fit, and the opposite, take an accusative of 
the thing with rid, but onlv a dative of t le person; as. Homo ad nullam rein 
utiUs. Cic. Locus aptus act insidias. Id. 

(2.) Adjectives denoting motion or tendency, take an accusative with ad 
more frequent);y than a dative; as. Finer ad pcenas, ad prsemia velox, Ovid; 
Ad oUriuem mo?*bu.m prbclivior, Cic.; Ad omne facinus pdrdtus, Id.; Pi'onus ad 
f idem, Liv.;—semfc>*imes with in; as, Celer in pugnam. Sil. 

(3.) Many adjectives, signifying an affection of the mind, may have an ac¬ 
cusative of the object with in, errja, or adversus, instead of the dative; as, 
Fidelia in fllios. Just ilf dter acerha in suos partus. Ovid. Grains erga me. 
Cic. Grdtum adversus te. Id. So His^milis in dominum. Tac. 

(4.) Adjectives signifying like^ equal, common, etc., when plural, are often 
followed by the ac cusative with ini'^r; as. Liter se similes. Cic. Haec sunt in¬ 
ter eos communia. Id. Intel se diversi. Id. 

Rem. 5. Prdpior and proonmus, instead cf the dative, have sometimes, like 
their primitive prope, an accusative; as, Qwd vttium propius virtutein erai. 
SaU. P. Crassus p'oximus mare Oceanum ieiemaroi. Cses. Ager, qui p'oximna 
finejn MegaldpolUdrum est. Liv. Cf. ^ 238, 1. 

Rem. 6. (a.) Some adjectives, instead of the dative, have at times an abla¬ 
tive with a preposition. Thus, par, communis, consentdwus, dvtcors, with mm; 
as. Quern pdrem cum llberis jecisti. Sail. Consentdneum cum ii? literis Cic. 
Civitas secum discors. Liv. So dlienus and dlversus with a or ah ; as, Ahenus 
a me. Ter.; A ratione dlversus, Cic.; or without a preposition; .as, AUeaum 
nostra amlcitia. Id.—(ft.) FrUus, which regularly takes the ablative, is in Livy 
construed wdththe dative; as, fortunsey'reiMs; nulli xdi fretns, etc. Cf. § 244.~ 
(c.) The participial adjectives juncius and conjunctus, instead of the dative 
take sometimes the ablative either with or without cum. 

Rem. 7. Idem is sometimes followed by the dative, chiefly in the poels , as 
Jupiter omnibus idem. Virg. Invltum qui servat, idem f dcit occidenti. Hor. 
In the first example, omnwus is a dative of the object; in the second, the 
iative follows idem, in imitation of the Greek construction with airdc and is 
equivalent to quod occldens, or quod f dcit is, qui occldit. Similis is construed 
Vn the same manner in Ilor. Sat. 1, 3^ 122. Idem is generally fehow ed not by 
4 caoe, but by qui, ac, atque, ut, quasi, or quam; sometimes by the preposition 
\nm. Cf. § 207, R. 27, (d.) Similis and par are sometimes, like idem, fcLowed 
by and atque. 

Kkm. 8. Some verbal substantives are followed by the crative, when derived 
from verbs governing the dative; as, Justitia est obtemperdiio scriptis leeribus 
^stitutisque pdpulorum. Cic. TrudUio dHcujus rei alteri. Id. Fxprohrdtio 
tuiquam viUms fortumz. Liv. 

Notk. A dative of the object often follows esse and other verbs, in connection with a 
predicate nominative or accusative, but such dative is dependent, not on the noun, but 
to the verb Cf. § 227, R. 4. 


1223. 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


22c 


DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 

§293. A noun limiting the meaning of a ve: h, is put in 
the dative, to denote the object to or for which any thing is, or 
is done; as, 

illea (tdmih. tibi pMet, ]\Iv house is open to you. Cic. Pars opfdre Idcum tecto, 
A piirt choose a site for a huildinc/. Virg. Tibi sen's, tibi 7netis, You sow for 
ytrurstlf you reap fur yourself I’laut. Licet neinini ccmtra patriam ducere ex~ 
ercHuia, It is not lawful for any one to lead an army against >'!s country. Cic. 
Hoc tibi promitto, I promise you this. Id. /Aerel lateri leUllis Cirundo. Yir^. 
Surdo f dbulam narras. I lor. ^lihi responsiaii dedit. Virg. Sic vos non vobia 
fertis drCdra, bores. Id. Omnibus bonis expM'it salcam esse rempublicam. Cic. 
Aplat habendo ensem. Virg. 

Note. The dative is thus used after all verbs, whether transitive or intransitive, par 
sonal or impersonal, and in both voices, provided their signification admits a reference to 
a remoter oljject, for whom or to whose benefit or injury any thing is done. In the pas- 
give voice, from their nature, neuter verbs can only be so construed impersonally. Cf. 
i 142, 1, and § 222, 2. 

Remark 1. The dative after many verbs is rendered not by to or for, but by other 
prepo.sitions, or without a preposition. Many intransitive Latin verbs are translated 
into English by verbs transitive, and the dative after them is usually rendered like the 
object of a transitive verb.—Most verbs after which the signs to and for are not used 
with the dative, are enumerated in this and the following sections. 

Rem. 2. ]\Iany verbs signifying to favor, please, trust, assist, and 
their contraries, also to command, obey, serve, resist, threaten, and 
be angry, take a dative of the object. 

Note. The neuter verbs comprehended in this rule generally express in the 
verbal form the meaning of those adjectives, which are followed by the dative, 
(cf. § 222, R. 1,) Thus, (a.) Jlla tibi facet. She favors you, or is favorable Us 
you. Ovid. Milii j^tdcebat Pomponius, ininime displicebat. Cic. Qui sibi fldit 
Hor. Non hcet sui commddi causa ndcere alteri. Cic. Non inmdetur iUi cetati 
sed ctiam f dvetur. Id. Desperat saluti suce. Id. Neque mihi veitra dec. eta aux- 
iUantur. Sail. Imperat aut servit collecta pecunia cuique. llor. Obedire et pdrere 
voluntati. Cic. Qudniam factiuni inimicbrum resistere nequiverit. Sail. Mihi 
mindbdtur. Cic. Irasci inimicis. Cses. 

(b.) So Adulor, assentior, blandior, commddo, fS,veo, gratificor, grator, gratulor, and 
Its verbal gratuldbundus, ignosco^ indidgeo, lendctnor, palpor, parco, plaudo, respondeo, 
Uudeo, supparasltor; crmulor, incommbdo, invideo, nbceo, obsum, ojftcin; — arrideo, 
vldceo ; displlceo; — credo, fido, confido; despero, diffvlo; — ndmitiiculor, auxUior, 
vigdeor, midicor, QpUnlor, patrodnor, prosum, suhvSnio, succurro; desum, insidior ;— 
impgro, mando, mbdgror, prmcipio, tempgro; ausculto, moriggror, obedio, obsgcundo, 
obsgquor, obtempgro, pareo, dicto audiens sum; — ancillor, fdmulor, ministro, servic, 
inservio, prcestolor; — adversor, refrdgor, obsto, obtrecto, rgluctor, rgnitor, rgpugno, rg- 
fisto and, chiefly in the poets, bello, certo, luctor, pugno ; — minor, comminor, inter- 

K-iinor; _ irascor, succenseo, stdmachor .—To these maybe added friiuo, adcpquo, convlaxyr, 

Uggngro, excello, niibo, suppgdito, praeraricor, rgcipio (to promi.se), rgnuncio, siiaieo, 
persuadeo, dissuadeo, supplico, vaco, videor, and sometimes misceo and lateo : —also tha 
Impersonals accidit, concgnit, conducit, contingit, dgcet, dolet, expgdit, licet, libet, or 
]iibet, liquet, placet, etc.—(c.) Intransitive verbs governing a dative are often used Impel'- 
eo'ially in the pa.ssive with the same case; as, mHu invvieiur, I am envied. MUii mguS- 
dl-itur, I am reviled. Mihi pardtur, I am spared, ilor. Hoc persuadclur mihi, 1 afiz 
persuaded of tliis. 

(1,) {a.) IMany of the above verbs, which, as intransitive, take the dative 
jjometlines become transitive and are followed by an accusative; as, adulor, 
ausculto, blandior, dc'ienero, despero, induhjeo, b'deo, medeor, medicor, mdderor, 
’^trecto, prcestolor, prbcldeo, etc.; as, Adulari rillquem. Cic. Hanc cave dey^n?.- 
res. Ovid. Indulyeo me. Ter. Hujus adventum prmsidlans. Cajs. Providere 
rem frumcntdriam. Id.—Sometimes also by a iireposition and the ablative or 
*ccui.ative; ns,, h SlcAcis deyenerdvit Pdnnetius. Cic. De reimbllca desperare. 
id. Obtrecfdrunt inter se. Nep.—or by a dependent clause; as, Qu8B desperai 
tractdta nitesccre posse, I'elinquit. Hor. 


226 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§m 


(S.) others, as transitive verbs, have, with the dative, an accnsative, ex 
pressed or understood; as^ impero^ mando, ministro, minor^ comminor, interminor 
j^aeipio, redpio, renuncio, etc.; as, Equites imperat clvitdtibus; where cogefu 
mi is perhaps to be supjdied. He enjoins upon the states the providing of cav* 
aliw. Cses. See ^ 274, R. 5. Minislrdre victum dlicui. Varr. Deflagrationem 
uroi et Jtdlice toti mlndbdtur. Cic. 

(c.) JEquo and ddceqxio are construed with the accusative and either the da¬ 
tive cr cum with the ablative.— Invideo takes either a single dative cf the per* 
son or thing, a dative of the person and an accusative of the thing; as, Udnd- 
rem mihi inmdent. Hor.; or, when invidere is used in the sense of prtvdre^ a da¬ 
tive of the person and an ablative of the thing; as. Non inindcrunt laiidc sud 
mulUribus. Liv. In Horace, by a Greek construction, the genitive is once v.sed 
instead of the accusative or ablative of the thing; as, Neque ille sepdsUi ciceru 
nec iongce inxndet dvence. 

(d.) Cedo, used transitively, takes a dative of the person and an accnsativa 
of the thing; but sometimes the thing is expressed by the ablative; as, cedlrt 
aUcui possessidne hortdrum. So, also, concedo iibi Idcum, or concedo tibi loco. 

(2.) klany verbs which, from their significations, might be included in the 
above classes, are, as transitive verbs, only followed by an accusative; as, 
delecto, juvo^ adjuvo, cu^'uto, Icedo, offendo, etc.— Jubeo is followed by the accusa¬ 
tive with an infinitive, and sometimes by the accusative alone, or the da¬ 
tive with the infinitive or subjunctive; as, Jubeo te bene sperare. Cic. Lea 
Jubct qu(s f dcienda sunt. Id. Britannico yussii exsurgere. Tac. Quibus 
Jussernt, ut instantibus resistdrent. Id.— Fido and confldo are often followed by 
the ablative, with or without a preposition; as, Flaere cursu. Ovid. Cf. § 245 

§ 234:. Many verbs compounded with these eleven prepo 
Bitions, dd, ante, con, In, inter, 6b, post, prce, pro, sub, and super, 
are followed by the dative; as, 

Annue coeptis. Be favorable to our undertahings. Virg. Romanis equitibus 
llieroe afferuntur, Letters are brought to the Roman knights. Cic. Antecellere 
omnibus. To excel all. Id. Antetulit irce religidnem. Nep. Audetque viris con- 
currere virgo. Virg. ExercUum exercitui, duces ducibus compdrdre. Liv. Immi~ 
net his a^r. Ovid. Pecori signum impressit. Virg. Nox praelio intervenit. Liv. 
Jnterdixit histrionibus scenam. Suet. Meis comniodis officis et obstas. Cic. 
Cum se hostium telis objecissent. Id. . Posthdbui mea seria ludo. Virg. Certd’- 
jrUni prcesedit. Suet. Hibernis Labienum pr(Bp6suit. Caes. Genibus prdcumr- 
here. Ovid. Miseris succurrere disco. Virg. lis subsidia submittebat. Caes. 
Timidis supervenit jEgle. Virg. 

Note 1. This rule implies that the compound retains the meaning of the 
preposition; and the dative following such compound is then used instead cf 
the case governed by the preposition. When such compounds are transitive 
they have with the dative an accusative also, like other transitive verbs. 

1. AccSdo, accresco, accumbo., acquiesco, &d<!quito, adhareo, adjdceo., adno, adndto, ad- 
Sto, adstIpTilor, adsum, adversor, ajfulgeo, allabor, alludo, annuo, nppareo, applauio, 
apprbpinquo, arrcpo, arrvleo, asplro, assentior, assldeo, assi.sto. assuesco, assurgo 
addT, adliibeo, adjlcio, adjungo, admoveo, adverto, advoivo, ajj'lro, affigo, alllgo, ap 

apptlco, aspergo. 

2. AntScedo, antScello, anteeo, antesto, antSvinio, antSverto ;— antSfSro, antShabeo 
%ntip5no. 

8. Coforreo, fiolludo, concino, congruo, comentio, consdno, consufsco, convlvo, ap-l 
chiaflj ill the poets, coi^o, concumbo, concurro, contendo;—conf i. o, conjungo, compluJ 
coniphno. 

4 Jnrldo, incubo, incit.mho, indormio, ingSmisco. hih^reo, inhio, innasror, innltar 
imhleo. insisto, insto, insudo, insulto, invado, invigVo, tiiacruno, iUndo, immineo, im 
m'irioT, immdror, impendeo, insum; — immisceo, impertio, impu7\o, imprlmo, incldo, in 
cludo, induo, in/lro, ingiro, hijlcio, insiro, inspergo, insuesco, \nuro. 

5. Intf.rcedo, intercldo, intercludo, interjaceo, intermico intersum intervSnio;—inter 
Uco, 'nterjlcio, interpdno. 


§ 225 . 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


227 


6. ObavibHIj, Sberro^ SbSqulto, obluctor, obmurmtiro^ ohrSpo^ obsto^ obtisto, obttripo 
vbsum, obtrecto, obvSmo, obversor, occumbo, occurro, occurso, officio; — obduco, objlcia 
offiroy offundo, oppono. 

7 P< st/Sro, posth&beo, postpono, postpUto, pofitscrlbo. 

8. Prcpcedo^ prcpcurro^ prcpeo^ prcpluceo^ prcpmlneo^ pranlUo^ proBsldeo^ prasum, pr(s- 
%>Sleo^ prcRvertor ; — prcffiro^ prcpj'lcio, prccpbno. 

0. Prdcwnbo, pro/lcio, propugno, prosplcio^ prbvldeo. 

10. SuccSdo, succresco, succumbo, succurro, siifflcioy suffr&gor^ sUbdleo^ sutijdc«g^ 
tttbrgpn mbsum, subvinio; — subdo, subjlcio, stibjilgo, submitto^ suppdno^ substerno. 

11. Siipercurro, stipersto, sUpersum, supervSnio, supervlvo. 

Note 2. In some verbs compounded with prepositions the meaning of the 
•proposition is lost. Such compounds are either not followed by a dative, oE 
the case depends, not on the preposition, but on the signification of the verb, 
according to § 223. 

Remark 1. {a.) Some verbs, compounded with db, de, ex, circum, and 'con¬ 
tra, are occasionally followed b}’’ the dative; as, absum, dcsum-, deldbor, despero, 
excido, circumdo, c%rcumfundo, circumjdceo, circwnjlcio, contrddico, coniraeo; aSj 
Se7-ta capiti delapsa, The garlands having fallen from his head. Virg. Numqui 
nummi excida'unt tibi ? Plant. Tigris urbi circumfundltur. Plin. Sibi desj^erans. 
Cajs.— {b.) Circumdo and circumfundo take either an accusative of the thing with 
a dative of the person, or an ablative of the thing with an accusative of the per¬ 
son ; as, circwndo dllcui custddias, or circumdo dllquem custbdiis. Aspergo, in- 
fptrgo, dono, impertio, exuo, and induo, are construed in the same manner. 
Cf. § 251, R. 2. 

Re:«. 2. Some verbs of repelling and taking away (most of which are com¬ 
pounds of dh, de, or ex), are sometimes followed by the dative, though more 
commonlv by the ablative; as, dbigo, abrdgo, abscindo, auf ero, ddlmo, ar'.eo, 
dcfendo, dimo, depello, derogo, dHrdho, eripio, eruo, excutio, extmo, extorqueo, ex- 
irdho, exuo, prdhibeo, su7'ripio. Thus, Nee mihi te CTrlpient, Nor shall they take 
you from me. Ovid. Solsiitium pecori difendite. Virg. Hu7ic arcebis pecori. Id. 
So rarely ab7'U7npo, dlieno, f uror, and rdqno. 

Rem. 3. Some verbs of differing (compounds of di or dis) likewise occur 
with the dative, instead of the ablative with the preposition _ db, or poetically 
with the ablative alone; 2iS, differo, discrepo, disco7'do, dissentio, dissideo, disto ; 
as. Quantum simplex hildrisque nepoti mscrepet, et quantum discordet, parcus 
avaro. Hor. Distdbit uifido scurrse d7nlcus. Hor. Grascis Tuscdnicos stdtiuB dif~ 
fei'unt. Quint. Comcedia differt sermdni. Hor. So likewise misceo; as, Mista 
modestise grdvltas. Cic. 

Rem. 4. Many verbs compounded with prepositions, especially ith ad, con, 
and in, instead of the dative, either constantly or occasionally take the case 
of the preposition, which is frequently repeated. Sometimes, also, a preposi¬ 
tion or similar signification is lased; as. Ad prlmnm vocem tlmidas advenitis 
aures. Ovid. Nemo eum antecessit. Nep. Saxa tides sold codlescere calce. Lucr. 
Inferunt omnia in ignem. Caes. Silex incumbebat ad amnem. Virg. Innixus 
rnoderamine navis. Ovid. In Pansam f7'dtrem innixus. Plin. Coruerte hang 
pdrem cum illo hello. Cic. In this substitution of one preposition for another, 
dd is used for In, and in for dd; db for ex; dd, ante, contra, and in, for tb; dd 
and anin, for qrro. 

Rem. 5. Neuter verbs of motion or of rest in a place, when compeurdod 
with the prepositions, dd, ante, cd7i, in, etc., either take the dative, or^ nequir- 
>ng an active signification, are followed by the accusative; as, lleUetix reliquoi 
GallO '5 vh-tute p 7 -cecedunt. The Helvetii surpass the other Gauls in valor. Css 
Uterque, Isocratem cetate pt'oecurrit. Cic. So proeeo, prmto, praxerlo, pi'aeelk). 
^ee § 233, (3.) 

§ I. Verbs compounded with sa/w, hene, and mdle^ are 

followed by the dative; as, 


228 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§ 225 , 


Et natiiras et iSgibus sdtisfedt, He satisfied both nature and the .■aws. Ci& 
Tibi dii bene/dcicmt omnes, j\lay all the gods bless you. Flaut. But also, Anii- 
cum erga bdie fid. Id. Mdlehlcit uirlque. Hor. So sdtisclo^ bdiedico^ mdlef ado, 

Note. These compouixis are often written separately; and the dative always dapenli 
not on satis. bSne, and male, but on the simple verb. So, also, bSne and male allcui 
vblo ; as, Tibi bene ex animo v6io. Ter. Illi igo ex omiiibus optIme volo. Plant. Non 
8ibi male vult. Petron. In like manner and vdle (ilco ; as, Augustus disii' 

dens 'e curia) sSdent'ibus singulis vdlere dicebat. Suet. Tibi valeftirire non licet gratis 
Sen.—In late writers binedlco and maledico sometimes take the accusative. 

II. Verbs in the passive voice are sometimes followed by a dative of the 
p.gent, ch'efiy in the poets and the later prose writers; as, Q.uidq',dd in hoc 
causa milii susceptum est. Cic. Neque cernitur ulll, Nor is he seen by an} oneu 
Virg. Nulla tudrum audita mihi netpue visa sdrdrutii. Id. Barbdrus hie iyo sum, 
quia 7ton intelliejor ulli. Ovid. But the agent after passives is usually in the 
ablative with a or ab. See § 248,1. 

ni. The participle in dus is followed by a dative of the agent ; 
as, 

Undo, omnibus endviganda, The wave over which (we) all must pass. Hor. 
Nobis, cum semel occidit brevis lux, Nox est perpretua una dormienaa. CatuU. 
Adhibejida est nobis diligentia, We must use diligence. Cic. Vestigia summbrum 
hdminum sibi tuenda esse dldt. Id. Si vis me f ere, dolendutn est prlmum ipsi 
tibi. Hor. Faciendum mihi putdd, ut responderem. Id. 

Remark 1. The dative is sometimes wanting when the agent is indefinite; 
as, Orandum est, ut sit mens Sana in corpdre sdno. Juv. liic vincendum aut m6- 
riendum, mllites, est. Liv. In such examples, tibi, vdbis, nobis, hdmlnibus, etc., 
may be supplied. Cf. § 141, R. 2. 

Rem. 2. The participle in dus sometimes, though rarely, has, instead of the 
dative of the agent, an ablative with a or db; as, Noti eos in dedrum imnuyrtdlhtm 
numero venerandos a vobis et cdlendos putdtos ? Cic. Hcec a me in dlcendo qrreB- 
tereunda non sunt. Id.—The dative after participles in dus is by some referred 
to § 226. 

IV. Verbs signifying motion or tendency are followed by an ac¬ 
cusative with dd or in; as, 

Ad templum Pallddis ibant. Virg. Ad prgetorem lidmlnem traxit. Cic. Vergil 
ad septemtriones. Cses. In conspectum venire. Nep. 

So curro, duco, fero, festlno, J ugio, inclino, lego, mitto, porto, preedpi- 

to, prdpero, tendo, tollo, vado, verto. 

Remark 1. So likewise verbs of calling, exciting, etc.; as, Eurum ad se 
edeat. Virg. Prdvdeasse ad pugnam. Cic. So dnimo, hortor, incito, invito, ld~ 
cesso, stimulo, suscito; to which may be added attineo, conformo, pertineo, and 
^ecto. 

Rem. 2 But the dative is sometimes used after these verbs ; as, Climor U. 
ccelo. Virg. Bum tibi llterm meve veniant. Cic. Gregem viridi compellere hlbis- 
00 . Virg. Sedibus hunc refer ante suis. Id. After venio both constructions 
are used at the same time; as, Venit mihi in mentem. Cic. Venit mihi in sus- 
picionem. Nep. Eum venisse Gennanis in amicitiam cogndeerat. Cajs. Prd- 
pinquo (to approach) takes the dative only. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes also verbs signifying motion are followed by an accuso' 
tive of place without a preposition, a supine in urn, an infinitive, or an adverb 
of place; as, Kumam es^. Ac doinum. Rus Lavinia li- 

tbra. Virg. Neque egc te derlsum venio. Plant. Non nos Llbycos popular^ 
pindtes venimus. Virg. Hue venit. Plant. See ^ 237, 276, II. 271, N. 2. 

Rem. 4. After do, scrlbo, or mitto liter as, the person fur whom they are writ¬ 
ten or to whom they are sent, is put either in the dative or ui the acc isative 
with ad; as, Ex eo Idea tibi literas ante ddderdmus. Cic. Vulturcius lUeras sibi 


§ 226 , 227 . 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


22U 


ad CatllTnam ddtas esse, dicebat. Id. Ccesar scrlbit Labieno cum, etc. Cars. Ad 
me Curius de ie scripsii. CIc. But to give one a letter to deliver is also ex- 
pressed by dare llleras dlictii, and also the delivery of the letter by the bearer. 

§ is followed by a dative denoting a possessor ; — 

(Jie tiling possessed being the subject of the verb. 

As/ thus used may generally be translated l)y the verb to hare with th€ 
dative as its subject; as, Eat inihi ddmi jniter, I have a father at home. Virg 
Sunt nobis r/utia pdina, We have mellow a,)i>les. Id. Gratia nobis 6j)us est tud, 
We have need of your favor. Cic. Innbcentia'. jdas prrhiili (piani hOndris est, 
S;dl. An ntsds lonr/as regilius esse mdnnsf Ovitl. So with an infinitive as the 
snbmct, Nec tibi sit diiros dcuisse in prtelia dentes. Tib. 4, 3, 3. The lirst and 
sooend persons :>(sum are not thus construed. 

Bemauk 1. Hence mihi est nomen signifies, I have the name, mv name is, or 
I am called. The proper name is jmt either in the nominative, the dative, or 
the genitive. See \ 204, R. 3. So also cognomen, cognomentum, and, in Taci- 
tu;;* vOcubulum, est mihi. —Sometimes, also, a possessive adjective agreeing with 
iidmen, etc., supplies the place of the proper name; as. As/ mihi nomen Tar- 
quinium. Cell. jMercuriale imposud'e mihi cognomen. Hor. 

Rem. 2. The dative is used with a similar signification after y’oj’e, stqypetit, 
dhest, deest, and deJit; as. Pauper enhn non est, cui rh'um suppHit usus. Hor. 
Si mihi cauda foret, cercdpithecus eram. Alart. Defnit ws vobis. Ovid. Non 
dPfbre Arsacidis virtiiteni. Tuc. Lac mihi non deJit. Virg. Hoc unum illi ab- 
fuit. Cic. 

Rem. 3. With the dative of the person after est Sallust and Tacitus some¬ 
times join, bv a Greek idiom, vOlens, cupiens, and invitus; as. Quia neque plebi 
militia vdlenil (es&e) initabdtur, Because the common people were not thought 
to like the war. Sail. Ul quibusque helium invitis aut cujnentihus ei'ai, Accor.i- 
ing as ^sch liked or disliked the war. Tac. 

Dative of the End or Purpose. 

§ 99T. Sum, and several other verbs, are followed by two 
datives, one of which denotes the object to which, the other the 
end for which, any thing is, or is done; as, 

Mihi mnximee est curie. It is a very gi*eat care to me. Cic. Spero nobis hanc 
conjunctidnem voluptati fore, 1 liope this union will afford us pleasure. Id. 
Matri puellam duno dedit. Ter. Fabio laudi datum est. Cic. Vitio id tibi uer- 
tunt. Plant. Jd tibi honbri hdbeiur. Cic. Mdturdvit collegie venire auxilio. Liv 
Cui hbno fuitf To whom was it an advantage f Cic. 

Remark 1. The verbs after which two datives occur, are sum, flo, do, d^no, 
duco, hdbeo, rSlinquo, trlhao, verlo; also curro, eo, millo, prdficiscor, venio, ajrpdno, 2». 
itieiio, cSdo, compdro, pateo, suppSdUo, emo, and some others. 

Kem. 2. The dative of the end or purpose is often used after these 
verbs, without the dative of the object; as, 

Kxem|>lo cs/yi/zwim, The ant is (serves for) an example. Hor. Absentmm 
dlvTsui fiu're. Liv. liHnpdt ])igii6ri paUhnina. Plant. Qme esui ti jibtu? 
Mini. Cell. Esse derlsni. To he a subject of ridicule. Tac. Keceptui edrdre) 
I'o sound a retreat. Cies. Aliquid doti dicare, To set out as dowry. Cic. 

Rkm. 3. {a.) The verb sum, with a dative of the end, may be va, 
lio’isly rendered ; as by the words brings, affords, serves, does, eto 
The sign for is often omitted Avith this dative, especially after sum 
•istead of it, as, or some other particle, may at times be used: as, 

20 


230 


SYNTAX.-DATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 


§228 


Ignivia erit tibi magno dedecori, Cowardice will bring great disgTace to yctt 
Cic. II(BC res est argumento, This thing is an ai-gument, or serves as an arm* 
mont. Id. //oc vitio mihidani^ This they set dow.i as a fault in me. ZM* 

vet fos curae lidbuit. Suet. Una res erat magno iisui.was of great use. 

Luoil. Quod tibi magnoitere cordi esg mlki vehenitnter displicet, What is a great 
pleasure, an object of peculiar interest to you, etc. Id. 

(b.) Sometimes the words Jit, able, readg, etc., must be supplied, especially 
before a gerund or a aerundive; as, Quum solvendo civitatefi non essent, .. . not 
able to pay. Cic. iJ'ivltes, qui dneri ferendo essent. Liv. Htue restinguendo 
igni f brent. Liv. Radix ejus est yQscQndo. Flin. 


Rem. 4. Instead of the dative of the end, a predicate nominative or accnstu- 
tive is sometimes used; as, Ndturd tu illi pater es, By nature you are hia 
Cither. Amor est exitium pecdri : or the purpose is expressed by the accusa¬ 
tive with ad or in; as, Alicui cdmes est ad helium. Cic. ^e Remis in clientelana 
(iicdOant. Gees.: or by the ablative with pro; as, Jnndcentia pro malivolentia 
duei caejni. Sail. Aleibus sunt arbores pro cubilibus. Cajs. 


Rem. 5. Instead, also, of the dative of the end or purpose, quo ? to what end? 
for what purpose? why? sometimes occurs, with an accusative, which gen- 
Brally depends on a verb understood, or with an infinitive or a clause; as. Quo 
tnihi fortunam, si non conceditur utif Hor. Quo tibi, Pasiphae, pretiosas suni^re 
festes.*’ Ovid. 


Rem. 6. After do and other similar active verbs an accusative of the purpose 
is found in apposition; as, Ldtini cdronam auream Jdvi donum in Cdpitmium 
mittunt. Liv. Alicui comitem esse datum. Cic. Cf. § 204, R. 1; and ^ 230, R. 2. 


Note. The dative, instead of the accusative, is sometimes used after the 
infinitive, Avhen a dative precedes, and the subject of the infinitive is omitted 
as, V'djis necesse est fortlhus esse viris. Liv. Maximo tibi et civi et dilci evaden 
contigti. Val. Max. See §§ 205, R. 6, and 239, R. 1. 


DATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 

§ Some particles are followed by tbe dative of the 

object j as, 

1. Some adverbs derived from adjectives; as, 

Prdpius Tiberi quam Thermopylis. Nep. Proxlme castris, Very near to the 
camp. Cses. Prdpius stabulis armenta tenerent. Virg. Congruenter n^urae, 
convenienterque vivere. Agreeably to nature. Cic. Epicumis quam sibi constan- 
ter convenienlerque dicut, non ICibdrat. Id. nimiani bene est. Afran. Mihi 

numquain in vita fuit melius. Hor. Vlvere "vitae hdminum dmlce. Cic. Bene 
mihi, bene vobis. Plant. So, !Mihi obviam venisti. Cic. In certdinina siwo com- 
minus ire viro. Sil. Queestdres provindix mihi preesto fuerunt. Cic. Samos es\ 
exadversum iilileto. App. 

Re^iark. Prdpius and proxime, like their primitive prdpe, are sometimes 
construed with a and the ablative; as, Prdpe a meis aedibus. Cic. Stellct 
cn^anies propius a tends. Id. A Sura proxime est PhiUscuvi, oqqndum Partkd^ 
rum. Piin. 

2. Certain prepositions, especiallv in comic writers; as, Mihi clam esi, It is 
unk lown to me. Plant. Contra ndbis. Id. But in such instances they seem 
rather to be used like adjectives. 

3. Certain interjections; as, Ileimihi! Ah me! Virg. Tie mihi! Wo is me 
Ter. Vte vutis esse J Liv. Vee misero mihi. Plaut Ilemtibi. Id. Ecce tibi. Cic. 

Note, (a.) The dative of the substantive pronouns seems sometimes nearly 
redundant, but it always conveys the expression of a lively feeling, and is 
^erefore termed ddtivus ethicus; as, 


§ 229 . 


SYNTAX.-ACCUSAITVE AFTER V^ERBS. 


231 


Fur mlhi es,.... in my opinion. Platxt. An ille mlhi liber, cui mulier mpHraf? 
Cic. Tonailium mihi eduxit. Id. Ubi mine nobis dens ille mdijister? Virt;. 
Ecce tibi oebosus! Cic. Hem tibi tdlentum arr/eiiti! Phllippivum est. Plant. S{ln 
IS sometimes subioined quite pleonastically to suns; as, Suo sibi gladio hunc 
jugulo. Plant, lynorans suo sibi servit pdtri. Id. Sibi suo tempdre. 

\b.) The fo.lowing phrases also occur with vdlo and a reflexive pronoim: 
fuid Ubi vis? what do you AvantV quid sibi iste vult? what does he want? quid 
vult sibi hcec bratio? what does this speech mean? quid hcec sibi dona vdlulU? 
\\hat is the meaning of these presentsV or, what is tlieh* object? 

ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 

§ 3^0. The object of a transitive verb is put in the accusa- 
th e; as, 

Legates mittunt, They send ambassadors. Caes. Animus mdret corpus, The 
mind moves the body. Cic. Pa veniam hanc. Grant this favor. Ter. Eum 
imitdti sunt. They imitated him. Cic. Piscem SyH venerantur. Id. 

Remark 1. A transitive verb, with the accusative, often takes a 
genitive, dative, or ablative, to express some additional relation; as, 

Te convinco amentias, I convict you of madness. Cic. Da. Vicum melioribus. 
Give place to your betters. Ter. Solvit se Teucria luctu, Troy frees hersoli 
from grief. Virg. See those cases respectively. 

Rem. 2. Such is the difference of idiom between the Latin and English languages, that 
many verbs considered transitive in one, are used as intransitive in the other. Ilenc*, 
In tran-slating transitive Latin verbs, a preposition must often be supplied in English; 
a.s, Ut me tavlret. That he should beware of me. Cic. On the other hand, many verba, 
which in Latin are intransitive, and do not take an accusative, are rendered into English 
by transitive verbs; as, Ille mVii favet. He favors me: and many verbs originally in¬ 
transitive acquire a transitive signification. 

Rem. 3. The verb is sometimes omitted:— 

1. To avoid its repetitiou; as, Eventum sendtus, quern (scil. dare) videbitur, 
dubit. Liv. 

2. The interrogative intenection gm’d? what? depends on a£s or censes. So 
also quid vero? quid igiturf quid ergo? quid enim? which are always followed 
by another question, and both questions may be united into one proposition, 
the first serving merely to introduce the interrogation. With quid jiostca? 
quid turn? supply seym^nr. With jmjc/ jMod, occurring in transitions, ditwra da 
to is omitted, but it may be rendered ‘ nay,’ ‘ nay even,’ ‘ bxit now,’ ‘ more¬ 
over,’ etc., without an interrogation.— Dlcam is also to be supplied with quid 
mtdta ? quid plura? ne malta; ne multis; ne plura. The infinitive dicere is also 
eometiraes omitted; as, Nimis multa vldeor de me. Cic. Perge rUiaua. Id. 

Rem, 4. The accusative is often omitted:— 

1. When it is a reflexive pronoun; as, Nox jn'cecipttai, scil. se. Vhg. Turn 
crai'a dvertit. Id. Eo Idcdtum, scil. me. Hor. 

The reflexives are usually wanting after dboPo, ahstineo, aermso, Mrpquo. (pquo, ag~ 
flSmSro, nii^eo, cSlSro, coiigdmhio^ contliiuo, itScllno, dccdquo, dcsino, rJiffUro, ffuro, 
Irumj/u, Jieclo, dejlecto, facesso, incipio, inrllno, insinno, irrumpo, jungo, Idvo, Icixo- 
Mnio, maturo. molllo, moveo, muto, pono, prrprlpVe prorumpo, (pidtio, rSmilto, retracto 
iSdOySisto, stahtilo, suppidito, tarda, tinea, tenda, trajlria. transmitlo, turbo, vdrij, verge, 
\trto, deverto, riverto, vestio, vibro; and more rarely after many others. 

2. When it is something indefinite, has been previously expressed in 
tase, or is easily supplied; as, Ego, ad quos scrioam, nescio, scil. lUeras. Cic. 
De quo et tecum egi dlllgenter, et scripn ad te. Id. Btne fecit Sltius. Id. Ducit 
h hestem, scil. exercitum. LlV. 


232 SYNTAX.-ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. § 23Q 

Rem. 5. An infinitive, or one or more substantive clauses, may 
supply the place of the accusative after an active verb ; as, 

Z>a mihi fallt-re. Hor. RtJdes luqui, reddts ridere decr.rum. Id. Ciipit 
me esse clenieiitem. Cic. Allirnlcnoi s gtatuerunt ut naves conscendereiit. Id. 
X'ertor ne a doetis repreliendar. Id.Kiue, Bacche, sunat. Oviil. Soinetiires 
both constructions are united; as, Di irain miserdiitur infau-m amborum^ et tan- 
to3 mortalibus esse l:\bbres. Vii^.— Kespectiiif^ the infinitive with and without 
E subject-accusative after an active verb, see § 270-273; and for the subjuno 
ti re after such vu'bs, see § 273. 

(a.) In such constructions, tlie subject of the dependent clause is snmetimsa 
put ir the accusative as tlie object of tlie leadinj^ verb; as, A7i.sh'Marcclluro, 
qnam tdnlus sit, for Nosti (pioui tardus sit Marcellus. Cic. Ilium, ui vivat^ 
^tant. Ter. At te e<jo J’dciam, ut ininus vdltns. Blaut. 

An ablative with de may also supply the place of the accusative, by ths 
ellipsis of some general word denoting things, f<t<ts, etc., modified by suen ab¬ 
lative; De ri’imblicd vestro paiicis (ici i/ie. Sail. Compare a similar omission 
of a siib^ ict modified by de and the ablative, § 209, K. 3, (2.) 

Rem. 6. The impersonal verbs of feeling, miseret, pcenitet, pudet^ 
tcedet, pXget, miserescit, rmseretur, and perkesutn est, are followed by 
an accusative of the person exercising the feeling, and a genitive of 
the object in respect to which it is exercised. Cf. § 215, (1.); as, 

Eoruin nos miseret. We pity them. Cic. The impersonal Veritum est also 
occurs with such an accusative; Quos non est veritum 2 >onere, etc. Cic. 

Rem. 7. Jurat, delecfat, fedlit, fugit, preeterit, and decet, with thsil 
compounds, take an accusative of the person; as, 

Te hlldri aninio esse t'alde me jurat. That you are in good spirits greatly 
delights me. Cic. Ffu/it me ad te scrlb- re. Cic. lllud alterum qunm sit difficile, 
te lum fugit. Id. Nec vero Ciesiirem fefellil. Cajs. Fads, ut te decet. Ter. 
So also when used personally; as, lhir\mm decent. Hor.; but decet often 

takes the accusative of the person with the infinitive; as, Ilanc mdculam noa 
dJecet eft’ugere. Ter.; and in comic writers a dative; as, Vobis ddet. Ter. 

For mea, tiia, sua, nostra, vestra, after refert and interest, see § 219, 11. 1; and for the 
ftccusative by attraction, instead of the nominative, see § 206, (6,) (b.) 

§ 330. Verbs signifying to name or call; to choose, render 
or constitute; to esteem or reckon, which in the passive voice 
have two nominatives, are followed in the active voice by two 
accusatives, oue of the object and the other of the predicate, 
Cf. § 210, 11. 3, (3.) ; as, 

Urbem ex Antidchi patris nomine Antiochiam vdedvit. He called the city An¬ 
tioch, etc. Just. Liidos /■{/(is me, You make game of me. Plaut. Me censii' 
lem fecistis. Cic. Irani bene Fnnius initium dixit insaniie. Id. Ancuni Mar- 
ciuin ])6pi'dus credrit. Liv. Sulpiciuin accusatureiii suum niim^rdbai, 

tacn competTtorem. Cic. Qttum vos testes hdbeam. Nep. 

Note 1. The following: are among the verbs included in this ru’e, viv. nppdiln, dlc 9 ^ 
nbmlno. nunrnpo. jidrhV/eo. salulo, srrtbo nnd iii.\rrib(i. rOro; rajiiii. c(iistUi(C, creo, JS' 
cltiio, ilellito. desiicno. dho, fac'-t, ejf'lrio, iiisiUiio, le^o, /irOdo, ruldo, rtnii irio, 

[iiuo, digimr. exisllmo, habto, jiidico, nuiniro, puto, rejerio, inteUigo, itivcrdo, se proB- 
tSie or jiro'sldre, etc 

NoTtc 2. An ablative Avitb ex occurs, though rarely, instead of the ■‘^cusa« 
tive of the object; as, Fortuna me, gui liber fueram, servum fecit, e summe 
infimum. ITaut. Cf. Qui recta prava fdciunt. Ter. 

Note 3. An infinitive may supply the place of the objective accusative; ae 
iii slinulasse rdca< C777«en. Ovid.:—and sometimes of the predicate accusative 


§231 


SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


233 


riso; as, Si repfrire vdcas amittSre certiiis; aut si scire ubi sit rSpSrlre vdcas. Id 
So also an acijective may supply the }*lace of the predicate accusative; as 
Prcebuit se digimm suis majorwus. Cic. Ciesd?’e7« certiorem fdciuni. Cajs. 

Remark 1. After verbs signifying to esteem or reckon, one of the 
aeciisatives is often the subject, and the other the predicate, of esse 
expressed or understood ; as, 

Eum Uvarum possumtts exisiimdre. Cic. Tdlem se imperatorom jn'Kouit. Nep. 
Fnzsta teeum, (pd mihi es co(/Hi(iis. Cic. Jlercurium omninm inveiitorein 
ferunt; hunc ridrum (d(iue itinevum diiceiw aybitrantur. Cies.; or an adjective 
supplies the place of the predicate accusative; as, Ne me exiUlJiidris ad nuinen- 
dum esse prOpeusiorem. Cic. 

Note 4. Instead of the predicate accusative, (1) pro with the ablative some¬ 
times follows jiulo^ duco, and hdbto, but denotes onl}* an approximation; ns, 
Alvj'dd j)ro certo hdbh'e or pt'dure. Ka prc falsis duck. Sail. AlUiuau pro hoste 
habere. Cses.—So also vi with the, ablative; as, Nihil printer virtikem in bonis 
hdbere. Cic. Alif/ueni in numcro hustiiiia dueere. Cic.—and the ablative with¬ 
out in; as, Lli vos ajf'lniinn loco ducerem. Sail.—So also e or ex with the abla- 
tivs; as, ( Cl) fdieret i/uod e rcpublica fidc(/?/e sua duceret. Liv.—Sometimes 
(2y the ijjenitive; as, Otficii duxit exordre filue patrevi. Suet. (Sec § 211, H. 8, (3.) 
Sc with a p;enitive or an ablative of price or value; as. Future dlipitm nihllo. 
Cic. Non hdbeo nauci Mursum augurem. Enn—and sometimes (3) a dative; as, 
Quaiulo tu me hdbes despicatui. Plant.:—or an adverb; as, Algre hdbuit, f Ilium id 
pro pdrente ausum. Liv. And (4) ad or with the accusative; as, ZxJca ad 
nibernacula Ze^e?’e. Liv. Aliquem in Patres legere. Id.: or (5) the genitive 
depending on the ablative of cause, manner, etc.; as, sei'vitutem deditiOnis 
nomine appellant. Caes. 

Rem, 2. IMany other verbs, besides their proper accusative, tako a 
second, denoting a purpose, time, character, etc. 

Such are do, tribuo, siiinOj peto, pono, adjungo^ ascrlbo, cognosco^ accio, Jingo, 
ngnlj'lco, etc.; as, 

Qudre ejus fugce Qoxxuiem me ad.jlingerem. Cic. ITdminum 6pinio socium me 
ascrlbit inis 'luudlbus. Id. Uuos ego sim tdiies jam dedignuta maritos. V'irg. 
Jlunc igitur rUgQm agnoscimus, gui Fhilippiim dedignaiur patrem? Curt. Flliam 
tuam mihi uxorem jjosco. Plant. I^etit hanc Sdtiirnia munus. Ovid. Such 
constructions may often be refeired to apposition, or to an ellipsis of esse. 

§ ^31. Verb.s of asking, demanding, and teaching, and celo 
(to conceal), are t olio wed by two accusatives, one of the person, 
the other of tlie thing; as, 

Hoc te vehementer rdgo. Cic. Illud te oro, ut, etc. Id. Fdgo te nummcs, 
I .ask you for money. !Mart. Posce deos veniam, Ask favor of the gods. Virg 
'/Mi's musicam d()c7ie/-d E[)amlnondam, When they shall read whc 
taught Epaminondas music. Nep. Autlgdnus Iter omnes cHat, Antigonus con¬ 
ceals his route from all. Id. Dcpreeuri deos mala. Sen. QuClidie Ccesar 
yEdous frumeiitum jlugltdre. Caes. ilulta deos drans. Virg. 

Rsm.‘RK 1. This rule include.^ the verbs of asking and demanding, 7?r<irRo, eJJSgVo, 
obsfcro, dro, exuro, con/i‘iido, ptrrontor, j>osco. riii>o$ro, consnio, pricor, dcjn’S.or, roga, 
and interidi'o, which, with the accu.sative of the per.son, take the accusative of 7ho neuter 

[ iTOnouns hoc. i'i, illiuJ. quod. quid, more frequently than that of a sub.staiitive , of teach- 
iig, ddceo. SdUcfo. deddrco. and cni lio. which last ha.s two accu.satives only in the poets, 
idnidnio and cousuto are rarely found with two accusatives; as, Consulan. hutic rern 
^nicos. riaut. Enin rein nos Idcus ndindnuit. Sail. 

Rem. 2. Instead of the accusative of the p(jrson, verbs of asking and de- 
iianding often take the ablative with ab or ex ; as, Non debebam abs to has llt^- 
ras poscere. Cic. Veniam ot'emus ab ipso. Virg. Mud vOlebam ex te percimtdri 
riauL 


20« 


234 


SYNTAX.-ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§232 


Rem. 3 (a.) Instead of the accusative of the thing, the ablative with de is 
loinetimes used; as, Sic ^go te eisdem de rebus interrdgem. Gic. De itiiifere 
hostiun sejuitiim ed6cet. Sail. Bassus nosier me de hoc libro celdrit. Cic. C''. ^ 229 
R. 5, (b.) —(/;.) Sometimes also instead of tlie accusative of the thing an infint 
tive, or an intini'.ive or subjunctive clause is used; as, Deos precdri dibetis, ut 
urbem defendant. Cic. Ut ddceam Ridluui posthac tacere. Id. Ddcui id nou 
fieri posse. Id. ewm qui vir Sex. Roscius fuerit. Id.—(c.) With verbp 

of teaching, the instrument by means of which the art is practised is put in 
tlie ablative; as, Allquem fldibus docere. Cic. Ducere dlUiuem armis, Liv. 
Literce may bs used either in the accusative or in the ablative; as, Te liicrcu 
doceo. Cic. Doctus Greeds lltens. Id. 

PiKM. 4. Some verbs of asking, demanding, and teaching, are not followed by two ac- 
cuBJitivcs; as, exl^o, pSto^ postulo, (/iifpro, scltor, sciscltor, which, with the accusative of 
the thing, take an ablative of the per.son with the preposition ab, de, or ex; imhuo, ?n- 
stltuo, instruo, etc., which are sometimes used with the ablative of the thing, generally 
w thout a preposition, and are sometimes otherwise construed ; as, Inst'ituSre aHquem 
ad<liceudum. Cic. 

Rem. 5. (a.) Many active verbs with the accusative of the person, 
take also an accusative denoting in what respect or to what degree 
the action of the verb is exerted. 

(6.) The accusative of degi'ee, etc., is commonl}’- nihil, a neuter pronoun, or 
a neuter adjective of quantity; as. Non quo me aliquid juedre jMsses. Cic. 
Pauca tempore mllites horiCttus. Sail. Id adjuta me. Ter. Neque est te fal-- 
lere quidquam. Virg. Cf. § 232, (8.) 

Rem. 6. By a similar construction, genus and secus, ‘ sex,’ are sometimes u&ed 
in the accusative, instead of the genitive of quality; as, Nullas hoc genus tigU 
tins vigildmint. Cell. So, Omnes muliebre secus. Suet. Cf. 211, R. 6, (4.) 

(1 .) Some neuter verbs are followed by an accusa¬ 
tive of kindred signification to their own; as, 

^ Yiiam jucundam vivere, To live a pleasant life. Plant. Mlrum somnidvi 
'lomnium, I have dreamed a wondei'iul dream. Id. Furere hunc furorein. 
Virg. Islam pugnara pumiaho. Plant. Pugndre dicenda Musis proelia. Hor. 
Lusum insdleniem ludere. Id. Si non servututem sendat. Plant. Uueror hand 
f dciles quQstxis. Stat. Jurdvi verissimwn jns^nrandum. Cic. Igndtas jubetlre 
vias. Val. Flacc. So, also, 7re exsequias. To go to a funeral. Ter. Jre suppe- 
tias. To go to one’s assistance. Ire iniitias. To deny. This expression is 
eq^uivalent to and may like that take an accusative; as. Si hoc unum 

adjuiixero, qwoa nemo eat inf itias. Nep.: or the accusative with the infinitive; 
as, Nd/ue hfitias tmus Siciliam nostram prbvinciam esse. Liv. Ut suum gau- 
dium gnuderemus. Cad. ad Cic. Frdflnsd magnum iter. Cic. PoUuj: Ttquc 
riditque viam. Virg. This accusative is usually qualified by an adjective. 

(2.) Verbs commonly neuter are sometimes used transitively, 
and are then followed by an accusative. 

Accusatives are thus used with 6leo and sdpio, and their compounds, ridUleo, 
r^slpio; as, Olet unguenta. He smells of perfumes. Tei*. peregilnum, 

To have a foreign smell. Cic. Ordtidnes redolentes antiquitatem. Id. McUa 
herbam earn sdpiuut, The honey tastes of that herb. Plin. Uva picem reslpitm. 
Id. So, Siiio hondres. Cic. Carnem pluit. Liv. Claudius a]eam studidsisslme 
hidt. Suet. Erumpd'e diu coercitam Irani in hostes. Liv. Libros evlgildre. OvicL 
Proetre verba. Liv. Nec vox homlnem s6nat. Virg. Suddre mella. Id. Morien- 
tem nomine cldmat. Id. Qiiis post vlna grdvem miMtiam aut pauperiem crepati 
llor. Omnes una mdnet nox. Id. Jngrdti dnimi crimen horreo. Cic. Ego meat 
.fortur as. Plant. Vlvd'e Bacchanalia. Juv. Pastdi'em saltdrei uti Cy- 
clopa, rdgdbat. Hor. So the passive; Nunc agrestem Cyclopa m&cdur. Id. 
Xerxes quum m^e amljuldvisset, terram ndvigasset. Cic. Qui stadium currit. Id, 
Vummunia jura migrdrs. Id. Te v6lo coUdqui. Plaut. Ea dissh'lre mdlui. Cio. 


§233. 


SYNTAX.-ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


235 


Cfirydon ard^hat Alexin. Virg. Stygias juravUmus undas. Ovid. Ndvtgat aequor 
Virg. Currimus aequor. Id. Pascuntur sylvas. Id. 

Note 1. Accusatives are found in like manner after ambulo^ calleo, dSlfo, SquXto, fieo> 
^avdfo, gSmo, glorior^ horreo, Icrtor, latro, ndlo, palleo, paveo, pSreo, dSpSreo, prQcCdo 
quSror, riUeo, slleo, sibllo, taceo, trSino, trSpido, vado^ vSnio, etc. 

(3.) Neuter verbs and sometimes adjectives also may be fol¬ 
lowed by an accusative denoting in what respect, or to what tfo- 
gree, the feeling, condition, etc., is manifested; as, 

Nihil Inhofo. Cic. Num id lacrtmat virgof Does the maid weep on that rvo 
countV Ter. Malta alia peccat. Cic. Quicquid dt’l'irant reges, pleclwUui' 
Adiivi. llor. Nec tu id imllgndri posses. Liv. lllud 7nihi loetnndum video. Cio. 
Illud va/de iibi assentior. Id. Idem gloridi'i. Id. Hajc gldrians. Liv. Hoi. 
stude'. unum. Hor.—So, Id dp^ram do, I strive for this. Ter. Conslliam petit, 
quid tibi sim auctor. Cic. Quod quidnin auetdres sunt, Which is attesti.'d by 
some authors. Liv. Nil nostn miserere'? Virg.—Nihil Romance plebis sTinilis. 
Liv. Sendtus nihil sane intentus. Sail. These limiting accusatives have com¬ 
monly the force of adverbs, particularly nihil, which is used like an em’phatio 
wn in the sense of ‘ in no way,’ ‘ in no respect.’ So non nihil, ‘ to some extent,’ 

in some measure.’ 

Note 2. In the above and similar examples, the prepositions ob, propter, per, nd, etc., 
may often bo supplied. This construction of neuter verbs is most common with the 
neuter accusatives id, quid, quidquam, Sdlquid, quicquid, quod, nihil, nonnXhil, Idem, 
illud, tantum, quantum, unum, multa, pauca, alia, cStSra, omnia, etc. Cf. § 256, It. 16, N. 

§ ^33. Many verbs are followed by an accusative depend¬ 
ing upon a preposition with which they are compounded. 

(1.) Active verbs compounded with trans, ad, and circura, have 
sometimes two accusatives, one depending upon the verb, the othei 
upon the preposition; as, 

Omneni equUdtum pontem transducit. He leads all the cavalry over the bridge, 
Cffis. Agesllaus Hellespontum cdpias trdjecit. Nep. Petreius jusjurandum ad 
Xqit Afranium. Cses. Roscillum Pompeius omnia sua prjesidia circumduxit. Id 

Pontus scopulos supei'jdcit undam. Virg. So, also, adverto and indueo with 
dnimum; as. Id dnimum advertit. Caes. Id quod animum induxerat paulisper 
non tenuit. Cic. So, also, injicio in Plautus —Pgo te mdnum injlciam. 

(2.) Some other active verbs take an accusative in the passive 
voice depending upon their prepositions; as, 

Mdgicas accingier axiQ%, To prepare oneself for magic arts. Virg. In prof’O 
writer's the ad is in such cases repeated; as, accingi ad consuldtum. Liv, 
Clasfis circumvehitur arcem. Id. Quod anguis ddmi vectem circumjectus J'uisset 
Cic. Irocum prcetervectus sum. Id. 

13.) Many neuter verbs, especially verbs of motion, or cf rest in a 
place, when compounded with prepositions which govern an accusa¬ 
tive, become transitive, and accordingly take an accusative; as, 

Gontes qtue mare illud adj&cent. The nations which border upon that sea. Nep. 
Chiq'iltdre agmen. Curt. Incedunt moestos 16x>‘)s. Tac. Transilui flammas. Ovid. 
Succedere tecta. Cic. Luddrum diebus, quv cognitlonem intervenerant. Tac. 
^dire prdvinciam. Suet. Caveat ne proeliuni ineat. Cic. Ingi'edi Iter pedibus, 
Cic. Epieuri horti quos mddo prceteriodmus. Id. 

Note. To this rule belong many of the compounds of ambiilo, cSdo, curro, eo, SquXto 
^uo, gr&dicr, labor, no and ndto, rlpo, salio^ scando, v&do, vehor, vSnio, vdlo cttfto 
ilie.:o, sUdec sistc, ^to. etc., with the rvepositionfl included in i 224, and #ith ex. 


236 


SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE AFTER VERBS. 


§234 


Remark 1. Some neuter verbs compounded with prepositions 
which govern an ablative, in like maimer become transitive, and are 
"ollowed by an accusative; as, 

Neminem conveni, I met with no one. Cic. Qui societatem coieris. Id. 
Aversai i hondres. Ovid. Ursi arbdretn dversi derepunt. Plin. Edormi crapulam. 
Cic. y:V//-ess 2 <s exsilium. Tac. ErddiUjue eeler Vir^. Kxcedere numd 

ntin. 'I'ac. Alci/ e limen. Ter. Tibur «</«« fertile prcejiaunt. Hor. 

Ri'::\r. 2. After verbs both active and neuter, compounded with 
{)reposltions which take an accusative, the preposition is often npeat- 
cd, or one of similar signification is used ; as, 

Gre-nr se ad neminem ndjunxit. Cic. Mtdfifudineni trans Phennm in Gallinm 
tramducere. Cjcs.—I n Galliam innlsit AntOnius. Cic. Ad me ad'ire qiiosdnm 
meinlni. Id. Ortdur ph'(Ujrat per aniinos hOuilnum. Id. Ne in senatum aeeede- 
rem. Id. ad teinplum incessit. \arg. .Ju.xta genitorem adstnt Ldvinia Id. 

Fates extra quos etjehU non passim. Cic. A dative instead of the accusati\T0 
often follows such compounds, according to § 224. Circuin is not repeated. 

Note. Some verbal nouns and verbal adjectives in hundm are 
followed by an accusative, like the transitive verbs from which they 
arc derived; as, 

Quid llhi hue receptio ad ie est meum virum ? Wherefore do you receive mv 
husband hither to you? Plant. Quid tibi, mdlian, me, aut quid ego again, curdilo 
’st? Id. Quid tlbi hanc udltio estf Id. Quid ilbi hanc ndtio est, inquam, amicara 
meam? Quid tlbi hanc dUjlto tactio ’st? Id. Hanno vltdbundus castra hostium 
consiilesque. Liv. ^Ilthridates Rdmanum meditabundus bellum. Just. Mira- 
bundi vanam speciem. Liv. Poqmldbundits agros. Sisenn. Camificem imdgina- 
hundus. App. 

§ 334. A verb in the passive voice has the same govern¬ 
ment as in the active, except that the accusative of the active 
voice becomes the nominative of the passive. 

Note 1. The accusative of the person wdth the infinitive, after verbs of saying 
and commanding, may become the subject of the passive voice; as, Active, 
IHcoYogfiva esse justum; —Passive, Rex dlcltur Justus esse. Act. Jubeo te re¬ 
tire;—Pass. Juberis redlre : the construction in the passive being the same as 
though regent and te had depended immediately upon elico and ;«o€ 0 .—So, also, 
when the accusative of the person is the object of the verb and the infinitive 
stands as the accusative of the thing. Cf. § 270, N. 

I. "When a verb, which in the active voice takes an accusative 
both of the iierson and of the thing, is changed to the passive form, 
the accusative of the person becomes the nominative, and the accusa¬ 
tive of the thing is retained ; as, 

Rlgdius est sententiam, He was asked his opinion. Liv. Tnferrdgdtus causam. 
Tac. Sf’gi'tes aliinentayiie debita dives poscehdtur humus. Ovid. Iklotus diceri 
gaudet 1 micas nidtiiro virgo. I lor. Omnes belli artes eductus. Liv. Nesne hoc 
teldtos tarn diu f Ter. Idulta in extis vidnemur. Cic. 

Note 2. The accusative of the thing after doctus and Cffoc/Ms is rare; and 
after cHdri it is generally a neuter pronoun; as hoc or la oelabar; of this I v/a^ 
kept in ignorance; but it is found also with the person in the dative; as. Id 
Alcibiadi diulins ccldri non pdtnit. Nep. Alcib. 6. Celo, and especially its pas* 
^ve, generally takes de with the ablative. 

Remark 1. (a.) and ea:tio, though they do not take two accusatives 
in the active voice, are sometimes followed by an accusative of the thing in 


§ 235. SYNTAX.—ACCUSATITE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. 23? 


the passive; as, Indtiitur atras vestes, She puts on sable garments. 0\id 
Thoraca indutus. Virg. Elxuta est Roma senectain. Mart. So inducor and cirh 
foi'; as, Fermm cinyitur. V’^irg. So recinyitur unguein. Ovid. 

{b.) When two accusatives follow an active verb compounded with iravs 
the passive retains that wliich depends upon thspreposition; as, Btlyob Rhenum 
anViqultus (ransducti. Gees. 

Rem. 2. The future passive participle in the neuter gender with est, is some¬ 
times, Ihougli rarely, fialoweil by an accusative; :is, Multa ndois rebus yuum sit 
iyendum. Lucr. Quain (viain) nobis inyrediendum est. Cic. 

II. Adjectives, verbs, and perfect participles, are jometimes fnl* 
lowed by an accusative denoting the part to which their significatioa 
relatog; as, 

Nidus membra. Bare as to his limbs. Virg. Os humeros( 7 ?te deo simiUs. Id. 
ClOri genus. Tac. Tribuni suam weem anxii. Liv. Tremit artus. VTrg. Cetera 
parce puer bello. Id. Sibila colla tumentem. Id. Expleri inentem neqidl. Id. 
Gi'yntus eimitur octilos. Otid. Pirti scuta Luhlci. Virg. ColUs frontem Uniter 
fasUyatus. Cais. Aniimun incensus. Liv. Oblitiis faciein suo crudre. Tac. 

Rkmauk 1. In this construction an ablative is often joined with tlie perfect 
pai’ticijde; as, Miles frnctus membra labore. Ilor. Dexterum genu lapKle 
ictus. Suet. Adversum femur tragula Liv. 

Rem. 2. This is a Greek construction, and is usually called the limiting or 
Greek accusative. It is used instead of an ablative of limitation, (§ 250,) and 
occurs most frequently in poetry. 

Rem. 3. A limiting accusative instead of the ablative is found also in a few 
ordinary expressions, as in pariim {for partem), vicem, maynani maxlmam 
instead of maynd or maxima ex parte, or the adverb fere; as. Maxi- 
mam partem lacte vlvunt. Caes. Maynam partem ex iambis iwstra constat brdtio. 
Cic. Livy has mayna pars, viz. Numidfe, magna pars agrestes.—So cetera and 
reZ?$'?irt are joined to adjectives in the sense of ceteris, ‘ for the rest,’ ‘in other 
respects ’; as, Proxlmum reynum, cetera eyreyium, ab und parte hand satis 
p!''^speru7n fuit. Liv. So cetera cetera 0(J/u<s. A te bis terve summura 

literas accepi. Cic.—So, also, in the expressions id tempoids; id, hoc or Idein 
oetdtis, illud hone, for eo temp&re, ed cetdte, etc.; id genus, omne genus, quod genus. 

III. Some neuter verbs which are followed by an accusative, are 
used in the passive voice, the accusative becoming the subject, ac¬ 
cording to the general rule of active verbs; as, 

Tertia vivitur cetas. Ovid. Bellum mllJtdbltur. Hor. Dorm\iur hiems. Mart. 
Multa percantur. Cic. AdlUir Gnossius Minos. Sen. Ne ab omnibus circumsis- 
UrHur. Ctes. Jlostes invddi posse. Sail. Campus dbllur dqud. Ovid. Flurca Uu 
euntur yrulice. Cic. Jda res siletur. Id. 

ACCUSATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. 

§ (1.) Twenty six prepos4ions are followed by the 

accusative. 

These are &d, tdversus or ndversum, ant^, Hpud, circa, or circum, circiter, els or citrl 
contra, ergd, extra, infra, intSr, intra jtixta 9b, pSnSs, pSr, post, ponS, preetSr, pi5p2 
froptir, sScwidion, supra, trans, ultra; as. 

Ad templum rum ceqiux Palladis ibant, —to the temple. Virg. Adversus hostes, 
Against the enemy. Liv. Germdni qui cis Rhenum incdlunt ,—this sitle the Rhine. 
Cses. Quum tantum r'isideat intra rniiros rrulli. Cic. Frincipio rerum imperiwn 
^nes reyes erat. Just. Templum pdnam propter dqr am. Virg. Inter dyerulum, 
vd. Ante ddmandum. Id. Respecting the signification of some of the preced. 
Ing prepositions see ^ 195, R. 6, etc. 


238 SYNTAX.-ACCUSATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. § 2^5. 


Rkmarr 1. C5s is generally used with names of p. Aces; citra with other 
words also; as, Cis Taui'um. Cic. Cis Pddum. Liv. Paucos cis menses. Plant. 
(Xtra VHinm. Cic. Citra sdtietdtem, Not to satiety. Col. Citra j'dtlydtidnenu 
Cels. Citra Trdjdna teinpdra. Ovid. 

Rem. 2. Inter., signifying between., applies to two accusatives jointly, and 
Bonietimes to a single plural accusative; as. Inter me et Sdpionem. Cic. Jnt^r 
ndtos et pdrenJtes. Id. Inter nos, Among oursel/es. Id. Inter faU drios, Among 
the scythe-makers. Cic. When it denotes time it signifies during, and more 
rarelv'ot/ iis,. Inter ipsum pugnoe tempus. Liv. Inter coenam. Cic. 

Rem. ft. Ante and post are commonly joined with concrete ofhcial titles, 
vhen used to indicate time, rather than with the corresponding abstract nouns; 
as, ante or ^mt Clch'bnem consulem, rather than ante or post cousuliitum Cite- 
rOnis. 

(2.) In and suh, denoting motion or tendency, are followed by tbe 
accusative; denoting situation, they are followed by the ablative; as. 

Via ducit in urbem. The way conducts into the city. Virg. Noster in te dinor, 
Cic. OdUmadii epigrnmma in Cleom])rdtum est —on or concerning Cleombrotus. 
Id. Exerdtus sub jugum missus est, 'I'lie anuy was sent under the yoke. Cajs. 
Magna mei sub terras ibit imago. Virg. Mhtid in urbe. In the midst of the 
city. Ovid. In his fuil Ariomstus. Cacs. Bella sub Ilidcis mcenibus gerire. 
To wage war under the Trojan walls. Ovid. Sub nocte silenti. Virg. 

Rem. 4. The most common significations of in, with the accusative, are, 
into, to, towards, until, for, against, about, concerning, —with the ablative, in, on, 
upon, among. In some instances, in and s^b, denoting tendency, are followed 
by the ablative, and, denoting situationj by the accusative; as. In conspectu 
meo audet venire. Phasd. Ndtidnes quae in amici tiam pdpuli Romani, dltionem- 
qve essent. Id. Sub jugo dictator hostes mlsit. Liv. Bostes sub montem conse^ 
disse. Cass. 

Rem. 5. In and sub, in different significations, denoting neither tendency noi 
situation, are followed sometimes by the accusative, and sometimes by the 
ablative; ?iS, A7m>r crescit inhbrAS. Ovid. Bostllem in modum. Cic. Quod in 
bdno servo did posset. Id. Sub ed conditione. Ter. Sub poena mortis. Siiet. 

Rem. 6. In expressions relating to time, sub, denoting at or in, usually takes 
the ablative; as. Sub adcentu Romdndrum. Liv. Sub luce. Ovid. Sub teripdre. 
Lucan. Denoting near, about, just before or just after, it takes the accusative; 
as,lucem. Virg. lurnlna prima. Hor. Sub hoc herus inquit. Id. 

Rem. 7. In is used with neuter adjectives in the accusative in forming ad¬ 
verbial phrases; as. In unlversum. In general. Intotuni, Wholly. So, ?n plenum; 
inincertum; iniantum; in quantum; inmajiLs; in melius; in omnia, in all re¬ 
spects, etc. 

(3.) Super, when denoting place or time, is followed by the accusa¬ 
tive, and sometimes poetically by the ablative ; but when it signifies 
on, about, or concerning, it takes the ablative. With the accusative 
super signifies over, above, besides or in addition to; with numerals, 
more than; as, 

Super Idbentem culmlna tecti, Gliding over the top of the house. Virg. Super 
tres mddios. Liv. Super vujrbum etiam fdmes ajf'ecit exercitum. Id. Super 
tbnero prosternit gramine corpus. He stretches his body on the tender grass 
Virg. Multa super Priamo 7'6gitans super Hectore multa, .... concerning Priam 
etc. Id. 

Rem. 8. The compound dhUper is found with the accusative, and insuper 
w^ith the accusative and the ablative. 

(4.) Subter generally takes the accusative, but sometimes, in 
poetry, the ablative; as, 

Sfibtei terras. Under the earth. Liv. Subter dentd testudine. Virg. 


§ 236. SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE OF TIME AND SPACE. 239 


(5.) Clam is followed by either the accusative or the ablati /e; as, 

Clnmvos, Without yoiir knowledge. Cic. patrem. Ter. C/am niatrem 

iTiam. Plant. Clim vobls. Ca;s. Neque potest elnm me esse. Plaut. Clam 
DXv^re mea. Id. Its diminutive clanculum is once followed by the accusative, 
clanculum patres. Ter. 

Kem. 9. The adv<^rbs versus or versum and usque are sometimes annexed 
to an accusative, principaiiy of place, which depends on ad or m, and sometimoe 
the preposition is omitted; as. Ad Oceanum veisus prOfldsci. Cses. Fugatn 
ad se versum. Sail. In Galliam versus castra niOvere. Id.— Usque ad Niimon- 
tiain. Cic. Usque in Pamphyliam. Id. Ad noctem usque. Plaut.—Bruiidiisiuin 
versus Cic. Tenninos usque Llbyce. Just. Usque Ennarn profecti. Cic Verstn 
is always placed after the accusative.— Usque occurs more rarely with sub and 
trnns with the accusative; as, Trans Alpes usque transferiur. Cic. Usque 
sub extremum brumm imbrem.— re7’SMS also rarely follows ai, and usqm 
either ab or ex with the ablative; as, Ab septemtriune versus. Van*. A fund^ 
mento usqi'^z mocisti mare. Plaut. Usque ex ultima Syria. Cic. Usque a pueritia. 
Ter. Usque a Rbmulo. Cic. Usque a mane ad vesperum. Plaut. 

Rem. j.0. Prepositions are often used without a noun depending upon them 
but such noun may usually be supplied by the mind; as, post a««a8, 

i. e. post id tempus. Cic. Circum Cbucordice, sell, cedem. Sail. 

Rem. 11. The accusative, in many constructions, is supposed to depend on a 
preposition understood; as. Quid dpus cst plural i. e. pi-opter qidd? AvhyV i. q. 
curf ox qudref Cic. So, Quid me osde/de/n Id. But it is not easy, in every 
case, to say what preposition should be supplied. For the accusative without 
a preposition after neuter verbs, see § 232. For the accusative of limitation, 
see § 234, II. 

ACCUSATIVE OF TIME AND SPACE. 

§ Nouns denoting duration of time, or extent of space, 

are put, after adjectives and verbs, in the accusative, and some¬ 
times after verbs in the ablative; as, 

Acc. Appius ccecus multos annos fuit., Appius was blind many years. Cic. 
Biduum Z,d^c/?c^ce ywi. Id. Dies tbtos (Ze mViute dissemint. Id. Te jam annum 
audientem Crdtippiiin. Id.— Ddreverunt intercdldrium quinque et quadraginta 
dies lonyum. Id.— Quum dbessem ab Amdm> iter unius diei. Id. Tres pdteat eali 
tpdtium non amplius ulnas. Virg. (Cf. § 256, R. 6.) A portu stadia centum et 
vTginti processimus. Cic.— Duas fossas quimlecim pedes Idtas perduxit., —two 
ditches fifteen feet broad. Cces. Fossae quinos pedes alUe. Id. Fdrdmlna kmga 
pedes tres semis. Cato. Orbem dledrium crassum digitos sex fdcito. Id.— 
Abl. Vixit annis undetriginta. Suet. Quatuordecim annis exsihum tdlh-dviL 
Tac. J'riginta annis vixit Pancetius. Cic.— Exercitus Rdmdnus tridui itinere ab~ 
fuit ab amne Tdnai. Tac. jEsculdpii templum quinque, millibus passuum dis- 
tans. Liv. 

Note 1. The ablative denoting extent of time and space is rarely used by 
Cicero, and less frequently than the accusative by other writers. 

Note 2. The accusative denoting extent of space sometimes follows the ad¬ 
verbs Zow^c, aZ^e, etc.; aSj Otmpestris Idcus alte duos pedes et semissem 
diendus est. Colum. Vercinyddinx Idcum casUis dellyit ab Ava. ico lonye millia 
passuum seJecim. Caes. 

Note 3. (a.) Old, in reference to the time which a person has lived, is 
expressed in Latin by ndlus, with an accusative of the time; as, Decesdt 
Alexander mensem unam, annos ires et tryiniandtus. Just. (6.) A person’s 
age may also be expressed without ndttes by a genitive of the time closely 
connected with his name, according to § 2il, R. 6; as, Alexander annomm 
trium et trlyiida decessit. (c.) Older or younger than a certain age is ex- 
oresaod by prefixing to the accusative or genitive of the defii dte ago the ad- 


240 


SYNTAX.—ACCUSATIVE OP PLACE. 


§237 


yerbs plm or minuSy or the adjectives major or minor, either with or without 
quam. See § 256, R. 6 and 7. —Sometimes, also, the ablative depends on the 
comparative; as, Minor v'lf/inti (/ninrjue au\m nafus. Nep. d/iwor triginta annis 
ndtu. Cic. Bieimio quam nos major. Id. Cf. § 256, K. 16. (1.) 

Remark 1. Nouns denoting time or space, used to limit other nouns, are puj 
In the genitive or ablative. See § 211, R. 6. 

Rem 2. A term of time not yet completed may be expressed by an ordina 
number, as, A’os vices]mum diem pdtimur hehesiere dciem hontm amtlri- 
tdiis. Cic. Punlco hello duodecimum annum lldlia urebdtur. Liv. Ilcnce in 
tlie passive. Nunc tertia vivitur setas. Ovid. 

Rem. 3. The accusative or ablative of space is sometimes omitted, while a 
genitive depending on it remains; as, Castra quoe dberant bidui, scil. 
ipdiio. Cic. 

Rem. 4. To denote a place by its distance from anotner, tne ablative is 
commonly used; as, Millibussex a C.esdns casiris consrdit. Caes.; but 
sometimes the accusative; as, Tria 2 )assuum millia ab ipsa urbe castra pdsuit. 
Liv. The only words used for this purpose in the ablative alone are spaiio and 
interrallo ; as, Quindec.m ferine mdlium spatio castra ab Turento pOsuit. Id. 

Note 4. For abhinc and a cardinal number, with the accusative or ablative 
of past time, see § 253, R. 2. For the ablative denoting diflerence of time or 
space, see § 256, R. 16. 

Rem. 5. A preposition is sometimes expressed before an accusative of time 
or space, but it generally modifies the meaning; as. Quern per dScem annoa 
aluivms, .... during ten years. Cic. 

Rem. 6. When the place from which the distance is reckoned is not men¬ 
tioned, ab is sometimes placed before the ablative of distance, as if this de¬ 
pended on the preposition; as, A millibus passuum duobus castra qidsuemint. Two 
miles from the place, or, Tavo miles off. Cajs. 

^ Rem. 7. An accusative of xceiyht also occurs when expressed by libram or 
libras in connection with pondo. Cf. ^ 211, R. 6. (4.) 

ACCUSATIVE OF PLACE. 

§ After verbs expressing or implying motion, the 

name of the town in which the motion ends is put in the accusa¬ 
tive without a preposition ; as, 

Rrijidus Carthagiuem rediit, Regulus returned to Carthage. Cic. Capuam 
flectii Uer, He turns his course Capua. Liv. Calqmrnius Kbm-Mii prdjiciscl^ 
tur. Sail. Romam Si'at nuncidtum. Cic. 

Reaiark 1. The accusative, in like manner, is used after iter with sum, hd^ 
beo, etc.’, as. Iter est mild Laniivium. Cic. Ccesdrejn iter /iditVe Capuam. Id 
And even after sum alone; as, Omnia ilia municipuf, quee sunt a Vibone Bnindl- 
sium. Cic. So Avith a verbal noun; as, Adventus Romam. Liv. Reditus Ito- 
mam. Cic. 

Rem. 2. {a.) The preposition to be supplied is in, denoting to or fn«o, which 
Is sometimes expressed; as. In Ephesum dbii. Plant. Ad, before the name 
cl a town, denotes direction tOAvards it; as. Iter dingere ad Mutlnam. Cic.; and 
also its vicinity; as, Adolcscentiilus miles prdfectus sum ad Capuam; i. e. in cas¬ 
tra ad Capuam. Id. So, Leelius cum classe ad Brundisinm venit. Cajs. Cesar 
ad CcmeA'a.'n pex'venit. Id. Quum ego ad Ileracleam accederem. Cic. 

(6.) When xirbs, opjyidum, Idctis, etc., follow the names of toAAuis as apposi¬ 
tions, they generally take a pr^osition; as, Demdrdtus s« centulit Tarquinws, in 
urhem Etrv.i'iae. fl orentissimam. Cic. Ad Cirtam oppidum itei’ constituunt. Sail.— 
So also when the name of the tOAvn is qualified by an adjective; as, Magnum 


§ 238. SYNTAX.-ACCUSATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES, ETC. 241 

iter ad doctas prdflcisci cdgor Athenas. Prop. But the poets and later prose 
writers sometimes omit the preposition; as, Ovid, Her. 2, 83. 

Rem. 3. Instead of the accusative, a dative is sometimes, though rarely 
used; as, Carthagini nuncios mittam. llor. Cf. § 225, IV. and R. 2. 

Re.ai. 4. Domus in both numbers, and rus in the singular, are put 
in the accusative, like names of towns; as, 

Ite domum. Go home. Virg. Galli domos oMerant, —had gone home. Liv. Rua 
\7)0, I will go into the country. Tei*. 

Kote. (a.) When ddmus is limited by a genitive or a possessive adjective 
pronoun, it sometimes takes a preposition: with other adjectives, the preposi¬ 
tion js generally expressed; as. Nan introeo in nostram domum. Plaut. Venisse 
in domum Leccae. Cic. Ad earn domum prdfecti sunt. Id. In domos siiperas 
scandcre cura fuit. Ovid._ Rarely, also, when not limited; as, Socrates phildsd^ 
phiam in domos introduxit. Cic. So, ICirern suum. App., or ad Idrem suum. Cic. 
Caricas in Albense rus inferre. Plin. Quum in sua rura venerunt. Cic. With 
the possessor’s name in the genitive, either ddimim or in ddmum is used; as, 
Potnpdnii ddmum venisse. Cic. In ddmum JVIcbIU tela inferuntur. Liv. 

(6.) Domus is sometimes used in the accusative after a verbal noun; as, 
Ddmum reditionis spe suhldtd. Ctes. So, Itio ddmum. Cic. Concursus ddmum. 
Caes Cf. R. 1. 

Rem. 6. (a.) Before the names of countries and of all other places in which 
the motion ends, except those of towns, and ddmus and ru^ the preposition is 
commonly used; as. Ex Asia transis in Europam. Curt. Te in Epirum venisse 
gaudeo. Cic. But it is sometimes omitted; as, Deveniunt speluncam. Virg. 
Deyenere locos. Id. Tumulum anfiquce Cereris sedemque sacrdtam ventmus. Id. 
Ibis Cecrdpios portus. Ovid. So, also, before names of countries, especially 
(hose ending in ?/s; tis, uEgyptus, Bospdrus, Chersdnesus, Epirus, Peldponnesus, 
etc. So, also, Illyricum p-dfectus. Cses. Macedoniam pervenit. Liv. Africaaa 
translturus. Id. So, Tacitus construes even names of nations, when used, as 
they often are, for those of countries; as. Ductus inde Cangos exercUus. Iberos 
ad patrium regnum pervddit. So, Virgil, Nos Ibimus Afros.—Pliny has. Insulas 
Rubri Aldris ndvigant. 

{h.) Before the names of small islands the preposition is frequently omitted; 
as, Pausdmam cum classe Cyprum miserunt. : but rarely before the names 
of the larger islands; as, Sardinia, Britannia, (Jreta, Euboea, Sicilia. 

(c.) Before accusatives of any words denoting locality after verbs of motion, 
the poets omit the preposition; as, Italiam— Ldvinidque venit litora. Virg.— 
The old accusative j dras is used, like names of towns, to denote the place 
whither, while ydm denotes the ^\q.c,q where; as, Vdde foras. Mart. Exit f5- 
ras Plaut. 

ACCUSATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS 
AND INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 938* 1. («.) The adjectives propior and proximus, with 
their adverbs propius and proxi'^e, like their primitive prope^ 
are often joined with the accusative; as. 

Ipse propior mo.item svx)s colldcat. Sail. Crassus nroximus mare Oceanuna 
\iemdrat. Cies.— Libyes propius mare AMcum dgiidoant. Sail. Proxime His- 
pani.nn Mauri sunt. Id. 

{b.) The adverbs pnidie and postrldie are also often followed by the accusa¬ 
tive; OH, Prldie eum diem. Cic. Pridieidus. Id. Postrldie ludos. Id .—(c.) An 
Bccasative sometimes follows intus and cdndnm as, Intus domum. Plant. 
Argestes cdminus Ire sues, soil. in. Prop. 

n 


U2 


SYNTAX.-SUBJECT-ACC DSATIVE. 


§239 


Remark 1. The accusative with prldie and postrndie is ^y some referred to 
mte and post understood. For the eenitive after these wcids, see ^ 212, R. 4 , 
N. 6.—Respecting versus, usque, exaaversus (-urn) and secus with the accusative, 
«ee § 195, K 3: and ^ 235, R. 3. 

Rem. 2. The adverb bene, by the elipsis of vdlere juheo, is sometimes followed 
by the accusative in fonns of drinking health; as, Bene vcs, bene nos, bme to 
Wne me, iejie nos/7’a7?i e/irtm Stephanium! Plaut. Bene Jlcssalam, a health to 
Messala. Tibull. It is also construed with the dative. See ^ 228, 1. 

2. In exclamations, the noun or pronoun which marks the dbjed 
o/* the feeling is put in the accusative either with or without the inter¬ 
jections, 0! ah I lieu! eheu! ecce ! enl hem! pro! or vtc.'as, 

En midtuor dras! ecce duas tibi Daphni! Behold four altars! lo, two for 
thee, Daphnis! Virg. Eccum! eccos! eccillum! for ecce eum! ecce eos! ecce 
fl/ofnPlaut. 0 prcecldrum custodem ! Cic. Ileumeinfelicem! Ter. Pro Dehm 
hdmrnumque iidemX Cic. Ah me, me! Catull. Eheu me misemim !'Her. Hem 
ttstutias! Id. Vcete! Plant. Vceme! Sen. Mish'amme! Ter. lldmlnem grd- 
cem et civem egregium ! - Cic. Cf. ^ 228, 3. 

Note. The accusative after interjections is supposed to depend on some 
verb of emotion to be supplied. 


SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 

§ ^30. The subject of the infinitive mood is put in the ac¬ 
cusative; as, 

Pompeium id ferre constdbat, That Pompeytook that ill, was evident. 
Cic. Eos hoc nomine appelldri fas est. Id. Miror te ad me nihil scribire, 
I wonder that you do not write to me. Cn. Mag. in Cic. Campos jvbet esse 
pdientes. Virg. 

Note 1. In historical writing the present Infinitive has sometimes its subject in the 
nominative. Cf. § 209, R. 5. 

Remark 1. The subject of the infinitive is omitted when it precedes in the 
genitive or dative case; as, Esl adolescentis mdjdres ndtu vereH, scil. eum. Cic. 
Expedit bdnas esse vdbis, scil. vos. Ter.; and rarely Avhen it precedes in the 
accusative; as, Ea pdpidus ketdri et merito dhere fern ; and also when its place 
is supplied by a possessive pronoun expressed or understood; as, Abn fuit con- 
fllium (meum)— servilibus officiis intentum cetdtem dgere (scil. me). SaL. 

Rkm. 2. A substantive pronoun is also sometimes omitted before the infini¬ 
tive, when it is the subject of the preceding verb; as, Pollicitus sum suscepturum 
(ease), scil. me, I promised (that I) would undertake. Ter. Sed reddere posse 
nigdbat, scil. se. Virg. 

Rem. 3. The subject of the infinitive is often omitted, when it is a genera] 
word for person or thing; as, Est dliud irdcundum esse, dliud Irdtum, scil. AJml- 
nem. Cic. See ^ 269, R. 1. 

Rem. 4. The subject-accusative, like the nominative, is often wanting. Sm 
^ 209, R. 3. The subject of tlie infinitive may be an infinitive or a claute 
See ^ 269, R. 3. 

Note 2. For the verbs after which the subject-accusative with the infinitive is used 
we § 272. For the accusative in the predicate after infinitives neater and passive, see 
1210. 


§ 240, 241. 


SYNTAX.—VOCATIVE—ABLATIVE. 


24S 


VOCATIVE. 

§ 940. Tlie vocative is used, either with or without an in 
terjection, in addressing a person or thing. 

Remark 1. The interjections 0, Aew, and pro (proTi)^ aiso aih^ at, 
(hnu ), e/iein, eho, e'hoduin^ eia (heia ), hem, heus, hui, io, and ohe, are 
followed by the vocative ; as, 

0 formose puer ! 0 beautiful boy! Virg. Heu virgo ! Id. Pro sancte Jupftar / 
Cic. Ah stultc! Ter. llem Syre! Id. OheUbeUe! Mart. Ehodum bone nr. 
Ter.— Urbem, mi Rufe, c(5Ze. Cic. Quinctili Vare, leyibnes redde. Suet. Quo 
merit ure rufs ? Hor. Macte e^fo. Cic. 

Rem. 2. The vocative is sometimes omitted, while a genitive depending upon 
it remains; as, 0 miserce sortis ! scil. hdmlnes. Lucan. 

Note. The vocative forms no part of a proposition, but serves to designate the pereou 
to >«hom the proposition is addressed. 

ABLATIVE. 

The ablative denotes certain relations of nouns and pronouns, all of which are expreee 
rd in English by means of prepositions. In Latin this case is sometimes accompanied by 
a preposition, and sometimes stands alone. Cf. i 37, 6. 

ABLATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. 

§ 941 . Eleven prepositions are followed by the ablative. 

These are a, for ab, abs), absque, de; cor am, palam, cum, ex, (e)‘ 
nne, tenus, pro, and pree ; as. 

Ah illo tempdre, From that time. Liv. A scrlbendo, From writing. Cic. 
Cum rxercitu, With the armv. Sail. Certis de causis, For certain reasons. Cio. 
Ex fugd, From flight. Id. Pdlam pdpfdo. Liv. Sine Mbore. Cic. Cupulo tinus. 
Virg. Cantdbit vacuus edram Idtrdne viator. Juv. cf. § 195, 6. 

Note. Of the prepositions followed by the ablative, five signify removal or separation, 
viz. a (ab or abs), de, S (or ex), absquS and sing. 

Remark 1. is always placed after Its case. It sometimes takes the 

genitive plural. See § 221, Ill.— Cu7)i is always appended to the ablative of tlie 
personal pronouns me, te, se, nobis, and vobis, and commonly to the ablatives 
of the relative pronoun, quo, qud, quibus, and qui. Cf. § 133, 4, and ^ 136, R. 1, 

Rem. 2. The adverbs prdcul and slmul are sometimes used with an ablative, 
which depends on the prepositions a or ab, and cum understood; as, Prdcul 
mari. Far from the sea. Liv. Simul nobis habitat. Ovid. Prdcul dublo. Suet. 
The prepositions are frequently expressed; as, Prdcul a terra. Cic. Prdcul a 
peUnd. Virg. Tecum simul. Plant. Vdbiscum dnitd. Cic.—So, rarely, aique. 
Qui me in terra cegue foi'tundtus erii. Plant. Cf. Novi aique omnia tecum. Id. 

Rem. 3. Some of the above pr'^positions, like those followed by the accusa- 
Hve, are occasionally used without a noun expressed; as, Quum coram sumus. 
Cic. Cum frdtre an sine. Id. Cf. § 235, R. 10 

Rem. 4. The ablative follows also the prepositions in and sub, when they 
tnswer to the question ‘where?’ siiper, when it signifies ‘on’ or ‘concerning’, 
Rjid sometimes clam and subter. Cf. ^ 235, (2.)—(5.) 

Rem. 5. /n is generally joined with the ablative after verbs of placing, as, 
Idco, colldco, stdtuo, constituo, and consido; as, Et sale tdbentes artus ir, 
ltdre pdnunl. Virg.—So, also, after verbs signifying to have, hold, or regard 


1^44 SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE AFTER CERTAIN NOUNS. § 242, 248 


as, Mbeo, duco, numero, etc.—After verbs of assembling^ concealing^ and include 
ino, in is followed by either the accusative or the ablative.—After deflgo, in- 
sc^bo, insculpOy incido, and iTisei'O, in is usually joined with the ablative. 

§ Many verbs compounded with ab, de, ex, and super 

are followed by an ablative depending upon the preposition; as, 

Abesse urbe, To be absent from the city. Cic. Ablre sedibiis, To depart from 
iJieir habitations. Tac. Ut se nudcdictis non abstlneant. Cic. DcU-udnid 7iwe& 
ftcdpuh, They push the ships from the rock. Virg. Navi egressus esL Nep. 
Excedh'e flnibus. Liv. Ccesar supersMere stdtuit. Cajs. Tributo ac ae~ 

Icctu supersessum est. Cic. So the adjective extor7'is; as, Extorris piCLtrid, ddmo. 
Sail. And so the verbal ernptw, as, ^lutiiia e7'uptio. Cic. 

Remark 1. The preposition is often repeated, or one of similar signification 
is used; as, Deti'cdiere^ de tud fumd 7iumq7tam cbyUdvi. Cic. Ex dculis dbiei'unU 
Liv. Exii'e a paEid. Cic. Exu'e de vitd. Id. Cf. § 224, R. 4. 

Rem. 2. These compound verbs are often used without a noun; but, in 
many cases, it may be supplied by the mind; as, Equites degressi ad pedtt 
cil. equis. Liv. Abli'e ad JJeos, scil. vltd. Cic. 

Rem. 3. Some verbs compounded with ab, de, and ex, instead of the abla¬ 
tive, are sometimes followed by the dative. See ^ 224, R. 1 and 2. Some com¬ 
pounds, also, of neuter verbs, occur with the accusative. See § 233, R. 1. 

ABLATIVE AFTER CERTAIN NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, 

AND VERBS. 

§ 24:3. Opus and usus, signifying need, usually take the ab¬ 
lative of the thing needed; as, 

Auctoritate ttid Tidbis dpus est. We need your authority. Cic. Nunc an!mis 
(pus, 7mnc pectore JirTno. Virg. Ndves, quibus consuli usus non esset, Ships, for 
tvhich the consul had no occasion. Liv. Nutic viribus usus, 7iunc manibus 7'dpl- 

• Virg. 

Remark 1. (a.) Op7is and usus are sometimes followed by the ablative of a 
\.erfect participle; as, Maturate dpus est, There is need of haste. Liv. Usus facto 
est mihi. Ter. Ubi summus imph'dtor non ddest ad exei'dtuin, citius, quod 7wn 
facto est usus. Jit, quam quod facto est 6p>us. Plant. After dp7is, a noun is some¬ 
times expressed with the participle; as. Opus fuit Ilirtio convento,—of meeting, 
or, to meet, § 274, R. 5. Cic. Oqms sibi esse domino (Jus inveato. Liv.—or a su- 

f ine is used; as, Ita dictu dpus est. It is necessary to say, I must say. Ter.— 
nstead of the ablative witti dqms est, an infinitive, either alone or with a sub- 
iect accusative, or ut with a subjunctive clause, sometimes occurs; as, Opus 
6St te dniino valere. Cic. Jlihi dpus est, ut lavem. Id. 

(b.) Opjis and usus, though nouns, are seldom limited by the genitive. In a 
few passages they are construed with the accusative. See"^ 211, R. 11. 

Rem. 2. Opus is sometimes the subject and sometimes the predicate of est; 
ttsus, which seldom occurs except in ante-classic poets, is, with only rare ex- 
loptions, the subject only. The person to whom the thing is needful is put in 
Qi 3 dative; (§ 226.) With opus the thing needed may either be the subject of 
Ihe verb in the nominative or accusative, or follow it in the allative; as. Dux 
nobis dpus est. Cic. Vein'es multa sibi dpus esse aiebat. Id.; or, Duce ndim 
(pus est. The former construction is most common with neuter adjectives and 
pronouns; as. Quod 7um opus est, asse cd7ni7n est. Cato apud Ilsen.—In tl.e 
predicate (>pv$ and usus are commonly translated ‘ needful ’ or ‘ necessary 
Cf. ^ 210, R. J. 

Non For the ablative of character, quality, etc., limiting a noun, cee J 2111, R. 6 


S 244, 245. SYNTAX.—ablative after certain noins. 246 


§ S414. Dignus, indignus, contentiis^ prcBditus, and JretuSj 
are followed bj the ablative of the object; as, 

Ih'f/nm laude, \Vc~thy of praise. Hor. Vox pdpuli majestate inclignn., A speech 
unbecoming the dignity of tlie people. Cass. Bestue eo contentce non quvei'uni 
aviplius. Cic. Udnio scelere prceditus. Id. Plevtque ingenio J'i'Ui. Id.—So, 
^qunm est me atque illo. Plaut. 

Remark 1. The adverb digne^ in one passage, takes the ablative; Prxv 
cat uter nostrum cruce dignius. Hor.— Dignor, also, both as the passive of the 
obsolete digno, anci as a deponent verb, is followed by an ablative of the thing, 
As a deponent it takes also an accusative of the person; as, Haud equidem tali 
me h6.abre (/jf/nor. Virg.—Pass. Qui tali honore digndti sunt. Cic. Conjagio. 
Andtlsn, Vmeris digndte superbo. Virg.—Sometimes as a deponent, i.:stead of 
the ablative of the thhig, it is followed by an infinitive clause; as. Non Sgo 
gvamnuit'uas ambire tribus et pidplta dignor. Hor. And both dignor and dedignor 
are followed by two accusatives, one of the object the other of the predicate. 
See ^ 230, R. 2. 

Rkm. 2. (a.) Digmis indignus are sometimes followed by the genitive; 

Susdpe cogWdidneni diqnissimam tvxs v\rtutis>. Cic. /w%nMS avbrum. Virg.; 
and (///yjiMs sometimes tabes a neuter pronoun or adjective in the accusative; 
as. Non me censes scire > mid dignus siem? Plaut. IrVetus is in Livy construed 
with the dative. Cf. § 222, K. 6, {b.) 

(b.) Instead of an ablative, dignus and indignus often take an infinitive, 
especially in the passive; as, Erat dignus amari. Virg.; or a subjunctive 
clause, with qui or ut; as, Dignus qui imperet. Cic. Non sum dignus^ ut f igara 
palum in parietem. Plaut.; or the supine in u; as, Digna atque indigna rildlu 
vociferans. Virg. Cbntentws is likewise joined with the infinitive; as, Nonktec 
aides contenta edidicisse fuit. Ovid.—So, Naves pontum irrumpero 

fretce. Stat. 

§ I. Uior, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor, and their 

compounds, are followed by the ablative; as, 

Ad quern turn Juno supplex his vocibus usa est, —addressed these words. Virg. 
Frui voluptate. To enjoy pleasure. Cic. ^Fungitur officio. He performs his 
duty. Id. Oppido p6iUi sunt. Liv. Vescitur aura. Virg. His rebus perfruor. 
Cic. Legibus abuti. Id. Defuncti imperio. Liv. Gravi opere perfungxmur. Cic. 
0 tandem magnis pUdgi defuncte periclis. Virg. 

The compounds are abutor, deutor, perfruor, defungor, and perfungor. 

Note. TJtor may take a second ablative, as an apposition or a predicate, 
like the predicate accusative, (§ 230, R. 2), and may then be translated by 
the verb to have; as, I lie fdcili me utetur patre, He shall have in me an indul¬ 
gent father. Ter. 

Remark. 1 n early writers these verbs sometimes tfike an accusative; as, 
Quam vQin inMlci uiunlur. Varr. Ingenium yrMi. Ter Daidmes miVitdre mu- 
tius fungens. Nep. Gentem dllquam urbem nostrum pOiituram putem. Cic. Sa- 
.'Tds lauros vescar. Tibull. Jn prdldgis scribendis operam dbutltur. Ter.— Pdtiar 
Is, also, found with the genitive. See § 220, 4. 

II. 1. Nltor, innitor, fido and confldo, may be followed by the ablative 
.vithout a preposition; as, Hasta innixus. Liv. Fidere cursu. Ovid. Natuar 
^ct confldeoant. Cses. 

2. Misceo v/ith its compounds takes, with the accusative of the object, the 
tblative of the thing mingled with, as, Miscere qidbdla sale. Coll. Aquas nac- 
tare. Ovid. Ad' multo calore admkrtus. Cic. 

3. Assuesco, assuifdcio, consuesco, insuesco, and sometimes acquiesco, taka 
either the dative or the ablative of. the thing; as, Aves san^ne et prseda as- 

Hor. NuUo officio aut disciplina asmefactus. Caes. Cf. ^ 224. 

21* 


E46 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETO. § 246, 247 


4 . Vivo and Spuhr^ ‘ to live or feast upon,’ are followed b y the ablative; as 
Papibus ^puldmur dpimis. Virg. Lacte atque pecore vlvunt. Caes. 

6. Sto signifying ‘to be filled or covered with,’ and also when signifying ‘ tc 
cost,’is followed by the ablative without a preposition; when signifying‘to 
persevere in, stick to, abide by,’ ‘ to rest or be fixed on,’ it is followed by the 
ablative either with or without in; as. Jam pulvere calum stare vndent. Virg.— 
Multo sanguine ac vulneribus ea Poenis victaria steiil. Liv. Stare conditionibus. 
Cic. 0m7iis in Ascanio stat cura parentis. Virg.— Consto, ‘to consist of’ or ‘to 
rest upon,’ is followed by the ablative either alone or with ex, de, or in; as, 
Constat mdteiies solido corpore. Lucr. UOmo ex anlrao constat el corpore. Oio. 

Remark 1. Fldo, confldo, misceo, admisceo, permisceo, and assuesco often 
take the dative. 

Rkm. 2. When a preposition is expressed after the above verbs, sto, f ido, 
oonfido, nitor, innitor, and asmesco take in or ad; acquiesco, in; and misoeo 
with its compounds, cum. 

§ S4rG. Perfect participles denoting,are often fol¬ 
lowed by the ablative of the source.^ without a preposition. 

Snch ar« natus, prO^n&tus, s&tus, cre&tus, erStus, SdUus, {Snitus, gSnSratus, ortus; to 
which niaj be added Qriimdus, descended from. 

Thus, Nate ded ! 0 son of a. goddess! Virg. Tantdlo pi'ogndtus, Descended 
from Tantalus. Cic. Sdtus Nereide, Sprung from a Nereid. Ovid. Credtti^ 
rege. Id. Alcdndi'e creti. Virg. Edite rcgibus. Hor. Diis genite. Virg. Argdl- 
ico gSnirdtus Alemdne. Ovid. Ortus nuUis mdjdribus. Hor. Ccelesti semine 
driundi. Lucr. 

Remark 1. The preposition is also rarely omitted after the verbs creo, gSnSro, 
and nascor; as, Ut patre certo naseSrere. die. Fortes creantur fortibus. Hor. 

Rem. 2. After participles denoting origin, the preposition ex or de is usually 
joined to the name of tne mother; and in a few passages ex or ab is joined to 
the name of the father; as, Progndti ab Dite patre. Cass. In speaking of one’s 
ancestors ab is frequently used; as, PUrosque Belgas esse ortos a Germanis. Id. 

Rem. 3. Origin from a place or country is generally expressed by a patrial 
adjective; as, Thrdsybulus Atheniensis, Thrasybulus of Athens. Livy often 
usesaft; as, Turmis Herddnius ab Aricia. Csesar prefers the ablative alone; 
as. Cn. Maghis Crembn^; and in this manner is expressed the tribe to which a 
person belongs; as, Verres Romilia,— of the Romilian tribe. 

ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, Etc. 

§ S47. Nouns denoting the cause, manner, means, and in¬ 
strument, after adjectives and verbs, are put in the ablative with¬ 
out a preposition. 

Note. The English prepositions with the ablative of cause, manner, means, 
and instrument are by, udth, in, etc. 

1. The cause. (1.) Adjectives which have a passive significa¬ 
tion, as denoting a state or condition produced by some external 
tause, may take such cause in the ablative; as, 

Carnpdni fvJrunt superbi bonltate agrdmm. Cic. Animal pabiilo Iceium. Sen 
Prajlio/essi lasslque. Weary and faint with the battle. Sail. H&ailnes agv 
ipravi morbo. Cic. 

(2.) Neuter verbs expressing an action, state or feeling of the 
subject originating in some external cause, may take that cause io 
the ablative; as, 


§ 247 . 


SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE OF CALSE, ETC. 


247 


Intirxit fame, He perished with hunger. Laude aliena ddlet. Cic Lcetor 
hia dignitate. Id. Gauck tuo bono. Id. Sua victoria gloi'idri. Caes. Aquilonl- 
bus Idoih'ant quercHa. Hor.—So with bene est ind the dative; as, Mihi bene erat 
non pisclbus ui'be peCUis, sed pullo atque hsedo. Hor. Ubi illi bene sit ligno, 
E(iua calida, cibo, vestiinentis, etc. Plaut. 

Note 1. After such adjectives and neuter verbs, a preposition with its case 
often supplies the place of the simple ablative. 

Note 2. In exclamations of encouragement or approbation the defective 
adjective made, macti, either with or without the imperative of esse {esto, estc, 
estate,) is joined with an ablative of cause, especially with virtute. 

Note 3. After neuter verbs and adjectives denoting emotions, accurative 
those of care, grief, and soi'row, the accusative mcem, with a genitive or a pos 
Bcssive pronoun, is used, instead of the ablative n“ce, to signify ‘ for ’ or ^ on 
account of’; as. Remittimus hoc tibi, ne nostram vicem irascdids. That you may 
not be angry on our account. Liv. Tuam vicem scepe doleo, quod, etc. Cie, 
Suam vicem mdgis anxius, quam ejus, cui auanlium oh se petebdtur. Liv. 

Remark 1. \\ hen the cause is a voluntary agent, it is put in the accusative 
with the preposition ob, propter, or per; as. Non est oequum me propter vos 
di'cipi. Ter. These prepositions, and a, or ab, de, e or ex, and prce, are also 
sometimes used wlien the cause is not a voluntary agent; as, Ob adulteriurn 
ccesi. Virg. Nec Idqui prge mcerore pdtuit. Cic. 

Rem. 2. (a.) After active verbs, the caMse, unless expressed by an ablative 
in u from substantives having no other case; as, Jussu, rdgdtu and adindnitu, 
is seldom expressed by the simple ablative, but either by a preposition, or by 
causd, gratid, ergo, etc., with a genitive; as, Legibus propter metum pdret. 
Cic. Ne ob earn rem ipsos de^ic^ret. Id. DondH virtutis ergo. Id. Si hoc 
honoris mei causa susceperis. Id. But with causd, etc., the adjective pronoun 
is commonly used for the corresponding substantive pronoun; as, Te dbesse 
mea causa, moleste fero. Cic. Cf. § 211, R. 3, (6.) 

{b.) When the cause is a state of feeling, a circumlocution is often used with 
a perfect participle of some verb signifying ‘ to induce ’; as, CupidXtdte ductus, 
inductus, incltdtus, incensus,inflammdtus,impulsus,mdtus, captus, etc. Mihi bene- 
volentia ductus tHbuebat omnia. Cic. Livy frequently uses ab in this sense; 
as, Ab Ird, a sqie, ab udio, from anger, hope, hatred. 

2. The manner. Cum is regularly joined with the ablative of 
manner, when expressed simply by a noun, not modified by any 
other word ; and also when an adjective is joined with the noun, 
provided an additional circumstance, and not merely an essential 
character of the action, is to be expressed. Thus: 

Cum vohiptate dliquem audlre. Verres Lampsdcum vmit cum magna calaml- 
tate civitdtis, Cic. Hence also when the connection between the subject and 
be noun denoting the attribute is only extenial; as, Procedere cum veste pur- 
nurea: in distinction from Nudis pedibus incedd'e; Aperto capite sedere, etc., 
which express circumstances or attributes essential to the subject. 

But mbdrus, ratio, mos, ritus, etc., signifymg manner, never take c«?«, and it is 
omitted in some expressions with other substantives; as. Hoc modo scrtjpsi; 
OonstUuet'unt qua ratione dgerdur; More bestidrum vdgdri; Latronum ritu vivere / 
^quo ariiiiio ; Maxima fide dmicltias cdluit. Summa Kquitate res consti- 
*uic; Viam incredibili celeritate confecit; Librujii magna cura dilIgentia 5 '^^fl 
%cripsit; the action of the verb be_ig intimately connected with the circum- 
itance expressed by the ablative. So in some expressions with substantives 
alone; as, Silentio or fd'Are dliquid; Le^edgere; Jure and injuria 

fdcere; 3lagistrdtus vitio credtus ; Recte et ordine Jit. 

Rem. 3. The manner is also sometimes denoted by de ox ex with the abla- 
five; as, De or ex industrid. On purpose. Liv. Ex integro, Anew. Quint 


248 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETC. 


§248 


3. The means and instrument. An ablative is joined with 
verbs of every kind, and also with adjectives of a passive significa¬ 
tion, to express the means or instrument; as, 

Amlcos observantia, revi parsimonia rUinuit, He retai/ied his friends by at¬ 
tention, his property by frugality. Cic. Auro ostrd^we decori. Virg. jEyreicu 
medendo. Id. Coruibus iauri^ apri dentibus, morsu leones se tutantur. Cic. 
Gccsns est virgis. Id. Trahs saucia securi. Ovid. For the ablative of tiie means 
after verbs of filing, etc., see § 249,1. 

Rem. 4. WTien the means is a person, it is seldom expressed by the cimpis 
ablative, but either by psr, or by the ablative dph'd with a genitive or a pos¬ 
sessive pronoun; as, med, tud, sud, d^^erd, which are equivalent to per we, per 
te per se, and denote both good and bad services. Beneficio meo, etc., is nsec 
Oi good results oidy; as, Beneficio meo patres sunt. Sail. But persons are some- 
timo3 considered as involuntary agents, and as such expressed by the ablative 
without a preposition; as. Servos, quibus silvas 2 mblicas dipdpuWus erai. Cic.— 
When per is used to express the means, it is connected Avith external concur¬ 
ring circumstances, rather than with the real means or instrument. Hence 
we always say w oppiduni cepit, but per vim ei b6na erlpuit. 

Rem. 5. The material instrument is ahvavs expressed by the ablative with¬ 
out a preposition; as, Conficere cervum sdqluis : qlddio dliquem vidnerdre; trd^ 
jicSre pectus ferro. 

§ 34:8. The ablative is used with passive verbs to denote 
the means or agent by which any thing is effected, and which in 
the active voice is expressed by the nominative. This ablative 
is used either with ab or without it, according as it is a person 
or a thmg. 

I. The voluntary agent of a verb in the passive voice is put in 
the ablative with a or ab ; as, 

(In the active voice,) Clddius me dllXgit, Clodius loves me (Cic.); (in the pas¬ 
sive,) A Clodio dlligor, I am loved by Clodius. Lavddtur ab his, culpdtur ab 
illis. Hor. 

Remark 1. (1.) The general word for persons, after verbs in the passive 
voice, is often understood; as, Prdbitas lauddtur, bq,\\. ab hdminibus. Juv. So 
after the passive of neuter verbs; as, Discurritur. Virg. Toto certdtum est cor- 
p&re regni. Id. Cf. § 141, R. 2. 

(2.) The agent is likewise often understood, wdien it is the same as the sub- 
iect of the verb, and the expression is then equivalent to the active voice 
With a reflexive pronoun, or to the middle voice in Greek; as, Quum omnes in 
imni genere scelerum volutentur, scil. a se. Cic. 

Rem. 2. Neuter verbs, also, are sometimes followed by an ablative 
of the voluntary agent with a or ab ; as, 

M. Marcellus p)eriit ab Annibale, M. Marcellus Avas killed by Hannibal. Plin. 
*Ve vir ab hoste cddat. Ovid. 

Rem. 3. The preposition is sometim<'s omitted; as, Nec ccnjhge caplm, 
Ovid.' CdlUur linig^rd turba. Id. Pereat meis excisus Argivis Hor. 

For the dative of the agent after verbs in the passive voice, and participles in dus, sea 
§ 226 , n. and m. 

n. The involuntary agent of a verb in the passive vo'ce, or of a neuter verb 
is put in the ablative Avitiiout a preposition, as the cause, means, or instrument 

Maximo dolore conficior. Cic. Frangi cupldltate. Id. uFacidee telo /acej 
^ector. Virg. 


S 249. 


SYNTAX.-AliLATIVr. OF CAUSE, ETC. 


249 


Note. The involuntary agent is sometimes personified, and takes a oi ab 
»iij A volnptatibus deseri. Cic. A natura datum hdmini vlvcndi cun Icalum. Ifc 
Vtnci a voluptate. Id. Victus a labbre. Id. 

§ S410. I. A noun denoting tlie means, by which the action 
of a verb is performed, is put in the ablative after verbs signify¬ 
ing to affect in any way, to Jill^ furnish^ load, array, equip, 
doiv, adorn, reward, enrich, and many others. 

Bxmark 1. This rule includes such verbs as afftcio^ aspergo, conspergo, inspergo, re- 
Spergo] co7/ipleo, expleo^ impleo, oppleo, repleo, sttppleo, cumulo^ farcio^ rSfercio, sdtio 
exsdiio, sdturo, stipo, coustlpo, dbruo, SnSro, avgeo, induo, vestio, anno, orno, ciraimdo, 
circuinfundo, macto, IdcupUto, instruo, imbuo, cZono, impertio, rtmuniror, honesto 
Adno;o, etc.; as, 

Ten'ore implctur Africa, Africa is filled with terror. Sil. Instruxere epulis 
mcnscis. They furnished the tables with food. Ovid. Ut ejus dnimum Mf opin- 
ibiiibus imbuas, That you should imbue his mind with these sentimer.is. Cic. 
Naves dnevant auro. They load the ships with gold. Virg. Cumiilat altdria dbnis 
He heaps the altars with gifts. Id. Terra se gramine resiii. The earth clothes 
itself with gi’ass. Id. Molllbus orndbat cornua sertis. Id. Multo cibo et potione 
ccnnpletL Cic. Libros j^uerilibus fabulis referclre. Id. Sdtidri delectatiune non 
possum. Id. Homines sdturdti honbribus. Id. Senectus stipdta studiis juvei*- 
iutis. Id. Me tanto houore kdnestas. Plant. Equis Africam Idcuplctdvit. Colura. 
Stadium tuum nulla me ndvd, voluptate affecit. Cic. Terrain nox obruit timbris. 
Lucr. 

Rem. 2. Several verbs denoting to fill, instead of the ablative, sometimes 
take a genitive. See § 220, 3. 

Rem. 3. The active verbs induo, dono, impertio, aspergo, inspergo, circumdo, 
and circumjumlo, instead of the ablative of the thing with the accusative ot 
the person, sometimes take an accusative of the thing, and a dative of the 

f ierson; as, Cui quum JDeidnlra tunicam indmssei. Cic. JJdndre munera civitas. 
n the earliest writers dono, like conddno, has sometimes two accusatives or an 
accusative of the person with the infinitive. 

II. A noun denoting that in accordance with which any thing ia, 
or is done, is often put in the ablative without a preposition; as. 

Nostro more. According to our custom. Cic. InstTmto suo Ccesar copias suas 
eduxit. According to his practice. Cses. Id factum consllio meo,—by my ad¬ 
vice. Ter. Pdeem /hs condltiouibus,—on these conditions. Nep. 

Note. The prepositions de, ex, pro, and secundum are often expressed with 
inch nouns; as, Nhme est facturus quidimam nisi de meo consllio. Cic. Er 
consuetudlne dllquicl f dch'e. Plin. Ep. Decet quidquid dgas, dgere pro virlbus. 
Vic. SecuiiQum naturam vlvere. Id. 

ni The ablative denoting accompaniment, is usually joined wiA 
"um; as, 

Vdgdmur igentes cum conjugibus et llberis, Needv, we wander with otti 
wives and children. Cic. Siejje admlrdri sdleo cum hoc C. Lajlio. Id. JuUum 
cum his ad te literis mtsi. ^d. Jngressus est cum gladio. Id. lidmam ve.ni cura 
febri. Cum occasu solis copias educere ,—as soon as the sun set. 

Remark. But cum is sometimes omitted before words denoting military 
and naval forces, when limited by an adjective; as. Ad castra Casdris omnlbui 
cdpiis contenderunt. CiEs. Inde toto exercitu prOfectus. Liv. Eddem decern 
navibus C. Furius venit. Liv. And sometimes in militarv language cum is omit¬ 
ted, when accompanying circumstances are mentioned, and not pemons; as 
jostra clamore invdamU. 


^50 


SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETC. § 250, 251 


§ 2^0. 1. A noun, adjective, or verb, may be followed by 

the ablative, denoting in what respect their signification is taken; 
as, 

PHtate filius. ccmsiliis parens, In affection a son, in counsel a parent. Cio. 
Rrges nomine magis quam imp6iio, Kings in name rather than in authority. Nep. 
(/ppidum ndmlne Bibrax. Cses.— Jure perltus, Shilled in law. Cic. Anxi^te drk> 
mo, Anxious in mind. Tac. Pedlbus ceger. Lame in his feet. Sail. Crlnc rubev^ 
nlger ore. Mart. Fronte Icetus. Tac. Major nCitu. Cic. Prudentid non injiidot', 
usu vero itiam suphnor. Id. Maximus ndtu. Liv.— Aninio angi, To botrcibled 
in mind. Cic. Chntreinisco totd mente et omnibus arlubus, I am agitated in my 
whole mind and in every limb. Id. Captus mente, Affected in mind, %. i de¬ 
prived of reason. Id. Altero dcuh cdpitur. Liv. Ingenii laude Jldrmi Cio. 
Pottere nobllitdte. Tac. Animoque et corpdre toipet. Hor. 

Rema rk. This may be called the ablative of limitation, and denotes the rela¬ 
tion expressed in English by ‘ in respect of,’ ‘in regard to,’ ‘as to,’ or ‘in.’— 
Respecting the genitive of limitation after adjectives, see ^213;—after verbs, 
§ 220, 1; and respecting the accusative of limitation, see § 231, R. 6; § 232, (Ji.); 
and § 234,11. 

% (1.) Adjectives of plenty or want are sometimes limited by tlie 
ablative; as, 

D6mus plena servis, A house full of servants. Juv. Dives agris, Rich in 
land. Hor. F^rax sceculum bdnis artibus. Plin.— Inops verbis. Deficient in words, 
Cic. Orba frdtrihus, Destitute of brothers. Ovid. Viduum arboribus sdlutn. 
Colum. Nudus agris. Hor. For the genitive after adjectives of plenty and 
want, see § 213, R. 3-5. 

(2.) Verbs signifying to abound, and to be destitute, are followed 
by the ablative; as, 

Sedtentem helluis pontum. The sea abounding in monsters. Hor. Urhs redundaX 
militibus. The city is full of soldiers. Auct. ad Her. Villa dbundat qwreo, hcedo, 
agno, galllnd, lacte, cdseo, melle. Cic.— Virum qui pecunid igeat, A man who ip 
In want of money. Id. Cdrere culpa, To be free from fault. Id. Mea dildles- 
centia indlget illbrum hdnb. existimatione. Id. Alrandat audacia, consilio et rA- 
tione deficitur. Id. 

Remark 1. To this rule belong dbundo, exubiro, rMundo, sedteo, affluo, dr- 
cumjluo, diffluo, superjluo, supp^dito, vdleo, vigeo; — edreo, egeo, indlgeo, vdeo, de~ 
fictor, destituor, etc. 

Rem. 2. The genitive, instead of the ablative, sometimes follows certain 
verbs signifying to abound or to want. See § 220, 3. 

Rem. 3. To do any thing Avith a person or thing, is expressed in Latin bv 
/’d';ere with r/e ,• as, 'Quid dQ Tulliold med fletf Cic ; and more frequently by 
he simple ablative, or the dative; as. Quid hoc homine or huic homini fdcidtis ? 
W hat can you do with this man V Cic. Nescit quid fdciat auro,—what he shall 
do with the gold. Plant. Quid me flat parvi pendis, You care little what be¬ 
comes of me. Ter.—(Sjt’a is occasionally used in the same manner; Mttum 
Lcperunt quidnam S3 futuimm esset, —what would become of them. Liv. 

§ 251. A noun denoting that of which any thing is de¬ 
prived, or from which it is freed, removed, or separated, is often 
put ill the ablative without a preposition. 

This construction occurs after verbs signifying to deprive, free, de~ 
’*ar, drive avmy, remove, depart, and others which imply separation. 


i 251. 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE OF CAUSE, ETC. 


251 


Note.. The principal verbs of this class are arcto, pello, duello, expello^ ab- 
iio), irUerdico, dejenao, deturbo, dejicio, ejicio, ahsterreo, deterreo, mdveo, dmdveo, 
iemdveo, rSmdveo, secemo, prdhibeo, sepdro, excludo, intercludo, dbeo, exeo, cedo, 
decedo, discedo, desisto, evado, abstlneo, spdlio, privo, orbo, llMro, expSdio, laxo, 
nudo, solco, exsolvo, exdnero, levo, purgo, to which may be added the adjec¬ 
tives liber, immunis, piiims, vacuus, and dlienus ; as, 

Nudaniur arbdres foliis, The trees are stripped of leaves. Plin. Eoc me ViMra 
mcti, Free me from this fear. Ter. Tune earn phil6s6phiam seqvbre, qius spdliai 
1U9 jilJlcio, pi'ivat approbatione, orbat sensibusV Cic. Solvit se Teucna luctu. 
Virg. Te illis sedibus arcebit. Cic. Q. Varium pelUre pos.'^essionibus cdndtus 
tit Id. Omnes tribu remoti. Liv. Levnre se sere alieno. Cic. Me leves chdri 
seceriYunt populo. Hor. Antmus omni liber cura et angore. Cic. Utrumqu« 
homine dlienissimum. Id. When dlienus signifies ‘ averse ’ or ‘ hostile to,’ it takoB 
the ablative with ab, or rarely the dative; as. Id dicit, qujod illi causae maxims 
at dlienum. Id. In the sense of ‘ unsuited,’ it may also be joined with the gen¬ 
itive; as, Qtiis dlienum putet ejus esse dignitatis? Id. —Alius too, in analogy 
W)th adjectives and verbs of separation, sometimes takes an ablative; as, bleve 
piites dlium sapiente bono^we bedtum. Hor.; but this may also be referred to the 
ablative after comparatives. Cf. § 256, R. 14. 

Remark 1. IMost verbs of depriving and separating are more or less fre- 
quentlv followed by ab, de or ex, with the ablative of the thing, and always by 
ab with the ablative of the person; as, Tu Jupiter, hunc a tuis aris arcebis. Cic. 
Prcesidium ex arce pepulei'unt. Nep. Aquam de agro pellere. Plin. Ex ingrdtd 
civitate cedere. Cic. Arcem ab incendio liberdvii. Id. Solvere belluam ex c^ 
tenis. Auct. ad Her. —Sedes remdtas a Germanis. Cies. Se ab Etruscis secer- 
nere. Liv. 

Rem. 2. Arceo, in the poets, sometimes takes the dative, see § 224, R. 2., 
and sometimes an infinitive; as, Pldgamque sedere cedendo arceoat. Ovid.— 
Prdhibeo and defendo take either the accusative of the person or thing to be 
defended, with the ablative of the thing to be warded off*—or the reverse— 
aliquem or dliqwid a q^ericulo, or pei’iculum ab dliquo. They are also sometimes 
construed with the dative, see § 224, R. 2, and sometimes with infinitive or 
subjunctive clauses. Prdhibeo has rarely two accusatives; as. Id te Jupiter 
w'dhibessit. Plaut.; or poetically the accusative and genitive; as, Captce prdht- 
hrre Poems aquilae. Sil.— Interdico takes the person either in the accusative or 
the dative, and the thing in the ablative, dUquem or dlicui aliqua re; aSj Quibm 
quum aqua et igni interdixissent. Caes.—Instead of the ablative, a subjunctive 
clause with ne, and more rarely with ut, sometimes follows interdico. — Absum, 
in like manner, takes the ablative with ab, and sometimes the dative; as, 
Curtce nesdo quid semper dbest rei. Hor. Cf. § 224, R. 1.— Abdico takes some¬ 
times an ablative, and sometimes an accusative of the thing renounced; as, 
Abdicare se magistratu. Cic. Abdicare magistratum. Sail. In Plautus, cir~ 
cumduco, to cheat, takes the ablative of the thing. Intercludo, instead of an 
ablative of the thing with an accusative of the person, sometimes takes an 
accusative of tlie thing and a dative of the person; as, Itinerum angusticB mul- 
Btuumi intercluserant. Cses.: and, instead of the ablative of the thing, 

a subjunctive clause with jiiO/wiMZfS occurs: Intercludor ddldre, qudminus ad (4 
fliii a scribam. Cic. 

Rem. 3. Verbs which signify to distinguish, to differ, and to disagree, ar© 
generally construed with ao, but sometimes, especially in the pc^ets, with the 
ablative alone. 

Note. Verbs signifying to distinguish, etc., are distingue, discemo, secemo, 
iiff^ro, diicrepo, dissideo, disto, dissentio, discen'do, dbhorreo, alieno, and dodlieno.— 
J^entio, dissldeo, discrepo, and discoi'do are construed also with cum .— The 
yerbs which signify to differ are soi.ietimes construed with the dative; as, 
Wshxt infido scurrae dwiicjw. Hor., and in like manner the adjective dioeiaas; 
IS, Nihil est tarn Lfsise diver sum, quam Isocrates. Quiqt. 


252 SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE OF PRICE AND TIME. § 252, 258. 


ABLATIVE OF PRICE. 

Tlie price or value of a thing is put in the ablative, 
when it is a definite sum, or is expressed by a substantive; as, 

Quum te trecentis talentis regi Cotto vendldisses, "When you liad sold yourself 
to king Cottus for three hundred talents. Cic. Vendidit file auro patriam, This 
one sold his country for gold. Virg. Cibus uno asse vendlis. Plin Constitit gudd^ 
ringentis milllbus.. Varr. Denis in diem assibus dnlmum et coipus {mllltum) 
CBstimdri. Tac. Levi momento cestimdre. Cass. Istuc verbum vile est vlginii mi¬ 
nis. Plaut. Asse edrum est. Sen. Ep. 

Kemakk 1. The verbs which take an ablative of price or value are '1) ctstJ- 
»230, .itco, fdcio, fto, hdbeOj pendo, puto, deputo, taxo: (2) emo, viercor, vervdo., db, 
reneo, sto, consto, pi'osto, conduco, loco., vdleo, luo, and Uceo .—To these must be 
added others, which express some act or enjoyment for which a certain price 
is paid; as, Ldvor quddrante. Trigintamilllbus Ccelius habitat. Cic. Vix drachmia 
est obsdndtus decern. Ter. Doceo tMento, etc. So esse in the sense ‘ to be worth ’; 
as, Sextante sal in Itdlid erai. 

Rem. 2. Respecting the genitive of price or value, when expressed in a gen- 
eral or indefinite manner, see \ 214. 

Rem. 3. The price of a thing, contrary to the general rule, is often expressed 
indefinitely by a neuter adjective; as, magno, permagno, parro, tantulo, plurty 
niinimo, plm'imo, vlli, vilion, vllissimo. nimio, etc.’; as, Plure venit. Cic. GonduxU 
non magno ddmum. Id. These adjectives refer to some noun understood, as 
prMio. (Bre, and the like, which are sometimes expressed; as, Parvo pretio ea 
cendldlsse. Cic.—The adverbs bene., pidchre, recte, male, edre, etc., sometimes 
take the place of the genitive or ablative of price; as, Bene ^mere; recte ven¬ 
der e ; optlme vendere, etc. 

Rem. 4. Varro has used m?eo with the accusative; as, Dendrii dicti, quod 
denos avis vdlebant. 

Rem. 5. Muto and its compounds, commuto and permuto, are commonly con¬ 
strued like verbs of selling, the thing parted with being put in the accusative, 
and the thing received in exchange for it, in the ablative; as, Chddniam glanr- 
dem pingui mutdvit dristd. Virg. But these cases are often reversed, so that the 
thing received is put in the accusative and the thing given for it in the abla¬ 
tive; as, Our voile permiitem Sdblnd divitias dperosidres? Why should I ex¬ 
change my Sabine valley for more wearisome riches? Hor.—Sometimes in this 
const!notion cum is joined with the ablative. 

ABLATIVE OF TIME. 

§ 253 . A noun denoting the time at or within which any 
thing is said to be, or to be done, is put in the ablative without 
a preposition; as. 

Die quinto decessit, He died on the fifth dav. Nep. Hoc tempoie. At this 
time. Cie. Tertid vigilia eruptibnem fecerunt, They made a sally at the third 
watch. Cses. Ut hieme ndviges, That you should sail in the winter. Cic. Piox- 
tmo triennio omnes gentes subegit. Nep. Agdmannon cum unlversd Gnecid vk 9 
decern annis unam cepit urbem. Nep. 

Note 1. The English expression ‘ by day ’ is rendered in Latin cither by 
interdiu or die; ‘by night,’ by noctu or node; and ‘ in the evening,’ by vesjibre 
or vesperi; see § 82, Exc._5, (a.) Ludis is used for in temqjbre iwldrum; and 
Sdturndlibus, Ldtlnis, glddidtoribus, for ludis Sdturndlibus, etc. Other nouns not 
witherly expressing time are used in that sense in the ablative either with oi 
wc,\)ont in, a.s initio, j))-incipio, adventu and discessu dlicujus, cdmliiis. *um<iltu 
^ello, pace, etc.; or in initio, etc. But bello is more common without tn. if it ii 


5 253 . 


SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE OF TIME. 


253 


joined-with an adjective or a genitive; as, BeUo Punlco secundo^ hello Ldtlnd- 
rum; and so, also, pugnd Cannensi. So we say in pueritid, but omit in with 
an adjective; as, extrema puhntid. In is very rarely used with ncuns express¬ 
ing a certain space of time; as, annns, dies, hora, etc., for the purpose of de- 
noting the time of an event. In tempdre signifies either ‘ in distress,’ or ‘ in 
time*,’ i. e. ‘at the riglit time’; but in both cases tempdre alone is used, and 
tempdre in the sense of ‘earlv’ has even become an adverb, an earlier fcrm of 
which was tempdri or temperi, whose comparative is temperius. 

Remark 1. When a period is marked by its distance before or after anothci 
hj.ed time, it may be expressed by ante or post with either the accusative or 
the ablative.—(a ) The preposition is regularly placed before the accusatire. 
but after the ablative. If an adjective is used, the preposition is often placea 
between the adjective and the noun. In this connection the ordinal as well as 
the cardinal numbers may be used. Hence the English phrase ‘ after three 
years,’ or ‘three years after,’ may be expresse-d in these eight ways; post tret 
araios, trihus annis ])ost; post tertinm antium, tertio anno post; ires post annos^ 
trihns post annis; tertium post annum, tertio post anno. 

(6.) When (mfe or/lost stands last, an accusative maybe added to denote 
the time before or after which any thing took place; as, Multis annis post de- 
cemviros. Cic. So Consul factus est annis post llGmam conditam trecentis dnd- 
denonaginta. 

Note 2. Post and ante sometimes precede the ablatives, as ante annis o<to; 
post pnucis dieius; and also before such ablatives as are used adverbially, as 
post dliquanto ; ante paulo. 

Note 3. Quam and a verb are sometimes added to jnyst and ante in aU the 
forms above specified; e. g. tidhus annis postquam vendrat; post tres annos quam 
venerat; tertio anno postquam venerat; }>ost annum tertium quam venerat, etc.; 
all of which expressions signify ‘ three years after he had come.’ Sometimes 
post is omitted; as, tertio anno quam vendrat. 

Note 4. Instead of postquam, ‘ after,’ we may use ex quo, quum, or a relative 
agreeing with the preceding ablative; as. Ipse octo didbus, quibus has llteras dd- 
bam, cum Lepidi capias me conjungam; i. e. in eight days after the date of this 
letter. Plane, in Cic. Fam. Moi's Sex. Roscii quatnduo, quo is occlsus est, 
Chi'ysdgdno nuntidtur ,—four days after he had been killed. Cic. Quern triduo, 
quum has ddbam literas, exspectdbam ,—three days after the date of this letter. 
Plane, in Cic. In such cases in is sometimes jomed with the ablative; as, In 
didbus paucis, quibus hcec acta sunt, mdmtur. Ter. 

Rem. 2. The length of time before the present moment may be expressed bj 
dlhinc with the accusative, and, less frequently, the ablative; as, Qiuxstor fuisti 
khhinG nnnos quatuorddeim. Cic. Cdmitiis j am dLhh'mc trlginta diehus hdbitis. Id. 
The same is also expressed by ante with the pronoun hie; as, ante hos se.x 
menses mdledixisti mlhi, —six months ago. Phajd. Ante is sometimes used in¬ 
stead of dbhinc: and the length of time before is sometimes expressed by the 
ablative joined with hicoviUe; as, Paucis his didbus, or paucis illis didbus,— 
n few days ago. 

Rem. 3. The time at which any thing is done, is sometimes expressed by the 
neuter accusative id, with a genitive; as, Vdnit id tempdris. Cic. So with a 
preposition; Ad id didi. Cell. See § 212, R. 3. 

Ri.'M. 4. (a.) The time at or idthin which any thing is done, is sometimes, 
with personal subjects, expressed by </«, with the ablative; as, De lertid Algilia 
ad hastes contendit, —in the third watch. Cies. Ut jugiilent hdinfnes surgunt de 
node latrdnes. Hor. So, also, with sub ; as, Ne sub ipsa prdfectidi e mUites <ppi- 
ium irrumpdrent,—at the very time cf his departure. Cais. Sub adventu Roman- 
^rum. While the Romans were arriving. Id. 

(b.) The time within which anv thing occurs, is also sometimes expressed by 
rn^ra with the accusative; as, f)imidiam partem ndtianum subdgit intra viginti 
dies. Plaut Intra ddcimum diem, quam Pkdras venerat^ In less than ten days 
\fter,.. Liv 


22 


E54 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE OF PLACE. 


§ 254, 255. 


Rkm. 6. The time within which a thing happens, is often expressed by the 
ablative with in; especially (a) in connection with numerals; as, Bis in die 
i^turum JieH; vix ter in anno nuntium audire; and (6), as in the use of intra^ 
to denote tliat the event happened before the time specified had fully expired. 

Rem. 6. Instead of in adOlescentid, jurentute, si7iectu(e, etc., instat¬ 
ing tlie age at which a person performed any action, the concretes jmer, dd6- 
Uscens, j'fivenis, jenex, etc., are commonly joined to the verb; as, On. Po7npetm, 
adolescens se et pdtrem consilio sei-vdvit.—ho, also, adjectives ending in emrius 
are sometimes used in stating the number of years a person has lived; as, 
Clc^iv sexdf/endrius. 

For the ablative denotir g duration of time, see J 236. 


ABLATIVE-OF PLACE. 

§ The name of a to^vn in xcliich any thing is said id 

or to be done^ if of the third declension or plural number, is 
put in the ablative witliout a preposition ; as, 

Alexander Babylone est mortuus, Alexander died at Babylon. Cic. IntSriril 
multum —Thebis nutritus an Argis,—whether brought up at Thebes or at Aigos. 
Hor. Ndtus Tibure vel Gabiis. Id. 

Remark 1. ‘ In the country ’ is expressed by rure, or more commonly by 
ruri, without a preposition; as. Pater f ilium ruri hdUtdre jussit. Cic. With an 
adjective only rure is used; as, Interdum nuydns rure pdtemo. Hor. Cf. 

§ 221, N. 

Rem. 2. (a.) The preposition in is sometimes expressed with names of 
towns; as. In Philippis quidam nuncidvit. Suet. 

(6.) Names of towns of the first and second declension, and singular number, 
and also ddmus and humus, are in like manner sometimes put in the ablative 
without in. See § 221, R. 2 and R. 3.—So, also, terra tnarlque, by land and by 
sea. In is also frequently omitted with Idco and lods, especiaUv when joined 
with an adjective and having the meaning of ‘ occasion ’; as, 'Hoc Idco, multis 
Idcis, etc.—joined with an adjective, as hoc, prlmo, etc., is used without 
in when the whole book is meant, and with in when only a portion is referred 
to. An ablative of place joined with tdto, tdtd, tdtis, is generally used without 
in; as, Urbe tdtd gemitus jit. Cic. Tdtd Asid vdgdtur. la. Tdto mdi'i. Id. But 
in such cases in is sometimes used. So cunctd Asia. Liv. 

Rem. 3. Before the names of countries, of nations used for those of countries, 
and of all other places in which any thing is said to be or to be done, except 
those of towns, and excepting also the plmases specified in the first and second 
remarks, the preposition in is commonly used; as, fyhicrdtes in Thracia vixit, 
Chares in Sigeo. Nep. Jtui'e ego viventem, tu dlcis in urbe bedtilm. Hor. Aio hoc 
fieii in Graecia. Plant. In Bactrianis SogdianisiyMe U7‘bes corulidit. Lucus Lu 
'''urbe fuit. Virg. But it is sometimes omitted by writers of every class and 
^ period; as, AllUtes stdtms castris hdbrbnt. Sail. Mag7iis in laudibus ftiii tdtd 
Grsecia. Nep. Pdpuli sensus maanme theatre et spectaciilis perspezi7is est. Cic. 
Pvmpcius se o\i\ndo tenet. Id. In the poets and later prose writers lids cmis- 
Bion is of very frequent occurrence not only with names of towns but with 
ablatives of all nouns answering to the question, where? as, Ndcita puppe 
tedens. Ovid. Jbam forte Via Saerd. Hor. Silvisque agrisque viisqne cerpdra 
fadajdce.nl. Ovid. Medio vdyeo concursum est. Liv.— FCi'is, out at the door, 
abroad, .s properly an ablative of place ; as, Foris canal. Cic. Cf. § 237, 
U. 6, (c.) 

§ 2*%^, 1. After verbs expressing or implying motion, the 

name of a town whence the motion proceeds, is pvt in the abla 
tive, without a preposition ; as, 


5 256 . 


SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE AJ^TER COMPARATIVES. 265 


Brtindlsio prdfecti sumus, We departed from Bimndisiizm. Cic. Didnysius 
Xyrannus Syracusis expulsus C&rinthi pueros ddcebat. Id. Demdrutus Tarquinios 
Corintho fiigit. Id. Accrpi tuns literns cldtns Placentia. Id. Interim Roma per 
titiras certior fit; scil. ildtns* or missns. Sail. J. 82. So, also, after a verbal 
noun; as, Narbone Cic. 

Remark 1. The ablatives domoy Tiumo, and rure or rw'i, are used 
like names of towns, to denote the place whence motion proceeds; 
as, 

Domo prdfectus, Having set out from home. Nep. Surqit liumo juvem's, 
The youth rises fr'^m the ground. Ovid. Rure hue aavenit. I'er. Si ruri veniet. 
Id. Virgil uses do7)io with wide; as, Qui ySnus f unde d’nio ? and Livy in¬ 
stead of ddmo dbesse, has esse ab ddmo. With an adjective, rure, and not ruri, 
must be U5>5d. 

Rem. 2. With names of towns and ddmus and humus, when answering the 
question ‘whence?’ ab, ex, or de, is sometimes used; as, Ab Alexnndrlu prd~ 
fectus. Cic. Ex ddmo. Id. De vliif era venisse Vienna. Mart. Ab humo. Virg. 

Rem. 3. (a.) With other names of places whence motion proceeds, ab, ex, 
or t/e, is commoidy expressed; as, Me a portu prcemlsit. Plant. Ex Asia 
transis in Eurdpam. Curt. Ex castris prdficiscuntur. Cses. De Pomptino, 
scil. pvsedio. Cic.—So, also, before names oi nations used for those of coun¬ 
tries; as, V's. ad adversdndrum hlberndcula pervenit. Nep. 

(6.) But the preposition is sometimes omitted; as, iitej-ce Macedonia oiidto. 
Liv. Classis Cypro advenit. Curt. Cessissent loco. Liv. Ni cite vicis et castellia 
proximis subventum f dret. Id. Ite sacris, pn'dperdte sacris, laurumque capillis 
pdnite. Ovid. Finibus omnes prdsilucre suis. Virg. Advolvunt ingentes montl- 
bus oi'Hos. Id. This omission of the preposition is most common in the poets 
and later prose writers. 

2. The place hy, through, or over which, after verbs of motion, com¬ 
monly follows per ; but frequently also it is put in the ablative with¬ 
out a preposition; as. 

Per Thebas Nep. Exerditum \i\do transducit. Caes. His pontibus 

pdbuldtum mittebat. Id. Trlbuni militum porta Collina urbem intrdvere sub signis, 
mediai/ue urbe agmine in Aventlnum pergunt. Liv. Legidnes Penninis Cottianis- 
que Alpibus, jpm’s monte Grsdo, trdducuntur. Tac. Eguites via breviore ^rcp. 
misi. Cic. 


ABLATIVE AFTER COMPARATIVES. 

§ 1. When two objects are compared by means of the comparative 

degree, a conjunction, as qunm, atque, etc., is sometimes expressed, and some¬ 
time ,j omitted. 

2. The comparative degi’ee, when quatn is omitted, is followed 
by the ablative of that with which the comi)arison is made; as, 

Nihil esi virtfxte formdsius. Nothing is more beantifnl than virtue. Cic. Quis 
C. Laslio edmior? Who is more courteous than C. Lselius? Id. 

Remark 1. The person or thing with which the subject of a pro¬ 
position is compared, is usually put in the ablative; as, 

Sidcre pidchrior illc e.^t, tu lei'ior cortice. Hor. ViUus argentum est auro, vir- 
utibus aurum. Id. Tullus Ilost'dius ferdcior Romi'ilo fuit. Liv. Lacilma nih& 
litius drescit. Cic. Quid nuigis est durum sixr.o, quid mollius xindsi'^ Ovid. Hoo 
nemo fuit minus ineptus. Ter. AU)dnum, Meecenas, slve Fdlernum ie mdgis ap 
Dt>sltis deleciai. Hor. 


2.'»6 SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE AFTER fOMPA IlATIVES. § 25(a 

Rem. 2. An object with which a person or thing addressed is compared, is 
also put in the ablative ; as, 0 fans Bandusvx, splendidioi' vitro! Hor. 

Rkm. 3. Sometimes the person or tiling with Avhich the subject of a proposi¬ 
tion is compared, instead of following it in the ablative, is connected with it by 
ywon^ and it is then put in the same case as the subject, wliether in the nomi¬ 
native or the accusative; as, Ordfio quam habitus J’uit miserabiivyi'. Cic. 
Ajfimao ntdlam esse iKudtia ampliorem qw-Am e'Axn. Id. So, also, when an abla¬ 
tive in the case absolute takes the place of the subject; as, Eodem ctoce, 
jdura, quam gregario inilite, tolerante. Tac. 

Rem. 4. If the person or thing which is compared with any object is neither 
the subject of the sentence nor the person addressed, quam is common]}' used, 
and the object which follows it is tlien put in the nominative with sum, ana 
sometimes in an oblique case to agree with the object with which it is com¬ 
pared; as, quam ego sum, suj>p6no tlbi. Plant. E(/o hdmlnem caili- 

didretn v'tdi rn'miuem quam Phormionem. Ter. Adventus hostium full agris, 
quam urbi tevribiiior. Liv. Omnes fonies ajstate, quam hieme, sunt pelidiares. 
Flin. Themistoclis nmnen, quam Soldnis, est illustrhis. Cic.—The Ibllowing 
example illustrates both the preceding constructions:— Ut tibi mullo majori, 
quam African us fuit, me nan mid',o mindrem quam Laelium futile et in repMica 
et in dmlcitid adjuntlum esse pdtldre. Cic. 

Rem. 5. (n.) The person or thing with which the object of an active vero is 
compare !, though usually connected with it by quam, (R. 4,) is sometimes put 
in the ablative, especially in the poets, and frequently also even in prose, if the 
object is a pronoun, particularly a relative pronoun; as, Attdlo, quo grdvidrem 
tnimlcum non hubui, sdrorem dedit. He gave his sister to Attains, than whom^ etc. 
Curt. Hoc nihil fp'dtius f deere pdtes. Cic. Causam enim suscqnsti ontiquiovem 
memoria tud. Id. ElxUji mdnumentum sere perennius. Hor. Cur dllvum san¬ 
guine \iperTno cauthis vital f Id. Quid priusdlcam sblltis jxrrentis laudibusV Id. 
Mdjora viribus nudes. Virg. Nullavi saerd, vite prius severis arborem. Hor. 
Nullos his mallem ludos spectasse. Id. § 178, 3. 

(6.) The ablative instead of quam is never used with any other oblique case 
except the accusative, but qiinm is sometimes found, even where the ablative 
might have been used; as, Melior tiitiorque est certa pax quam sph'dta victoria. 
Liv. After quam, if the verb cannot be supplied from the preceding sentence, 
est, fuit, etc., must be added; as, Hcec verba sunt M. Varrdnis, quam fuit 
Claudius, doclidris. Gell. Drusum Germdmcum mindrem ndtu, quam ipse erat, 
frdtrem dmisit. Sen. 

Rem. 6. (a.) Afinus, plus, and amplius with numerals, and with other words 
v^enoting a certain measure or a certain portion of a thing, are used either with 
or without quam, generally as indeclinable words, without influence upon the 
construction, but merely to modifv the number; as. Non plus quam qudtuor 
millia efuf/erunt, not effuyit. Liv. Victores antlqui non sunt usi qdus quam qud- 
tvuyr cdldribus, not plunbus. Cic. 

(6.) is frequently omitted with all cases; as, Afimis duo millia liOml- 

num ex tanto exercUu effuyerunt. Liv. M'dites lidmdni sespe qdus dlmididti men- 
sis dbdria ferebant. Cic. Quum jdus annum ceyer fuisset. Liv. Setlecim non 
amplius ex> anno leyidnibus defensum imperium est. Id. 

(c.) These comparatives, as in the preceding example, are sometimes in¬ 
serted between the numeral and its substantive, and sometimes, when joitied 
witl a negative, they follow both, as a sort of apposition; as, Quiuque milUa 
armdidrum, nun amplius, relictum erat pnesidium, —a garrison of five thousand 
soldiers, not more. Liv. So, also, luiiyius; Qesa" certior est factus, maynai 
Galldrum cdqjias non longius millia passuum octo ab hlberuis suis abfuisse. Cics. 
See § 236. 

id.) ^ The ablative is sometimes used Avith these as with other comparatives; 
as, Dies triyinta aid q^lus eo in navi fui. Ter. Triennio amplius. Cic. Huia 
amplius moliebantur. Id. Ne lonyius triduo ab castris absit. Cses. Apud ^vot 
turn longius anno remdnere uno in loco incdlendi causa, licet. Id. Quum initio non 
amplhis dubbus millibus hdbuisset. Sail. 


§ 25fi. SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE AFTER COMPARATIVES. 


25? 


Rem. 7. Quam is in like manner sometimes omitted without a change of 
case, after wiryoy, Tnfnor, and some other comparatives; as, Obsides ue mimres 
octrrfium demim aiinorum neu majores quinum quadragemim,.... of not less 
than eighteen, nor more than forty-tive years of age. Liv. Aa; urbdno exercitu^ 
qui vilnorts (luim/ne et tr'ujinta annis erant, in naves impostli sunt. The genitivj 
and ablative, in these and similar examples, are to be referred to § 211, K. 6. 
Longius ab urbe mille passuum. Liv. Amios nutas mdgis quddrdginta. Cic. 

Rem. S. When the second member of a comparison is an infinitive or a 
clause, quam is always expressed; as, Nihil est in dlcendo majus quam ut fiiveat 
oratbri auditor. Cic. 

Ricm. 9. Certain nouns, participles, and adjectives,—as djnnione^ spe, ex^ 
^Tectdttone, fide., —t/icto, sdlito, — ceqao, C7’edimli, nectssdt'io, ver’O, and justo, — are 
ase(l_ in a peculiar manner in the ablative after comparatives; as, Opinione 
celerius venturus esse dicitur, —sooner than is expected. Coes. Dicto citius tUmi- 
da aquura pldcnt, Quicker than the word was spoken. Virg. Injdnas nrdvim 
fequo habere. Sail. 

(a.) 'I’hese ablatives supply the place of a claxrse; thxis, gravius ceqiio is 
e.q\x\\i\\e\\t to grdcius quam (piod (je<ptuiii est. They are ofteti omitted; as, Tiii- 
misiotits iTberius vlvcbat, soil. a;quo. Nep. In such cases, the comparative may 
be translated by the positive degree, with too, quite, or rather, as in the above 
example—‘He lived too freely,’or ‘rather freely.’ Vdluptas quum major est 
atque longior, omne dnimi lumen exstingtiit, —w'hen it is too great, and of too long 
continuance. Cic. So iristior, scil. s 'dlito, rather sad. 

{b.) The English word ‘ still,’joined with comparatives, is expressed by 
Uiam or vel, and only in later prose writers by udhuc; as, Ut in corpunbus may- 
rue dissimiliiudines sunt, sic in unwiis exsistunt majores etiam vdrietdtes. Cic. 

Rem. 10. {a.) With inferior, the dative is sometimes used, instead of the 
ablative; as, Vir nulla arte cuiquam inferior. Sail. The ablative is also found; 
as, Ut humdnos casus virtute inferidres putes. Cic. But usually inferior is fol¬ 
lowed by ; as, Tlmdtheus belli laude non infeinorfuit, quam pater. Cic, 
Gratia non inferior, quam qui umquam fuerunt amplissimi. Id. 

{b.) Qudlis, ‘ such as,’ with a comparative, occurs poetically instead of the 
relative pronoun in the ablative; as, Nai'do perunctum, quale non perfectivA 
mere Idbordi'int mdnus; instead of qtio. Hor. Epod. 5, 59. Aninue quales neque 
candldiores terra tulit; for qmbus. Id. Sat. 1, 5, 41. 

Rem. 11. Quatti pro is used after comparatives, to express disproportion; as, 
Prcelium atrocius quam pro numero pngnantium. The battle was more severe 
than was proportionate to the number of the combatants. Liv. Minor, quam 
pro tumultu, ccedes. Tac. 

Rem. 12. When two adjectives or adverbs are compared with each other, 
both are put in the comparative; as, Triumphus clarior quam gratior, A tri¬ 
umph more famous than acceptable. Liv. Fortius/ 7 Mrtr/i fclicius bellum gesse- 
runt. So, also, when the comparative is formed by means oi'mdgis; as, 5Ltgi8 
SLudncter quam fivixte ad dicendum veniebat. Cic.—Tacitus xises the positive in 
one part of the proposition; as, Speciem excelsce glorice vOhementius q7iam cauta 
ajpetebat; or even in both; as, Claris mdjdribus quam vctustis. 

Rem. 13. {a.) Pdtius and mdgis are sometimes joined pleonastically with 
malle and prcestdre, and also with comparatives; as, Ab omnibus se dcsertos p^ 
tins quam abs te dPfensos esse mrdunt. Cic. Q,ui niagis vere vincere (mam diu 
imperdre mfilit. Liv. Ut emdri potius (piam servire praxstaret. Cic. Mild quorvit 
fuga potius quam ulla qirOcincia esset optatior. Id. Quis magis (jueat esse bea- 
tiorV Virg. 

(b.) So, also, the prepositions prce, ante, prceter, and supra, are sometimea 
used with a comparative; as, t'ims proe ceteris fortior exsurgit, Apul. Scelire 
a:ite alios immdnior omnes. Virg. They also occur with a superlative; a.s, 
4nte alios cdrissimus. Nep. As these prepositions, when joined with the 
positive, denote comjiarison, they seem in such examples to be rodundant, 
See S 127. 


22* 


258 


SYNTAX.—ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 


§257 


Kem. 14. Alius is sometimes in poetry treated as a comparative, and con¬ 
strued with the ablative instead of atquc with the nominative or accusative; 
as, Neve putes aliuin sapiente hbnoque bedtum. Hor. Alius Lydpqx). Id. But 
compare | 251, N. 

Kem. 15. By the poets ac and atque are sometimes used insteai of quam 
after comparatives; as. Quanto constnntiov idem in ritiis, tnnto Uims miser ao 
prior ille^ qui^ etc. Hor. Arctius atque hederd procera adstrinyilur ilex. Id. 

Rem. 16. The degree of difference between objects compared ifl 
expressed by the ablative:— 

(1.) Of substantives; as. Minor wno mense. Younger by one month. Ilor. 
Sesqulpede quam tu lonyior, Taller than you by a foot and a half. I’liut. 
Hibernia dlmldio minor quam Britannia. Ctes. Dimidio mlnbris constdbit, It 
will cost less by half. Cic. Quam mdlestum est uno digito qdus habere .'....to have 
one finger more, i. e. than we have, to have six fingers. Id.—but the expression 
is ambiguous, as it might mean ‘ to have more than one finger.’ Superat capita 
€t cervicibus altis. Virg. 

(2.) Of neuter adjectives of quantity and neuter pronouns, in the singular 
number. Such are tanto, quanto^ quo, eo, hoc, midto, qynrvo, patdo, niniio, dli- 
quanto, tanliilo, (iltero tanto (twice ns much); as, Multo doctior es qiatre. Thou 
art (by) much more learned than th}’- fixther. The relative and demonstrative 
words, quanto — tanto, quo — eo, or quo — hoc, signifving ‘ bv how much—by so 
much,’ are often to be translated bv an emphatic the; as, Quanto sumus supeid- 
bres, tanto nos submissius gerdmus, The more eminent we are, the more humbly 
let us conduct ourselves: lit. by hoxv much—by so much—. Cic. Eo grdvior 
est dolor, quo culpa est mdjoi'. Id. But the relative word generally precedes 
the demonstrative; as, Quo difficilius, hoc proecldmus. Id. Poetically, also, 
quam magis — tarn mdgis are used instead of quanto mdgis — tanto mdgis. Virg. 
in. 7, 787: and quam mdgis — tanto mdgis. Lucr. 6, 459.— Iter multo fadlius, — 
much easier. Cses. Parvo brevius, A little shorter. Plin. Eo mdgis, The more. 
Cic. Ec minus. Id. Istoc mdgis vdpuldbis. So much the more. Plaut. Via altero 
tanto hngior, —as long again. Nep. LIulto id maximum fuii. Liv. 

(3.) The ablative of degree is joined not only with comparatives but with 
verbs which contain the idea of comparison; as, mdlo, proesto, supero, excello, 
antecello, antecedo, and others compounded with ante; and also with ante and 
post, in the sense of ‘ eaidier ’ and ‘ later ’; as, Multo prcestat. Sail. Post paulo, 
A little after. Id. Multo ante lucis adventum. Long before—. Id. Multis jynrtv- 
bus is equivalent to multo; as, Numero multis partibus esset inferior. Cass. 

Note. The accusatives midhim, tantum, quantum, and dliquanium, are some¬ 
time^ n'sed instead of the corresjwiiding abhitives; .as, Aliquantum est ad rem 
aiiiliio. I'cr. .Multuui improhidres sunt. Plant. Quantum ddnui inf erior, txn- 
tnm glorii snpi'nur evasit. \’al. Ma.x. Cf. § 282, (3.)—So longe, ‘far,’ is fre- 
que ally used ior muUo; as, Longe \drg. Longe et mulium antecelUre, 

Cic, So, pars pedis sesqui nuljor, —longer by one half. Id. 

ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 

§9,17. A noun and a participle are put in the ablative, 
called absolute, to denote the time, cau.se, means, or concomitant 
of an action, or the condition on which it depends; as, 

Pythdgbras, Tarquinio regnante, in Jtdliam venit, Pythagoras came into Italy, 
ir the reign of Tarquin. Cic. Lupus, stimulante fame, caqdat bv'de. Hunger in¬ 
citing, the Avolf seeks the fold. Ovid. Mllites, peedre e knginquidribus rids 
adacto, extremam fdmem sustentdbant. Caes. Bac dratione iwDita, concilium 
•Jimlsit Id. Qalli, re cognita, obsididnem relinquunt. Id. Virtute excopta^ nihil 
Tmicif*dprcbstdbiliusputbtis. Cic. 



§ 257. 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 


259 


Note 1. 1 he Latin ablative absolute may be expressed in English by a sim- 
Dar construction, but it is commonly better to translate it by a clause connect* 
Bibx u'fien, since, while, nlthontjh, after, ns, etc., or by a verbal substantive: 
as, Te adjurnnle. With thy assistance. Nun—nisi te adjnrante. Only with thj 
assistance, or not without tliy assistance. Tc non ailjucante, Without thy as« 
sistance. Cf. ^ 274, U. 5, (c.) 

Hem ARK 1. -This construction is an abridged form of expression, 
equivalent to a dependent clause connected by quum, si, etsi, qiiam- 
quam, quamvLs, etc. 

Thus, for Tarqulnio regnnnte, the expression dum Tarqninim regndhat might 
be used; for hac ordtione hdbitd ; — quum hanc drdtidnem hObuisstt, or quurn hetc 
drdtio hdbitn esset, — conciliion dimisit. The ablative absolute may always be 
resolved into a i)roposition, by making the noun or pronoun the subject, and 
the participle the predicate. 

Rem. 2. This construction is common only wilh present and per- . 
feet participles. Instances of its use with participles in rtis and dus 
are comparatively rare; as, 

Cmsare venturo, Phosphdre, redde diem. Jlart. Imipturis fam infestis n^ 
tionlbus. Liv. Quum cimcio jtlausum, meo nomine rccitaudo, dedi.ssct, —when my 
name was pronounced. Cic. Quum immolnnda Iphigenia (ristis Calchas esset. 
Id. Quis est enim, qui, nullis qff'icii praiceptis tradendis, j)hilds6phu7n $e audeat 
dicere —without propounding any rules of duty. Cic. Cf. § 274, K. 5, (C.) and 
R. 9. 

Rem. 3. (a.) A noun is put in the ablative absolute, only when it 
denotes a dilferent person or thing from any in the leading clause. 
Cf. § 274, 8, («.) 

(b.) Yet a few examples occtir of a deviation from this principle, especially 
with a substantive pronoun referring to some word in the leading clause; as, 
Se audiente, sci'lbit Thucydides. Cic. Legio ex castris Vai'rdnis, adstante el in 
spectante ipso, signa sustulit. Caes. Me duce, ad hunc vdti flnem, me millte, 
veni. Ovid. So M. Porcius Cato, vivo qudque Scipione, alldtrdre ejus inagnitudi- 
nem sdlitus drat. Liv. 

Note 2. Two participles must not be put together in the ablative ab.solute 
agreeing with the same noun. Thu‘;, we may say Porcia scepe marWim cogi- 
tanteui inrenerat. but not, Porcia marito engitante invento. 

Note 3 Instead of tlie ablative absolute denoting a cause, an accusative 
with db or pi’opter occurs in Livy and in later writers; as, Cdndpum coudidi're 
^rn tani, ob scpultum illic rectorem navis Canupum. Tac. Decemviri librbi 
otbylllnos iuspicere jussi sunt propter territos homines nOms prddigiis. Liv. 

Rem. 4. Tho ablative absolute serves to mark the time of an ac- 
ticn, by reference to that of another action. If the present particijile 
is used, the time of the action expressed by the particijtle, is the same 
as that of the princijtal verb. The perfect particijtle and the future 
in rus, denote respectively an action as prior or subsequent to that 
expressed by the princq)al verb. 

Thus In The preceding exam.ples— Pgtlidndras. Tarquini: regnaiite, in Ttdliam 
tenit, r\'lliagoras came into Italy durmg the reign of Tarquhuus. Gidli, re cog- 
nita, obsldimem relinquunt, The Gauls, having learned the fact, abau Jon the 
Page. So, i^ea; dprm won ntsi migraturo examine fdr as proved it. The kmg-bea 
iocs not go abroad, except when a swai'tn is about to emigrate. Fliu. 


2C0 


SYNTAX.-ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 


§25f 


Note 4. Non prius qnam^ non nisi, ut, vllut, and tamquam, ate sometime*' 
joined with tlie participle; as, Tiberius excessum Augusii non prins palnm fecit, 
(juara Aqripixt jiivene inth'eifvpto^ —not until. Suet. GalU heti, ut explorata viC’ 
torid, ad vaUra Rdmdnorum qycrijunt. Cats. Antiochus, tamquain non trunslturit 
in Asiam Jiouidnis, etc. Liv. 

Rkm. 5. (n.) The construction of the ablative absolute with the 
perfect passive particijile, arises freipiently from the waut of a paiv 
ticiple of that tense in the active voice. 

Thus, for Ciesar, having sent forward the cavalni’', was following with aU his 
orces,’ Ave find, ‘Ctesa?’, equitatu pratmisso, subsequebdtur omnibus copiis.' 

(b.) As the perfect participle in Latin may be used for both the perfecst 
actiA’e and the perfect jiassive participles in English, its meaning can, in many 
instances, be determined only by the connection, since the agent with n or cw 
is generally not expressed Avith this participle in the ablatiA-e absolute, as it ia 
Avitli other parts of the passi\'e A'oice. Thus, Ccesar, his dictis, concilium dlmmt, 
might be rendered, ‘ Caesar, havintj said this, or this having been said (by some 
other persoy), dismissed the assembly.’ 

(c.) As the perfect participles of deponent verbs correspond to perfect active 
particijiles in English, no such necessity exists for the use of the ablatiA'e ab¬ 
solute A'.dth them; as, Ccesar, hxc \6cutus, concilium dhnisit. In the folloAving 
example, both constructions are united: ltdque....agros Jiembrum dejidpulati, 
omnibus vlcis, cedificiisgue iucensis. Caes. 

Rem. 6. The perfect participles of neuter deponent verbs, and some also of 
actiA'e deponents, Avhich admit of both an active and a passive sense, are used 
in the ablatiA’e absolute; as, Orta luce. Caes. Vel exstincto vel elapso animo, 
nullum residere sensum. Cic. Tarn multis glarnam cjus adeptis. Rlin. Llteras 
ad exei'Cltus, tamquain adepto principatu, misit. Tac. 

Rem. 7. («.) As the verb sum has no present participle, two 
nouns, or a noun and an adjective, which might be the subject and 
predicate of a dependent clause, are put in the ablative absolute 
without a participle; as. 

Quid, adolescentulo duce, efficere possent. What they could do under the 
guidance of a youth. Cses. !Me suasbre atque impulsbre, hoc factum. By my 
advice and instigation. Plant, llannibdle vivo. While Hannibal Avas liA’ing. *Nep. 
Jnvltd Minerva, In opposition to one’s genius. Cic. Ccelo sei'cno, When the 
weather is clear. Virg. Jl/e Without my knoAA’ledge. Cic. With names 

of office, the concrete noun is commonly used in the ablatiA’e absolute, rather 
than the con'esponding abstract Avith ill to denote the time of an event; as, 
Romain venit Mario consiile. He came to Rome in the consulship of ^Marius. Cic. 

(6.) d'he nouns so used as predicates are by some grammarians considered 
as su])plying the place of particii)les by expressing in tlieinsclves the action of 
a verb. Such are dux, edmes, adjutor and adjutrix, auctor, testis, judex, inter- 
pres, mdgister and mdgistra, jrnecepior and preeceptrix; as, dace natt ra, in the 
sense of ducente ndtiird, Under the guidance of nature; judice Poh/iio, According 
to the judgment of Polybius. 

Rem. 8. A clause sometimes supplies the place of the noun; as, Nendum 
comperio quam in regibnem venisset rex. LIa’. Aiullto venisse nuncium. Tac. 
Vfde dicto. Ovid. 'J’liis construction, howcA’cr, is confined to a feAv participles; 
as, audito, cognito, comperio, expldrdto, desperdio, nuncidlo, dicio^ edicto. But the 
dace of sue!) participle is sometimes sup])Iied by a neuter adjective in the ab- 
aitiye; as, Incerto pris tenebris quid petereni. Liv“ Cf. R. 7, {a'.) Hand enquam 
dnbio quin hostium essent. Id. Juxta pei'lculOso vera an ficta prbmC-ret. Tac. 

_ Rem. 9. (1.) The noun in the ablative, like the subject nominatiA’e, is some¬ 
times wanting; {a) AA’hen it is contained in a preceding clause; as, Atticus Se^rvi, 
Vam Bi'uti vidtrern, non nUnus post mortem ejus, quam flbrente, cdluit, scil. eo, 


§268. 


SYNTAX.-CONNECTION OF TENSES. 


26 i 

i. e Brufo. Nep. (6) When it is the general -word for person or persons fol¬ 
lowed by a descriptive relative clause; as, Hannibal Jhcrum cofias trajecit, 
praemissis, qni Alpium trnnsitvs specularentur. Liv. (c) When the participle in 
the neuter singuliir corres])onds to tbe impersonal construction of neuter verba 
in the passive voice; as In nouiis (ratispressu, multnm certato, Bardemnes ricit 
Tac. errato, Jiidla renin, rede facto, exit/un Ians propdnltnr. Cic. 

no^ndum pfdam facto, t'ici imyriuajue proniiscue complorCrentur. Liv. Xarn ^ntii 
wtdte ed sum, ut non siet, peccato, mi ipnusci cequuni; i. e. si jpeccdiuni fuerit. i er. 
Gf. ^ 274, K. 5, (6.) 

(2.) So in descriptions of the weather; as, Tranqnillo, scil. mart, the soa 
being tranquil. Liv. Serena, scil. coelo, the sky being clear. Id. Ardnei s^reno 
texunt, nubilo texunt, —in clear and in cloudy weather. Plin. Substantivea 
Wl ten used thus are to he considered as ablatives of time; as, Cdmitiis, ludi-a, 
Circensibus. Suetonius has used proscriptidne in the sense of ‘ during the pro¬ 
scription.’ So pace et Principe. Tac. Imperio qydjmli lidmdni. Cces. 

Kem. 10. This ablative is sometimes connected to the preceding clause by a 
conjunction; a>, Gesa/-, quamquam obsidiCaie J/ussiZ/ce rctardaute, bred tdmen 
omnia subeyit. Suet. Decemviri non ante, quain perlatis legibus, dcpOslturos im- 
perium esse aiebant. Liv. 

Rem. 11. A predicate ablative is sometimes added to passive participles of 
natmny, chooriny, etc. § 210, (3.); as, Hasdrubdlc imperature suffecto. Liv. 


CONNECTION OF TENSES. 

§ S58. Tenses, in regard to their connection, are divided 
into two classes— principal and historical. 

A. The principal tenses are, the present the perfect defnitey 
and tlie two futures. 

B. The historical, which are likewise called the preterite 
tenses (§ 145, N. 2.), are the imperfect, the historical perfect, 
and the pluperfect. 

I. In the connection of leading and dependent clauses, only 
tenses of the same class can, in general, be united with each other. 
Hence:— 

1. A principal tense is followed by the present and perfect defi¬ 
nite, and by the periphrastic form with sim. And :— 

2. A preterite tense is followed by the imperfect and pluperfect, 
and by the periphrastic form with essem. 

Note. The periphrastic forms in each class supply the want of subjunctive 
futures in the regular conjugatign. 

The following examples will illustrate the preceding rules 

(a.) In the fi'rst class. Scio quid dyas. Scio quid eyeris. Scio quid aciurus 
ds.—Audlvi quid dyas, I have heard what you are doing. Audlvi quid eyeris 
Aiidlvi quid aciurus sis.—Audiam quid dyas, etc. —Audlvcro quid dyas, etc. 

(6.) In the second class. Sciebom qidd dyeres. Sciebam quid eyisses. Scirbam 
gtiid aciurus esses.—Audlvi quid dyeres, I Iieard what you were doing. Audim 
quid eyisses. Audlvi quid aciurus esses —Audlveram quid dqeres, elc. 

The following may serve as additional examples in the first class; viz. of principal 
le/wts depending on,—1. 

(1.) The Fkesknt; as. Non sum Ua hebes, ut tsZtfc dicam. Cic. Quantum 
ddldrem acceperim, tu existimdre potes. Id. Nec dubito quin reditm ejus reipub’ 
licce sdlutiri' futurus sit. Id. 


262 


SYNTAX.—CONNECTION OF TENSES. 


§258. 


(2.) The Perfect Defijtete; as, Satis provisum est, ut ne quid dgere pos- 
Bint. Cic. Quis musicis, mis luiic studio lilerainim se dedldit, qtdn omneni illaruni 
artium run comprehenderit. Id. Beftctidnes soils prsedictae sunt, qixe, quanUR 
quandv futdrse sint. Id. 

(3.) The Futures: as. Sic /dcilltme, quanta ordtorum sit, semperque fueril 
paiu^itas, judieahit. Cic. Ad quos dies redUurus sim, scribam ad te. Id. S\ 
Rcivrls aspidtati li'itPre uspiam, et velle cdiqutm iniprudejitem super earn assldere, 
cujus mors Ubi eimlmientum factura sit, imprdbe feceris, nisi mouaeris, nc assl* 
deat. Id. 

Tho following, also, are additional examples in the second class, viz. of preterite tenses 
depending on,—2. 

(1.) The Iiwperfect; as, Unum illud extimescebamj ne quid tzirptter 
rem, vel jam elFecissem. Cic. Non mini dubltabam, quin eas libenier lecturua 
esses, Id. 

(2.) 'Ihe Historical. Perfect; as, Veni in ejusvillam ut libros inde prora6- 
rem. Cic. Ihec quuni esseut nuntiata, Valerius classem extemqdo ad ostium Jtumi- 
nis duxit. Liv. , 

(3.) The Pluperfect; as, Pdvor ceperat miJites, ne morttferum esset tml- 
nus. I..iv. Ego ex ipso audieram, quam a te llbmcditer esset tractiitus. Cic. Non 
satis mlhi constiterat, cum dllqudne dnimi mei mdlestid, an potius libenter te Athe~ 
rus visurus essem. Id. 

Remark 1. (a.) "WTien the present is used in narration for the historical 
perfect, it may, like the latter, be followed by the imperfect; as, Legdtos mit- 
tunt, ut pdcem impetrarent. Caes. 

(6.) The present is also sometimes followed by the perfect subjunctive in its 
historical sense; as, Panchte nunc Helicdna, decs, cantusque movete, Qui beUo 
exciti reges, quce quemque secutce Complerint campos acies. Virg. 

Rem. 2. The perfect definite is often followed by the' imperfect, even when 
a pi'esent action or state is spoken of, if it is possible to conceive of it in its pro- 

f ress, and not merely in its conclusion or result; and especially when the agent 
ad an intention accompanying him from the beginning to the end of the 
action; as. Feci hoc, ut intelllgeres, I have done this that you might under- 
Btand; i. e. such was my intention from the beginning. Sunt jyhildsdpht et fue- 
runt, qui omnlno nullani hdbere censerent humdndrum rerum procurdtidnem 
deos. Cic. 

Rem. 3. (a.) The historical perfect is not regularly followed by the perfect 
Bubjunctive, as the latter is not, in general, used in reference to past action in¬ 
definite. 

(6.) These tenses are, however, sometimes used in connection, in tlie naira- 
tive of a past event, especially in Livy and Cornelius Nepos; as, Factum est 
ut plus quam colleges Miltiddes valuerit. Nep. 

(c.) The imperfect and perfect are even found together after the historical 
perfect, when one action is represented as permanent or repeated, and the 
ether si.-nply as a fact; as, Adeo nihil miseriti sunt, ut incursidnes facerent ei 
Veios in dnimo habuerint oppugndre. Liv. * 

(d.) The historical perfect may even be followed by the present, when a 
general trnth is to be expressed, and not merely one which is valid for the time 
indicated by the loading verb'; as, Antidcho pdcem petenti ad qjridres conditidnes 
nihil additum, Afriedno prcedicante, neque Romanis, si vincaiitur, dnimos minui, 
neque, si vincant, secundis rebus insoltscme. Just. 

Rem. 4. (n.) As present infinitives and present participles depend for their 
time upon the verbs with which they are connected, they are followed by such 
tenses as those verbs may require; as, Apelles pietdres qudque eos peccare 
dicebat, qui non sentirent, quid esset satis. Cic. Ad te scrips!, te leviter accusans 
m eo, quod de me dto cre(Raisses. Id. 


g259. 


SYNTAX.-INDICATIVE XC OD, 


263 


(h.) In like manner the tense of the subinnctive following the infinitive 
future is determined by the verb on which such infinitive depends; as, Soi 
Phwethonti fliio facturum se esse dixit qvia/uid optasset. Cic. 

Rem. 5. (a.) Ihe perfect infinitive folloAvs the general rule, and takes aftet 
it a principal or a preterite tense, according as it is used in the defiinte or in 
the historical sense; as, Arbitrumur nos ta praistitisse, quee rulio et doctnna 
prjpscripscrit, Cic. £st quod yaudeas te in ista Idea venisse, uhi dtiquid sdpire 
vl.ierere. Id. 

(6.) Ibit it may sometimes take a different tense, according to Rem. 2; a£ 
lia mlhi vldeor et esse Deos, et quales essent satis ostendisse. Cic. 

n. Tenses belonging to different classes may be made dependent 
on each other, when the sense requires it. 

(a.) Hence a present or perfect definite may follow a preterite, when the re¬ 
sult of a past action extends to the present time; as, Ardebat autem lhrten$iua 
u'lpiditdte dicendi sk\ nt in nullo umquani Jtngrantius sfudium vidcrim; i. e. that 
up to this time I have never seen. Cic. And, on the other hand, a preterite 
may follow a present to'express a continuing action in the jnist; as, Scitote 
oppidiun esse in Sicilia nullum^ quo in oppido non isti dclecta viuliev ad libidlnein 
esset: l^esset here alludes to the whole period of Verres’ praetorship.) Cic. 

(6.) But without violating the rule which re^^uires similar tenses to depend 
upon each other, the hypothetical imperfect subjunctive, may be followed by 
the present or perfect subjunctive, since the imperfect subjunctive refers to the 
present time; as, Memovdre possem quibus in locis maxinias hostiuni cdpias 
pdpulus Roindnns parvd mdnu fuderit. Sail. Fosse7n here differs from possum 
only by the hypothetical form of the expression. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 

§ 3^0. The indicative is used in every proposition in which 
the thing asserted is represented as a reality. 

Note. Hence it is used even in the expression of conditions and suppositions 
with si, nisi, etsi, and etiamsi, when the writer, without intimating his own 
opinion, supposes a thing as actual, or, with nisi, makes an exception, which, 
only for the sake of the inference, he regards as actual; as, J/u?-s md plane 
neyliyenda est^ si ovinlno exstinguit dnimum, ant etiarn optanda, si dliquo turn 
deducit, j/i<i .s^< f uUu'u» cetevnus. Cic. Adhuc cei’te, nisi eyo imanio, stulte omnia 
et incaute flunt. Id.—it is likewise used in interrogations. 

Remark 1. The several ten.ses have already been defined, and their usual significationa 
have been given in the pju-adignis. They are, however, sometimes otherwise rendered, 
one tense being apparently xased with the meaning of another, either in the same or in a 
different mood. Thus, 

(1.) (a.) The present is often used for the historical perfect in narration, see 
§ 115, I. 3.—(6.) It is sometimes used also for the future to denote the certainty 
of an event, or to indicate passionate emotion. SOj also, when the leading sen¬ 
tence contains the present imperative, si is often joined with the present in¬ 
stead of the future; as, Defende si pdtes. —(c.) The present is also used for the 
impel feet or perfect, wnen it is joined with dum ‘ while’; as, JJum iyo in Sid- 
lid sum, nulla stdtua dejecta est. Cic. It is even so used by Livy in transitions 
from one event to another; as, Dum in Asid btllum geritur, ne in A^tblis quidem 
quiche res fuerant. But the preterites are sometimes used with while’; 
and dum ‘ as long as ’ is regularly join 3d wdth the imperfect. 

(2.) (n.) The perfect, in its proper significatijn, i. e. as a perfect definite, 
denotes an act or state terminated at the present time. Thus Horace, at the 
close of a work, sayt, Exegi mdnumentum oei'e perennius', and Ovid, in like cir« 
ooastances, Jamg^ne dpus exegi. So, also, Panthus in Virgil, in order to de* 


SYNTAX.—INDICATIVE MOOD. 


§ 2r)9 


VJ64 

note the utter ruin of Troy, exclaims, Fuimus Trees,’ fuit Ilium i. e. We are nc 
longer Trojans, Ilium is no more.— {b.) The perfect indefinite cr historical per¬ 
fect is used in relating past events, when no reference is to he made to the 
time of other events; as, Casnr Rfihudnem transiit, Ciesar crossed the Kubicon. 
(c.) As in the epistolary style the imperfect is used instead of the j)resent, 
when an incomplete action is spoken of 14o, II. 3), so tlie hi.storical perfect 
is in like circumstances employed instead of the present, when speaking of a 
competed action. With both the imperfect and perfect, when so used, however, 
the adverbs nunc and etiamnunc may be used instead of tunc and etiaintum. 

(J.) The historical perfect is sometimes used for the pluperfect in narration; 
as, Bed postquam aspexi, illico cognovi, But after I (had) looked at it, I recog¬ 
nized it immediately. Ter.—This is the usual construction after j^ostquam or 
posiedquam^ tibi^ ubi pi'linim, ut^ tit prlnimn^ quuni prlmum, swiul, simul ut, simul 
ac, or simul attjue, all of Avhich have the signification of ‘ as soon as,’ and some¬ 
times after qyriusquam. But when several conditions are to be expressed in yjast 
time, the pluperfect is retained after these particles; as, Idem slmulac se rcmls- 
erat, neque causa suberat, quare Ctnlmi Idborem qierfcrret., luxi'triOsus reperiebCdur. 
Nep. So, also, postquam is joined with the pluperfect, when a definite time 
inteiwenes between events, so that there is no connection between them; ns, 
Hannibal anno teriio, qtostquam ddmo prbfugcrat, cum quinque ndvibus Africam 
accessit. Id.—In a very few passages the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive 
are joined Avith q^ostquam. 

(3.) The pluperfect sometimes occurs, where in English we use the historical 
perfect; as, Dixerat, et sjnssis noctis se condidit umbiis, She (had) said, and hid 
nerself in the thick shades of night. Virg. Sometimes, also, it is used for the 
historical perfect to express the rapidity with which events succeed each other; 
BO, also, for the imperfect, to denote wdiat had been and still was. 

(4.) The future indicative is sometimes used for the imperative; as, Vdlehi$^ 
Farewell. Cic. And:— 

(5.) The future perfect for the future; as, Alio Idco de drdtdrum dnimo et in- 
juriis vidtu'o, I shall see (have seen).... Cic. This use seems to result from 
viewing a future action as if already done, and intimates the rapidity with 
which it Avih be completed. 

Bicm. 2. When a future action is spoken of either in the future, or in the im¬ 
perative, or the subjunctive used imperatively, and another future action is 
connected Avith it, the latter is expressed by the f uture tense, if the actions 
relate to the same time; as, Nat dram si sequemur ducem, numquam abeiTabl- 
nms. Cic.; but by the future perfect, if the one must be completed before the 
other is perfonned; as, De Carihdgine vereri non ante desinam, quam illam ex- 
cisam esse cognovero. Cic. In English the present is often used instead of the 
future perfect; as, Fdciam si potero, I Avill do it, if I can. Ut sementem feceris, 
tta metes, As you sow, so you Avill reap. Cic. 

Rem. 3. In expressions denoting the propriety, practicability or advantage 
of an action not performed, the indicath^e of the preterites (§ 145, N. 2.) is used, 
where the English idiom Avould have led us to expect the imperfect or pluper¬ 
fect subjunctiA'e. 

(a.) This constniction occurs with the verbs dportet, rA,cesse est, debeo, conve- 
nit, possum, (Meet, licet, reor, 2 mto: and Avith par, fas, copia, cequum, justum, 

consentdneum, satis, sdtius, eequius, melius, utilius, oqyt.pilius, and ojAimum _ est 

Hrat, etc. ’ 

{b.) In this connection the imperfect indicative expresses things which are 
not, but the time for Avhich is not yet past; the historical perfect and the 
Dluperfect indicative, thinp wliich hiVA’e not been, but the time for Avhich is 
past; as. Ad mortem ie add jam prldem oportchat, i. e. thv execution avhs 
necessary and is still so; hence it ought to take place. Cic.— Longe utilius fuit 
angnstias aditus occupdre. It Avould have been much better to occupy the pass. 
Curt. Cdtillna erupit e sendtu idtimpham gavdio, quern omnlno vivum illinc exvre 
non oportuferat. Cic. 


s 260. 


SYNTAX.—SUBJUNCTIVE MOOT 


265 


^ (c.) !n both the periphrastic conjugations, also, the preterites of the indica¬ 
tive have frequently the meaning of the subjunctive; as, Tamhdna constanier 

f rmla tenenda fuit,—oxight to have been kept. Ovid. This is more common iu 
ypothetical sentences than in such as are independent. 

\d.) The indicative in such connections is retained, even when a hypothetic 
cal clause with the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive is added, and it is here 
in particular that the indicative preterites of tlie periphrastic conjugations are 
employed; as, Ciwce si dubla aut prdcul essent^ tdvieyi omnes hdnos relpiblicce con- 
fiilere decebat. Sail. Quodsi Cii. Pompeius prlvdtus esset hoc temp6i'e, iamm 
ferat mittendus. Cic.— Deleri lotus exercitus potuit, si fugientes persecuti victores 
essent. Liv. Quns nisi mdniimisisset, tormentis etiam dedendi fuerunt. Cic. Si te 
non inoeyiissem, periturus per prmeipltia fui. Petr. But the subjunctive also is 
admissible in such cases in the periplirastic conjugations. 

Rem 4. (1.) The preteidtes of the indicative are often used for the pluper¬ 
fect subj'unctive, in the conclusion of a conditional clause, m order to render a 
description more animated. They are so used, 

(c.) When the inference has already partly come to pass, and would have 
been completely realized, if something else had or had not occurred, whence 
the adverb is frequently added; as. Jam, fames quam pesUlentia tristior 
erat; ni annonce f dret subxentum^ —would have been worse. Liv. The same is 
expressed by the verb ccepi instead oi Jam; as, Bntanni drcumlre terga vincen- 
tium coeperant, ni, e^. Tac. And without ; Effigies Pisdnis iraxerantin 
Gemmias ac diveUebant (would have entirely destroyed them) ni, etc. Id. 

(b.) The perfect and pluperfect are likewise used in this sense, and a thing 
whicli was never accomplished is thus, in a lively manner, described as com¬ 
pleted; as, Et peractum erat bellum sine sanguine,, si Pompeium opprimere 
Brumlisii (Ciesar) pdtuisset. Hor.—The imperfect indicative is rarely used, 
also, for the imperfect subjunctive, when this tense is found in the hypotheti¬ 
cal clause; as, Stultum erat mdnd'e, nisi fierei. Quint.—Sometimes, "also, the 
preterites of the indicative are thus used in the condition-; as, At fmrat melius^ 
si ie puer iste tenebat. Ovid. See § 261, R. 1. 

(2.) ‘I ought’ or ‘I should,’ is expressed by the indicative of debeo, and p>os- 
sum is in like manner often used for possem; as. Possum persequi multa oblectd- 
mtnla rerum rusticdrum, sed, etc., I might speak of the many pleasures of hus- 
ba idry, but, etc.; and it is usual in like manner to say, difficile est, hngum e«<, 
infinitum est^ e. g. narrdre, etc., for, ‘ it would be difficult,’ ‘ it would lead too 
far,’ ‘ there would be no end,’ etc. 

(3.) The indicat^’O is used in like manner after many general and relative 
expressions, especially after the pronouns and relative adverbs which are 
either doubled or have the suffix cumque; as, quisguis, quotguot, qulcumquey 
dtut, utcumque, etc., see 139,6, (3.) and 191,1. R. 1,(6.); as, Quidquid id est^ 
timeo Ddnaos et dona f erentes. Virg. Quern sors cumque ddbit, lucre appdne. Hor. 
Sed quoquo mddo sese illud hdbet. But however that may be. Cic.—In like man¬ 
ner sentences connected by sive—sive commonly have the verb in the indica¬ 
tive, unless there is a special reason for using the subjunctive; as, Sive vamm 
< st, sive falsum, mihi quidem ita renunddtum est. Later writers however use 
the subjunctive both with general relatives, etc., and with sive — sive. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

The subjunctive mood is used to express an action 
or state simply as conceived by the mind. 

Note. The subjunctive character of a proposition depends, not upon its sub¬ 
stance, but upon its form. ‘ 1 believe,’ ‘ 1 suppose,’ are only conceptions, but 
my believing and supposing are stated as facts, and, of course, are expressed 
by means oi the indicative. When, on the other hand, I say, ‘ I should b<v 

aa 


266 


SYNTAX.—SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


§260 


lieve,’ ‘I should suppose,’ the acts of believing and supposing are repiesentc^ 
not as facts, but as mere conceptions. Hence the verb that expresses the pur¬ 
pose cr intention for which another act is perfoni ed, is put in the subjunctive, 
since it expresses only a conception; as, Edo ul vfvara, I eat that 1 may live 
This mood takes its name from its being commonly used in subjoined or de¬ 
pendent clauses attached to <-he main clause of a sentence by a suboi clinate 
connective. In some cases, however, it is found in independent clauses, or in 
such, at least, as have no obvious dependence. 

I. The subjunctive, in some of its connections, is to be translated 
by the indicative, particularly in indirect questions, in clauses expres¬ 
sing a result, and after adverbs of time ; as, 

R6ga$ me quid tnstis sim,—why I am sad. Tac. Stelldrnm tanta est multi- 
tSdo. ut n^merdn n<m possint,—that they cannot be counted. Q,uum Qesar esset 
in (xaliid, When Csesar was in Gaul. Cjbs. 

II. The subjunctive is used to express what is contingent or hy- 
pothalical, including possibility, power, liberty, will, duty, and desire. 

Remark 1. The tenses of the subjunctive, thus used, have the significations which 
have been given in the paradigms, and are, in general, not limited, iu regard to time, 
like the corresponding tenses of the indicative. Thus, 

(1.) The present may refer either to present or future time; as, Medidcribfu 
et quis igncAcas vltiis teneor, I am subject to moderate faults, and such as you 
may excuse. Hor. Oral a Gesdre ut det sibi veniam, He begs of Csesar that he 
would give him leave. Caes. 

(2.) The imperfect may relate either to past, present, or future time; as, 
Si fata fuissent cadcrem, If it had been my fate that I should fall. Virg 
8\ possem, sdnior essem, I would be wiser, if I could. Ovid. Ceteros raperem 
(i prostenierem. The rest I would seize and prostrate. Ter. 

(3.) The perfect .subjunctive has always a reference to present time, and is 
equivalent to the indicative present or perfect definite; as, Errarim fortusse. 
Perhaps I may have erred. Plin.—When it has a future signification it is not 
to be accounted a perfect, but the subjunctive of the future perfect. See Rem. 
i and 7, (1.) But compare § 258, R. 1, (A) and R. 3, (b.) 

(4.) The pluperfect subjunctive relates to past time, expressing a contin¬ 
gency, which is usually future with respect to some past time mentioned in 
connection with it; as. Id respondei'unt se facturos esse, quum ille vento Aquilone 
venisset Lemnum.... when he should have come.... Nep. 

Rem. 2. The imperfects vellem, nollem, and inrllem, in the first person, ex- 

f ress a wish, the non-reality and impossibility of which are known; as, vellem, 
should have wished.—In the second person, where it implies an indefinite 
person, and also in the third when the subject is an indefinite person, the im¬ 
perfect subjunctive is used in the sense of the pluperfect, and the condition is 
to be supplied by the mind. This is the case especially Avitn the veibs, d'>co, 
pHto, aroltror, credo; also with video, cerno, and diseerno; as, Miestlque { credS- 
res victos) redeunt in castra, —one might have thought that they were di.feated. 
Liv. PUcunioe an fdmoe minus parch'et, hand facile discerncres. Sail. Qui 
vlderet e'mum Trdjdnum introductum, urbem captain diccret. Cic. Quis umqiiam 
creJeretf Li. Quis putaretV Id.—The imperfect subjunctive is frequently 
r.sed, tor the pluperfect in inteirogative expressions; aSj Socrates quum 
L’og^tur cujdtem se esse diceret, Munddnum, inquit. Id. Quod si quis deus dio6- 
rel., numqunm putilrem me in Academia tamquam phildsdphum disputdturum, If 
any god had said....I never should have supposed. Cic. 

Rem. 3. The subjunctive in all its tenses may denote a supposition or 
concession; as, Vendat cedes vir bdnus, Suppose an honest man is selling a 
bouse. Cic. Dixerit E/ncurus, Grant tliat Epicurus could have said. Id. 
Verum anceps puynce fuerat fortuna .—Fuisset. Grant that it might have been. 
Virg. Mdlus civis On. Carbo fuit. Fuerit dliis, He may have been to others 
Cio. —This concessive subjunctive is equivalent to eato tU. 


5 260 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


267 


flKM. 4. The present and perfect subjunctive are used in independent pro- 
^sitions to soften an assertion. When so used, they do not dilFer essentially 
from the present and futiire indicative; as, Forsltan qujeratls, You may i)C.r- 
haps ask. \i:\\m sic vxistimes^ 1 would wish you to'think so. Nhno istiui ftbi 
concedat, or concesserit. No one will grant you that. Hue sine ullu duhiUitiimi 
confinnaverim, elOquentiqni revi esse omnium dijf'icilli7nam, This I will unhesi¬ 
tatingly affirm. Cic. Nil §(/o contulerim jucundo sdnus umico. Hor. The ferm 
which is called the perfect subjunctive, when thus used for the future, leema 
to be rather the subjunctive ot the future perfect; see Rem. 7, (1.) Utffo and 
its compounds are often so used in the present; as, V'^elim obvias ntihi llttrcii 
crehry mitLis, I wish that you would frequently send, etc. Cic. The perfect 
sabjunctii e is also rarely used in the sense of a softened perfect indicative; as. 
Fci-situn temsre fecerim, I may have acted inconsiderately. 

Rkm. 5. The subjunctive is used in all its tenses, in independent sentences, 
to express a doubtful question implying a negative answer; as, Quo ecunf 
Whither shall I goV Quoiremf Whither should 1 go? Quoivei'wi? Whither 
was i to have gone ? Quoivissemf Whither should I have gone V The answer 
imphed in all tliese cases is, ‘ nowhere.’ So, Quis dubitet qum in vh-tute divitke 
sintf Who can doubt that riches consist in virtue? Cic. Quisquam niimen Jund- 
nis adoret proetet'ea f Virg. Quidni, inquit, memlnerim ? Cic. Quis vellet tanti 
nuntius esse mdli ? Ovid. 


Rem. 6. The present subjunctive is often used to express a "wish, 
an exhortation, asseveration, request, command, or permission; as, 

Jloriar, si, etc. May I die. if, etc. Cic. Peream, si non, etc. May I perish, if, 
etc. Ovid. So, Ne sim snivus. Cic. In mMia arma ruamus. Let us nish.... 
Virg. A'e we attingas, sce/esteDo not touch me, villain! Ter. Faciat qvod 
luhet, Let him do what he pleases. Id. The perfect is often so used; aSj Ipse 
vidcrit. Let him see to it himself. Cic. Quainid I'ecte fdciam, vidcrint 
Id. Meminerimus, ru/rersMS infimosjvstitiam esse servandnm. Id. NiliH 

incommOdo vi'di'tudinis iuce feceris. Id. Etnas, non qiuxl Opus est, sed qxuAi necesM 
est. Sen. Donis impii ne pUlcdre audeant deos; rlCdontm audiant. Cic. Ndtd- 
rain expellas furen, tdmen bisque recurret. Hor. 

(rt.) The examples show that the present subjirnctive, in the first person 
singular, is used in asseverations; in the first person plural, in requests and ex¬ 
hortations; in the second and third persons of the jtresent and sometimes of 
the perfect, in commands and permissions, thus supplying the place of the im¬ 
perative, especially when the person is indefinite. 

(6.) With these subjunctives, as with the imperative, the negative is usually 
not non but ne; as, ne dlcas; ne dicat ; ne dixeris. So, also, ne fuerit, for Lcet 
ne fuiint, 

(c.) The subjunctive for the imperative occurs most frequently in the third 
person. In the second person it is used principally with ne; as, ne In 

the latter case the perfect very frequently takes the place of the present; as, 
nc dixhis. The subjunctive is also used in the second person, instead of the 
Imperative, wdien the person is indefinite. 

(rf.) In precepts relating to past time, the imperfect and pluperfect, also, are 
sajed for the imperative; as, Foi'sitan non nemo vir foi-tis dixerit, restltisses, 
<u>rtem puynans oppetisses,—you should have resisted. Cic. 

Rem. 7. In the regular paradigms of the verb, no future subjunctive was 
exhibited either in the active or passive voice. 

(1.) When the expression of futurity is contained in another part of the sen¬ 
tence, the future of the subjunctive is supplied by the other tenses of that 
mood, viz. the future subjunctive by the present and imperfect, and the future 
perfect by the perfect and pluperfect. Which of these four tenses is to be used 
depends on the leading verb and on the completeness or incompleteness of the 
action to be expressed. The perfect subjunctive appears to be also the suh- 
iunctive of the future perfect, and might not improperly be so called; aa. 


B68 


SYNTAX.-PROTASIS AND APOI OSIS. 


§261 


Tnnium mdneo, hoc tempus si amisSris, te esse nuUum umquam mdgis idoneum rg- 
pC'rtC”Tim, I only warn you, that, if you should lose this opportunity, you wiL 
never find one more convenient. Cic. 

(2.) If no other future is contained in the sentence, the place of the futiire 
subjunctive active is supplied by the participle in 7'us, with sim and esstm; as, 
Non dubliat quin brevi Tri^'a sit peritura, lie does not doubt that Trey wit 
soon be destroyed. Cic. In hypothetical sentences the form with fuiinm takes 
the place of a pluperfect subjunctive; as, Quis enim dubitat, quin, si Sdyuntinit 
imjptqre tulissnnus dpem, tbtum in Hispdniam aversuri btllum fuerlmus. Liv. 
The form in /uissem occurs also, but morerarelv; as, Appdruit, quemtam ex.- 
cltatura mdlem vera fuisset clddes, quum, etc. Bee Pei'ijki'ostic Qmju^aikm^ 
§ 162, 14. 

(3.) The fuhire subjunctive passive is supplied, not by the participle in dus, 
but by yuturum sit or esset, with ut and the present or imperfect of the sub¬ 
junctive ; as. Non duJbXto quin futurum sit, ut laudetur, I do not doubt that he 
will be praised. 


PROTASIS AND APODOSIS. 

§ 961 . In a sentence containing a condition and a conclu¬ 
sion, the former is called the protasis, the latter the apodosis. 

1. In the protasis of conditional clauses with si and its compounds, 
the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive imply the non-existence of 
the action or state supposed, the imperfect, as in English, implying 
present time. In the apodosis the same tenses of the subjunctive de¬ 
note what the result would be, or would have been, had the suppo 
cition in the protasis been a valid one; as, 

Nisi te satis incitdtum esse confiderem, senberem plura, Did I not believe 
that you have been sufficiently incited, I would write more (Cic.); which im¬ 
plies that he does believe, and therefore will not wi'ite. Si Neptunm, quod Theseo 
promlserat, non fecisset, Theseus fllio HippOlyto non esset orbatus. Id. 

2. The present and perfect subjunctive in the protasis, imply the 
•real or possible existence of the action or state supposed; as, 

Si vHit, if he Avishes, or, should Avish, implying that he either does Avish, or, 
it least, may Avish. In the apodosis the present or perfect either of the sub¬ 
junctive or of the indicative may be used. 

Remark 1. The tenses of the indicative may also be used in the prota^ 
»>f a conditional sentence Avith si, etc.; as. Si vales, bene est. Cic. Si quis aniea 
mlrabatur quid esset, ex hoc tempdre mlretur pdtius.... Id.—The conjunction si 
in the protasis is often omitted; as, Libet agros hni. Prlmuni queero quos agrosf 
If you Avill buy lands, I Avill first ask, etc. But the protasis may be rendered 
withoAit if, and either with or without an interrogation, as. You Avill buA' lands, 
or. Will you buy lands ? The future perfect often occurs in the prolasis or 
Boch sentences; as, Casus medicusve Uvdrit oegrum ex pneclpUi, nvUei' dehra nS- 
edhit, (Hor.) Should chance or the physiciaii have saA’ed him, the silly mother 
will destroy him. Si is in like manner omitted Avith the imperfect and pluper¬ 
fect subjunctive, in supposing a case Avhich is knoAvn not to be a real one; as, 
Absque te esset, hddie numquam ad solem occdsum viverem. Plaut. 

Rem. 2. The present and perfect subjunctiv'e differ but slightly from the in- 
i'icative, the latter giving to a sentence the fonn of reality, Avhile“ the subjunc¬ 
tive represents it as a conception, which, however, may at the same time' be a 
reality. The second person singular of the present and ])erfect subjunctive 
often occurs in addressing an indefinite person, where, if the person Avere defl- 
nite, tae indicative would be used; as, Membria minuitur, nisi earn exerceaa 
Cia. When the imperfect or pluperfect is required to denote a past action 


1 262. 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 


269 


the indicative must be used, if its existence is uncertain, as those tenses in tlie 
subjunctive would imply its non-existence. In the ordlio obtigua, A^hen the 
leading verb is a present or a future^ tlie same diflerence is observed between 
the tenses cf the subjunctive as in hypothetical sentences; but when the lead¬ 
ing verb is a preterite the diflerence between possibility and impossibUity is 
not expressed. 

Rem. 3. The present and perfect subjunctive are sometimes used, both to 
the pri tasis iind apodosis of a conditional sentence, in tlie sense of the imper¬ 
fect and pluperfect; as, Tu, si hie sis, dliitr setilias, If you vere here, ycu 
would think otherwise. Ter. Quos, ni mea cura Tosist^^Lt, Jam Jiamince 
Virg. 

Rem. 4. The protasis of a conditional sentence is fre ;^uently not expresaed, / 
but implied; as, Mcujno viercentur AtriJie, i. e. si possint. Virg.; or is contained 
in a participial clause; as, etsi a multitudine victus, ylorid tdmen cr/mej 
viciL Jiist. So, also, when the participle is in the ablative absolute; as, Dona- 
rem hripddns —divite me scilicet artium, qiias aut Parrhusius prdtulit, aut Scdiyis, 
Hor. C. JIucius Povsenam interflcere^ proposita slhi morte, edndtus est. Cio. 
It is only in later writers that the concessive conjunctions etsi, quam/piam^ and 
quamvis are expressed with the participle, but tdmen is often found in the 
aqxxlosis, even in the classic period, when a participial clause precedes as a 
protasis. 

Rem. 5. In hypothetical sentences relating to past time, the actions seem 
often to be transferred in a measure to the present by using the imperfect, 
either in the protasis or the apodosis, instead oi the pluperfect; as, Quod eerie 
non fecisset, si suum numerum (nautdrum) naves haberent. Cic. Cimbri si stdtim 
xnfesto agmine urbem pMissent, grande discrimen esset. Flor. Sometimes the 
imperfect, although the actions are completed, appears both in the protasis and 
the apodosis. 

Rem. 6. Nisi, nisi vero, and nisi foi'te are joined with the indicative, v hen 
they ini reduce a coiTection. A'ist then signifies ‘ except ’; as, A^escio; nisi/loc 
vidw. Cic. Nisi vero, and nisi forte, ‘unless perhaps^’ introduce an exception, 
and imply its improbability; as. Nemo fere saliat sobnus, nisi foile insdnit. Cio. 
Nisi forte in the sense of ‘ unless you suppose,’ is commoifly used ironically to 
uitroduce a case which is in reality inadmissible. 

SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 

A. Substantive Clauses. 

§ A clause denoting the purpose, object, or result of 

^ preceding proposition, takes the subjunctive after ut^ ne, quo, 
quin, and quominus ; as, 

Ea non, ut te institu^rem, seripsi, I did not write that in order to instruct 
you. Cic. Irritant ad piignandum, quo fiant acridres, They stimulate them to 
tight, that they may become fiercer. Varr. 

Remark 1. or «/t, signifying ‘ that,’ ‘i^ order that,’ or simply 
- to ’ wl h the infinitive, relates either to a purpose or to a result. In 
the latter case it often refers to sic, \ta, ddeo, tarn, tails, tanius, is, 
sjusmddi, etc., in the preceding clause; as. 

Id mihi sic h'it grdtum, ut grdtius esse nihil possit. That will be so agreeable 
to me that nothing can be more so. Cic. Non sum pa hebes, ut istuc dicam. Id. 
Nemie tarn erdmus dmentes, ut expldrdta nobis esset victoria. Id. Tantum indulsk 
ddlOri, ut eum pietas tincerei. Nep. Ita and tarn are sometimes omitted; as, 
Epdndnondas fuit etiam diserhis ut nemo Thebdnus ei par esset eldquentid, instead 
3 f tarn disertus. Id. Esse dportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. Auct. ad Her 
Sol ejjicxt ut (mnia floreant. Cic. 

23* 


B70 SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. § 2G2 


Rem 2. Ut^ signifyinj^ ‘ even if’ or ‘ although,’ expresse.^ a suppo- 
Bition merely as a conception, and accordingly takes the subjunctive; 
as, 

Ut (lesint vires, tamen est Imidanda vdluntas, Though strength be wanting, yet 
tlie will is to be praised. Ovid. Ut, in this sense, takes the negative non; as, 
ExercKus si pacts nomen audierit, ut non referat pedtm (eveu if it does uot with¬ 
draw) insistct certe. Cic. 

Rem. 3. Ut, with the subjunctive denoting a result, is used with 
impersonal verbs signifying it happens, it remains, it follows, etc., aw, 

QvA fit, ut nctiM contentus vivat? How does it happen that no one lives con¬ 
tented V Hor. IJuic contigit, ut patriam ex serviiute in llbertutevi vindicaret. 
Nep. Sequitur imiur, ut Uiain vitia sint parca. Cic. Reliquum est, ut egd^rust 
mihi consulam. Nep. Restat lyltur, ut motus astrorum sit vCluntdrius. Cic. 
Extremum illud est, ut te Orem el obsecrem. Id. 

Note 1. To this principle may be referred the following verbs and phrases 
signifying ‘ it happens,’ viz. ft, feri non pdtest, accklit, incidit, continyit, evenit, 
usn re nit, occurrit and est (it is the case, or it happens, and hence esto, be it 
that):—and the following, signifying ‘ it remains,’ or ‘ it follows,’ viz. futiirum, 
extremum, prdpe, proximum, and reliquum — est, relinquUur, sequitur, restat, and 
siiperest; and sometimes accedit. 

Note 2. Continyit with the dative of the person is often joined with the 
infinitive, instead of the subjunctive with as. Non cuivis homini continyit 
adire Cdrinthum. Hor. And with esse also and other vei'bs of similar meaning, 
the predicate (as in the case of licet) is often found in the dative.— SequUur and 
efficllur, ‘ it follows,’ have sometimes the accusative with the infinitive and 
sx>metimes the subjunctive; and noscitur, in the same sense, the subjunctive 
only. 

Note 3. Mos or moris est, consuetiido or consuetudlnis est, and natura or co)j~ 
surtudofert, are often followed by ut instead of the infinitive. — Ut also occurs 
occasionally after many such phrases as ndvum est, ri.vum, ndturede, necesse, 
iisltdtum, mirum, sinyuldre — est, etc., and after eequum, rectum, verum, utile, veri- 
similc, and inteyrum — est. 

For other uses of ut, with the subjunctive, see § 273. 

Rem. 4. Ut is often omitted before the subjunctive, after verbs de 
noting willingness and permission ; also after verbs of asking, advis¬ 
ing, reminding, etc., and the imperatives die and fac ; as, 

Quid vis fdcinmf What do you wish (that) I should do? Ter. Insdni feriani 
stne Imra fiuctus. Virg. Tenies disslmuldre rdyat. Ovid. Id sinas dro. Id. ^ 
suddere, dixit, Fharnnbnzo id ncybtii ddret. Nep. Accedat dqm tet actio vdiia. 
Cic. Fac cdyites. Sail. So, Vide ex navi efferantur, quee, etc. ITaut 

Veibs of willingness, etc., are volo, mOlo, permitto, eoncedo, patior, sInn, licet, vSto, 
etc.; those of asking, etc., are rSg^o, 5ro, qu/rso, m6neo, admdneo, jiiheo, mamio, pSto, 
prtcor, censeo, suadto, dportet, necesse est, postulo, honor, euro, Uccerno, evto, inipSro. 

Rem. 5. Ke, ‘ that not,’ ‘ in order that not,’ or ‘ lest,’ expresses a 
purpose negatively; as, 

Cut'a ne quid ei desit, Take care that nothing be \vanting to him. Cic. JYtnw 
frudens piinit, ut ait Plato, quia pecedtum est, sed ne qjeccetur. Id. Ut re is fi'o- 
)uently used for ne, especially in solemn discourse, and hence in laws; as 
Oplra detiir, ut judlcia ne flaiit. Id. Quo ne is used in the same manner in one 
passage of Hor.ace. Missus ad hoc —quo ne per vacuum Rduuhio mcwrcx&t hos- 
U's.—On the other land ut non is used when a simple result or consequence is 
to be expressed, in which case ita, sic, tam are either expressed or undei stood 
as, Turn fen'te agrltdbam, ut ad nuptias tuas venire non possem. In a few ciises 
however, ut ivm is used for ne.— Ut non is further used, when the negation re 


§ 262 . 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PART.CLES. 271 


fe'P to a particular word or to a part only of the sentence, as in similar cases 
» non must be used, and not nisi; as. Confer te ad Manliumy ut a me non 
l/ectus ad ulienvs, sed invitdtus ad tuos isse videaris. Cic. 

RE:\r. 6. Ne is often omitted after cave ; as, 

Cave puieSy Take care not to suppose. Cic. Compare § 267, R. 3. 

RE:\r. 7. After metuoy funeo, vereovy and other expressions denoting 
fear or caution, 7ie must be rendered by that or lesty and ut by that 
not. 

Note 3. To the verbs nietuOy timeOy and v^i'eoi' are to be added the substan¬ 
tives expressing fear, appreliension or danger, and the verbs tei'reo, conterreOy 
deteiTeOy tdrco, to be on one’s guard, video and obseiTO in requests (as, vide 
vidUe and videndum est), in the sense of‘to consider’; as, 

Milo inetuPbaty ne a sends indicariitur, Milo feared tliat he should be betrayed 
bv his servants. Cic. Vereor, ne, dum minuere velim biborem, augeam. Id. 
lhii\ )r eraty ne casira Iwstis aggrederetur. Liv. Jlla duo vereor, ut ti/d possim 
concedere, I fear that I cannot grant.... Cic. Cdvendmn est ne assentPdorlhus pat- 
fefaciamus aures, neu adulPni nos sinamus. Cic. Vide ne hoc tibi obsit. Teirnit 
genteSy grave ne rediret seculum Pyrrhce. Multitudinem deterrenty ne frumentum 
conferant. Cajs. Meniisei'um! ne cadas. Ovid. 

Note 4. Neve or neu is used as a continuative after ut and ne. It is properly 
equivalent to aut ne, but is also used for ei ne after a preceding iit; as, on the 
other hand, et ne is used after a negation instead of aut ne ; as. Legem iulit, ne 
quis ante aetdrum rerum accusdretur, neve multaretur. Nep. Cesar mUltes non 
tongidre dt'dtidne cdhortdtus, quam nti suce pristince virtutis memdriam retinerenty 
neu perturbarentur dnimo — prodii commitiendi signum dedit. Caes. Neque, also, 
is sometimes used for et ne after ut and ne ; as, Ut ea qjrcetermittani, neque eoa 
appetlem. Cic. Cur non sancitis ne viclnus patricio sit plibehis, ncc eodeni itinere 
eat. Liv.— Ne non is sometimes xised for ut after verbs of fearing; as, Timeo ne 
non impetrem, I fear I shall not obtain it. 

Rem. 8. The proposition on which the subjunctive with ut and ne depends, 
is sometimes omitted; as, UtUa dicam. Cic. Ne singulos ndminem Liv. 

Note 5. NeduiUy like ne, takes the subjunctive; as, Optimis tempdribus cldris- 
timi viri vim Mbunieiam sustinere non qjdtuerunt: nedum his tempdribus sine 
judlcidrum j-emediis salvi esse possJmus,—still less, etc. Cic. Ne is sometimes 
used in the sense of nedum; as, Ndvam earn pdtestdiem (scil. tnbundrum plebis) 
erlpere patnbus nostris, ne nunc dulcedine semel capti ferant deslderium. Liv.— 
Nedum without a verb has the meaning of an advei'b, and commonly follows a 
negative; as, AUgre inermis tanta multitudo, nedum annatOy sustlneri pdtest. Liv. 
Ac, also is used in the same manner in Cic. Fam. 9, 26. 

Rem. y. Uud, ‘that,’ ‘in order that,’ or, ‘that by this means, 
especially with a comparative; non quOy or non quod, ‘not that,’ ‘not 
as if’; non quin, ‘not as if not’; which are followed in the apodosis 
y sed quody sed quiay or sed alone ; and quominus, ‘ that not,’ after 
clauses denoting hindrance, take the subjunctive; as, 

Adjiita mcy quo id fiat facilius. Aid me, that that may be done more easily. 
Ter. Non quo repPiblicd sit inihi quiequam edrius, sed desperdtis dtiam IJippdcrutes 
vetat ddhibPre medicinam. Cic. Non quod sola ornent, sed quod excellant. Id. 
Neque. reeusdvit, quo minus legis pcenam subiret. Nep. Ego me ducem in cZn/i 
hello negdvi esse, non quin rectum esset, seel quia, etc. Cic. And instead of non 
(uin we may say non qrx) non, non quod non, or non quia non ; and for non quod, 
"ion eo quod, or non idea quod. 

Rem. 10 Quin, after negative propositions and questions with quit 
•md quid implying a negative, takes the subjunctive. Quin is used, 


?72 SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. § 262 


1. For a relative with non, after nemo, mtUus, nthii....est, rep^ntur, invenltuf 
etc., vix est, (Bffre repc'itur, etc.', as, Messanam nemo venit, quin viderit, i. e. 
qui non vlderit. No one came to Messana who did not see. Cic. Ne^o ullam pic- 
tura?/i/h/sse....quin conquisierit, i. e. quavi non, etc. Id. Aihil quin mdli 
narrarido possit deprdvdri. Ter. Quh est, quin ceriiat, quanta vis sit in stnsihtisi 
Cic. 


Note 6. When qttin is used for tlie relative it is commonly equivalent to the 
nominative qui, qtue, quod, but it is sometimes used in prose instead of the 
accusative, and sometimes after dies for quo, as the ablative of timr ; as, Diet 
fere mdlus est, quin hie Satrius domum memn ventitet, i. e. q^lo — non vcn*\M^ 
Cic.— is often used for ; as, Quis enhn erat, qni non sciret. Id.; 

and when stands for qui non or quod non, is and ?V/are sometimes added 

for the sake of emphasis; as, Cleanthes neyat ullnm elbuni esse tain yrdvem, quin 
is die ct noete concdqudtur. Cic. Nihil est quoil sensum hdbeat, quin id intereai. 
Id,—So, also, the place of quin is supplied hyntnon; as, Auyusius nuinquam 
fUios suos pdpiilo commenddvit ut non adjiceret'{without adding) si merebuntur 
Suet. And if no negation precedes, or if non belongs to a particular word, and 
not to the verb, qui non and ut non must of course be used and. not quin. 

2. For ut non, ‘that not,’ or ‘wdthout’ with a participle, especially after 
fdee re non jfossum, fieri non potest, mdla causa est, quid causes estf nihil causa 
est ; as, Fdctre non jMssum quin ad te mittam, i. e. ut non, etc. Cic. Numquam 
tarn male est Siculis, quin dliquid fideete et commode dIcant. Cic. Nu7nquam ac¬ 
cede, quin ahs te abeam docUor, —wdthout going from you wiser. Ter. 

Note 7. Quin takes the subjunctive also after the negative expi'essions non 
dubito, non est duJimm, non amblyo, I doubt not; non dbest; nihil, qx^-ulum, non 
pi'ocul, hand midtum dbest; non, vix, ceyre alstlneo ; tenere me, or temperdre mih\ 
non possum; nonimpedio, non recuso, nihil qy^'cetermitto, and the like. In these 
cases, however, the negation in quin is superfluous, and it is generally trans¬ 
lated into English by ‘that,’ ‘but that,’ or ‘to’ Avith an infinitive; as. Non 
dubito quin ddmi sit, that he is at home. Non multum dbest, quin mlserrimus sirn, 
Not much is wanting to make me most wretched. Cic. Hence, as quin is not 
in such cases regarded as a negative, non is superadded when a negative sense 
is required; as, Jn quibus non dubito quin offensidnem neyliyentice vitdre atqut 
effuyere non possum. Cic. Dubitanduni non est quin numquam possit utilitas cum 
hdnestdte contendert. Iil. 


Note 8. In Nepos, non dubito, in the sense of ‘ I do not doubt,’ is always fob 
lowed by the infinitive with the accusative, and the same construction often 
occurs in later writers but not in Cicero: in the sense of to scruple or hesitate, 
when the verb following has the same subject, dubito and non dubito are gener¬ 
ally followed by the infinitive; as, Cicero non dubitabat conjurdtos supqiUcio af- 
"Icere.—It may be added that ‘ I doubt whether ’ is exoressed in Latin by 
dubito sitne, dubito utrum — an, dubito sitne — an, or dubito num, numqidd, for dubito 
%n, and dubium est an are used, like nescio an with an affirmative meaning. 

Note 9. Quin signifies also ‘why not?’ being compounded of the old ablar 
t ve qui and ne, i. e. non, and in this sense is joined with the indicative in ques¬ 
tions implying an exhortation; as. Quin conscendimus equos ? Why not mount 
our horses? In this sense it is also joined Avith the imperative; as. Quin dio 
ftdtim, Well, tell me: or Avith the first person of the subjunctive. Hence Avilh- 
3ut being joined to any verb it signifies ‘ even ’ or ‘ rather.’ 

Rem. 11. The principal verbs of hinderance, after which quominus occurs, 
and after which ne, and, if a negative precedes, quin also may be used, are de- 
terreo, impedio, intercedo, obsisto, obsto, ojficio, prdhibeo, recuso, and repuyno. It 
occurs also after stat or fit per me, I am the cause, Tion puyno, nihil moror, non 
contineo me, etc. 

Note. Impedio, dHerreo, and recuso are sometimes, and prdhibeo frequently 
followed by the infinitive. Instead of quominus, quo secius is sometimes used. 


§ 263 . 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AITER PARTICLES. 


27 ? 


§ 263. The particles specified in this section always introduce a sentencii oou 
laliiing only a conception of the mind, and are hence joined with the subjunctive. 

1. The subjunctive is used after particles of wishing, as utinam, ut\ 
O f and 0 ' si ; as, 

Utlnam infrus viUe cujMi fuissemus! 0 that we had been less attached to life 
Cic. 0 si sdlike quicquavi virtuiis adesset! Virg. 

Remark. The present and perfect tenses, after these particles, are used in 
reference to those wishes which are conceived as possible; the imperfect and 
pluperfect are employed in expressing those wishes which are conceived as 
wanting in reality. Of. ^ 201, 1 and 2.—‘ Would that not’ is expressed in Latin 
both by uh’wriw 7ie and iiUnam non. Uiinam is sometimes omitted; as, Tecum 
ludere slcui ij/sa jxjssem ! CatuU. 

B. Adverbial Clauses. 

2. (1.) Quamyis, however; licet, although; tamqnam, tamquam si, 
quasi, ac si, ut si, velut, velut si, veluti, slcuti, and ceu, as if; modo, 
durn, and diimmddo, provided,—take the subjunctive; as, 

Quamvis ille felix sitj tdmen, etc. However happy he may be, still, etc. Cic. 
Vi'ntas licet nu'llum dejensdrem obtlneat^ Though truth should obtain no de¬ 
fender. Id. Tamquam clausa sit Asia, sic nihil qierfertur ad nos. Id. Sed quid 
ego his testdms utor, quasi res duhia aut obscura sit? Id. Me omnibus rebus, juxta 
ac si mens frater esset, sustentdvit. He supported me in every thing, just as 
though he were my brother. Id. Similiter fach'e cos, —ut si nauUe certarent, 
uter, etc. Id. Abseniis Ari6visti crudeUtatem, velut si coram adesset, horrerent. 
Caes. Inqiie sinus caros, veluti cognosceret, ibat. Ovid. Sicuti jurgto liicessi- 
tus fbret, in sendtum vend. Sail. Hie vero ingentem qmgnam, ceu ceth'a nusriuam 
bella forent. Virg. Oderint dum metuant. Att. in Cic. Mdnent ingeni i sHlbus, 
inodo ])ermaneat stadium et industria. Cic. Omnia hdnesta negligunt dammodo 
pdtentiam consequantur. They disregard every honorable principle, provider 
they can obtain power. Id. 

Note. 3Iddo, dum, and dummddo, when joined with a negation, become 
mddo ne, dum ne, and dummddo ne. 

(2.) Quamvis (although) is in Cicero joined with a principal tense of the sub¬ 
junctive; as, Quamvis non fueris swasor, cei'te juisti. Cic. In latei 

writers it is often used with the indicative; as, Fellcem Nidben, quamvis tot 
funera vidit. Ovid. So also once m Cicero, Quamvis patrem suum numquam 
^riderat. Rab. Post. 2. 

(3.) QnaTnris, as a conjunction, in the sense of ‘ however much,’ is joined 
irith the subjunctive. So also when its component parts are separated; as, 
C. Gracchus dixit, slbi in somnis Ti. frdtrem visum esse dicere, quam vellet cuno- 
lai’etur, tdmen, etc.— Quamvis ‘however much,’ as an adverb, governs no par¬ 
ticular mood. 

(4.) Etsi, tdmetsi, even if, although, and quamquam, although, commonly in¬ 
troduce an indicative clause:— etiamsi is more frequently followed by the sub¬ 
junctive. In later prose writers, and sometimes in Cicero and Sallust as weU 
IS in tlie poets, quamquam is joined with the subjunctive; as, Quamquam proe^ 
fente Lucullo Iwpiar. Cic. Vi regdre patriam quamquam possis. Sail. Jug. 3. 
Filius quamquam Thetidos marines Darddnas turres quateret. Hor. 

Remark. The imperfect subjunctive with ac si, etc., is used after the pre. 
\ent, to denote that in reality the thing is not so, but in that case a liypothetL 
••al subjunctive must be supplied; as, Zgndtii rem ut tued7'e<^que a tepeto, ac sj 
viea rdgdtia essent, i. e. ac peter cm, si mea negdtia essent, as 1 would pray if 
fttc Cic. 


274 SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 


§263 


3. After antequam and priusquam, the imperfect and pluperfect 
Eens(;s are usually in the subjunctive; the present and perfect may be 
either in the indicative or subjunctive. The present indicative is 
commonly used when the action is to be represented as certain, near 
at hand, or already begun; the subjunctive is used when the thing is 
stxll doubtful, and also in general propositions; as, 

Ea causa ante moriua esi, qnara tu natus esses, Tliat cause was dead before 
you were born. Cic. Avertit equos, priusquain pabula gustassent Trace Xarh- 
thnmque bibissent. Virg. Priusquam uicipias, comulto 6pus est, Before’jcu be¬ 
gin there is need of counsel. Ball. 

4. (1.) Dum, donee, and quoad, signifying until, are followed by 
the subjunctive, if they refer to the attainment of an object; as, 

Dum hie veniret, Idcum rUinquere noluit, He was unwilling to leave the place 
until he (Milo) should come. Cic. Nihil putx) llbi esse utllius quavi opp^rlri quoa^i 
tc'ire possis, quid tibi ayendum sit. Id. Qyrnu tetendit, et duxit lonye, donee curvd- 
ta coirent inter se capita. Virg.—In the sense of ‘ as long as,’ these particles 
take the indicative, but Tacitus joins donee with the subjunctive even when a 
simple fact is to be expressed. 

,2.; Dum, while, is commonly used with the indicative present, whatever 
may be the tense of the principal sentence. Cf. § 259, R. 1, (1. >, (a.) 

5. Quum (cum), when it signifies a relation of time, takes 
the indicative; when it denotes a connection of thought, the 
subjunctive; as, 

Qui lUm defendit injumam, ntque repulsat a suis, qmam potest, injuste fdcit. 
Cic. Quum I'ecte naviydri poterit, turn nc'niyes. Id. Credo turn, quum Sicilia 
florebat Oplbus et cbpiis, mayna artiflcia fuisse in ed imuld. Id. Quum tot sustin- 
eas et tanta neyotia, j)eccem, si mdrer tua tempdra, Since you are burdened 
with so many and so important albiirs, I should do wrong, if I should occupy 
vour time. ftor. Quum vita sine ditucis metus plena sit, ratio ipsa monet dmicil 
las coinpdrdre. Cic. 

Remark 1. (a.) The rule for the use of quum may be thus expressed: 
Quum temporal takes the indicative, quum causal the subjunctive. Hence, 
when quum is merely a particle of time, with no refei ence to cause and effect, 
and not occurring in a historical narrative (see Rem. 2), it may be joined with 
any tense of the indicative. But when it is emjdoyed to exjxress the relation 
of cause and effect, or has the meaning of ‘ though ’ or ‘ although,’ it is joined 
with the subjunctive (6.) Quum, relating to time, is commonly translated 
when, while, or after; referring to a train of thought, it signifies as, since, though 
or althouyh, because; but may often be translated when. 

Rem. 2. In narration, quum, even when it relates to time, is joined 
with the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive, when a historical per¬ 
fect stands in the princiixal clause; as, 

Gracchus, quum rem illam in reliyidnem qmpiilo venisse sentiret, ad sendiu^ riU 
a'it. Cic. Alexander, quum intereinisset Clitum, vix mdnus a se abstinuit. Id. 

Note. Quum temporal, when it expresses an action frequently repeated, 
maybe joined \\ th the piujxerfect indicative, and the apjdosis then contains 
Ihe imperfect; as, Quum autem rir esse caqu'rat, diibat se bibori. Cic. Quum 
"dsain viderat, turn incipere ver arbitrabatur. Id. Cf. § 2t>4, 12. 

Rem. 3. Quuin in the sense of ‘ while ’ is joined with the perfect and imper¬ 
fect indicative, often with the addition of interea or interim, to express simulta- 
aeous occ urrences; as, Cdtulus cepit magnum sues virtutis fructum, quum omnes 
\»'{>pe uad voce, in eo ipso vos spem hdbituros esse, dixistis. Cic. Qeaebdtur mrgis 


§ 2(54. 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER QUI. 


275 


in m^dio fdro Messdnoi civis Rdmdnus, judices, qnuin iaterea nuUa vox alia i$tivs 
misit'i audiel atur, nid Imc: civis Romdnus sum. Id. 

^ Rkm. 4. Quum, for the aiost part preceded by an adverb, as, Jam, nondum, 
vix, (xgre, or joined with r^pente or siiblio is followed by the iad cative, espe¬ 
cially by the present indicative, to express the beginning of an action. In the 
cases mentioned in this and the precedmg remark, the historians also use qwujA 
with the historical infinitive. 

For the subjunctive after si and its compounds, see ^ 261. 

C. Adjective Clauses. 

SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER dUl. 

§ 264;. Relatives require the subjunctive, when the clauses 
connected by them express merely a conception; as, for exam¬ 
ple, a consequence, an innate quality, a cause, motive, or purpose, 

1 (a.) When the relative qui, in a clause denoting a result of the 
character or quality of something specified in the antecedent clause, 
follows a demonstrative, and is equivalent to ut with a personal or 
demonstrative pronoun, it takes the subjunctive. 

Note. The demonstratives after which qui takes the subjunctive, are tarn with an 
adjective, tantus, talis, ijusmddi, hujusmddi, and is, ille, iste, and hie in the sense of 
talis; as, 

Quis est tarn Lynceus, qui in tantis tenebris nihil offendat? i. e. ut ille in taniis, 
etc.. Who is so quick-sighted, that he would not stumble, (or, as not to stum¬ 
ble,) in such darkness, Cic. Tulem te esse dportet, qui ab impiorum civium sdeiS- 
tate sejungas; i. e. ut tu, etc. Id. At eafuit legdtio Octdvii, in qua pinmli 
susplcio non subesset, i, e. ut in ed. Id. Nec tdmen ego sum ille ferreus, qui frd- 
tris edrissimi mcerdre non movear, i. e. ut igo non mdvear. Id. Non sumus ii, 
quibus nihil vemim esse videatur, i. e. ut nobis nihil, etc. Id. Nulla gens tarn 
ftra est, cujus mentem non iinbufirit dedrum dpinio, i. e. ut ejus mentem, etc. Id. 

(ft.) Sometimes the demonstrative word is only implied; as. 

Res parva dictu, sed quas siudiis in magnum certdmen excessSrit, i. e. tdlis 
7 ?ice....of such a kind that it issued in a violent contest. Cic. Nunc diets dliquid, 
quod ad rem pertineat, i. e. tdle ut id, etc. Id. So quis sum, for num tdlis sum; 
is. Unis sum, cujus aures loedi nefas Sen.—In like manner, also, a demou- 

Btrative denoting a character or quality, is implied in the examples included in 
the following rule :— 

2. When the relative is equivalent to quamquam is, etsi is, or dumr 
modo is, it takes the subjunctive; as, 

Laco, consilii quamvis egregii, quod non ipse afferret, inimicus, Laco, an oppo¬ 
nent of anv measure, however excellent, provided he did not himself propose 
t. Tac. *ru dtpLam a pumice postulas, qui i 2 )sus sitiat. Plaut. Nihil mClestum, 
juod rton desideres, i. e. dummddo id. Cic. 

S. Quod, in restrictive clauses, takes the subjunctive; as, 

Qncrd sciam. as far as I know; quod ndminerim as far as I recollect; quod igo 
mtelliqam; qnod intelligi possit; quod conjeciard providers possit; pxod soled f idt 
passim; quod commddo tuo flat, etc. — Quidem is sometimes added to the rela¬ 
tive in such sentences. Quod sine mdlestid tud fiat. So far as it can be done 
without troubling j ou. Cic. In the phrases quantum possum, quantum dgo p^- 
ipicio, on the other hand, the indicative is used. 


276 SYNTAX.—SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER QUI. § 264 

4. A relative clause, alter the comparative followed by quam^ takes 
the subjunctive; as, 

Major sum, quam cui possit fortuna ndcere, i. e. quam ut mihi, etc., I am too 
^eat for fortune to be able to injure me. Ovid. Audita voce prasconis majus 
qaudium fuit, quam (piodi universum hdmines Upon the herald’s voice 

being heard, the joy was too gi'eat for the people to coiit.ain Liv. 

Remark 1. The clause annexed by quam qui implies an inlierent q aality, or 
a consequence; so that quam qui is equivalent to quam ut, Avhich also some¬ 
times occurs. Sometimes the subjunctive follows quam even without a rela¬ 
tive pronoun; as, In his lltens kmqior fui, quam aui vellem, aut quam mepiUavi 
Jdre: —and so frequently with the verbs velle and posse. 

5. A relative clause expressing a purpose, aim, or motive, and 
equivalent to ut with a personal or demonstrative pronoun, takes iho 
subjunctive; as, 

LdcMcemonii legates Athenas mlserunt, qui eum absentem accusarent: i. e. ul 
illi eum accusarent. The Lacedaemonians sent ambassadors to Athens to accuse 
him in his absence. Nep. Oesar eqidtdtum omnem qyreemittit, qui videant, quas in 
partes iter f dciant, Cajs. Sunt autem multi, qui enqnunt dliis, quod dliis largian- 
tur. Cic. Assldue repetant, quas perdant, Belldes undas. Ovid. 

Rem. 2. So also with relative adverbs ; as, Lampsdeum ei ( ThemistocU) rex 
ddndrat, unde vinum sumeret, i. e. ex qua or ut inde, etc. Nep. Super tabeimdc- 
ulum regis, unde ab omnibus conspici posset, imago sdlis crystallo inclusa fulge- 
bat. Curt. 

6. A relative clause with the subjunctive after certain indefinite 
general expressions, specifies the circumstances which characterize 
the individual or class indefinitely referred to in the leading clause; 
as, 

Fuerunt ed tempestdte, qui dicerent. There were at that time some who said. 
Sail. Erant, quibus appHentior fdmoe, videretur, There were those to whom 
he appeared too desirous of fame. Tac. Sunt, qui censeant, una dnlmum ei 
corpus occidere. Cic. Erunt, qui existimdri A'elint. Id. Si quis erit, qui perpi- 
tuam di'dtionem desideret, altera actidne audiet. Id. Venieut legidnes, qine neque 
me inultum neque te impunltum patiantur. Tac. So after est followed by qur>d, 
in the sense of‘there is reason why’; as, Est quod gaudeas. You have cause 
to rejoice. Plaut. Est quod visam ddmurn. Id. Si est quod desit, ne bedtus 
quidem est. Cic. 

Note 1. The expressions included in the rule are est, sunt, S.dest, preesto sunt, exsu- 
tunt, exdriuntur, inviniuntur, rSpSriuntur, (sell, kdtnlnes)', si quis est, tempos fuit, tem- 
pus viniet, etc. 

Rem. 3. The same construction occurs with relative particles used indefi- 
mtely; as, Ast unde Acec fiant. Si est culpani ut tre se admiserit. If it 

ichance that, etc. Ter. Est ubi id isto mddo valeat. Cic. So est cur and est ui 
fn the sense of est cur, as, llle erat, ut odisset defemdrem sdlutis meoe, i. e. he 
tad reason to hate. Cic. Non est igitur ut mirandum sit. There is no occasion 
foi wondering. Id. 

Resi. 4. The above and similar expressions are followed by the subjunctive 
only when they are indefinite. Hence, after sunt quldam, sunt nonnulli, sunt 
muiu, etc., when referring to definite persons, the relative takes the indicative; 
as, SiiHi di'dtidnes queedarn, quas Menocrito dabo. Cic. 

Rea:. 5. The indicative is sometimes, though rarely, used after sunt qui 
even when taken indefinitely, especially in the poets; as. Sunt, jwos jiivat, llor 
Sunt qui ita dicunt. Sail. 

7. A relative clause after a general Begative, or an interrogative 
3xpresslon.implying a negative, takes the subjunctive; as, 


§ 264 . 


SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER QUI. 


277 


Nfmo est, qiii fimid intelllgat, There is no one who does not understand. Cic 
Nulla res est, quae 2 )erferre possit contmmmi Idbc^ein, There is nothing which 
oan endure perpetual labor. Quint. Nulla j)ars tst i-Oi-pdrls, quae iwn sit minor 
id. Nihil est, quod tarn tniseros faciat, (/uain impietas ei scelus. Cic. /« Jo'/'i 
vix dhimus (/uisque est, qui ipsus sese noscat. Plant. Quis est, qui uiilia fugiat? 
Who is there that shuns what is useful V Cic. Qiue latebra est, in quain non in- 
tret 7«(u7<s f Sen. Quid dtiU ius habere, qxucnm omnia audeas stc A5- 

2 ui ut teeimif Cic. (See respecting this use of the indefinite qulcum rather than 
the definite (/wdc*M777, § 13P, K. 1.) An est quis'junni, qui Iloc ignbret? Is there 
any one who is ignorant of this? Id. Nunquid est nudi, quod non dixerisV Ter 

Note 2. General negatives are nemo, nvllus, nihil, iinus non, dlius non, non (/visquam 
vir ullits, ner iiPiis, etc., with est: ri.r with an ordinal and quisipie ; nfi'o esse, quenupt^im, 
«‘iC. Interrogative expre.ssions implying a negative, are (ptis, quid; qui, quae., quod 
rptanfus. iit^r, e/<fu.is, numquis, an qiiisqiiatn, an dllquis, qadtus quisque, qudtus, etc 
■*ith est quot, quam multi, etc., with sunt? 

Note 3. The same construction is used after non est, nihil est, quid est, num- 
quid est, etc., followed by quotl, cur, qudre, or quamobrem, and denoting ‘there 
is no reason Avhy,’ ‘ v/liat cause is there T ‘ is there any reason T as, Quod 
timeas, non est, fhere is no reason why you should fear. Ovid. Nihil est, 

J uod adrent.ujn nostrum pertimescas. Cic. Quid est, quod de ejtis civitdte clubitcs V 
d. Queens a me, quid C(jo Cdtilinam metuam. Nihil, et curdvi ne quis niHiieret. 
Quid est, enr virtus ijjsa per se non eft’iciat iedtos ? Id.—So after 7ion hdbeo, or 
nihil hdbeo; as, Non hdbeo, quod te accusem. Cic. Nil hdbeo, quod agam, I have 
nothing to do. Ilor. Nihil hdbeo, quod ad te scribam. Cic. So without a nega¬ 
tive, t)e quibus habeo ipse, quid sentiam. Id. Causa or, with quid and nihil, 
c«?7S(E, is sometimes added; as, Non fuit causa, cur postuldres. Id. Quid erai 
'ausee, cur metueret. Id. 

Note 4. (a.) The relative clause takes the subjunctive after the expressions 
included in this and the last rule, only when it expresses the character or 
quality of the subject of the antecedent clause; and the relative, as in the pre¬ 
ceding cases of the relative with the subjunctive, is equivalent to a personal or 
demonstrative jironoun with ut; as, Nemo est, qui nesciat. There is no one v.'ho 
is ignorant, i. e. no one is ignorant. Cic. So, Sunt, qui hoc carpant, There are 
some who blame this, i. e. some blame this. Veil. 

(6.) If the relative clause is to be constnied as a, pari of the loqical sttbjeci 
it does not require the subjunctive; as, Nihil stabile est, quod infldum est 
Nothing which is faithless is firm. Cic. 

8. (1.) A relative clause expressing the reason of what goes before, 
takes the subjunctive; as, 

Pecedfisse mihi videor, qui a te discesserim, I think I did wrong in leaving 
you. Cic. Inertiarn accusas dddlescentium, qui istam arteni non ediscant. You 
Dlara’e the idleness of the young men, because they do not learn that art. Id. 
0 fortuiuite dddlescens, qui tuoe virtfitis lldmerum prveedneTn inveneris!—in hav¬ 
ing found. Id. Cdnlnius fuit mirified viyllantiu, qui suo ioto consuldtu somnum 
non viderit,—since, etc. Id. 

(2.) Sometimes, instead of qui alone, ut qui, quippe qui, or utpStfi 
pii, is used, generally with the subjunctive; as, 

(hnrivin czirn patre non inibnt, qnipj)e qui 7ie in opjtidum paidem nisi perrdTO 
renisset. Cic. Neque Autonius jtrOcul dberat, utpOte qui matpio exercitu seque- 
retur. Sail. Hut sometimes with the indicative in Sallust and Livy; as, Quippe 
qui omnia viccrat. Sail. 

9. After diqnus, indignus, aptus, and xdoneus, a relative idause 
^kes the subjunctive; as, 

Videtur, qui dliquando imperet, dignus €«se. He seems to ce worthy at som< 
time to command. Cic. Rusiici iwstri quum fidem diict^us bdnitdtemque luudant, 
iignum esse dticunt, quicuin in tembns raices. Id Nuda vidcbd,tur aptior pcri 

24 


278 SYNTAX.—SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. § 265 


tona, quae de cetdte loqueretur. Id. Pompeius Idoneus non est, qui impetret. Id 
Ki reni idoiieam, de qua quajratur, et homines dignos, quibusoiw disscralur, pu~ 
tant. Id. 

Note 5. It the relative clause does not express that of which the person of 
thing denoted by the antecedent is worthy, its construction is not influenced 
by tliis rule. Thus, Quis semis libertate dignus fuit, cui nostra solus cdra non 
essdf The subjunctive is here used according to No. 7 of this section. 

Note 6. The infinitive frequentlv follows these adjectives in poetry, though 
rarely in prose; as, Et puer ipse fuit cantari dignus. Virg.:—and sonietimea 
ut; as. Eras dignus, ut liuberes inteyram mdnum. Quint. 

10. A relative clause, after unus, solus, primus, etc., restricting 
the affirmation to a particular subject, takes the subjunctive; as, 

Ilvec est una contentio, quae dt/Auc permanserit. This is the only dispute which 
has remained till this time. Cic. VOluptas est sola, quae nos vocet ad se, et alll- 
ccat suapte naturd. Pleasure is the only thing that, by its own nature, invites 
and allures us to itself. Id. 

11. When the relative refers to a dependent clause, it often takes 
the subjunctive. See § 266. 

12. The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive are used in narra¬ 
tion after relative pronouns and adverbs, when a repeated action is 
B})oken of; as. 

Semper lidhlti sunt fortissimi, qui summam imperii potirentur. Those were al¬ 
ways accounted the bravest, who obtained the supreme dominion. Nep. 
Quemcumque Victor jussu consulis prehendisset, iribunus mitti jubebat. Liv. 
Ut quisque maxime labbraret b)cus, aut ipse occurrebat, aut dliquos mittebat. So 
nfter si quis or qui; as, Si qui rem malltidsius gessisset, dcdecus existimabant. 
Cic. Qudiiens super tali neyotio consultaret, edita dOmus parte utebdtur. Tac. 
Nec quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tulisset impetwn, sustinere vdluit. —It is sometimej 
found in like manner after quum, tibi, ut, and si when used in the sense of 
qiium, when repeated actions are spoken of; as, /(/ubi dixisset, hnstam in fines 
edrum emittcbat. Liv. Sin NumUloe prdpius accessissent, ihi vero virtutem astern- 
dere. Sail. Sometimes even the present stibjunctive is so use<l when em¬ 
ployed as an aorist to express things which have hap])ene<l repeatedly, and 
still happen (see § 145, 1. 2.); as, Ubi de maynd virtute et ylorid bdndrum memo- 
res, quie sibi quisque, etc. Sail. 

Note 7. This is called the indefinite subjunctive, or subjunctive of generality, inasmuch 
as the action is not referred to a distinct, individual case. The indicative, however, is 
used in such cases more frequently than the subjunctive. 


SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 

§ Dependent clauses, containing an indirect question, 

take the subjunctive. 

Note 1 . A question is indirect when its substance is stated in a dependent 
clause witliout tlie interrogative form. Indirect questions generally depend 
npon those verbs and expressions which commonly take after them the accusa- 
tivj with the infinitive. Cf. § 272. Thus:— 

Quill is sit animus, ipse diiimus nescit, The mind itself knows not wbat the 
mini is. Cic. Credibile non est, quantum scribam, It is incredible how much I 
write. Id. Q\xh eyo sim, me royitasf Do you ask me who I am? Plaut. Adis 
quid scribam nescio. Cic. Nec quid scribam hcibeo, Nor have I any thing Co 
write. Id. Ddce me, ubi sint dii, Inform me wliere tlie gods are. Id. Incertvn 
ist, quo te loco mors exspectet. Sen. Ep. Quam pridem sibi heredi\ as venissct, 
UOcet. Id. Nunc accipe, quare desipiant omnes. Hf'r. Id utrum ilU seutiaat, ajj 


S 266. SYNTAX.-SUBJUNCTIVE IN INSERTED CLAUSES. 279 


vero slmulent, tu intelliges. Cic. Qticero, num tn sSndtui cmisnm tuam perniittas. 
Id T'irfes, ut altd stet nive candldmn Sdracie. Hor. JVescit, vitdne fruatur, ac 
Bit dpud mdnes. Ovid. 

Note 2. All interrofiativos whether adjectives, pronouns, or par* 
tides, may serve as connectives of clauses containing indirect ques¬ 
tions; as, 

Quantus, quali.t, qxtdt, guSius, qudtuplex, nter; quis, qui, cujas ; qud, unde, quQ^ 
quorsum, quamdiu, quamdudum, quampridem, qudties, cur, quare, qiinmobrem, quemadc 
mddum, qudmddo, ut, quam, quantdpSre, an, ne, num, utrum, anne, annon. 

Remark 1. The indicative is frequently used in dependent questions, 
especially in Terence and Plautus and occasionally in later poets; as, Vi<h 
di dritui quid facit. Ter. So Virg. Eel. 5, 7. In the best prose writers the in* 
dicative generally indicates that the question is direct, or that the senter.ee is 
not a question; as, Queerdmus ubi 'itudefuiwn est. Let us seek there, Avhere the 
crime actually is. Cic. Nihil est admirdbilius, quam quomddo ille moi'tem fiUt 
tiilit. 

Rem. 2. In double questions, ‘ whether — or,’ the first may be introduced by 
utrurn, or the enclitic ne, or without an interrogative particle. Hence there are 
tour forms of double questions,—1. utrum (or utrum ne), — an. 2. utrum, —an 

(anne). 3. -ne, - an. 4. -ne, - -ne; as, Multum interest, utrum lam 

immlnuatur, an sdlus deseratur. Cic. The inten'Ogative particle utrum is not 
used in a single question; and num — an is used only in direct questions. The 
English ‘ or not ’ in the second part, which is used without a verb, is expressed 
in Latin by annon or necne, either with or without a verb; but necne occurs 
only in indirect questions; as, Dii utrum sint, necne sint, qtueintur. Cic.— Ne — 
ne, an — an, or num — num scarcely occur except in poetical or unclassical lan¬ 
guage. 

Rem. 3. Dubito, duhium est, or incertum est an, dHibero or hcesito an, and 
especially haud scio an, nescio an, though implying some doubt, have generally 
a sense almost affirmative. Compare § 198, 11, R. (e.) 

Rem. 4. Nescio qnis, used nearly in the sense of dtiquis, does not influence 
th.e mood of the following verb; as, Sed cdsu nescio quo in ea tempOra letas nos¬ 
tra incldit. Cic. Luciis, nescio quo cdsu, nocturno tempdre incensus est. Nep. 
So, also, nescio qubmddo, ‘somehow’ or ‘ in some way ’; as, Std nescio quornd- 
do, Inhceret in rnetitibus quasi aiujurium. Cic. In like manner mirum quam, mi- 
rum quantum, nlmium quantum, and the like, when united to express only one 
idea, do not affect the m'' d of the verb; as, Sales in dlcendo nimium quantum 
valent, —very much. Cic 

SUBJUNCTIVE IN INSERTED CLAUSES. 

§ SOU. 1. When a dependent proposition containing either 
an accusative with the infinitive, or a verb in the subjunctive, has 
a clause connected with it, as an essential party either by a rela¬ 
tive, a relative adverb, or a conjunction, the verb^of the latter 
clause is put in the subjunctive; as, 

(laid enim pdtest esse tarn perspicuum, quam esse dllquod niimen, quo lixc vo- 
ganturV For what can be so clear as, that vhere is some divinity by wtorn 
tiiese things are governed V Cic. Here the thing which is stated to be clear is, 
not merely esse aliquod niimen, that tin.-"* is a god, but also that the votld is 
governed by him. Hence the latter clause, quo luec regantur is an essential pari 
of the general proposition. Jlludsic fere defjnlri solet, tlecdrum id esse, qiua 
\omentdneum sit hdminis excellentice. Id. Auaiam quid sit, quod EqTicurum non 
vobes, I shall hear why it is that you do not approve of Epicurus. Id. Jussit 
4, quee venissent, ndves Euboeam peiirent. Liv. 


280 SYNTAX.—SUBJUNCTIVE IN INSERTED CLAUSES. § 266 


Remark 1. Henco the subjunctive is used in general sentences, in which 
the class of things mentioned exists only ns a conception or idea, Avhile the 
individual thing has a real existence; as, A’si enim ulcisctiidi et pinicndi mddus 
atque hand si io (in satis sit vum qui lacessierit injurice sues poenitere^ i. e. each 
individual offender of the class. 

Rem. 2. \Mien the principal proposition contains a subjunctive denoting a 
result, after itn, tarn, U'llis, etc., the inserted clause has the indicative; as, Astu 
vero tain dplma est et fertilis, ut— riiultitudine edrum rerum, quae exportantur 
facile omni/jiis terris antecellat. Cic. The same is the case in definitions; as 
Vidrr?. ic/ifur d/Hirtet, epue sint convenientia cum ipse neyotio, hoc est, quaj ab r@ 
tep'irdi-e non Cic.—So also explanatory clauses, especially circumlo¬ 

cutions introdnceil by a relative pronoun, are sometimes found witli the indic¬ 
ative; as, Itdtpie ilie Marius item eximie L. Flotium dilexit, cujus inyenio j^dUlbai 
ea, quaj gesserat, posse celtbrdri. Cic. 

Note. To this rule belongs the construction of the drdtio ohliqua, ‘ indirect 
discourse,’ or ‘reported speech,’ in which the language of another is prcsen'.ed, 
not as it Avas conceived or expressed b}' him, but in the third person. Thus. 
Ctesar said, ‘ I came, I saw, I conquered,’ is dhect,—^Caesar said, that * he came, 
saw, and conquered,’ is indirect discourse. 

2. In the drdtio ohliqua, the main proposition is expressed by 
the accusative with the infinitive; and dependent clauses con 
nected with it by'relatives and particles, take the subjunctive. 

Thus, Cicero and Quintilian, in quoting the language of Marcus Antonius, 
make use^ the former of the drdtio dlrecta, the latter of the drdtio obliqua ; — 
Antdniiis inqxdt, ‘ Ars edimm rerum est, quae sciuntur’, Antonius says, ‘Art be¬ 
longs to those things Avhich are known.’ Cic. Antonius iiuquit, artem edrum 
rerum esse, quae sciantur, Antonius says, that ‘ art belongs to those things 
which are known.’ Quint. 

So, Socrates dicere sdh'bal, omnes, in eo quod scireut, satis esse eldquentes, So¬ 
crates Avas accustomed to say, that ‘ all Avere sufficiently eloquent in that which 
they understood V Cic. Cato mirdri se aiehat, quod mm rideret hdruspex, hdruspi- 
cem quum vidisset. Id. Neyat jus esse, <pd nvles non sit, puyndre cum hoste. Id. 
Imliyndbantur ibi esse imperium, ubi non esset libertas. LiA'. Itdcpie Alhenienses 
quod hCmestuni non esset, id ne utile quidem (esse) putdverunt. Cic. 

Re.makk 1. (a.) When the subjunctiA’e Avould be necessary in the drdtio 
rfim tu, to denote liberty, poAA'er, etc., the same remnit'.s in ihQ drdtio obliqua, 
and is not changed into the infuutive Avith an accusativ’c; as, Ad hcec Aridristus 
resjMmlit, r/uum vellet, congrederetur. To this Ariovistus replied, that ‘ he might 
meet him Avhen he pleased.’ Cais. In the drdtio dlrecta, this would be cemyre 
didr is. 

(b.) The imperative in the drdtio dlrecta is, in the drdtio obliqua, changed 
into the subjuncpve; as, hoc mild dlcite, Avhich in the drdtio obliqua is, hoc %lbi 
dieant, or hoc sibi dlcerent, according to the tense of the leading verb. 

(c.) So also direct questions addressed to the second person, AAdien changed 
from direct to indirect spe^^ch, become subjunctives. Liv. 6, 37.—But such 
questions Avhen not addressed to the second person are expressed in the drdtio 
obliqua by the'udcusative Avith the infinitive; as Avhen in direct speech Ave saj’, 
litiamsi veteris contuiidlue ubllrisci relim, nnm possum etiam rheniium injuridrum 
m-hiidricni drponeref 'I'he drdtio obliqua will be, Cesar respondii (histor. ])err.,'— 
d veteris cont'um lue obllvisci vellet, num etiam 7•ecentium injuridrum—memdriam 
dcpdiiere posssV Cajs. Verv rarely the accusative Avith the infinitive is found 
in a question of the secoiul person, as in LiA\ 6, 17: but the subjunctive in 
questions of the third person is less uncommon in Caisar; as, Quis 'j>dti posseti 
lOr quern iMlti qiossef Quis hoc sibi persudderetf for quern sibi persudsurumf See 
s 273, 3. 

Rem. 2. A writer may state his own past' words or thoughts in dmtio ohtiquo 
elthei pre erving the first person, or adopting the third. 


§267 


SYN I AX.-IMrERATTVE MOOD. 


281 


Rkm. 3. When the inserted clause contains the words or sentiments of the 
subject of the leadinc; clause, all references to him are roajulariv expressed by 
the reflexives sui and «/?/.*>■; as, Ilac necessitate coacins domino navis qid sit dp?.i it 
jKulta podicens, si se canse'cvassel. Nep. And this is equally true 'when the 
V'ord to which the pronoun refers is not in reality the grammatical snhject, 
provided it may still ne conceived as such; as, Qumn ei in snspicidnem vhiisseiy 
sliqnid in e/nstOla de ?e esse scriptiim. Nep.; for the words, yiui/u ei in susptciA^ 
tteni venisset, are equivalent to (juitin suspicaretur. See ^ 208, (1.) 

Rkm. 4 The tenses to he used in changing the driitio dlrectn into the oldlqva, 
depend on the tense of the verb which introduces the quotation, according to 
the rule, ^ 258. But when the future perfect would be used in the direct, the 
plu’perfect is necessary in the oblique form; but the perfect is used after the 
present, perfect definite, or future. 

Rem, 5. When the connected clause contains merely a descriptive circnm- 
etaiice, or expresses what is independent of the sentiment of the preceding 
clause, it takes the indicative; as, Imp^rdvit Alexander Lysippo, ut eortini eipi- 
iiim, qul dpud Granlcum ceclderant, fdcerci stdtuas^ Alexander ordered Lysip¬ 
pus to make statues of those horsemen who liad fallen at the Granicus. 
Sometimes, in other cases, Avhen it is evident from the sense, that the connect¬ 
ed clause is an essential part of the proposition, the indicative is used, to avoid 
giving the appearance of contingency to the sentence. 

3. A clause connected to another by a relative or causal con¬ 
junction, takes the subjunctive, (whatever be the mood of the 
preceding verb,) when it contains not the sentiment or allegation 
of the writer, but that of some other person alluded to ; as, 

Socrates accfisdtus est, quod coiTumpgret juvenlutem, Socrates was accused 
of cornipting the youth, lit., because (as was alleged) he corrupted the youth. 
Deuni inrdcdbnnt, cujus ad sdlenne venissent, They invoked the god, to whose 
solemnities they luul come. Liv. Quos viceris dmlcos tlbi esse edve credos. Do 
not believe that those whom you have conquered are your friends. Here, in 
the first example, the charge of cormpting the youth is not made by the 
writer, but by the accusers of Socrates. So, in the second example, the wor- 
shij)pers allege that they have come to attend upon the solemnities of the god. 
In the last, it is implied by the use of the subjunctive mood, that the belief 
spoken of is that of the person addressed:— quos vicisti would have been merely 
an addition of the speaker, by means of which he would have designated life 
persons whose friendship he was speaking of; and, in general, the indicative, in 
such sentences, is employed in those statements which are independent of the 
sentiments of the person, to whose thoughts or words allusion is made. Of. 
supra, 2, R. 5. 

Remark. In the preceding cases, it is not directly said that the sentiments 
are those of another than the writer. In Cicero, however, the words dlco, puto 
arbitror, and the like, are often construed in a similar manner, although, ])ro- 
perly speaking, not these verbs, but those in the clauses dependent on them, 
should be in the subjunctive; as, (inuni mini, Ilonnibdlis permissu, exisset de 
castins, rediil poulo post, (piod se oblituni nescio quad dicOret,...because (as) he 
said, he had forgotten something. Cic. Ab Atlo'nlensibus, Idciim sejnillurit intra 
urbeni ut durent, ihi 2 )etrdre nonpdtui, quod reliy.bne se iinpedln dicerent. Id. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

§ The imperative mood is used to express a command 

wis/i, advice, or exhortation ; as, 

Nosce te, Know thvself. Cic. xEquani memento servUre mentem, Remenibe 
o preserve an unruled mind. Hor. Hue ades, Come hither. Virg. Pasce cd- 
wUas, et poturn pastas age, et inter agendum occursdre capro caveto. Id. 


882 


SYNTAX.—INFINITIVE MOOD. 


§268 


^1.) The imperative present denotes that an action is to be performed direct¬ 
ly or at once; as, Uge^ read; in&rere, die; or that a state or condition is to con¬ 
tinue; as, m’e, live. 

(2.) The imperative future denotes that something is to be done, as soon as 
something else lias taken place; as, (Juu?/i vuletudini tuce consulueris, turn con- 
Bulito ndvigdtidni. Cic. Prhis audlte jjaucis; qu^d quum dixero, si pldctie-nt^ 
facitote. Ter. The precedent event is often to be supplied by the mind. 
Sometimes, especially in poetry, the imperative present is used for the impera¬ 
tive future, and, on the other hand, scito and sciidte, from scio, are used instead 
of the imperative present, which is wanting. 

(3.) Hence the imperative future is properly used in contracts, laws, and 
mils ; and also in precepts and rules <f conduct; as, Reyio imperio duo suntc^ 
i\que consfUes appellantor, mllitue sumnium Jus habento, neiniui parento, illis 
idh(spopuli suprema lex esto. Cic. Non satis est jmlchra esse jjocwidfa, dulcia 
snnto. Hor. Ignoscito siepe alteri, numquam tibi. 'Syr. 

Remark 1. With the imperative, not is expressed by ne, and nor 
by neve; as, 

Ne tantu dnimis assuescite bella. Virg. Ne crede cdldH. Id. Hdnilnem mor- 
tuuin in urbe ne sepelito, neve urito. Cic. 

Note. Non and neque occur, though rarely, wnth the imperative; as, Fos 
imdque non cdris aures dnerdte Idpillis, nec prodite grdves insuto vestibus auro. 
Ovid. But with the subjunctive used for the imperative non and especially 
neipie are found more frequently. Cf. § 260, R. 6, (6.)—In Plautus and Terence 
ne is of common occurrence both with the imperative and ■with the present 
subjunctive, and with no difference of meaning; but later poets chiefly use ne 
with the present subjunctive, and ne with the imperative onlv when they speak 
iinphatically. In classical prose writers the periphrastic nolt with the infinitive 
s prefeiTed. 

Rem. 2. The present and perfect subjunctive are often used instead of both 
tenses of the imperative, to express a command in a milder form, an exhorta¬ 
tion, or an entreaty; as, Qui adipisci veram gloriam rOlet, justitice fungatur 
pjficiis. Cic. Quod dubitas, ne feceris. Plin. Ep. See § 260, 11., R. 6. An imper¬ 
ative of the perfect passive is very rarely found; as. At vos adnibniti nostris 
qudque cdsibus este. Ovid. Jacta dlea esto. Ctes. in Suet. But the subjunctive 
is more common; as, Jacta sit dlea. Sometimes also the futui'e indicative; as, 
Sed valebis, medque negdtia vldebis, mcque diis juvantibus ante bruniam exspec- 
tabis, instead of vale, vide, exspecta. Cic. Ubi sententiam meam vdbis jm'egdro, 
turn quibus eddem pldcebunt, in dextram partem tdciti transibitis, instead or 
transitdte. Liv. With the future the negative is non. See § 259, R. 1, (4.) 

Rem. 3. Sometimes, for the simple affirmative imperative, cw'a or curdto ut, 
fac ut, or fac alonQ IS, used with the subjunctive; as, Cura ut quam prlmum 
venias, CTwie as soon as possible. Fac erwlias. Instruct, or Take care to in¬ 
struct. Cic. For the negative imperative fac ne, cave ne or cave alone, with 
the present or perfect subjunctive is used; but especially noli with the infini¬ 
tive; as, Noli piitdre. Do not suppose. Cic. Cove existimes. Do not think. Id, 
Nolite id voile qiuxl non feri piutesl, el cavete ne spe prcesentis pads peipetuam 
ydcein bmittatis. Id. 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 

OF THE TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE 

§268. 1. The infinitive partakes of the properties of the noun and 

verb, just as th^ participle combines the properties of the adjective and verb 
It expresses nmply the action or state iinjilied in the verb in'an abstract mau 
ler, without specif} ing either person, number, or time, and thus raere/y hidi 
jates whether an acti(in is in progress or completed. 


§ 268 . 


SYNTAX.-INFINITIVE MOOD. 


2St 

2. The tenses of the infinitive denote respectively an action 
ns present, past, or future, in reference to the time of the V(jrbs 
r’/itli whicli they are connected; as, 

J/oc facere possum, I am able to do this. Cic. Vidi nnafros tnlmlcos cup^J’O 
I saw that our enemies were desiring war. Id. Nec gemere aPrid ces- 
sabit turtiir ah nlino. Nor shall the turtle dove cease to coo from the loftv elm 
Virg.— Vic(drem vicice succubuisse qucror, I complain that the victor has 
yielded to the vanquished. Ovid. Se a senlbus andisse dicebant, Thev said 
that they had heard (it) from the old men. Cic. Audiet ch'vs acuisse 
fumiiws. The vouth will hear that the citizens have whetteil the sword.' Hor.— 
Negat sc.se rerbum esse facturum, He declares that he is not about to spcai. 
Cic. Postf/uam ainlicrat non datum iri /ilio uxOrem swo, After he had lic&i\t 
that a wife would not be given to his son. 'I'er. Seinpei- existimabitis vliiH 
hdruni ros visuros fore, You will always suppose that you are to see none ol' 
these things. Cic. 

Re.vahk 1. (a.) The present and perfect infinitives are sometimes called ro- 
spectively the infinitives of incompiett and of tompleted action. The jiresent in¬ 
finitive, however, is sometimes used to denote a completed action. This is the 
u.<nal construction with ; but in such case the speaker transfers him¬ 

self to the past, and the expression denotes rather a recollection of the pro¬ 
gress than of the completion of the action; as, Hoc memenilni dicere, I remem¬ 
ber my saying this. Cic. Teucrum memini Siddna venire, I remember Teucer’s 
coming to Sidon. Virg. So with mhndrid teneo. Cic. Phil. 8, 10. Scribit also 
is construed like meminit; as, Cic. Off. 3, 2: and after the same analogy, and 
for the sake of vivid expression Cicero says, M. Maximum accepimus ydd/s 
celare, tacere, dissimulare, etc., though speaking of things Avhich he had not 
witnessed himself. So, also, with recordor; — Recoi'dor hnge omnibus unum an- 
teferre Demosthenem. Cic. When the action is spoken of simply as a fact, the 
perfect infinitive is used with memini; as, Memimstis meita distribuisse caas^im. 
Cic. 

(A.) The passive voice having no simple form for expressing the completed 
state of suffering makes use of the combination of the perfect participle with 
tsse; as, dmdtus esse, to have been loved. When thus combined esse loses its 
own signification of a continued state, and when this state is to be expressed, 
another infinitive must be chosen; as, Constrictam jimw horum conscu ulld toneri 
conjdrdtidntm tuam non Tides f Cic. Sometimes, howCver, Avhen no ambiguity 
can arise, esse in the usual combination retains its original meaning as, Aima 
PUddnem est, omnem mdrem Ldcediemdnidrwn inflammatum esse cupldiidte vin- 
cendi. Id. Here inflammatum esse expresses a continued or habitual state — 
Fuisse with the perfect participle denotes a state completed previous to a certain 
past time; as, Jubet bdno dnimo esse; sopitum fuisse regem subito ictu. Liv. 

Rkm. 2. To express the result of an action rather than its progi-ess, the per¬ 
fect infinitive is sometimes used instead of the present, especially after satii 
hdbeo, satis mild est, piidet, contentus sum, melius erU, vdlo or a verb of equivalent 
meaning; as, Baichdtur vdtes, magnum si peetdre ])ossit excussisse r/eun. Virg. 
Quum illam nemo relit attigisse. Plin. The poets use the infinitive perfect v/hera 
we should expect a present; as, Tendentes Pelion imjjdsuisse Olympo. Hor. 

Rem. 3. The present infinitive is also sometimes used for the future, esps- 
ciady when the verb has no future; as. Desine fdta deiim flecti sprrdre, Cease 
bo hope that the fates of the gods Avill be changed. Virg. _ Iflvdyjeaitm Trdjdm 
« sanmine diici audi(^,rat. hi. Cras mihi argentum dare dixit, i. e. se ddturum 
tsse. 'Ter. Cato aflirnud se tiro ilium non triumphare. Cic. 

Rem. 4. (a.) The infinitive future \ctive is formed by a combination of tha 
oarticiple future active with esse ; as, drndturus esse; the infinitive futurepaa- 
vvo bv'a combination of the supine in um wi*^!! iri; as, dmdtum Iri. Tnese 
uture infinitives denote an action or state as continuing. The particijile in 

, which properly expresses intention (see § 162, 14), takes also the infinitive 

’ e to express a past mtention; as, Scio te senpturum fuisse, I know thaf 


284 


SYNTAX.—INFINITIVE MOOD. 


§269 


you have had the intention to write, whence it was an easy transition to the 
Bense, ‘yon would have w'ritten,’ in conditional sentences, when tin; condition 
is not fulfilled Tliis infinitive is used especially in the apodosis of hypotheti¬ 
cal sentences, where in direct speech tlie pluperfect subjunctive would be 
used (cf. § 102, 14, R. 3.); as, Ktiain.-fi ofilevipera.-oiet atisphiis, idem eventurum 
fuisse j/ftlo. Cic. In like manner the infinitive future with esse is used in the 
ipodfjsis of hypothetical sentences instead of the imperfect subjunctifc; as, 
Xdbertus, nisi jurnsset, scelns se facturum (esse) ar/nti abCdur. Id. 

(b.) Instead of the future infinitive, in both voices, y/l/unm ease or fdre 
followed by and the sul)junctive, is often used; the present and imperfect 
Bubjunctive, in such cases, denoting an unfinished, the ])erfect and j)lu))erfcct 
a finished, future action; as, Nuintiwiia piituri fore, ut supplex ad te venire'/Ti, 
I never supposed (that it would hapjjen) that 1 should come a suppliant to you. 
Cic. Siispicor fore, ut infringatur hotnhuna imjirObitas. Id. Credibam fore, ut 
ijnsidlam scripsisses.—So, also, in the passive lor a continued state of future 
Bufieriiiio; the jn-esent and imperfect are used; as, Cvhh fore, ut episiolam scri- 
batur, and, Crcdebavi fore, ut epistdla scriberetur. Rut to express a com[)leted 
state in future time the perfect participle is employed; as, Q.uos spero brevi 
tempOre iecinn copulatos fore. Cic. Quod vide ret nbnilne jxleis bellum involiitura 
fore. Id. d'his construction is necessarily used, when the verb has either no 
future active participle, or no supine; as, in such case, the regular future infin¬ 
itive cannot be fonneil; as, Spero J'dre ut sdpias.—FOre is found in two pas¬ 
sages ])leonastically joined with the future participle active, viz. Te ad me 
fore venturum. Cic. Att. 5, 21: and Quuin smdtus censeret—llbenter facturos 
fore. Liv. 6, 42. 

Rem. 5. (a.) The periphrastic infinitive formed by the future active partici¬ 
ple with fuisse, denotes a future action contingent upon a condition which was 
not fulfilled; and, in the apodosis of a conditional sentence, corresponds to the 
pluperfect subjunctive; as, An censes me tantos Idbores snscepturum fuisse, si 
iisdem ftnibus (jloriam meam (juibiis vltam essem terrninaturus? Do you think 
that 1 should have undertaken so great labors if, etc. Cic. Ut persincuum sit 
omnibus, nisi tanta dcerbitas inja ice fuisset, iinmcptam illos in eum lOcuni progres- 
suros fuisse,....that they never w'ould have come into that place. Id. 

(6.) Futurvrn fidsse with ut and the imperfect subjunctive passive, corres¬ 
ponds to the infinitive fuisse with the future participle active in a conditional 
proposition; a?,. Nisi nuncii essent alldti, existlmdbant pliirique futurum fuisse, 
ut oppidum amitteretur,...that the town would have been lost. Cses. 

(c.) The participles future passive cannot be iised to form an infinitive future 
passive, since it always retains the meaning of necessity, and in this sense has 
three regular infinitives, dmaivdum esse, dinandum fuisse, and dmandumfdre; 
as, Inst ire hiemem, aut sub pelllbus habendos m'dites jore, aut difl’ereudum 
esse hi eestdtem bellum. Liv. 

Rem. 6. In the apodosis of a conditional seritence, the perfect infinitive, 
li^e the past tenses of the indicative, (see § 259, K. 4.), sometimes corresponds 
bi th--|)luperfect subjunctive; as, ( Dixit) sibi vitam flliie sue edriorem fuissa, 
ti lilcerre, ac jmdtcce rirere lieitum fuisset, (He said) that the life of h'S daughter 
bad been dearer to him thrm his own, if it had been permitte<l.... Liv. Thij 
nse of the perfect infinitive is necessary, when the verb has no fuhire partici¬ 
ple; as, Fjpiidem Pldtdnem existima, si ejenus fdreiise dicendi tract jre vCbiissst 
gvdvissime et copiosissime potuisse dicere, —would have been able to speak. Cic.* 

§ The infinitive may be regarded either as a verb or as an ab¬ 

stract noun, (a.) As a verb it is used either indefinitely (^ 143, 4), or with a 
iubject of its own, which is put in the accusative, (§ 239). But tlie infinitive 
passive of iieuter and sometimes of active verbs, like the third person singulai 
of that voice, mav be used impersonally or without a sulject; as, Vid^ tdU 

r 'perari litdre, Vou see a stir is made all along the shore. Vir^. See ^ '2U9 
8, (2 ), and 239, R. 4. The present infinitive has sometimes, in narration, & 
subject in the nominative See \ 209, R. 6. 


^ 2G9. 


SYNTAX.—INFINTTTVF. MOOD. 


285 


(6.) As a non, the infinitive, either alone or with a subject acciisatire, has 
two case?!, the nominative and tlie accusative, and is accordingly used either 
as the subject or the object of a verb. 

THE INFINITIVE AS THE SUBJECT OF A VERB. 

Tlie infinitive, either Avitli or without a subject-accusative, may 
be the subject of a verb; as, 

Ad rempublicim perttnet me conservari. It concerns the state that I should 
be i>rcserved. Cic. Nuviquam est utile peccare. To do Avrong is never useful. Id. 
Mujui dcdeciis est pnrlu ainittere (piam omnlno non paravisse. Sail. In the first 
example conservari with its subject accusative me is the subject of pertinet^ 
and is equivalent to ‘ my preservation ’; in the second, ^^ectdre is the subject 
cf est Utile. See § 202, 2, and III. R. 2. 

Remark 1. A general tnith may be expressed by the infinitive Avithout a 
subject; as. Fuelnus est vwclrQ civem lioinanum, To bind a Roman citizen, or, 
that one should bind a Roman citizen, is a crime. But in such case the verb 
esse and vei'bs denoting to appear^ to be considered or called (^210, S.), yq- 

quire the noun or adjectiA^e of the predicate to agree Avith the implied subject 
in the accusative; as, jEquum est pcccdlis veniam poscentem reddSre rursiis. 
Ilor. Atticus maximum cestimdvit queestum, memorem gratum^'ue cognosci. Nep. 

Note. The indefinite pronoun dliquem or dliquos may in such cases be sup¬ 
plied, and the same indefiniteness may be expressed by te or 7?os, cf. § 209, R. 7; 
but it is still more frequently expressed by the infinitive passiA'e. Hence the 
sentence Fdclnus est rincire civem Jiomdnum, may also be expressed by Fdclnus 
est vinciri civem Jtdmdnum. So, Qunm viderent de edrnm virtute non desperari. 
Nep. — 'I'he impersonal verlis licet, decef, oportet, 6pus est, and necesse est, Avhen 
tnere is no definite subject, are j’oined Avith the infinitive actiA’O alone; but 
Avhen ttiere is a subject-accusative, they are connected Avith the passive con¬ 
struction: as, act. beet hoc fdch'c; decet sq)ecimen cdjjcre ex hac re; p'ass. ftcei 
hoc Jieri; decet specimen cdpi. 

Rem. 2. The infinitive, Avith or Avithout a subject accusatiA'c, is often the 
subject of a proposition, Avhen the substantiA’e verb Avith a noun, a neuter ad¬ 
jective. or an impersonal A’crb forms the predicate. Of this kin<l arc 
vequum, verls'^m'de, emsentdneum, dpertum — est, erat. etc., necesse est.dpus est; — 
appdret, constat, convenit, decet, licet, dportet ; intelliqi'ur, jieisiniitur, etc.; as, 
Cni A^erba dare diffUile est. Ter, IMendacem memorem. esse dportet. Quint. 
Legem breA'’em esse dportet. Sen. Constat prdjecto ad sulutem clvium inventas 
esse leges. Cic. Non dnim me hoc jam dicere pudebit. Id. See § 209, R. 3, 
(5.), («:> 

Reai. 3. The infinitiv’e may itself be the subject of an infinitiA^e; as, AwtZio 
non llcere cuiquam in ndve cdpillos deponere. Ter. 

Rem. 4. The infinitive, Avith or Avithout a subject accusative, ma}' also be 
the predicate nominative; as, Tmpune qiicelibet facere id est regem esse. Sail. 
In this sentence y’dcere is the subject, and regem esse is the predicate; for id, 
which only represents by a kind of apposition the clause impune qumlibet f deere, 
can be omitted. 

Re.ai. 5. When the infinitiA^e me, (or others of similar meaning, as, feri, 
xnvdre, vltam. degere, ceddre, dblre. etc.), Avith a predicate adjective (or noun), is 
joined Avith licet, such predicate is put in the accusative, if the subject-accusa¬ 
tive of the infiiutive is expressed, and sometimes, also, Avhen it is omitted, but 
more frequently, in the latter case, Jie predicate adjective or noun is attracted 
to the dative "folloAving licet; as, Ut eum llceat ante tempus consulem fieri. 
Anct. ad Her. Medios esse jam non llcebit. Cic. Si clvi Romano licet esse 
CAlitilnum. Id. — Llcuit enim esse dtiexo 'Themistocli. \(\. Mild negllgenti esse 
turn licet. Id. Slbi vltam fllice sud edridrem faisse, si liberoe ac pudicoe Adv^re 
kcHum fuisset tscil. ei). Liv. So also ndeesse est Avith the predicate in the 


286 


SYNTAX.-INFINITIVE MOOD. 


§270 


dative. FoAt* n^ee^e est fortibus \iris esse. Liv.—Bi'.t Ucet, fiportei and n^ces'A 
ut are also joined with the subjunctive mood, and hence is derived the con 
Btruction of* iictt as a conjunction. See ^ 263, 2. 

THE INFINITIVE AS THE OBJECT OF A VERB. 

§ S70. Tlie infinitive,, either with or without a subject-ac¬ 
cusative, may be the object of a verb; as, 

Bxc -vitare cfijMJiius, We desire to avoid this. Cic. Poctas omnmo nen Conor 
attingcre, 1 do not at all attempt to read the poets. Id. Sententiam v.iljre 
cCqni'runt, 'I'liey desired that the opinion should prevail. Id. Sj)ero te vaUre, 
I nope that you are well. Id. 

Notk. The infinitive as the object of a verb supplies the place of the accusa¬ 
tive of the thiny, and hence many active verbs besides the infinitive take in 
the active voice an accusative of the person, cf. § 231, R. 3, (b.), and in the 
passive retain the infinitive; as, Consules jubentur scribere exercitum. jMurofl 
adire vetiti sunt. Cf. § 234, I. 

Remark 1. The infinitive alone may also depend upon an adjec¬ 
tive, and sometimes upon a noun. 

(a.) It may depend upon relative adjectives, (see § 213, R. 1), which, by the 
poets, are joined with the infinitive instead of their usual construction with the 
genitive of the gerund, etc.; as, Cedere nescius. Hor. Avidi coimiiittere ptig- 
nam. Ovid. Cin)idus inoriri. Id. Cantdre periti Arcades. Virg. Callidus cow- 
dere furto. Hor. Quidlibet hnpdtens sperdre. Id. Sutr'mas fdeere inscihs. Varr. 
Insuetus vera aiidire. Liv. Certa indri. Virg. Felicior ungmre tela. Virg. 
So, Audax omniaperpeti, Resolute to endure every thing. Hor. Sellers orndre 
Cyp nssis, Skilful to adorn. Ovid. Segues solvere rmluvi. Hor. Indocilis pau¬ 
perism pdti. Id. AVm lenis fdta riclm^ere. Id. See § 213, R. 4, (1.) 

{b.) It may also depend upon adjectives signifying usefulness, Jitness, e'lc,., 
which are sometimes by the ])oets construed with the infinitive instead of the 
dative; as, ( aspirare et a.^<;sse chOris erat utilis. Hor. Bitas mollis ei 

apta regi. Ovid. Eons etiain rivo dare nonien idoneus. Hor. Friujes conshmtro 
nati. Id. And after and cojifewfas; as, Dignus dindri. Virg. Cf. § 244, 

R. 2, (A) 

(c.) Upon a noun; as, Tempus est hytis libri fiicere flnem. It is time tc 
finish this book. Nep. Iniit consilia 7'eges tollere. He devised a plan to destroy 
the kings. Id. Ea erat confessio cdjmt rerum Rdinam esse. Liv. Cupido iiices- 
terat B'Jhidpiam invisere. Curt. Quibus in dtio vivere copia h'at. Sail. So, Nec 
mihi sunt vires inimlcos pellere tectis, instead of pellendis inlmlcis, or ad ])dlendo» 
\nlmicos. Ovid. 

(d.) If for the infinitives depending on nouns or adjectives other nouns were 
substituted, these last would be put in the genitive, dative, or ablative; and 
hence such infinitives may perhaps be properly regarded as exceptions to the 
rule, that the infinitive has but two cases, the nominative and the accusative. 

Re? 4 2. (rt.) The infinitive with the accusative sometimes stands imcoii- 
nested, especially in exclamations and indignant interrogations, Avhere criulibile 
csif or wrunine estf may be supj)lied; as, Mene incepto desistere victam? That 
1, vanquished, should desist from mv undertaking? \Trg. Me miserum! te in 
tentas a;ru7nnas propter 7ne iuchlisse! Cic.—But ?/<, also, with the subjunctive, 
either with or without an interrogative particle, may be used to express a 
question with indignation; as. Ewe (scil. patri) ego ut adverser? Liv. Tu ut 
um<iuam U corrlgas? Cic. .Judlcio ut drdtor decumdnuni persequalur? 1(.L 
where fd-i pdtest f may be supplied. 

(6.) So, in the orotic obllgua, the words signifying said, sayi7ig, etc., are ofter 
omitted, or implied in a preceding verb or phrase; as, Id facile ejfzci posse 
scil. durit. Nep. Quern signum daturum f ugientibus t Curt. 


§271 


SYNTAX.-INFINITIVE MOOD. 


i87 


ftKM. 3. The infinitive is sometimes to be supplied; and esse and fuisst 
with a predicate adjective, and also in the compound forms of the infinitives, 
both active and passive, are commoidy omitted, especially after verbs of say- 
iny, (hi ikliiij, Icnotcuifj, iiin\ jyerveiviny ; as, Vos coynm'i fortes. Sail. Qnem pid< 
turn memdrOvi. Tac.—So, also, with the infinitive perfect passive when depend¬ 
ing on re/o, nolo^ ciijno. atid dporttt ; as, Adolescenti moreiti yestum djfortuit. Ter. 
Q’ohI Jam pritltm Jactam Oportuit. Cic.—Sometimes in a relative danse an in¬ 
finitive is ti) be supplied from the finite verb of the main proposith'n; as, 
Quos vOliiit oouies iyttcrj'hit, scil. inter/h ere. Ne ilUun quldeni consiquunluTf 
quam putant, yrutiam ; i, e. quani se eonsecutaros putant. Cic. 


niE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A S U B JE C T-A C C US ATI VB. 

§ 971 . The infinitive, without a subject-accusative, Is used after 
verbs denoting (ibility, obligation, intention or endeavor ; after verba 
eignifying to begin, continue, cease, abstain, dare, fear, hesitate, or be 
loont; and after the passive of verbs of saying, believing, reckoning, 
etc. 

Note 1. To these classes belong pos5?<m, queo, n^queo, valeo, dsbeo; euro, eSgito, 
(fSrerno, statuo, conslltuo, in.ttltuo, ])aro; Conor, nitor, lendo, contendo, tento, mdiinro, 
jrropSro, ag^rSdior, persSviro,; — ccppi, inclpio, pergo, dcstno, dcsisto, intermitto, parco, 
r^cu.so; sSleo, assuesco, consuesco, insuesco; audeo, vSreor, mStuo, rifomndo, t\meo, 
korreo, dvIAto; — audior, credor, existi7nor, firor, 7iSgor,nuntior, pSrIAbeor, putor, trador, 
jubeor, videor, and cogor. 

Note 2. When the preceding verbs are joined with esse, lidheri, judlcaH, 
vidrin, etc., the predicate noun or adjective is put in the nominative; as, Solei 
tristis n't/ert; neu/e sapiens esse; coepit inihi molestns esse; debts esse diligeus; 
potest liber esse: and so also nieretur, seit, didhit liber esse. 

Note 3. The poets, in imit«ition of the Greeks, use the infinitive after fuye, 
auftr, c(ire, puree, memento; pCiveo, refuyio, (puero, uryeo, Idburo, dmo, yaiuleo, 
furo, adleo, sdnio, mitio, remitto, puiior, jdro, conjuro, pnyno, ndtus, and some 
Other verbs, especially to denote a tcish or purpose; as, Introiit ridere. Ter. 
Non te franyere persefpior. llor. Non pdpulare penutes venimus. Virg. In this 
construction, the poets are sometimes imitated by the later prose writers. 

Remark 1. Many of the verbs above enumerated, instead of the infinitive, 
may be followed by" the subjunctive with ut, ne, etc.; and with some of them 
this Is the regular construction; as, Sententiam ne diceret, reeusdvit. Cic. 

Rem. 2. The passives dlcor, trador, feror, narror, repirior, existlmor, rideor, 
etc., may either be used personally, with the infinitive alone, or impersonally, 
followed* by the accusative with the infinitive. Thus we may say. Muter 
Pausdnice eo tempore y'lsXssQ dicitur, or, Dicitur eo tempdre mdtrevi Paminia 
■'izisse. The mother of rausanias is said to have been living....or. It is said 
tii.it the mother of rausanias Avas living.... Nep. The former construction is 
Oiore common especially Avith videor, see § 272, K. 6; but the latter is fi equcnt 
with ntintiutur, and A'ery common Avith the compound tenses, trdditum eet, 
vrtylVAim est, etc,., and Avith the participle future passiA^e; as, crulendum esU 
intdbyenduni est, etc.; as. Quorum neminem tdhm fuisse creilendum, etc. Cic. 

Rem. 3. The infinitive Avithout a subject I'’ used after a verb, only when it 
denotes an action or state of the subject of that verb. 

Rem. 4. The verbs to wish or desire, volo, nolo, main; ciipio, opto, studeo, have 
a tAVofold constriction: — the infiniti\’e Avithout a subject-accusative is used 
tfter them, Avhen the subject remains the saiue; ami Avhen folloAved by esse, 
bdberi, etc., the jiredicate-noun or adjectii'e is in the noirinative; — but the 
accusative A’ith the infinitive is used Avhen the .subject is changed, or Avlieii a 
Tcilexive nroi.oun of the same person follows. We say, therefore, volo erfidituj 
(ieri. and on the other hand, vdlo te a'uditum and vdh me eiiulitum fei'i 
jo, Volo is esje, qttem t/u me «33e vdluisti. Cic. Cupw me esse clementem, cupio— 


Sf88 


SYNTAX.-INFINITIVE MOOD. 


§ 


070 


m<3 non dissdJuttm vlderi. Id. ; or, omitting the pronoun, cupic esse clemens nec 
dissolutus videri .— Omnis hdinines qui sese student prcestdre eeteins anvndUbus 
etc. SiiU. 

Note 4. Vdlo is used with the present infinitive passive; as. Me dmdri v6h^ 
r wisli to be beloved; hoc vHini inttUiyi^ I wish this to be understood; and also 
with the infinitive perfect passive to denote tlie eager desire that soniotliing 
should be instantly accomplished; as, L(‘(jjti quod erant nppelldti sitpei bias, 
OSriiithum pritres vestri —exstinctum esse vOlnerunt. Cic.; but it occurs mc?t 
frequenth^ with the omission of esse; as, hoc factum vdlo; nunc illos cominbiil- 
toa velim: so, patviani exstinctam ciipit. 

Note 5. The nominative with the infinitive after verbs of saying, perceiv¬ 
ing, etc. (§ 272), is rare even in poetry, and is an imitation of the Greek idican, 
which requires the nominative with the infinitive when the same subject re¬ 
mains; as, Phaselns ille, quern ridPtis, hospites, ait fuisse ndcium cCderrinuis. 
Catull. Quin retidit Ajax esse Jdvis nepos, instead of se esse Jovis nepolem 
Ovid. Sensit imdios delapsus in hastes, instead of se delapsum esse. Vii'g. 

THE INFINITIVE WITH A S UB J E C T-A C C U S ATI VE. 

§ The infinitive with a subject-accusative follows verbs 

of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, and the like; as, 

Vldebat, id non posse fieri. He saw that that could not be done. Nep. Sentit 
animus, se sud vi, non dliend, mdveri. Cic. AudTvi te venire. Me in ejus pdtes- 
idte d\yA f dre. Id. A'ddrm?Lnt m'dltum jdcere dnimos. Liv. /Scp/je venit ad aures 
mens, te istud nlmis cj-e6ro dicere. Cic. Earn pniynam ad Perusiam puyndiam 
(esse), quldam auctores sunt. Liv. 

Note I. This rule includes all such verbs and phrases as denote the exercise of the 
external senses and intellectual faculties, or the comumnication of thought toothers; 
as, audio, video, sentio, anvmadverto, cos^nosco, itUelllgo, perclpio. disco, scio, nescio, 
cerisfo, spcro, despero, coiclto, jndico, credo, arbitror, puto, dplnor, dfico, statuo, jyiemlni, 
rScordor, obllviscor, dplnio est, spes est. etc.', — dlco, trado, prodo, scrlbo, refdro, uarro, 
nuntio, coufirmo, nSgo, ostendo, indlc.o, ddceo, certiurem fdcio, ddinonstro, jiSrhlbeo', 
prduiiUo, poinceoi, spondeo, etc.; but with most of these a different construction oft«n 
occurs. See § 273 

Note 2. The propositions, whose subjects are thus put in the accusative and their 
verbs ill the infinitive, are those which are directly dependent on the verbs of saying 
and perceiving. Respecting the clauses inserted in such dependent propositions, see 
5 266, 1. 

Note 3. (a.) When a relative clause inserted in a proposition containing 
the accusative with the infinitive, has tbe same verb as the proposition in 
which it is inserted, but such verb is not repeated, the noun which is the sub¬ 
ject of the relative clause is also put by attraction in the accusative; as, Te 
ausjncor eisdem rebus, quibus me ipsum, commdveii. If the verb is expressed 
we must say, eisdem rebus commdceri, quibus (ego) ipse commbveor. So, also, 
in inserted relative clauses where the verb, if expressed, would be in the sub¬ 
junctive, (see § 266, 2.); as, ( Verres) aiebat se tnntldem cestimasse, qiianti Sacer- 
dotcm, for qiumti Sncerdos eestimasset. Cic. ConfiUetur se in ed qmrte fuisse qua 
te, qua virum omni laude diynum patrem tuum. Id. 

(6.) The same is the case with the particle qtinm after a comparative, see 
§ 256, R. 5, (a.) But sometimes when qunm connects a clause to a preceding 
proposition containing the accusative with the infinitive, the same construction 
follows that precedes qunm, even when the verb of the latter clause is express¬ 
ed; as, Nonne tibi ajfirmdvi qtddvis me pdtius perpessurum, quam ex Italia ad 
ledum civile me exiturum; instead of qunm exirem or quam ut exirem. Cic. ^^j^ 

(c.) In long speeches in tlie drdtw obliqun, relative clauses, liaving a verb 
of their own which should properly be in the subjunctive, are put in the ac¬ 
cusative with the infinitive, if the relative clause is not subordinate to the ci» 
with the infinitive, and which is governed by a verb of saying or perceiving 


§272. 


SYNTAX.-INFINITIVE MOOD. 


289 


but is ratber coordinate with it; in which case tiie relative is equivalent to the 
demonstrative with ei ; as. Nam illorum urbem ut propuyndcutuni ojjpdsiium esse 
bafbdris, apud quam jam bis classes reyias J'ecisse nauj'rdyium; for et dpud earn 
jaw. bis, etc .—In Livy and dacitusthe same construction sometimes occura 
even after conjunctions; as after quum in the sense of ‘ while,’ see263,6, K. 3; 
after (juamquam on accouiit of its absolute signification, see § 198, 4, and after 
quin. 

Note 4. The personal pronouns, which, with the other moods, are expressed 
only wlien they are emphatic, must be always expressed in the accusative 
with tlm infinitive. The verbs ‘to promise’ and ‘to hope’ are in English 
usually joined with the infmitiv'e present without a pronoun, but in Latin not 
onlj' is the pronoun expressed, but the infinitive which follows is in the future; 

He promised to come,’ is in Latin, Promlsit se ventiimm (scil. esse, seo 
^ 270, R. 3). But the infinitive present sometimes occurs after these verbs; 
as, Polllcentur obsides dare, Caes. B. G. 4, 21; and the pronoun is occasionally 
omitted, see § 239, K. 2 and 3. 

Remark 1. When ambiguity would arise from the subject and the object 
of the verb being both in the accusative, the passive infinitive is substituted 
for the active, by which means the subject is put in the ablative, or in the 
accusative with per ; as, Ne fando qiildem auditum est, crdcddllum viSldtum esse" 
ab .^gyptio; instead of iEgyptium crdcddllum vidlasse. Cic. 

Rem. 2. After verbs of saying, thinking, etc., the conjunction that is omitted 
m translating from English into Latin, and the subject of the dependent clause 
is put in the accusative, and its verb in the infinitive. 

Rem. 3. The accusative -with the infinitive is sometimes rendered into Eng¬ 
lish by a similar form; as. Si vis me flei'C, If you wish me to weep. Hor.; but 
the dependent clause is more frequently connected to the verb of saying, etc. 
by the conjunction that, and the infinitive translated by the indicative or po¬ 
tential mood; as, Seutimus nivem esse cdbam. We perceive that simo is white. 
Cic. Sometimes the dependent clause is annexed to the other without the 
conjunction; as, Credunt se negligi. They think they are neylected. Ter. 

Rem. 4. A present infinitive corresponds to the imperfect indicative, when 
with an accusative it follows a preterite tense; as, D[xit Cwsdrem venire. He 
said that Ctesar was cominy. Cajs. In like manner the perfect infinitive with 
an accusative after a preterite tense corresponds to the pluperfect indicative; 
as, Dixit Ckesdrem venisse. He said that Caesar had come. See ^ 268, 2. 

Rem. 5. The present infinitive, after verbs of sense, is often equivalent to 
the present participle; as, Surgere videt Imam, He sees the moon (to rise) 
rising. Virg. Arma rutilare vident. Id. Videbis colliicere faces. Id. Nec 
/Aphyros aiulis splriwe'i Do you not hear the zephyrs blowing? Id. Scepe hoc 
mdjdres ndtii dicere audici. Cic. T^he two constructions are sometimes united; 
as. Medium video discedere ccelum, palantesjwe pdlr itellas. Virg. 

Rem. 3. The subject-accusative after verbs of sayiny, showiny, and believina; 
as, dlco, neyo, trddo, fero, viemdro, narro, nuntio, perhibeo, prodo, sci'ibo, de~ 
immstro, ostendo, aryuo, credo, pido, existlmo, and the like, and also after y«l»eo, 
veto, and jf^’bhibeo, is regarded also as the accusative of the object after these 
verbs; and hence such verbs are used also in the passive, the accusative of the 
active voice becoming, as usual, the nominative of the passive. This is espe¬ 
cially the case when their subject is indefinite; as, Dlcunt (they or people say) 
tie virum prdbum esse, or dicor vir prdbus esse. So, Vetamur hoc facere, instead 
of, Nos hoc facer e retant. Instead also of the impersonal vldetur {\t appears) 
followed by the infinitive with its subject-accusative, it is common to say 
personally, videor, videria, etc., with the infinitive; as, videor errasse, it sppoart 
lhat I have erred. 


25 


m 


SYNTAX.—INFINITIVE MOOD. 


§275 


INFINITIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE CLAUSES. 

§ S73. 'VYlien the particle that, in English, introduces a 
clause denoting a purpose, object, or result, it is a sign of the 
subjunctive in Latin, and is to be expressed hut 

otherwise it is usually the sign of the accusative with the inthii- 
tive. Of. §§ 262 and 272. 

1. («.) Verbs of endeavorinci and resolvinq take after them the in- 
6nitive and ipore rarely the subjunctive, when the subject lemains 
the same; but when the subject is changed, they take the subjunc¬ 
tive only. 

Note 1. Such are statuo, consfituo^ decerno^ tento^ Idhoro^ paro^ m^d^tor. cnro^ nltor, 
contendo, ronsllium capio, clnimum or m anvnum induco. Cf. ^ 271, N. 1. Alter dpS- 
ram do, I exert myself, id, hoc, or illud ago, 1 endeavor, iilhil antlqicius habeo or dnco 
quayn, nothing is of more importance to me, and video for euro, the subjunctive is al¬ 
most exclusively used. 

(&.) Verbs of effecting are construed with ut or ne and the sub¬ 
junctive. 

Note 2. Such are fdcio, efficio, perficio, Svinco, pervinco, xmpetro, assHqaor, consi¬ 
gnor, etc. But faeSre ‘ to effect ’ occurs in Cic. Brut. 38, in connection with the accusa¬ 
tive and infinitive passive. 

Notes. Facio with wHs also used as a periphrasis for the indicative; as, 
Invitus quidem feci, ut L. Fldmlnium e senatu ejicei'em, for invitus eject. Cic.— 
Fac, ‘suppose’ or ‘granting,’ and eflcere, ‘to prove,’ take the accusative with 
the infinitive; but the passive efficitur, ‘it follows,’ takes also the subjunctive. 
— Facive, ‘to introduce’ or ‘represent,’ is joined with a present or perfect 
participle; as, Lcelium et Scipioneni facimus adinirantes. Cic. In the passive 
the accusative also with the infinitive is found, there being no present par¬ 
ticiple; as, Isocratem Pluto laudari facit a SdcrCde. Cic. 

2. Verbs signifying to request, to demand, to admonish, to advise, to 
encourage, to command, and the like, both when the subject remains 
the same and when it is changed, are followed by the subjunctive 
with ut or ne, and only rarely by the infinitive. 

Note 4. (a.) Such are rdgo, dro, pricor, pito ; posco, postTilo, flagUo ; moneo, ad-' 
intineo, commdneo, hortor, cdhortor, exhortor, siiadeo, persuddeo, inshtuo, (1 instruct) 
impdlo, cogo, mando, prcescrlbo, edlco, dccerno, ligem do, censeo, perpello, exetto, in 
tito, impSro, etc.; as, Te non hortor solum, sed Hiam oro, ut tdta mente in rempubttcatn 
incumbas. Cic. 

(6.) In the poets and later prose writers the infinitive more frequently fol¬ 
lows those verbs without any difference of meaning. The poets even use the 
infinitive to express a purpose; as, Proteus pecus egit altos visere montes. Hor. 

(c.) Nuntio, sertbo, mitto, and even dU'o, are followed by the subjunctivo 
when they imply an injunction or intention that something should be done 
as, Utfc ut facias, scribo. Cic. 

{d.) Jubeo and reto commonly take the accusative with the infinitive, but 
eorr.etimes the subjunctive with or rarely without ut. Sometimes, with th€ 
infinitive, the person to whom the command is given is omitted, especially 
when it is either obvious from the nature of the command or indefinite; as. 
Cnstva munire jubet, s>c\\. mllites. Coes. Lex recte facere jilbvt, scil. hUmlncs, 
Cic. With the subjunctive the dative of the person sometimes follows yalAco, 
ts, BrUunnico jussil, exsurffret. Tac.— hnpero is sometimes followed by the 
accusative with the infinitive passive; and so flso is censeo, 1 vote, or, I ordain 
The latter is often construed with the participle in dus with esse expressed <r 
understood; as, Curthaginem delendam censeo. 


SYNTAX.—INFINITIVE MOOD. 


291 


5 27 ? 

(e.) MGneo and aclrndneo, ‘I remind.,’ and persuddeo, ‘I convince,’ take the 
accusative with the infinitive. 

3. (a.) In the orafio oh/lqna, the construction of the accusative with 
the infinitive, is exchanged for that of the subjunctive, to denote po 9 - 
sib'.lity, liberty, duty, etc.; as, 

Vir(limits unum Ap. Claudium legum expcrtem esse aiebat: respicerent tribUnai 
hdmines castellum omnium scelerum. Liv. 

(b.) On the contrary, when the subjunctive has been used after a verb cf 
requesting, commanding, etc., the construction often passes into that of tha 
accusative with the infinitive; the verb of saying being considered as implied 
in the verb of requesting, etc.; as, Ornfmt ne se ut parrhldum liberum averse 
rentur: sibi vitain fllite sud edriorem fuisse, sL... Liv. Cf. § 270, R. 2, ^b.) 

4. (a.) Verbs which denote willinfjne^ts, unwillingness^ permission^ 
and necessity^ commonly take the infinitive, or the accusative with the 
infinitive, but sometimes the subjunctive. 

Note 5. Such are vQlo^ nOlo, main, opto, permitto, patior, stno, conrSdo, licet, prdhl- 
beo, 5portet, and nScesse est. Cf. ^ 271, H. 1. Volo ut is used to express a strong em¬ 
phasis. Nolo is not construed with the subjunctive. 

{b.) An infinitive passive without a subject is sometimes used with dportet; 
as, JVon dporluU rclictas, scil. esse ancillns. Ter. Ut ut erat, mansum ictmen 
dportuit, scil. esse. Id. iVbn putdbant de tdli viro susplcionibus dporiere judicari. 
Nep. 

(c.) Some other verbs which regularly take the accusative with the infim’- 
tive after them, are occasionally followed by the subjunctive. 

5. Quod, ‘ that,’ commonly with the indicative, introduces a sub* 
stantive clause containing the explanation or ground of the predicate 
or of some other word in the principal clause. 

Remark. The subjunctive follows quod in those cases only in which the 
clause expresses tlie view or sentiment of some other person Ilian the writer 
or speaker. Cf. § 266, 3. 

QuamI is used:— 

(1.) After such expressions as bene, male, prudenter /ado; bSne, mMe/t; 
Cr^nit, acefd/t, and the like; irroetereo, mitto; and generaUy adde, accedit, etc.; 
as. Bine fads, quod me adjuvas. ■. 

(2.) To introduce tlie explanation of a noun, pronoun, or pronominal adverb 
in the principal clause; as. Magnum beneflcium est ndturee, quod necesse eai 
Vi&ri. 

(3.) After verbs signifying aw cjfecfi'cra q/’1’7/e m/wc/, and the outward expres¬ 
sion of such feeling ; and also after verbs of praising, censuring, accusing, and 
thanking. 

Note. 6. Such are gaurfeo, r/Slector, gratum, or jiicundum est mint, angor, ooieo, eegre, 
Vljleste, or grdviter fero. surcenseo, pcrnltet, nnror, adrntror, glorior, gr&tiilor, gr&tiai 
%go, (/uiror, mdignor, and Others of similar meaning; as, Snpio qu6rebatur, quod 
omnibus in rebus homines dtlngentlores essent, ut, etc. Cic. Gaiideo quod te inter> 
peliavi. Id. Quod spirdtis, quod vocem mittltis, quod formas htimlnum hdbStis, indig- 
oantur. Liv Cato mirari se aiebat, quod non rlderet hdruspex, hdrusplcem quum vldt- 
ret. Cic. 

Note 7. After those verbs which express the feeling of joy, grief, etc.; as, 
caudeo, ddleo, miror, the accusative with the infinitive is more commonly 
V>und, but those which denote the outward expression of such feeling are more 
commonlv construed with quod; but sonu^’mes this distinction is reversed 
wrdtulor is commonly joined with jmoo. 


«92 


SYNTAX.—PARTICIPLES. 


§274 


Note 8. A purely objective proposition is expressed by qwd only_ when it 
iepends upon addo, (generally in the imperative adde), or upon Jocio joined 
^'ith an adverb; as, Adde quod pubes tibi crtscil omnes. Hor. Adcle hue quod 
merceni sine fucis gestat. Id. Fecit humanlter quod ad me vesp^m venit. 

Cic. In all other cases the infinitive is employed in purely objective propo- 
itions. 

6. By the infinitive, Avith or without a subject-accusative, a proposition is 
expressed as a thought, so that it resembles an abstract noun; bv qui>d, with 
the indicative or the subjunctive, it is represented simply as a/act. To the 
latter is frequently joined hoc, id, illud, istud, or ime, etc.; as, Illu-d qudque nobis 
accedit incommddum, quod M. Junius dbest. Cic. Hue acchl bat, quod, etc. tirall. 
Quod generally refers to past time, and hence it is preferable to say, Gratissl- 
mum rnihi est, quod ad me tua nuinu scripsisti; but with the infinitive, Grcitissh 
mum mihi est te bene valere. 

v'n.) Quod, with the indicative, in the sense of as to, or with regard to, is used 
at the beginning of a sentence, especially in letters, in repeating an expression 
of a person for the purpose of answering it; as, Quod autem me Agdmemndnem 
ainuldri pittas, falleris. Nep. Quod scribis te velle scire, qui sit reipublicte status. 
summa aissensio est. Cic. Sentences thus introduced by quod are in no gram¬ 
matical connection with the verb that follows them. See § 206, (14.) 

(b.) Quod is used in explanatory or periphrastic propositions which refer to 
a preceding demostrative pronoun, as hoc, id, etc., unless such pronoun be 
added pleonastically, in the nominative or accusative, to verbs governing the 
accusative with the infinitive; as, JJihi quldem videntur hCmines hac re maxime 
belluis 2 »'cEstdre, quod lOqui q^ossunt. Cic. 

Note 9. The construction of the”infinitive resembles, in the fol¬ 
lowing particulars, that of a noun in the singular number and neute/ 
gender:— 

(a.) Like a noun, it may have an adjective or pronoun agreeing Avith it; as 
1 otuni hoc phildsdphari Cic. Qumti wlvcre ipsum turpe sit nobis. Id. 

Me hoc ipsum nihil iigere delectat. Id. Meum intelligere nulla pecunid vendo. 
F etr. See § 205, R. 8. 

(5.) It may be followed by a limiting genitive; as, Cujus won diinlcare fuii 
vincere. Val."]\lax’. 

(c.) It may be either the subject or object of a verb. See ^ 209, R. 3, (5,) 
and 229, R. 5. It may also be used after neuter verbs, like an accusative, 
depending on a preposition understood; as, Te accepisse meas lUeras gaudeo. 
Ter. See 232, (2,) and 273, 5. 

(d.) It is also used like a predicate-nominative; as, Videre est perspicero 
aUqutd. Cic. See ^210. 

(e.) It may, like a genitive, limit the signification of an adjective or noun, 
pee ^ 270, R. 1. 

if.) It may, like an accusative, depend on a preposition; as, Aristo et Pyrrho 
inter optime valere et grdvissime aegrotare, nihil pi-orsus dlcebant hiteresse. Cic. 
Qvvii crimen dlcis praeter amasse meum f Ovid. Inveniet nil slbi legdtum, praeter 
plorare. Hor. 

(g.) It is used also like an ablative; as, Audito regem in Siciliam tendere. 
Sail. 

(h.) Sometimes, also, especially in the poets, it denotes a purpose, like a 
participle in dus, (see ^ 274, R. 7.); as, Lorlcam donai habere vii'O. Virg.; or 
‘iko a dative of the end, (see ^ 227.) 

PARTICIPLES. 

§ 274:. 1. Participles are followed by the same cases aiK? 

sons!ructions as their verbs; as 


§ 274. 


SYNTAX.-PARTICtPLES. 


293 


Quidam, poeta nomtnafus, A certain one, called a poet. Cic. Ca'filom n oblUa 
'ccena, The lioness forgetful of her whelps. Virg. rehus QirthcyUiifin 

Slum, Favoring the interests’ of the Carthaginians. Liv. Tendens cd sldtrn pul- 
mas. Virg. A<'(us(7^?<s rei capnalis. Cic. Pvlma du te mihi sumind dlcende Cd~ 
mnid. Hor. Omina doctus. Stat. Casus dbies rlsura mdrmos. Id. Cdrituri ur- 
bore immtes. Ovid. Parcendiim est tengris. Jnv. Utendum est aetate. Ovid. 

J . Brutus arcens reditu tyrannum, in proclio concidit. Cic. 

2. The present, perfect, and future active participles, denote re¬ 
spectively an action which is present, past, or future, in relerence to 
the time of the verb with which they are connected; as, 

Siiinl hoc dicens attolUt se. Virg. Turn ad Thrasenm in Iwriis agenteni n,i»- 
gns est. Tac. Turnum i'ugientem hcec terra videbitf Virg. Qui missus n6 
Jtdld conshlerat urbe. Id. Lamia mtinei'e cedllUutis perfunctus, pHit jirietdram. 
Cic. .Jussus cum fide pcenas luam. Hor. Juvenis medios moriturus in hostet 
irruit. Virg. Peri turns injecit sese in agmen. Id. Ilia tibi ventura bella exp&~ 
diet. Id. 

Note. The participle expresses the action or state of the verb, and also 
marks its complete or incomplete state or condition. Cf. ^ 144, 1-3. Except, 
however, in deponent verbs, the Latin language has no active participle de¬ 
noting a completed action, equivalent to the English ‘ having written,’ nor any 
passive participle denoting a state of suffering still going on, equivalent to the 
English present participle ‘being loved.’ 

Remark 1. The present participle, particularly that of the verb eo, some¬ 
times denotes that which is about to be done; as, Interclusit hiems, et terruit 
Auster euiites, .... as they were on the point of going. Virg. Nec nos via faUit 
euntes. Id. 

Rem. 2. (a.) The present participle, also, sometimes denotes a purpose; as, 
Ibant, brantes vhiiam,....io sue for favor.... Virg. Eurypylum scitantem drda'ila 
Plnebi mittimus. Id. \b.) It is also used to express a state or condition, where, 
in English, a substantive is employed with a preposition; as, ignorans, from 
iguoiance; metuens, from fear; consCddtum ])Uens, in his suit for the consulship; 
outut malum nascens facile oppnmitur, —in its origin. 

Rem. 3. (n.) The perfect participle passive, especially in the poets, often 
denotes the result of a past action, and thus supplies the place of a present 
participle passive; as, Pfdtus evdlat piced tectus cah^rfne....covered with pitchy 
darkness. Ovid. Cf. Virg. Jin. 1, 480; 2, 277; 4, 72, 589; 5, 113, 708; 6, 335: 
Georg. 1, 204. It is often to be translated by a present active participle; as, 
Mdnu pectus percussa decorum, fdventesque abscissa cdmas, i. e. perciitiens ab- 
sciiukns. N'wg. lumve. pectdra palmis. Id. So, ii\so, sdlitus, mmis, flsus, (\.nd 
the perfect participles of deponent verbs; as, Longiim cantu sqlata Uibbrem. Id. 
Vox auditur fractos sdnitus imitata tubdrum. Id. Jjidtidcus Qesdrem complexus, 
obsecrdre ceepit. Cses. Concretos sanguine crines gerens. Virg. Toiisis in vaL 
Ubus, i. e. quse tondentur. IJ. 

{b.) The perfect participle of a preceding verb is often-used in a succeedirg 
rlause, to express the completion Df an action; as, Exercitum fundit 
tQsum persdjuitur. Liv. This idiom frequently occurs in Ovid. 

Rem. 4. 77(/6eo, with perfect participles denoting knowledge and determina¬ 
tion; as, cogndum, perspectum, jrerceptum, comprehensum, explordtum, sto'.uturn, 
scnstitutum, diilberdtum, perswlsum mihi hdbea, etc. forms a periphrasis, like the 
passive verb in English, and equivalent to cogndin, j^erspexi, jierccjii, etc., in¬ 
stead of the verb of the participle; as, Clbdii d‘>dm‘>/m perspectum or cognltum 
\dbeo ; for perspexi, etc., I perceivft,, know. I'e'^sudsfum mihi hdbeo and persud- 
%isslm^lm hdbeo are used only in the neater gender and with an accisative with 
the infinitive in the sense of mihi persudsi or jrersudsum mihi est. When hdbea 
with any other participle than those above indicated is used, it expresses more 
liian the. ordinary pertect active; as, Qnod me hoi'tdris ut absolvam; habeo ab* 

©1 utam ejm ad Coesdrem; i. e. I have it ready. Cic. Do, reddo, ctirc\ 

26« 


B94 


SYNTAX.-P ARTICIPL E S. 


§ 274. 


tineo, posstdeo, ani missum fdcio, are sometimes so constn ed witli participles 
as, Missam ira7n fdcitt, for mittel. Ter. Busies victos ddre Aox vincere. Sail. 

Rem. 5. (a.) The passive participles may supply the place of a verbal noun 
in f'> or MS, the perfect being employed to represent an action as completed, 
and the future when it is conceived as still incomplete; as, Ante Boniavi condi- 
tam. Before the building of Rome. Cic. Consilia urbis delendse. Plans for the 
destruction of the city. Id. See § 275, II. With the limitations about to be 
made in regard to the nominative, this construction is used in all the cases, 
and even when they are governed by the prej^ositions, at/, ante, cb, post, prop¬ 
ter; a/> and ex; as. Hie tile rce recitatje magnum luctum feccrunt^ The reading 
of this letter. Liv. Tdrentum captum. The taking of Tarentum. Ob receptum 
Hannibdlem^ On account of the reception of Hannibal. Sibi quisque caesi riiyia 
txpetrbat decns, The glory of killing, or, of having killed the king. Propter 
Afncam dOmitam. Lutrop. Ante Kpdmlnondam natum. Nen. Post Christum 
Datum. Ab condita urbe ad liberatam. Liv. 'I’he oblique cases only of partici- 
])les in dus are used in this manner as the nominative denotes necessity, (see 
Rem. 8,) and even the perfect participle is not thus used in the nominative by 
Cicero. 

(6.) The neuter of the perfect passive participle without a noun is used by 
Livy, as the subject of a proposition; as, Tentatum per dictdtorem^ ut ambo por- 
tricii consules crcdrentur, rent ad in.er^'egnum perduxit: i. e. the attejnpt, or 
the fact of the attempt being made by the dictator. Compare a similar use 
of this participle in the ablative, ^ 257, R. 9, (1.) (c.) 

(c.) The English ‘ without ’ with a verbal substantive; as, ‘ without writing, 
without having waited,’ etc., is expressed in Latin by means of a negative 
noun, adjective or particle connected with a participle; as, Ccesar exei'cltum 
numquam j)er insidiosa itinera duxit, nisi perspeculatus Idebrum situs, without 
having examined the localities. This form occurs often with the ablative 
absolute; as, AthPnienses non exspectato auxllio adversus ingentem Persdiaim 
exercUum in prcelium egrediuntur, without waiting for assistance. So, nulla 
prsestitutac/i'e, Without fixing any time. Cic. Miserum est nihil perficientem 
angi. Id. 

Rem. 6. (a.) The participle in rus, especially with verbs of motion, often 
denotes intention or piirpose; as. Ad Jdvem Ammonem pergit consulturus ci<j 
drlgine sud, He goes to Jupiter Ammon, to consult respecting his origin. Just. 

(6.) It is also used where in English a clause connected by since, when, ai- 
though, etc., is employed; as, Plura locuturos dbh'e 7ws Jussit, When or although 
we intended to say more. Uei'culem Germd7U, ituii m p7'(£liu7n cdnunt. Tac. 
Hence it is sometimes used, though not by Cicero, to express the inference 
from a hypothetical proposition; as, Kgreditur castris Rdmdnus, vallum invasu- 
rus, ni cdpia jmgiue Jicret. And with the repetitioiT of the preceding \erb; as, 
Dedit 7nihi quantum 7naxime qyoLuit, datums amqjlius, si pdiuisset, i. e. ac dedissct 
a7nplius. Flin. Ep. 

Rem. 7. (a.) The participle in (/«s, alsOj denotes a purpose passivelv, when 
joineil with verbs signifying to give, to deliver, to agree for, to have, to receive, 
io u'ulei'tuke, etc. Such are do, trddo, trlbuo, attribuo, mando, mitto, pei'initw, 
concldo, rednno, conduco. Idea, ndtbeo, acclpio, susdpio, I'elinquo, euro, dfposco 
rdgo; as, Testdmeiiium tibi tradit legendum. He delivers his will to you to read. 
Hor. Attrlbult 7ws triicidandos Cethrgo. Cic. Quod utendum accepei-is, reddito. 
Id. Cdrum 7nuros dlrutos a Lysaiidro reficiendos curdvit ,—ordered them to be 
restored. Nep. 

ib.) But the same meaning mav be expressed actively bv means of ad and 
‘he gemnd; as, Oesar oppidum aJ diripiendum m'tlitibus cthucessit.—The poets 
sometimes use the infinitive active for the same purpose; as, Trislitiam et me- 
tus trddam prdtei vis in indre (Jaspium portare veiitis. Hor. In prose such use 
of the infinitive is of exceedingly rare occurrence; as. Bibii « ddi'e. Cic. 


§274 


SYNTAX.—PARTICIPLES. 


205 


Rem. 8. ^a.) Tbe participle in dus^ when agreeing with the subject 
ol a sentence, has the signification of necessiti/or propnety; some¬ 
times, though rarely, except in later writers, that of possibility ; as. 

Is venerandus a nobis et colendus est, He should be worshipped and honored 
by us. Cic. Dclenda est Carthayo, Carthage must be destroyed. Cato. Hcec 
Bperanda V'irg. So with es^ used impersonally; as, tliruni pace nobit 

an btllo csset utendum. Cic. 

(6.' Sometimes, also, when not agreeing with the subject of a sentence, It 
bas this signification; as, Facta nnrrdbas dissimulanda tibi, You were relating 
facts which you should have concealed. Ovid. A. L. Brulo princlpe hujns 
mojcime conservandi generis et ndminis. Cic. 

Rem. 9. The participle in dus^ in its oblique cases, supplies the place of a 
pre sent participle of the passive voice, to» denote a continued or Incomplete 
uotion; as, OccupdtiLS sum in Uteris scribendis, in writing letters; literally, in 
letters which are being written. See ^ 275, II.—So, also, in the poets both in 
the nominative and oblique cases; as, Trlginta magnos volvendis menslbus ortta 
imjferio explibii. Virg. Volvenda dies. Id. Cf. Voiventibus annis. Id. 

Rem. 10. After participles in c?«s, the person by whom a thing must be 
done, is put in the dative, but in a few passages even of Cicero it is found in 
the ablative with ab. See ^ 225, III. 

Rem. 11. The neuter of the participle in dus., joined with a tense of esse in 
the periphrastic conjugation (see ^ 184, 3,) retains the signification of necess:j j , 
as, Audenduni est, We must venture. In early writers and sometimes also in 
the poets, an accusative of the object is joined with this neuter, if the verb 
is transitive; as. Nunc pacem orandum, nunc —arma repbnendum, et helium eajf- 
iidle edvendum. Sil. But in classical Latin such accusative is generally changed 
to the nominative, and the participle is made to agree with it in gender and 
number. Thus, instead of frtTwfanciMwi es<, we usually find virtus lau- 

damia est. The accusative in this connection is used by Cicero in only two 
passages. Utendum est with the ablative occurs more than once in Cicero; as, 
Quum suo culque judicio sit utendum. 

Rem. 12. In classical prose the participle in dus never has the signification 
of possibility, except when joined with vix ; as, Vix optandum nobis videbdiur. 
Cic. Vix erat credendum, i. e. vix cridi pdterat. Later writers use it in this 
sense with negative particles, and at a later period it was used with still more 
frequency in the sense of possibility as well as in that of necessity. 

3. (a.) A participle is often employed, instead of a verlj, in a 
conditional, explanatory, adversative, relative, or othei dependent 
clause; as, 

Cuno, ad f 6cum sedenti (as he was sitting) magnum auri pondus Samnites 
attulirunt. Cic. Tridui viam progress!, rtn'sus rivertei'unt; for, quum pivgi-essi 
vssent. Cies. Dionysius tyrannus, Syrdciisis expulsus, Cdrinthi pweros ddefbat. 
Cic. Dionysius, culirvs mOtuens tonsorios, candenti carbirne sibi ddurebot cdpillum. 
M. Risns'^interdum ita repente erumpit, ut eum cupientis tenere nequedmus. Id. 
CiednidB abitui'se vungregantur in loco certo. Plin. 

Note 1. If the participle refers to a noun not containefl in the leading proposition, it 
8 put with that noun in the ablative absv^lute. See § 257, K. 3. 

Note 2. (a.) The English clauses most frequently expre.ssed in Latin by means of par* 
dcsplc.s are such its aie counet^ted by relatives or by as, tchen, after,^although, since, be- 
etc.; as. Nemo observal lunam nisi laborautem. Sen. 5. bcnliis, sic dnhnus^ se 
port vldens, alia cernit, —though not perceiving itself. Cic. Servilius Ahdln Sj.'urtum 
Mudiudi, rt-stnurn appetentem, intiremit, —because he wfis aspiring to the sovereignty. 

When a participle is connw'ted with a relative or interrogative it can only be 
'Vranslated by a circumlocution; as, Non sunt ea buna dlcenda, quibus abundautem Hcet 
esse niiserrlmutn, —which one may possess in abundance, and still be very miserable 
Cic. Senntns absurdimi esse dicebat, i^norare regem, ^uid speraas aut petens vcnerit,-~ 
with what hope or request he had come. IJv. 


296 


SYNTAX.-GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. 


§ 27 ^ 


^6.) When two verbs are in English connected by and, and t le sotions de> 
noted by them .are regarded as simultaneous, one of them may be expressed 
in Latin bv the present participle; as, He sits and bolds his lute, file {Aricn) 
Bedens citfiuram tenet. Ovid. Simulhoc dicens atiollit in (egrum se fhnuv. Virg. 
I. e. hoc elicit et attollit. But if one of the actions precede the other, tho 
perfect participle must be used; as, Cajsar attacked and defeated the enemy, 
Caesar nosies aggressus fugdvit. Submersas obrue puppes, i e. Submerge et 
obrue. Virg.— When the bbiglish clause would be connected by although, the 
participle is often followed by tdmen. Later writers in such case join the par¬ 
ticles quamqttam, quamvis, etiam and vel with the participle i*^self; as, Ccesdrem 
jmlltes, quamris rhc\i?>?LYite,m ultra in AfHcam sunt secuti. Suet.; and these are 
sometimes retained in the ablative absolute.—It is only in late Latin that par¬ 
ticiples are sometimes used in describing persons as possessing certain attri¬ 
butes, e. g. adstantes, audientes, for ii qui adstani, audiunt, i. e. the bystander's, 
hearers. 

(c.) A participle is used with verbs signifying to represent and perceive, 
especially to see aifd hear^ when the object is described or perceived in a parti¬ 
cular state; 2lS, Apelles pvnxit Alexandrum Magnum fulmenX.or\Qn\.em. Plin. In 
English the infinitive is often joined with verbs of seeing and hearing; as, 
Aiidivi te canentem, I heard you sing. Audlvi te canere, would be, I heard that 
you sung. Videmus Polypheniuni vastd se mole moventem. Virg. 

Note 3. In many cases, for want of a perfect participle .active, and a present participle 
passive, this construction cannot be used. Thus, qiaim mnavisset cannot be exchanged 
for a participle corresponding with the English having; loved. As the perfect participles 
of deponent verbs, however, have .an active signification, they admit of the participial 
construction. The want of a perfect active participle may also be supplied by the perfect 
passive participle in the ablative absolute. See § 257, R. 5. 


GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. 

§ ^7^. I. Gerunds are governed like nouns, and are fol¬ 
lowed by the same cases as theii* verbs; as, 

Metus pdrendi ^Vox, Fear of obeying him. Sail. Parcendo victxfx. By sparing 
the vanquished. Liv. Pfieror studio patres vestros videndi, I aia transported 
with a desire of seeing your fathers. Cic. Petendi consulatum gratia. Sail. 
Venit ad recipiendum pecunias. Varr. 

Remark 1. The gerund is the same in form as the oblique cases of the 
neuter singular of participles in dus, but it has the meaning of the active voice. 
It is sometimes translated by the present participle with a preposition, and 
sometimes by a present infinitive active; as. Comilium LdeedaemCnem occu 
pandi, A design of occupying, or to occupy, Lacedaemon. Liv. 

Rem. 2. The gerund is sometimes, though rarely, used in a passive sense; 
as, Spes restltuendi mdla erat, —of being restored. Nep. Aihenas erudiendi 
ardtid missus,—for the purpose of being instructed. Just. Ante domafidum. 
Virg. Ades ad imperandum. Cic. 

Rem. 3. The genind is in its nature a verbal noun, having only the genitive, 
native, ablative, and, after a preposition, the accusative. In its signification it 
.wrrespends with the English present participle when used as a verbal noun. 
Hence, in the oblique cases, it supplies the place of a declinable present infin¬ 
itive active; but in the accusative there is this difference between the infini¬ 
tive used as an accusative and the geruud, that the infinitive has simply the 
power of an abstract noun, whereas the gerund expresses a real action; as 
Multum hi ter^t inter dare et accipere. Sen. Non solum ad discenaum [n-dpensi 
'Hmus, sea etiam ad ddeendum. Cic. 


§ 275 . 


SYNTAX.— 3ERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. 


291 


II. When thb object of an active verb is to be expreiscil, the 
participle in dus is commonly used in preference to the gerund; 
the object taking the case in which the gerund, if used, would 
have been })ut, and the participle agreeing with it. 

Thus, to express ‘the design of writing a letter,’ which, with the aid of the 
gerund, would be represented in Latin by Consilium scrlbemli epistolary the 
participle in o?Ma' is commonly substituted for thegeru)id: "nd since, i i this 
example, the gerund, (sanbemdi) is in the genitive, the rule requires tl it, in 
substituting the participle for the gerund, the object of the gerund [qnstdlam) 
should also be put in the genitive, and that the participle (scrlbendus) should 
agree with it in gender, number, and case. Hence with the participle the ex¬ 
pression is, Consilmm scribendce epistolce. Between the two forms of constn c- 
tion there is no difference of signification. So, Consilia urbis delendse (Cic.), 
for urbem dHendi, Plans for destroying the city. Kcparandarum classium cawsd 
(Suet.), for c/asses. Perpetiendo iTibbri idoneus. Colum. defen- 

dcndam Rbmam ab oppugnanda Capua duces Romanos abstruhere. Liv. 

Remark 1. The same construction is used with the future passive partici¬ 
ples of utor, fruoiy fungor, pbtior, and rarely of medeor, as these vei'bs were 
originally followed by the accusative; as, JEtas ad hcec utenda idonea. Ter, 
Justitice fruendae causa. Cic. In munere fungendo. Id. Ilostes in spent potiuu- 
dorum castrorum venerant. Coes. Aqu<z sdluhntdte inedendisgwe corpbributi ndty- 
lies. Veil. 

Rem. 2. When a participle is thus used for a gerund, it is called a gerundive. 
and is usually translated like a gerund. The gerundive cannot be substitv ted 
for the gerund, where ambiguity would arise irom the gSnder not being dis¬ 
tinguishable. It should therefore not be used when the object of the gerund 
is a neuter pronoun or adjective; as, AMqnid f dciendi rdtio (Cic.), not dlicujus. 
Artem et vera et falsa dljudicandi (Id.), not verdrum dijudicanddrum: because it 
would not be known whether dlicujus and verdrum were masculine or neuter. 
It is to be remarked, also, that the change of the gerund into the gerundive is 
less frequent in some writers than in others. 

III. Examples of the construction of gerunds, in each of their cases, have been al¬ 
ready given, among other nouns, under the heads Gettilive^ Dative^ Accusative^ and Ab- 
lative. The following remarks specify in what connections they are used : and when 
is said that the gerundive is governed in any of the cases like the gerund, it will of cours* 
be understood of the noun which is limited by a gerundive. 

Remark 1. The genitive of gerunds and gerundives may follow 
either nouns or relative adjectives; as. 

Amor hdbendi Cic. Pairiam spes videndi. Virg. Nam hdhet ndtura, ut dlidrum 
omnium rerum., sic vivendi modum. Cic. Barbdra consuetudo hdmlnum inimd- 
landdvum. Id. Postremo Cdtillna dissimulandi causd aut sui expurgandi, in 
tdndlum venit. Sail. Inlta sunt consilia urbis delenda), clvium trucidandorum, 
ndmlnis Rdmdni exstinguendi. Id. Venandi studidsL Cic. Certus eundi. Virg 
InsueUts nuvigandi. Cses. Peritus clvUdtis regencke. Nep. 

(1.) The nouns after which these genitives most frequently occur are amor, 
ars, causa, consilium, consurtudo, cbpia, cuplditas, desiderium, difficultas, J'lnif, 
fdcidtas, forma, gratia, illecebra, libido, Idcus, licentia, mddus, materia, mos, 
ccccsio, dtium, pdtestas, ratio, spdtium. spes, stadium, tempus, usus, venia, vis, 
vdluntas. 

Note 1. With these ar.d other substantives the infinitive also may be used, 
when wdth a tense of sum they form a periphrasis for a verb which is folk wed 
bv the infinitive, or supply the ])lace of an adjective cf wliich the infinitive is 
the subj3Ct; as, Quibus Omnia hdnesta atque inhdnesta vendere mos erat. With 
v/honi it was a custom, or, who were accustomed. Sail. Tempus est abire, It is 
ime, i. e. iempestlvum est, it is proper to go 


898 SYNTAX.-GERUNDS AND GERUNDIVES. § 275 


02.) The relative adjectives, which most freqnentlv take after them these 
genitives, ive such as denote desire, krunoledf/e, rt memhrance, and their contra* 
lies; as, dvimis, cvpldm, studiosus, peritus, imperUus, insuetus, certus, contcius^ 
igndrus, rudis, etc. See § 213, R. 1, (3.) 

Note 2. With the relative adjectives the infinitive is also joined poetically. 

(3.) Instead of an accusative after the gerund, or a genitive plural with a 
gerundive, a noun or pronoun in the genitive plural is sometimes joined with 
the gerund r as, E-xemplornm elige7uli jjdtestas, instead of exempla eligemli, or, 
exemplontm cugenddrurn. Cic. Earum rerum infiticmdi ratio. Id. FdcuUas agro¬ 
rum conddnandi. Cic. Ndminnndi istdrura erii cdpia. Plant. 

(4.) The pronoun tui and also tlie plurals vestri and sui, even when feminine, 
are joined with the masculine or neuter form of the gerundive in di; as, Clud- 
mam I'li videndi est cdpia. Plant. No7i vereor, ne quis hoc me vestri adhortandi 
causa mayntfice Idqui existimet. Liv. In castra vcncrunt sui purgandi causa .— 
With the demonstrative pronouns, ejus, hujus, illhis, the participle UaU.ally 
agrccy, but in two passages of Terence ejus, though referring to a woman, h^j 
the participle in di, not in dcs; as, E<jo ejus videwli cfipklus recta consequor. Ter. 
Tvi in the first example and (jus in the last are feminine. 

(5 ) By a Greek idiom the gerund and gerundive, after the verb sum, are 
Bometimes found in the genitive denoting a tendency or puiqxjse, with no noun 
or adjective on which thev can depend; as, Rc(jium imq)erium initio conservandtt 
libertatis fuerat. Sail. Sometimes esse in some form is to be supplied; as, 
Qucb postquam yldndsa mddo, ne<iue belli 2 )atrandi coyndvit, soil. esse. Id. Causd 
or gratia may sometimes be supplied. In some other cases, also, the word on 
which the genind in di depends is not expressed, and the gerund seems to b« 
used instead of th^ infinitive; as, Mdneat prdvincidlibus pdte^diam suam tdU 
mddo ostentandi, scil. fdcultas. Tac. Quurn hdberem in dnimo uavigaudi, scil. 
prdpdsitum. Cic. 

Rem. 2. The dative of gerunds and gerundives is used after adjec¬ 
tives which govern a dative (§ 222), especially after those which sig¬ 
nify usefulness or Jitness ; and also after certain verbs and phrases, 
to denote a purpose ; as, 

Charta empdi'etica est imlUlis scribendo. Plin. Capessendte reipublicce hdbilis. 
Tac. Ut nee triumviri accipiundo, nec sci'lbte referundo stiffIcerent. Liv. Locum 
oppldo condendo cdpere. Id. Non fuit consilium agrum culendo aut venando 
intentum cetdtem dyere. Sail. Tiberius quasi firmandce vdletudini in Campdniam 
concessit. Tac. Quum solvendo cere dlinio respublica non esset. Liv. Quum sol- 
l^endo clvitdtes non essent, —were insolvent. Cic. 

(1.) The verbs and phrases upon which this dative most frequently depends 
are, Studere, intentum esse, temqnis imjiendere, tempns consumere or insdmere, dpd- 
ram ddre, stifficere, satis esse, deesse, esse, signifying to serve for, to be ade- 
quate to, and, in later writers, on verbs of motion.—The dative of the gerund 
aPer sum is usually supposed to depend on iddneus understood; but see 4 227, 
R 3. 

(2.) The dative of the gerundive, denoting a purpose, is also used after 
:ames of office; as, ZtJcenm'n legi!)us scribendis, i. e. the ten coinmissionnirs 
f'T drawing up a code of laws. Liv. So, Cdmitia creandis decemviris. Id. 
Tt iujnvi'^js agro dando treat. Id. 

(3.) A purpose is more commonly expressed by ad at.d the accusative of 
the gerund, or by a clause with ut, than by the dative; as, Picus ad vesceudum 
kdmlnibus apta. Cic. 

R'EM. 3. The accusative of gerunds and gerundives follows the 
prepositions ad, to, or mter, during or amid, and sometimes ante, circa 
'♦r ob; as, 


1 ^ 276 . 


SYNTAX.—SUPINES. 


29 & 


paniltendum prdj^rat, qxd dto judicat. Pub. Syr. Inter Ube/Adum While 
Wnkiiie. Just. Ad tdUraiidos JucUius labores. Quiut. Ad castra fdcienda. Cic. 
Oo nbsolvendam. Id. 

Notic. The construction of the gerundive instead of the gerund almost ia- 
vai’iably occurs here when the object of the gerund is to be expressed. 

Rem. 4. The ablative of gerunds and gerundives follows the pre¬ 
positions a, (iib)y de, e, (ex), or in ; or it is used without a preposi¬ 
tion, as the ablative of cause, manner, or means; as, 

Aristdtelem non dderrnit a scnbendo. Cic. Ex assentando. Ter. Non videor 
E delendendis hoininibus discedere. Cic. Crescit eundo. Virg. Rem quoervnt 
mercafurU faciendis. Cic. Ordtwnem Ldtlnam legendis nostris efficies qdenib' 
rtm, IJ. 

Note 1. This ablative also occurs, though rarely, after pro and cum; as, 
Pro vCqmlando. Plant. Cum Idquendo. Quint. 

Note 2. Generally with the ablative of the means, and always with the ab¬ 
lative after a preposition, the gerund, when its object is to be expressed, is 
changed to the gerundive. In a few passages the ablative of the genndive is 
differently construed; o.?,, Nullum officium referenda gratia mdgis necessdrium 
instead rUdtidne grdtice. § 256. Cic. Nec jam possidendis agris 

contentos esse. § 244. Liv. Js finis fuit ulciscenda Germantci morte, —in avoug- 
ing the death of Germanicus. Tac.; where the ablative seems to imply tim^ 

§ 263. 

SUPINES. 


§ 276. Supines, like gerunds, are verbal nouns, having no other cases except 
the accusative and ablative singular. In certain connections they supply the place of 
the present infinitive; the supine in um having an active and the supine in m a passive 
signification. As in the ca.se of gerunds, we are to regard their construction both es 
verbs and as nouns. As verbs we are to notice their government, as nouns, their de¬ 
pendence. 

I. Supines in um are followed by the same cases as their 
verbs; as, 

Non Grdiis servUum matrlbus Ibo, I shall not go to serve Grecian matrons 
Virg. Je id admonitum venio. Plaut. 

II. Supines in um follow verbs of motion, and serve to denote 
the purpose of the motion; as, 

Cubitum discessimus. Cic. Ire dejectum mdnumenta regis. Hor. Legdd 
venerunt questum injurias, et res repetitum. Liv. Quum spectatum ludos Iret. 
Nep. So after participles; as, Patnam defensum revdcdtus. Nep. Spectatum 
admiid. Ilor. 

Notb. The construction of the supine in um, considered as a noun, is analogous to 
that cf names of places in answer to the question ‘whither? ’ 237), the notion of pur¬ 

pose arising from its verbal character. 

liKMARK 1. Supines in um sometimes follow verbs wnich do not express 
motion; as. Do flUam nujAum. Ter. Voi ultum injurias horiox. Sail. 

Reji. 2. The supine in with eo literally signifies ‘ I go to do a thing,’ and 
hence ‘ I intend,’ or, ‘ am going to.’ Instances of this use are found in Flautua 
and Terence and in tlie [)rose writers later than Cicero; as, Mea Glydnum, 
tuid dgis? cur te is perditum? Wliy are vou going to destroy yourself? Plaut. 
honorum jn'omxa ereptum eunt. Sail. With eo the supine in um often forms a 
jeriphia.sis equivalent to the same mood and terse of the verb from which the 


300 


SYNTAX.—ADVERBS. 


§277 


Bupine is fomed; as, Ne hdnos omnes perditum eant (Sail.), for perdant ^ Erep- 
tum eunt (Id.), for eripiunt. Ultum Ivii (Tac.), for ultus est. X/llum ii'O injurias 
festlncfl^ i. e. ulcisci. Sail. 

Rem. 3. The supine in um most frequently occurs with the infinitive Iri 
with which it forms the future infinitive passive; as, Brutum visum Iri a me 
puto. Cic. In this construction the accusative properly depends upon the su¬ 
pine, and Iri is used impersonally; ‘ I suppose that I am going to see Brutus ’ 
4 184, 2, (a.) Its notion of futurity is derived from the proper signification of 
the active voice, as perditum iri, to go to destroy, the idea oi intending passing 
easily into that of futurity. 

Rem. 4. But to express a purpose Latin writers in general prefer using 8 
gerund or genii dive in the accusative with ad or in the genitive with causa ox 
(jrdtid, a subjui-Ctive clause with ut or gui, a present or future active participle, 
and sometimes poetically an infinitive. 3ee § 275, R. 1, 2: §§ 2G2, 264, 274, 
and 271. 

III. The supine in w is used to limit the meaning of adjec¬ 
tives signifying wonderful, agreeaUe, easy or difficult, worthy or 
unworthy, honorable or base, and a few others; as, 

Mlrahile dictu! Wonderful to tell, or to be told ! Virg. Jucundum cogrdiu at- 
que auditu, Pleasant to be known and heard. Cic. Mes factu fdcilis, A thing 
easy to be done. Ter. Facilia inventu. Gell. Incredibile memdrdtu. Sail. Tur- 
pia dictu. Cic. Optimum factu. Id. 

Note. The principal supines in u in common use are auditu, cognltu, dictu, foAitu, in¬ 
ventu, mhnSratu and natu, which occurs in the expre.ssions, grandis, major, minor, 
maxlmus, and minimus natu. In magno natu, of an advanced age, and maxima natu 
JiUus, the eldest son, natu is the ablative of a verbal substantive, since neither gerunds 
uor supines are joined with adjectives. 

Remark 1. The principal adjectives, after which the supine in u occurs, are affahllis, 
arduus, asper, bonus, deformis, dignus,indignus, dulcis, durus, facllis, difflcllis, faedus, 
gi&vis, hdnestus, horrendus, incrcdtbllis, jucundus, injucundus, magnus, mSmbrabllis, 
mollis., prdclivis, pulcher, rarus, turpis, and utllis. 

Rem. 2. The supine in u is used also after the nouns fas, nefas, and 6pus; 
as. Hoc fas est dictu. Cic. Nefas dictu. Ovid. Dictu dpus est. Ter.—In the 
following examples it follows a verb: Pudei dictu. Tac. Agr. 32. Dictu fastld- 
ienda sunt. Val. Max. 9, 13, 2. 

Rem. 3. As the supine in u is commonly translated by a passive form, it is placed un¬ 
der the passive voice; but, in many cases, it may with equal or greater propriety be 
translated actively. As a noun,its construction may be referred to the ablative of limi¬ 
tation. § 250. 

Rem. 4. (a.) Instead of the supine in u, an infinitive, a gerund or gerun¬ 
dive with ad, or a verbal noun in the ablative, and sometimes in the dative or 
accusative, may be used; as, Ardua imitdtu, ccterum cogiiosci utilia. Val. I\Iax. 
JUud autem facile ad credendum est. Cic. Opus proscriptiune dignum. Plin. 
Aqua potui jucunda. Id. Fdcilior ad intellectum atque Imitationem. Quint, 
"W ith dpus est the perfect passive participle is often used instead of the supine 
in u ; as. Opus est maturate. There is need of haste. Cf. § 243, R. 1. 

(b.) The construction with arf and the gerund; as, 7'es fdcilis ad intelUgen- 
aum ; or with sum and the infinitive active; as, facile est invenire, is used by 
the best writers after fdcilis, difficilis, and jucundus. The most common con¬ 
struction of dignus is with gui and the subjunctive, (§ 264, 9), but the poets 
and later prose writers have joined it with the infinitive passive. 

ADVERBS. 

§ 27 ^ 7 ', I. Adverbs modify or limit the meaning of verbs, 
adjectives, and sometimes of otiier adyerbs; as, 


i>' 277. 


SYNTAX.-ADVERBS. 


30l 


Bine rndres. You advise well. Ter. Fortisslme urgentts, Most vigox'ously 
pressing on. Plin. Male narrando. Ter. Longe dissimilis. Cic. Valde bint. Id. 

Remark 1. Adverbs may also modify nouns, when they are used as adjec¬ 
tives or participles, and accordingly denote a quality, or when a psrticipie is 
understood. They are also joined to adjective j)ronouns, when their ad jective- 
chiracter predominates; and sometimes limit the meaning of a preposition; as, 
Pjindus late rex, for late regnans, —ruling far and wide. Virg. Nihil adnibdu^ 
Nothing at all. Cic. Ildnio plane noster, —entirely curs that is, devoted to us. 
Id. IJoinirus jddne orator. Id. AdmOdum piitlla. Liv. Late tyrannus. Hor. 
Ordiibus sr.rerne utibns conjiutabantur, i. e. superne accCdaitibns. Tac. Malid- 
rum ciica civitatum, i. e. neighboring cities. Liv. 

Rem. 2. (a.) Most of the modifications made by adverbs may also be made 
by means of the various cases of nouns and adjectives, and many modifications 
may be made by these, for expressing which no adverbs are in use. In*genera] 
those limitations which are most common can be expressed by adverbs; as, 
$dpienter for cam sajHcntid ; hie for in hoc Idco; bme for in b6no mddo; nunc for 
hoc tvmpdre. —(6.) The following are examples of other parts of speech used 
adverbially, viz. Nihil, ‘in no way’; nonnihil, ‘in some measure ’; quidquam, 

' at all ’; ullquid, ‘ somewhat ’; quid f ‘ why V ’ 

Hem. 3. A negative adverb, modifying another negative word^ 
destroys the negation; as, 

Non pdrere noluii, He was not unwilling to obey. Nep. Ilaud igndra mail 
Not ignorant of evil. Virg. Baud nihil est. It is something. Ter. Nec hoc ilia 
non vldit, And this he clearly perceived. Cic. So, nonnulU, some; nonnumquam, 
sometimes. Non, before a negative word, commonly heightens the affirmative 
sense, Avhile it softens the expression; as. Homo non indoctus, i. e. hdmo seine 
doctus. Non semel, i. e. scepius; non igndro, non nescio, non sum nescius, I know 
very well. Qui mortem in mails pbnit, non pdtest earn non timere, —must needs 
fear it. Cic. 

Rem. 4. Wlien the subject and predicate of a proposition are both 
modified by negative words, and also when the predicate contains 
two negatives, tlie proposition is allirmative; as, 

Nemo non videt. Every one sees. Cic. Ncque hesc non evenirunt, And this 
indeed took place. So, if both the antecedent and the predicate of a relative 
clause are negative, the proposition is affirmative; a.s, Nemo est, qui nesciat 
Every body knows. Cic. 

Re.ai. 5. (a.) But in the case of non followed by ne — quidem, the two negxi- 
tive do not destroy each other; as. Non f iigio ne hos quidem mores: and 
when the negative leading proposition has subordinate subdivisions with neque 
>— neque, neve—neve, or non — non, these negative particles are equivalent to ant 
—(tat ; lus. Non me carminibus vineet, nec Orj)heus, nec Linus. Virg. Neminem, 
non re, non verbo, non oultu denique offendi. Cic. Nullius rei neque prats, ne¬ 
que manceps facias esi. Nep. 

(6.) b'. a few passages, hov/ever, two negatives in Latin, as in Greek, 
strengthen the negation, and this exception a])pears to have been derived from 
tlie language of common life; as. Jura te non ndelturam hdmini neniini. Plant. 

(c.) Nemo, nullus, nihil, and numqunm have a different sense according as the 
faw is placed before or after them; as. Non nemo, some one; nemo non, every 
one; non mihi, s~ome‘, nullus non, every \ nonnihil, something; nihil mm, every 
thing; non numquam, sometimes; nunupaim non, at all times. So, nusquam non, 
iserv where, but instead of nonnusquam, diuubi is used. 

RE^r. 6. (a.) Non is sometimes omitted after non modo or non 
vm, when followed, in a subseejuent clause by ne quidem, if both 
.clauses have the same verb, and if the verb if contained in the second 
lause; as. 


26 


302 


SYNTAX.-ADVERBS. 


§277 


Mihi non 7'iddo Irasci^ sed ne ddlere qtddem imjmnft Ucet^ which is equivalent to 
M^hl mm 7fi6do mm h’asd, sed ne dOUre (juldvm impfine licet ^ or Mihi non r.idd) 
irasci, sed ddh're quUkvi impune mm licet, Not only atn I ’v.t permitted to be 
iin^y, but not even to grieve vdth impunity. Cic. Quum sendtui non solum ju~ 
vdre Tempi.'‘lieam, sed ne luycn quidem liceret. Id. 

(b.) Non is also rarely omitted after 7ion mddo when followed bv sed or vlmm 
with and also after ivx; as, Uni mm nuklo ea ffitura timet, vervm etiam 

ferl, su.'Jinetqne pnesentia. Who not only (loes not fear.... Cic. J/cec ydiera 
riri 'iluvi non solum in moTibus nostris, sed vix jam in libris repdiuntur, d bese 
virtues are not only not found in life, but scarcely in books. Id. 

Kem. 7. Facile, in the sense of undanhledly, clearly, is joined to sup«:tlatives, 
an I words of similar import; as, Vic iinus totius Grcecice facile doctissimus. Cic. 
Homo reyibnis illius inrtute facile princeps. Id. 

ll,tsi. 8. Sentences are often united by means of an adverb which is repeated 
before each of the connected clauses; as, mddo — rnddu, and tiunc — nunc, (somO' 
times-sometimes); as, Modo hoc, mddo illuddicit; niddo hue, mddo illuc iduxt 
Instead of the .second other particles of time are sometimes used; as, 
dliquando, nonnumquam, interdum, stepius, turn or delude. — Partim —-/xu’/ba,‘part¬ 
ly—partly,’ is sometimes used Avith a genitiv’e or the preposition ex, in the 
ense of alii — alii, as a nominative in all the genders; as, Quum partim e iiMia 
iia timidi sunt, ut, etc., partim ita repubhed dversi, tit, etc. — Slmid — simtil, ‘ aa 
well—as,’ like nunc — nunc, is not found in Cicero.— Qua—qua is equivalent to 
et — et. — Turn — tnm is used sometimes like mddo — mddo, sometimes Wke parthn — 
partim; as Erumpunt scepe vitia dmicdrum turn in ijjsos dmicos, turn in dliinos. 
Cic. Hvec {beneficia) turn in universam rempublicam, turn in singulos cires cott^ 
feruntur. Id. 

Rem. 9. Quum—turn is equivalent to et — et, except in assigning a greater 
importance to the second part: hence it must be translated by ‘ both—and 
especially,’ ‘ not only—but also,’ or ‘ but more particularly.’ Sometimes ad¬ 
ditional weight is given to the second part by means of m-o, certe, etiam, uu6- 
que, prcBcipue, imprimis or maxime. This use of quum—turn seems to have had 
its origin in the use of quum Avith the subjunctive and often Avith the indioa- 
tiA^e in the protasis, followed by turn in the apodosis. When quum followed by 
turn serves to express the opposition betAA'een single words Avliich have the 
same A’erb, it is to be regarded as a complete adverb ; as, Fortuna quum in rell 
^uis rebus, turn priecipue in bello plurimum pdtest. Sometimes the A'erb stands 
ni the first jiart of the sentence; as, Quum omnis arrdyantia ddidsa est, turn ilia 
inyenii aUpie eldquenticB multo nidlestissima. Turn is sometimes repeated in the 
spccnd part of the sentence; as. Quern pater mdriens quum tutdribus et prdpin- 
quis, turn leyibus, turn lequUdti mdyistrdtuum, turn judiciis vestris commenddium 
putuvit. Cic. Sometimes the gradation is, quum — turn—turn vero. 

Rkm. 10. Non mddo—sed etiam (or non solum, or non tantum—rerum etiam) 
generally expresses the transition from less important to more important things, 
liko the English ‘not oidy—but (also)’. The transition from greater to smnllot 
things is expressed by non mddo — sed, Avithout the dtiam, which we render in 
English by ‘ I Avill not say—but only,’ and in Latin, too, we may say non dxam 
or non dlco—sed ; as. Quid est enim minus non dlco drdtdns, sed hdminis. 

Rem. 11. Tam — quatn expresses a comparison in degree; as, Nemo tarn 
vinlia scripsit, (piam multn sunt imsira. \\ itli super’atives they are rendered 
Into English by ‘ the—the ’ and comparatiA’es; as, I (terndsus q'uam plurimum 
t im 7n.''/a’i'me s/’/b, The more he drinks, the more he thirsts. Cato, (^nam 
pj'isuie pe.ssl me fecit, tarn maxime tutus est. Sail.— Tam — quam quod maximt 
signifies, ‘ as much as possible.’— Non tarn — quam signlfiesj ‘not so much—as,’ 
Dr ‘ less—than ’; as, Prdvincia non tarn grdtidsa et illustns, quam neydtidsa at 
mdlesta. Cic. 

Rkm. 12. Non minus—quam and non mdgis — quam are equiA^alent to aque— 
‘as much as,’but in non the greater weiglit is attached to the 

allirmadve clause beginning Avith quam ; as, Alexander non 'duels luagis quaiv 


I 277. 


SYNTAX.-PREPOSITIONS. 


30e 


ynlUiis v\uma. encs^qiiebdtur, Alexander performed as much the service of a sol- 
Aier as that of a commander. In this connection frequtatly supplies the 
place of m i y.s. 

{a.) Si' and itn are demonstrative adverbs corresponding to the relative uU 
The J’cstiiy.i/e meaning of Wi (seej 191, R. 5.), is sometimes made more em¬ 
phatic by the addition of /amen. Tnntiis is used in a like restrictive sense; as, 
Prce^iihi umUmi est, ut ne murus quldtm cingi jwssif, i. e. ‘only so much.’ Oa3S. 

(i.) Ut—Ua or sic places sentences on an equality. They may sometimcg 
be translated ‘although—still,’ or ‘indeed—but.’—The adverb wt, ‘as,’ some¬ 
times takes the signification of the conjunction qmd, ‘because’; as, Atqiie Hit 
ut semptr fait dpertissinius, non se purgdvit. Cic. 

Rem. 13. In an enumeration, prhmim, deinde, turn, denique are commonly 
preferred to the numerals, pninuin^ shtindo, (for sh undam is not often used), 
l^rtiuni, quartuni, etc., unless the strict succession of the numbers is required. 
Sometimes Uwi is used once or twice instead of dei7ide, or the series is extended 
by acchVf hue adde^ etc. Sometimes (.h'nUiue is followed by postremo to form 
the concjusio)r of a series, but often denique without the other adverbs con¬ 
cludes a series, and is then equivalent to ‘in short’ or ‘in fine.’ See Cic. Cat. 
1, 5. 

Rem. 14. Mlmis is often used for non; as, Nonnumquam ea, quee prxdicta 
sunt, minus eveniunt. Cic.—So, si minus — at, ‘ if not—yet;’ and sin minus, ‘ but 
if not,’ without a verb, after a preceding si; but with si non the verb is repeated. 
—'I’he English ‘ how little ’ is in Latin quam mm; and ‘ so little,’ Ua non or 
ddeo non; as, ddeo non curdbat, quid h&mmes de se Idquerentur. 

Re:m. 15. Nunc always expresses the time actually present, or the time to 
which a narrator transfers himself for the purpose of making his description 
livelier. Thus in speaking of the present time we may saj’’. Nunc prhnum 
wmnia me eludunt or eluserunt; but in a naiTative we must say, Somnia tunc 
pcimuni se dicebat idusisse. Compare the use of hie and ille. See ^ 207, R. 23, (c.) 

Rem. 16. The conjunction dzim, ‘ while,’ when added to negatives, becomes an 
adverb, signifying ■ yet ’; 'A9,,nondum, ‘not yet’; necduni, ‘and not yet’; nul- 
iusdum, ‘ no one yet ’; nlhildum, ‘ nothing yet.’ Hence vixdum signifies ‘ scarcely 
yet’; as, Vixdum ejristdlam tuam legeram, quum ad me Cuctius vend. Cic.— 
So, also, the conjunction nisi, by omitting its verb or uniting it with the lead¬ 
ing verb, acquires, after negatives and negative questions, the sense of the ad¬ 
verb ‘except,’ which is generally expressed by pneterquain or the preposition 
prieter, and must be so expressed when no negative j)recedes. But tlie ex¬ 
pression ‘except that’ may be rendered eitlier by nisi quod or preeterquam 
quod .—After nihil uliud we may use either nisi or quam, nisi referring to nihil 
and quam to dliud. Hence nihil uliud nisi signifies ‘ notliing further,’ or ‘noth¬ 
ing more,’ and nihil dliud quam, ‘ nothing else,’ or ‘ no other thing but this.’ 

Rem. 17. Ut, ‘as,’ in interposed clauses, such as ut dqnnor, ut puto, ut ccnsco, 
ut credo, is frequently omitted. Credo, used in this maimer often takes an ireni- 
cat sense. 

PREPOSITION’S. 

II. 1. See respecting the construction of prepositions with the accusative 
^ 235; and with the ablative, § 241. See, also, for the difi’erent meanings of 
prepositions, ^ 195, and for their arrangement, § 279, 10. 

2. Two prepositions must not be joined in Latin, as they sometimes are in 
English, with the same noun; as, to speak yin-and a^ainsU'x law; or, I have 
learned this with, and, to some extent, from him. I'hese sentences may be 
thus expressed in Latin; pto lege et contmi legem dkere; luv.c cum to, partim 
Uiam afp to didicL Those dissyllabic prepositions only, which are sometimes 
used as adverbs, may follow another, without being joined with a case; as. 
tim)d aut secundum ndturam esset, aiU contra. Cic. Cis Pddum ultrdque- Li\ 
tffisar reverses the order, Jntj'a extrdque mmitidnes. B. Civ. 3, 72. 


?04 


. SYNTAX.—CONJUNCTIONS. 


§ 27a 


3. AVlien nouns mutually dependent upon a preposition are in ap* 
position, when they constitute an enuineration without a connective, 
and when connected by cojndativc, disjunctive, adversative, or com¬ 
parative conjunctions, the juvposition is not re})eared, unless such 
nouns are to be distinguished from each other, or are emphatic; as, 

iZitiil (Ihnm (le tlulsauro onmiuin rrrnm, incnioriaV Hoc (ij)purct in bestiis, 
volucriluis, naiitibiis, ap'ostiljus, cicuribus. feris, ut sc ipste (Ulhjrnit. Cic. 

inter me ct Scipibnein (hnidlid disscrf'bdtiir. Id. Quid f'lheres si 
in iiliquam dunnun villamve vddssesf Id. Nihil ])er Irani aut cfipiditritem 
mitiih est. Id. TkeiuistOclts no7i minus in rdhns gvrendis proinptus quaiit exco* 
gltandis erat. Nep. 

4. The monosyllabic prepositions ah, nd, de, ex, and in are often used before 
each of two nouns connected by e(, etc., especially if the qualities denoted by 
such nouns are to be considered separately. If the nouns are separated by 
et — et, nee — nec, etc., the prejiositions must be rej)eated; as, Ut edrum et in 
bellh is et in clvilibus ojf'iciis v)<jent iadustria. Cic.— Inter is frequently repeated 
bv Cicero after interesse, and other writers rejicat it after other verbs also; as, 
Cluid intersit inter j)dpuldrem — eirem, et inter con^tantem, severum et (jrdvein. Cic 
CerUilum inter Ap. Cluudiuni maxiiiie ferunt et inter P. Deeium. Liv. 

5. («.) In poetry a preposition is occasionally omitted with the first of two 
nouns, and put with the second only; as, Quee nei/wra, aut (pios dperr in speens, 
(Hor.) for, in qiux nemdra nut in (jxios s]>ictis arjor. So, Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 25.— 
(6.1 An ellipsis of a preposition with the relative pronoun sometimes occurs, 
together with that of the verb belonging to the preceding demonstrative; as, 
In eddem dpinione fui, qua reliqui oiunes, (Cic.), properly qua rellqui omna 
fuerunt. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ ST'S. Copulative, disjunctive, and other coordinate con- 
junction.s, connect similar constructions. 

Note 1. Clauses are similarly constructed, which are mutually independent, 
whose subjects and verbs are in the same case and mood, and which have 
either no dependence or a similar dependence on another clause. 

Note 2. {a.) Words have a similar construction, ivhen they stand in the 
same relation to some other word or words in the sentence. Hence, 

(6.) Conjunctions connect the same cases of nouns and pronouns, depend 
ent, if the cases are oblique, upon the same government; the same number, 
case, and gender of adjectives, belonging to the same noun; the same mood of 
verbs, either independent, or alike dependent; adverbs qualifying the same 
verbs, adjectives, etc.; and prepositions on which depends the same noun oi 
pronou i; as, Concidunt venti, J uyiimtqwe nubes^ The winds subside, and the 
clondsdisper.se. Hor. Ldcuni, qiiejii et non cdqitU sol, et tanyit rus. Varr. L'mU. 
decent per dies, facti sunt, neque res ulla pneterniissa est. Cic. I’h/es, ^lt altd, 
Stei nice cam/idnni Somi te, nee Jnin susiineaut onus silrie hiborantes, yeluqne 
Jiuinino constiterrnt di nto. Hor. IntellUjitis e" dniniuni ei priesto J’uisse, uee con- 
silinin di'fuisse. Cic. (Jeneri dniniantiuiu onun est a ndturd trlhutuni, at se tuedtur, 
decllnetqwe ea, ipue tidcitiim vldeontur. Id. Aut in'Miio, nut Cato sdpiens fur.i. Id. 
Pul vis et umbra sunius. Hor. Si tu et fullia vdletis, ego et Cicero cdlimus. Cic. 
Atf'^cre jiicto turv\i)\isque constitdtis. Ca's. Clarus et honbratus vir. An illus¬ 
trious and honorable man. Id. Civsar Rhnos cbhortatus, llberdliterque ordtiom 
prbsecutus. Ca*s. J'dter tuns, quern colui et dilexi. Cic. Helijip spectont in 
S3 )tentriunem et brientem sblem. Cies. Navibus junctis, ratib‘js 7 Me ci/n:plur-£~ 
bus factis. Id. Lege, vet tdbellas redde. Plant. Allobrdyes trans Rhddduum vicoi 
ses 8 ibnes( 7 Me hdbebant. CaJS. Quum triumphuni egeris, censorque fu< ris, ei 
jbi^iris leyatus. Id. Qiiuni ad oppidum accessisset, caatraque ibt pbnbret Caca 


§ 278 


SYNTAX.—CONJUNCTIONS. 


305 


Ades dntmo, et omitte tirndrem. Cic. Ua videre ac perspTc^re pdtestis. Id 
Gra\iter et copidse dixisse Jiatur. Id. Cum /Vo^/’e an stne. Id. Cf. §277, II. 2- 
Qii Ciirmina cordi, nutiierosque iiitendere nervis. Virg. Nec census, nee elcruif 
Iiurnen sed prohltas niaynos ingdninnu/^/e «7. Ovid. JViilO-wphi ne- 

ffc.nt quetn-^uiim virum //dnuvi esse, nisi siipieiitem. Cic. Gloria virlutem tarti- 
quavi umbra scquliur. Id. 

Rkmark 1. Copulative conjunctions may connect either single 
words and phrases or entire clauses; the other conjunctions, whether 
coordinate or subordinate, connect clauses only. 

Iik:*i. 2. Words thus connected are sometimes in different cases, though in 
the same construction; as, Mea ct rei|)ul)bc:e interesl. Cic. (See § 219.) Sire 
es I’onne, sive in Kpiro. Id. (See §§ 221 and 254. l>ut see also § 221, Note.) In 
Methl desceiidat judieis anres, et patris et nostras, llor. See § 211, K. 3. In lig6 
manner, Uannib(d non all ter vinei pOtuit, quam mbra. 

Khm.3. As the subjunctive is often used for the imperative, they may be 
connected by coordinate conjunctions; as, Disce nec invideas. Pers. 

_ Re.m. 4. Where the purpose of the writer requires it, coordinate conjunc¬ 
tions sometimes connect independent propositions, whose verbs are in ilitferent 
moods; as, Stupurem luhninis, vel dicam pecudis, videte. Cic. Hec satis scio, 
me, si seiam, d'lcere ausim. Liv. 

Kkm. 5. £t is used after 7nvlti followed by another adjective, wdiere ia 
English ‘and’ is usually omitted; as, MulUe et niapnce arhbres, Many large 
trees. In such ca-ses et supplies the place of et is, introducing a more accurate 
description. See § 207, R. 26, (c.) 

Rem. 6. The conjunction is often omitted; as, (a.) When two single words, 
as comprehending the whole iflea, are opposed to each other, as, velim, noUm, 
whether I would or not; maxima minima, the gi'eatest as well as the least; 
prlma postrema, from the first to the last; dUjnos mdiqnos ddlre ; Ire redlre, to 
go to and fro. xEdifieiis omnibus publieis privdtis, saci'is jrrdfemis sic jjepti'cit. 
Cic. JVam ylbriam, hdndrem, imph'ium bdnus iyndvus ouim sibi exoptant. Sail. 

{b.) Et is very frequently omitted between the names of two colleagues; as, 
Consules dt'cldrdti sunt Cn. Pumpeius M. Crassus. P. Lentdlo L. Tridrio, qnies- 
tdribus urbdnis. Cic. Sometimes, also, when the two persons are not colleagues. 
It is also occasionally omitted between two words in the oratorical style; as, 
Aderant dmici, prdpinqui. Id.; also with verbs; as, Adsunt, queruntnr SiciiH. Id- 
In good prose, if three or more substantives are joined, it is usual either wholly 
to omit the conjunction or to insert it between each. The following may serve 
as an example of both cases: Qui non mddo Ciiriis, Cdtonibus, Pompeiis, antiquis 
illis, eed his recent'ibus, Mdriis et Dldiis et Qeliis commemdrandis jdceb(nit. 'I'his 
is also the common practice with adjectives and verbs, and hence when ct has 
not previously occurred in an enumeration of persons or things, we shouM not 
conclude the enumeration with et alii, et reliqui, et cetera, etc., but should make 
use of tl'.e adjectives alone, dlii, reliqid, cetera, etc. But though et, ac and at- 
j-we are not used alone in the third or fourth place, yet the enclitic que he- 
qutntly occurs in this position; as, Precor ut ea res voids pdeem, ti(tnquillltd' 
tern, dtinni, concordiamque afferat. Cic. Et may be supplied also when two 
protases introduced by si are joined together; wdierc we say‘if—and if,’ cf 
‘if—and.’ See an exani[)le in Cic. Off. 3, 9. 

(c.) An ellipsis of w< is supposed when ne precedes and et, atque, or qne is 
used to continue the sentence, tliose copulative conjunctior.s in such case cb- 
\aining the meaning of the ailversative sed; as, Monere ceepit Porum, ne ultima 
eapet iri perseverdret, deaerttqiie se victcri. Curt, 

Rem. 7. Copulative conjunctions are often used, before each cf tivo or more 
connected words or clauses, in order to mark the connection more forcibly; as, 
Et pecunia persuddet, et yrdtia, et auctdrltas dicentis, et diynitas, et p>jstremQ 
i^ectus Quint. Roc et turpe, nec tdmen tutum Cic. Neque nata eil, et eeterna 

Id. Et tlU et 7nihi vdluptdti fdre. Id. Before clauses the disjunctive con- 
26* 


506 


SYNTAX.—ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 


§279 


jiUlctioii!) are used in a similar manner; as, Res ipsa aut invltdbit aut dehyt'kifit 
tur. Id. So, also, nunc...nunc, slnuil...siimd, partim...pavlim, qua....qua, turn., 
turn, qunm...tuvi, are used before successive clauses. 

Rem. 8 . To connect different names of the same person or thing, sive or sew 
rather than aut or vtl, is employed; as. Mars slve Mdvors. Cf. § 198, 2, (c.) 

Rkm. 9. Instead of ei and ut with the negatives’ ntliil, nn/lus, and num- 
quoin, neque (or wee), and ne are used with the correspomling affirmative words 
quisquaiii, ullus, uinqunm, and usquam. Rut ‘ in order that no one ’ is rendered 
in Latin by ne quis and not by ne quisqunni, .see § 207, R. 31, (n.); as, litres 
guidem cedunt, et die.-i, et menses, et mini: nec prceteritiim tempos umquam /•<$- 
vertitur. Cic. Sendtus decrevit, darent dpiram cunsults, ne quid respublica de.l.'i- 
menti cdperet. Cses. 

Rem. 10 . The conjunctions igitur, verum, rerumtdmen, sed, and sed tdmen, in. 
dicate a return to the construction of the leading clause, when it has been 
disturbed by the insertion of another clause. These conjunctions, in such 
connection, are usually rendered by ‘ I say,’ and sometimes in Latin inquam is 
so used. Nam also is occasionally employed in this way and very rarely 
tidque. 

Rem 11. Vero and autem are frequently omitted in adversative clauses, 
especially in short ones; as, Vincere sek Hannibal, victoria uti nescit. Liv. This 
omission often occurs in describing a progress from smaller to greater things, 
as in Cic. Cat 1, 1. And it is to be remarked that non in the second member 
of such adversative sentences is used without et or vero; as, dliena vitia videt, 
tua non videt. But in unreal suppositions or ironical sentences, where the second 
member contains the truth, et non or ac non must be used, where we may sup¬ 
ply ‘rather’; see § 198, 1, (c.); as. Quasi nunc id dgdtur,—ac non hoc quaera- 
tui’. Cic. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

Respecting the construction of interjections with the nominative, see ^ 209 
R 13:—with the dative, § 228,3:—with the accusative, § 238, 2:—and with 
tl e vocative, §*240. 


ARRANGEMENT. 

I. OF THE WORDS OF A PROPOSITION. 

§ 97.^. 1. In arranging the parts of a proposition in English, after 

connectives, are placed, first, the subject and the words which modifv or limit 
it; next, the and its modifiers; then, the object of the verb; and final!v, 
prepositions and the words depending upen them. This is called the hgicai 
or natural order. 

2 . (a.) In Latin, either of the four principal parts of a sentence may be 

placed first, and there is great freedom in the arrangement of the rest,” but 
with this general restriction in prose, that too?-ds which are necessarn for the 
complete expression of a thought should not be separated by the intervention f other 
words. In ordinary discourse, ’especially in historical writing, the ful’lowino 
general rule for the arrangement of the parts of a sentence is for the most paid 
observed. 

(A) In a Latin sentence, after connectives, are placed, first, 
the subject and its modifiers ; then, the oblique cases and other 
A^ords which depend upon or modily the verb; tmd last of ail, 
lie verb 


§ 279. 


SYNTAX.—ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 


30V 


(c.) Hence a Latin sentence rep^alarly begins with the subject and ends 
with the principal verb of its predicate; as, Duinnbrix f/rCdid et hivfjltimie dpva 
S( '^mnos plurimuiii |)otcrat. C:cs. But the verb is often not placed at the end 
of a sentence, especiaily if tlie sentence is long, or if two many verbs would be 
thus brought together at the end. In the familiar style, also, the verb is often 
^ace<l earlier in the sentence, and in explanatory clauses it is sometimes 
placed at the very beginning of the proposition, in which case a conjunction is 
gonei-ftllv added. 

(d.) It is also to be remarked, as a further modification of the general rule 
of arrangement, that, in sentences containing the expression of emoticn, the 
wogd v/hos5 emphasis characterizes it as especially affecting the feelings, or as 
forming a cont''ast, is placed at the beginning; as, Cito dretidl lai nmfi, p'co- 
tfrtii .•! in dlicnls 7n:llis, Quit kly dries the tear, especially when shed for others’ 
W>98. Cic. Sua vUia inaipu-utts et suam culptim in shitctuttm con/etniuL Id. 

{e.) If there be no emotive or pathetic word requiring prominence, the place 
at the end of the jiroposition is reserved for the sit/tiLjicani word, that is, tha 
word which is to be most strongly impressed upon the understanding or mem¬ 
ory; as, Gallia est ovinis dirlsa in partes tres. Cajs. Quod ante id tempus accitU- 
rat numquam. Id. Quod dliud Her hdbh'ent nullum. Id. Qu(£ virtus ex provi- 
dendo est appelldta prudentia. Cic. 

3. (r/.) Connectives generally stand at the beginning of the clause 
which they introduce, and with the following this is their only posi¬ 
tion ; viz. et, etenim, ac, at, atque, atqui, ne<iue or nec, aut, veL, sive, 
sin, sed, natn, verum, and the relatives qudre, quocirca, and quahio- 
brem. 

(b.) !Most other connectives generally stand in the first place, but when a 
particular word is peculiarh’- emphatic, this Avord with all that belongs to it 
stands first, and the conjunction follows it. Ut, eA^eiiuvlien there is nc particu¬ 
lar emphasis, is commonly })laced after vix, juene, and prdpe, and also alter the 
negatives nullus, nemo, nihil, and the Avord tantuin. In Cicero, itdyue stands 
first and iyltur is commonly placed after the first, and sometimes after several 
words. 

(c.) Autem, enim, and vero (but), are placed after the first Avord of the clause, 
or after the second, Avhen the first two belong together, or Avhen one of them 
is the auxiliary verb ; as, Jlle enim revdedtus i-esistere caepit. Cses. Ego 
vero vellem, affidsses. Cic. Incredibile est enim, quam sit, etc. Id. They rarely 
occur after several vAords; as. Cur non de integro rmtem datum. Id. The encli¬ 
tics que, ne, ve, are usually subjoined to the first AVord in a clause; but Avhen a 
monosyllabic preposition stands at the beginning, they are often attached to its 
case; as, Romam Cdto demigrdcit, in foroque e.sse capit ; and this is always tha 
case Avith a, ad and ob. So, also, for the sake of euphony, Apud quosque. Cic. 

(d.) Quidem and quCque, Avhen belonging to single Avords, are always sub¬ 
joined to the emphatic woril in a clause; as, Verbo ille reus erat, re miidem 
vinro Ojipianicus. Cic. Me scilicet maxime, sed proxime ilium qvuiqiie jej'ellii- 
sejn. M. In negatlA'C sentences, ne precetles, and quidem follows, the emphatio 
word; as, Ne ad CdtOneui quidem proruedbo. Cic.— Quidem is sometimes at¬ 
tracted from the word to Avhich it properly belongs to a neighl.oring pronoun; 
as, Tibique persuade, e.^se te quidem viihi edrissimum, sed niulto fore edriorent, 
si. etc., \n<itoi\d of, le edrissimum quidem niihi esse. —1‘repositions and conjunc¬ 
tions belonging to the word on Avhicli the empliasis rests are placed AA'ith it ho- 
Ivt'oeu ne iuu\ quidem ; as, ;Ve hi fdiiis quidem. Cic. Ae si dwjitrtur quidem. Id. 
Ne quum in Sicilid quidem Juit. Id.; and CA’cn Ne cfijus rei argueretur quidem.—r 
So, also, in Cicero, non nisi, ‘ o...}’,’ are sejiarated; and the negative may even 
be contained in a A'erb. 

(e.) The preceding rules respecting the position of connectives are often 
violated by the poets, who place even the prepositive conjunctions after one or 
vnore words of a proposition; as, Et tu, pdtes nam, etc.. Hor. Tivos et rbderei 


308 


SYNTAX.—ARRANGEMENT O* WORDS. 


§27S 


ungues. Id. They even separate et from the word belonging to it, as, Audin 
Bt videor pios errare per iucos. Id. So, Auctius atque dii melms fecere. Id 
And they son.etiines append and re neither to the first word, nor to theil 
proper words in other connections; as, MessaUain terra dum sequVMrque miiri^ 
instead of terra marVpie. Tib. In such arbitrary positions, however, these 
conjunctions are almost invariably joined to verbs only. 

4. When a word is repeated jn tlie same clause, so that one is opposed to, 
or d'stinguished from, the otlier, they must stand together; as. Homines horai- 
uWjX.i?' vutxime utiles esse possuut. Cic. AV/?/i7t'S alii &\\o dllapsi sunt. Liv. lAgiU 
qne vlruni vir. Virg. !Manus manura iCmil. Petr. So, also, the personal and 
possessive pronouns; as, Sequere quo tua te ndtura dudt. Suum sq negdiium 
aijlre dlcunt. 

5. Words used antithetically are also placed near each other; as, Dum 14- 
cont, clamant. Cic. Fragile corpus animus sempitermis mdv>et. Id. 

6. Inqunm and often nio, introducing a quotation, follow one or more of the 
words quoted; as, '•Non nosti quid piiter,' inquit, '•Chrysippus dicat.' Hor. 
'Quid,' aio, 'tua crimlna prodisf' Ovid. When a nominative is added to inquit, 
it usually follows this verb; as. Mild vd'O, inquit Cotta, ricfefMr. Cic.— Dic-H 
and dixit are used like inquit only by the poets. 

7. (a.) The adjective may be placed before or after its noun according as 
one or the other is emphatic, the more emi)hatic word being placed before the 
other. When any thing is dependent on the adjective, it usually follows its 
noun. When a noun is limited by another noun, as w'ell as by an adjective, 
the adjective usually iwecedes both; as, Ulla off’icii proecepta. Cic. Tuum erga 
dignitatem meam studiuin. Id. 

{h.) Demonstratives, and the adjectives prirnus, medius, etc., when signifying 
the first part, the middle part, etc., (see \ 205, R. 17), usually precede their 
nouns; as, Ea res. Cies His ipsis verbis. Cic. Media nox. Cass. Heliqua 
ACgyptus. Cic. 

8. Monosyllables are usually prefixed to longer words with which they are 
connected; as, Vir cldrissiinus. Cic. Hi iminortdles. Res innuinerdhiles. Vis 
ieniq}estdtis. Caes. 

9. {a.) When nouns are put in apposition, the one -which explains or defines 
the other is generally put last, unless it is to be made emphatic; as. Opes irri- 
tamenta I'tdloru/n. Ovid. Hence names of honors or dignities, and every thing 
of the natiire of a title, are commonlv placed after the proper name, as explan¬ 
atory additions. Thus, especially, the names of changeable Roman dignities; 
as, t'fcero consiil; C. Ciirioni tribuno plebis; but also permanent appellations; 
as, Ennius poeta; Plato phildsophus; Didnysius tyrannus; and such epithets as 
vir hdnestissimils; hOmo doctissimus. But the hereditary title rex is frequently 
placed before the name; as, rex Deiotiirus; and so the title Imperdtor after it 
became j^ermanent. 

{b.) In the arrangement of the Roman names of persons, the prasnomen 
Bt.mds first, next the ndtiien or name of the gem, third the cognomen or nama 
of \\\c Jdmilia, and hist X.\\e. agnomen; as, Publius Oornriius Scipio AfrUd iui. 
The ])r;enomen is usually denoted by a letter. In the imperial times X].() nonkcm 
is often either omitted or follows as something subordinate. 

10. (rt.) Obrujiie oases pmecede the words on which they depend, 
but they follow prepositions; as, 

Rbpuli Rcmdni Inns esf. Cic. Laudis dvidi, pecunite liberdles. Sail. Cunctis 
esto benignus, nulli blandns, panels fdmilidris, omnibus lequus. Sen. Mdnu 
mtniwm sere jid-ennius. Hor. Hanc tlbi dono do. Ter.— Ad meridiem spectans 
Cic. Extra perlculum. Id. 

(6.) Genitives depending upon neuter adjectives are commonly placed last 
as, Jna:rta JorndneB. Liv. Nec tibi plus cordis, sed minus oris inesi. Ovid. 


1279, 


SYNTAX.-ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 


S(/^» 

Remark. Tliis rule, so far especially as it relates to genitives is in a great 
degree arbitrary, as the position of the governed an 1 goveri'.ing ^7ord3 deiionds 
Dn the iiiea to be expressed; thus, mors pdiris tui, contrasts tlie (hfuth with the 

f recv^ding life; but, frutris lui mors distinguishes tliis case of death from others, 
lence we say, dnimi motuf, dnimi morbus. corpOris pnrtts, tcrne viotus. —An ob¬ 
jective genitive usually follows the worl on which it depends: as, wm? siynlfi- 
catione literarum, by means of a single notice by letters.— When several geni¬ 
tives are dependent on one noun, the subjective genitive commonly precedes 
and the objective genitive may either precede or hdlow the governing iu>un.— 
The grnitive depemlent on rnusd or gratiu, ‘on account of,’ regularly precedes 
th ese ablatives; as, ylOrm causa moriem dblre ; emolumenti sui yrdtid. 

(c.) When a noun which is governed by a prepositL n, is moilified by cthei 
Kords which precede it, the preposition usually stan.is before the w<;rds by 
which the noun is modilied; as, A prhnd ifa e ad sextain horam. Liv. Ad dnimi 
tfiei ktUtinm. Cic. Ad brut bedteiiut vivendum. Id. 

yd.) Sometimes, however, the preposition comes between its noun and an 
adjective or a genitive, by which the noun is modified; as. Nulla in re. Cic. 
Jmtis de cansis. Id. Suos inter cequdles. Id. Ilanc ob cnusam. Id. Mayno cum 
mitu. Id. Qua in urbe Id. £d in re. Id. xEtdtis svxe cum prlmis. Nep.— 
So, also, a conjunction may foUow the preposition; as. Post yero Sulhevicto- 
riam. 

(e.) Per, in adjurations, is often separated from its case by other words; as, 
Per eyo te deos 6ro. Ter.—In the poets, other prepositions are sometimes sepa¬ 
rated in the same manner; as, Vulnera, qvxe circuin plurima muros accepit pa- 
trios. Virg. 

{f.) Thins and versus, and sometimes other prepositions, (cf. § 241, R. 1,) 
follow their cases, especially when joined with qui or hie. This occurs most 
frequently with the jirepositions ante, contra, inter, and propter; more rarely 
with circa, circum, penes, ultra and adversus; ami with still less frequency 
with post, per, ad, ami de ; as, quant ante, quern contra, qiios inter, quern prop¬ 
ter, quos ad, quern ultra, hunc adversus, hunc post, quant circa. — fhe preceding 
prepositions, and more rarely others also, sometimes, especially in the poets 
and later jirose writers, follow nouns and personal pronouns. In such case, if 
the noun be modified by an adjective or a genitive, the preposition sometimes 
stands between them, and sometimes follows both; as. Pastes sub ipsos. Vhrg. 
Jtipain apud Puphrdtis. Tac. Maria omnia circunt. Virg. And more rarely 
other words intervene; as. His accensa super. Id. Viliis iwino sine nascitur 
Hor. 

11. Infinitives precede the verbs on which they depv.nd; as, 

Juyurtha, iihi eos Africa decessisse ratus est, neque pu'opter l6ci n.ituram Oir- 
tam armis expugnare possit, moenia circumdat. Sail. Servire ntdyis quam impS- 
rare parfiti estis. Id. 

12. A word which has the same relation to several words, either precedes or 
follows them all; as, Vir yrdris et sapiens. Cic. Cldrus et h&ndrdtui vir. Id. 
/n scriptbribus lependis et imitandis, or In leyendis iniitandisque scriptbribns; 
but nci Jn leyendis scriptbribus et imitandis. Qnuni respondere nhjue vellct neque 
posset. JIdbentur et dlcuntur tyranni. Amicitiam nec usu nec rdtione habent 
cogratam. 

13. Relatives are commonly placed after their antecedents, and 
as near to them as possible; as, 

Qui sim, ex eo, quern ad te nilsi, ccjnosces. Sail. Literas ad ie niisi, per quas 
y dtios tibi eyi. Cic. 

14. Qnisque is generally placed after se, sims, qui, ordinals and superlatives; 
« iyuos quisque aebet tuhn. Cic. Satis superque est sibi sudruii cuiqne rerum 
Kiira. Id. Severitas dnimadversiduis in/imo cuique yrdtis»nta. Id. Maxime 
itHcet, quod est cujmque maxime suum. Id. Quitque very rarely begins % propo- 

lotion. 


310 


SYNTAX.—ARRANGEMENT OF CLAESES. 


§28C 


16 . (a.) An adverb is usually placed immediately before the word which it 
qualifies; but if the same word is modified by the oblique case of a noun, the- 
latter commonly follows the adverb; as, Male purta male dilabuntur. CiG 
Nihil tarn nxjterum nei/ut tarn difficile, esse, quod non cupidissime*yi/ct«/'j essetit. 
Sail.— /mperiuiii fiicWQ iis ai'libus retinetur, quibus initio ^Mi tiiin esl. I J. Sed 
maxiine uddlescentium fdmiUdrUdtes a|.'j)etebat. hi. Non tarn in bellis et in 
preeliis, quam in promissis et fide finniOrein. Cic.— {b.) When non belongs to a 
single word of the proposition, it always stands immediately before it ; as, non 
ie reprehendo, sed jortuncun. but if it belongs to the proposition generally, it 
stands before the verl), and particularly before the finite verb, if an infinitive 
depends on it; as. Cur tuntdpere te (ukjus, intellipere sane non possum. Instead 
of non d/co, ne/jn is generally used; as, ne/jarit eu/n lidesse .—The iifgatives ■JOtJ, 
neqiie, nh/io, nullus, when joined to general negative pronouns or adverbs, sucli as 
quisi/udin, iillus, u/nqun/n, always precede them though not always imineiliately; 
as, nemini quidqua/n ne/jurit; non i/ie//iini me uniqiumi te cldisse. § 207, K. 31. 

Note 1. In some phrases, custom has established a certain order, which must 
be observed and imitated; as, Clcis Rd/ndnns, qjdpulus Jio/ndnus, jus civile, ces 
{ilienum, terra mdriqtie, Pontiffex maximns, mdpister equituvi, tribiinus 7nilitum^ 
iz-ibuni militum consulciri pdtestdte, Jupiter optipius mnxl/nus, via Appia; ne quia 
respublica detrimenti capiat. Cic. The ablatives Opinio/ie, spe, justo, solito, (see 
§ 256, R. 9), generally precede the comparative. 

Note 2. Exceptions to the foregoing principles are very numerous. These may arise 
(a) from emphasis; (6) from poetic license; and (c) from regard to the harmony of the 
seuteuce. The following general rule sometimes modilies nearly all the preceding. 

16. The emphatic word is placed before the word or words con¬ 
nected with it which are not emphatic. 

Note 3. The last place is often an emphatic one, except for the verb. 
When the verb is neither first nor last in a proposition the word before it is 
emphatic. An adjective, when emphatic, coniinoidy precedes its substantive; 
when not emphatic, it commoidy follows it. But with the demonstrative pro¬ 
nouns the rule is reversed. 

Note 4. The principal poetical variation in the arrangement of words consists In the 
Bepar.ition of the adjective from its noun, and in putting together words from different 
parts of a proposition. 

17. A sentence should not close like a hexameter verse, with a dactyl and 
spondee; as, £sse videtur; nor, in general, with a monosyllable. 

18. Hiatus should be avoided; that is, a word beginning with a vowel should 
not follow a word ending with a vowel. 

19. A concurrence of long words or long measures,—of short words or short 
measures,—of words beginning alike or ending alike,—should be avoided. 

II. OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES 

§ 280. A compound sentence, whose clauses arc united as prot- 
isis and apodosis, or in which the leading clause is divided by the 
insertion of one or more subordinate clauses, is called a period. 

1. (n.) In the former kind of period the protasis must precede the apodosis, 
as, Qim/n Pausdnias semid/ii/nis de teniplo HctUis esset, confestim animam efllavit, 
When Bansanias had been carried out of the temple but just alive, he imui 0 « 
diately expired. In a iieriod of the latter kind the verb of the ])rincipal propo 
sition is placed at the end, and the subordinate clau.ses between the parts of 
the leading clause; as, I’ausanias, quum semidnimis de templo eldtus esset, con- 
festim animam efllavit, Bansanias, when he had been carried out of the temple 
but just alive, immediately expired. Nep. 

(6.) A sentence, such as Scipio exerdtum in Affricam irdjecH,ut Hann'^bdlem 
ex Jtdlid deduciret, is not periodic in Us structure, but it becomes so when we 


S280 


SYNTAX.—CONNECTION Or CLAUSES. 


311 


Say, [klpin^ ut ITannihalem ex Ttalin dMuch'et, exercitum in AJi'icnm trajecit 
J^eriods in which tlie subordinate clause precedes witii two conjunctions, aa, 
(iMtim iyitur Romam vfnisset, siathn impiirat&rejn ailiit, are made still mor« 
strictly periodic by f)Iacinw first tlie conjunction which belongs to tlie whole 
find thei inserting tlie subonlinate proposition; as, Itaque, quu7H Romam ve 
nissei, statiin imperatorem adiit. 

2. (ft.) If the verbs of the leading and dependent clauses have the same 
Bubject, or the same noun dejiending on them, thev' are commonly formed into 
» nerif'd; as, Antigbnus, fytttmt ftc/rerstts «Sc/ct/CMWi ).i/sii)uhhui>u/ue dunicaret, in 
prodio occisus est. Xep. Quern, ut bai bdri iiiceiidiuin effiujisse eininus lidei'unt, 
lelis missis interfecerunt. Id. 

(b.) So, aho, wlien the nfiun winch depends on the verb of the leading clause 
is the subject ot the dependent clause; as, L. Manlio, jttMWi dktubjr Juisset^ 
SI. I'oinponius, tiibunus jilebis, diem dixit. Cic. 

3. When obscurity would arise from separating the leading subject and 
verb by dependent words or clauses, they are eften placed together at the be¬ 
ginning or end of the sentence; as, Liltie (sunt) deinde leges, non solum qiua 
reyni sus^)icidne consulem absolvereJit, sed quee (idea in eonU'cirium verterent, ut po/m- 
lurem etiari fucirent. Liv. The position of the leading verb is also often 
otherwise varied, from regard to emphasis, to avoid monotony, or to prevent 
its meeting with the verb of the last de}endent clause; but clauses, when so 
arranged, do not constitute a period. 

4. When one clause is interrupted by the introduction of another, the latter 
should be finished before the first is resumed. 

6 . Clauses expressing a cause, a condition, a time, or a comparison, usuallf 
precede the clauses to which they relate. 

6 . A short clause usually stands before, rather than after, a long one. 

III. OF THE CONNECTION OF CLAUSES. 

(1.) In connecting propositions, relatives, whether pronouns, pronominal ad 
jectives, or adverbs, are often employed in order to avoid the too frequent re- 
3 urre!ice of et, autem, and certain other conjunctions. Every relative may bo 
nsed for this purpose instead of its corres|)ondin^ demonstrative with et; as, 
qui for et is, qudlis for et tails, qm for et to, etc. They are used also before those 
conjunctions which are joined with ei or flffkort at the beginning of a proposi¬ 
tion; as, si, nisi, ut, quum, etc. (see § 206, (14.); as, quod quum audivisstm, quod 
ti fecissem, quod quamvis non iyndrassem, for et quum hoc, et si hoc, et qunmvis 
hoc; or quum autem hoc, etc.; and, often, also, where in English no conjunction 
is used, and even before other relatives; as, quod qui fdcit, turn eyo impium 
iudico, i. e. et qui hoc fdcit, or, qui autem hqe fdcit. In the ablative with com¬ 
paratives the relative is often used as a connective; as, Ckto, qno 7i0mo tun 
irat prudenthr, i. e. Cato, who was more prudent than all othci's. 

(2.) In propositions consisting of two members, the relative pronoun is joined 
gi'ainmatically either to the apodosis or to the protasis; witli the fonner in, 
Qui, quum ex eo qiuer^retur, cur tarn diu vellet esse in vita. Nihil habeo, inquit, 
quod accusem senectutera. Cic. de Sen. 6. Kut is more frequent with the 
protasis or secondarv clause; as, A quo (pium qmErf'retui quid inaxime eipe- 
diret, vespondit. Cic.'Off. 2, 25. When it if tL as joined with the protasis, the 
nominative of the demonstrative is supplietl with the apodosis from another 
case of th.; relative in the protasis, as, in the jn'eceding passage, from the abla¬ 
tive. But for the sake of emphasis the de-ronstrative may be expressed, and 
frequently, also, for the sake of clearness; as, Qui mos quum a poster id ri bus iioA 
esset retentns, Ai-cesilas eum rdvdedvit. Cic. do Fin._ 2, 1. The accusative is' 
sometimes to be supplied; as, Qui (Heraclitus) qudniam intelliyi ndluit, dmitU.^ 
wta. Cic. N. D. 3, 14. When the demonstrative precedes, and is followed by 
a proposition consisting of two members, the relative is attached tc the prota 


312 


SYNTAX.-ANALYSIS. 


§ 281 


sis, winch is placed first, and not to the leading clause o\ apodosis; k?,^ Eo 
S'ldsi Pompeio^ quibus ille si paniisset, Cvesnr inntas dpes, qunntas nunc hdbet 
non hdb.'ret. Cic. Fain. 6, 6. Noli ndi'ersus eos vit vtllt ilucere, cum quibus ne 
contra te anna ferrem, Itdliam HVajui. Nep. Att. 4. 

(3.) Where i.. English we use ‘however’ with the relative; as, He promised 
me many things, wliich, however, lie ditl not perform, the Latins made use 
of the d'err.onstrutive with std or or the relative alone implying the ad¬ 

versative conjunction; as, multa mihi promisit, sed ea nwi pruestitit, or, quaa 
non pnestitit, but not (/me. autein or (/vve vero. Qni (nitem and (/ui vtro are used 
however in jirotases, where the relative retains its relative meaning, and there 
is a corresponding demonstrative in the apodosis; as, Q.ui auttm omni<i bdna a 
ee n>sis peiani^ us nihil mdluin videri potest, quod ndturve necessltns itfferat. Cic 
do Sen. 2. 

(4 ) In double relative clauses, especially Avhere the cases are different, 
Cic3ro frequently for the second relative clause substitutes the demonstrative, 
as, Sed ipshis in mente inshlibdt sphies /ndchrUudinis exiinia qucedam, quam in- 
taens, in eaque defixus, ad, etc. for et in qua. Cic. Oitit. 2. And sometimes 
even when the cases are the same; as. Quern Phllunteni venisse ferunt, eumqut 
mm Leonte disseruisse qucedam. Cic. Tusc. 5, 3; Avhere et alone would have 
been sufficient. 

(5.) From this tendency to connect sentences by relatives arose the use of 
quod before certain conjunctions merely as a copulative. See § 206, (14.) 

(6.) Neque or nec is much used by Latin writers instead of et and a nega¬ 
tion, and may be so used in all cases except when the negative belongs to one 
particular word; see ^ 278, R. 9. Neque or nec is added to eniin, vero, and td- 
men, where we cannot use ‘ and.’ To these negative expressions a second 
negative is often joined, in Avhich case neque mini non is equivalent to nam; 
non Vtro non, to aU/ue etiam, a stronger et; nec tdmen nun, to attdmen. 


ANALYSIS. 

§281. I. 1. The analysis of a complex or a compound sen- 
ten(?e consists in dividing it into its several component propositions, 
and pointing out tlieir relation to each other. 

2 . In resolving a sentence into its component clauses, the participial con 
structions equivalent to clauses should be mentioned, and ellipses be supplied 
Soe ^ 203, 4; ^ 274, 3; and § 257. 

3. In a continued discourse the connection and relation of the successive 
sentences also should be specified. 

Rules for the Analysis of Complex and Compound Sentences. 

(1.) State whether the sentence is complex or compound. § 201, 11, 12. 

(2.) If complex, (1) specify the principal and subordinate clauses. (2) Speci¬ 
fy the class to which the subordinate proposition belongs, 201, 7), and (3), its 
cccnective, and the class to which such connective belongs, (§ 201, 8 and 9.) 

(S.) If compound, specify the principal propositions, Avith their subordinates, 
If any they have, as in the case of complex sentences. 

IT, The analysis of a proposition or simple sentence consists in distinguish¬ 
ing the subject from the predicate, and, in case either of them be compound 
'In pointing out ti e simple subjects or predicates of which it is composed, and 
If complex, in specifying the several modifiers, whether o' the essential or suhb 
ordinate parts. 


§ 281 . 


SYNTAX.-ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


813 


Rules for the Analysis of a Simple Sentence. 

1. Diviie it into two parts—the subject and the predicate, § 201, 1—3. 
If these are simple, the analysis is complete, but if either is compound:— 

2 . Specify the simple subjects or predicates of which the compound con 
sists.—If either is complex:— 

3. Point out tlie grammatical subject, and the words, phrases, etc. directly 
modifying it. 

4. Point out the words, phrases, etc., which modify the direct modifiers of 
tho grammatical subject, and those which modify them, and so on succes- 
Bhely, until the relation of each of the words composing the logical subject is 
specified. 

6 . Point out the grammatical predicate, and the words, phrases, etc., directly 
modifying it. 

6 . Point out the words, phrases, etc., which modify the direct modifiers of 
the gi-ammatical predicate, and those which modify them, and so on succes¬ 
sively, until the relation of each of the words composing the logical predicate 
Is specified. ^ 


PARSING. 

in. Parsing consists in resolving a proposition into the parts of 
speech of which it is composed, tracing the derivation of each word, 
and giving the rules of formation and construction applicable to it 

Rules for Parsing. 

1. Name the part of speech to which each word belongs, including the sub- 
dlvisicn in which it is found. , 

2. If it is an inflected word:— 

(1.) Name its root or crude form, and decline, compare, or conjugate it. 

(2.) If it is a noun or pronoun, tell its gender, number and case:—if in the 
ntiminative or in the accusative with the infinitive, tell its verb:—if in an ob¬ 
lique case depending on some other word, tell the word on which its case 
depends. 

(3.) If it is an adjective, adjective-pronoun, or participle, tell the word which 
it moelifies. 

(4.) If it is a finite verb or an infinitive with the accusative, tell its voice, 
mocd, tense, number, person, and subject. 

3. If it is a conjunction, tell its class and what it connects. 

4 . If it is a preposition, tell the words whose relation is expressed by it. . 

6. If it is an adverb, tell its class and what it qualifies. 

6. Prove the correctness of each step of the process by quoting the definition 
or nile of formation or construction on which it depends. 

Note. The words constituting a proposition are most conveniently parsed iu 
thit order ui which they are arranged in analysis. 

Examples of Analysis and Parsing. 

1. Equus currit, The horse runs. 

Analysis. This is a simple sentence: its subject is iq*ius^ its predicate is 
eurrit^ both of which are simple. See § 201, 1-3; § 202, 2; and ^ 208, 2. 

27 


314 


SYNTAX.—ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


§281 


Parsing. JEquus is a common nonn, § 26, 1 and 3; of the 2d dec!., ^ 33 
masc. gender, ^ 28, 1; third person, ^ 35, 2; its root is eyr*-, ^ 40, 10; decline it 
^ 46; it is in the nominative case, singular number, § 35, 1, (b.); the subject 
of currit, ^ 209, (a .)—Currit is a neuter verb, ^ 141, II.; of the 3d conjugation, 
§ 149, 2, from curro; its principal parts are cta-ro, cmno'rn, cursmn, izirvere^ 
§ 151, 4; it is from the first root curr-; give the formations of that root, ^ 151,1; 
it is in the active voice, ^ 142, 1; indicative mood, ^ 143, 1; present tense, ^ 14S, 

I. ; third person, § 147; singular number, § 146; agi-eeing with its subject-nomi¬ 
native iquus^ § 209, (6.) 

Note. The questions to be asked in parsing eqzms are such as these, Whv is 
Squus a npun? Why a common noun V VVhy of the second declension f ^^hy 
masculine f etc. —In parsing currit^ the questions are. Why is cun-it a verbi 
Why a ncnter verb V Why of the conjugation V Which are the principai 
parts of a verb? Of what does the Jirst root of a verb consistV Wliat parts 
of a verb are derived from the Jirst rootl etc. The answer in each case may 
be found by consulting the etymological rules and definitions. 

2. Scevius ventis agitdtur ingens pinus. The great pine is mort 
violently shaken by th^ winds. Hor. 

Analysis. This also is a simple sentence:—its subject is ingens pinus, it» 
predicate scevius ventis agitdtur; both of which are complex, ^ 201, 10, § 202, 6 
and § 203, 5. 

The grammatical subject is plnus, the pine; this is modified by inqens. ereat, 
§ 201, 2, § 202, 2, and § 202, 6, (3.) 

The grammatical predicate is dg%td,tur, is shaken; this is modified by two 
independent modifiers, scevius, more violently, and ventis, by the winds, ^ 203 

II. 3 Kem., ^ 203, I. 1, (2), and (3.) 

P nr stn g. Plnus is a common noun, § 26, 1 and 3; of the 2d and 4th de¬ 
clensions, ^ 88 and ^ 99; feminine gender, § 29, 2; 3d person, ^ 35, 2; from the 
root piTi^, \ 40, 10; (decline it both in the 2d and 4th decjeiisions);—it is found 
in the singular number, ^ 35, 1, and the nominative case, tiie subject of agitd- 
iur, ^ 209, (a.) 

Jngens is a qualifying adjective of quantity, ^ 104, 4, and § 205, N. 1; of the 
3d deck, § 105, 1, and § 38; of one termination, ^ 108, and § 111; from the root 
ingent-, § 40, 10; (decline it like prcesens, ^111, but with only i in the ablative, 
^ 113, Exc. 3,);—it is found in the singular number, feminine gender, ^ 26, R. 4; 
and nominative case, agi’eeing with its noun plnus, § 205. 

Acjltdtur is an active frequentative verb, ^ 141, I., and § 187, II. 1; of the 
1st conjugation, § 149, 2; from the first root of its primitive dqo, § 187, II. 1, (6.); 
(name its principal parts in both voices, see § 151, 4; and give the conjuga¬ 
tion of the passive voice, indicative mood, present tense, see § 156,);—it is 
found in the singular number, ^ 146; third person, § 147; agreeing with its 
lubjCCt-nominative plnus, § 209, (b.) 

Scevius is a derivative adverb of manner, § 190, 2-4; in the comparative de¬ 
gree, from the positive scene or sceviier, which is derived from tlie adj( 5 ctive 
iteftts, { 194, 1 and 2, and ^ 192,11. 1, and Exc. 1 and 2; modifying the verb 
igitdtur, by expressing its degi'ee, § 277. 

Ventis is a common noun, ^ 26, 1 and 3; of the 2d declension, ^ 38; masculine 
gender, §46; from the root vent-, §40, 10; (decline it);—it is found in the 
plural number, § 35, 1; ablative case, modifying dgitdtur by denoting its meaiia 
01 instrument, § 247. 

3. Mithr\(ldtes, diidrum et viginti gentium rex, totidem Unguis Jura 
dixit, Mithridates, king of twenty-two nations, pronounced judicial 
decisions in as many languages. Plin. 

Analysis. This also is a simple sentence; its subject is Mithridates, dug, 
rum et v.ginti gentium rex, its predicate is tdtidem Unguis jura dixit, bf/th of 
which are complex, § 201, 10, § 202, 6, and § 203, 6. 


1281. 


SYNTAX.—ANALYSIS AND PARSINO. 


m 


The grammatical subject is Mithrtddtes: this is modified directly by 
\ 202, I. (1.) 

litx is limited by gentmm, § 202, I. 1, (2.) 

(jtntium is limited by the compound addition duarum and vlginti connecteQ 
coOrdinately by et, ^ 202, III. 3. 

The gi’ammatical predicate .s dixit; this is limited hj jfira and Unguis, the 
former a simple, the latter a complex addition, as it is modified by tOtidem 
§ 203, 1. 1, (2.) and 11. 1. 

Parsing. il/it/mV/dtes is a proper noun, § 26, 2; of the third declension, 
4 38; masculine gender, ^ 28, 1; from the root Mithrldat^, §40, 10; genitive 
Mlthriddtis, § <”3, 1; (decline it in the singular number only, § 95, (a.);—it ia 
found in the nominative case, the subject of dixit, § 209, (n.) 

Rex is a common noun—third declension, § 38; masculine gender, § 28, 1; 
from the root reg-, § 40, 10; genitive regis, § 78, 2; (decline it);—it is found in 
the singular number—the nominative case,* in apposition to Mlthridates, § 204. 

Gentium is a common noun from gens —third declension—feminine gender, 
§ 62; from the root gent-, § 56, 1, R. 1; genitive gentis, § 77, 2 and (2.); (de¬ 
cline it);—it is found in the plural number—genitive case, § 83, II. 3; limiting 
rex subjectively, § 211 and R. 2. 

Duarum is a nunieral adjective, § 104, 5; of the cardinal kind, § 117; from 
duo, duos, duo; from the root dur- ; (decline it, § 118, 1,);—it is found in the 
plural number, § 118, 2; feminine gender, genitive case, § 26, R. 4; agreeing 
with its noun gentium, § 205. 

Et is a copulative conjunction, § 198,1, connecting dtidrmm and Viginti, § 278. 

Viiginti is a numeral adjective of the cardinal kind, indeclinable, § 118,1; 
limiting gentium, § 205. 

Dixit is an active verb, § 141, I.; of the third conjugation, § 149, 2; from 
dico, (give the principal parts in the active voice, and its first, second, and 
third roots, § 150, 4, and § 171, 1;) it is formed from the second root dix-, (give 
the formations of the second root);—it is found in the active voice, § 141, 1; 
indicative mood, § 143, 1; perfect indefinite tense, § 145, IV. and Rem.; sin¬ 
gular number, third person, agreeing with MUhriddtes, § 209, (5.) 

Jura is a common noun, of the third declension, from jus, root jur-, § 56, I. 
R. 1 genitive § 76, Rxc. 3; neuter gender, § 66; (decline it);—it is found 

tn the jdural number, accusative case, § 40, 8; the object of dixit, § 229. 

Linguis is a common noun, of the first declension, feminine gender, from 
%ngua. root lingu-, (decline it);—found in the plural number, ablative case, 
*fter dixit. § 247. 

Tdtidem is a demonstrative pronominal adjective, § 139,5, (2.) and (3.); in¬ 
declinable, § 115, 4; it is in the ablative plural, feminine gender, limiting lin^ 
guis, § 205. 

4 . PausaritAxs, quum semidnXmis de tem/plo eldtiis esset^ confestim anXr 
mam effidvit. Nep. Paus. 4. 

Analysis. This is a complex sentence, § 201, 11; consisting of two mem^ 
bers, which are so arranged as to constitute a period, § 280, 1. 

The principal proposition is, Paiisdnias confestim dnUnam effldvit, § 201, 6. 
Tlie subordinate proposition is, quuin (is) semidnimis de teviplo eldtus essct, 
§ 201 , 6 . 

The leading proposition has a simple subject, Pausdnias, § 2Q2, 2, and a 
complex predicate, confestim dnimam ejfldvit, § 203, 3; in which effidvit is the 

r ammatical predicate, § 203, 2; which is modified by confestim and aniinam, 
203,1. 1, (2.) and (3.), and II. R. 2., and also by the adverbial clause quwA 
femidnimis, etc. § 201, 6 and 7, and § 203, I. 3. 

The subordinate proposition, which is connected to the leading clause by 
the subordinate conjunction qtium, § 201, 9, has a simple subject, viz. is under- 
Btoed, and a complex predicate, semidnimis, de templo eldtus esset, § 203, 3.— 
The grammatical predicate is eldtus esset, § 203, 2; which is modified by semlit 
nimis, § 203, 1 1, (1.), and de templo, § 203,1. 2, and II. Rem. 2. 


B16 


SYNTAX.—ANALYSIS AND PARSINQ. 


§281 


Parsing. Paus&nias^ a Greek propernonn, § 26, 2;—1st deck, 

44; masc. gender, ^ 28, 1; root Pausdnv-; found in sing, num., nom. case, the 
Bubject of effiavit, § 209, (a.) 

Cimfestim. an adv. of time § 190, 3; limiting effidmt, § 277. 

Anlmam is a com. noun of 1st decl., fern, gender, ^ 41; from dnfTua, root 
aniwj-; (decline it);—it is found in the shig. num., acc. case, the object of 
ejfidi'it, § 229. 

PJidvit, an act. verb, 1st conj., from efflo, compomded of ex and Jio, ^ 196, 6: 
(gi/e 'he principal parts in the act. voice and the three roots);—it is formed 
from the second root; (give the formations of that root); in the active voice 
ini. mood, perfect indennite tense, sing, num., 3d pers., agreeing -with Pausdi- 
ai IS, ^ 209, (6.) 

Qnum is a temporal conjunction, § 198, 10; connecting the dependent to the 
principal clause, § 278. 

iSemidnimis is a predicate adj., of the 3d decl., of two terminations, § 109; 
(decline it);—it is in the sing, num., masc. gend., nom. case, agreeing with is 
understood, ^ 210, R. 1, (a.) 

De is a preposition, expressing the relation between eldtus esset and iemplo, 
s 195. 

Temph is a com. noun, 2d decl., neut. gend., from templum, root tempi-; (de¬ 
cline it);—in the sing, num., abl. case, after de, § 241. 

Eldtus esset is an irregular active verb, of the third conjugation, § 179; from 
effero, compounded of ex and fero, § 196, 6; (see f&ro and compounds, § 172): 
(give the principal parts in both voices, and the 1st and 3d roots);—it is formed 
from the third root, Udt-, (give the formations of that root in the passive voice); 
in the subjunctive mood, pluperfect tense, § 145, V.; sing, num., third person, 
agreeing with is understood referring to Pausdnias, § 209, (6.) 

5. Romana pubes, seddto tandem pdvore, postquam ex tarn turMdo 
die serena et tranquilla lux rMiil, ubi vdcuam sedem reqiam vidit, etsi 
satis credebat patrlbus, qui proxtmi stelSrant, suhllmem raptum pro- 
cello,; tdmen, velut orbUdtis metu icta, mcestum aliquamdiu silentium 
obtinuit. Liv. 1, 16. 

Analysis . This is a complex sentence, whose clauses constitute a period, 
( 280. It is composed of the following members or clauses:— 

1. Romana pubes [tamen] mosstum dUquamdiu silentium obtinuit. This is tho 
ending clause. The following are dependent clauses. 

2. velut v7'bltdtis metu icta, 

3. seddto tandem pavore, 

4 . postquam ex tmn turbido die sSrena et tranquilla lux ridiit, 

6. ubi vdcuam sede7n regiam vidit, 

6. etsi satis a'edebal patrlbus, 

7. qui proxlmi steterant, 

8 . subllmem raptum pi-dceUd. 

Note 1. In the preceding clauses the predicates are printed in ItaUcs. 

Note 2. The connective of the 1st clause, is the adversative tdmen, which 
IS inserted on account of etsi intervening between the principal subject and 
predicate. The connective of the 2d clause is vHut, of the 4th postquam, of the 
5th ubi, of the 6th etsi, followed by a clause constituting the protasis, and of 
die 7th qui. The 3d and 8th clauses have no connectives. 

(1.) Ihe grammatical subject of the leading clause is pubes, which is limited 
by Mmdna. —The grammatical predicate is i^Unuit, which is limited by dft- 
quamdiu and silentium, and also either directly or indirectly by all the depend¬ 
ent clauses. Silentium is itself modified by metstum. 

The second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth clauses are used adverbially tc 
denote the time and other circumstances modifying the pnncipal predioato 
<letUUm obUnuit, ^ 201, 7. 


5 281. 


SYNTAX.—ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


317 


(2.) The second is a participial clause, equivalent to vUut ('ca scil. pules 
n^tatU rn^tii icta esset, § 274, 3, (a.) 

(3.) The third clause is also participial, and is equivaleiil to quum tandem 
pdi'OT' seddtus esstt, § 257, R. 1; and hence pdvore represents the subject, and 
Be data tandem the predicate—the former being simple, tlie latter complex. 

(4.) The grammatical subject of the 4th clause, which is connected to the 
leading clause by postquam, ^ 201, 9, is lux, which is moilified by serena and 
tran'pulla. —The gi'ammatical predicate is rediit, which is m-Ddified by postjuam 
and ex tarn turlido die, § 203, 1. 1, (3.), and II. 1. 

(6.) The grammatical subject of the fifth clause is ea understood.—The 
grammatical predicate is vulit, which is modified by ubi and vacuum sedein 
reyiam, ^ 203, I. 1, (3.) and II. 1. 

(6.) The grammatical subject of the sixth clause also is ea. Its grammati¬ 
cal predicate is credebat, which is modified by st^is and patnbus, 203, 1. (2.) 
and (3.), and by the 8tii clause, II. 3. 

(7.) The grammatical subject of the seventh clause is gui. Its grammatical 
predicate is sfeteram, which is modified by j)roxlmi, ^ 203, I. (1.) It is an ad¬ 
jective clause, modifying patribus, ^ 201, 7 and 9. 

(8.) The grammatical subject of the eighth clause, which has no connective, 
§ 201, Rem., is eum, i. e. Rdmulum, understood. Its grammatical predicate iw 
raptum (esse), which is modified by svhllmem and prdcelld. 

Parsing. Roindna is a patrial adjective, § 104, 10, derived from Roma., 
§ 128, 6, (a.) and (e.); of the 1st and 2d declensions, § 105, 2; fern, gender, 
sing, number, nom. case, agreeing with pubes, § 205. 

Pubes, a collective noun, § 26, 4; 3d decl., fern, gender, § 62; from the rool 
pub-, § 56, I. R. 6; genitive pubis, § 73, 1; (decline it);—found in the nom. 
sing., the subject of cbtinuit, ^ 209, (a.) 

Tdmen, an adversative conjunction, ^ 198, 9, relating to etsi in the 6th clause. 

Mcestum, a qualifying adj., § 205, 1; of the 1st and 2d declensions, neut 

gender, sing. num.,*acc. case, agreeing with silentium. 

Aliquamdiu, an adverb of time, § 191, II.; compounded of aliquis and diu 
§ 193, 6; and limiting obllnuit, ^ 277. 

Silentium, a com. noun, 2d decl., neut. gender, ^ 46; sing, number, acc. case 
the object of obtinuit, § 229. 

Obtinuit, an active verb, of the 2d conj., § 149, 2; from obtineo, compound6<J' 
of ob and teneo, see § 168; (give the principal parts in the act. voice, and th( 
formations of the 2d root, § 157 at the end);—found in the active voice, ind. 
mood, perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d person, a^eeing with pubes, ^ 209, (6.) 

VHut for vHut si, an adverb, compounded of vel and ut, §193, 10; modifying 
icta, and obtinuisset understood, (as they would have done if, etc.) 

Orbltdtis, an abstract noun, § 26, 5; from the primitive orbus, § 101, 1 and 2; 
8d dec'., fern, gender, § 62; from the root orbital-, § 56, I., and R. 1; (decline 
t);—found in the sing, num., subjective gm. case, limiting metu, § 211. 

MHu, an abstract noun, 4th decl, masc. gen., § 87; sing, num., abl. case, 

247. 

Jcla, a perf. part, pass., from the activt verb Ico, of the 3d conj. (give tho 
principal parts in both voices, and decline .he participle);—found in the fern, 
gen., sing, num., nom. case, agreeing with piiber., § 205. 

Stildto, a perfect pass. part, from the active verb set/o, of the 1st conj., § 149 
2; (give the principal parts in both voices, § lol, 4; and decline it, § 105 
R. 2.);—found in the masc. gender, sing, num., abl. case, agreeing with pd~ 
vdi'e, § 205. • 

Tfindem, an adverb of time, § 191, .1.; modifying seddto, § 277. 

Pdvore, an abstract noun, § 26, 5, and § 102. 1; (from pdveo), 3d decl., masc. 
gen., § 58; root pdverr, § 56, II., and § 70, (decli.ae it);—found in the sing 
number, abl. case, absolute with skldto, § 267. 

Postquam, an adverb of time, compounded of pest and quam, § 193,10; mod 
tfying rkliit, and connecting the 1st and 4th clauses, § 201, 9. 

Ex, a preposition, § 196, R. 2. 

Tam, an adveverb degree, § 191, R 2; modifying lurbido, § 277. 

27» 


818 


SYNTAX.—ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 


§281 


Tarbido, an adjective, agreeing with die. 

Die, a common noun, 6th decK, masc. gender, ^ 90, Exc. 1.; ting, number 
abl. case, after the prep, ex, ^ 241. 

Serena, an adj., 1st and 2d decls., fern, gen., sing, num., nom. case, agreeing 
with lux, ^ 205. 

£t, a copulative conjunction, § 198, 1; connecting sirena and iranquilla 
S 278. 

Tranquilla, like sirena. 

Lux, a v^ommon noun, 3d deck, fern, gen., ^ 62; from the root Ztio-, § DO, L, 
and R. 2; genitive lucis, § 78, 2. 

Rediil an irregular neuter verb, of the 4th conj., ^ 176; from r^deo, corn- 
pounded of eo, § 182, and the inseparable prep, red, ^ 196, (6.), 3; (give its prio- 
sipal parts);—found in the ind. mood., perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d pers., 
agreeing with lux, ^ 209, (6.) 

Ubi, an adverb of time, and like postquam, a connective, ^ 201, 9; and modi¬ 
fying vidit, ^ 277. 

Vdcuani, an adj., qualifying sedem. 

Sedem, a common noun, 3d deck, fern, gen., § 62; from the root sed-, ^ 66, L, 
R. 6; genitive si*lis, ^ 73, 1; (decline it);—found in the sing, num., acc. case, 
the object of the transitive verb vidit, ^ 229. 

Reyiam, a denominative adj., ^ 128,1., 2,(a.); from the primitive rex, agree¬ 
ing with sedem. 

Vidit, an active verb, of the 2d conj., (give its principal parts in the active 
voice, and the formations of the 2d root); found in the active voice, ind. mood, 
perf. indef. tense, sing, num., 3d pers., agreeing with ea, i. e. puies, under¬ 
stood. 

Ltsi, a concessive conjunction, § 198, 4; corresponding to the correlative ad¬ 
versative conj. tdmen, § 198, 4, R. and 9. 

Satis, an adverb of degree, § 191, III., and R. 2; modifying crHehat, ^ 277. 

Crklebat, an act. verb, ^ 141,1.; 3d conj., (give the principal parts in the 
active voice and the formations of the Ist root);—found in the act. voice, ind. 
mood, imperfect tense, sing, num., 3d person, agreeing with ea, scil. pubes, 
understood. 

Patiibus, a common noun, ^ 26, 3; 3d deck, from the root pair-, ^ 66, II., 
R. 3; gen. patiis, § 71; masc. gender, § 28, 1; plur. num., dat. case, depending 
on credebat, § 223, R. 2. 

Qui, the subject of the 7th clause, is a relative pronoun, § 136; masc. 
gender, plur. num., agreeing with its antecedent patribus, ^ 206, R. 19, (a.j; 
and is nominative to steterant, § 209, (a.) 

Proxlmi, an adj. of the superlative degree, § 126, 1, (compare it); of the Ist 
and 2d decls., masc. gen., plur. num., nom. case, agreeing with qui, \ 205, k 210, 
R. 1, (rt.) and R. 3, (2.) 

a neuter verb, 1st conj., irregular in its 2d root, § 165; (give its 
principal parts, and the formations of the 2d root);—found in the act. voice 
U'd. mood, plup. tense, § 145, V.; 3d person plural, agreeing with its subject 
fi«' ^ 209, (6.) 

Siiblimem, an adj., of the 3d deck, and two terminations, § 109; masc. gem. 
sing, num., acc. case, agreeing with eum, (i. e. Romrdum,) understood, and 
nodifying also raptum esse, ^ 205, R. 15. 

Rnptum (esse), an act. verb, 3d conj.; (give the principal parts in both 
voices and the formations of the 3d root in the passive voice)—found in the 
pass, voice, inf. inood, perf. tense; but, following the imperfect, it has the 
meaning oi a pluperfect, § 268, 2, and ^ 145, V.; depending on credebat, § 272. 

PoOctUu a com. noun, 1st deck, fern, gen., sing, num., abk case, ^ 247. 


§ 282, 283. PROSODY.—quantity—general rules. 319 


PROSODY. 

§ 283. Prosody treats of the quantity of syllables, and the 
laws of versification. 


QUANTITY. 

1. The quantity of a syllable is the relative time occupied in 
pronouncing it. Cf. § 13. 

2. A syllable is either shorty long, or common. 

(a.) The time occupied in pronouncing a short syllable is called a mora or 
time. 

(6.) A long syllable requires two morce or double the time occu- 
pred in pronouncing a short one ; as, amdre. 

(c.) A common syllable is one which, in poetry, may be made 
either long or short; as the middle syllable of tenebrce. 

3. The quantity of a syllable is either natural or accidentalf — 
natural, when it depends on the nature of its vowel; accidental, when 
it depends on \is position. 

Thus the e in reslsto is short by nature ; while in resfiti it is long by its posi¬ 
tion, since it is followed by two consonants: §283, IV. On the contrary, the 
e in deUuco is naturally long, but in decrro it is made short by being placed be¬ 
fore a vowel: § 283, I. 

4. The quantity of syllables is determined either by certain estab¬ 
lished rules, or by the authority of the poets. 

Thus it is the poetic usage alone that determines the quantity of the first sylla¬ 
bles of the following words, viz. mater, frater, prdims, dlco, duco; pater, S-vus, 
cddo, miiieo, (jrdvis, etc. ; and hence the quantity of such syllables can be as¬ 
certained by practice only or by consulting the gradus or lexicon. 

5. The rules of quantity are either general or special. The for¬ 
mer apj)ly alike to all the syllables of a word, the latter to particular 
syllables. 


GENERAL RULES. 

§ 283. !• («.) A vowel before another vowel, or a diph- 

tlioiig, is short; as, e in meus, i in patrice. Thus, 

Consria mens recti ffimae rnendarla ridet. Ovid. F. 4^311. 

'pse Hi x»i eximloe laudis suceeudus S,iaore. Virg. A. i, 496. 

(i.) So also when h comes between vowels, since h is account¬ 
ed only a breathing; as, nihil: (see § 2, 6.) 'rims, 

D6 nViiia n,ihtl, in nVMum nil posse reverti. Pert. 4, 84, 


320 


PROSODY.—QUANTITY—GENERAL RULES. § 283 


Exc. 1. (a.) Flo has the i long, exeept in fit and when followed 
by er; as flunt^ fleham. Thus, 

Omnia jam flant^ fliri qua? posse nggabam. Ovid. Tr. 1, 8, 7. 

(J.) It is sometimes found long even before er; as, fUret. Ter.; fl^ri. Plant 
and, on the contrary, Prudentius has fid with i short. 

Exc. 2. (a.) E is long in the termination of the genitive and da 
tive of the fifth declension, when preceded and followed by t, as 
faciei. Thus, 

Non i^dii solis, nSque luclda tela disL Lucr. 1,148. 

(A) In speij reiy and fidex., e is short. 

Note. In Lucretius, the e of rei is, in a few cases, long, and that of fidi\ Is 
lengthened once in Lucretius and once in a line of Ennius. 

Exc. 3. (a.) A is long in the penult of old genitives in ai' of the 
first declension; as, auldi, pictai. Cf. § 43, 1. 

ib.) A and e are also long in proper names in aius, etws, or c?a; as, Codus 
Pompeius, Aquileia; and in the adjectives Grains and Veins. Thus, 

^therium sensum, atque aurSi eimplTcis ignem. Virg. A. 6; 747. 

Accipe, Pompei, deductum carmen ab illo. Ovid. Pont. 4,1, 1. 

Necnon cum Venetis Aquileia perf urit armis. Sil. 8, 606. 

Exc. 4. (a.) / is common in genitives in ius; as, unius, illlus 
Thus, 

Ilttus et nitldo stillent unguenta cSlpillo. TibuU, 1, 7, 61. 

Iltlus puro destillent tempora nardo. Id. 2, 2, 7. 

(6.) But» in the genitive of alter is commonly short; and in that of olHus it is 
always long. 

‘ Exc. 5. The first vowel of eheu is long; that of Diana, to, and Bhe 
is common. 

Exc. 6. Greek words retain their original quantities, and hence, 
in many Gi'eek words, a vowel is long, though immediately followed 
Vy another vowel; as, 

der, Achdia, Acheldils, dia, cos, Ldertes, and Greek words having in the orig¬ 
inal a long e or 0 (« or a.) See also § 293, 3. 

(1.) Words which, in Gi*eek, are written with ei («) before a vowel, and in 
Latin with a single e or i, have the e or i long; as, uEneas, Alexandria, Cassich 
pea, Clio, Ddrlns, ilegia, Galatea, Medea, Mausdlenm, Peneldpea, Thalia, Atruks. 

Hence most adjectives in ens, formed from Greek proper names, have the e 
PeldpHa. Cgiherens, Peldpens', and the e remains long when ei is restored; as, 
ong; as. 

Esc. Academia, chdrea, Mnlea, pldtea, and some patronymics and patiials 
Ml <ds; as. Nereis, have the penult common. 

(2.) Greek genitives in eos, and accusatives in ea, from nominatives in eu$, 
^>euerally shorten the e; as, Orpheos, Orphea ;—but the e is sometimes length- 
aned by the Ionic dialect; as, Ctpheos, Ilidnea. 

(3.) Greek words in ais, ois, ains, eins, oins, aon, and ion, generally lengthen 
the first vowel; aSj Ndis, Mlndis, Grdins, Nereins, Mindius, Mdchd n, Ixion. 
But Thcbdis, Sirtdks, Fhdon, Dencdlion, Pygmalion, and many others, shorten 
the former vowel. 

Note 1. Greek words in am and ion, with o short in the genitive, have the 
pentUt long; but with o long in the genitive, they have it short; as, Amythdon 
Adhia { Deucalion, -dnis. 


5 283. PROSODY.-QUANTITY—GENERAL RULES. 32^ 

Note 2. In Greek proper names in em (gen. eos), as Orpheus, the eu in the 
nominative is always a diphthong in the original, and, with very few excep¬ 
tions, in the Latin poets.* 

II. A diphthong is long; as, aurum^ foenus, Euh^a, Pom'- 
pEius, Orplimi. Tims, 

InfernTqiie licus, JEnaque insula Circse. Yirg. A. 3, 386. 

Thlsnuros ignotuni argenti pondus et Tiuri. Id. A. 1, 359. 

Harj)yicb(i\xe coluut alicB, Phineia postquam. Id A. 3, 212. 

Exc. 1. PrcE, in composition, is short before a vowel; as, praustus^ 
pi^dcutus. Thus, 

Nec tota tXmen ille prior pr^eunte cariva. Virg. A 6, 186. 

In Statius, and Sidonius Apollinaris, it is found long. 

Exc. 2. A diphthong at the end of a word, when the next word 
begins with a vowel, is sometimes made short; as, 

Insula lonio in magno, quas dira Celaeno. Virg. A. 3, 211. 

Exc. 3. The diphthongs consisting of u followed by a vowel are either lonfl 
or short; the two vowels thus combined being subject to the same rules or 
quantity, as their final vowel would be if standing alone; as, qua, qul, qudrum,, 
quia, quiems, qudtio, queror, cequdr, linqud, sanguis. 

III. A syllable fbrmed by contraction is long; as, 

dtius for aliius; edgo for c6dgo; nil for nihil; junior for juvSnior. Thtji, 

Tityre edge pecus, tu post carecta latebas. Virg. E. 3, 20. 

IV. A vowel naturally short, before two consonants, a double 
consonant, or the letter j, is long by position ; as, drma^ bellumy 
axis, ydza, major. Thus, 

Pdisc?re dpdrtet Sves deductum dlcere carmen. Virg. E. 6, 5. 

Nec myrtiis vincet corylos ; nSc laurea Phcebi. Id. E. 7, 64. 

At nobis, Pax alma, reni, spicamque teneto. Tihull. 1, 10, 67. 

Kara jQvant: primis sic major gratia pomis. Mart. 4, 29, 3. 

Note 1. A vowel (other than i) before j is in reality lengthened by fonning 
a diphthong with it, since i and j are in fact but one letter. Thus major is 
equivalent to maV-or, which would be pronounced md'-yor. See § 9, 1. 

Exc. 1. The compounds of jugum have t short before j; as, hXju- 
gi'£, quadryugus. Thus, 

Interea Mjixgis infert se LucSlgus albis. Virg. A. 10, 676. 

Remark. The vowel is long by position, when either one or both 
♦f the consonants is in the same word with it; but when both stand 
it the beginning of the following word, the vowel is either long or 
short; as, 

Tolle miiras; semper ndruJt differre pSratis. Lucan. 1, 281. 

Ferte cTti ferrum; date lSl&; scandlte miiros. Virg, A. 9, 37. 

Ne tAmea ignoret, quae sit senlent'd scripto. Ovid. 

Note 2. A short vowel at the end of a word, before an initial double conso* 
oant or j in the following word, is not lengthened. 

Note 3. In the comic poets a vowel frequently remains short though fol 
owed by two c onsonants, especiallj if only one of them is in the same word. 


322 


PROSODY.—QUANTITY-SPECIAL RULES. 


§281 


Exc. 2 A vowel naturally shorU before a mute followed by a 
liquid, is common; as, agris^ phdretra, vulucris, poplUes, cochlea. 
Thus, 

Et prTmo sTmllis vdlUcri, mox vera vSlucrjs. Ch'id. M. 13. 607. 

Natum ante ora pHtris, painm qui obtruncat ad aras. Virg. A. 2, 663* 

Nox tenSbras profert, Phoebus f ugat inde tSnibras. Ovid. 

Rem. 1 . If the vowel before a mute and liquid is naturally long, it continues 
bo; as, sdlubris, ambulacrum. 

Rem. 2. In compound words, of which the former part ends with a mute, and 
the latter begins with a liquid, a short vowel before the mute is made long by 
position; as, dbluo, dbi'uo, sublevo, quambbrem. 

Rem. 3. A mute and liquid at the beginning of a word seldom lengthen the 
short vowel of the preceding word, except in the arsis of a foot; as, 

Terrasyug tractusque mirls ccelumque profundum. Virg. E. 4, 61. 

Rem. 4. In Latin words, only the liquids I and r following a mute render 
the preceding short vowel common; but, in words of Greek origin, m and n 
after a mute have the same effect, as in Ticme$sa, Procne, Cycnus. 


SPECIAL RULES. 

FIRST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. 

I. DERIVATIVE VfORDS. 

§ 284:. Derivative words retain the quantity of their prurn 
tives; as, 

by conjugation, amo, &mai, &mdbat, ^mdvi, amdfiM, etc.; by declension, &mor, 
ii,mSris, kmon, kmdi-ibw, etc.; so, Hn\rnal, knUndtua, from knlma; gbmebundua, 
from gem^re; fkmllia, ixom fkmulus; maiemtis, fiommaier; prbpinquus, from 
prbpe. 

Note 1. Ldr, par, 6dl, and pes in declension shorten the vowel of the nomi¬ 
native ; as, sails, pedis, etc. 

Note 2. The vowel of the primitive is sometimes lengthened or shortened in 
the derivative by the addition or removal of a consonant. 

Rem. 1. Derivatives from increasing nouns of the second or third 
declension agree in quantity with the increment of their primitives; 
as, 

pubritia, from pueri; virgine'us, from virgfnis; sdlnber, from sdlntis. 

Rem. 2. In verbs, the vowels of the derived tenres and of deriva¬ 
tive words agree in quantity with the verbal root from which they 
are formed; as, 

mowebam, movebo. vdbveam, mbverem, move, movere, move?is, moYendm 
from the root oi the present, with <5 short;— n\bveram, cnbverim, mbvissem. 
Tiovero, movisse, from r/idP, the root of the perfect, with d long; mbtu -ms ana 
aibtns; —moto, raOtio, motor, and mot^zs, -itf, from mot, the root of the supine; 
with b a'so long. 

Bem. 3. (a.) Sdlutum and vdlutum from solvo and volvo have the first syllable 
short, as if from s6luo, vdluo. So, from gigno come genui, genitum, as if from 
oeno; and pdtui, from pdiis sum (possum). 


§ 284 . PROSODY.-QUANTITY-DERIVATIVE WORDS. 328 


(A.) The a in da, imperative of do, is long, though short in other parts of the 
verb. See § 294, 2. 

(c.) The 0 in p6$ui and pdsttum is short, though long in pou). 

Exc. 1. Perfects and supines of two syllables have the first 
syllable long, even when that of the present is short; as, 

vent, vidi, feci, from vinio, video, fddo; cdsum, mdtim, visum, from afcto, 
indvco, video. 

Noi E 3. Such perfects are supposed to have been formed either by the con¬ 
traction of reduplicated syllables, as vSnio, perf. veveni, by sjuicope vSSni, by 
crasis vini, or ty the omission of a consonant, as video, perf. vldsi, by syncope 
eidi, the vowel retaining the quantity which it had by position. 

Note 4. The long vowel of dissyllabic supines probably arose in like man¬ 
ner from syncope and contraction; as, video, vidsum, by syncope visum; mOveo, 
mdviium, by syncope mditmn, by contraction molum. 

(1.) (a.) These seven perfects have the first syllable short:— 
dtdi, fidi, (from findo), scidi, steti, stXti, tuli. So also perculi, from 
percello. 

(6.) The first syllable is also short before a vowel 283, I.); as, rHi. • 

(2.) (a.) T['hese ten supines have the first syllable short:— cltum^ 
(from cieo), datum, Xtum, IXtum, quXtum, rdtum, rutum, sdtum, sXtum, 
and stdtum. 

(b.) So, also, had the obsolete futum, from fu6, whence comes futurus. 

Exc. 2. (a.) Reduplicated polysyllabic perfects have the first two 
syllables short; as, 

cicldi, cSdni, Utigi, didici, from cddo, cdno, tango, and disco. 

(6.) The second syllable of reduplicated perfects is sometimes made long by 
position; as, mdmordi, tetendi .— Cecidi from ccedo, and pepedi from pedo, retain¬ 
ing the quantity of their first root also have the second syllable long. 

Exc. 3. Desiderative verbs in urio have the u short, though, in the third 
root of the verbs from which they are formed, it is long; as, ccendturio from 
coemdu, the third root of coeno. So partuvio, esurio, nuplurto. 

Exc. 4. Frequentative verbs, formed from the third root of verbs of the first 
conjugation, have the i short; as, cldmito, vdUto. See § 187, II. 1. 

Exc. 6. A few other derivatives deviate from the quantity of their primi 
lives. 


1. Some have a long vowel from a short one in the primitive 


Such are, 

Deni, from decem. 
Fomes and ) from 
Foiaentum, j foveo. 
HSmauus, from homo, 
t aten.a, from lateo. 
Lit fra from lino. 

Lex (legis), from Ifgo. 


Mobilis, from moveo. 
Persona, from persono. 
Regula and ) from 
Rex (regis), ( rego. 
Secius, from sfeus. 
Sedes, from sSdeo. 
Semen,yVow* sSro. 


Stipendium, from slips 
(stipis). 

Suspicio, onis, from sus- 
plcor. 

Teghla, from tSgo. 


2. Some have a short vowel from a long one in the primitive; 
Such are,' 


Vicax, from dico. 
f)nx ,ducis), from duco. 
Fides, fr<)m fido. 
uhbo, from labor, dep. v. 
Lucenia, from luceo. 


Molestus, from moles. 
Nato, from natu. sup. 
Noto, from notu. sup. 
6dium, from odi. 
Quasillus, from quAlus. 


Sagax, from sagio. 
Sopor, from sop'io. 
Vadum, front vado. 
Voco, from vox (vocis,) 


52i 


PROSODY.—QUANTITY-COMPOUND WORDS. § 285 


Note 1. Disertm comes regularly (by syncope) fr>im dissertus, the prefix dk 
being short, ^ 299, 1. Cf. dirlim and dirlbeo, where s is changed to r. bee § 19S 

(6.) i 

Note 2. Some other words might, perhaps, with propriety be added to these 
lists; but, in regard to the derivation of most of them, grammarians are not 
entirely agreed. ^ 

Remark 1. Some of these irregularities seem to have arisen from the inflm 
ence of syncope and crasis. Thus mobilis may have been m&olbilis; moluni^ 
mdtitum, etc. 

Rem. 2. Sometimes the vowel in the derived word being naturally short, is 
restored to its proper quantity by removing one of the consonants which, in 
the primitive, made it long by position; as, nux^ nucis. So, Vhen the vowel of 
the primitive is naturally long, but has been made short before another vowel 
it is sometimes restored to its original quantity by the insertion of a consonant 
as, liibennus^ from hiems. 

Rem. 3. The first syllable in liquidus is supposed to be common, as coming 
either from liqtuyr or liqueo ; as, 

Crassique conveniant ttqvMu, et tiqulda crassis. Lucr. 4, 1256. 


^ II. COMPOUND WORDS. 

§ S85. 1. Compound words retain the quantity ef the words 
which compose them ; as, 

dif er ), of de and f ero; itdoro, of dd and dro. So dbdHor, dmdvdo, circumio^ 
edmedo, enltor, prdduco, s&bdmo, 

2. The change of a vowel or a diphthong in forming the compound 
does not alter its quantity ; as, 

coTicitZo, from edeb; concido^ from C(zdo; ertgo, from re go; reclvudo^ from claudo; 
iniquus, from eequus. 

Exc. 1. A long syllable in the simple word becomes short in the following 
compounds :—agnitus and cognitus^ from ndtus; dejero and pejero, from juro, 
kddie, from hdc die: nlhilum and -nihil, from hilum; causidicus, and other com¬ 
pounds ending in diciis, from dico. 

Exc. 2. Imbecillus, from bdcillum, has the second syllable long. The partici¬ 
ple ambitus has the penult long from Hum, but the nouns ambitus and anbitio 
follow the rule. 

Exc. 3. Innuba, prdnuba, and subnuba, from nubo^ have u shoi't; but in conr- 
mtbium, it is common. 

Exc. 4. 0 final, in the compounds of do and sto, is common, though long in 
the simple verbs. ^ 294, (a.) 

Note 1. Prepositions of one syllable, which end in a vowel, are long 294, 
'a.); those which end in a single consonant are short (§ 299, from 

txans is long; as, ti'ddo, traduco. 

Exc. 6. Pro, in the following compounds, is short:—;>r5/dn«s, prdfdri, 
prdfecto, prdfestus, prdf iciscor, prdfiteor, prdfugio, prdfugus, prdcella, prd- 
fundus, p’dnepos, prdneptis, and prdtei'vus. It is common in procuro, profundo 
propdgo, pixpello, and i?rqpZ/io.—Respecting^7 -cb in composition before a vowel 
eee ^ 233, II. Exc. 1. 

Rem. 1. The Greek preposition pro (before) is short; as, prdpheta. In prdt- 
Jy'us, propdla, and qn'opino, it is common. 

Rem. 2. The inseparable prepositions di (for dis) and se are long 
ns, 

diduco, tepdro. Respecting disertus, see § 284, Exc. 5, 2, N. 1. 


§ 286. PROSODY.—QUANTITY-INCREMENT OF NOUNS. S2t 


Rem. 3. (a ) The inseparable preposition re or red is short; as, 

remitto, refero^ rfdamo. 

(b.) Re is sometimes lenfjthened in reixgio, relif^nim, reJiqnu?^ repMt, re^ulit 
repuUi, recldit^ re<liu(ire, where some editors dtmhie the consonant following re. 
Cf. 9 30", 2. In the impersonal verb refert^ re is long, as coming from res, 

IvEM. 4. A ending^ the former part of a compound word, is long; 
(he other vow'tds are short; as, 

ma,o, <innpriipter, trddo^ {(rnns do); vofas, valedlco, lutjitscSnbdi; biceps, trl~ 
dens, oviuipotens, sir/nij'ico; liddie, qiimiihh/inde/a, jjhilOsvjjlius; ducenti, lOcvpleSy 
1 rojjyena ; J'olydofus, Rurypijlus, Tlirtisybidiis, 

Exc. 1. A. -4 is s.iort in yiutsi, endevi, when not an ablative, and in .some 
Greek compounds; as, catapalta, hejcdmeter. 

Exc. 2. K. E is long in credo, nemo, nequam, nequdqunm, nequidquam, ne- 
qtiis, 7ie(p-.Uia; ynemet, mecuni, tecum, sccurn, sise, vecors, vesdnus, rinfj'icns, and 
vldelictt; —also in words compounded w'ith se for sex or semi; as, sededm^ 
Beyntsiris, semddius; but in selibra it is found short in Martial. 

Note 2. (a.) The first e in videlicet, as in vide, is sometimes made short. 
See § 295, Exc. 3. 

(6.) E is common in some verbs compounded with fdcio; as, liquefacxo, 
pdtefdcio, rdrefdcio, tdbefdcio, tipefdcio. 

Exc. 3. 3. (1.) / is long in those compounds in which the first part is de¬ 
clined, 296;) as, quulam, qulvis, qullibet, quaniivis, quanilcumque, tantidem, 
unicuique, eldem, relpublicce, utrique. 

(2.) / is also long in those compounds which maybe separated without al¬ 
tering the sense, (§296;) as, ludlmdyister, slquis, ayrlcultura. 

(8.) I, ending the former part of a compound word, is sometimes made long 
by contraction; as, tlbicen for tibiicen, from tibia and cd.no. See § 283, III. 

(4.) /is long in biyce, quadrigae, lllcet, scilicet. 

(5.) In idein, when masculine, i is long; but when neuter, it is short. The i 
of ubique and utrdblqne, the second in ibidem, and the first in nlmlrum, are long. 
In ubicumque, as in uhi, i is common. 

(6.) Compounds of dies have the final i of the former part long; as, blduum, 
triduum, merldits, qudtldie, quotldidnus, prldie, postrldie. 

Note 3. In Greek words, i, ending the fonner part of a compound, is short; 
Rs, Calllnmchus; unless it comes from the diphthong ei («), or is made long or 
common by position. 

Exc. 4. (). (1.) In compounds, the final o of coniro, intro, retro, and quando 
\except quanddquidem,) is long; as, contrdversia, inti'dddco, retrdeedo, quanddque. 
0 is long also in dlidqui (~quin), and utroque. 

(2.) 0 is long in the compounds of quo and eo; as, qudmMo, qudcumque, qud~ 
nam, qudllbet, qudviinus, qudeirca, quovis, qudque (i. e. et quo) ; eddem, edne ; but 
in the conjunction qudque, it is short. 

(3.) Greek words which are Avritten with an omega (a) have the o long; as, 
gedmetra, Mindtaurus, Idgdpus. 

Exc. 6. U. (7 is long in Jupiter {Jdtis pater), and judlco {jiis Mco). 

III. INCRE^^IENT OF NOUNS. 

§286. 1. A noun is said to increaste, when, in any ot its cases, 

t has more syllables than in the nominative singular; as, pax, pacts, 
termo, sermmis. The number of increments in any case of a noun is 
equal to that of its additional syllables. 

38 


1126 PROSODY.— QUANTITY INCREMENT OF NOUNS. §287. 


2. Nouns in general have but one increment in the singular, but 
il?r^ supellex, compounds of caput ending in ps, and sometimes jecur 
have two increments; as, 

Her, sujiellex, su-pel-lec-ti-Us; anceps, an-cip-t-tis; jScur, jS cin. 

i-ris. 

Remark. The double increase of iter, etc., in the singular number arises 
from their coming from obsolete nominatives, containing a syllable more than 
those now in use; as, itiner, etc. 

.3. The dative and ablative plural of the third declension have one 
increment more than the genitive singular; as, 

rex, Gen. re-ffis, D. and Ab. reg-i-bus. 

serim, - ser-mo-nis, - ser-mon-i-bus. 

iter, - i-liiir4-ris, - itr-l-iier-l-bus. 

4. The last syllable of a word is never considered as the incre 
ment. If a w^ord has but one increment, it is the penult; if two, the 
antepenult is called the first, and the penult the second; and if three, 
the syllable before the antepenult is called the first, the antepenult 
the second, and the penult the third increment; as, 

1 12 12123 

ser-mo, ser-md-nis, ser-mon-i-bus; i-ter, i-tln-i-ris, it-i-ner-i-bus. 

6. In the third declension, the quantity of the first increment is the 
flame in all the other cases as in the genitive singular; as, 

sermonis, serjndni, sermbnem, sermone, sennbnes, sei'mMum, sei-mdnibus. Bdbm, 
or bubtis, from bos, bdvis, is lengthened by contraction from bbvtbus. 

Note. As adjectives and pa*diciples are declined like nouns, the same rules 
of increment apply to all of them; and so also to pronouns. 


INCREMENTS OF THE SINGULAR NUMBER. 

OF THE FIRST, FOURTH, AND FIFTH DECLENSION^ 

§ S87. 1. IVhen nouns of the first, fourth, and fifth declensions in¬ 

crease in the singndar number, the increment consists of a vowel before the 
final vowel, and its quantity is determined by the fii'st general rule with its ex¬ 
ceptions, § 283,1. 

Thus, aura, gen. aurai, § 283, I. Exc. 3, (a.): fructus, dat. fructui, ^ 283, I. 
a.): dies, gen. diei, § 283, I. Exc. 2, (a.) 


INCREMENTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 

2. Tlie increments of the second declension in the singular 
auraber are short; as, 

glner, geniri ,■ satur, satuH; Uner, tSneri; vir, viri. Thus, 

Ne. pulri, r.e tanta antmis aasuescTte bella. Virg. A. 6, 833. 

Wnnstra elnuut; giniros exteruis affore ab oris. Id. A. 7, 270. 

Fxc The increment of Iber and Cdtiber is long. For that of genitives in 
ms see ^ 283, I. Exc. 4. 




§ 287 . PROSODY.-QUANTITY-INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 827 

INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

3. The increments of the third declension and singular nuni' 
her in a and o are long; those in e, i, w, and y, are short; as, 

Animal, dnimalis; audnx, awldds; sermo, sermdnis; Jernx, Jerdcis; dpus^ 
^ris; cUer, celeiis; miles, militis; supplex, supplicis; murmur, mumiuris, 
iux, duds; chldmys, chldmydis; Styx, Styyis. Thus, 

Pron&que cum spectent anhndlin cetera terram. Ovid. M. I, 84. 

Hsec turn multipllci populos sfrmdne replebat. Virs;. A. 4, 189 

Incumbent i^^niris lapsi aarcire rulnaa. Id. G. 4, 249. 

Quaiem virgineo demeaaum police tlarem. Id. A. 11, 68. 

Adapice, rentoai ceclderuut murmuris aurse. Id. E. 9, 68. 


Exceptions in Increments in A. 

1. (a.) Masculines in al and ar (except Car and Nar') increase 
(diort; as, Annibal, AnnXbdlis; Amilcar, Amilcdris. 

(b.) Par and its compounds, and the following— anas, mas, vas (vddis), baC’- 
car, hepar, jubar, lar, nectar, and sal —also increase short. 

2. A, in the increment of nouns in s with a consonant before it, is 
short; as, daps, dap is; Arabs, Ardbis. 

3. Greek nouns in a and as (ddis, dnis, or dth) increase short; as, 
lampas, lampddis; Melas, Meldnis, poema, poemdtis. 

4. The following in ax increase short:— dbax, anthrax, Arctdphylax, Atax, 
Atrax, climax, cdlax, c&rax, and nycticdrax, dropax, fax, harpax, pdnax, smilax, 
and styrax .—The increment of Syphax is doubtful. 

Exceptions in Increments in O. 

1. 0, in the increment of neuter nouns, is short; as, 

marmor, majmidtns; corpus, corjidris; ibur, ihdris. But os (the mouth), ard 
the neuter of c^nnparatives, like their masculine and feminine, increase long. 
The increment of ddor is common. 

2. 0 IS short in the increment of Greek nouns in o or on, which, 
in the oblique .ases, have omicron, but long in those which have 
omega; as, 

Aedon, Aeddms ; Agdmemnon, Agdmemndnis: — Pldto, Pldtonis ; Sinon, Sinbnis ; 
Stcyon, Sicymis. Siuon, Orion, and A^gceon, have the increment common. 

5. (a.) In the increment of gentile nouns in o or on, whether 
Greek or barbaric, o is generally short; as, 

Mcicedo, Mdceddnis. So, Amazones, Adncs, Myrmiddnes, Santdnes, Saxdnea.^ 
Bendnes, Teutdnes, etc. 

(6.) But the following have o long:— Eburdnes, Lacones, lones, Nasamones, 
Buessones (or -tones), Vettones. Burgundibnes. Britones has the o common. 

4. Greek nouns in or increase short; as. Hector, Hectdris ; rhdor 
rhetcris ; Agenor, Agendris. 

6. Compounds of fnis, {nrovc), as tripvs, pdlypus, (Edipus, and also arbor 
Vidmcr, bos, compos, impos, and Upus, increase short. 

6. 0, in the increment of nouns in s with a consonant before it, is 
lliort; as. 


U28 PROSODY.—QUANTITY INCREMENT OF NOLNS. § 28R 


scrdbs, scrdbis; inops, indpis; DdUpes. But it is long it the increment of 
percops, Cycbrps, and hydrops. 

7. The increment of Allobrox, Qippddox, and prcecox, is also short. 

Exceptions in Increments in E. 

1. Nouns in en, enis (except Ihimen'), lengthen their increment 
as, Sirm. Sirenis. So, yl/o'cn/x, JVerlrKl.s, from Anio and Eei'io, or 
rather from the ol>solete A/iien and Nerienes. 

2. fltvrrs, li)rfiples, niaiisiies, 7n(-rces, and t/iiirs —also //>er, rer, lex, l ex, dice Ot 
dlex [hoi-) northtx and ctrrex—plrOs and scjfs —increase long. 

3. (jreek nouns in es and er (except aer and cether) increase long; 
as, maynes, rnaynetis ; crater, crater is. 

Excejytions in Increments in I. 

1. Nouns and adjectives in fic, increase long ; as, victrix, victrlcis 
felix, fellcis. 

Exo. Cdlix, Cilix, coxendix, filix, fornix, hysirix, Idrix, nix, pix, sdlix, strix 
and rarely sandix or sandyx, increase short. 

2. Vibex and the following nouns in is increase long:— dis, glis, lis, vis, lie- 
sis, Qulris, and Saninis. The increment of Psophis is common. 

3. Greek nouns, whose genitive is in inis increase long; as, del' 
phin, delphinis; Sdldmis, Sdldminis. 

Exceptions in Increments in U. 

1. Genitives in udis, uris, and utis, from nominatives in us, have 
the penult long; as, 

jTohis, pi'dndis; telhis, telluns; virttts, virtutis. Bxxt interctis, Ligus and pScus 
p^cudis, increase short. 

2. Fur, frux, (obs.), lux, and Pollux, increase long. 

Exceptions in Increments in Y. 

1. Greek nouns whose genitive is in ynis, increase long; as, Trd- 
chyn, Trdchynis. 

2. I'he increment of bombyx, Ceyx, gryps, and nwrmyr, is long; that of Be- 
hryx and sandyx is common. 

INCREMENTS OF THE PLURAL NUMBER. 

§ 2S8. 1. A noun in the plural number is said to increase^ 

when, in any case, it has more syllables than in the ablative singular! 

Rkmahk. When the ablative singular is wanting, or its place is supplied bv 
a form derived from a dillerent root, an ablative may, for this purpose, be as¬ 
sumed, by annexing tlie proper termination to the root of the plural. 

2. When a noun increases in the plural number, its penult is called the 
plural increment; as, sa in musdrum, no in ddmin&i'um, vi in iHpium and 
'ujjibus. 


§ 289, 290. PROSODY.—quantity—increment of verbs. 32& 


3. In plural increments, a, c, and o, are long, i and m are short; 
as, 

bdnarum, dnimabtis, rerum, rebus, gSnirdrum, ambobus; sermdnibus, Idcubus 
Thus, 

Appia, lons^Srum, tfirttur, regTtia riHrum. Stat. 8. 2, 2, 12. 

Sunt lacrjoiae rSrutn, et niortalia tangunt. Vir^. A. 1, 462. 

Atque alii, qu6ruyn comoedia pri^ica vlrdritm eet. Hot, S. 1, 4, 2. 

Fortubui egredior, veutisque J'ertntlbus ubus. Ovid. 


IV. INCREMENT OF VERBS. 


1. A verb is said to increase, when, in any of its parts, 
it lias more syllables than in the second person singular of the present 
indicative active; as, das, dd-tis; ddces, do-ce-mus. 

2. The number of increments in any part of a verb is equal to that 
of its additional syllables. In verbs, as in nouns, the last syllable ig 
never considered the increment. If a verb has but one increment, it 
is the penult; and this first increment, through all the variations of 
the verb, except in reduplicated tenses, continues equally distant 
from the first syllable. The remaining increments are numbered 
successively from the first; as. 


&-mas, 

1 

»-ma-mus, 

1 2 

&m-a-b^mus, 
12 3 

&m-a-v 6-ra-mu3. 


mo-nes, 

1 

mo-ne-tur, 

1 2 

mon-e-re-tur, 
12 3 

mon-e-bim-l-ni. 


au-dis, 

1 

au-di-tis, 

I 2 

au-di-e-bas, 

- 1 2 3 4 
au-di-e-b am-I-ni. 


8. A verb in the active voice piay have three increments; in the passive, it 
may have four. 

4. In determining the increments of deponent verbs, an active 
voice, formed from the same root, may be supposed. 

1 12 

Thus the increments of los-td-tur, Icet-d-hd-tur, etc., are reckoned from the 
supposed verb Iceto, Icelas. 

§ 290. In the increments of verbs, a, e, and o, are long; 
? and u are short; as, 

dmdre, mdnere, fudtote, vdlumus, rigebdmtni. Thus, 

Et rnntare pSres, et respondere parati. Vh^. E. 7, 5. 

Sic equidcm dfirehum aniiiio, rebarqut fiituruui. Id. A. 6, 690. 

Cuiiiqiie loqui poterit, uiiitrem fhr'iioU siiliite* Ooid, M. 9. 378. 

S^indMur incertuin Htudia in contraria vulgu.«. Vn^. A. 2, 39. 

Nob nuiuerus sUt/ius, et fruges couBumere natl. Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 27. 


(a.) Exceptions in Increments m A. 

The Jirst increment of do is short; as, damns, dabamns, ddret, dH 
%rus, circumdcre, circumdaldmus. 


28* 


B80 PROSODY.-QUANTITY—INCREMENT OF VERBS. § 290 

(b.) Exceptions in Increments in E. 

1. E before r is short in the first increment of all the present and 
imperfect tenses of the third conjugation, and in the, second inciement 
in beris and here; as, 

rlyire (infin. and imperat.), reg^rh or r^g^re (pres. ind. pass.), r^gSrem and 
rfgerer (imp. subj.); dmdbiris, dmdbere; tndneberis^ nionebere. 

Note 1. In vHim, veils, etc., from vblo, (second person, regularly vdlis, by 
syncope and contraction vis), i is not an increment, but represents the root 
vowel 6, and is therefore short; § 284, and § 178, 1. 

2. E is short before ram, rim, ro, and the persons formed from 
them; as, 

dindviram, dmdrSrat, dmdviHm, mbmi^rimus, rexiro, audlveritis. 

Note 2. In verbs which have been shortened by sjmcope or othervrise, e be¬ 
fore r retains its original quantity; as, Jteram, for Jteweram. 

For the short e before runt, in the perfect indicative, as, steiSrunt, see Systole, 
§ 307. 


(c.) Exceptions in Increments in I. 

1. /before v or s, in tenses formed from the second ioot, is long 

m, 

petivi, audivi, qiuesivit, divlsit, audivtmus, divistmus, audivSram. 

2. I is long, after the analogy of the fourth conjugation, in the final 
syllable of the third root of (jaudeo, arcesso, dlvldo, fdcesso, Idcesso, 
peto, (jucero, recenseo and ohiiviscor ; as, 

gdvisus, arcessltus, divisus, fdcesslUis, Idcessitus, petitus, qucesitus, recensltus, 
obUtus; ydvisurus, etc. 

3. I in the first increment of the fourth conjugation, except in 
tmus of the perfect indicative, is long; as, 

audlre, audirem, audltus, audlturus, pres, venimus, but in the perfect venimtis. 
So in the ancient forms in ibam, Ibo, of the fomth conjugation; as, nutiibai, 
Unibunt; and also m ibam and ibo, from eo. 

Note 3. When a vowel follows, the i is short, by ^ 283 ; as, audiunt, atu&e- 
b'im. 

4. /is long in the first and second persons plural of subjunctives in sim, sis, 
kV, ttc., (§ 162, 1,); as, simm, sUis, velimus, velltis, and their compounds; as, 
possii'ius, adslmus, mdllmus, nolhnus. So also in nbliio, ndllte, ndlitbte, after the 
analogy of the fourth conjugation. 

5. I in m, rimns and ritis, in the future perfect and perfect sub- 
junci i VC, is common; as, 

vldMs, Mart.,om(/e7-is, Hor.; vldbritis (Ovid), dederitis (Id.); fecerimus iC&- 
tuU.), eyerimus (Virg. ) 

(/.) Exceptions in Increments in U. 

U is long in the increment of supines, and of participles formed 
from the third root of the verb; as, 

sbcutus, sbldtus, sbcutu'^is, sSluturus. 


§291. 


PROSODY.—QUANTITY—PENULTS. 


33J 


nULES FOB THE QUANTITY OF PENULTIMATE AND ANIEPE. 

NULTIMATE SYLLABLES. 

I, PENULTS. 

§ 291 . 1. Words ending in news, tews, and icwriy shorten the 

penult; as, 

amdracuSy uEgyptidcxis, rusticus, iritlcum, viaticum. 

Exc.'pt DdcM^ tuirdens. dpdeus; amicus^ apneus, Jlcus^ mendicus, plcua, 
posticus^ pudlcuSj splcujf umolltcus^ vicus. 

2. AVords ending in ahrum, uhrum^ acrum^ and atrum, lengthen the 
penult; as, 

candchabrum, dMvhrum^ ]dvdcrum, verdtrum. 

3. Nouns in ca lengthen the penult.; as, 

apdlheca, chdea, lactuca, Idi'lca, phdea. 

Except dlica, brassica d^ca, fulica, manttca, pidtea^ pertica, scutlca^ pMldrtca^ 
tunica, vdmica; and also some nouns in ica derived from adjectives inlciw; 
as, fabi'ica, grammdUca, etc. So mdnicce. 

4. Patronymics in ades and ides shorten the penult; as, Atlantiddes^ 
Pridmides. 

Except those in ides which are formed from nouns in eus or es («f); as, 
Atrldes, from Atreus; Neoclides, from Ncodes; except, also, Arnphidrdides, 
Bdldes, Amydides, Lgcurgides. 

5. Patronymics and similar words in ais, eis, and ois, lengthen the 
penult; as, 

Achdis, Chryseis, Minbis. Except Phoedis and Thebdis. The penult of ATe- 
reis is common. 

6. AVords in do lengthen the penult; as, 

vddo, cedo, dulcedo, fomiido, rodo, testudo. Except eddo, divide, edo (to eat), 
comido, Macedo, mddo, sdlido, spado, tHpido. Rudo is common. 

7. AVords in idus shorten the penult; those in udus lengthen it; 
as, 

callldus, herbidtis, limjAdus, lividus, perfldus; crudus, ludus, nudus, sudus, udus. 
Except Jdus, J'ldus, inf Idas, nidus, sidus. 

8. Nouns in ga and go lengthen the penult; as, 

saga, collega, auriga, 'ruga; imago, cdligo, a>rugo. Except cdUga, osslfrdga 
tdga, pldga, (a region, or a net), fuga and its compounds, steya, ecloga, ego, 
karpdyo, ligo. 

V. \Vords in le, les, and Us, lengthen the penult; as, 

crin/lle, riantde, anclle; dies, miles, proles; anndlis, criidHis, clvilis, cu'ndu.-- 
Except /—verbals in His and bilis; as, agilis, /—adjectives in 

atilis; as, /—and also, indoles, sdbdles; periscelis, dapsihs, yrdetlia, 

^ Mills, pdrilis, sirn'Ms, sterilis, mugiUs, strigdis. 

10. AVords in elus, ela, elum, lengthen the penult; as, 

phdselus, querela, prelum. Except gilus, gelum, scilus. 

U. Diminutives in ohts, ola, olum, ulus, ula, ulum, also words in 


PKOSODT.—QUANTITY—PENULTS. 


532 


§ 291 


tins, and those m ulus, ula, and ulum^ of more than two fyllalles 
shorten the penult; as, 

urcedlus, J'iliOla, lectultis, ratiuncula^ corculum^ pabulum j rutllus garrilut^ 
f abula. Except dsilus. 

12. AVords in ma lengthen the penult; as, 

f ama, poema, rima^ pluina. Except dnima, cdma, decuma, lacrima, victima, 
hdrna. 

13. A vowel before final men or mentum is long; as, 

lernmen^ grdinen, crimen, Jtumen, jumentum, dtratnentum. Except tdmen, c<J« 
Idmen, I/ymcu, elemevtiim, ami a few verbal nouns derived from verbs of tha 
secoiul ami third coiijujjations; as, dlimeutum, ddcumen or ddcumentum, eniilSr 
mehlum, inOnunientuvi, riylmen, specimen, ieylmen, etc. 

14. Words ending in imus shorten the penult; as, 

dnlmus, declmus, finitlmus, foi'tisslmus, maximus. Except blmus, llmus, mimuB 
{plums, quddrimus, sh/ius, trimus, and two superlatives, imus and primus. 

Note. When an adjective ends in umtis for imus, the quantity remains the 
same; as, decumus, ojMmus, maxumus, for declmus, etc. 

15. A, e, o, and m, before final mus and mww, are long; as, 

rdmtts, remus, extrhnus, prdJ7i‘^, dumus, pdm7im, vdlemum. Except didmuSy 
balsdmum, cinndmum, dOmus, gldmus, humus, postumus, thalamus, tdmus, cdldmus, 
nimus. 

16. (a.) Words in na, ne, ni, and nis, lengthen the penult; as, 

Idna, drena, cdrina, mdtrdna, luna, mane, septei\i, octdni, Indnis, J^inis, immunis. 
Except advena, coltdna, ptlsdna, mlna, uena, bme, sine, cdnis, elms, juvenis ; and 
the following in ina, — buccina, ddmlna, jisdna, f hnlna, fusclna, lamina, mdchina, 
pdyina, patina, sardna, tibiclna, trutina: and in plur. dpince, mince, nundinae. 
So compounds of yeno; as, indiyena. 

(6.) Verbs in ino and inor shorten the penult; as, 

destino, fasdno, inqulno, slno, criminor. Except festino, prepino, sdyino, dpi- 
nor, and the compounds of clino; as, inclino, etc. 

17. (rt.) Adjectives in inns, when they express time, or indicate a 
material or an inanimate substance, shorten the penult; as, 

crastinus, diutlnus, pristhius, perendlnus : fdmnus, crddmis, hydcinthlnus, dda- 
mantinus, crystallinus, dledylnus, bombyclnus. Except mdtutinus, repentinus, ves~ 
ptrlitius. 

(h.) Other adjectives and words in inns and in inum lengthen the 
penult; as, 

canuuis, blnus, pdreyrlnns, mdrinus, clnndestlnus, shpinus: linum. Except 
dclnus, (isinus, coednus, coniinus, eminns, cdjdnnus, ddmlnus, fdduus, f dtidnus 
protinus, sinus, terminus, ydninus, cirdnus, minus, vdtidnus, suednum, fasdnum. 

18. A, e, 0 , and u, before final nus and num, are long; as, 

urbnmis, sd’enus, pntrbnus, promts, miinus, trlbunus, f anum, venenum, donum. 
Except anus, an old woman, yalbdnus, mdnus, oceanns, pldtdnus, ebmus, yinus, 
Ivniyemts, penus, tenus, I'duis, 67iu$, bdnus, sdnus, thrdnus; Idydnum, peuceddr 
Hum, jfOjHiuum, tyinjuinum, abrOtOnuin. 

19. Words ending in ha, bo, pa, and po, shorten the penult; as, 

fdba, juba, sylldba; bibo, ciibo, prdbo; dldpa, lupa, sedpha; crepo, partlclpa 
Except yleba, scriba, bubo, glubo, libo, ndbo, scribo, sipho, cepa, cupa, papa, pupa 
dpa, scopa, stupa; capo, repo, stipo. 


^ 291. 


PROSODY.—QUANTITY—PENULTS. 


333 


20. Words in aZ, ar, are, and aris, lengthen the penult; as, 
tribunal, vecth/nl: lupanar^ pulnnar; altdre, laqtieare ; navis. F^xoept Animal 

idfitnl, cubital., tdval, jubar, sular^ mare, bimdris, hiluris, canthdris, cappdris 
leans. 

21. Before final ro or ror, a and e are short; i, o, and w, are long 
as, 

dro, pdro, Jero, g?rn, sero, cel^ro, tempero, queror ; miror, splro, tiro; auetdro 
irnCi' 0 ,dro; euro, duro, flgiiro; luror. Except di’cldro, /na'O, spero; fdro, 
ro7, sSi'or, v6ro, jfuro, sdturo ; antiderivatives from genitives increasing short 
auguror, deedro, memdro, murmuro, etc.; from augur, auguris; deeus, died- 
ris, etc. 

22. Before final rus, ra, rum, e is short; the other vowels are 
long; as, 

me rum, nidrus, hedera, sdrum, cetdrum; cams, mirus, mdrus, murus, gyrus, 
dra, s/nra, dra, ndtum, Idrum. 

Except, 1. austerus, gdlerus, plerus, prdeerus, sincerus, serus, sederus, verus, 
crater a, cera, pera, panthera, state ra. 

Exc. 2. barbdrus, cammdrus, edmurus, canthdrus, chdrus, fdrus, hellebdrus, 
nurus, dpipdrus, dvipdrus, phosjdidrus, pirns, sdtyrus, sedrus, spdms, tartdrxis, 
tdrus, zephyrus; amphdra, anedra, cithdra, hdra, lyra, mdra, purpura, philyra, 
pyra, sdtira; /drum, gdrum, pdrum, suppdrum. 

23. Adjectives in osus lengthen the penult; as, 

fumdsus, vlndsus. 

24. Nouns in etas and itas shorten the penult; as, 
pietas, clvltas, bdnitas. 

25. Adverbs in tim lengthen the penult, those in iter and itus 
snorten it; as, 

stdtim, (constantly), rlnhm, acriter, Junditus. Except s<dn*»i, (im¬ 

mediately), offdtim. 

26. (a.) Words in ates, iiis, oils, and in ata, eta, ota, uta, lengthen 
the penult, as, 

vdtes, pendtes, vitis, mitis, edrydtis, Icdridtis, pirdta, rneta, poeta, dluta, ctciita. 
Except sitis, pdtis, drapeta, ndta, rdta. 

(b.) Nouns in ita shorten the penult; as, 
dmita, ndiita, orbita, semita. Except pitulta. 

27. Nouns in atum, itum, utuin, lengthen the penult; as, 

lupdtnm, dzdnltum, verutum. Except defrutum, pulpitum, petdritum, lutum 
(/iiud) compltum. 

28. Nouns and adjectives ending in tus lengthen the penult; as, 

barbdtus, grdtus, bdletus, fdeetus, crmltus, peritus, leyrdtus, tdtus, argutus, hir 
sutus. Except edtiis, Idtus, (-eris), impetus, nietus, vdgetus, vetm; drdielitus, digi¬ 
tus, grdtiitus, kdlilus, hospitus, servitus, spirit us ;,antiddtus^ ndfus, quotas, tdtus 
(so great); arbutus, put us; inclytus; and ^derivatives from perfect participles 
having a short penult; as, exereitus, habitus. 

29. A penultimate vowel before v is long; as, 

c\lva, dliva, dives, ndvis, civis, pdpdver, pdvo, privo, drum, prdvus, cestvni, 
fugitiviiS. Except avis, brevis, grdvts, levis, dvis; edvo, grdvo, juvo, Idvo, lero. 
’^vo; dviis, cams, fdvus ndvus, favor, pavor, ndvem. 


B34 


PKOSODT.-QUANTITY-ANTEPENULTS. § 292, 293 

30. Words ending in dex^ dix^ mex^ nix^ lex, rex, lengthen the 
penult; as, 

codea, judexj Iddix, radix; cimex, pumex; junix; ilex; carex, murex- 
Except culex, silex, rumex. 

II. ANTEPENULTS 

§ 992. 1. /is short in diminutives in iculus and icellus (a, um,') 

whether nouns or adjectives; as, 

colliculus, dulciallus, craticula, pellicula, molltcellus. Except words in which 
the preceding vowel is short; as, cullcula, cdnicula: or iu which i is long in the 
primitive; as, cornicula, from curnix, -ids. 

2. Numerals in ginti, ginta, eni, and esimus, lengthen the antepe¬ 
nult; as, 

viginti, quddrdginta, triceni, quingudgesimus. 

3. 0 and u before final lentus are short; as, 
vindlentus, frauddlentus, pulverulentus, truculentus. 

4. A vowel before final nea, neo, nia, nio, nius, nium, is long; as, 

drdnea, linea, cdneo, munia, punio, Fdvonius, patrlmonium. Except castdnea 
tinea, mdneo, mineo, mdneo, seiieo, teneo, ignominia, luscinia, venia, Idnio, rmic, 
ingenmm, genius, sdiio, sent um; words in cinium, as, lendcmium; and deriva¬ 
tives in onius, wlien o in the root of the primitive is short; as, Agdmemndnius 
from Agamemnon, -dnis. 

5. 'Words ending in areo, arius, arium, erium, orius, orium, lengthen 
the antepenult; as, 

drto, cihCirius, plantdrium, dictrrium, censdrins. tentorium. Except cdreo, vd- 
trius, di'siderium, impenum, nulgisterium, 7ninisterium. 

6. Adjectives in aliens, atilis, lengthen the antepenult; as, 
dqudticus, plumdtllis. Except some Greek words in dtlcus; as, grammdllcus 

7. / before final tudo is short; as, 
aUitudo, longiiudo. 

8. Verbals in bilis lengthen a but shorten i in the antepenult; as, 
dmdbilis, mirdbilis; credibllis, terrlbilis. In hdbilis, b belongs to the root. 

9. U before v is short, (except in Juverna') ; as, 
juvdnis, Juvenalis, jUvenililas, Jluvius, diluvium. 


III. PENULT OF PROPER NAMES. 

§ 993 . 1. Patrials and proper names of more than two sylla 


penult;— 





ba. 


0,6 

ges. 

dus,t6 

ca,’ 

le,4 

on,7 

les. 

eus,i4 

la,2 

ne.* 

os,8 

lis,io 

gus,i5 

be. 

re,‘ 

er,9 

bus. 

1US,16 

ce,8 

al, 

mas, 

cus,ii 

mus,U 

che. 

il. 

ras, 

chu8,i2 

pbus,!** 


ena,i9 

anes, 

enes, 

aris, 

QCIO 210 


arus, 

erus,2i 

yrus, 

asus, 

osus. 


atns,22 

irus,23 

OtUB.24 


§293 


PROSODY.-QUANTITY-PENULTS. 


836 


Exceptiom. 

I'TasIca.—2p;rtph}'la, Messilla, PliTlomela, Suadela.—- 
*Kri})hyle. Neobule, Pt-riinele.—Sfnripe.—®Cartliago, Cupavo, (’upTdo, 
Origo, 1 licano.—"AliTMnon, Aiitliedoii, Ciialcedoii, lasoii, I’liileinoti, I’olype* 
mon, Sarpydiiii, '1 liermbdoii.—^(jercjTos, l’<’'])iiretlios, Pliarsalos, Stalphos.— 
^Mi loager.—I'Miessalis, Kiiineli'^, .luvt'iialis, Martialis, Phaselis, Stvinphillis.— 
i*Beiiacus, Caieus, (jrfitiieus, Nuinicus, Trivlcus.—i^0|iliiuciius.—l^^^bvdaa.— 
•‘•Ca[)linreu'', Kiiipeus, Prometheus, Plioroiieus, Sahnoiieus, Olleus.—iSCethe- 
^is .—^'^Nduus in -clus, in -olus (except .Eolus, Naubolus), in -bulus, (excepl 
Plbiilus) Huinelus, (Jietulus, lulus, Massylus, Orbeliis, Pharsalus, Sardanapfi^ 
lus, Stymphalus .—^~Siiine in -deiims and -plieimis; as, Acadeinus, I’blyplio- 
nms.—*8SerTplius.—'yAlemena, Atlieiise, Ciimena, Fidena, Messeiui, Murona, 
^lyceiite.—^"Amasis.—^'Hbmerus, Iberus.—^-Aratus, Cajratus, Torquatus.— 
2ttlleraclitus, llermapbroditus.—’■^Buthrutus. 

2. Proper names of more than two syllables, found in the poets 
with the following terminations, lengthen the penult:— 


ana,i 

sa. 

num,7 

tas, 

des,® 

nus,i2 

urus. 

etus,^® 

ina,2 

ta,4 

turn. 

pus,^® 

irus. 

esus,'5 

utus, 

oua,* 

tse,® 

or,® 

tes,i® 

isus, 

ytus,U 

yna, 

ene,® 

nas. 

tis,ii 

orus,^4 

ysus. 

vus. 


Exceptions. 

hSequana.—^yifttlna, Proserpina, Riispina, Sarsina.—SAxona, Matrona.- 
^Divluiata, Procliyta, Sannata, Lanitha.—SQjiljitge, Jaxam^tae, Massagetse, 
Macetse, Saur6mat».—^ciyuieiie, lieleue, ^lelpomene, Nyctimene.—"Arlml- 
num, Drepanutn.—^Ntimitor.—'^Miltiades, l*ylades, Sbtades, Tliucy'lules; por- 
'xonyinics tn -des, 2U1, 4,) and plunds in -ades. — '^Antii)liates, Charites, Fu- 
rybates, leliiiol^ates, Kuergt tes, ^lassagetes, nritl ail names in -crates. — I'Der- 
cetis.— '-Apidaiuis, Aia’>iiu>, Carami.', Clirysdgbuus, Cimiiius, Clyinemis, Con- 
canus, I>ardanus, Diadumeiuis, Kariiuis, Kiidaiius, 1 uciiuis, Helenas, Libaiius, 
Morini, Mycoiius, Xebrbplibiuis, Oleiuis, l*ericlyineuus, Khodaiius, Saiitbnus, 
Secjuani, Stepliaiius, Telegdiius, Terminus, <ind names in -^pmis and -xenu.s.— 
li^CLdipus. — I'il’acorus, Bosporus, aiid names in -chorus and -phorus; as, Stesi- 
chorus. Phosphorus.—i^Ephesus, Vogesus, Volesus.—i^lapetus, Taygetus 
Venetus.—^"dilpytus, Anytus, Fmrytus, Hippolytus. 

3. The penultimate vowel of the following proper names, and ad¬ 
jectives derived I'rom proper names, though followed by a vowel, is 
long. See § 283, I. Kxc. 6. 

iEneas, iEtlnon, Achelous, Achilleus, Alcyoneu? Alexandria, Aloeus, Al- 
pheus, Amineus, Ampli'araus, Amphigenia, Xinpb...:)!!, Amythaon, Anon, An- 
chiseus, Atlanteus, Aiitiochia, Bioneus, Caisarea, Ciilaurea, Calliopea, Cassio 

f ea, Cleantheas, Cydoneus, Cymodocea, Cytherea, Darius (-eus), Ueidamia, 
)idyinaon, Dionietleus, Dollchaoii, Fchion, Kleiis, KndymiCaieus, Fn/o, Fous, 
Erebeus, Frectlieus, (ialatea, Uiganteus, lleraclea (-eus), Hippodamia, Hype- 
fiOn, llitliyia, hiifion, Iblaus, Iphigeiiia, Ixion, Laoch'wnia, Lalbus, Le>bou3, 
Ljl'caon, ^iachaon, Mausblewn, Medea, Menelau>, Metliion, Mvrtdus, Ophion, 
O.'ion, Orirhyla, Orj)lieus, Pallaiiteiur. '-us), I’aiidion, I’a])hagea, Peneus, Pen- 
Uifisllea, PhcebSus, Poppea, Prutesilaus, i’yreneus, SardCus, Thalia. 

Note. Eus in the tern "nation of Greek proper names, is commonly a dipn- 
ihoti"; as. ALctas. iXeneus^ Orpheus^ Peltus, Perseus, Prdtens, Theseus, Tydeus, 
which' are dissvilabies; Briureus, Enipht^is, Macdreus, Ttjphdeus, whicli are tri¬ 
syllables, IdAmeneus, etc. Of. ^ 283, Fxc. 6, Note 2. But in those which in 
'grreek are written aoc (eios), eus forms two syllables; as, Alpheiis. So also in 
a/^jectives in eus, whether of Greek or Latin origin; as, Ei-ibeUs, EreciheVs 
Orpheiis; 'lur^iis, liynHis. 


536 PROSODY.-QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. §294,295 

QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 


I. VOWELS. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

§ 204. (d.) All monosyllables, except enclitics, ending in a 

vowel, are long; as, 

a, cfi, dd, std, e, de, me, te, se, ne, re, i, ft, hi, qui, ni, si, 0 or oh, dd, prS, 
prCh, quo, std, tu. 


POLYSYLLABLES. 

A Jitial. 

1. A final, in words declined, is short; as, musd, templdy cdpi^ 
td, Tyded. Thus, 

Musa mlhi causas memora; quo numlne laeso.... Virg. A. 1, 8. 

Exc. A final is long in the ablative of the first declension, and in 
the vocative of Greek nouns in as and es ; as, 

Mwsd, fundd,; 0 uEned, 0 Palld, 0 Anchisd. 

2. A final, in words not declined, is long; as, dmd, fnistrd, 
anted, ergd, intrd. Thus, 

Extr& fortunam est quidquid donatur Smlcls. Mart. Epig. 6, 42, 7. 

Exc. A final is short in eid, itd, quid, and in putd, when used adverbially, 
in the sense of ‘for example.’ It is sometimes short in the preposition contra, 
and in tuimerals ending in yinta; as, tnyhita, etc. In posten, it is common. 

A final is also short in the names of Greek letters; as, alpha, beta, etc., and 
in tdrdlanidrd, the imitated sound of the trumpet. 

E final. 

§ 29^. E final, in words of two or more syllables, is short; 
as, ndte, patre, ipse, curve, regere, nempe, ante. Thus, 

InctpS, parvS puer, rlsu cognoscBrS matrem. Tirg. E. 4, 60. 

Remark. The enclitics -yue, -ne, -ve, -ce, -te, -pte, etc., as they are not used 
alone, have e short, according to the rule; as, neque, hujuscS, suapti Of. 
^ 294, (a.) 

Exc. 1. E final is long in nouns of the first and fifth declensions 
as, 

idallldpc, Tydldc, fkle. So also in the compounds of re and die; as, qudre, 
hddif’, pr'idie, ptostndie, qudtldie, and in the ablative fame, originally of the fifth 
declension. 

Exc. 2. E final is long in Greek vocatives from nouns in -es, of the third 
declension; as, Achille, Hippdmene; and in Greek neuters plural; as, cetS, mils 
peldye, Tempe. 

Exc. 3. In the second conjugation, e final is long in the second 
person singular of the imperative active; as, ddce, mdne ; —but it i> 
•ome times short in cdue, vale and vide. 


§ 296-298. PROSODY.—quanti-et of final syllables. 33y 


Exc. 4. E final is lonw in adverbs formed from adjectives of the 
•econd declension; as, 

j)ldcide, pulchre, valde for vdlXdJe^ maxXme; but it is short in mdli, infer ni^ 
and mpei'ne. 

Exc. 5. Eere, ferme^ and oAe, have the final e long. 

1 Jinal. 

§ 996 . I fiinal is long; as, domin% fili^ cldssl, doceriy si* 
Thus, 

Quid dSminl ficient, audent cum talia furea. Virg. E. 8,16. 

Exc. 1. (a.) / final is common in mthi, tibi, stbi, tbi, and ubi. 

(b.) In ublque and commonly in ibidem it is long, but in ubivis and ubinam it 
Is short.—(c.) In nisi, quasi, and cui, when a dissyllable, i final is common, 
but usually short. In utinam and utlque, and rarely, also, in uii, it is short. 

Exc. 2. /final is short in the dative singular of Greek nouns of the third de¬ 
clension, which increase in the genitive; as, Pallddi, MlnMdi, Tethyi. 

Exc. 3. / final is short in the vocative of Greek nouns in -is; as, AUsdly 
Daphnl, Pari. But it is long in vocatives from Greek nouns in -is, («f) -entos; 
as, Simdi, Pyrdi. 

Exc. 4. /final is short in Greek datives and ablatives plural in -si, or, be¬ 
fore a vowel, -sin; as. Dryad, heroid, Trbddn. 

O final, 

§ 90T. 0 final, in words of two or more syllables, is com¬ 
mon ; as, Virgo, dmo, quando. Thus, 

ErgH metu cSipIta Scylla est Inlmlca pitemo. Virg. Cir. 880. 

Ergd solliCitaB tu causa, pecunia, vit» es ! Prop. 8, 6,1. • 

Exc. 1. 0 final is long in the dative and ablative singular; as, dbmXnd, regnOy 
bond, sud, illo, e6. 

Exc. 2. 0 final is long in ablatives used as adverbs; as, certd, fcdsd, mdrild, 
vulgd, edj qud ; and also in omnind, in ergd, ‘ for the sake of,’ and in the inter¬ 
jection w. 

Remark 1. The final o of verbs is almost always long in poets of the Augus¬ 
tan age. 

Rem. 2. In poets subsequent to the Au^stan age, final o in verbs, in ge- 
runas, and in the adverbs ddeo, idea, ergo, dro, vero, porro, retro, immo, i^irco, 
gibito, and postremo, is sometimes short. 

Exc. 3. 0 final is short in dto, ilUco, prdfecto, and the compounds of mddo; 
as, dummddd, postmddd, etc.; and in igo and h&mo it is more frequently short 
than long. 

Exc. 4. 0 final in Greek nouns written with an omfiga (*) is long; as, CUd, 
Dido, Athd, and Andrdged, (gen.) 


U fincU, 

§ 998 * 1 . U final is long; as, vultu, cornu, Panthu, dUctUy 
iiu. Thus, 

Vultu, quo coelom tempostatesqoe sdr^nat. Ftrg. A. 1, 266. 

28 


B38 PROSODY.—QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. § 299 

£xc. Indi and ancient forms of in and non, have u short, contentu' 
ihort in terminations in us short, when s is removed by elision; as, Z7 is also 
for contmius. See ^ 305, 2. 


Y final. 

2, T final is short; as, Mdly, Tlphy. Thus, 

M5ly T5cant superi: nigra radice tenetur. Ovid. M. 14, 292. 

Exg, r in the dative Telhy, being formed by contraction, is long. ^ 283, III. 

II. CONSONANTS. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

§ 300 1. Monosyllabic substantives ending in a consonant 

are long; all other monosyllables ending in a consonant are 
short; as, 

s6l, mr, fur, jus, splen, ver,fdr, Idr, Ndr, par, Ser,fds, mas, res, pes, Dls, gliB. 
Its. vlsJIOs, mds, ros, Trds, os, (oris), dos, grus, rus, tus; — nec, in, an, db, dd, quia, 
quis, quvL, et; as, 

Ipse d5cet qu'id SLgam. F&s est it ab hoste doceri. Ovid. M. 4, 428. 

Vir adeo frondi nemorum, vir utile silvis. Virg. 0. 2, 323. 

Note. The rules for the quantity of final syllables ending in a consonant 
imply that the consonant is suigle, and that it is preceded by a single vowel. 
If otherwise the syllable will be long by ^ 283, IV. and II. 

Exc. 1. C&r, fel, niel, pOl, vir, ds (gen. ussis), and probably pcw (mtfw), are 
short. 

Exc. 2. En, non, quin, sin, eras, plus, cur, and par, are long: so also are 
particles and pronouns ending in c, except nec, which is short, and the pro¬ 
nouns hie and hoc, in the nominative and accusative, which are common. 

Exc. 3. Monosyllabic plural cases of pronouns and forms of verbs in aa, 
and is, are long; as, has, quds, hos, nos, vos, quos, his, quis /— das, Jles, stis, ig. 
fis, sis, vis ; except es from sum which is short. 

Exc. 4. The abridged imperatives retain the quantity of their root; as, die, 
iuc, from dico, duco; jdc, fir, from fdcio, fdro. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

D, L<, N, R, T, Jinal. 

2 Final syllables ending in d, I, n, r, and t, are short ; aa 
idad, consul, carmen, pater, caput. Thus, 

Obatupuit simul ipse, simul perc.ulsua Achates. Virg. A. 1, 613. 

Nomen ArTSnium SIculas impleverat urbea. (Mdd. F. 2, 93. 

Dum Idqudr, liorrCr, hibet; parsque est mfimlnisse doloris. Id. M. 9, 291. 

Exc. 1. E in lien is long. 

Exc. 2. In Greek nouns, nominatives in n (except those in on 
written with an omicron), masculine or feminine accusatives in an or 
in, and genitives plural in on, lengthen the final syllable ; as, 

TiUin, Orion, j^irndn, Anchisen, Callidpen; eplgrammdtdn. 


I 300. PROSODY.—QUANTITY OP FINAL SYLLABLES. 33J) 


Exc 3. (ether, and nouns in er which form their genitive in 
im, lengthen the final syllable; as, 

crater, soter. So also Iber; but the compound Celttber has sometimes in 
Martial its last syllable short. 

Remark. A final syllable ending in t, may be rendered long by a diphthong, 
by contraction, by syncopation, or by position; as, aut, obit lor dlnit, f uTndt, 
for Jmndvit, dmdnt. “See § 283, U. lU. iV., and § 162, 7, {d.) 

M Jinal. 

Note Final m with the preceding vowel is almost always cut off, when 
the next word begins with a vowel. See Ecthlipsis, ^ 305, 2. 

3. Final syllables ending in m, when it is not cut off, are short; 
as, 

Quam laudas, pluma? eseto num fi.dest hSnor Idem. Hot. S. 2, 2, 28. 

Remark. Hence^ in composition the final syllables of cum and dreum are 
short; as, edmedo, dreumdgo. 


C Jinal. 

4. Final syllables ending in c are long; as, dUc, illic, istdCy 
illuc. Thus, 

lUlc indocto primum se exercuit arcu. Tib. 2,1, 69. 

Exc. The final syllable of donSc is short; as, 

DdnSc €ris felix multos num^rabis Simicos. Ovuf. Trist. 1 9, 6. 


AS, ES, and OS, Jinal. 

§ 300 . Final syllables in as, es, and os, are long; as, 

musds, pietds, dmds, JEneds, guies, sermmes, dies, Peneldpes, duceniies, mdnes, 
\6nds, viros, ddminds. Thus, 

Has autem terr&s, It^llque hanc lltoris 6ram. Tirg. A. 3, 396. 

Si m5do dis UUb cultus, slmllSsque pSLratus. Ovid. M. 6, 454. 

Exc. 1. (a.) AS. As is short in anas, in Greek nouns whose genitive ends 
m ddis or ados-, as, Areas, Fallas; and in Greek accusatives plural of the third 
declension; as, herdds, lampddds. 

{b ) As is short also in Latin nouns in as, ddos, formed like Greek patronym¬ 
ics; as, Appids. 

Exc. 2. ES. (a.) Final es is short in nouns and adjectives of the 
third declension which increase short in the genitive; as, hosp&f, 
limes, hd>es ; gen. hospilis, etc. 

(b.) But it is long in dbies, dines, paries, Ceres, and pes, with its compounds 
yyi'nipes, sdnijies, etc. 

(c.) Es, in the present tense of sum and its compounds, and in the preposi¬ 
tion penes, is short. 

(d.) Es is short in Greek neuters in es; as, cdcoetMs, and in Greek nomma- 
fives and vocatives plural from nouns of the third declension, which increase 
In the genitive; as, Aredd^s, Trees, Amazdnes; from Areas, Areddis, etc. 

Exc. 3. OS. (a.) Os is short in compds, impds, and ds (ossis), with its com- 
ftoond exds 


340 PSOSODT.—QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. § 301 


(5.) Os is short in Greek nouns and cases written in the original with onv 
crm; as(l) in all neuters; chads, epds, Argds; (2) in all nouns of the second 
declension; as, Ilids, Tyrds, Delds; except those whose genitive is in 0, (Greek 
»); as, Aihds, gen. Alhd; (3) in genitives singular of the third declension; aa, 
PaUmds, TeOiyds, from Pallds and Tethys. 

IS, US, and YS, Jincd, 

§ 301. Final syllables in iis, and ys, are short; as, 

turris, millIts, mills, amdtls, amabls, mdgis; pectus, bdnus, ejus, amdmus, rursus 
iinus; Cdpys, Itys. Thus, 

Non apis inde tulit collector sedula flores- Ovid. M. 13, 928. 

Sirius aut citius sedem prdpiramus ad unam. Id. M. 10, 33. 

At Capys, et quorum melior senteutia menti. Virg. A. 2, 36. 

Exo. 1. IS. (a.) Is is long in plural cases; as, 

musts, nobis; omnis, urbls, (for omnes, urbes); quis, (for queis or qutbus). So 
also in the adverbs gratis, ingrdtls, and fdrts, which are in reality datives or 
ablatives plural. 

Et liquid! simul ignis; ut his exordia prlmls. Virg. A. 6, 33. 

Quls ante ora patrura TrSjse sub moenibus altis. Id. A. 1, 95. 

Non omnis arbusta juvant, humllesque myrlcae. Id. E. 4, 2. 

Adde tot egregias urlns, 5perumque ikborem. Id. G. 2,156. 

(5.) is is long in the nominative of nouns whose genitive ends in Itis, lim, at 
tmtis; as, Samnis, Sdldmls, Simols. 

(c.) Is is long in the second person singular of the present indica¬ 
tive active of the fourth conjugation; as, 

audls, nescls. So also in the second persons, fls, is, sis, vis, veils, and their 
compounds; as, adsis, possls, quamvis, mails, noils, etc. Cf. § 299, 1, Exc. 3. 

' (rf.) Ris, in the future perfect and perfect subjunctive, is common; as, 
vhderis. 

Exc. 2. US. (a.) Us is long in nouns of the third declension which 
increase long, and in the genitive singular, and the nominative, ac¬ 
cusative, and vocative plural of the fourth declension, (§ 89, Hem., 
and § 283, HI.) ; as, 

tellus, virtiis, incus;—frucius. But pdlus, with the m short, occurs in Horace, 
Alt. Poet. 65. 

(b.) Us is long in Greek nouns written in the original with the diphthcng out 
otif)whether in the nominative or genitive; as, nom. Amdthus, Opus, (Ediput, 
trdpus, Panihus; gen. Didus, Sapphus. But compounds of pus (nrobs), when of 
the second declension, have us short; as, polypus. 

Note. The last syllable of every verse, (except the anapsestic and 
the Ionic a mindre), may be either long or short at the option of the 
poet. 

Remark. By this is meant, that, although the measure require a long syl- 
'able, a short one may be used in its stead; and a long syllable may be uset 
where a short one is required; as in the following verses, 'where the short syl. 
[able ma stands instead of a long one, and the long syllable cu instead oi a 
short one:— 

Sangulneaque m&nu crepitantia concutit H,rm&. Ovid. M. 1,148. 

Non oget l^uri jaculis. nec arcu. ilar. Od. 1, 22, 2. 


§802. 


PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—FEET. 


841 


VERSIFICATION. 


FEET. 


§ 30^. A foot is a combination of two or more syllables of 
a certain quantity. 

Feet are either simple or compound. Simple feet consist of two 
or three syllables; compound feet of four. 

I. SIMPLE FEET. 

1. Of two Syllables. 

Spondee, .two long,-; as,. .funduni 

Pyri'hic, .two short, w; as,. Dius. 

Trochee, or choree, .a long and a short, — as,. drmd. 

Iambus, .a short and a long, w —; as,. irdnt. 


2. Of three Syllables. 


41 oaxwx u cxx. 

Tribracn, .three short. 


Bacchlus, .a short and two long. 


jProceleusmatic, .a double Pyrrhic, ^ •>_ 

Ditrochee, .a double trochee, — — 

Diiambus, .a double iambus, — >- 

Greater Ionic, .a spondee and a Pyrrhic, 

Smaller Ionic, .a Pyrrhic and a spondee, 

Chcyriambus, .a choree and an iambus, 

intispast, .an iambus and a choree. 

First epitHt, .an iambus and a spondee. 

Second epitrit, .a trochee and a spondee. 

Third epitrit, .a spondee and an iambus, 

Fimrth ejntrit, .a spondee and a trochee, 

Fh'st pmm, .a trochee and a Pyrrhic, 

Second pceon, .an iambus and a Pyrrhic, 

Third pceon, .a Pyrrhic and a trochee, 

fourth pceon, .a P 3 'Trhic and an iambus. 

Remark. Those feet are called isocfironous, which consist of equal times 

the spondee, the dactyl, the anapaest, and the proceleusmatic, onejong time 
jeing considered equal to two shon. 

29* 


- w w;as,. 

.corpdrd. 

- w —; as,. 

. ddmtni. 

3,. 

.fdciri. 


. contends,nt. 

nort j ^ ^ • 

.dmdrS. 

mg, — ^ ; as,. 

.cdstitds. 

'-; as,. 

. Cdidnes. 

---;as,. 

. RdmdnUs. 

FEET. 


; as,. 

. conpxerunt. 

- as,. 

.hdmlnibiis. 

- w: as...... 

.cdmprdbdvit. 

? as,. 

.dmdverdnt. 

-w w; as,.. 

.cdrrexlmiis. 

^ --; as,.. 

. prdperdbdni. 

—w —; as,.. 

.terrf leant. 

--w; as,.. 

. ddheestssS. 

^-; as,.. 

.dmdverunt. 


.condltdres. 

___; as,. . 

.dlscordtas. 

-as,.. 

. ddduxistis. 

— w ^ w; as,.. 

. iempbribus. 

w —^ as,.. 

.pdientld. 

w w — as,.. 

.dnimdtus. 

as,.. 

. cfleritds. 










































BiS PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-METRE-VERSES. § 303, 304 


METRE. 

§ 80tl. 1. Metre is an arrangement of syllables and feet 

according to certain rules. 

2. In this general sense, it comprehends either an entire verse, a part of a 
verse, or any number of verses. 

8. Metre is divided into dactylic^ anapcefitic, iambic, trochaic, chori- 
amlic, and Ionic. These names are derived from the original or 
fiindamental foot employed in each. 

4. A metre or measure, in a specific sense is either a single foot, 
or a combination of two feet. In the dactylic, choriambic, and Ionic 
metres, a measure consists of one foot; in the other metres, of two 
feet. Two feet constituting a measure are sometimes called a syzygy. 

VERSES. 

§ 804 :. A verse is a certain number of feet, arranged in a 
regular order, and constituting a line of poetry. 

1. Two verses are called a distich; a half verse, a hemistich. 

2. Verses are of different kinds, denominated sometimes, like the 
different species of metre, from the foot which chiefly predominates 
in them; as, dactylic, iambic, etc.;—sometimes from the number of 
feet or metres which they contain; as, sendrius, consisting of six feet; 
octdndnus, of eight feet; manometer, consisting of one measure; dime¬ 
ter, of two; trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter; —sometimes 
from a celebrated author who used a particular species; as, Sapphic 
Anacreontic, Alcaic, Asclepiadic, Glyconic, Phaloecian, Sotadic, Archi- 
iochian, Alcmanian, Pherecratic, Aristophanic, etc., from Sappho, Ana¬ 
creon, Alcceus, Asclepiddes, Glycon, Phalcecus, Sotddes, Archilochus, 
Aleman, Phereerdtes, Aristophdnes, etc.—and sometunes from tha 
particular uses to which they were applied; as, the prosodiac, from 
its use in solemn processions, the paroemiac, from its frequent use in 
oroverbs. 

3. A verse, with respect to the metres which it contains, may be 
Vmplete, deficient, or redundant. 

(1.) A verse which is complete is called acatalcctic. 

(2.) A verse which is deficient, if it wants one syllable at the end, 
is called catalectic; if it wants a whole foot or half a metre, it is 
o^lled hr achy catalectic. 

(3.) A verse which wants a syllable at the beginning, is .called 
acephalous. 

(4.) A verse which has a redundant syllable or foot, is called 
hypercatalectic or hypermeter 

4. Hence, the complete name of every verse consists of three 
terms—the first reierrin^ to the species, the second to the number oj 
Vietress and the third to the ending ; as, the dactylic trimeter catalectic. 


§ 305. 


PROSODY.—VERSIFICATIOX-FIGURES. 


343 


5. A verso or portion of a verse of any kind (measured from tht 
bejjinnin^) whi^h contains three half feet, or a foot and a half, i^ 
called a trihemXmeris ; if it contains five half feet, or two feet and a 
half, it is called a penthemimeris ; if seven half feet, or three feet and 
a half, a hepthemimer'is ; if nine half feet, or four feet and a half, an 
ennehemimeria. A portion of a verse consisting of one whole metre 
and a half, is called a hemiolius^ as being the half of a trimeter. 

Note. The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called its place. 

6. Scanning is the dividing of a verse into the feet of which it is 
composed. 

Remark. In order to scan correctly, it is necessary to know the quantity 
of each syllable, and also to understand the following poetic usages, which arc 
aometimes called 


FIGURES OF PROSODY. 

SYNALCEPHA. 

§ 300. 1. Synalcepha is the elision of a final vowel cr 

diphthong in scanning, when the following word begins with a 
vowel. 

Thus, terra antiqua is read terr' antiqua; Darddnldce infensi, Darddntd’ in- 
fensi ; vento hue, vent' hue. So, 

Quidve mSror? si omnes dno ordine hSibetis Achivos. Virg. A. 2,102. 

Which is scanned thus— 

Quidve mSror? s’ omnes un’ ordin’ hSLbetis Aebivos. 

(1.) The interjections O, heu, ah, proh, vcc, va/i, are not elided; 
as, 

O et de LS-tiSi O et de gente.S&bIna. Ovid. M. 14, 832. 

Remark. But 0, though not elided, is sometimes made short; as, 

Te Corydon O Alexi; trabit sua quemque voluptas. Virg. E. 2, 66. 

(2.) Other long vowels and diphthongs sometimes remain unelided, in which 
tase, when in the thesis of a foot, they are commonly made short; as, 

Victor Jipud rapldum Simoenta sub IliS alto. Virg. A. 5, 261. 

Anni tempore eo f/ul Etesicp e.sse feruntur. Lucr. 6, 717. 

Ter sunt conatt imponere Pelid Ossam. Virg. G. 1, 281. 

Glaucd et Pandpece, et Inoo Mellcertae. Id. G. 1, 436. 

(3.) Rarely a short vowel, also, remains without elision; as, 

Et vera incessu pituit de&. Hie ubi matrem.... Virg. A. 1, 406. 

^4.) Synalcepha in a monosyllable occasionally incurs; as. 

Si ad vitiilam spectas, nihil est, quod pocula laades. Virg. E. 8, 48. 

For sjmaloepha at the end of a line, see Synapheia, § 307, 3. 

ECTHLIPSIS. 

2. Ecthlipsis is tlie elision of a final m with the preceding 
rowel, when the following word begins with a vowel. Thus, 

0 Curas hSmlnwOT, 0 quantum est in rebus inane! Pers. 1,1. 


344 


PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-FIGURES. 


§306. 


Which is thus scanned— 

0 Curas homin’ 0 quant’ est In rebus inane. 

Monstn(m horrendum, Informe, ingens, cui lumen Sldemptnm. Virg. A. 3 068. 

(1.) This elision ■was sometimes om.tted by the early poets; as, 

Corpdrutn officium est quTniam premere omnia deorsum. Lucr. 1, 363. 

See S 299, 2, 

(2.) Final s, also, with the preceding vowel, is sometimes elided by the 
early poets before a vowel, and sometimes s alone before a consonant; as, con- 
tenV atque (Enn.), for conientm atque; ornnibu' rebus. {Lucr.) So, 

Turn latirOlV dolor, certisslmu? nunciu’ mortis. Lucil. 

Bemakk. This elision took place principally in short syllables. 

For ecthlipsis at the end of a line, see Synaphcia^ § 307, 3. 

SYNTHESIS. 

§ 300. 1. Synceresis is the contraction into one syllable 

of two vowels which are usually pronounced separately. Thus, 

Aured. percussum virga, Tersumque yenenis. Virg. A. 7, 190. 

Eosdem hSLbuit secum, quibus est elata, caipillos. Prop. 4, 7, 7. 

Tityre, pascentes a flumine reice cSpellas. Virg. E. 3, 96. 

Remark 1. So Pha^ihon is pronounced PTuethon; alveo, alvo; Orphea^ 
Orpha; deorsum, dorsum. 

(1.) Synaeresis is frequent in n, ildem, iisdem, dii, dils, dein, deinceps, deinde^ 
deest, deerat, deero, deemt, deesse; as, 

Prseclpitatur iquis, et ^quis nox surgit ab tsdem. Ovid. M. 4, 92. 

Sint Maecenates; non deerunt, Flacce, MarSnes. Mart. 8, 56, 5. 

Rem. 2. (Jui and huic are usually monosyllables. 

(2.) When two vowels in compound words are read as one syllable, the 
former may rather be considered as elided than as united with the latter; as, 
e in anteambub, anielre, aniehac, dehinc, mehercule, etc., and a m contralre. 

(3.) The syllable formed by the lanion of i or u followed by another vowel 
retains the quantity of the latter vowel, whether long or short; as, dbUte, drilte, 
dbiegnee, pdrieiibus, consilium, JortuUus, Ndsidienus, vindemidtor, omnia; genua, 
tenuis, pituita, jiumdrum, etc. In such examples, the i and u are pronouncea 
like initial y and w; as, dbyete, pdryetibus, consilyum, fortwUus, Ndsidyenus, 
i.'mn-yd, tenwls, pitwlta, etc.; and, like consonants, they have, with another 
consonant, the power of lengthening a preceding short vowel, as in the above 
examples. 

Note. In Statius, the word tenuiore occurs as a trisyllable, in which the 
three vowels, uio, are united in pronunciation; thus, ten-wid-re. 

(4.) Sometimes, after a synaloepha or echthlipsis, two vowels suffer syntere- 
sis; as, stellio et, pronounced stell-yet: consilium et, — consil-yet, 

(6.) If only one of the vowels is written, the contraction is called crasis; as 

consili, for dii, consilii. 


DI.ERESIS. 

2. Diceresis is the division of one syllable into two; as, 

avidt, Trdla, tUlua, suddent; for aulce, Troia or Troja, silva, suddent. So 
$u^SCO (or suesco; rellquus (or iliquus; ecqtiis (or ecquis; miluus (or milvug. oto. 
as 


§307. 


PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-FIGURES. 


3U 


iEtht'reum sensum, atque aurS'i simpKcis ignem. Virg. A. 6. 747 
Atque Sllios alii irrldent, Veneremque suMent. Lurr. 4, 11^. 

Grammitici certant; et Idhuc sub iuitlce lis est. Hor. A. P. 7S. 

Aurarura et sUucb metu. Id. 0. 1, 23, 4. 

(1.) So in Greek words originally written with a diphthong (u or; as^ 
iUgeia for eleyia, Bacchiid for Bacchea, Rhceteius for Rhcetens, Pieids for Pllds: 
and also in words of Latin origin; as, Vciiis for Veins, Agaileld for Aguileid. 

Rjemakk. This figure is sometimes called dialysis. 

SYSTOLE. 

§ 307 . 1. Systole is the sliortening of a syllable which is 

long by nature or by position ; as. 

tdde'n for videsne, in which e is naturally long; sdiVn for sdtisne, in which ^ is 
long by position ;—hddie for hoc die; multlmddis for multis mddis. So, 

Ducere multlmddis voces, et flectere cantus. Lucr. 6, 1405. 

(1.) By the omission of j after db, dd, 6b, sub, and re, in compound words, 
those prepositions retain their naturally short (quantity, which would otherwise 
be made long by position; as, dbici, ddicit, dbicis, etc. Thus, 

Si quid nostra tuis ddicit vexatio rebus. Mart. 10, 82, 1. 

Remark. In some compounds the short quantity of dd and db is preserved 
before a consonant by the elision of the cf or 6 of the preposition, as in dperw^ 
6j>67'io, dmitto, etc. 

(2.) The penult of the third person plural of certain perfects is said by 
some to be shortened by systole; as, stdtdrunt, tulirunt, etc.; but others ascribe 
tliese irregularities to the errors of transcribers, or the carelessness of writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2. Diastole is the lengthening of a syllable which is naturally 
short. 

(1.) It occurs most frec^uently in proper names and in compoimds of re; as, 
Frlamides, reiigio, etc. Ihus, 

Uanc tibi Prlamldes mitto, Ledaea, saiutem. Ovid. H. 16, 1. 

Rdtlgidne patrum multos servata per annos. Virg. A. 2, 716. 

(2.) Some editors double the consonant after the lengthened re; as, relligio 

(3.) Diastole is sometimes called ectdsis. 

SYNAPHEIA. 

3. Synapheia is such a connection of two consecutive verses, 
that the first syllable of the latter verse has an influence on the 
final syllable of that which precedes, either by position, synaloo- 
yha, or ecthlipsis. See §§ 283 and 305. 

(1.) This figure is most frequent in anapaestic verse, and in the Ionic a 
tiinore. 

The following lines will illustrate its effect:— 

Praeceps silvas moutesque fuglt 
Citus Actaeou. Sen. 

Here the i in the final syllable of fugit, which is naturally short, is made long 
Oy position before the following consonants, tc. 


B46 PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION-ARSIS AND THESIS. §308 


Omnia Mercurio rtmtlis, vocemque c^lOremyiw 
Et crines flavos.... Virg. A. 4, 658. 

Di-'isldens plebi numero beiitorK?n 
Eximit virtus. Hot. 0. 2. 2. iS. 

In the former of these examples, synapheia and synaloepha are co tnhined, 
being elided before et in the following line; in the latter there is a simuar 
combination of synapheia and ectlilipsis. 

(2.) By s'mapheia, the parts of a compound word are sometimes divided be* 
tween two "s erses; as, 

.... si non oCFenderet unum- 

Quemque poetaruui llmae labor et mora... Hot. A. P 290 

(3.) In hexameter verse a redundant syllable at the end of a line elided be¬ 
fore a vowel at the beginning of the next line, by causing the accent to fall on 
the second syllable of the concluding spondee, and connecting th<* two versos 
bv synapheia, excites the expectation of scmething which is to foUow, and 
ollen tends to magnify the object; as, 

Quos supSr- I -ati4 si- | -lex, -jam lap- | -surS. ci- | -denti- | -que 

Immlnet assimllis. Virg. A. 6, 602. 

Remark. The poets often make use of other figures, also, which, however, 
are not peculiar to them. Such are prosthesis, ajjhceresis, syncdpe, epentitisw, 
apocOpe, paragoge, tmesis, antithesis, and metathesis. See § 322. 


ARSIS AND THESIS. 

§ 308. (1.) Rhythm ls the alternate elevating and depress¬ 

ing of* the voice at regular intervals in pronouncing the syllables 
of verse. 

(2.) The elevation of the voice is called arsis, its depression thesis 
These terms designate, also, the parts of a foot on which the eleva¬ 
tion or depression falls. 

1. The natural arsis is on the long syllable of a foot; and hence, 
in a foot composed wholly of long, or wholly of short syllables, when 
considered in itself, the place of the arsis is undetermined ; but when 
such foot is substituted for the fundamental foot of a metre, its arsis is 
determined by that of the latter. 

Remark. Hence, a spondee, in trochaic or dactylic metre, has the arsis cn 
the first syllable; but in iambic or anapaestic metre, it has it on the last. 

2. The arsis is either equal in duration to the thesis, or twice as 
long. 

Thus, in the dactyl, — — and anapaest, w w —, it is equal; in the tro 
chee, — and iambus, ^ —, it is twice as long. This difference in the pro 
pertionate duration of the arsis and thesis constitutes the difference cf rhythm. 
4 foot is said to have the descending rhythm, when its arsis is at the beginning, 
and the ascending, when the thesis is at the beginning. 

3. The stress of voice which falls upon the arsis of a foot, is called 
ihe ictus. When a long syllable in the arsis of a foot is resolved into 
Jwo short ones, the ictus falls upon the former. 

Note 1. Some suppose that the terms arsis and thesis, as txsed by the an* 
sieiits, denoted respectively the rising and falling of the hand in beating time 
ind that the place of the thesis was the syllable which received the ictus 


5 309, 310. PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-DACTYLIC METRE. 54t 


Note 2. As the ancient pronunciation of Latin is not now understood, 
writers differ in regard to the mode of reading verse. According to some, the 
accent of each word shoiild always be preserved; while others direct that the 
stress of voice should be laid on the arsis of the foot, and that no regard should 
be paid to the accent. 

^ It is generally supposed that the final letters elided by svnaloepha and octh« 
lipsis, though omitted in scarming, were pronounced in readmg verse. 

C^SURA. 

§ SOO. CcBsura is the separation, by the ending of a woid, 
of syllables rhythmically or metrically connected. 

Caesura is of three kinds;—1, of the foot; 2, of the rhythm; and 3, 
of the verse. 

1. Caesura of the foot occurs when a word ends before a foot is 
completed; as, 

Silves- I -trem tenu- | -i Mu- | -sam medi- | -taris a- | -venSl. Virg. E. 1, 2. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm is the separation of the arsis from the 
thesis by the ending of a word, as in the second, third, and fourth 
feet of the preceding verse. 

Rem 1. It hence appears that the caesura of the rh3d;hm is always a caesura 
of the foot, as e. g. in the 2d, 3d, and 4th feet of the preceding verse; but. on 
the contrary, that the caesura of the foot is not always a caesura of the rhytnm, 
as e. g. in the fifth foot of the same verse. 

(1.) Caesura of the rhythm allows a final syllable naturally short, 
to stand in the arsis of the foot instead of a long one, it being length¬ 
ened by the ictus; as, 

Pectorl- I -bus Inhl- | -ans spl- | -rauta j consullt j exta. Virg. A. 4, 64. 

This occurs chiefly in hexameter verse. 

Rem. 2. Caesura of the foot and of the verse do not of themselves lengthen a 
short syllable, but they often coincide with that of the rhythm. 

3. Caesura of the verse is such a division of a line into two parts, 
as affords to the voice a convenient pause or rest, without injury to 
the sense or harmony. 

Rem. 3. The caesura of the verse is often called the ccesural pause. In sev¬ 
eral kinds of verse, its place is fixed; in others, it may fall in more than one 
place, and the choice is left to the poet. Of the former kind is the pentameter 
of the latter the hexameter. 

The proper place of the caesural pause will be treated of, so far as shall be necessary 
under each species of verse. 

Rem. 4. The effect of the caesura is to connect the different words har¬ 
moniously together, and thus to give smoothness, grace, and sweetness, to the 
verse. 


DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 

DACTYLIC METRE. 

§ 310 . I* A hexameter or heroic verse consists of six feet, 
Of these the filth is a dactyl, the sixth a spondee, and each of 
the other foui' either a dactyl or a spondee ; as, 


V 


48 PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-DACTYLIC METRE. § 310 

At tuM I teirlbl- I -lem sonT- | -turn procul ] aerS c5l- | -noro. Virg, A. 9, 508. 

Inton- 1 -8l cri- | -nes Ion- | -ga cSr- | -vice flu- | ebant. Tibtill. 3, 4, 27. 

Lu'iSrfc j cjuS vel- | -lem cal&- | -mo per- J -misit 4- [ -gresti. Virg. E. 1, 10. 

1. The fifth foot is sometimes a spondee, and the verse in suull 
case is called spondaic ; as, 

Cars. dS- | -um sobo- | -les mag- [ -num Jovis [ Incre- | -mSntum. Virg. E. 4 49. 

Remark 1. In such verses, the fourth foot is commonly a dactyl, and the 
fifth should not close with the end of a word. Spondaic lines are thought to 
be especially adapted to the expression of grave and solemn subjects. 

2. A light and rapid movement is produced by the frequent recur¬ 
rence of dactyls; a slow and heavy one by that of spondees; as, 

QuadrupS- | -dantS pu- | -trem soni- | -tu quStit | iingulS | campum. Virg. A. 8, 696. 

Dli in- I -ter se- | -se mag- ] -na vi | brachial tollunt. Id. A. 8, 452. 

Rem. 2. Variety in the use of dactyls and spondees in successive lines, hafe 
Bn agreeable effect. J^exameter verse commonly ends in a word of two or 
three syllables, and a monosyllable at the end of a line is generally ungraceful, 
but sometimes produces a good effect; as, 

Stemitur, \ exXni- j -misque, tre- | -mens pro- | -cumbit hu- | -mi bos. Virg. A. 6, 481 
Parturl- | -unt mon- | -tes: nas- | -cetur | ridicu- | -IQs mus. Hor. A. P. 139. 

3. The beauty and harmony of hexameter verse depend much on due at¬ 
tention to the ccesura. (See ^ 309. ) A line in which it is neglected is destitute 
of poetic beauty, and can hardly be distinguished from prose; as, 

Rom® I moeniSL ] terruit | implger | HannibSil | armis. Enn. 

4. The caesural pause most approved in heroic poetry is that which 
occurs after the penthemimeris., i. e. after the arsis in the third foot. 
This is particularly distinguished as the heroic ccesura. Thus, 

At domus I interi- [ -or || re- | -gali [ splendidS. J luxu. Virg. A. 1, 637. 

5. Instead of tlie preceding, a caesura in the thesis of the third 
foot, or after the arsis of the fourth, was also approved as heroic; as. 

Infan- | -dum re- | -glnS. || ju- | -bes reno- | -vare dS- | -l5rem. Virg. A. 2, 3. 

Inde to- I -r5 pSiter | Alne- | -as || sic | orsus Sib | alto. Id. A. 2, 2. 

Rem. 3. When the caesural pause occurs, as in the latter example, after the 
kephthemimens, i. e. after the arsis of the fourth foot, another but slighter one is 
often found in the second foot; as, 

PrlmSL tg- I -net, || plan- ] -suque vo- | -lat || freml- \ -tuque sS- | -cundo. Virg. A 6, 338. 

6. The caesura after the third foot, dividing the verse into exactly 
equal parts, was least approved; as, 

Cul non I dictus Hy- | -las puer || et La- | -tonlS, | Delos. Virg. 3t. 3, 6. 

Rkm. 4. The caesural pause between the fourth and fifth feet was considered 
as peculiarly adapted to pastoral poetry, particularly when the fourth foot wan 
a dactyl, and was hence termed the bucolic caesura; as, 

Stant vita- I -li et tene- | -ris mu- | -gltlbus || aera | complent. Nemes. 

Note 1. The caesura after the arsis is sometimes called the masculine or 
syllabic caesura; that in the thesis, the feminine or trochaic, as a trochee imme¬ 
diately precedes. When a caesura occurs in the fifth foot it is usually the 
trochaic caesura, unless the foot is a spondee; as, 

Fraxinus \ In sll- | -vis pul- | -cherrimil, | pmus in \ hortls. Virg. E. 7, 66. 

(a.) It is to be remarked that two successive trochaic caesuras in the second 
md tiiird feet are, in general, to be avoided, but they are scmotimes employed 
lo express irregular or impetuous motion; as, 


S311» PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—DACTYLIC METRE. 349 


Pna Eu- I -riisguS N5- | 4iisquS ru- | -Qnt cr5- | -berquS pr5- | -cfllla. Virg i 1 85. 

(A) Successive trochaic caesuras are, in like manner, tobeavoided m thethird 
and fourth feet, but are ap])roved in tlie frsl and second^ in the fourth and 
fifUi, and in the fr$t, third and ffth. See Virg. A. 6, 651: 1, 94: nnd 6, 522. 

Note 2. In the ] rincipal c^sura of the verse poets frequently introduce a 
pause in the sense, vhicli must be attended to in order to determine the olace 
of the csesural pause. For in the common place for the ciesura in tlie third 
foot there is often a cajsura of the foot; while, in the fourth foot, a still more 
marked division occurs. In this case, the latter is to be considered as Lh6 
principal cajsura, and distinguished accordingly; as. 

Belli I ferra- | -tos pos- [ -tes, || p5r- | -tasque re- | -fregit. Hor. S. 1, 4, 61. 

n. Tlie J^riapean is usuallv accounted a species of hexameter. It 
is so constructed as to be divisible into two portions of three feet each, 
having generally a trochee in the first and fourth place, but often a 
Bjiondee and rarely a dactyl; in the second, usually a dactyl; and 
an ampliimacer and more rarely a dactyl in the third; as, 

0 CO- 1 -lonIS, I quffi cupis |; p6nt€ | ludere | longo. Catidl. 17,1. 

It is, however, more properly considered as choriambic metre, consisting of 
alternate Glyconics and Pherecratics. See ^ 316, IV. V. Thus, 

0 Co- j -lonli, quS I cupis 
Ponte IluderfiIon-|-go. 

Note. A regular hexameter verse is termed Friapean, when it is so con* 
jtructed as to be divisible into two portions of three feet each; as, 

Tertis. I pars pa- | -tri dSta [| pars dStS | tertlS | matrl. Catidl. 62, 64. 

See above, 6. 

§ Oil. III. A pentameter verse consists of five feet. 

Remark 1. It is generally, however, divided, in scanning, into 
two hemlstichs, the first consisting of two feet, either dactyls or spon¬ 
dees, followed by a long syllable; the last, of two dactyls, also fol¬ 
lowed by a long syllable ; as, 

Natu- I -r« sequi- | -tur || semlnSl | qQisqu§ su- Prop. 3, 7, 20. 

Carmlnl- | -bus vl- | -ves || tempus In | omne me- | -Is. Ovid. 

1. According to the more ancient and correct mode of scanning 
pentameter verse, it consists of five feet, of which the first and second 
may each be a dactyl or a spondee; the third is always a spondee ; 
find the fourth and fifth are anapaests; as, 

Natu- I -rm sequi- | -tur || sem- | -InS quTs- | -que suse. 

Carailnl- | -bus vi- | -yes || tern- | -pus In 6m- 1 -ne mSIS. 

2. Tlie caesura, in pentameter verse, always occurs after the pen- 
themimerls, i. e. at the close of the first hemistich. It very rarely 
lengthens a short syllable. 

3. The pentameter rarely ends with a word of C;ree syllables. In. Ovid, it 
ujually ends with a dissyllable. 

Rem- 2. Tills species of verse is seldom used, except in connection with 
hexaineter, a line of each recurring alternately. This combination is called 
iU.ytao verse. Thus, 

FlSbllls Indignos, Elegelft, solvS c&plllofl. 

Ah nlmls ex vero nCuc tibl n5m£u firit! Ovid. -4m. 8, 9, 8. 


80 


S50 PltOSODT.-7ERSIFICATI0N-AXAP^STIC METRE. § 313 

§ 312. IV. The tetrameter a pridre, or Alcmanian dactylic te* 
irameter, consists of the first four feet of a hexameter, of which the 
fourth is always a dactyl; as, 

Giirruli I per ra- | -mos, &vis | obstrSptt. Sen. CEd. 454. 

V. The tetrameter a posteriure, or spondaic tetrameter, consists of 
the last four feet of a hexameter; as, 

fbimus, 1 0 sod- | -i, C(5mi- | -tesque. Hor. Od. 1, 7, 26. 

Remark. The penultimate foot in this, as in hexameter verse, nay be a 
Bpondee, but in this case the preceding foot should be a dactyl ; as, 

Menso- | -rem cohl- | -bent Ar-4 -chyta. Hor. Od. 1, 28, 2. 

"ST. The dactylic trimeter consists of the last three feet of a hexar 
meter; as, 

Qrato I PyrrhS, sub | antro. Hor. Od. 1, 6, 3. 

Remark. But this kind of verse is more properly included in choriambio 
metre. See § 316, V. 

VII. The trimeter catalectic Archilocliian consists of the first five 
half feet of a hexameter, but the first and second feet are commonly 
dactyls; as, 

PulvTs et I umbrSl su-1 -mus. Hor. Od. 4, 7,16. 

Vni. The dactylic dimeter, or Adonic, consists of two feet, a dac¬ 
tyl and a spondee; as, 

Rlalt A- I -polio. Hvr. Od. 1,10,12. 

IX. The ^olic pentameter consists of four dactyls preceded by a 
spondee, a trochee, or an iambus. Thus 



X. The Phalcecian pentameter consists of a dactylic penthimimeria 
and a dactylic dimeter; as. 

Vise- 1 -bat gell- | -d® || slderSl | brum®. Boethius. 

Remark. A trochee is sometimes found in the first place and an iambus in 
the first and second places. 

XI. The Tetrameter Meiurus, or Faliscan consists of the last four 
feet of a hexameter, except that the last foot is an iambus instead of 
a spondee; as. 

Tit novSl I fruge gra- ] -vis Ceres | 6at. Boethius. 

XII. The Tetrameter Catalectic consists of the tetrameter a piiore 
wanting the latter half of the concluding dactyl; as, 

Omne homi- 1 -num g^niis 1 in ter- | -ris. Boethius, 


ANAP^STIC METRE. 

§ 313. I. The asiaprEstic monomtier consists of two ana 

pSBbtS j LiS, 


niulSs- I -sS c&nes. Sen. 



§ 314 . PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-IAMBIC METRE. 35 . 

II. The anapaestic dimeter consists of two measures, or four 
anapassts; as, 

PharStr®- I -quS grives | date s®- | -vJL fSrS.... Sen. 

Remark 1. The first foot in each measure of anap^stic metre was very 
often changed to a dactyl or a spondee, and the second foot often to a spondee, 
and, in a few instances,'to a dactyl. 

Rem. 2. Anapaestic verses are generally so constructed that each measure 
ends with a word, so that they may be written and read in lines of one, two, 
or more measures. 


IAMBIC METRE. 


§ 314:. I. 1. The iambic trimeter., or senarim, consists of 
three iambic measures, or six iambic feet; as, 

PhSLse- I -lus II- I -16, || qu6in [ vide- j -tis hos- | -pites.... Catvll. 4. 1. 

2. The caesura commonly occurs in the third but sometimes in the 
fourth foot. 

3. The pure iambic measure was seldom used by the Latin poets, 
but to vary the rhythm spondees were introduced into the first, third, 
and fifth places. In every foot, also, except the last, which was al¬ 
ways an iambus, a long syllable was often changed into two short 
ones, so that an anapaest or a dactyl was used for a spondee, and a 
tribrach for an iambus, but the use of the dactyl in the fifth place 
was very rare; as, 

Quo, quo I sceles- | -tl rul- | -tis? aiit [ cur d6x- | -tens.... Hor. Epod. 7, 1. 

Alitl- I -bus at- I -que cSini- | -bus homl- ] -cldam Hec- | -torem.... Id. Epod. 17,12- 

4. Sometimes, also, a proceleusmatic, or double pyrrhic, was used in the 
first place for a spondee. The writers of comedy, satire, and fable, admitted 
the spondee and its equivalents (the dactyl and anapaest) into the second and 
fcorth places, as well as the first, third, and fifth. 

6. The following, tiierefore, is the scale of the lambic Trimeter:— 



6. In the construction of the lambic Trimeter an accent should fall on tha 
second syllable of either the third foot or both the second and fourth feet; as, 
Ibis I LIbur- | -nis in- \ te;r al- | -tSi na- | -vlum | . 

Utrum- I -ne jus- | -si per- | -s&que’- \ -mur 6- | -tium. | 

n. The scazon, or cTioliamhus (lame iambic), is the iambic trime¬ 
ter, with a spondee in the sixtn foot, and gene:ally an iambus in the 
fifth; as. 

Cur In I Ihea- | -trum, C&to I sevS- | -re, ve- | -nlstl? 

An Ide • |-6 tan- | -turn Ten- 1 -eras, 1 ut 6x- | -ires? Mart. Ep. 1, 1, 3. 

jthis species of verse is also called Eippcmaciic trimeter, from its inventor 
Hipponax. 







352 PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—IAMBIC METRE. § 314. 


m. The iam/nc tetrameter or quadratus, called also from the num¬ 
ber of its feet octonarius, a measure used by the comic poete, consists 
of four iambic measures, subject to the same variations as tne iambic 
trimeter (I.); as, 

Nunc hic I dies | &llim | Titam af- H -fert, SLIT- | -6s m5- j -res p58- | -tulat. Ter. A.1)2,18. 

Remark. The caesura regularly follows the second measure. 

IV. The iambic tetrameter catalectic or Ilippnnactic^ is the iambic 
tetrameter, wanting the last syllable, and having always an iambus 
in the seventh place, but admitting in the other places the same var 
liations as the trimeter and teti-ameter; as, 

Depren- | -sS, na- | -vis In | miri, | vesa- | -nien- | -te ven- | -to. Catull. 25, 13. 

V. The inm}>ic trimeter catalectic or Archilochian^ is the iambic tri¬ 
meter (I.), wanting the final syllable. Like the common iambic tri¬ 
meter, it admits a spondee into the first and third places, but not into 
the fifth; as, 

Voca- I -tus at- | -qu6 non | voca- | -tus au- | -dit. Hor. Od. 2, 18, 40. 

TrShunt- | -que sic- | -c^ mach- | -Inae 1 carl-1 -nas. Id. Od. 1, 4, 2. 

VI. The iambic dimeter consists of two iambic measures, with the 
same variations as the iambic trimeter (I.) ; as, 

Fort! I seque- | -mur pCc- | -tore. Hor. Epod, 1, 14. 

Ciinidl- I -& trac- | -tavit | dSpes. Id. Epod. 3, 8. 

Vide- j -re pr5pe- | -rantes | d5nium. Id. Epod. 3, 62. 

Eehark. The iambic dimeter is also called the Archihehian dimeter. 


The following is its scale:— 


1 

2 

eo 

1 

) 

1 

) 

— 

— ^ 

) 

) 

) 

( 1 1 ( 

( ( ( 

1 ( ' ( 


Vn. The iambic dimeter hypermeter., called also ArcTiilochiant is 
the iambic dimeter, with an additional syllable at the end; as, 

Rede- J -git In | veros | tlmo- I -res. Hor. Od. 1, Sf, 16. 

Remark. Horace always makes the third foot a spondee. 

VIII. The iambic dimeter acephalous is the iambic dimeter, want¬ 
ing the first syllable ; as. 

Non I ebur I neque au- | -reum... Hor. Od. 2, 18,1. 

Remark. This kind of verse is sometimes scanned as a catalectic trochaic 
limeter. See § 315, IV. 

IX. The iambic dimeter catalectic, or Anacreontic, is the lambio 
dimeter, wanting the final syllable, and having always an iambus in 
the third foot; as, 

Ut tl- I gris or-1 -b& gna- | -tls. Sen. Med. 863. 

X. The Galliambus consists of two iambic dimeters catalectic, the 
last of which wants the final syllable. 

Remark 1. It was so denominated from the GaUi or priests of Cybele, bv 
■vhom it was used. 





S 315. PROSODY.—^VERSIFICATION—TROCHAIC METRE. 55A 


Rkm. 2. In the first foot of each dimeter the anapaest was generally pre¬ 
ferred to the spondee. The catalectic syllable at the end of the first dimeter 
Is long, and the second foot of the second dimeter is commonly a tribrach; as, 

Supfir &1- I -t4 Tec- | -tue A- | -tys || cfilerl | rStS mSL- | -ria. Catull, 63, 1. 

Bkm. 8. The caesura uniformly occurs at the end of the first dimeter. 

TROCHAIC METRE. 

§ 1. Trochaic verses bear a near affinity to iambics. The-addi- 

tion 01 retrenchment of a syllable at the beginning of a pure iambic verse, ren¬ 
ders it pure trochaic, and the addition or retrenchment of a syllable at the be¬ 
ginning of a pure trochaic line, renders it pure iambic, with the deficiency or 
redundancy of a syllable in each case at the end of the verse. 

I. The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet, fol¬ 
lowed by a catalectic syllable. In the first five places and very 
rarely in the sixth, it admits a tribrach, but in the seventh a 
trochee only. In the even places, besides the tribrach, it admits 
also a spondee, a dactyl, an anapaest, and sometimes a proceleus- 
matic; as, 

Jussus I Sat In | Snnis | TrS: H pQrua | IrS | jussus | §8t. Auct. P. Vin. 

Romu I Uea* | Ipsi | fecit || cum Si- | -binia | nupti- | -as. Id. 

Dinil 1 des, c6- | -it6; \ vestras U hie dl- | -es quSi- ] -rit mi- | -nus. Sen. 

The following is its scale:— 


2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

7 

, ) 1 ) 1 
) )) 

' ) ' 1 ) 

^ ^ 

— 

WWW 

— w w 



Remark 1. The pure trochaic verse was rarely used, and the dactyl very 
rarely occurs in the fourth place. The caesural pause uniformly occurs after 
the fourth foot thus dividing the verse into a complete dimeter and a catalec¬ 
tic dimeter. The comic writers introduced the spondee and its equivalent feet 
into the odd places.^ 

Rem. 2. The complete trochaic tetrameter or octonarius properly consists of 
eight feet, all trochees, subject, however, to the same variations as the catalco- 
tic tetrameter; as, 

IpsS I summis | saxis | fixus | asp5- | -ris, g- | -vIscS- | -ratus. Enn. 

n. llie Sapphic verse, inverted by the poetess Sappho, consists 
of fii^e feet—the first a trochee, the second a spondee, the third a 
dactyl, and the fourth and fifth trochees; as, 

IntS- I -ger Ti- | -cS, || scele- | -risqug | purus. Hor. Od. 1, 22, 1. 

1. Sappho, and, after her example, Catullus, sometimes made the second 
foot a trochee. 

2. Those Sapphics are most harmonious which have the caesura after the 
fifth semi-foot. 

Note 1. In the composition of the Sapphic stanza, a word is sometimes 
divided between the end of the third Sapphic, and the beginning of the Adonic 
which follows; as, 

Labi- I -tur rl- | -pa JovS | non prS- | -bante uxr 
6rlu8 I ^nifl. Hor. Od. 1, 2,19. 

ao# 









554 PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—CHORIAMBIC >IETRE. §316 


It haa been thought by some that such lines should be considered as one 
Sapphic verse of seven feet, the fifth foot being either a spondee or a trochee. 

Note 2. This verse is sometimes scanned as epichoriambic, having an epi 
trite ill the first place, a clioriambus in the second, and ending with an iambic 
sizygj’ catalectic; thus, 

Integer tT- | -tie, ec51erTs- | -que purus. 

in. The Phalrecinn verse consists of five feet — a spondee, a dac- 
t} 1, and three trochees ; as, 

Non eet | Tivere, ] sed vSl- | -lere | vltS.. Mart. 

Remark 1. Instead of a spondee as the first foot, Catullus sometimes uses a 
trochee or an iambus. This writer also sometimes uses a spondee in the 
secend place. 

Rem. 2. The Plinlcecian verse is sometimes called hendecasyUdbic as con¬ 
sisting of eleven syllables; but that name does not belong to it exclusively. 

IV. The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet, properly 
all trochees, and a catalectic syllable, but admitting also in the second 
place a spondee or a dactyl; as. 

Non e I -bur nS- | -que aur6- [ -urn. Hor. Od. 2, 18,1. 

Lenis I ac modi- | -cum flu- \ -ens 

Aurd, I nec ver- [ -gens Id- | -tus. Sen (Ed. 887. 

Note. This measure is the same as the acephalous iambic dimeter (see 
^ 814, Vllli), and it is not important whether it be regarded as iambic oi 
trochaic. 


CHORIAMBIC METRE. 

§ 310. {a.) In a pure clioriambic verse each metre except 

the last is a clioriambus, and the last an lambic syzygy. 

Nots. a spendee and iambus, i. e. a third epitrite, are sometimes ysed in 
place of the lambic syzygy. 

(5.) An epichoriambic verse is composed of one or more 
choriambi with some other foot, especially a ditrochee or a 
second epitrite, joined with it. 

1. ^ The choriamhic pentameter consists of a spondee, three chori- 
ambi, and an iambus ; as, 

TQ ne I qa$8ldrls, | scire nefas, | qu5m mihl, quern tibl., Hor. Od. 1, 11, 1. 

n. The choriamhic tetrameter consists of three choriambi, or feet 
of equal length, and a Bacchius ; as, 

Omnd nemus | cum fluvlls, | 6mn6 ednat | prdfuudum. Claud. 

2. In this verse Horace substituted a spondee for the iambus con* 
tained in the first clioriambus; as, 

Te deos 6- | -ro, Sybdrin | cur prSperes | dmando. Hor. Od. 1, 8, 2. 

3. Some scan this verse as an epichoriambic tetrameter catalectic, begin¬ 
ning witli tlie second efitrite. 

III. 1. The A.^^ctepiadic tetrameter (invented «y the poet Ascle- 
piades) consists of a spondee, two choriambi, and an iambus} as, 

M*c6- 1 -nis, dt&Tl.} U edlt£ reg- ] -Ibus. Hor. Od. 1,1,1. 


i 817 . PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION—IONIC METRE. 355 

2. This form is invariably observed by Horace; but other poets sometimes 
though rarely, make the first foot a dactyl. 

3. The caesural pause occurs at the end of the first choriambus. 

4. This meaoure is sometimes scanned as a dactylic peutameter catalectio. 
See § 311, 111. Thus, 

Msecs- I -nas, &t3L- ] vis H edits | regIbus. 

IV. 1. The choriamhic trimeter, or Gh/conic (invented by the poet 
(jlyco), consists of a spondee, a choriambus, and an iambus; as, 

Sic te I divSL poteus | CJ^pri... Hor. Od. 1, 3, 1. 

3. The first foot is sometimes an iambus or a trochee. 

3. When the first foot is a spondee, the verse might be scanned as a dactylic 
trimeter. Thus, 

Sic te I dlvSL p5- | -tens Cypri. 

V. 1. The choriamhic trimeter catalectic, or Pherecratic (so called 
from the poet Pherecrates), is the Glyconic deprived of its final syl¬ 
lable, and consists of a spondee, a choriambus, and a catalectic sylla¬ 
ble; as, 

GrSLto, 1 PyrrhSl, sub an- ] -tro. Hor. Od. 1, 6, 3. 

2. The first foot was sometimes a trochee or an anapest, rarely an iambus. 

3. When the first foot is a spondee, this measure might be scanned as a 
dactylic trimeter. See § 312, VI. 

4. The Pherecratic subjoined to the Glyconic produces the Priapean verse. 
See § 310, II. 

VI. 1. The choriamhic dimeter consists of a choriambus and a 
Bacchius; as, 

Lydia die I p5r Smnes. Hor. Od. 1, 8, 1. 

2. Tliis verse is by some called the choriamhic dimeter catalectic. Cf. 4 816, 
(a.) 


IONIC METRE. 

§ 317. I. The Ionic a majore., or Sotadic, (from the poet So- 
tades), consists of three greater Ionics and a spondee. 

1. The Ionic feet, however, are often changed into ditrochees, and either of 
the two long syllables in those feet into two short ones; as. 

Has, cum gemi- | -na compede, | dedleat cSi- | -tenas, 

Saturue, ti- I -bi Zollus, | anuulos pri- 1 -ores. Mart. 

2. Hence the following is its scale: — 

4 


N>te. The final syllable, by § 301, note, may be short. 

n. 1. The Ionic a mindre consists generally of verses of three or 
r^ur feet, which are all smaller Ionics; as, 

Puer ^es, [ tibl tolas, | 3peros«- | -C[u6 Mlnervm... Hor. Od. 3, 12, 4. 

3. In this verse, as in the anapajstic, no place is assigned to the pause; be¬ 
cause, since the metres, if rightly constructed, end with a word, the effect of a 
pause wiU be produced at the end of each metre. 






856 PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—COMPOUND SIETRES. § 318, 


COMPOUND METRES. 

§ 81 8. Compound metre is the union of two species of 

metre in the same verse. 

I. I'he dactylico-ianihic metre or Elegiamhus consists of a dactylic 
penthemimeris ( 312, vii.), followed by an iambic dimeter (§ 314 , 
VI.); as, 

Scrlb^rS | yerslcu- | -I5s || SLmo- | -re per- | -culsum | grSLTl. Hor. Epod. 11, 2. 

II. The iamhico-dactylic metre or lainhelegus consists of the same 
members as the preceding, but in a reversed order; as, 

Nives- I -que de- \ -ducunt ] Jovem: || nunc mare, | nunc Bllu- | -ae. Hor. Epod. 13, 2. 

Note. The members composing this and the preceding species of verse are 
often written in separate verses. 

in. The greater Alcaic consists of an iambic penthemimeris, i. e. 
of two iambic feet and a long catalectic syllable, followed by a chor- 
iambus, and an iambus; as, 

Vides I ut al- 1 -ta || stet nlyg can- | -didum. Hor. Od. 1, 9, 1. 

Remark 1. The first foot is often a spondee. 

Rem. 2. The caesura uniformly occurs after the catalectic syllable. 

Rem. 3. This verse is sometimes so scanned as to make the last two feel 
dactyls. 

IV. The dactylico-trochaic or ArcMlocliian heptameter^ consists of 
the dactylic tetrameter a priore (§ 312), followed by three trochees; 
as, 

Solvltur 1 acris hi- | -Sms gra- | -ta tIcS || verls | et FSL- | -Tonl. Hor. Od. 1, 4,1. 

Remark. The caesura occurs between the two members. 

V. The dactylico-trochaic tetrameter or lesser Alcaic., consists of two 
dactyls, followed by two trochees, i. e. of a dactyhc dimeter followed 
by a trochaic monometer; as, 

LevISl 1 personu- U -SrS ] saxSL. Hor. Od. 1,17,12. 


COMBINATION OF VERSES IN POEMS. 

§ 310. 1. A poem may consist either of one kind of verse 

only or of a combination of tivo or more kinds. 

2. A poem in which only one kind of verse is employed, is called 
carmen monocolon; that which has two kinds, dicolon; that which 
has three kinds, tricolon. 

3. When the poem returns, after the second hne, to the same 
verso, with which it began, it is called distrophon; when after the 
third line, tristroplion; and when after the fourth, tetrastrdphon. 

4. The several verses which occur before the poem returns to the 
kind of verse with which it began, constitute a stanza or strophe. 

6. A poem consisting of two kinds of verse, when the stanza contains twe 
verses, is called aUcdlon distrdphon, (see ^ 320, 3); when it contains three, dico- 


§ 320. PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION—HORATIAN METRES. 357 


Ion trislrdphoHy (Auson. Profess. 21); when four, dicOlon tetrasMjphon, (§ 8i0,2) 
and when five, dicdlon pentastrdphon. 

6. A poem consisting of thi*ee kinds of verse, when the stanza contains thro€ 
verses, is called tricolon tristrOplwn^ 320, 16); when four, tricokm tetraitrd^ 
vhon^ 320, 1). 

HORATIAN METRES. 

§ 320. Tiipi diffV'rent species of metre used by Horace in 
his lyric compooiUuuo are twenty. The various forms in which 
he has employed them, either separate or in conjunction, are 
nineteen, arranged, according to the order of preference given 
to them by the poet, in the following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1. Two greater Alcaics (§ 318, iii.), one Archilochian iambio 
dimeter hypermeter (§ 314, vii.), and one lesser Alcaic (§318, v.) 

as, 

Vtdes, lit alta stet nivS candldum 
SoractS, nec jam austineant 5uus 
Silvia libdrantea, geluquS 
Flumln& cbnatlterint &cuto. {Ub. 1, 9.) 

Remark. This is called the Horatian stanza, because it seems to have been 
a favorite with Horace, being used in thirty-seven of his odes. 

2. Three Sapphics (§ 315, ii.) and one Adonic (§ 312, viii.); as, 

Jam satis terns nivis atquS dirae 

Grandinis misit pater, et, rubentS 

Deitera sacr^ jilculatus arces, 

Terruit urbem. (Lib. 1, 2.) 

8. One Glyconic (§316, iv.) and one Asclepiadic (§316, m.); as, 

Sic te Divi pStens Cypri, 

Sic fratres lieleum, lucIdS. sld^ra... (Lib. 1, 8 )' 

4. One iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.) and one iambic dimeter (§ 314, 
VI.); as, 

Ibis Libiimis Intgr altSL naviam, 

Amicfi, propugnacula. (Epod. 1.) 

6. Three Asclepiadics (§ 316, iii.) and one Glyconic (§ 316, iv.)*, 
as, 

ScrlberTs V5rT5 fortls, St hostlum 
. Victor, Maeouii carminis allti, 

Quam rem cumque ferox navibus aut Squlfl 

Miles, te duce, gesserit. (Lib. 1, 6.) 

6. Two Asclepiadics (§ 316, iii.), one Pherecratic (§ 316, v.), and 
one Glyconic (§ 316, iv.); as, 

Dianam, t6n€r®, dicTtS vlrgines: 

Intonsum, puerl, dicitS Oynthium, 

Latonamqu€ supremo 

Dllectam penltus J5yi. (Lib. 1 , 21 ) 

7 The Asclepiadic {§ 316, iii.) alone; as, 

Milenas &t&Ti8 Sdltd rSglbos. (Lib. 1 , ].) 


3d8 PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION—HORATIAN METRES. § 320 


8. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.) and cne dactylic tetrameter 
a posteriOre (§ 312, v.) ; as, 

Laudabunt SLITI cliram RhSdon, aut Mitylenen, 

Aut Ephesum, bimSLrlsve CSrlnthi... .{Lib. 1, 7.) 

9. The choriambic pentameter (§ 316, i.) alone; as, 

Tu ne quEESifirls, Bcire nefas, quern mihl, quern tibi... {Lib. 1, 11.) 

10. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.) and one iambic dimeter 
(§ 314, VI.) ; as, 

Nox £r5t, et coel5 fulgebat lunSl sSreno 
Inter mlnori sidera. {Epod 16.> 

11. The iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.) containing spondees; as. 

Jam, jam efficaci do mSmus sclentlse. {Epod. 17.) 

12. One choriambic dimeter (§316, vi.) and one choriambic tetra 
meter (§ 316, ii.) with a variation; as, 

Lydia, die, pgr omnes 

Te Deos oro, Sybirin cur prSpSraa amando... {Lib. 1, 8.) 

13. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.) and one iambic trimeter 
without spondees (§ 314, i.); as. 

Altera jam tSrltur belllB clTllIbus setafi; 

Suls et ipsa Roma Tirlbus ruit. {Epbd. 16.) 

14. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.) and one dactylic penthe* 
mimeris (§312, vii.) ; as, 

Diff figSre uItSs : rSdSunt jam gramlna campts, 

IrbSrIbusqug c5maB. . (Lt6. 4, 7.) 

15. One iambic trimeter (§ 314, i.), one dactylic trimeter catalec^ 
tic (§ 312, VII.), and one iambic dimeter (§ 314, vi.); as. 

Petti, nihil m5, sicut antea, juvat 
Scribere yerslculos, 

Amore perculsum gravi. {Epoa. 11.) 

Note. The second and third lines are often written as one verse. See 
I 318, 1. 

16. One dactylic hexameter (§ 310, i.), one iambic dimeter (§ 314, 
VI.), and one dactylic penthemimeris (§ 312, vii.) ; as, 

Ilorrlda tempestas coelum contraxlt; St Imbres 
Nivesque deducQnt Jovem: 

Nunc mare, nunc siluae... {Epod. 13.) 

Note. The second and third lines of this stanza, also, are often written as 
one verse. See 4 318, ii. 

17. One Archilochian heptameter (§ 318, iv.) and one iambic tri 
meter catalectic (§ 314, v.); as, 

Solvltur acriB hlema grata vIcS vSriB St Favonl, 

Trahuntque siccas machinm carinas. {Lib. 1, 4.) 

18. One iambic dimeter acephalous (§ 314, viii.) and one iambic 
trimeter catalectic (§ 314, v.); as. 

Non ebur nSque aureum 

Mea rSnidet in domo iSLcunar. {Lib. 2,18.) 

19. The Ionic a mindre (§ 317, ii.) alone; as, 

MLsgraram est nSque &mdrl cUirg ludum, nSquS dulcl... 


{Lib. 8 , 12 .) 


5 321 


PROSODY.-VERSIFICATION-HORATIAN METRES. 359 


1 891. A METRICAL KEY TO THE ODES OF HORACE 

Containing^ in alphabetic order^ the first words of each^ with a refer' 
ence to the numbers in the preceding Synopsis^ where the metre is 
explained. 


^■Vt. vehisto.No. 1 

memento... 1 

Albi, ne doieas. 6 

Altera jam teiitur.13 

Angustam, amice. 1 

At, 0 deonim. 4 

Audivere, I yce. 6 

Baochum in remotis. 1 

Beatus ille. 4 

CopIo supinas. 1 

Ccelo tonaiitem. 1 

Cur me querelis. 1 

Delicta majonim... 1 

Descende ccel:;. . 1 

Dianam, tenSrao.6 

Diffugere nives. 14 

Dive, qnem proles. 2 

Divis orte bonis. 6 

Donarem pateras. 7 

Donee gratus eram tibi. 3 

Eheu ! fugaces. 1 

Est mihi noiium. 2 

Et ture et fidibus. 3 

I'ixegi monumentum. 7 

Extremum Tanaim. 6 

Eaune, nymphanim. 2 

Festo quid potius die. 3 

Herciilis ritu. 2 

Horrida tempestas.16 

Ibis Liburnis. 4 

Icci, beatis. 1 

Ule et nefasto. 1 

impios parrae. 2 

Inclusam DanaCn. 6 

Iiitactis opulentior. 3 

Integer vitae. 2 

Intermissa, Venus, diu. 3 

Jam jam efficaci.11 

Jam pauca aratro. 1 

Jam satis terris.2 

Jam veils comites. 6 

Justuni et tenacem. 1 

Laudfibunt alii. 8 

Lupis 3t agnis. 4 

I.vdia, die, per omnes.12 

Maecenas atavis. 7 

Mala soluta. 4 

Martiis cseiebs. ... 3 

Mater saeva Cupidinum. 3 

Merc an, tacunde. 2 

Mercuri, nam te. 2 

Miserarum est. 19 


Mollis inertia.No 10 

Montium custos. 2 

Motuin ex Metello. 1 

Musis amicus. 1 

Natis in usurn. 1 

Ne forte credas. 1 

Ne sit ancillae. 2 

Nolis longa ferae. 6 

Nondura subacta. 1 

Non ebur neque aureum..IS 

Non semper imbres. 1 

Non usitata. 1 

Non vides, quanto. 2 

Nox erat.10 

Nullam, Vare, sacra. 9 

Nullus argento. 2 

Nunc est bibendum. 1 

0 crudMis adhuc. 3 

0 diva, gratum. 1 

0 fons Bandusioe. 6 

0 matre pulchra. 1 

0 nata mecum. 1 

0 navis, referent. 6 

0 saepe mecum. 1 

0 Venus, regina. 2 

Odi profanum. 1 

Otium Divos. 2 

Parcius junctas. 2 

Parcus l')eorum. 1 

Parentis olim. 4 

Pastor quum traheret.;. 5 

Percicos odi, puer. 2 

Petti, nihil me.16 

Phoebe, silvarumque. 2 

Phoebus volentem. 1 

Pindarum quisquis. 2 

Poscimur: si quid. 2 

Quae cura Patrum. 1 

Qualem rainistrum. 1 

Quando repos turn. 4 

Quantum distet ab Inaeho.....0 

Quern tu, Melpomene... 8 

Quern virum aut her3a. . 3 

Quid bellic('>sus. 1 

Quid dedicatum. 1 

Quid fles, Asterie.6 

Quid immerentes. 4 

Quid obseratis.11 

Quid tibi vis. 8 

Quis desiderio. 6 

Quis multa gracilis. 6 

Quo me, Bacche. 3 













































































































860 PROSODY.—VERSIFICATION-HORATIAN METRES. § 321 


Quo, qao, scelesti rultis.No. 4 

Quumtu, Lydia. 3 

Rcctius vives. 2 

Bogwre longo. 4 

Scribdrrs vario. 6 

iSeptlini, Gades.2 

Sic te Diva potens. 3 

Solvitur acris hiems.17 

Te maris et terrae. 8 


The following are the single m 
compositions, viz:— 

1. Dactylic Hexameter. 

2. Dactjdic Tetrameter a posteridn. 

8. Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic. 

4 . Adoiiic. 

6. Trimeter lambic. 

_ 6. lambic Trimeter Catalectio. 

7 . lambic Dimeter. 

8. Archilochian Iambic Dimetei Hy¬ 

permeter. 

9. lambic Dimeter Acepxialons. 

10. Sapphic. 


Tu ne quaesi^ris.No. J 

T vrrbena regum. 1 

Ulla si juris.1 

Uxor pauperis Ibyci.i 

Velox amcenum.1 

Vides, ut alta. 

Vile potabis. 2 

Vitas hinnuleo. 6 

Vixi Duellis. 1 


used by Horace in his Lync 


11. Choriambic Pentameter. 

12. Choriambic Tetrameter. 

13. Asclepiadic Tetrameter. 

14. Glyconic. 

15. Pberecratic. 

16. Choriambic Dimeter. 

17. Ionic a mindre. 

18. Greater Alcaic. 

19. Archilochian Heptameter. 

20. Lesser Alcaic. 






















§ 822 . 323 . 


APPENDIX.—GRAMMATICAL FIGURES. 


3(31 



APPENDIX. 


GRAMMATICAL FIGURES. 

§ Certain deviations from the regular form and con¬ 

struction of words, are called grammatical figures. These may 
relate either to Orthography and Etymology, or to Syntax. 

1. FIGURES OF ORTHOGRAPHY AND ETYMOLOGY. 

These are distinguished by the general name of metaplasm. 

1. Prosthesis is the prefixing of a letter or syllable to a word; as, gndius, fot 
naius; tetuli, for tuli. These, however, are rather the ancient customary toi ins, 
firorn which those now in use were formed by aphaeresis. 

2. Aphoereds is the taking of a letter or syllable from the beginning of a 
word; as, ’s/, for est; rdbonem^ for arrdbmem. 

3. KpeniMsis is the insertion of a letter or syllable in the middle of a word; 
as, dlituum, for dUium; Mdvors, for Mars. 

4. Smcdpe is the omission of a letter or syllable in the middle of a word; a£^ 
deum, (or dedinim; meilm f actdm, iox meoT^m factcnrum; scecla, for scecula ; Jlestif 
for Jlevisti; repostiis, for repdsitus; aspyds, for asperis. 

6. Orasis is the contraction of two vowels into one; as, cdgo, for cddgo; nil, 
for lUkll. 

6. Paragdge is the addition of a letter or syllable to the end of a word; as, 
med, for me; claudier, for claudi. 

7. Apocdpe is the omission of the final letter or syllable of a word; as, men', 
for mene; Antoni, for Antdnii. 

8. Antithesis is the substitution of one letter for another; as, oUi, for iM; 
(ptumus, for opiimus; afficio, for adficio. 0 is often thus used for «, especially 
after v; as, vultus, for mltus; servom, for servum. So after qu; as, cequom, for 
fzqxt.um. 

9. MetatMsis is the changing of the order of letters in a word; as pisiris, 
for pi-istis. 


II. FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 

^^23. The figures of Syntax are eUipsis, pleonasm, enal^ 
Inge, and hyperhdton. 

1. (a.) Ellipsis is the omission of some word or woffJs in a sen¬ 
tence; as, 

Aiunt, sell, hdmlnes. Ddriw Bystaspk, soil, filius. Cano, scil. igo. Quid 
multa f scil. dicam. Ex quo, scil. temp&re. Ferina, scil. caro. 

{b.) Ellipsis includes asyndeton, zeugirca, syllepsis, and prolepsis. 

(1.) is the omission of the copulative conjunction; as, dbiit,es> 

oesait, evOsii. erupit scil. ed. Cio. This is called in pure Latin dissdlotio. 

81 


562 


APPENDIX.—FIGUREJ OP SYNTAX. 


§32 


(2.) (a.) is the uniting of two nouns or two infinitires tc a verb, 

which, as to its meaning, is applicable to only one of them; as, Pacem an hcV 
lum glrem: (Sail.) where gerens is applicable to belluvi only, 'while pucem re¬ 
quires Semperne in sanguine, ^erro, Jugd vei'sdbimurf (Id.) where the 

verb does not properly apply to ferro. 

{b.) N^go is often thus used with two propositions, one of which is aSirma- 
live; as, Negnnt Ccesdretn 7nansura7n, postuldtdque mterpOsiia esse, for dieuntgtie 
postuldta . Cic. See ^ 209, Note 4. 

(c.) W Jcn an adjective or verb, referring to two or more nouns, agrees w’th 
one, and is understood with the rest, tlie construction is also sometimes called 
zeugma, but more comjnonly syllepsis; as, Kt gams, et vh'tus, nisi eu7n 7’e, 'viliot 
alga est. H(^r. Cdj)er tlbi salvus et litedi. Virg. Quatnvis ille nlger, qua7H7ns <u 
oandlda esses. Id. 

(8.; Syllepsis is when an adjective or verb, belonging to two or more nouns 
of difl'orent genders, persons, or numbers, agrees with one rather than another, 
as. Attoniti ndcitCde parent Baucis, timidusque Philemon. Ovid. Procn7nbU 
ftterque promts hwm, i. e. Deuedlim et Pyrrha. Id. Sustulimus mdnus et ego 
ct Balbus. Cic- So, Ipse cum fratre arfesse jussi sumus. Id. P7'^'ectisque ami- 
culo et lite7'is. Curt. See §§ 205, R. 2, and 209, R. 12, (3.) and (7.) 

(4.) Prdlepsis is when the parts, differing in number or person from the 
Avliole, are placed after it, the verb or adjective not being repe.ated; as, Prin- 
clpes uti'bique pngnam eieba7it, ab Sibinis Jlettius Curtius, ab Romanis Hostua 
Hostilius. Liv. Boni qudniam conve7il7nus a7nbo, tu cdld77ios injidre, ego dic&re 
ve7'sus. Virg. 

2. (a.) Pleonasm Is using a greater number of ■words than is neces¬ 
sary to express the meaning; as, 

Sic ore IdcCita est. Virg. Qtii magis vere rinc^re quam diu imperdre malit. Liv 
A’mo Cic. Forte fortdnd. \d, Pt'udetis scie7is. Ter. 

(b.) Under pleonasm are included parelcon, polysyndeton, hendi- 
udys, and perijihrdsis. 

(1.) Pfire/con is the addition of an unnecessary syllable or particle to pro¬ 
nouns, verbs, or adverbs; as, egdrnet, agedum, fortassean. Such additions, 
aowever, usually modify the meaning in some degree. 

(2.) Pdlysyndeton is a redundancy of conjunctions; as, Una Pwrusque Ndtua- 
que iniunt trefterque prOeellis Af7'icus. Virg. 

(3.) Hendindys is the expression of an idea by two notms connected by et 
-yue, or atque, instead of a noun and a limiting adjective or genitive; as, P'atd- 
ns libd77ius et auro, for au7'eis pdtet'is. Virg. Libro et silvest/'i subere clausam 
for lib7-o subei'is. Id. Cristis et auro. Ovid. Met. 3, 32. 

(4.) PmjoI?nJsfs or ciVcM/nf^cuh'o is a circuitous mode of expression; as, 715- 
niri foetus oviuni, i. e. ag7ii. Virg. 

3. (a.) Pinalldye is a change of words, or a substitution of one gen¬ 
der, number, case, person, tense, mood, or voice of the same word for 
another. 

{b.) Enallage includes antlmeria, heterosis, antiptosis, synesis, and 
anacoluihon. 

(1.) Antimena is the use of one part of .speech for another, or the abstract 
for the concrete; ns, Nostnmi istud vivere triste, for 7ujstra vita. Pers. Aliud 
eras. Id. Conjiigium ? for cmijugem. Virg. 

(2.) Heterosis is the use of one form of noun, pronouuj verb, etc., for another- 
as, Eqo rudque una pereo, quod r/iihi est earius, for qut mihi sum edrior. Ter 


S 324. APPENDIX.-TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. 363 


Bomanus prcdio victor, for Rdmini victdres. Liv. Many words are used by the 
poets in the plural instead of the singular; as. colla, co/da, 6ra, etc. Sse § 98. 
Me truncm illapstis cerebro sustfderat, for sustuhsset. Hor. See § 259, R. 4. 

(3.) Antiptosis is the use of one case for another; as, Cui nunc cognomen 
liilo, for lulus. Virg. ^ 204, R. 8. Uxor invicti J&vis esse nescis, for te esse ux5- 
rem. Hor. ^ 210, R. 6. 

(4.) Synesis, or syntMsis., is adapting the construction to the sense of a word, 
father than to its gender or number; as, Subeunt 7'e^cea juventus azixilio lardi. 
StaL Concursus populi mirantium (mid rei est. Liv. Pars in crucem acti. Sail. 
Vbi illic est scelus, qui me perdidits Ter. Id inea mXnime referi^ qui sum ndtu 
maximus. Id. See ^ 205, R. 3, (1.) and (3.), and § 206, (12.) 

(5.) Andcdluthon is a disagreement in construction between the latter and 
former part of a sentence; as, Nam nos omnes, guibus est dUcunde dlUjuis objectm 
]dbos, ovine (/nod est interea tempus, priusquam id rescitum est, lucro eat. 1 er. 
In this example, the writer began as if he intended to say lucro hdbhnus, and 
ended as if he had said Tiobis omnibus, leaving rxs omnes without its verb. 

4. (a.) Hyperhdton is a transgression of the usual order of words 
or clauses. 

(&.) Hyperbaton includes dnastrdphe, hysteron prdteron, hypalldge^ 
synchysis, tmesis, and parenthesis. 

(1.) Anastrbphe is an inversion of the order of two words; as, Transtra per 
et 7'emos, for per transtra. Virg. Collo dare brdchia circum, for drcumddre. Id. 
Nox erit una super, for suph'h'it. Ovid. Et fdcit are, for drifdcit. Lucr. 

(2.) Hystiron prdtd'on is reversing the natural order of the sense; as, Mdrid- 
mur, et in niedia arma mdmus. Virg. Vdlet aU/ue vlvit. Ter. 

(3.) Hypalldge is an interchange of constructions; as. In ndva fert drAmus 
mutdtas dlcd'e formas corpdra, for coi'pdra mutdta in n6vas formas. (Jvid. Ddre 
classlbus Austrcs, for dare classes Austins. Virg. 

(4.) Synchysis is a confused position of words; as, Saxa vdcant Jtdli, Tnidiis 
quae in fiucUbus, dras, for quxje saxa in midiis fuctibus, Itdli vdcant dras. Virg. 

(5.) Tmesis or dincdpe is the separation of the parts of a compound word; 
as, Septem subjecta tridni (yens, for se/itentridni. Virg. Quae me cum/ue vdcant 
terrce. Id. Per niihi, per, inquam, grdtum feceris. Cic. 

(6.) Parenthesis or dialysis is the insertion of a word or words in a sentence 
interrupting the natural connection; as, Tityre dum redeo, (brevis est via,) 
pasce cdpeUas. Virg. 

Remark. To the above may be added archaism and Hellenism, 
which belong both to tl^ figures of etymology and to those of syntax. 

(1.) Archaism is the use of ancient fonns or constructions; as, auldt, for 
aulae; sendti, for sendtus; fuat, for sit; prdhlbesso, for pi-dhibuero; impetrassert, 
for impetrdturum esse; fdner, for fdii; nenu, for non; endo, for in;—Operam 
ibutitur, for dperd. Ter. Quid tibi hanc curdtio est rem^ Plaut. 

(2.) Hellenism is the use of Greek forms or constructions; as, HHme, for 
ndlenn ; Anti/jhon, for Antipho; auras (gen.), for avrce; PiUlddos, Pidlada, for 
Pallddis, Pallddem; Trddsin, Trdddas, for Troddibus, Troades;—Abstineto ird- 
rum. Hor. Teinpus desistere puynce. Virg. 

§ 33 4. (1.) To the grammatical figures may not improperly be subjoined cep- 

ain others, which are often referred to in philological works, and which are called 

TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. 

(2.) A rhetorical fgui'e is a mode of expression different from the direct and 
simple way of expressing the same sense. The turning of a wo'i'd from its 
iriginal and customary meaning, is called a trope. 


JI64 APPENDIX.—TROPES AND FIGCBES OP RHETORIC. § 324 


1. (a.) A metaphor is the transferring of a word from the object to which it 

a >erly belongs, and applying it to another, to which that object has some 
cgy; as, Ridet d//er. The field smiles. Virg. ^tas aurea^ The gclden age. 
Ovid. NaufVagia fortutue, The wreck of fortune. Cic. Mentis oculi. The eyes 
of the mind. Id. Virtm anlmuni yldrue. stimulis concitai. The harshness of a 
metaphor is often softened by means of qudsi^ tamquam, quidam, or ut ita dicam; 
as, In und phildsdphid qu-^i tabernaculum vitoe sues colldcarunt. Id. Opimum 
qaoddam et tamquam adipatse dictionis yenus. Id. 

(6.) GUachi'esis or dbusio is a bold or harsh metaphor; as, Vir yr^yis ipse 
aS^ier. Virg. Earns per Sic ulus equitavit undas. Hor. 

a. Metonymy is substituting the name of an object for that of another to 
which it has a certain relation; as the cause for the effect, the container for 
what is contained, the property for the substance, the sign for the thing signi¬ 
fied, and their contraries; the parts of the body for certain affections; the pos¬ 
sessor for the thing possessed; place and time for the persons or things which 
they comprise, etc.; as, Moridtes, ior hdmlnes. Virg. Amor duri Martis, i. e, 
btUi. Id. fruyes Cererem ap 2 )elldmas, vlnum autem Libei'um. Cic. Cupio vigl- 
liam meam tibi tradere, i. e. meam curam. Id. Pallida moi's. Hor. Hausit p^ 
teram, i. e. vlnum. Virg. Vina edrdnant., i. e. pdth'am. Id. Necte ternos colores, 
i. e. tria ftla dlversi cdldris. Id. Cedant arma togse, i. e. bellum pad. Cic. 
Saecula mltescent, i. e. hdmines in sceculis. Virg. Vivat Pdcuvius vel Nestdra 
totum. Juv. Doctrlnd Graecia nos superdbat, for Greed siipd-dbant. Cic. Pagi 
centum Suevorum ad rlpas Rheni coush/ei'ant, ior pay drum inedtis. Cajs. Tempera 
dmlcdrum, for res adversce. Cic. Claudius leye prcedidtdrid vendlis qyependit.^ 
for Claudii preedium. Suet. Vici ad Janum medium sedentes, for Jdni vi- 
cum. Cic. 

3. Synecdoche is putting a whole for a part, a genus for a species, a singular 
for a plural, and their contraries; also the material for the thing made of it^ 
a definite for an indefinite number, etc.; as, Fontem ferebant. Id. Tectum, for 
ddmus. Id. Armdto milite complent, for armdtis mllltibus. Id. Ferrum, for y\&- 
dius. Id. Qui Cdrinthiis 6[)erlbus dbundant, i. e. vdsis. Cic. Urbem, urbem, mt 
Ru/e, cdle, i. e. Rdmam. Cic. Centum puer artium, i. e. multdrum. 

4. Irony is the intentional use of words which express a sense contrary to 
that which the writer or speaker means to convey; as, Salve bone vir, curasti 
probe. Ter. Egregiam vero laudem, et spolia ampla referiis, tuque, puerque 
i^ius. Virg. 

6. Uyperhdle is the magnifying or diminishing of a thing beyond the truth 
L8, Ijise arduus, altdque pulsat slu^ra. Virg. Odor Euro. Id. 

6. Metdlepsis is the including of several tropes in one word; as. Post aliquot 
iristas. Virg. Here aristas is put for messes, and this for annos. 

7. (a.) Alleyory is a consistent series of metaphop, designed to illustrate quo 
subject by another; as, 0 navis, ref ereni in mdretendvi jiuctus. Kor. 

(6.) An obscure allegory or riddle is called an ceniyma; as. Die, qutbus m 
tert'is ires pdteat coeli spdtium non amjjlius ulnas. Virg. 

8. Antdndmdsia is using a proper noun for a common one, and the contrary; 
as, Irus et est subito, qui mddo Croesus erat, for and dives. Ovid. So, by 

periphrasis, pdtor Rhdddni, for Gallus. Hor. Eversor Carthdyinis, for Scipio. 
Quint. Eldquentioe qivinceqjs, for Cicero. Id. Tydides, for Diomedes. Virg. 

9. lAtMes is a mode of expressing something by denying the’ contrary; as, 
Von laudo, I blame. Ter. Non innoxia verba. Virg. 

10. Antiphrdsis is using a word in a sense opposite to its proper meaning, 
as, Auri Sacra fdines. Virg. 

11. Euphemism is the use of softened language to express what is offensive 
or distressing; as, St quid accidisset Coesdri, i. e. si mortuus esset. Veil. 

12. Antunacldsis or jmnning is the use of the same word in different senses 
as, Quis neget yEneev ndtum de sthpe Nerdnem? Sustulit hie mdtrem, sustuiP 
ille patrem. Epigr. Amari jucvndum est, si curetur ne quid insit amari. Cic. 


324. APPENDIX.—TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. 363 


13. Anaphdra or Spdnaphdrn is the repetition of a word at the beginning of 
nccessive clauses; as, Nihilne te nocturnum prcesldium paldtii, nihil urbis 

Uo’, nihil tiinor pOpuli, etc. Cic. Te, dulcis conjux, te, solo in lltdi'C secum, to, 
venienie die, te, decMcnte, ednebat. Virg. 

14. Epistrdphe is the repetition of a word at the end of successive clauses; 
as, Pasnos pdpulus Rdmdnns Justitid vicit, armis vicit, IMrdUtdte vicit. Cic. In 
pure Latin this figure is called conversio. 

15. Sympldce is the repetition of a word at the beginning, and of another at 
the end, of successive clauses, and hence it includes the anaphora anti the 
epistrophe; as, Quis l?yem tulilf Rullus: Quis mdjdi'em pdjndi jfcirtem snffriV- 
giis prlvdvit'? Rullus: Quis C(5 wh7«s prafuitf ycZem Rullus. Cic. 

16. Epdndlepsis is a repetition of the same word or sentence after interven- 
ing words or clauses. See Virg. Geor. II. 4—7. 

17. Anddiplosis is the use of the same word at the end of o:ie clause, and the 
beginning of another; as, SequUur pulcherrimus Astur, Astur fldens. Virg. 

A. 10, 180. Nunc eiiam nudes in hdrum conspectum venire, venire nudes in hdrum 
conspectum f Cic. This is sometimes called epdnastrdphe. 

18. Epdnndipldsis is the use of the same word both at the beginning and end 
of a sentence; as, Crescit dinor nummi, quantum ipsa picunia crescit. Juv. 

19. Epdnddos or rSgressio is the repetition of the same words in an inverted ^ 
order; as, Q-udelis mdter mdyis, an puer imprdbus ille^ Imprdbus ille puer, criir 
delis tu qu6que, mdter. Virg. 

20. Epizeuxis is a repetition of the same word for the sake of emphasis; as, 
Exci'tate, excitate eum ab infens. Cic. Ah Corydon, Cory^don, qum te dementia 
cepiil Virg. Ibimus,ibimus, utcumque prcecMes. Hor. 

21. Climax is a gradual amplification by means of a continued anadiplosis, 
each successive clause beginning with the conclusion of that which precedes 
it; as, Quee reliqua spes manet lioertdtis, si illis et quod libet, licet; ei quod licet, 
possunt; et quod possunt, audent; et quod audent, vobis molestum non estV Cic. 
This, in pure Latin, is called grdddtio. 

22. Incrementum is an amplification without a strict climax; as, Fdclnus est, 
t inciri ctvem Romdnum ; scelus, verberdri ; pr6pe parricidium, nbedri; quid di¬ 
cam in crucem tolli f Cic. 

23. Pdlyptdton is the repetition of a word in different cases, genders, num¬ 
bers, tenses, etc.; as. Jam clipeus cllpeis, umbdne repellUur umbo; ense ndnaa 
ensis, j)ede pes, et cusplde cuspis. Stat. 

24. Paregmenon is the use of several words of the same origin, in one sen¬ 
tence; as, Abesse non p6test, quin ejusdem hdminis sit, qui improbos probet, pro- 
bos improbare. Cic. Istam pugnam pugnabo. Plant. 

25. Pdrdndmdsia is the use of words which resemble each other in sound ’ 
as, Ajnnr et melle et felle est fecundissimus. Plant. Clvem bdmirum artium 
bbndnim partium. Cic. Amantes sunt amentes. Ter. This figure is sometimes 
tailed oynbmlndtio. 

26. JIdmoeojrrdpheron or alliteration is the use in the same sentence of sev¬ 
eral words beginning with the same letter; as, 0 Tiie, tide TiUi, tibi tanta, 
tyranne, tulisti. Enn. Neu patriae vdlldas in viscera vertite vires. Virg. 

27. Antithesis is the placing of different or opposite words or sentiments in 
lontrast; as, Htijus ccrdtionls difficilius est exitum quam principium invinire. 
Cic. CiBsar beneflciis ac munificentia niaynus hdbebdtur; integritSte vltsa 
Cato. Sail. 

28. Orymbrm unites words of contrary significations, thus producing a seem¬ 
ing contradiction; as, Concordia discors. llor. Quum tdeent, ctdmant. Cic. 

29. Sifnmymia is the use of different words or expressions having the same 
mt'Drt;*as, Non feram, non pdtiar, non sin ^m. Cic. Prdmiito, recipio, spon- 
■> 60 . Id. 


81* 


0 APPENDIX.—TROPES AND FIGURES OF RHETORIC. § 325 


30. ParabH^a or Simile is the comparison cf one thing with anotner; as, Ri- 
vente te, tamquam ttrpem e Idtlbulis, dculis.eminentibus, tnjidto coUo, tumldis cer- 
Oicibiis, intulisti. Gic. 

31. ■^rdtHis is an earnest question, and often implies a strong affirmation of 
the contrary; as, Q'ediiis dvectos hastes f Virg. lieu! quos me aiqiUira possuni 
accipire^ fd. 

32. Epdnorthosis or Cbrrectio is the recalling of a word, in order to place a 
stronger or more significant one in its stead; as, Flliuin unlcum dddlesceniulum 
habeo: ah! quiddixif me habere? iTno habui. Ter. 

33. Apdsidphis, Rettcentia, or Interruptio, is leaving a sentence unfinished 
in consequence of some emotion of the mind; as, Quos igo — sed motos proestai 
conpdiiere Jiuctus. Virg. 

84. Prds6pd]xma or personification represents inanimate things as acting or 
speaking, and persons dead or absent as alive and present: as, Uuce {patria) 
t^um, Oitilina, sic dyit. Cic. Virtus sumii aut pdnit secures. Hor. 

35. Apostrdplie is a turning off from the regular course of the subject, to ad¬ 
dress some person or thing; as, Vi pdtltur; quid non mortdlia peetdra edgis^ 
auri sacra fames! Virg. 

38. Pdrdleipsis is a pretended omission of something, in order to render it 
more observed. See Cic. Cat. 1, 6, 14. 

37. J^lphonema or Accldmdtw is an exclamation or grave reflection on some¬ 
thing said before; as, Tantce mdlis drat Rdmdnam condere geniem. Virg. 

38. Ecphdnesis or Excldmdtio shows some violent emotion of the mind; as, 
0 tempura ! 0 mores ! 

39. Apdria, Didpdresis, or Dubltdtio, expresses a doubt in regard to what is 
to be said or done; as, Quos accedam, aut quos appeUem t Sail. 

40. Prdlepsis is the anticipation of an objection before it is made, or of an 
event before it occurs; as, verum anceps pugnoe fuerat foi’tuna. Fuisset: 
Quern metui moritura ? Virg. 

§ 3^.% To the figures of rhetoric may be subjoined the follow¬ 
ing terms, used to designate defects or blemishes in style:— 

1. Barharhm is either the use of a foreign word, or a violation of the rules 
of orthography, etymology^ or prosody; as, rigordsus, for Hgidus or severus; 
domvilnus, for didminus; dam, for dedi. 

2. Solecism is a violation of the rules of syntax; as, Vdnus pulcher ; vos inryl" 
iemus. 

3. Neotensm is the use of words or phrases introduced by authors living 
subsequently to the best ages of Latinity; as, murdi'um, a mimier; conaidduld- 
''ivs, a constable. 

4. Tautology is a repetition of the same meaning in different words; as, Jam 
tos aciem, et proelia, et hostem poscitis. Sil. 

6. Amphibdlia is the use of equivocal words or constructions; as. Callus, 
Gaul, or a cock. Aio te, ^acida, Romanos vincere posse. Quint. 

6. /(ffbftsm is a construction peculiar to one or more languages: thus, the 
ablative after comparatives is a Latinism. When a peculiarity of one languagf 
is imitated in another, this is also called idiotwn. Thus, Mitte mihi verbttn 
.nstead of Fac me certidrem, is an Anglicism. 


§ 326. APPENDIX.—ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING-TIME. 36? 


ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING. 
I. OF TIME. 


1. The Roman Day. 

§»26. (1 .) With the Romans, as with us, the day was either 

civil or natural. Their civil day, like ours, extended from midnight 
to midnight. The natural day continued from sunrise to sunset, as, 
on the other hand, the night extended fr^ra sunset to sunrise. The 
natural day and night were each divided into twelve equal pans or 
hours, which were consequently of ditfcrent length, according to the 
varjdng length of the days and nights in the successive seasons of the 
year. It was only at the equinox that the diurnal and nocturnal 
hours of the Romans were ecjual to each other, as each was then 
equal to the twenty-fourth part of the civil day. 

(2.) In the Roman camp the night was further divided into four 
watches (vigilice), consisting each of three Roman hours, the second 
and fourth watches ending respectively at midnight and at sunrise 


2. The Roman Month and Year. 

(1.) The calendar of the Romans, as rectified by Julius Caesav, 
agreed with our own in the number of months, and of the days in 
each, according to the following table:— 

Jannarixis . 31 days. Maius . . 31 days. September 30 days. 

Febriiarius 28 or 29. Junius. . 30 “ October . . 31 “ 

Martius. . . 31 days. Quintilis 31 “ November 30 “ 

Aprilis ... 30 “ Sextilis. 31 “ December 31 “ 

In early times the Roman year began with March, and the names 
Qumtllis, Sextilis, September, etc., indicated the distance of those 
months from the commencement of the year. Quintilis and Sextilis 
were afterwards called Julius and Augustus in honor of the first two 
emperors. The Romans, instead of reckoning in an uninterrupted 
series from the first to the last day of a month, had in each month 
three points or periods from which their days were counted—the 
Calends, the Nones, and theJdes. The Calends [Cdlendce], were al¬ 
ways the Jirst day of the month. The Nones (Nonce), were the ffth^ 
und the Ides (Idas), the thirteenth; except in March, May, July, and 
October, when the Nones occurred on the seventh day, and the Ides 
jn the ffteenth. 

(2.) They always counted forward, from the day whose date was 
to be determined, to the next Calends, Nones, or Ides, and desig¬ 
nated the day by its distance before such point. After the first day 
of the mouth, therefore, they began to reckon so many days before 
'^e Nones ; after the Nones, so mc.ny days oefore the Ides; and after 
he Ides, so many before the Caienda, of the next month. 

Thus, the second of January was denoted by quarto Nonas Jdnunrias, oi 
Jdnudrii, scil. die ante: the third, tertio Nonas; the fourth, pridio Nonas; 
nnd the fifth, Nmis. The sixth was denoted by octavo Idus; the seventh 


sJ68 APPENDIX.-ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING-TxME. § 326 


teptimoldm; and so on to the thirteenth, on which the Ides fell. The four* 
loenth was denoted by undMgestmo C&lendas Febriidrias, or Februdrii ; and sc 
on to the end of the month. 

(3.) The day preceding the Calends, Nones, and Ides, was termed 
pridie Calendas, etc., scil. ante: in designating the other days, both 
the day of the Calends, etc., and that whose date was to be cleten 
mined, were reckoned; hence the second day before the CaIend8^ 
etc., was called tertio, the third quarto, etc. 

(4.) To reduce the Roman calendar to our own, therefore, when 
the day is between the f^r.loads and the Nones or between the Nonea 
and the Ides, it is necessary to take one from the number denoting 
the distance of the given day from the Nones or the Ides, and to sub¬ 
tract the remainder from the number of the day on which the Nones 
or Ides fell in the given month. 

Thus, to determ I’ne the day equivalent to IV. Nonas Jdnudrias, we take 
1 from 4, and subtract the remainder, 3, from 5, the day on which the Noner, 
of January fell (i. e. 4—1=3, and 5—3=2): this gives 2, or the second of Jan¬ 
uary, for the day in question. So VI. Idm AprUis: the Ides of April falling 
upon the 13th, we take (6—1, i. e.) 6 from 13, which leaves 8 (i. e. 6—1=5, 
and 13—5=8): the expression, therefore, denotes the 8th of April. 

(a.) In reckoning the days before the Calends, as they are not the 
last day of the current month, but the first of the following, it is 
necessary to subtract two frodi the number denoting the distance of 
the given day from the Calends of the following month, and to take 
the remainder from the number of days in the month. 

Thus, XV. Cal. Quintiles is 16—2=13, and 30—13=17, i. e. the Roman date 
XV. Cal. Quint, is equivalent to the 17th of June. 

{h.) To reduce our calendar to the Roman, the preceding method 
is to be reversed. Thus when the given day is between the Calends 
and the Nones or between the Nones and the Ides, (unless it be the 
day before the Nones or the Ides), we are to add one to the number 
denoting the day of the month, according to our reckoning, on which 
the Nones or Ides fell. But if the day is after the Ides, (unless it be 
the last day of the month), we must add two to the number of days 
in the month, and then subtract the number denoting the day of the 
month as expressed in our reckoning. The remainder will be the 
day before the Nones, Ides or Calends. 

Thus to find the Roman date corresponding to the third of April, we have 
6-1-1—3=3; the required date, therefore, is III. Non. Apr. —To find the proper 
Roman expression for our tenth of December we have 13-f 1—10=4; the date 
therefore, is IV. Id. Dec. —The Roman expression for the 22d of August, in 
pursuance of the above rule, is found thus, 31-1-2—22=11, and the date is ^XJ 
Oil. Sept. 

(5.j In leap year, both the 24th and 25th of February were called 
the sixth before the Calends of March. The 24th was called dies 
\(sextus, and the year itself annus hisextus, bissextile or leap year. 

(a.) The day after the Calends, etc., was sometimes called postridie cdletu- 
das, etc. 

(6.) The names of the months are properly adjectives, though often use/l a» 
nouns, mensis being understood. 


§ 326. APPENDIX.—ROMAN MOE OF RECKONING—TIME. 360 


(6.) The correspondence of our calendar with that of the Romans 
is exWbited in the following 

O 


TABLE. 


Days of 
our months. 

]\Iar. 

JUL. 

Mai. 

Oct. 

Jan. Aug. 
Dec. 

Apr. 

Sept. 

JUN. 

Nov. 

1 

Febr. 

1 

Calendae. 

Calendse. 

Calendae. 

Calendae. 

2 

VI. 

Nonas. 

IV. Nonas. 

IV. Nonas. 

IV. Nonas. 

3 

V. 

il 

III. 

ii 

III. 

ii 

HI. 

ii 

4 

IV. 

U 

Pridie 

it 

Pridie 

ii 

Pridie 

ii 

5 

III. 

ii 

Nonae. 


Nonae. 


Non®. 


6 

Pridie Non. 

VIII. Idus. 

VTII. 

Idus. 

VIII. Idus. 

7 

Nonae 


VII. 

ii 

VII. 

it 

VII. 

ii 

8 

VIII. 

Idus. 

VI. 

ii 

VI. 

it 

VI. 

ii 

9 

VII. 

ii 

V. 

«i 

V. 

it 

V. 

it 

10 

VI. 

it 

IV. 

ii 

IV. 

it 

IV. 

ii 

11 

V. 

ii 

III. 

ii 

III. 

it 

III. 

ii 

12 

IV. 

ii 

Pridie 

it 

Pridie 

it 

Pridie 

it 

13 

III. 

ii 

Idus. 


Idus. 


Idus. 


14 

Pridie Id. 

XIX. 

Cal. 

XVIII. Cal. 

XVI. 

Cal. 

16 

Idus. 


XVIII. 


XVII. 

ii 

XV. 

it 

16 

XVII. Cal. 

XVII. 

ii 

XVI. 

ii 

XIV. 

it 

17 

XVI. 

ii 

XVI. 

ii 

XV. 

ii 

XIII. 

it 

18 

XV. 

ii 

XV. 

ii 

XIV. 

ii • 

XII. 

it 

19 

XIV. 

ii 

XIV. 

ii 

XIII. 

ii 

XI. 

it 

20 

XIII. 

ii 

XIII. 

ii 

XII. 

ii 

X. 

ii 

21 

XII. 

ii 

XU. 

ii 

XL 

ii 

IX. 

it 

22 

XI. 

ii 

XI. 

ii 

X. 

it 

VIII. 

t( 

23 

X. 

ii 

X. 

ii 

IX. 

ii 

VII. 

it 

24 

IX. 

ii 

IX. 

ii 

VIII. 

ii 

VI. 

il 

26 

VIII. 

ii 

VIII. 

it 

VII. 

it 

V. 

it 

26 

VII. 

ii 

VII. 

ii 

VI. 

ii 

IV. 

it 

27 

VI. 

it 

VI. 

ii 

V. 

it 

III. 

it 

28 

V. 

ii 

V. 

it 

IV. 

ii 

Pridie 

“ Mar 

29 

IV. 

ii 

IV. 

it 

HI. 

it 



30 

III. 

it 

III. 

it 

Pridie Cal. 



L 31 

Pridie Cal. 

Pridie Cal. 






(7.) In leap-year the last seven days of February were reckoned thus:— 

23. Vn. Cdlendas Martias. 27. IV. Cal. Mart. 

24. bisexto Cal. Mart. 28. III. “ “ 

25. VI. Cal. Mart. 29. pridie Cal. Mart. 

26. V. “ “ 

(a.) Hence in reducing a date of February in leap-year to the Roman date, 
for the first 23 days we proceed according to the preceding rule in 4, (6,), as if 
the month had only 28 days. The 24th is marked as bisexto Cal. Mart.., and to 
obtain the proper expression for the remaining five days we regard the month 
as having 29 davs. Thus the 27th of Februarv in leap-year is 29-f 2—27=4, 
and the proper Roman expression is IV. Cal. Mart. 

(b.) On the other hand, to reduce a Roman date of Fcbraary in leap-vear to 
onr date we reverse the above process, and during the Nones and Ides and 
until the 177. Cdlendas Martias we recko,.. *he month to have only 28 days:— 
Msextc Ccd. Mart, is set down as the 24th, and for the remaining ilays desig- 
Bted as VI. V. IV. Ill and pridie Cal. Mari, we reckon the month to have 
29 days. Thus III Cai Mart, is 3—2=1, and 29—1=28, and the given day is 
equivalent to the 2Sth c f February. 











57^^ A-rPENDIX.—ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING MONET. § 32'^ 


(8.) The Latins not only said terfio,/)n<Ke, etc., C&lendas, etc., but also ant{ 
Hem tertiuin, etc., Cdlendas, etc.; and the latter form in Cicero and Livy is 
far more common than the former, and is usually written thus, a. d. Ill 
Cal., etc. 

(9.) The expression ante diem was used as an indeclinable noun, ana isi 
joined with in and ex; as. Consul Ldt'mar feHas in ante diem iertium Idas Sex 
tills edixit, The consul appointed the Laliii festival for the third day before the 
Ides of August. Liv. SujtpUcatio indicta est ex ante diem quinium idus Octobres. 
Id. So, Ad pridie Nonas Maias. Cic. 

(10.) The week of seven days (hebddmas), was not in use among the Romans 
under the republic, but was introduced under the emperors. The days of the 
week were then named from the planets; die^ Solis, Sunday; dies Luna, Mon« 
day; dies Mortis, Tuesday; dies Mercurii, Wednesday; dies J&vis, Thursday; 
dies Vhieris, Friday; dies ^turni, Saturday. 

(11.) The term nundlna (from ndvem — dies) denotes the regular market day 
at Rome when the country people came into the city; but it is not used for the 
purpose of denoting the period of eight days intervening between two succes¬ 
sive market days. 

(12.) The year at Rome was designated by the names of the consuls for 
that year. Thus Virgil was born, M. Licinio Crasso et On. Pompeio Mayno 
consulibus, i. e. in the year of the consulship of Crassus and Pompey. But in 
Roman authors events are often dated from the year in whicn Rome was 
founded, which, according to Varro, was in the 753d year before the birth 
of Christ. This period was designated as anno urbis condiUe, and by ab¬ 
breviation, a. u. c., or simply u. c., and sometimes by a. alone, before the 
numerals. 

Thus the birth of Virgil was a. u. c. 684. To reduce such dates to our reckoning, if 
Che given number is less than 754, we subtract it from the latter number, and the dif¬ 
ference is the required year before Christ. The birth of Virgil therefore is 754—684=70 
before Christ.—But if the number of the Roman year exceeds 753, we deduct 753 from 
the given number, and the remainder is the year after Christ. For example, the em¬ 
peror Augustus died a. u. c. 767, and the corresponding year of our er^ w -'*53=«14. 


U. TABLES OF MONEY, WEIGHT, AND MEASURE. 


Of the As. 


§ 327. The Romans used this word {As) to denote, I. The copper coin, 
whose value (in the time of Cicero) was about one cent and a half of our 
money. II. The unit of Aveight (libra), or of measure (jugerum). III. Any 
unit or integer considered as divisible; as, of inheritances, interest, houses, etc.; 
whence ex asse heres, one who inherits the whole. The multiples of the As aro, 
Dfipondius {duo pondo; for the As originally weighed a pound), i. e. 2 Asses; 
Sestertius {sesqui tertius), i. e. 2J Asses; Tressis, e. 3 Asses; Quati-ussis, i. c. 
4 Asses; and so on to Centussis, i. e. 100 Asses. The As, Avhatever unit it re¬ 
presented, was divided into twelve parts or uncia, and the different fracLous 
received different names, as follows: 


Uncia. 

As. 12 

Deunx. 11 

1)( xtans. 10 

Dodrans. 9 

Bes.f .. 8 

8<iplunx... 7 

^(irnis. 6 


Uncia 


Quincunx. 6 

Triens. 4 

Quadrans, or Teruncius. 3 

Sextans. 2 

Uncia. l 


Sescuicia. d 


















§ 327 . APPENDIX.-TABLES OP MONET, WEIGHT. ETC. 371 

The VnciQ w&c divided in the following manner:— 

1 Uncia contained 2 Semunciae. 

“ “ 3 Duellse. 

“ “ 4 Sicilici. 

“ “ 6 Sextulse. 

“ “ 8 Drachmae. 

** “ 24 Scriipula. 

“ “ 48 Oboli. 


Roman Coins. 

These were the T§runciti8, Sembella, and As or Llbella, of copper; the Ses 
terti'M, Quindriiis (or ViciOi'idiiis)^ and Denarius, of silver: and the Aureus 
of gold. 


_ VU5. iU. 

The Teruncius. 0 0 3.9 

2 Teruncii make 1 Sembella. 0 0 7.8 

2 Sembellae “ 1 As or Libella..... 0 1 6.6 

2^ Asses* “ 1 Sestertius. 0 3 9 

2 Sestertii “ 1 Quinarius. 0 7 8 

2 Quinarii “ 1 Denarius. 0 16 6 

26 Denarii “ 1 Aureus. 3 90 0 


• Sometimes also (in copper) the triens, sextans, uncia, sextula, and dupondins. 


Roman Computation of Monbt. 
Sestertii Nutnmi. 


9 Gts. M. 

Sestertius (or nummus). 0 3 9 

Decern sestertii. 0 39 0 

Centum sestertii. 3 90 0 

Mille sestertii (equal to a sestertium). 89 0 0 

Seatertia. 

Sestertium (equal to mille sestertii). 39 0 0 

Decern sestertia. 390 0 0 

Centura, centum sestertia, or centum millia sestertiOm. 3900 0 0 

Decies sestertium, or decies centena millia nummum. 39000 0 0 

Centies, or centies h. s. 390000 0 0 

Millies H. 8. 3900000 0 0 

Millies centies h. s. 4290000 0 0 


N. B.—The marks denoting a Sestertius nummus are IIS., LLS., HS., which are pro¬ 
perly abbreviations for 2 1-2 aa^es. Observe, also, that when a line is placed over the 
cumbers, centena millia is understood, as in the case of the numeral adverbs; thus, II, S 

HO. is millies centies HS.; whereas HS MO. is only 1100 Sestertii. 


Roman Calculation of Interest. 

The Romans received interest on their loans monthly, their highest rate be- 
mg one per cent, (centesima), a month, i. e. 12 per cent a year. As this was 
Jie highest rate, it was reckoned as tho as or unit in reference to the lower 
-ates, which were denominated, according to the usual division of the as, semis- 
ses, tnentes, quadranies, etc., i. e. the half third, fourth, etc., of the as or ot 
12 per lent, according to the following tabie:— 




















B72 


APPENDIX.—TABLES OF MONET, WEIGHT, ETC. § SS? 


Per cent, a year 

Aflses iisurffi or centeslmse. 12 

Semisses usurse. 6 

Trientes usuras. 4 

Quadrantes usurae. 8 

Sextantes usurae. 2 

Unciae usurae. 1 

Quincunces usurae. b 

Septunces usurae. 7 

Besses usurae. 8 

Dodrantes usurae. 9 

Dextantes usurae... 10 

Deunces usurae. 11 


Romajj Weights. 

Oz. Dwtfl. Gr. 

SlUqua. 0 0 3.036 

8 Slliquae make 1 Obolus. 0 0 9.107 

2 Oboli “ 1 Scrupulum.... 0 0 18.214 

8 Scrupula “ 1 Drachma. 0 2 6.643 

1 } Drachma “ 1 Sextula. 0 8 0.867 

IJ Sextula “ 1 Siclllcus. 0 4 13.286 

IJ Siclllcus “ 1 Duella. 0 6 1.714 

8 Duellae “ 1 Uncia. 0 18 6.143 

12 Unciae “ 1 Libra* (As)... 10 18 13.714 


* The Libra was also divided, according to the fractions of the As, into Deunx, ete. 


Bomah Measukes for Things Dry. 


Englisk Corn Measure. 





Peck. 

Gal. 

Pint. 

Sol. in 


LIgula. 


0 

0 

0 1-48 

0.01 

4 

Ligulae make 

1 Cyathus. 

0 

0 

0 1-12 

0.04 

IJ 

Cyathus “ 

1 Acetabulum... 

0 

0 

0 1-8 

0.06 

4 

Acetabula“ 

1 Hemina. 

0 

0 

0 1-2 

0.24 

2 

Eemin® “ 

1 Sextarius. 

0 

0 

1 

0.48 

16 

SextMii “ 

1 Modius. 

1 

0 

0 

7.68 


Roman Measures for Things Liquid. 

English Wine Measure. 
Galls. Pints. • Sol. In, 



Llcmla.... 



0 

0 1-48 

0.117 

4 

LlgulsB make 

1 Cyathus. 

0 

0 1-12 

0.469 

11 

Cyathus 

(( 

1 Acetabulum. 

0 

0 1-8 

0.704 

2 

Acetabula 

(( 

1 Quartarius. 

0 

0 1-4 

1.409 

2 

Quartarii 

tt 

1 Hemina. 

0 

0 1-2 

2.876 

2 

Heminse 

(( 

1 Sextarius*. 

0 

1 

6.636 

6 

Sexlarii 

(( 

1 Congius. 

0 

7 

4.942 

4 

Ccngii 

(t 

1 Uma. 

3 

4 1-2 

6.33 

2 

Um» 

(( 

1 Amphora (or Quadrantal). 

7 

1 

10.66 

20 

Amphoras 

(t 

1 Culeus. 

143 

3 

11.095 


•The Sext&rius was also divided into twelve equal parts, called cySthi, and therefore 
the cilices were denominated sextantes, quadrantes, tnentes, according to the number o 
cyatki which they contained. 

N. B.— Cidus, congiarius, and ddlium, are the names of certain vessels, not measwres. 
of capacity. 



































4 327. APPENDIX.—TABLES OP MONET, WEIGHT, ETC. 373 


Roman 

Digitus transversus. 

Measures 

CP Length. 

English 

paces. 

. 0 

Feet. 

0 

Inch. Dec. 
0.725 1-4 

1 1-6 Digitus make 

1 Uncia.... 


0 

0 

0.967 

8 Unciae “ 

1 Pulmus minor... 

0 

0 

2.901 

4 Pal mi mlnores “ 

1 Pes. 


0 

0 

11.604 

1 1-4 Pes “ 

1 Palmipes. 


0 

1 

2.505 

1 1-6 Palmipes “ 

1 Cubitus.. 


0 

1 

6.100 

1 2-3 Cubitus “ 

1 Gradus... 


0 

2 

6.01 

2 Gradus “ 

1 P«ssus.. 


0 

4 

10 02 

125 Passus “ 

1 Stadium 

. . 

120 

4 

4 5 

8 Stadia “ 

1 MUliarium. 

967 

A 

0 

Roman Square 

Roman 
sq. feet. 

Jug?rum (As). 28,800 

Measures. 

English 
rods. Sq. plfl. 

2 18 

Sq. feet. 
250.06 


Deunx. 

26,400 

2 

10 

183.86 


Dextans. 

24,000 

2 

02 

117.64 


Dodrans. 

21,600 

1 

34 

61.42 


Bes. 

19,200 

1 

25 

257.46 


Septunx. 

• 16,800 

1 

17 

191.25 


Semis. 

14,400 

1 

09 

125.03 


Quincunx. 

12,000 

1 

01 

68.82 


Triens. 

9,600 

7,200 

0 

32 

264.85 


QuMrans. 

0 

24 

198.64 


Sextans. 

4,800 

0 

16 

132.43 


Uncia. 

2,400 

0 

08 

• 66.21 



Remark 1. The Romans reckoned their copper money by asseSf 
^lleir silver money by sestertii, and their gold money by aurei and 
sometimes by Attic talents. 

Rem. 2. _ The as, as the nnit of money, was originally a pound of copper, 
but its weight was gradually diminished, until, in the later days of the repub¬ 
lic, it amounted to only l-24th of a pound. 

Rem. 3. (a.) The dendritis was a silver coin, originally equal in value to ten 
asses, whence its name; but, after the weight of the as was reduced, the dend- 
rius was equal to eighteen asses. 

(b.) The sestertius, or sesterce, was one fourth of the denarius, or two asses 
and a half (semistertius). The sestertius was called emphatically nummus, as in 
it all large sums were reckoned after the coining of silver money. 

(c.) The aureus (a gold coin), in the time of the emperors, was equal to 26 
denarii, or 100 sesterces. 

Rem. 4 . In reckoning money, the Romans called any sum under 2000 ses- 
t rces so va^vcij sestertii; as, decern sestertii, ien sesterces; centum sestertii, a 
hundred sesterces. 

Rem. 5. Suras from 2000 sesterces (inclusive) to 1,000,000, they denoted 
her by mille, millia, with sestertiilm (gen. plur.), or by the plural of the 
uter noun sestertium, which itself signified a thousand sesterces. Thus they 
d quadraointa millia sestertiiim, or quadraqinta sestertia, to denote 40,000 
tei’ces. With the genitive sestertium, millia was sometimes omitted; as 
sesU^.dm centum, soil, millia, 100,000 sesterces. 

Rem. 6 . To denote a million, or more, they used a combination; thus, aides 
centena millia sestertiikn, 1 ,000,000 sesterces. The words centena millia, how¬ 
ever, were generally omitted; thus, dedes sestertidm, and sometimes merely 
ieeies. See ^ 118, 6. So, centies, 10 millions; miUies, 100 millions. 

























374 


APPENDIX.—ABBREVIATIONS. 


§ S28, 329 


Rem. V. Some sappose that sestertium, when thus joined with the numeral adyeibs, is 
always tlie neuter noun in the nominative or accusative singular. The genitive ani 
lative of that noun are thus used; as, Decies sestertii dote^ With a dowry of 1,000,OOC 
sesterces. Tac. Quinqudgies sestertio, 6,000,000 sesterces. Id. But this usage does not 
DC cur in Cicero. 


ABBKEVIATIONS. 

§ Ths foliowinjT are the most common abbreviations of 


Latin words:— 

A., Aulns. 

C. , Qitus, or Gains. 
Cn., Cneils. 

D. , DMmus. 

L. , Lucius. 

M. , Marcus. 


A. d., ante diem. 

A. U. C., anno urhis con¬ 
duce. 

Cal., or Kal., Calendce. 

Cos., Consul. 

Coss., Gonsules. 

D., Dlvus. 

D. D., dono dJedit. 

D. D. D., rfai, dlcat^ dedi¬ 
cate or dono dicate de¬ 
dicat. 

Des., desipnaius. 

D. M., diis vidnihus. 

Eq. Rom., egues Romdnus. 


M. T. C., Marcus Tullius 
Clch'o. 

M. ’ Mdnius. 

Mam., Mdmercvs. 

N. , Num^Hus. 

P., Publius. 


F., Filius; as, M. F., 
Marci filius. 

Ictus, Jurisconsultus. 

Id., Idus. 

Imp., implrdtor. 

J. 0. M., opUnu) 

maxlmo. 

N., mpos. 

Non., Nonce. 

P. C., patres conscripti. 
PI., plebis. 

Pop., pdjtulus. 

P. K., pdpulus Rdmdnus. 


Q., or Qu.j Quintus. 
Ser., Servtus. 

S. , or Sex., Sextus. 
Sp., Sjmriits. 

T. , Titus. 

Ti., or Tib., Tiberius. 


Pont. Max., ponUf&s 

maxlmus. 

Pr., praetor. 

Proc., proconsul. 

Resp., respublica. 

S., sdluiem, sacrumy OT 
sindtus. 

S. D. P., sdlutem dicU 
plurimam. 

S. P. Q. R., Sindtuspdpdr 
lusque Romdnus. 

S. C., sendtds consulium. 
Tr., iribunus. 


To these may be added terms of reference; as, c., cd/rat, chapter; cf., confer 
compare; L c., Uco citdto; 1. 1., Idco lauddlOe in the place quoted; v., versus, 
verse. 


DIFFERENT AGES OF ROMAN LITERATURE. 

§ S29. 1. Of the Roman literature for the first five centuries after the 

foundation of the city, but few vestiges remain. The writers of the succeed¬ 
ing centuries have been aivanged in four ages, in reference to the purity of 
die language in the period in which they flourished. These are called the 
golden, silver, brazen, and h'on ages. 

2 . The golden age is reckoned from the time of Livius Andronicus, about 
A. U. C. 514, to the death of Augustus, A. U. C. 767, or A. D. 14, a period 
of a little more than 250 years. The writers of the early part of this age are 
valued rather on account of their antiquity, and in connection with the his- 
toiy of the language, than as models of style. It was not till the ago of 
Cicero, that Roman literature reached its highest elevation. The era com- 
pjehending the generation immediately preceding, and that immediately suc- 
fcseding, that of Oic.ero, as well as his own, is the period in which the mosf 
distinguished writers of Rome flourished; and their works are the standard of 
ourity in the Latin language. 




§329. 


APPENDIX.-WRITERS IN DIFFERENT AGES. 


375 


8 .^ Tlie silver age extended from the death of Augustus to the death of 
Trajan, A. D. 118, a period of 104 years. The writers oi this age were inferioi 
to those who had preceded them; yet several of them are worthy of com¬ 
mendation. 

^ 4. The brazen age comprised the interval from the death of Trajan to the 
time when Rome was taken by the Goths, A. D. 410. From the latter epoch 
commenced the iron age, during which the Latin language was much adulter¬ 
ated with foreign words, and its style and spirit essentially injured. 

6 . The body of Latin writings has been otherwise arranged by Dr. Freund. 
BO as to be comprised in three main periods,—the Antt-cUusical, Classical^ and 
Post-clnssical. The ante-classical extends from the oldest fragments of the 
language to Lucretius and Varro; the classical from Cicero and Cassar to 
Tacitus, Suetonius, and the younger Plinv inclusive; the post-classical from 
that time to the fifth century of our era. The classical Latinity is subdivided 
into (a.) Ciceronian, (6.) Augustan, (c.) post-Augustan, and to the language of 
the fourth and fifth centuries he has given the title of late Latin. 


LATIjif WRITERS IN THE DIFFERENT AGES 


(From the Lexicon of Facciolatui^) 


WRITERS OF THE GOLDEN AGE. 


Livius Andronicus. 
Laevius. 

C. Naevius. 

Statius Caecilius. 

Q. Ennius. 

M. I’acuvius. 

L. Accius. 

C. Lucilius. 

Sex. Turpilius. 

L. Afranius. 


L. Cornelius Sisenna. 
P. Nigidius Figulus. 

C. Decius Laberius. 

M. Verrius Flaccus. 
Varro Attacinus. 
Titinius. 

L. Pomponius. 

C. Sempronius AseUio. 
Cn. Matius. 


Q. Novius. 

C. Q. Atta. 

L. Cassius Hemina. 
Fenestella. 

Q. Claud. Quadrigarius. 
Ccelius Antipater. 
Fabius Pictor. 

Cn. Gellius. 

L. Piso, and others. 


Of the works of tne preceding writers, only a few fragments remain. 


M. Porcius Cato. 

M. Accius Plautus. 
M. Terentius Afer. 

T. Lucretius Cams. 
C. Valerius Catullus. 
P. Syrus. 

C. Julius Caesar. 

C. Cornelius Nepos. 
M Tullius Cicero. 


Sex. Aurelius Propertius. 
C. Sallustius Crispus. 

M. Terentius Varro. 

Albius Tibullus. 

P. Virgilius Maro. 

T. Livms. 

M. Manilius. 

M. Vitruvius. 


P. Ovidius Naso. 

Q. Horatius Flaccus. 
C. Pedo Albinovanus. 

Gratius Faliscus. 
Phaedrus. 

C. Cornificius. 

A. Hurtius, or Oppius. 
P. Cornelius Severus. 


To these may be added the following names of lawyers, whose opinions are 
found in the digests:— 

Q. Mutius Scaevola. M. Antistius Labeo. Masurius Sabirius. 

Alfenus Varus. 


Of the writers of the golden age^he most distinguished are Terence, Uatul 
us, Caesar, Nepos, Cicero, VirgU, Horace, Ovid, T. Livy, ani Sallust 


376 


APPENDIX.-WRITERS IN DIFFERENT AGES. 


§329 


WRITERS OF THE SILVER AGE. 


A. Cornelius Celsus. 

1’. Velleius I’aterculus. 

L. Junius Moderatus 

Columella. 
Pomponius Mela. 

A. Persius Flaccus. 

Q. Asconius Pedianus. 

M, . Annajus Seneca. 

L. AnnKus Seneca. 


M. Annseus Lucanus. 
T. Petronius Arbiter. 
C. I’linius Secundus. 
C. Silius Italicus. 

C. Valerius Flaccus. 

C. Julius Sollnus. 

D. Junius Juvenalis, 
P. Papinius Statius. 
M. Valerius MartiMis. 


M. Fabius Quintilianuft 
Sex. Julius Frontinus. 

C. Cornelius I'.acitus. 

C. Plinius CiKcilius Se¬ 
cundus. 

L. Annaeus Floras. 

C. Suetonius Tranquil 
lus. 


The age to which the following writers should be assigned is somewhat un 
certain:— 

Q, Curtins Rufus. Scribonius Largus. L. Fenestella. 

Valerius Probus. Sulpitia. Atteius Capito. 

Of the writers of the silver age, the most distinguished are Celsus, Velleius 
Columella, the Senecas, the Plinies, Juvenal, Quintilian, Tacitus, Suetonius 
and Curtius. ^ , 


WRITERS OF THE BRAZEN AGE. 


A. Gellius. 

L. Apuleius 

Q. Septimiua Tertullia- 
nus. 

Q. Serenus Sammonl- 
cus. 

Censorinus. 

Thascius Csecilius 
Cyprianus. 

T. Julius Calpumius. 

M. Aurelius Nernesianus. 
Allius Spartianus. 
Julius Capitolinus. 
JElius Lampridius. 


Vulcatius Gallicanus. 
Trebellius PoUio. 
Flavius Vopiscus. 
Coelius Aurelianus 
Flavius Eutropius. 
Rheinnius Fannius. 
Amobius Afer. 

L. Ccelius Lactantius. 

AJius Donatus. 

C. Vettus Juvencus. 

Julius Firmicus. 

Fab. Marius Victorinus. 
Sex. Rufus, or Rufus 
Festus. 


Ammianus Marcel- 
linus. 

Vegetius Renatus. 

Aurel. Theodorus Macro 
bins. 

Q. Aurelius Symmachus 

D. Magnus Ausonius. 
Paulinus Nolanus. 

Sex. Aurelius Victor. 

Aurel. Prudentius Cle¬ 
mens. 

Cl. Claudianus. 

Marcellus Empiricus 
Falconia Proba. 


Of an Age not entirely certain. 

Valerius Maximus. Terentianus Maurus. Sosipater Charisius. 

Justinus. Minutius Felix. Flavius Avianus. 


The opinions of the following lawyers are found in the digests;— 


l.icinius Proculus. 
Neratius Priscus. 

P. Juventius Celsus. 
Priscus Jabolenus. 
Domitius Ulpianus. 


Herennius Modestinus. 
Salvius Julianus. 
Cains. 

Callistratus. 
jEmilius Papinianus. 


Julius Paulus. 

Sex. Pomponius. 
Venuleius Satumlnus. 
Allius Marcianus. 

AJius Gallus, and others 


Of the writers of the brazen age. Justin, Terentianus, Victor, Lactantiufl, 
and Claudian, are most distinguished. 


The age to which the following writsrs belong is uncertain. The style o 
some of them would entitle them to be ranked with the writers of the prececl 
ing ages, vi hile that of others would place them even below those of &e iron 


§ 329. APPENDIX.—WRITERS IN DIFFERENT AGES. 


377 


Palladins Rutilins Tau¬ 
rus iErailianus. 
5)milius Macer. 

Messala Corvinus. 

Vibius Sequester. 

Julius Obsequens. 

L. Ampelius. 

Apicius C(eliu3. 

Sex. Poinpeius Festus. 
Prbbus (auctor 
ruin.) 

Fulgentius Planci^des. 
Hyginus. 

C. Caesar Gennanicus. 

P. Victor. 

P. Vegetius. 


Auctores Priapeiorum. 

Catalecta Virgilii et 
Ovidii. 

Auctor orationis Sallustii 
in Cic. et Cicerunis iii 
Sail.; item i>iius AntS- 
qw'vx iTfi ir, 

Auct 'vr Kpistolae ad Oc- 
tavium. 

Auctor Panegp’Ici ad 
Pisonem. 

Declamationes quae trl- 
buuntur Quintiliano, 
Porcio Latroui, Calpur- 
nio Flacco. 


Interpres Daretis Phry- 
gii, et Dictyos Cro 
tensis. 

Scholiastae Vetfres. 

Grainmatlci Antiqui. 

Rhetores Antiqui. 

Medici Antiqui. 

Catalecta Petroniana. 

Pervigilium Veneris. 

Poematiaet EnigrammA 
ta vetera a P.thaeo col- 
lecta. 

Monumentum Ancyra* 
nuin. 

Fasti Consularcs. 

luscriptiones Veteres. 


WRITERS OF THE IRON AGE. 


Cl. Rutilius Numatianus, 
Servius Honoratus. 

D. Hieronjhuus. 

D. ^Augustinus. 

Sulpicius Severus. 
Paulus Orosius. 

Coelius Sedulius. 

Codex Theodosianus. 
Martianus Capella. 
Claud ianus Mamertus. 
Bidonius ApollinariB. 


Latinus Pacatus. 

Claudius Mamertinus, et 
alii, quorum sunt Pan- 
egj^ci vetSres. 

Alcimus Avitus. 

Manl. Severinus Bc5- 
thius. 

Priscianus. 

Nonius Maroellufl. 

Justiniiim InsUtutidneB 
et Codex. 


Ruf. Festus A’denus. 
Arator. 

M. Aurelius Cassidoms. 
FI. Cresconius Corippua 
Venantius Fortunatus. 
Isidorus Hispalensis. 
Anonymus Ravennas. 
Aldheliiimj or AltholmuSi 
Paulus l>iaodnua. 


INDEX. 


The Ugawo lo the following Index designate the Sections and their dliisions: b stanJa 
for TCinarky N for ncU^ s. for exception, w. for with, and pr. for prosody. 


A, sound of, 7 and 8'; nouns in, of Ist 
deil., 41; gender of, 41: of 3d decl. gender 
of. 66; genitive of, 68, 2; in acc. sing, of 
masc. and fern. Greek nouns, 79 and 80; 
in noin. acc. and voc. plur. of all neuter 
nouns, adjectives and participles, 40, 8; 
83,1.; 85; 87; 105, 2; verbals in, 102, 6, (c.) ; 
change of in compd. verbs, 189; increment 
in, 3d decl., 287, 3; in plur., 288; of verbs, 
290; ending the first part of compds., 285, 
E. 4; final, quantity of, 294. 

A, ab, ahs, how used, 195, E. 2, and 10; 
in compo.sition, 196, i., 1; before the abl. 
of dishince, 236, R. 6; ah, de, or ex, with 
abl. of depriving, etc., 251, b. 1. 

Abbreviations, 328. 

Abdico, constr. of, 261, R. 2. 

Abest mihi, 226, e. 2; non multum abest 
quin, 262, n. 7. 

Ahhijic, 253, R. 2. 

Ablative. 37; sing, fid decl., 82; of adjs. 
of 3d decl., 113; plur. 1st decl., 40, R. 6, 
and 43; 2d decl., 40, R. 6; 3d decl., 84; 4th 
decl., 89,5; used adverbially, 192, I., n. ; 
of character, quality, etc., 211, R. 6; after 
prepositions, 241; after compd. verbs, 242; 
after ojms and usus, 243; after dis;nuB, etc. 
244; after utor. etc., 245, i.; after nitor, 
etc., 245. II.; after parts, denoting oriain, 
246; of cause, etc., 247; of means and 
Bgsnt. 248; of means, 249, i.; of accord¬ 
ance, 249, u.; of accompaniment. 249, n(.; 
denoting in what respect, 250; after adjec¬ 
tives of plenty or want, 250,2,(1.); after 
verbs of abounding, etc., 250, 2, (2.); after 
fdcio and sum, 250, R. 3; after verbs of de¬ 
priving. etc., 251; of price, 2.52; of time 
when, 253; of place where, 254; of place 
whence, 255, 1; of place by or through 
whi(?h 255,2; after comparatives, 256; of 
degree of dilFerence, 2,56, R. Ii5; abl. abso¬ 
lute, 257; how translated, 257, N. 1; equiv¬ 
alent to what, 257, R. 1; only with pres, 
and perf parts., 257, R. 2; without a parti¬ 
ciple, 257, R. 7; with a clause, 257, R. 8; 
how it marks the time of ar action, 267, 
%. 4; noun wanting, 257, r. 9. 

Abounding and wanting, verbs of, with 
abl. 250 , with gen. 220, (8.) 


“ About to do,” how expressed, 162, 14, 
“about to be done,” how expressed, 162, 
14, R. 4. 

Abstineo, w. abl., 251, N. ; vix or cegre ab 
stineo, quin, 262, N. 7. 

Abstract nouns, 26; formation from adjs 
101; their terminations, 101, 1 and 2, (8.); 
from verbs, 102. 

Abundo, 250, (2.) r. 1. 

-abus, dat. and abl. plur. in, 43. 

Ac or atque, 198, 1, R. (6.) and 3, r. ; in 
stead of quam, 256, R. 15; oc si withsubj., 
263, 2, and r. 

Acatalectic verse, 304, 3, (1.) 

Accent in English, 16; place of secondary 
accent, 16, 1 and 2; in laitin, 14 and 15* 
of dissyllables, 14. 4; of poly.syllables, 14, 
5, and 15—written accents, 5, 2, and 14, 2. 

Accentuation, 14—16. 

Accidents of nouns, 26, 7; of verbs, 141. 

Accipio, w. part, in dus, 274, R. 7- 

Accompaniment, abl. of, 249, in. 

Accordance, abl. of, 249, n. 

Achivom for Achivorum, 63. 

-acis, genitives in, 78. 2, (1.) 

Accu.sative, 37; sing., terminal letter of 
in masculines and feminines. 40, 2; plural, 
terminal letter of in do., 40, 7; of 3d decl., 
79; of Greek nouns. 80; plur. 3d decl., 85; 
do. of adjs. of 3d decl., 114; neuter in all 
declensions, sing and plur., 4<J, 8; \n em 
and iyn, 79; of Greek nouns in im, in, or a, 
79, (b.) and 80; in idem, 80, e. i, in ym or 
yn, 80, u.; in ea, 80, ui.; in etem, eta, em, 
or en, 80, iv. ; neuter u.sed adverbially 102, 
n., 4, and 205, R. 10; acc. after verts, 229— 
234; omitted, 229, r. 4; inf. or a clau.se in¬ 
stead of. 229, R. 5; of aper.son after miseret, 
etc., 229, R. 6; after jm-al, etc., 229, r. 7; 
after neuter verbs, 232; after compound 
verbs, 233; after verbal nouns and verbal 
adjs.. 2.33, N.; of part affected, 2.34, n.; a 
limiting acc. instead of the abl. in partnn, 
vicem, cetera, etc., 2.34, a., R. 3; after pre¬ 
positions, 235; of time and space, 2.36; of 
place, 237; after adverbs and interjections, 
238; acc. as subject, 239; acc. of the thing 
supplied by the inf., 270, N., acc. w. inf. 
972; do. exchanged for the 





INDEX, 


379 


278, 8.—two accusatiyes after certain verbs, 
230 and 231; acc. of thing retained in pas¬ 
sive voice, 234; places supplied by infini¬ 
tives, 229, N. 2; pred. acc. how supplied, 
lb. N. 4. 

Accusing and acquitting, verbs of, constr., 
217, and R. 4. 

Accmso, constr., 217, and r. 2—6. 

Acephalous ver.se, 304, 3, (3.) 
declined, 108, i. 

Aihillfs^ declined, 86. 

Ar.quiesco, 245, li., 3. 

Acute accent, 5, 2, and 14, 2: when used, 
IK 3. 

Active voice, 141. 

Active verb, 141; used impersonally, 184, 
2 ; ■'•bject of act. verb. 229 ; two ^ases after, 
229, R. 1; verb omitted, 229, r. 3. 

A/l^ how used, 195, R. 5; in composition, 
196, I. 2; construction of verbs compound¬ 
ed with, 224; ml used for Oi, 224, r. 4. 

Adilf quod, 273, N. 8. 

Additions to simple subject, 202, 6, etc.; 
to simple predicate, 203, 5, etc. 

Adeo, adv., 191, r. 5 ; adeo non, 277, R. 
14.—verb, constr., 233, 3, and n. 

-a/les, patronymics in, 100, 1, (a.) 

Adest, qui, with subj., 264, 6. 

Adhuc locortim, 212, R. 4, N. 4. 

Adipiscor, w. gen., 220, 4 Jin. 

Adjectives, 104—131; classes of, 104,1— 
15 ; declension cf, 105 ; of Ist and 2d decls. 
105—107; of 3d declension, 108—114 ; of 
three terminai.ons, 108; of two termina¬ 
tions, 109, 110; of one termination. 111; 
their gen. sing., 112 ; their abl. sing. 113 ; 
their nom., acc., and gen. plur., 114 ; irreg¬ 
ular, 115—116; defective, 115; redundant, 
116 ; numeral, 117—121; cardinal, 117,118 ; 
ordinal, 119, 120; multiplicative, 121, 1; 
proportional, 121, 2 ; temporal, 121, 3 ; in¬ 
terrogative, 121, 5; compari.son of, 122— 
127 ; irregular comparison, 125; defective 
oomparison, 126; derivation of, 128—130; 
composition of, 131; amplificative, 128, 4 ; 

f atrial, 128, 6; verbal, 129 ; participial, 
30 ; composition of 131;—how modified, 
202, II., 1, (2.); agreement of, 205; quali¬ 
fying and limiting, 205, N. 1 ; modifiers or 
predicates, 205, n. 2; with two or more 
nouns, 205, R. 2; with a collective noun, 
2G5, R. 3; sing, wth a plur. noun, 2o5, 
E. 4 ; «lat. of. for acc. in the predicate of 
acx:. with the inf., 205, R. 6; without a 
noun, 205, r. 7; with infinitive, a clau.se, 
etc., 2=1'). R. 8 ; in the neuter with gen. of 
their noun, 205, R. 9, and 212, r. 3 ; neuter ' 
adjs used adverbially, 205, R. 10; gender 
cf, when u.sed partitively, 205, R. 12; in 
enitive with posse.ssive adj. or pronoun, 
05, R. 13; agreeing with the governing 
noun instead of the genitive, 205, R. 14 ; 
two or more with one noun, 205, R. 16; 
Instead of an adverb, 205, R. 15 ; first, last, 
etc. part expressed by the adj. alone, 205, 
R. 17 ; agreeing with relative instead of its 
antecedent, 206, (7.); with gen. 213; w. 
geu. or abl., 213, R. 5; w. dat., 222; w. 
fen. or dat., 213, R. 6, ai d 222 , r. 2; of 


plenty or want with abl., 250 . w. Inf. 270, 
a. 1; place of, 279, 7. 

Adjective pronouns, 134—139; nature o^ 
132, 5; classes, 134; agreement, 206. 

Adjective clauses, 201, 7q how connect¬ 
ed, 201, 9. 

Adjunctive pronoun, 135, R. 1. 

Adjui'o and mljuto, constr., 223, r. 2, (2.| 
Admonishing, verbs of, w. gen. 218; c thei 
constructions, 213, R. 1 and 2; 273. n 4. 

Adolesrens. its gender, 30; as a.'Jj. how 
compared, 126,4. 

Adorning, verbs of, w. abl., 249. 

Adonic verse, 312. 

Adulori. constr., 223, R. 2. (b), and (1), (a.) 
Adverbial correlatives, 191, a 1;—claui««, 
201, 7, 9. 

Adverbs, 190,2—194; primitive, 191; of 
place and order, 191, i. ; correlative, 191, 
a. 1; of time, 191, ii. ; of manner, quality, 
degree, 191, in.; division of, 191, R. 2 
derivation of, 192; numeral, 192, ii., 3, 
and 119; diminutive, 192, iv., r. ; comyto- 
sition of, 193; signification of some adverbs 
of time and manner, 193;—comparison of. 
194;—how modified, 277, i.; u.sed as adjec¬ 
tives, 205, R. 11; w. gen., 212, e. 4; w. 
dat., 223, (1.); w. acc., 238; use of, 277; 
two negatives, force of, 277, r. 3—5; equiv¬ 
alent to phrases, 277, R. 8; of likeness, as 
connectives, 278, r. 1; place of 279, 15. 
Adversative conjunctions, 198, 9 
Adversus, how u.sed, 195, R. 7. 

JE. how pronounced, 9. 

.Mfpialis, construction of, 222, r. I. 

JEque with abl., 241, r. 2; eeque ac., 198, 
3, R. 

jEqui boni /ado or consulo, 214, N. 1. 
JE({uo and ada>quo, construction of, 214; 
cequo, adj. w. comparatives, 256, R. 9. 

A'er, acc. of, 80, R. ; pr. 299, E. 3. 
id-lolic pentameter, 312, ix. 

gender of, 61, 2; gen. of, 73, s. 2. 
^stbno, constr., 214. 

^ther, acc., 80, R.; pr. 299, e. 3. 

-iFits, adjs. in, 128, 6, (A.) 

^2quu?n est, ut, 262, r. 3, n. 3 : (fquxm 
erat, indie, instead of subj., 2.59, r. 3* 
(r.quum eat, with inf. as subject, 269, R. 2. 
AJfatim, w. genitive. 212, u. 4. 

Ajfluo, constr., 250. 2, r. 1. 

Af/icio, constr., 249, r. ]. 

Ajfinis, constr., 222, R. 2, (a.) 

Ai'i'T, declined, 46. • 

Agent, verbal nouns denoting, 102, 0; 
dative of, 225, iii., R. 1; 248, R. 1; abl. 
of, 243. 

Ages of Roman literature, 329. 

A^nitus, pr. 285. 1, E. 1. 

Agnominatio, 324. 25. 

Ago w. gen. of the crime, 217, R. 1;— 
rtge w. plur. subject, 183, 10;— id agere ut, 
273. N. 1. 

Agreement defined. 203, III., 6; of ad^i., 
etc., 205; of relatives,. 206. 

Ai, how pmuounced, 9, 1.— ai, old gen. 
ill, 43 ; quantity of the a in do., 283, e. 3. 

Aio, conjugated, 1S3, 4 ; a/n’ for aisne, 
183,4, N. 4; nit, cllip.«is of, 209, R. 4; its 
place iu a sentence, 279, 0. 




380 


INDEX. 


'flJ, abl. of nouns in, 82; increment of, 

287, K. (A.)l. 

Alcaic verse, 304,2;—greater, 318, ill.; 
leseer, 318, iv. 

Alcinanian verse, 304, 2;—dactylic tetra¬ 
meter, 312. 

Alfc^ gender of, 66; genitive, 70. 

Alfs. gender of, 30 and 61, 2; genitive 
Bing., 73. 2; gen. plur., 83, il., a. 2. 

AiVy, gender of, 65, 2. 

Aheno, and abalteno, constr., 251, R. 3, 
and N. 

Alnnus, constr., 222, R. 1 and 6. 

Ah'/u>into, 127, 2; 266, R. 16, (2.) 

A iqunnlum, 256, a. 16, N. 

ACii/uis, declined, 138; how used, 138, 2, 
207, R. 30. 

AHi/uo, w. gen., 212, R. 4, n. 2. 

Aliquot, indeclinable, 115,4; correlative, 
121, 5. 

Aliquoties, correlative of quoties, 121, 5. 

-alis, adjs. in, 128, 2; how compared, 126, 
4; alis, old adj., for alius, 192, ii., 2. 

Aliter, from alis for alius, 192, ii., 2. 

Alius, how declined, 107; how used, 207, 
R. 32; alius — alium, with plur. verb, 209, 
R. 11, 4; refers to more than two, 212, r. 2, 
N. 1, (5.); w. abl., 256, R. 14; pr. 283, 1, 
E. 4. 

Allegory. 324, 7. 

Alliteration, 324, 26. 

Alphabet, 2, 1. 

Alter, how declined, 105,3; 107, and r. 2; 
gen. alterius, quantity of 283, i., E. 4, (6.;; 
used for secun'lus, 120, 1 ; answers to uter, 
139, 5, (1.), v^ )— altera tanto, w. compara¬ 
tives, 256, R. 16. 

Alteruter, 107; 139, 6, (1.), (5.)— alteru- 
terque, 107. 

Altus and alto^ w. acc. of space, 236, and 

ft. 2. 

Ambi, amh, am, or an, 196, (5.) and 1. 

Ambio, how conjugated, 182, R. 3.— ambi¬ 
tus, pr. 285, 2, E. 2. 

Arnho, how declined, 118. R. 1. 

Amicus, constr., 222, R. 2. (c.) 

Amo, conjugated, 155, 156. 

Amphibolia, 325, 5. 

Amplificatives, nouns, 100, 4, (a.); adjec¬ 
tives, 104, 12; 128, 4. 

Ampliiis, wi*h or without qvam, 256, R. 6. 

An, 193,11; use of, 198,11, r. (-'/.), (c.); 
In double questions, 265, R. 2 ; (ITibilo an, 
e*c., 205, R. 3; an — an, 265, R. 2. Jin. 

Anacoluthon, 323, 3. (5.) 

Anacreontic verse, 304,2;—iambic dime¬ 
ter, 314. IX. 

Anadiplosis, 324, 17. 

Analysis of sentences, 281. 

Auapaisticmetre 313; 303;—monometer, 
B13, I.; —dimeter, 313. 

Anaphora, 324, 13. 

Anastropbe, 323, 4, (1.) 

Ano.'i, gen. of, 72, e. 1; pr. 300, E. 1. 

Anceps, gen. of, 112, 2; abl. of,.113, E. 8. 

Ancile, 93, 2. 

Anilrogeos, declined, 64, 1. 

-aneus, adjs. in, 128, 8. 

Angor, constr., 273, 5, K. 6. 

Anim^, declined 67. 


Animans, gender of^ 64. 

Antmo, 2o0.— animi for antrno^, 220,1 • 
213, R. 1, (a.) 

Anio, genitive of, 69, E. 2. 

Anne, in double questions, 265, R. 2;— 
ann m, ib. 

compds. of, 121, 3. 

Antanaclasis, 324. 12. 

Ante, w. superlativ^iS, 127, 6; in compo¬ 
sition. 196, I., 3; construction cf verbi 
compounded with. 224; with titles, 2J5, B. 
3; with comparatives, 256, R. 13, (6-le¬ 
ant* and post w. acc. and abl. of tinitn 2b8, 
R. 1; w. quam an<i a verb, 253, N. 3; for 
abhinc, 253. R. 2. 

Antecedent, 136; ellipsis of, 206,(3.), (4.), 
its place supplied by a demonstrative, 206, 
3, (a.); in the case of the relative, 206, (6.), 
(b.)-, implied in a possessive pronoun, 200, 
(12); may be a proposition, 206, (13.) 

Antecedo and antecello, constr., 256, R 
16, (3.) 

Antepenult, 13; quantity of, 292. 

Anlequam, constr., 263, 3. 

Antimeria. 323, 3, (1.) 

Antiphrasis, 324, 10. 

Antiptosis, 323, 3, (3.) 

Antithesis, 322 ; 324, 27. 

Antonomasia, 324, 8. 

-anus, adjs. in, 128, 6. 

Aorist ten.se, 145, iv., R. 

Apage, 183, 10. 

Apertum est, w. inf. as subject, 269, B. 2. 

Aphaeresis, 322, i. 2. 

Apiscor and adipiscor, w. gen., 220. 

Ajdustre, nom. plur- of. 83 and 94, 4. 

Apocope, 322, i. 7.—Aj odcsis, 261. 

Apollo, gen. of, 69, E. 2. 

Aposiopesis, 824, 33. 

Apostrophe, 324, 35. 

Apparet, w. inf. as subject, 269, B. 2. 

Appellative nouns, 26, 3. 

Appello, constr., 230, n. 1. 

Appeterts, w. gen., 2l3, B. 1, (2.) 

Appendix, 322—3^. 

Apposition, 204; to two or moru nouns, 
204, R. 6; to nouns connected by cum, 204, 
R. 5, (1); to proper names of different gen¬ 
ders, 204, R. 5, (2.); genitive instea.1 of, 
204, B. 6; 211, R. 2, .n. ; abl. with gen., 204, 
R. 7; of a proper name with nomen, etc., 
204, R. 8; of a clause, 204, R. 9; of parts 
with a whole, 204, R. 10; 212. E. 2, n. 6; 
place of nouns in apposition, 279, 9. 

Apprime, 127, 2; 193. 

Aptotes, 94. 

Aptus, constr., 222, R. 1 and 4, (1.); aptui 
qui, w. subj., 264, 9; w. gerund, 27&, R. 2 
and 3. 

Apud, 195, R. 6. 

-ar, nouns in, gender of, 66, 67; genitlvn 
of, 70, 71; abl. of, 82, increment of, 287 

E. (A.)l. 

Arbitror, in imperf. subj., 260, R. 2. 

Arbor {-os), gender of, 61. 

Arceo, w. abl., 251, R. 2. 

Arcesso, constr., 217, B. 1. 

Archaism, 323, R., (1.) 

Archilochian verse, 304, 2;—penthemi 
meris, 812;—iambic trimeter, 814, v.; de 





INDEX, 


381 


Jinicrer, 814, vn.;—heptameter, 318, iv. 
Arrncr^ ae gen. of place, 221, a. 3, (4.) 
Ayi'O^ genitive of, 69, a. 3. 

Ar^os {-ici), 92, 4. 

Ar^iio, constr., 217, a. 1. 

Ariwtophanic verse, 304, 2. 

-arium end -anus, nouns and adjs. in 
IX), 8; 12.8, 3; 121, 4. 

Arrangement of words, 279; poetical, 279, 
r 4; of clauses, 280. 

A»‘s, declined, 67. 

Arsis and the.sis, 308. 

Article, wanting in Latin, 41, N. 

-Cl.', genitives in, 43; nouns inofSddecl., 
gender of, 62; genitive of, 72; geu. plur. of, 
88, ii., 4; in acc. plnr. of Greek nouns of 
5d decl., 85, e. 2.— -as ind -anus, adjs. in, 
.123, 6; -rts final, quantity of. 300. 

A.S, >alue of, 327; how divided, 327;— 
gender of, 62, e. 1; 72, e. 1; gender of parts 
anding in ns, 64, 2; assis non habere, 21i, 

R. 1. 

Asclepiadic verse, 304, 2;—tetrameter, 

816, Tii. 

Asking, verbs of, with two accs., 231; 
constr. in the pass., 234, I. 

Aspergo, 249, i. and a. 1 and 3. 

Aspirate, 3, 1. 

Asse/uor, ut, 273, N. 2, 

-assa for -avero, 162, 9. 
assuesco and assuef^acio, w. abl., 245, II.; 
w. dat., 245, ii., a. 1. 

Asyndeton, 823, 1, (1.) 

-at, roots of nouns in, 56, ll,, R. 6. 

At, couj., 198, 9; at enim, atqui, 198, 

B, (6 ) 

-atim, adverbs in, 192, i., 1. 

Atque, composition and meaning, 198,1, 
R. (b.) See ac. 

Attraction, 206, (6.); 209, N. 6 and B. 8; 
210, R. 6; 272, n. 3. 

Attribuo, w. participle in dus, 274, B. 7. 
-atus, adjs. in, 128, 7. 

An, how pronounced, 9, 2 and e. 2. 
Audeo, how conjugated, 142, 2. 

Audio, conjugated, 160; used like appel¬ 
lor, 210, N. 2; constr., 272, n. 1; audes for 
audies, 183, b. 3;— audiens, constr., 222, 
R. 1. 

-aus, ncz::!'' In, gender of, 62; genitive 
of, 76, E. 4. 

Ausculto, constr., 222, e. 2, {t ), and (1.), 

(a.) 

Ausim, 183, R. 1. 

Aut and vel, 198, 2, R. (a.); aut and ve, 
198, 2, R. (i/.); nut — ant, 198, 2, r. {e.); 
aut with the singular, 209, R. 12, (5.) 

Autem, 198, 9; its position, 279, 3, c ); 
ellipsis of, 278, R. 11. 

Authority, in prosody, 282, 4. 

Auxiliary verb, 153. 

•av and -at in the 2d and 3d roots of 
verbs, 164. 

Ava^us, with gen., 213, R. 1. 

Ave, l»3, 8. 

Avidus, with gen. 213, R. 1; w. gen. of 
gerund, 275, (2.); w. inf. poetically, 270, 

ft. 1. 

M, nouns in, gen. of, '^8, 2, (1.'; adjs. 
:n, 129, 6; verbals in with gen., 2l3, R. 1. 


B. 

B, roots of nouns ending In. 66. i., 
changed to p., 171, 2. 

Balneum, plnr. -ea or -em, 82, 6. 

Barbarism, 325, 1. 

Bnrbiton, declined. 54,1. 

Belle, bellissime, 192, iv. R. 

Belli, construed like names of towns, 221 
R. 3 , bello, 253. 

Bene., derivation, 192, ii., 1; constr. of 
its compounds, 226, i.; bene est, w. dat., 
228, 1; bene, w. acc., 238, R. 2; with verbs 
of price. 252, r. 3. 

-ber, names of months in, how decUned 
71 and 108. 

Bes, gen. of, 73, E. 2. 

Bibi, pr., 284, E., (1.) 

Bicorjwr, abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115,1, (a.) 

Biduum, triduum, et«., bienniurn, eto., 

121 , 2 . 

-hilts, adjs. in, 129, 4; how compared, 
126, 4; with dative, 2ffi, r. 1. 

Bimestris, 113, E. 1. 

Bipes. genitive of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, 
E. 2; 115, 1, (a.) 

Bonus, declined, 105, 2; compared, 125, 
5; boni consulo, 214, n. 1. 

Bos, dat. and abl. plur. of, 84, e. 1; 286, 
6; gender of, 30;'geuitive of, 75, e. 1; gen. 
plur., 83, :i., r. 1. 

-hr, roots of nouns in, 56, ii., R. 3. 

Brachycatalectic verse, 304, o, (2.) 

Brazen age of Homan literature, 329, 4. 

-brum, verbaLs in, 102, 5. 

Bucclic ciesura, 310, 6, R. 4, 

-bulum, verbals in, 102, 5. 

-bundus, adjs. in. 129, 1; comparison of 
126, 6; with acc., 233, n. 

C. 

C, sound of, 10; before s in roots of 
nouns, 56, i., R. 2; in roots of verbs, 171,1; 
gender of nouns in, 66; genitive of, 70; 
c final, quantity of, 299, 4; C. for Caius, 

1. q. Gains, 328. 

Ca’lebs,lVl,2’, in abl. sing., 113, k. 2; 
115, 1, (a.) 

Caesura, 309; kinds'of, 309; in hexanr.etei 
verse, 310, 3; caesural pau.se, 309, 3; iu 
hexameter verse, 4—6; in pentameter verse, 
311, 2; iu iambic verse, 314, i. and X.; in 
trochaic verse, 315, i; in choriarobic verse, 
316, in. 

Cairo, change of a to « In its compds., 
189, N. 3. 

Calendar, Roman, 326, 6. 

Calends, 326. 

Callidus, 270, R. 1; 213, a. 1. 

Canalis, abl. of. 82, 5, (c.) 

Cano receptui, 227, R. 2. 

Capaz, w. genitive, 213, R. 1. (1.), and 
R 5, (1.) 

I^apio, conjugated, 159; adjs. compound¬ 
ed of, 112, 2. 

Capital letters, how used by the RomaiiB 

2, 2; as numerals, 118, 7. 

Caput declined, 57; capitis aoi capite 
damnare, accusare, etc., 217, R. 8. 




382 


INDEX, 


Carhasits. plur. -i and -a, 92, 3. 

Cardinal numbers, 117 and 118. 

Careo, 250, 2, K. 1. 

Cannen, declined, 57. 

CV/ro. gender of, 59, 3; gen. of, 69, B 2; 
gen. plur., 83. ii., 5. 

CariJia^ini, in abl of the place where, 82, 
B- 5. (c.) 

Case-endings, table of, 39.—Ca.ses of nouns, 

36 and 37. — Casus recti aud oUiqui, 37, R- 

Catuilircs.s, 324, 1. (b.) 

i-niisa. tirutta^ etc. with wed, etc., 247, 
B. 2; their place with genitive, 279, R. 

Causal conjunctions, 19S. 7. 

Cause, abl. of, 2-17; after active verbs, 
247, R. 2; acc. of with prepositions, 247, 
R. 1. 

Cnuso, change of au in its compounds, 
189, N. 3. 

Cave or cave ne, w. subj., 267, R. 3; 262, 
R. 6. 

-ce and -cine, enclitic, 134, R. 4. 

Cedo, constr., 223, R. 2, (1), (d.) 

Cedo, imperative, 183, 11. 

Cfler, how declined, 108; gen. plur., 114, 
B. 2. 

Celo, with two accs., 231; w. de, 231, R. 3. 

Censeo, 273, n. 4. 

Centena millia, ellipsis of, 118, 5. 

-ceps, nouns in, gen. of,77, R.; adjs. in, 
genitive of, 112, 2 ; abl. of, 113, e. 2; e. 3. 

Ceres, genitive, of, 73, E. 2. 

Certe and certo, 192, N. 1. 

Certus, 213, R. 1; 275, iii., (2.); 270, R.l. 

Cetera and relir/ua for ceteris, 2^, n., E. 8. 

Ceterum, 199,8, R., (6.) 

Ceu, w. subj., 263. 2. 

Ch, sound of, lO. 1; when silent, 12, r. ; 
In syllabication, 18. 2. 

Chanicter or quality, gen. of, 211, E. 6. 

Chaos, 61. E. 3. 

Cheli/s, declined, 86. 

Choliainbus, 314. H. 

Chorianibic metre, 316; 303;—pentame¬ 
ter, 316, r.;—tetrameter, 316, n.j--trime¬ 
ter, 316, rv.;—trimeter catalectic, 316, v.;— 
dimeter, 316, vi. 

Cicur, gen. plur. of, 114, e. 2. 

Circum, in composition, 196, 4. 

Circumdo and circumfundo, 249, R 3. 

Circumflex accent, 5, 2, and 14; bow 
used, 14, 3. 

Cis and citra, constr., 2.35, R. 1. 

Citerior, compared, 126. 1. 

Citinn, pr.. 284. e. 1, (2.) 

Clam, constr.. 235, (5.) 

Clancuhnn, 192. tv., R.; 2.35, (5.). 

Claudo. its compounds, 189, N. 3. 

Clause, 20l, 13; as the subject of a pro- 
pcsitiou, 202. HI., r. 2: as an addition to 
the predicate. 203, u., 3; its gender, 34, 4; 
as the object of a verb, 229, r. 5; in abl. 
absolute. 257, R- 8; connection of clauses, 
198, I. and ii.; 278. R. 1; 280, iii.; arrange¬ 
ment of, 280; similar clauses, 278, N. 1. 

Clnnax, 324, 21. 

Clothing, verbs of, 249, i. 

Ceelestis, abl. of, 113, K. 1; gen. plur. of, 
E. 3. 

fmlum, pltr. caeli, 92, 4. 


Coens, w. gen. of price, 214, N. i, 

Carpi and cceptus sum, 183, 2. 

Cognate object. 2.T2;—subject, 23-4, iri. 
Coicnitus, pr.; 285, 2, E- 1- 
Coienomen follows the gentile name, 2T& 
9, (b.) 

Cosnominis, abl. of, 113, E. 1. 

Coho, 273, N. 4. 

-cola, compounds in, gen. plur. of, 4S, 2 
Collective nouns, 26, 4; number ol tliall 
verbs, 209, r. 11. 

Com for cum in composition, 196, R 
197, 5. 

Comitiis, as abl. of time, 253, N. 1. 
Common, nouns, 26, 3;—geuder, 30;—' 
syllables, 282, 2; 283. iv., e. 2. 

('ommoneo aud commonefaiio, constr., 
218; 27.3. n. 4. 

Communis, constr., 222, R. 2, (a.) and K 
6, (a.) 

Commuto, constr., 252, r. 6. 

Compar., gen. plur. of, 114, E. 2. 
Comparo, constr., 224, N. 1, 3. 
Comparative conjunctions, 198, 3. 
Comparative degree, 122, 5; uses of, 122. 
R. 1, 2, 3; formation of, 124; by ynag-is, 
127, 1.—comparatives declined, 110; abl. 
sing, of, 113, 2; w. gen., 212, r. 2,; denote* 
one of two, 212, r. 2., N. 1; w. abl., 256; 
used pleonastically, 256, R. 12. 13. 

Comparison, 25; of adjs., 122—127; de¬ 
grees of, 122, 3; terminal, 124;—irregular, 
125; defective, 126; by ?/2agi5 aud majcime, 
127;—of adverbs, 194. 

Complex subject, 202, 1, 3, 6; complex 
predicate, 203, 1, 3, 5; complex sentence, 
201, 11. 

Comphires, bow declined, 110. 

Comjiono, constr., 224, n. 1, 3, and r. 4. 
Compos and impos, gen. of. 112, 2; abl 
of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, (rt.); pr. 300, e. 3. 

Compo.sition of Tiouns, i03;—of adjs.. 
131;—of verbs, 188;—of adverbs, 1J)3. 

Compound verbs, how conjugated, 163, 
4;—subject, 202, 4;—predicate, 203, 4;— 
senteTice, 201, 12;—metres, 318;—words, in 
syllabication, 23;—nouns, declension of, 
91; how formed, 103; quantity of compd 
words, 285. 

Con, adjs. compd. with w. dat.,222, r. 1; 
verbs compd. with, tv. dat., 224; w. cum, 
224, r. 4. 

Conredo, con.str., 273, N. 5: 274, R. 7- 
(’oncessive conjunctions, 198, 4. 

Conrors, and discors, geu. of, 112, 2; ahl 
of, 113, E. 2. 

Concrete, nouns, 26, r. 2.;—adjs., 131. 
R. ; used for abstracts, in expressions 
time, 253, r. 6. 

Conditio, in abl., 249, ir. 

Conditional conjunctions, 198, 6. 
Conduro, with part, in dus, 274, R. 7- 
Condemning, verbs of, w. gen., 2l7. 
Confero, .w.^dat, 224, N. 1, 3. 

Conjido, w. abl., 245, ii.; w. dal., 246, R. 1 
Con fit, 183. 12; 180, N. 

Confini.%, 222, R. 1. 

Conifruo, 224, N. 1, 3, and R. 4. 
Conjugation, 25; 149 . first, 156 166 
second, 167; third, 168, 169; fourth, 160 



INDEX. 


383 


of deponent verba, 161; periphrastic, 162; 
genorjil rulss of, 163; of irregular verbs, 
17C—182; of defective verbs, 183; ofiniper- 
Bonal verba, 181; regiriar and irregular 
verbs in the four conjugations, 164—177.— 
conjugations, how characterized, 149; re¬ 
marks on.162. 

Conjunctions, 198; classes o^ 198; cob’r- 
ilinatc. 198, i.; subordinate, 198, n.; encli¬ 
tics. l9n, N 1; copulative and disjunctive, 
their use, 278; use of coordinate and sub- 
ordjnate conjs., 193, R. 1; repeated, 278, 
B. 7; whin omitted between aiijs., 206, a. 
10;—between words opposed, 278, R. 0. 

Conjinii^o, 224, .N. 1, 3, and a. 4, 

Conju trtiis. 222. r. 6. 

Cr.r.'ur, gender of, 30• gen. of, 78, 2, (6.) 

Connecting vowel, 150,5; omitted in 2d 
root, li’>3, 2; in verbal nouns, 102, 6, (b.); 
In verbil adjs., 129, 1 and4, (6.); in compd. 
ncuns and adjs., 103, R. 1.; 131, n. 

Connection of tenses, 258;—of words by 
oenjunctions^ 278;—of clauses by do., 278, 
a. 3. 

Connectives, 201, 8, 9; place of, 279, 8. 

Conor, 271, N. 1. 

Consents, 213, a. 1; 275, nr., (2.) 

Consentaneus, w. dat., 222, a. 1, w. abl., 
222, R. 6; consentaneum erat, the indie, in- 
itead of the subj., 259, a. 3, (a.); with inf. 
as subject, 269, a. 2. 

Consentio, w. dat., 224, N. 1, 8. 

Conseqnor, ut, 273, N. 2. 

Consido, 241, R. 5. 

Consonants, 3. 1; division of, ib.; double, 
B, 1. 2; sounds of, 10—12. 

ConsorSy 213. R. 1. 

Con.ctat, w. inf. as subject, 269, a. 2. 

Constituo, 272, .v. 1. 

Cnnsto, w. abl., 245, ii., 5. 

Consuetudo est, constr., 262, a. 3, N. 2. 

Consuesco, 245, il., 3 

Contendo, 273, .n. 1. 

Contentus, w. abl , 244; w. perf. inf., 268, 

B.2. 

Conterminus, w. dat., 222, a. 1, (a.) 

Continens, abl. of, 82, e. 4, (n.) 

Continental pronunciation of I^tin, 6. 

Conlin^it, conjugation, 184; w. ut, 262, 
I 8 ; w. dat. and inf., 262, a. 3, n. 1. 

Continuo, 193, n., 1. 

Contra, how used, 195, a. 7. 

Contracted syllables, quantity of, 283, iii. 

Contractions in 2d root of verbs, 162, 7. 

Convemo, 23S, n. 

Convenil, the indie, for the subj., 259, 
B 3; w. inf. 269, R 2. 

Conviiiro, 217, k. 1. 

Co/ In est, w. inf., 270, a. 1, (c.) 

Cepuhs, 140, 4. 

Copulative conjs., 198,1; repeated, 198, 

B. (e.) 

Cor, gender of, 61; genitive of, 71, s.2; 
fompds. of. 112, 2. 

Correlative adjs., 139, (2.), (3 ); 104,14;— 
adverbs, 191, R. 1. 

Cornu, declined, 87. 

Crasis, 306, (5.) and 322. 

Crater, genitive of, 71. 

Credo, 272, and a. 6; — erederes, In tile 


sense of a pluperfect, 260, ii., B. 2;—cr« 
dendum est, 271, R. 2. 

Creo, nnsror, etc., 246, R. 1. 

Crime, in genitive alter verbs, 217. 

Crnnine, without a preposition, 217, B 

2 , ( 6 .) 

Crude form or root, 40, 10. 

-crum, verbals in, 102, 5. 

Ct, initial, 12, a. 

Cui and huic, how pronounced, 9, 6: p?. 
306, R. 2. 

Cujns, how declined, 139, 4, (b.) 

Cujus, how declined, 137,5; atjusmodi, 
etc., 134, R. 5- 

-culum, verbals in, 102,5; contracted bo 
-clum, 102, 5. (b.) 

-cuius, a. um, diminutives in, 100, 3, and 
B., 1,2; 128,5. 

Cut?i, prep., affixed to abl., 241, a. 1; 
133, R. 4; 136, R. 1; how u.sed, 195, R. 11; 
w. abl. of manner, 247, 2; in composition, 
196, 5. 

Cufn or quum, mood of the verb following 
it, 263, 5. 

Cuvi, ‘while,’ 263, 5, a. 3. 

-cunique, used to form general indefinites, 
191, a. 1, (6.); 139, 5, a.; composition and 
meaning, 139, 5, n. 1; sometimes separated 
from qui, etc., ^3, 4, (5.) 

Cumprimis, its meaning, 193, ll., 2, 

Cuncti and omnes, w. gen. plur. 212, 
a. 2, N. 6. 

-eundus, adjs. in, 129, 1. 

Cupido, gender of, 59, a. 2. 

Cu/iidus, constr., 213, a. 1; 275, (2.); 
270, R. 1. 

Cupio. 271, R. 4; rupiens, 213, R. 1, (2.) 

Caro, 273, N. 1; 274, R. 7; cura ut, 267, 
R. 3. 

Curritur, conjugated, 184, 2. 

Cusios, gender of, 30; 61, 3, genitive, 76, 

£. 1 . 

D. 

D final in prosody, 299, 2; before $ in 
roots of nouns, 66, a. 1; in roots of verbs, 
171, 3, and e. 6. 

Da, pr., 284, a 3, (b.) 

Dactylic metre, 310 and 303;—trimeter, 
312, VI.; —dimeter, 312, vni.;—hexameter, 
310, I. Dactylico-iambic meter, 318, I. ; dao- 
tylico-trochaic hephimeter, 318, iv.;—tetrmr 
meter, 318, v. 

JPniin, gender of, 42, 2. 

Dotnni tufreti snlisdo, etc., 217, R. 3. 

Dative, 37; sing, of 3d decl., 79. pinr 
always like abl., 40, 6; exceptions in do 
1st decl., 43; of 3d decl., 84; of 4th ds'cl., 
89, 6; used for predicate nom., 210, N 8; 
for gen., 21 1 , R. 5; rounnodi tt incommodi, 
222. 1 and 2; dative of the end, ‘227; dat. 
of the object, after adjs., 222; different con¬ 
structions instead of, ‘222, r. 4 and 6; after 
idem, 222, R. 7; after verbs, 223—227; after 
verbs compounded with ad, ante, etc., 224; 
with ab, ex, de, circum and contra, 224, R. 1 
and 2; with dis, 224, R. 3; with satis, bene 
and malo, 225, l.; dat. of the agent, 226, n 




384 


INDEX. 


ind III.; of the poeeessor after est, 226; 
after particles, 228; dat. with the acc., 223, 
(1.); two datiyes after sum, etc., 227; want¬ 
ing, 22.5, HI., R. : dativus ethicus, 228, n. 
Datum, pr., 2^, e. 1, (2.) 

De, 195, R. 12; mth abl. instead of acc., 
229, R. 5, (6.); 2^, r. 3. 

Dea, dat. and abl. plur. of, 43. 

Debebat, indie, instead of subj., 269, R. 3. 
Decedo, w. abl., 251. 

Decerno, 273, is. 1 and 4. 

Z)ece«, conjugated, 184; its construction, 
229, R. 7; 223, r. 2,(<>.); indie, for subj., 
269, R. 3. 

Peclanitive sentences, 200, 3. 

Declaro, 230. rs. 1. 

Declension, 38; parts of speech declined, 
25,3; of nouns, 38—40; rules of, 40; first, 
41—45; exceptions in do., 43; paradigms 
of, 41;—second, 46—54; paradigms of, 46; 
exceptions in do., 52; third, 56—86; para¬ 
digms of, 57; exceptions in do., 68—85; 
fourth, 87—89; paradigms of, 87; excep¬ 
tions in do., 89; formed by contraction, 89; 
fifth, 90; paradigms, 90; exceptions in, 90; 
—of adjs., 1st and 2d. 105—107; third, 108— 
111;—declensions, how distinguished, 38; 
tabular view of, 39. 

Dedi, pr.. 284, 2, E. 1. 

Dfest mini, 226, R. 2; pr.,306, 1, R. 1, (1.) 
Defective nouns, 94—96;—adjs., 115;— 
verbs, 183. 

Defendo, 251, R. 2. 

DeffTo, w. gen. of the crime, 217, R. 1. 
D'-ficior, w. abl., 250, 2, r. 1. 

Defit, 183, 13, and 180, N.; 226, R. 2. 
Dfflvcto, 229. R. 4. 

Defim^or, 245, i. 

Degree, acc. of, 231, R. 6 : 232, (3.) 

Degrees of comparison, 122 and 123; in¬ 
terior degrees, 123, 1; equal degrees, 123, 3; 
a small degree, 123. 2; superior degrees va¬ 
riously expressed, 127, 2, 3, 4. 

Dejero, 189, N. 3; pr., 285, 2, e. 1. 

Dein, deinceps, deinde, pr., 306, 1, R. 

1 , ( 1 ) 

Delectat, conjugated, 184; its construc¬ 
tion, 229, R. 7; 223, r. 2. 

Delector, w. quod, 273, n. 6. 

Deligo, w. two aces., 230, n. 1. 

-dem, enclitic, 134, R. 6. 

Demonstrative adjs., 104,15; 139, 6, R.; 
—pronouns, 134; constr. of, 207; in appo¬ 
sition to a clause, 207, r. 22; 206, (3.); u.sed 
when the reference is not to the subject, 
208, (6.); place of, 279, 7; ellipsis of de¬ 
monstratives before their relatives. 206, (3.), 
(a.); constr. of dem. adjs., 206, (16.); dem. 
advs. for dem. pronouns, 206, (20.); dem. 
ronouus is, etc., used for the oblique c;i.<e8 
im, her, etc., 207, R. 20; redundant, 207, 
R. 21; dem. prons. and advs. announciug a 
proposition, 207, R. 22. 

Dernove. 0 , w. abl., 251. N. 

Denarius, value of, ^7, R. 3; divisions 
>f. ib. 

Denique, its use, 277, I., R. 13. 
Denominatives, adjs., 128;—verbs, 187,1. 
Dens, gender of, 64 1; compds. of, 64, 1. 
Depello, w. abl., 261, N. 


Dependence, defined, 203, ill., 8; of 
tenses, 258. 

Dependent or subordinate propoeitiona. 

201 , 6 . 

Deponent verbs, 142, r. 4; conjupited 
161; participles of, 162, 17; lists of in Ist 
conj., 166; 2d conj., 170; 3d conj., 174 
4th*conj., 177; increment of, 289, 3. 

Deposco, 274, R. 7. 

Depriving, verbs of, w. abl., 251. 

Denvation of nouns, 100;—of adjs., 128 
—of verbs, 187;—of advs., 192. 

Derivative words, quantity of, 284. 

Deses, gen. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, R. 2 
defective, 115, 2; compared, 126, 4. 

Desiderative verbs, 187, ii., 3; 176, If. 
quantity of the u in, 284, E. 3. 

Designo, with two aces., 230, N. 1. 

Despero, constr., 224, R. 1. 

Desuper and insuper, 236, R. 8. 

Deterior, compared, 126,1. 

Deterreo, quin, ne, or quominus^ 262 
R. 11; w. inf. ib. n. 

Deturbo, w. abl., 251, N. • 

Dexter, how declined, 106; how com¬ 
pared, 125, 4. 

Deus, declined, 53; deum for deorum, 63. 

Di or dii, 63; ellipsis of, 206, R. 7. 

-di or ~dis, see -dis. 

Diaeresis, 306, 2; mark of, 6, 2. 

Dialysis, 306, 2. r. 

Diana, pr. 28o, i., E. 6. 

Diastole, 307, 2. 

Dico, w. two aces., 230, n. 1; ellipsis of, 
229, R. 3, 2; 209, r. 4; 270, R. 2, (b.)-, w. inf. 
and acc., 272, n. 1; w. ut, 273, 2, (c.); 
dicunt, ‘ they say,’ 209, R. 2, (2.); dicor, w. 
predicate nominative, 210, a. 3, (3.), (a.) 
and N. 1, cf. 271, a 2; 272, r. 6; die, im¬ 
perative, 162, 4. 

Dicolon, 319, 2. 

Dicto auttiens, w. dat., 222, R. 1; dicta 
w. comparative, 256, r. 9. 

-dicus, words ending in, pr., 285, 2, E. 1. 

Dido, declined, 86; genitive of, 69, e. 3. 

Dies, declined, 90; its gender, 90, E. 1 , 
compds. of with numerals, 121, 3; quantity 
of, 285, R. 4, e.3, (6.) 

Difference, degree of, how expressed, 256 
R. 16. 

Differo, constr., 251, R. 3, N.; 229, R. 4,1. 

Diff^ering, verbs of, 251, R. 3. 

Difficile est, the indie, for the subj., 259, 
R. 4, (2.); vith an inf. as subject, 269, R. 2; 
with supine in u, 276, iii., a. 1; w. ad and 
a gerund, 276, in., r. 4. 

Digne, w. abl., 244, R. 1. 

Dignor, w. abl., 24i, R. 1; w. acc. of the 
per-son, ib.; w. inf., ib.; w. two aces., ib. 

Dignus, w. abl. of the thing, 244; w. gen 
244, R. 2, (u.); w. acc. of neut. pren. or 
adj., 244, R. 2, (a.); w. inf. or a subj. 
clause, 244, R. 2, (6.); with relative ami 
subj., 264, 9; w. supine in u, 276, iii., a. I 

Dimeter, 304, 2. 

Diminutive nouns, 100, 3;—adjs., 104,11 
128, 6;—verbs, 187, ri., 4;--adverbs, 192, a 

Diphthongs, 4; sounds of, 9; quantity 
of, 13 4; 283. ii. 

Diptotes, 94. 





XKTDSX. 


Dir for dts. 196, (6.)) 2. 

Dis or di, mseparable prep., 196, (6.), 2; 
Bonstruction of some yerbs compounded 
Withj 251, R. 3, N.; pr., 285, 2, a. 2. 

-d?5, genitives in, 77, B. 1; dw, adj., gen. 
piur. of, 114, E. 3. 

Discerno, 251, R. 3, N.; In imperf. Bubj. 
for pluperf., 200, ii., R. 2. 

Discolor, abl. of, 113, K. 2. 

Discordo and discrepo, 251, R. 8, and K. 

Disfrtus, pr., 284, e. 5, 2, n. 1. 

Disjunctive conjs., 198, 2. 

Dtssidfo, constr., 251, R. 3, and l». 

Dissimilis, 222, &. 1, and K. 2. 

Distich, 304. 

Distm^no and disto, 251, R. 3, and n. 

. Distributive numbers, ll9,120; gen. plur. 
c€, 105, R. 4; used for cardinal numbers, 
120, 4;—for multiplicatives, 120, 4, (d.) 

Distrophon, 319, 3. 

2>jw, compared, 194, 5. 

Dives, gen. sing., 112, 1; gen. plur., 114, 
E. 2; 115, 1, (a.) 

Division of’words Into syllables, 17—^23. 

Do, 149, E.; w. perf. participles, 274, 
B. 4; w. participles in dus, 274, R. 7; incle¬ 
ment of, 290, E.; 284, e. 4. 

-do, nouns in, gender of, 69, 2; genitive 
of, 69, E. 1. 

Doceo, 231, R. 1; w. gen. of price, 214, w. 1. 

Doleo, w quod, etc., 273, N. 7. 

Dotninus, declined, 46. 

Domics, declined, 89; different use of 
doniiis and donii, 89, (a.); constr. of gen., 
221, R. 3; of acc., 237, R. 4; of abl., 255, 
R. 1; 254, R. 2. 

Donee, w. subj., 263, 4; pr., 299, 4, E. 

Dono, w. abl., 249, I., R. 1; w. two da¬ 
tives, 227, R. 1. 

Dos, gen. of, 61, 3; doti dicare, 227, R. 2. 

Double consonants, 3, 1. 

Dc.ubtful gender, 30. 

Duhito and non dubito, 262, IT. 7 and 8; 
dubito an, 198, 11, (e.); dubito sit ne, etc., 

262, N. 8. 

Duco, constr., 214; 227, B. 1; 230, n. 1; 
in nurruTo, or in loco, 230, N. 4; due, im- 
perat., 162, 4. 

Dutlurn and jamdudum, 191, r. 6. 

Duim, duis, etc., 162. 1. 

Dum, w. subj., 263, 2 ; dum ne and dum- 
modo ne, 263, 2, N ; djirn, ‘ until,’ 263, 4, 
(1.);— ‘While,’ 263. 4, (2.)—compounded 
■with a negative, 277, R. 16. 

Duntaxnt, 193, ii., 3. 

Duo, declined, 118; duum for duorum, 

118, E. 1. 

-dus, participle in, how declined, 105, 
R, 2; 'f neuter deponent verbs, 161■with 
fvm. 162, 15, neuter in -durn with 274, 
R. II; w dat. of person, 162, 15, R. 6; 225, 
in ; of dep. verbs, 162, 17, (b.); w. acc., 
334, R. 2; its signifleation, 274, 2, R. 7 and 
8; used for a gerund, 276, ii. 

£. 

F, sound of, 7 and 8; S changed to « or 1, 
56, n. 4 and 6; nom in 2 in 3d decl., 66, i, 
R. 1, 7; gender of nouns in e 5f 8d decl., 
a;i 


38 & 


66; genitive of. 63; abl. of, 82; old dat. in, 
79; acc. plur. m, 64, 6; nom. plur. in, 88, 

I. , 1; voc. in, 81, R.; in gen. and dat. sing. 
6th decl., 90, E. 2; cf 40, 11; advs. in, 192, 

II. ; syncope of in imperf. of 4th conj., Iffil, 
2: increment in s of 3d decl., 287, 3; plur.. 
288; of verbs, 290; e ending the first part 
of a compound word, 285, R. 4; e final, 
quantity of, 295.— e or ex, prep., see ex. 

-ea, Greek acc. sing, ending in, 64, 6, and 
80, in. 

Eapse, etc., 136, R. 3. 

Ecce, compounded with demonstrativo 
pronouns, l34, R. 2; w. nom., 209, s 13; 
w. acc., 238, 2. 

Eccum, eccillum, eccistam, etc., 134, R. 2; 
238, 2. 

-ecis, gen. In, 78, (2.) 

Ecquis and ecqui, how declined, 137, 8, 
and R. 3; ecqiue and ecqua, 137, 3, h. 4^ 
ecquis est qui, 264, 7, N. 2; ecquicl, interrog. 
particle, 198, 11, and R. a and b. 
Ecquisnam, l37, 4. 

Ectasis, 307, 2, (3.) 

Ecthlipsis, 305, 2. 

Edepol, 199, R. 3. 

Edico, 273, N. 4. 

Edim, edis. etc., 162, 1. 

-edis, gen. in, 73, e. 1 and 112,1. 

Editus, w. abl., 246. 

Edo, ‘ to eat,’ conjugated, 181; compds 
of, 181, rt. 

-edo, abstracts in, 101,1. 

Edoceo, w. two aces., 231, R. 1. 

Efficio, 273, N. 2;— efficiens, w. gen., 218, 
R. 1, (2.);— efficitur, w. ut, or the acc. with 
the inf., 262, r. 3, n. 2. 

Effugio, w. acc., 283, R. 1. 

Egeo and indigeo, 250, 2, R. 1; 220, 8. 
-egis, genitives in, 78, 2. 

Ego, declined, 133. 

Eheu, pr., 283, i., E. 6. 

Ei, how pronounced, 9, 1, and r. 1; gen¬ 
itive in, 73, R.; pr., 283, i., e. 6, (1.) 

-eia, verbals in, 102, 3. 

-eis, fern, patronymics in, 100, 1, (5.)— 
acc. plur. in, 85, e. 1, and 114, 2. 

-eius, pr., 283, i., e. 6, (3.) 

Ejus, use of, 208, (6.) 

Ejusmodi and ejusdemmodt, 139, 6, N. 2 
-ela, verbals in, 102, 3. 

Elegiac verse, 311, R. 2. 

Ellipsis, 323; of pronoun in case of appo¬ 
sition, 204, R. 4; of the noun of an a^., 
205, R. 7; 252, r. 3; of the antecedent 206, 
(3.) and (4.); of mens, etc., 207, R. 36; of 
nom., 209, R. 2 and 3; of verb, 209, R. 4; 
229, R. 3; of a noun limited by a genitive, 

211, R. 8; of gen., 211, r. 9; of a partitive, 

212, R. 2, N. 3; of subject acc., 239 ; 269, 
R. 1; of acc. after transitive verb, 229, B. 4; 
of prep., 232, (2.); 235, R. 5; 241, r. 4; 248, 
R. 3 ; of voc., 240; of quam, 256; of partici¬ 
ple, in abl. abso!., 257, R. 7; of wt w. subj., 
262, R. 4; of ne after cave, 262, R. 6; of no* 
after non mod), etc., 277, R. 6; of conjuno 
tions, 278, r. 6; of; in composition, 307 
of centena millia, 327, R. 6. 

-ellus, a, um, diminutives in, 100, 8 
▲ 8. 




m 


INDEX. 


-em ind -en, sees, in, 46,1; 80, iv.; -em 
tn aco sing. SddacL, 79, 80. 

Em ), 252, R. 1. 

jfim ha tic word, ite place in a sentence, 
279. 2 and 16. 

En, interrogative particle, 198, 11, and R. 
(a.); 137, R. 3; cn, interjection, 199; w. 
bom., 209, R. 13; w. acc. 238, 2; -en, acc. 
In, 46, 1; 80. iv. 

Eua!la.ge, 323, 3. 

Enclitics, in accentuation, 16, 3;—con¬ 
junctions, 198, N. 1. 

Endeavoring, verbs of, 273, 1, (a.) 

-tndus and -umhts, 162, 20. 

.English pronunciation of Latin, 6. 

Enhn and »ia?n, 198, 7, and a.; 279, 3, 
ia.) and (c.) 

Enimvero, 198, 9, R. (a.) 

Ennehemimeris, 304, 6. 

Ens, participle, 154, R. 1. 

-tnsis, adj.s. in, 128, 6, (a.l 
-entissimus, superlatives in, 126, 3 
-enus, adjs. in, 128, 1, (c.j 
Eo, conjugated, 182; compds of, 182, 
a. 3; w. supine in uw, 276, n., r. 2; w. two 
datives, 227, R. 1. 

-€o, verbs in of 1st conj., 166, R. 3. 

Eo, pron. w. comparatives, 256, R. 16. 
As adverb of place, w. gen., 212, r. 4., n.2, 
(b.) —of degree, w. gen., 212, K. 4. n. 3. As 
an illative conj., 198. 6. 

Eoiiem, w. gen., 212, R. 4. N. 2. 
eo5, Greek gen. in, 76, E. 7 ; 64 6; pr., 
m, I., E. 6, (2.) 

Epanadiplosis, 324, 18. 

Kpanados, 324, 19. 

Epanalepsis, 324, 16. 

Epanaphora, 324, 13. 

Epanastrophe, 324, 17. 

Epanorthosis, 324, 32. 

Epenthesis, 3^, 3. ' 

Epicene nouns, 33. 

Epistrophe, 324, 14. 

Epizeuxis, 324, 20. 

Epulor^ with abl., 246, n., 4. 

Epulicm, 92, 6. 

Equality, how denoted, 123, 3. 

Eques^ gender of, 31,2; used collectively, 
209, R. 11, (1.), (c.) 

Eqtddem, its composition and use, 191, 
E. 4. 

-er, nouns in, of 2d decl., 46—syncopated, 
43, 1; of 3d decl., gender of, 68 and 60; 
genitive of, 70 and 71; syncopated, 71;— 
adjectives in, superlative of, 125; annexed 
to pres, infin. pa.s8., 162, 6. 

Erga, how used, 195, R. 7. 

-ere, in 3d pers. plur. of perf. indie, ac¬ 
tive, 162, 8. 

■eris, genitives in, 76; 73, E, 2; 74, E. 1; 
a£.d 112, 1 and 2. 

Erg- 0 , w. gen., r47, R. 2, (a.) 

Erotesis, 324, 31. 

-ctt/wms, superlatives in, 125,1. 

-es, proper names in, 44, 1; ~es and -e in 
tifee) nouns changed to a, 46, 3; nouns in 
cf 3d lecl. increasing in genitive, gender of, 
68; 6i; genitive of, 73; genitive of adjs. in, 
112 : not increasing, geader of, 62 ; genitive 
Kf, iS; in uim., aco., and voc. plur. of 


maso. and fern, uouns of 3d deol., 88, r.; 
final, sound of, 8, e. 2; quantity of, 300. 
Escit, 154, R. 4. 

Esse and /uisse, ellipsis of, 270, R. 3. 
-esso, -isso or -so. intensives in. 187, n., U 
Est, w. dat. of a possessor, 226; est, quL 
with subj., 264, 6; so eit, unde, ubi, cur, oi 
ut, 264. 6, R. 3. 

El and que, 198, 1, R. (a.); et ipse, 207 
R. 27, (6.); ellipsis of et,2tS, r. 6, (o.); et is, 
et id, et is quidem, 207, R. 26. (c.); et- tii 
el — que, et — neque or nee, 198, 1, R. (s.) 
et non, 198, I, (c.) 

Etenim, 198, 7, R. (a.) 

Etiam, 198, 1, r. with comparativeg 
256, R. 9, (6.); 127, 3; etiamnum, etkm 
turn, 191. R. 7. 

-ftis, genitive in, 73; 112, 1. 

Etsi and etiamsi, constr., 271. R. 2. 
-etum, derivative nouns in, 100, 7 
Etymology, 24—199 

Eu, the diphthong, 9 3; when not a 
diphthong, 9, 3, R. 3; ’m voc. sing a? 
Greek nouns in cits, 81. 

Euphemism, 324, 11. 

Eus, nouns in of 2d decl., 54, 6;—ad)a. 
in, 128, 1 and 2; Greek proper names in, 
283, N. 2; gen. of, 76, e. 7; acc. of, 80, ni. 

-ev and -etu, in 2d and 3d roots of verbs, 
167. 

Evado, constr., 251, N. 

Evenit, conjugated, 184; evenit ut, 262, 
R. 3, 

Ex and e, prep., how used, 196, R. 2 and 
13;—used with partitives instead of the 
genitive, 212, n. 4; sometimes omitted, 261, 
and R. 1; ex quo, soil, tempore, 253, N. 4. 
-ex, gender of nouns in. 65, 2. 
Exai/versus, w. acc., 195, R. 3. 

Excedo, w. acc., 233, (3 ). 

Excello, constr., 256, r. l6, (3.) 

Excito, w. ut, 273, N. 4. 

Exclude, constr., 251, N. 

Exeo, constr., 251, N. 

Existimo, w. gen., 214; w. two aces., 
230, N. 1; existmioT, constr., 271, R. 2. 
Exlex, 112, 2; 196, i., 6. 

Exos, genitive of, 112. 2. 

Exosus, 183, 1, N. 

Exsistimt qui, w. subj., 264, 6. 

Exter, 105, 3, and N.; comparison at, 
125, 4. 

Expedio, 251, N.; expedit, w. dat, 228 
R. 2. (6.) 

Experior si, 198, 11, (e.) 

Exr>ers, w. gen., 213, R. 1, (3.), fU>d 
R. 5. (2.) 

Exteniplo, 193.4. and n. 1. 

Extern, how comp.ired, 125, 4; extremuM, 
how used, 206, R. 17; extremum est, ut, 
262, R. 3. 

Exuo^ consti., 224, r. 2; exuor, 284,1.. 
R. 1. 

F. 

Fabula, ellipsis of^ 29, 2. 

Fac, imperative, io2, 4; fac utovne, 287. 
R. 3; fac, ‘ suppose or granting,’ w. aoo. ana 
inf., 273, N. 3; pr., 29§, s 4. 




INDEX, 


387 


Fofile^ adT j 192, 4, (6.); 'w. superlatires, 
|tc., 277, R. 7. 

Fan7/.<,constr.,276, in.. R. 4; 222, r. l.(a.) 

l^ac/oand couipds., passiveof, IHOandN.; 
thanges of iu the coinpds., 189, N. 1' w. 
psn. of value, 214, r. 2; w. two accs., 230, 
N. 1; w. abl., 200, r. 3; w. ut and subj., 
273, 1, N. 2 and 3; w. participle, 273, 1; 
w. de, etc., 250, r. Z'. fnrfre non possum 
quin, 2G2, 2; /acere quod, 273, N. 8; ellipsis 
of, 209, R. 4; facfrf certiorem, 230, N. 3. 

Faliscan ver.se, 312, xi. 

i'allit me, 229, a. t. 

Familia with pater, etc., gen. of, 43, 2. 

Familiaris, w. dat., 222, r. 1, (o.); with 
gen., 222, r. 2,(c.) 

Far, its root, 56, ii., r. 6; gen. of, 71, 
E 2; abl., 82. e. 1, (6.); 94 and 95. 

Fas, geuder of, 62, e. 2; 94;/'Z.'! erat, 
the indie, instead of the subj., 259, r. 3; 
fas est, w. supine in u, 276, in., r. 2. 

Faxo, faxim and faxem, 162, 9, and 183, 
r. 1. 


Faux, geritive of, 78, 2, (6.); but cf. 94, 
p. 50, gen. plur., 83, ii., 3. 

Favetur, conjugated, 184, 2, (b.) constr., 
?23. 


Fearing, verbs of, w. ut and ne, 262, r. 7. 

Febris, ellipsis of, 205, R. 7, (1.) 

Fecundus, w. gen. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) 

Feet, in poetry, 302; isochronous, 302. r. 

Fel, its root, 56, ii., R. 6; its genitive, 
70, E. : 94. 

Felix, declined. 111; 213, R. 4, (1.) 

Femina, added to epicene nouns, 33. N. 

Feminine nouns, of 1st decl.,41; of 2d 
decl., 49—51; of 3d decL, 62; exceptions in, 
62-65. 

Femur, genitive of. 71, 3. 

Fer, 162, 4; quantity of, 299, e. 4. 

F'ero, conjugated, 179; its compds., 172, 
(p. 134); ferlur, constr. of, 271, R. 2. 

-feus, comparison of adjs. in, 125, 3, (a.) 

Fido, how conjugated, 142, r. 2; w. abl., 
245, II.; w. dat., 245, ii., R. 1; 22.3, R. 2. 

Fidi, (from findo), pr., 284. e. 1, (1.) 

Figures of prosody, 305—307; of orthog¬ 
raphy and etymology, 322; of syntax, 323; 
Df rhetoric, 324. 

Filia, dat. and abl. plur., 43. 

Filiu-s, voc. sing., 52. 

Filling, verbs of, w. abl., 249, i.; w. gen., 
820,-3. 

Final syllables, quantity of, 294—301;— 
CCujunctions, 198, 8. 

F iniiimus, w. dat., 222, R. 1, (a.) 

F/o, conjugated, ISO; w. gen. of value, 
il 4, R. 2; w. two datives, 227, R. ft and 
non potest ut, 262^ r. Z’, ft pier me, 
a. 11; quantity of i in fo, 283, e. 1. 

Fln^tto w. two accs., 231, R. 1; w. wt, 
171, N. 4. 

Flecto, used reflexively, 229, r. 4, 1. 

Flocci habere, etc., 214. R. 1. 

Fluo and struo, 2d and 3d roots of, 171, N. 

Follow, in what sense used, 203, 9. 

Vans, gender of, 64, 1. 

Foras and ./brts, 237, R. 5, (c.) 

Forem, fore, etc., 154. R. S; 162, 12, (1.); 
V two dative», 227, R. 1. 


Fractional expressions, 12.1, 6. 

Freeing, verbs of, 251. 

Frenum, plur. /rent and frena, 92 6. 

Frequens, w. gen. or abl., 213, R. 5, (4.); 
cf. R. 4, (1.) 

Frequentative verbs, 187, ii., 1; quantity 
of i in, 284, e. 4. 

Fretus, w. abl., 244; w. dat., 222, R. 6; 
w. inf., 244, r. 2, (b.) 

Fructus, declined, 87. 

Frugi, 115, 4; comparison of, 125 5. 

Fruor, w.abl., 245. i.; w. acc., 245, I., R, 

Fmr, genitive of 78, 2, (5.)' 94. 

Fugio, constr., 225, iv.; 210, R. 3., (2.), 
fuge, poetically, w. inf., 2(’l, n. 3; fugitme^ 
'229, R. 7. 

Fill, etc., in compound tenses, 162 lH, 
(1.); fuisse, w. perf. pass, participles, 268, 
R. 1, (6.) 

Fungor, w. abl., 245, I.; w. ace , 246, R., 
275, II., R. 1. 

Fuo, root of fui, 154, R. 2 and 3; futum, 
pr., 284, E. 1, (2.) (5.) 

Furo, 183, R. 2. 

Furor, w. dat. or abl., 224, R. 2. 

Future ten.se, 145, iii.; how supplied in 
the subj., 260, R. 7; future perfect tense, 
145, VI.; old form in so, 162, 9 and 10; 
future indie, for imperative, 267, R. 2; 259, 
R. 1, (4.); fut. imperative, 267, (2.), (3.); 
future pa.ss. part. w. acc., 234, i., R. 2, 
fut. perf. for fut., 259, r. 1, (5.) 

Futurum esse or fore, ut, w. subj., 26S 
R. 4, (b.)’, futurum fuisse, ut, 268, R. 6. 

Q. 

G, sound of, 10; before s in roots o 
nouns, 56, R. 2; iu roots of verbs, 171, 1 
and E. 5. 

Galliambus, 314, X. 

Gaudeo, how conjugated, 142, R. 2; with 
abl., 247, 1, (2.); w. acc., 232, N. 1; with 
quod, etc., 273, n. 6. 

Gemo, w. acc., 232, n. 1. 

Gems, gender of names of, 29. 

-gena, compounds iu, 43, 2. 

Gener, declined, 46. 

General relatives, 139, 5, R.; how used, 
207, R. 29. 

General indefinites, 139, 5, R. 

Gender, 26, 7 and 27; its divisions, 27; 
general rules of, 27—34; natural and gram¬ 
matical, 27; masc. from signification, 28; 
fern, from do., 29; common and doulttful, 
30; epicene, 33; neuter appellatives of per 
sous, 32, 2; of Greek nouns, 34, r. 1; neu¬ 
ter, 34; of Lst decl., 41; exes in 1st dec! , 
42: of 2d decl., 46; exes, in 2d decl., 49; 
of 3d decl., 58, 62, and 66; exes, in 3d decl., 
59—67; of 4th decl., 87; exes, in 4th decl., 
88; of 5th decl., 90; exes, in 5th decl., 90, 
gender of adjs., 205. 

Genero, w. abl., 246, r. 1; generatus, w. 
abl., 246. 

Genitive, 37; sing., 1st decl., exes, in, 43’ 
of 3d decl., 68; of adjectives. 3d decl., 112 
plur., 1st decl., contracted, 43; 2d decl. 
do., 53; 3d decl., 83; terminal letters iu al 
the declensions, 40, 5; of adjectives, Sd 



688 


INDEX, 


iecl., 112 and 114; liter nonns, 211; its 
place, 279, R.; whaj relations it denotes, 
fill. R 1; subjective and objective, 211, r. 2; 
of substantive pronouns objective. 211, R. 
8: possessive adjective used for, 211. R. 4; 
dative used fcr, 211, r. 5; of character or 
quality, 211, r. 6; of measure, 211. R. 6, 
and (3.) and (fi.): noun limited by. omitted, 

211. R- 7; wanting, in the predicate after 
sum, 211, R. 8; in other cases, 211, R. 8,(4.); 
omitted, 211, r.9; two genitives,211, r. 1(); 
fen. after o/'us and usiis, 211, 11; how 
tranekited, 211, R. 12; after partitives, 212; 
after a neuter adjective or adj. pronoun, 

212, R. 3; its place, 279, 10; after adverbs, 
212, B ■1; after adjectives, 213; of rnuM or 
sowce, 213, H. 2; different constructions 
instead of, 213, r. 4; after (lii;nus and in- 
diznus, 244, r. 2; after verbs, 214—220; 
after saw, and verbs of valuing, 214; of 
crime, 217; after verbs of admonisliing, 218; 
after verbs denoting an affection of the 
mind, 220; instead of abl. after verbs of 
abounding, etc., 220, 3; instead of predicate 
acc., 230, N. 4; of place, 221: after parti¬ 
cles, 221, II., HI. ; of gerunds, 275, m., r. 1; 
plur. depending on a gerund, 275, - r. 1, 
[3.); place of, after neuter adjectives, 279, 
10 . 

Genitives, two, limiting the same noun, 
211, R. 10. 

Oenitus, w. abl., 246. 

Genius, voc. sing., 52. 

Gentium, 212, r. 4, n. 2. 

Genus, in acc. instead of the gen. or abl., 
as. i<t genus, omne getiiis, etc., 234, ii., r. 
2, Jin.', 211, R. 6, (4.); 231, r. 6; used with 
the genit. instead of an apposition, 211, 
R. 2, N. 

Georgicnn, 54, 4. 

Gero and fe.ro, compounds of, in nouns 
of 2d decl., 47; in adjs. of 1st and 2d decls., 
105, 3; not compared, 127, 7. 

Gerundives, defined, 275, R. 2; how used, 
275, II. 

Gerunds, 25, and 148, 2; by what cases 
followed, 275 ; and gerundives, genitive of, 
875, III., R. 1; nouns which they follow, ib. 
(1.); adjectives, ib. (2.); after sum denoting 
tendency, 275, (5.); instead of a noun in 
ipposition, 211, r. 2, n. ; dat. of, 275, R. 2; 
4CC. of, 275, R. 3; abl. of, 275, r. 4; infin. 
Cor, after adj., 270, R. 1, (a.) 

Gigno, pr., 284, r. 3. 

Gl, tl, and thl, in syllabication, 18, 3. 

Glorior, with abl., 247, 1,(2.); w. acc., 
332, N. 1, and (3.) 

Gljconic ver.se, 304, 2 ; 316, IV. 

Gn, initial, 12, r. 

Gnuius, w. gan., 213, R. 1; cf. R. 4, (1.) 

'po. nouns in, gender of, 69,2; genitive 
jf, 69, E. 1. 

Oi'iien age, of Roman literature, 329, 2. 

Qoverniuent defined, 203. 7. 

Giammatical subject. 202, 2; cases of, 
J02. R. 4; predicate. 203, 2; figures 322. 

Gratia, w. gen., 247, R. 2; its pl&.e, 279, 
R.; g'aHas rtgo, coustr., 273, n 6. 

Gratum miki est, quod, 273, n 6. 

Oratulor, o^nstr., 278, n. 7. 


Grave accent, 6, 2, and .4, 2; 15, B 8. 

Gravidus and gravis, w. gen. or abl. 
213, R. 5, (3.) 

Greek nouns, gender o", 34, R. 1; tenni 
nations of in 1st decl., 44; in 2d decl., 64 
terminations of in 3d decl., 65, R. ; acc. o', 
in 3d decl., 80; declension of, in do., 86 

Greek or limiting acc., 234, R. 2. 

Grex, gender of, 65, 2; genitive of, 78, 

2 , ( 2 .) 

Grus, gender of, 30; genitive of, 76, B. 8 

Guilt and innocence, adjectives of; with 
gen., 217, R. 1. 


n. 

H, its nature, 2. 6; its place in syllabi¬ 
cation, 18. 1; before s in verbal roots, 171 
1; in prosody, 283, i., (6.) 

Habeo, with two accs., 230, n. 1; liahcn 
in nttmero or in loco. 230, N. 4; w. gen of 
value, 214, i. 2; w. abl. of price, 252, r. 1; 
w. two datives. 227, R. 1; w. participle perf. 
pass., 274, R. 4; w. participle in 274 
R. 7, (a.); habeo, non habeo, or nihil habeo, 
quod, w. subj., 264, N. 3; haberi, w. predl 
cate nom., 210, R. 3, (3.), (c./; 271, N, ^ 
and R. 4. 

Hahito, w. gen. of price, 214, n. 1; w 
abl. of, price, 252, r. 1. 

Hac in answer to qua 1 191, R. 1. (c.) 

Hactenus, adv. of place and time, 191 
R- 1, (g-) 

Hadna, gender of, 42. 2. 

JHeec, for hce. 134. R. 1. 

Hand, signification and u.se, 191, R. 8‘ 
hand multum abtsl quin, 262, N. 7; katm 
scio an, 198, 11, R. (e.) 

Hebes, gen. of, 112, 1; abl. of, 113, B 8; 
defective, 115, 2. 

Hei mihi, 228, 3. 

Hellenism, 323, R. (2.) 

Hem. w. dat., 228, 3; w. acc., 238, 2; w. 
voc., 240, R. 1. 

Hemistich, 304. 

Hemiolius, 304, 5. 

Hendiadys, 323. 2, (3.) 

Hepar, genit. of, 71; abl. of, 82, E. 1, (b.) 

Hephthemimeris, 304, 5. 

Heres, gender of. 31, 2; genitive, 73, B. 1. 

Heroic caesura, 310, 4 and 5. 

genitive, 75, 2; acc., 80, R. ; dat 
plur.. 84; acc. plur., 85, E. 2; declined,S6 

lieteroclite nouns. 93. 

Heterogeneous nouns, 34, R. 2; 92. 

Heterosis. 323. 3. (2.) 

Hexameter verse, 310; Priapean, 310, II. 

Hiatus, 279, 18. 

Hdjernus. pr.. 2.S4, E. 5. R. 2. 

H/c, pron., declined, 134; distinguished 
from ille. 207, R. 23; hie —Ate, f(>r hie — Hit. 
207, R. 23, (A.); related in time like hmim 
and tunc. ib. (c.) 

Hie, adv. of place, hie, hinc, hue, etc. 
referring to the place of the speaker, 191 
R. 1, («.); w. gen., 212, r. 4, N. 2, b.), 
adv. of time, 191, r. 1, (g.) 

Him, her, etc., how expressed in Latin 
207, E. 20. 




INDEX. 


389 


Hlpponactlc trimeter, 314, v ..: tetrameter, 
114, IV. 

Iligtorical present, 145, i., 3; perfect, 
i45, IV., R.; for the pluperfect, 259, r. 1, 
V/.); infinitive, 2U9, R. 5; tenses. 258. 

i/nr. pleoiiH.stic, 207, R. 21 and 22; hoc 
W- partitive gen., 212, r. 3, .N, 1; Aoc witc 
souipaiitives, 250, R. 10. 

Ho'hf, pr., 2So. 2, k. 1. 

Homo, gender of. 31,2: genitive, 69, e. 2; 
4o?no, iioiiitii'-s, ellipsis of, 2U9, R. 2, (2.): 
Ja5, R. 7. (1); 229. R. 4. 

II*iinn?opropheron, 324, 26. 

Honor, (-<«), declined, 57. 

Horace, key to the odes of, 321. 

Honitiiin metre.s, 320. 

Homo,, w. inf., 271, 1. 

Hortor, w. ad, 22i>, R. 1; w. ut, ne, etc., 
yS. 2; without ul, 202, r. 4. 

Ilospes, gender of, 30; formation of nom. 
ling., 56, I., R. 3; genitive, 73, 2; abl.,113, 
c. 2; as an adj., 11^1, 8. 

Hostis, w. gen. or dat., 222, R. 2, (c.) 

‘ However ’ w. a relative, how expressed 
In Littin, 280, iii., (3.) 

Hue, w. genitive, 212, R. 4, N. 2,(4.); 
kuccine rerum, 212, r. 4, N. 3. 

Humi, constr., 221, r. 3: kumo, 2-54, R. 2; 
255, R.l. 

Huie, pronunciation of, 9, 6; pr., 306, 
E. 2. 

Hujus non fad 0 , 214, R. 1. 

Hujusmodi, 134, R. 5; w. qui and the 
lubj., 204, 1, N. 

Hypallage, 323, 4, (3.) 

Hyperbaton, 323, 4. 

Hyperbole, 324, 5. 

Hvpercataiectic or hypermeter verse, 304, 
B, (4.) 

Hypothetical sentences, 259, r. 3, (c.), 
(d.), and R. 4; 260, n.; in the inf., 268, r.4 

—R. 6. 

Hysteron proteron, 323, 4, (2.) 

I. 

I, its sound, 7 and 8; i and j but one 
character, 2, 3; i for ii in gen. of 2d decl., 
t2; t changed to e in forming certain 
horns., 50. I., R. 3; nouns in i, gender of, 
t6; genitive of, 68: genitive of Greek nouns 
b, 73, R.; dat. of 3d decl. in, 79; abl. sing, 
m, 82; 113; in gen. and dat. sing, of 5th 
Jecl.. 90, K. 2; i ending the former part of 
ti compound noun or adj., 103, R. 1; 131, 
K.; in dat. sing, of nineadjs. in m.v and er, 
107; in Lst person sing, of the perf. act., 
147,3; i, tlie characteristic vowel of the 
4th COnj., 149, 2; cf 150, 5; i or « for the 
Greek «, 283, e. 6, '!.); increment in, 3d 
decl., 287, 3; plur., 288; of verbs, 290; 
i final, quantity of, 235, R. 4.; 290. 

-ia, abstriicts in, lOl, 3; in nom., acc. 
and voc. plur.. 83; 85. 

-iariis. adj.s. in, 128, 1. (d.) 

lambic metre. 314; 303; tetrameter, 314, 
ill.; trimeter, 314, J. ; catalectic, 314, iv.; 
jimeter, 314, vi.; hypermeter, 314, vii.; 
acephalous, 314, viii.; catalectic, 314, IX,; 
Embico-dactyiic metre, 318, n. 

33* 


-tanux, adjs. in, 128, 6, (. ^.) 

-tas, fem. patronymics in 100, ^ (6.' 

Ibt, ellipsis of before xtbi, 200, (3.), (a.) 
-iris, genitive in, 78, 2, (2.), inil., and 
(3.), init, 

-iriu.'i, adjs. in, 128, 2; -idus or -itius 
verbal adjs. in 129, 5. 

Ictus, 308, 3. 

-iridus,a, U7n, diminutives in, 100, 3, R. 1 . 
-icus, adjs. in, 128, 1, (d.), and 2. (a.', 
and 6, t i.) 

Id, before a relative pron., 206, (13 )j 
w. gen., 212, it. 3; id teinpori.'^, rrtatis, id 
genus, etc., 234, ii., R. 3; ^53, R. 3; id ago, 
constr., 273, n. 1; 207, R. 22; id quod in¬ 
stead of quod. 200, (13.), (6.); as acc. cf de¬ 
gree, etc., (3.) 

Idem, declined, 134, r. 6; how used, 207, 
R. 27; w. gen., 212, r. 3; w. dat., 222, r.7: 
207, R. 27, id-)', supplying the place or 
iteyn, etiam, or tanien, 207, R. 27; idem 
qui, ac, aique, ut, cum, etc., 207, R. 27, {d-)) 
^22, R. 7 ; idi m — idem, ‘ at once,’ 207, R. 27, 
(c.); as acc. of degree, 232, (3.) 

Idea, 326, 2. 

-ides, and -iades, patronymics in, 100, 1 , 
(a.); pr., 291, 4. 

Idiotism, 325, 6. 

-idis, geuitives in, 73, E. 1; 74, K. 2. 
Idoneus, qui, 264, 9 ; 270, R. 1. 

-idus, adjs. in, 129, 2. 

-jet, in 6th decl., quantity of the e, 288, 
I., E. 2. 

-ies, advs. in, 192, ii., 3. 

Igitur, 198, 6; its place, 279, 3, (5.), 
equivalent to ‘ I say,’ 278, R. 10. 

Ignarus, w. genitive, 213, R. 1; 275, HI. 
R. 1, (2.) 

-ii in gejutive contracted, 62; how ao> 
cented, 14, e. 

-He, derivative nouns in, 100, 9. 

-His, adjr. in, 129, 4; 128, 2. 

Iliac, in answer to qua ? 191, R. 1, (rf.) 
Illacrimn, w. dat., 224, n. 1, 4. 

Illative conjunctions, 198, 6. 

Hie, declined, 134; its uses, 207, R. 20— 
26; w. qwHem, redundant, 207, R. 21; 
its relation to time, 207, R. 23, (c.); as a 
pron. of th*i 3d pers., 2C7. r. 20; relation 
of hie and ilk, 207, R. 23; iUe, qui, w. subj., 
264, 1, N. 

lllt't, pron , how declinid. 134, R. 8; 
illic, illuc, ilhne, advs., the.'r 'o'erence. 191, 
R. 1, (e.) 

-illirnus, suptriatives in, 125, 2. 
Illiusmodi, >!’4. o. 

-illo, verbs in, 187, ii., 4. 

Illud, w. geivt've, 212, R. 3, N. (n.)’ 
pleonastic, 207, R. 22; as acc. cf 
232, (3.) 

Illuflo, w. dat., 22^, 4. 

-Ulus, a, um, diminutives in, 100, 3, A.. 8. 
-im. in acc. sing. M decl., 79, SO; im fat 
eum, 134, R 1; -im, jj, etc., in T)re3. salty.,, 
162, 1; adverbs in. 192, and ii. 
imbedllus pr., 28^, 2, n. J. 

Imbuo, constr., 231, b 4. 

Imitative verbs, 187. S. 

Immernor, gen of, 112, ^; abl., 118, x. 3 
gen. plnr., 114, x. 2. 




!90 


INDEX 


ImmOj Idl, B. 8. 

Immodicus. w. jcen or abl., 218, B. 6, (3.) 

Immunis, w. gen, jr abl., 213, B. 6, (3.) 
:f- 261, N. 

-tmoniitm, deriv. nouns in, 100, 6;—and 
•imonia., verbals in. 102. 3. 

ImpatienSy w. gehit., 213, R. 1, (2 ) 

Irtipavidus, w. genit., 213, R 1, (3.) 

hnpfdiOy w. quin^ 262, n. 7; w. quomi- 
flMS, 262, R. 11; w. inf., 262, r. 11, N, 

Itnpelto, 273. N. 4. 

Imperative. 143, 3; its tenses, 145, R. 3: 
tow used, 267, (1.), (2.); irregular, 162, 4 
and 5; salij for imperati^'e 267, R. 2; sing, 
for plur., 209, n. 2.' used as a noun, 205, 

B. 8. 

Imperfect tense, 145, n -• w. oportet, etc., 
250, K. 3; the imperf. indie, for plup. subj., 
259, R. 4. 

Iniperitiis, w. geni*"., 213, R. 1, (3.); of 
gerund, 275, in., R. 1, <2.) 

Impfro, constr., 273, n. 4; 262, E. 4; w. 
dat. and acc., 223, r. 2, (1.) 

Impersonal verbs, 184; subject of, 184, 2; 
list of in 2d conj., 169; 184, R. 1; in Ist, 
8d, and 4th conj., 184, R. 1; constr. w. gen., 
215,(1); 219; w. dat., 223, R. 2, N, (6.); w. 
acc., 229, R. 6 and 7. 

Impertio, 249, i., and R. 3; 226, B. 1, (6.) 

Impetro, ut, 273. N. 2. 

ImpleOy 249, r. 1; 220, 3. 

Jmpono, 241, r. 6. 

Impos and vnpotens. vr. genit., 213, B. 1, 

( 8 .) 

Imprimis^ 193, li., 2. 

Jmprudens, improvidics^ w. genit., 213, 
B. 1. 

Imputes, genitive, 112,1; abl., 113, e. 2; 
115, 1, (a.) 

Impulsus, w. abl. of cause, 247, R. 2, (b.) 

-in, roots of nouns in, 56, ii., R. 1 and 2; 
in acc. sing., 79. 

In, prep., constr., 235, (2.); signification 
and use, 195, R. 14; in composition, 196, 7; 
in with abi. instead of predicate acc., 230, 
N. 4; constr. of verbs compd. with, 224; 
w. abl. after verbs of placing, holding, re¬ 
garding. assembling, etc., 241, R. 5; ellipsis 
of with some ablatives of place, 254 and RS. ; 
with ablatives of time, 2-53, N. 1, and R.. 6; 
Irtth names of towns, 254, r. 2 and r. 3. 

Inunis, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 6, (3.) 

IncassunK 193, ii., 4. 

Incedo, 233, (3.), N. ; 210, r. 3. (2.) 

Inceptive verbs, 187, ii., 2; list of, 173. 

Incertuc, w. genit., 213, R. 1; incerturn 
an, 198, 11, R. (e.); 265, R. 3. 

Inchoatives, see inceptive verbs. 

Inridit tit, 262, R. 3. 

In:ito, constr., 225, R. 1; incitatus, w. abl. 
0 cause^ 217, u. 2, (b.) 

Incipio, w. inf., 271, N. 1. 

Inelino constr., 229, r. 4,1; 225, iv. 

Ittcnmn odo^ w. dat., 223, n. 2, n. (b.) 

inemneat of nouns, 286; sing, num., 
287; plur. num., 2S8; of verbs, 289. 

Iticrementum, 324, 22. 

Increpo and increpi'o, w. gee., 217, E. 1. 

Incumbo, w. dat., 224, 4; w. ad, 224, R. 4. 

Jneusa, w genit., 217, a. 1. 


Inde, ellipsis of before un>ie, 206, (8.), (2.; 
inde loci, 212, R. 4, n. 4. 

Indeclinable nouns, 34; O'!;—adjeotlvwa 
115. 4. 

Indefinite adjectives. 104; 139, 5, B. 
pronouns, 1.38;—adverbs, 191. R 4. 

Indicative mood. 143. 1; its tenser, 146 
how used, 259; tenses used one for another 
259, R. 1—4; indie, of the preterites wit! 
oportft, etc , 2.59. R. 3; in inserted clausea 
266, 2, R. 3 and 5; 266, 1, R- 1. 

Indico, w. acc. and inf. 272, It. 1. 

Indigeo, w. abl., 250, 2, (2-); w. genit 
220, 3. 

Indignor, constr., 273, 6, N. 6. 

Indipius, w. abl., 244; w. genit., 244; 
R. 2; indigntis qui, w. subj., 264, 9; w. BU- 
pine in u, 276, iii., R. 1. 

Indigus, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 6, (2.) 

Indirect questions, subj. in, 265:—indi¬ 
rect reference, 266, 3:—indirect discourse, 
266, 1, N. and 2. 

Induco, id animum inducere, 233, (1.); 
pass. vr. acc., 234, R. 1; inductus, w. abl 
of cause, 247, R. 2, (b.) 

Indulgeo, constr., 2^, (1.), (a.) 

Induo, w. dat. and acc., 224, 4; w. abl 
and acc., 249, i., r. 1; cf 224, r. 1, (6.) 
induo and exuo, constr. in p.ass., 234, B. 1. 
-me or-tone, fern, patronnnics in, 100, l,(ft. 

Ineo, 182, r. 3; inire ansilia, w. inf 
270, B. 1, (c.); 284, III. 

Iners, abl. of, 113, e. 3, and r. 1. 

Inexpertus, w. genit.. 213, R. 1. 

In fnmo, w. genit. of crime, 217, a. 1. 

Infero, 224, 4, and r. 4. 

Inferus, comparison of, 125, 4;— infenor 
w. dat., abl., or quam, 256, R. 10; injimui 
and imus, 205. R. 17. 

Infinitive, 143, 4: as a noun, 26, R.; 269; 
its gender, 34, 4; 205, R. 8; its cases, 269, 
(6.); as an acc., 229, r. 6; 270; as a verb, 
269, (a.); its tenses, 145, R. 4; old inf. pres 
pafis. in -er, 162, 6;—inf. as logical subj., 
202, R. 2; 269; how modified, 203, m., 5; 
with subject nom., 209, R. 5; for the geni¬ 
tive, 213, R. 4; its subjetc. 2.39; w, dat. in¬ 
stead of acc., 227, construction and 
meaning of its tenses, 268; inf. as subject 
of inf, 269, r. 3; as predicate nom., 269, 
R. 4; e.v.^e, etc., with lirt-l and a predicate 
noun or adj., case of such predicate. 269, 
R. 5; poetically after wlint verbs. 271 N. 3; 
depending on a verb, 270: 229, r. 6; on an 
adj. or noun, 270, R. 1; 275, ii., R. 1, n. 1; 
absolute. 270, R. 2; ellipsis of, 270, R. 3; 
inf. without a subject after what verba 
used, 271; with a subject, after what verbs, 
272; 273; how translated. 272, r. 3; uaeq 
like a noun, 273, n. 9; its place, 279, 11; 
inf. pre.s. for inf. perfect, 268, r. 1; inf. 
perf for pre.sent, 268, r. 2; pre.s. forfutura 
268, R. 3; poet, to denote a purpose, 274 
R. 7, (b.) 

Injinitum est, the indie, for the subj, 
259, R. 4, (2 ) 

Injirmus. w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3. 

Infit, 183, 14, I'^O. > 

Inflection, 25; parts of speech Inflected 
24, 4. 


; 




INDEX. 


m 


higei^^ abl of, 113, b. 3. 

jtnimicus, w. dat., 222, a. 1; w genit., 
122, R. 2, (c.) 

-inis, genitives in, 69, b. 1 and 2. 

Initio, “at first,” 253, x. 1. 

Innitor, 22i, R. 4. 8^ also nitor, 

Innocens and innoxitis, w. genit 213 

R 1. 

Insntuibilis, w. genic., 213, R. 6, (1.) 

Insriits, w. genit., 213, R. 1, (3.) 

Inscribo, inscidvo, and insero, constr., 
2ll. R. 5. 

Insimido, w. genit., 217, R. 1. 

Insolt-ns and insolitus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. 

liiops. abl. of, llj, 3. 3; 115, 1, («.); w. 
genit., 213, r. 1: cf. r. 4, (1.): w. abl.. 250, 
2 ,( 1 .) 

Inquam, 183, 5; ellipsis of, 209, r. 4; its 
position, 279, 6. 

Inserted clauses, 266. 

Insitiito, constr., 229, R. 4, 1. 

Inso7is. genit. plur. of, 114, e. 3; 115, 1, 
(a.); w. genit., 213, r. 1. 

Inspergo, 249, i., R. 1 and R. 3. 

Jnstar, a diptote, 94. 

Jnstituo, 273, N. 4; 230, N. 1; 231, R. 4; 
w. inf., 271, N. 1. 

Instrument, abl. of, 247, and R. 5; w. 
verbs of teaching, 231, R. 3, (c.) 

Instruo, 231, R. 4. 

Insumere tempiis, 275, R. 2. 

Insuesco, w. dat. or abl. of the thing, 
245, n., 3; w. inf., 271, n. 1. 

213, r. 1, (3.); 222, r. 2, (o.); 
275, III., (2.); 270, R. 1; 275, ni., r. 1, (2.) 

Insuper, w. acc. or abl., 235, R. 8. 

Integer,^ w. genit., 213; integrum est ut,, 
262, R. 3, X. 3. 

Intelligo. w. two accs., 230, x. 1; w. acc. 
and inf., 272, x. 1; i/Uelligiticr, w. inf. as 
subject, 269, R. 2. 

Intention denoted by participle in rus 
with su7n, 162, 14; 274, r. 6. 

Intentus, w. acc. nihil, 232, (3.); intentum 
esse, w. dat. of gerund, 275, in., r. 2, (1.) 

Inter, use of, 235, 1, R- 2; in composition, 
196, I., 8;—w. se or ipse, 208. (5.); w. p- 
runds, 275, III., R. 3; in-stead of partitive 
gen., 212. r. 2, x. 4; construction of its 
compds., 224; repeated by Cicero after in- 
ttressf, 277, II., 4. 

Intercedo, w. quin, ne, or quominus, 262, 

R. 11 , 

Interdvdo and interdico, 251, N.and r. 2. 

Interdiro, w. abl.. 251, x. 

Intrrdiu or dif, 253, x. 1. 

InUren loci, 212, R. 4, X. 4. 

Interest, Roman computation of, 327. 

Interest, w genit.. 219; w. wra. etc., 219, 
R 1 ; suhjw’t cf. 219. k. 4; degrie of interest 
how expre.^sed, 219. r. 5. 

comparison of, 126 1; intunus, 

t05. R 17. 

inteijections, 199; w. nom., 209, r. 13; 
w. dat . 228, 3 • w. acc., 238.2; w. voc., 
240 ; O, heu, etc., not elided. 305. 

hitfrmittOy w. inf.. 2(1, x 1. 

i nler/ires, gender of, 30; 61 2; genit. of, 
*3, 8. 

(ntetritus, w. genit., 213, R 1 »nd 2. 


Interrogative particles, 198, 11adjs 
104, 14; 121, 5; 139, 5, 8;—pronouns, 187 
in indirect questions, 137, x.; 265, X. 2;- 
sentences, 200, 3. 

Interrogo, w. two accs., 231, R. 1; constr 
in pa.s8., 234, I.; w. genit. of the ciiiue, 
217, R. 1. 

Intersum, w. dat., 224, 5. 

Intus, w. acc., 238.1, (b.) 

Intra, how used, 195, R. 8; 253, R. 4, (6.) 

Intransitive verb, 141, ii.; used imper¬ 
sonally in pa.ss. w. dat., 223 k. 2. (c.) 

-inus, adjs. in, 128, 1, 2, and 6. 

Invado, 233, (3.), x. 

Invariable adjs., 122; specified, 127, 7. 

InveniOj w. two accs., 230, N. 1; invaiir 
untur, qui, w./ubj., 264, 6. 

Invideo, constr., 223, (1.), {’.i; 220, 1 
invidetur mihi, 223, R. 2, x. (c.) 

Invitus, w. dat: of the person, 226, r. 3, 
invitd. Minerva, 257, R. 7. 

Involuntary agent of pass, verb, 248, ii., 
and N. 

- 10 , nouns in, gender of, 59, 1; personal 
appellatives in, 100, 4, (6.); verbals in, 102, 
7; verbs in of 3d conj., 159. 

Ionic metre, 317; 303;— a majore, 317,1.; 
— a minore, 317, ii. 

-ior, -ius, in terminational comparatives, 
124, 2. 

Ipse, declined, 135; how used, 135, R. 1; 
207, R. 28; used refiexively, 208, (4.); 207, 
R. z8, (c.); w. inter, 208, (5.)j^ et ipse, 207, 
r.27,{6.); ipse, with the inf., 2(3, x.9, (a.); 
nunc ipsum and tian ipsum, 191, r. 7. 

Ipsus and ipsissimus, 135, R. 2. 

Irascor, w. dat., 223, R. 2, x., (b.) 

Iri, w. supine in um, 276, ii., R. 3. 

Iron age of Roman literature, 329, 4. 

Irony, 824, 4. 

Irregular nouns, 92;—adjs., 115;—verbs, 
178—182. 

-is, nouns in, gender of, 62; 63; genitive 
of, 74; -Is or -eis instead of -Ss in a«c. plur. 
of 3d decl., 85, e. 1; abl. of adjs. in is used 
as nouns, 82, e. 4;—u.sed as proper names, 
82, E. 4, (6.); -is for -us in genitive of 4th 
decl., 89, 2; fern, patronymics in, 100, 1, 
(6.); ellipsis of in 2d root of verbs, 162, 7, (c i 

Is, pron., declined, 134; how u.sed, 207, 
R. 26; referring to a clause, 206, (l3.); is 
and ille with quidem used pleonastically, 
207, R. 21; is for tnlis, 207, R. 26, (6.); 264, 
1, et IS, atque is, isque, et is quidem 
207, R. 26, (c.); ellipsis of is, 207, R. 26, (d.)\ 
is-qui, 264, 1. X. 

Islands, gender of, 29; constr. of names 
of, 237, R. 5, (b.) 

-issinnis, a, um, the terminational super 
lacive, 124. 2. 

-isso, verbs in, 187, ti., 5. 

Iste, how declined, 134; how used, 207,- 
R. 25 ; iste qui, w. siibj.. 264,1, x. 

Istic, pron., declined, 134. R. 3. 

Istic, adv., istinc, istuc, the’r refersnoej 
191, R. 1,(^.) 

Istiusmodi, 134, R. 5. 

-it, roots of nouns in, 56, it., r. 6; in 8d 
root of 4th conj., 176, of certain verbs o 
8d conj., 171, K. 7 



m 


INDEX. 


Ita, 191, B 6; 277, R. 12, (a.); ita ncfi, 
277, R 14. 

Itaque, its meaning, 198, 6, R. ; its place, 
B79, 3, (b.) 

Itrr, dei’lined, 57; 71, 2; with sum and 
Bcc. of place, ^7, R. 1; increments of, 
286 ; 2 . 

■Iter and -t«r, advs. in, 192, ii. and iv. 
-itas, -ia, -itia, -ities, -ituUo, and -itus, 
Ebetrasts in, 101, 1. 

-itu, genitive in, 73; 78, 1; 112, 1. 

-ito, frequentatives in, 187, ii., 1. 

■dints or -icius, adjs. in, 129, 5. 

Iturn, sup., in prosody, 284, E. 1, (2.) 
-itus, advs. in, 192, i. and ii.; adjs. in, 
128, 7. 

-turn, verbals in, 102, 2; -dum or -itium, 
nouns in, KX), 5. 

-ius, genitives in, place of English accent, 
16; in what adjs., 107; quantity of the t, 
28S: I., E. 4:—adjs. in, 128, 1, 2, and5; 
vcc. sing, of patrials and possessives in, 62. 
•iv, in 2d roots of verbs, 175; 171, E. 3. 
-ivus, adjs. in, 129, 7. 


J. 

J, vowel before, in pro.sody, 283, iv., w. 1. 

Jaceo, 210, R. 3, (2.); 233, (3.), n. 

Jam, with a negative, 191, R. 6; jamdu- 
dum, ib. 

Jecur, genitive of, 71, 3; increments of, 
286, 2. 

Jejunus, w. gen. or abl., 213, r. 5, (3.) 

Jesus, decl. of, 53. 

Jocus, plur. joci and joca, 92, 2. 

Jubar, abl. of, 82, e. 1, (6.) 

Jubeo, constr., 223, (2.); 273, 2, (J.); 272, 
B. 6; 262, R. 4; ellipsis of jubeo valere, 238, 
E. 2; jubeor, w. inf., 271, N. 1. 

Jucundus, constr., 276. in., r. 1 and 4; 
jurundum est, w. quod, 273, 5, N. 6. 

Judico, w. two accs., 230, N. 1; w. acc. 
and inf., 272; .n. 1; in pass., 210, r. 3, (3.), 
(c.); judican w. predicate nominative, 271, 
R. 2. 

Jugerum, 93, 1; 94. 

Jiigum, quantity of its compds., 283, iv., 

«. 1 . 

Jungo, constr., 229, r. 4, 1. 

Junctus and conjunctus, constr., 222, 
R. 6, (c.) 

Jupiter^ genitive of, 71; declined, 85. 

Jure aliquid facere, without ?M?n, 247, 2. 

Juro, its compds., 189, n. S:—juratus, 
with active meaning, 162,16:—ywro, poet, 
w. inf., 271 N. 3. 

Juiijurandum, declined, 91. 

Justum, erat, indie, for subj., 259, R. 3, 
'ustiim est with inf. as subject, 269, R. 2; 
justo after comparatives, 256, r. 9; its 
olace 279, R. 1. 

Juvat, w. acc., 229, R. 7 

Juvenalis, abl. of. 82, e. 4, (b.) 

Juvrnis, abl. of. 82. e. 4, (b.): 113, E. 2; 
jomparison of. 126, 4; 116, 1, (a.); for in 
juventute, 253, r. 6. 

Juxta as an adv., i(95, R. 4; juxta ac or 
tque, 198, 3, u. 


E. 

K, its use, 2, 4. 

Key to the Odes of Horace, 821. 

Knowing, verbs of, their construction, 272 

L 

L, roots of nouns in, 66. ii.; gender of 
nouns in. 66; genitive of, 70;—final, quan 
tity of, 299, 2. 

Lahoro, constr., 273, N. 1; poet. w. inf. 
271, N 3. 

Labials. 3. 1. 

Lac, gender of, 66, K.; genitive of, 70. 

Lneesso, constr.. 225, R. 1. 

LfPtor, w. abl., 247, 1, (2.); acc., 232, (3.) 

La-tus, w. abl. or gen., 213, R. 6, (4.); 
cf. R. 4, (1.) 

Lampas, declined. 86. 

Lapis, declined, 57. 

Imc, pr., 284, N. 1. 

Largus, w. gen. or abl., 213, b. B, (8.) 
cf. R. 4, (1.) 

Lars, genitive of, 71. 

Lassus, w. genit., 213, R. 2. 

Lateo, w. dat. or acc., 223, R. 2, N., (5.), 
and (1.), (a.) 

Latin grammar, its divisions, 1. 

Lntinis, for ludis Latinis, 253. n. 1. 

Latus, altus, and longus, w. acc. of space, 
236. 

Lavo and laaro, scil. se, 229, r. 4, 1; lavo, 
w. abl. of price, 252, R. 1. 

Laxo, w. abl., 251, n. 

Leading clause, subject, and verb, 201.13. 

Lego (ere), its form in the compds., 189, 
N. 2; constr., 230, n. 1. 

Lenio, constr., 229, r. 4, 1. 

-lentus, adjs. in, 128, 4. 

Letters, 2: division of, 3; sounds of, 7 
numeral, 118, 7; capital, 2, 2; silent, 12, r 
terminal in 3d decl., 66. 

Leva, w. abl., 251, n.; w. gen. poet. 

220 , 2 . 

Lex, gender, 65, 2; genitive, 78, 2, (2.);— 
legem dart, constr., 273, 2, n. 4;— lege, abl 
of manner, 247, 2. 

Liber, w. abl. or gen., 213, n. B, (4.); c£ 
220, 2; and 251, n. ; w. genit., 213, R. 6, (4.); 
cf. R. 4, (1.) 

Libero, w. abl., 251, a.; poetically, w, 
genit., 220, 2. 

Liberalis. w. ^nit., 213, R. 6, (1.) 

Libram and libras, 236, r. 7. 

Libro, abl. w. adj. without prep., 254, 
R. 2. 

Licentia, w. genit. of gerund, 276. m., 
R.l,(l.) 

Liceo, w. genit. of price, 214, R. 3, w 
abl., 252, R. 1. 

Licet, w. dat., 223 R. 2; w. subj. the acc 
with the inf., or the inf. alone, 273, 4: 262 
R 1; w. inf. as subjwt, 289, R 2; case of 
the predicate after licet esse, etc., 269, a. 5; 
w. indicative instead of subj., 269, R. 3, (a, 
— licet, conj. w. subj., 263, 2. 

Limiting ficc.^ 23*4) n.;—abl., 260 and n 

-limits, superlatives in, 126, 2. 

Linguals and liquids, 3, 1. 



INDEX. 


393 


Liqui/ius, pr., 284, E. 5 , r. 3. 

-fix, adjs. in, comparison, 125, 2. 

Idteras /fare, scribere or miUerf.^ 225, iv. 

». 4; ellipsis of, 229, r. 4. 2; literas or Ute- 
•is, aftor verbs of teaching, 231, r. 3, (c.) 
Litotfs, 324. 9. 

pr., 284, E. 1, (2.) 

Loading, verbs of, w. abl., 249,1. 
LorupUs. genitive of, 112, 1; abl., 113, 
8. 2; gen. plur., 114, e. 3; 115, 1, (a.); w. 
nbl. or gen., 213, r. 5, (4.) 

Locus, plur. loci and loca, 92, i., 2; loco 
and lori.s, abl. of place without a preposi¬ 
tion, 254. r. 2; loco^ w. gen. for predicate 
Dora., 210, N. 3; for predicate aoc., 230, n. 
4; /oc/and/ororu?;?, 212, r. 4. n. 2 and N. 
4 ;_/oc«.s in appo.'iition to names of towns, 
237, R. 2; loco, w. gen. of price, 241, r. 5; 
w. abb of price, 252, r. 1; w. participles in 
dus, 274, R. 7; w. genitive of gerunds, 275, 
HI., R. 1, (1.) 

Logical subject, 202, 3,—predicate, 203,3. 
Long syllable, 282. 2. 

Lon^c, w. comparatives and superlatives, 
127, 3; 256, n. ; w. acc. of space, 236, n. 2 ; 

gentium, 212, r. 4, n. 2, (6.); longuts 
without quam, 256, r. 6. 

Longitudine, w. genit. of measure, 211, 

R. 6, (6.) 

Longus, w. acc. of space, 236; longum 
est, the indicative instejid of the subjunc¬ 
tive, 259, R. 4, (2.) 

-Is, genitive of nouns in, 77, 2, (2.) 

Ludis, for m tempore ludorum, 263, N. 1; 
257, R. 9, (2.) 

Luo, w. abl., 252, r. 1. 

M. 


M, roots of nouns ending in, 56, i.; be¬ 
fore d changed to n, 134, N. 1; dropped in 
the 3d root of certain verbs, 171, E. 6; final, 
'juautity of, 299, 3; elided, 305, 2. 

-ma, Greek nouns in, genitive plur. of, 
14, E. 2. 


Mactus, 115, 5; made, w. abl., 247, 1, 
2; w. genit., 213, r. 5, (4.) 

Magis and maxime, use of in forming 
eomparatives and superlatives, 127, 1; ple- 
Bnastic with malle, etc., 256, R. 13. 

Magnus, compared, 125, 5; w. supine in 
(i, 276, III., R. 1; magnam partem, 234, ii., 
t 3; magnijparvi, etc., w. verbs of valu¬ 
ing, 214, R. 1; magno, parvo, etc., w. verbs 
of buying, etc., 252, r. 3. 

Mile, ;onstr. of its compounds malefacio, 
9ia/«<'//co, etc., 225, i.; mule, instead of abl. 
'>f price, 252. r. 3; male, bene, or pnidenter 
facio; male or b^ne Jit, w. quod. 273, 5,(1.) 

Male, conjugated, 178, 3; constr., 273,4; 
St2, R. 4; mullein ji,ariing of, 26)0, ;i. r.2; 
K n.str. w. abl. like a comparative, 256, r. 
Id, (3.) 

Mains, compared. 125, 5. 

Mandn, constr., 223, R. 2. and (1.), (5.); 
178, N. 4; 274 r. 7, (a.); 262, r. 4 

Maru, 94; 192, 3. 

Afaneo, 210, r. 3,(2.); compds of, 233, 
il.), n. 

ManifesfMS, w. geuit. 213, r. 1. 


Manner, advs. of, 191, i.l., abl of 247 
with cum, 247, 2; vt. de or ex, 247, r. 3. 

Manus, gender of, 88; ellipsis of, 205, % 
7, manum injicere, 233, (1.) 

Mare, abl. of, 82, k. 1, (6.); ellipsis of 
205, R. 7. 

ISlas, gender of, 62, e. 1; genitive, 72, 
E. 1; genit. plur., 83, li., 3, e. ; used t<J 
distinguish the .sex of epicenos, 33, N. 

3Ia.sculine nouns of 3d de^l., 58; 
tions in, 59—61;—masculine emsura, 310, 

N. 1. 

Materfamilias. declined, 91 

Blateria, w. geuit. of gerunds, 275, 1X7., 

R. l.,(l.) 

Material nouns, 26, 6;—adjs., 104, 8 

Maturo, soil, se, 229, R. 4, 1; w. inf., 271, 

N. 1. 

Me. and mi for mihi, 133, R. 1. 

]\Iea, tua, etc., w. refert and interest,219, 
R. 1 and 2. 

Means, abl. of, 247; when a person, 247, 
R. 4; w. pa.ssive verbs, 248. 

Measure or metre, 303; Roman measurei 
of length, etc., 327. 

Medeor, w. dat., 223, N. (5.); its gerun¬ 
dive, 275, II., R. 1. 

Medicor, constr., 223, (1.), (a.) 

Meditor, constr., 273, N. 1. 

Medius, how translated, 205, r. 17; w. 
genit., 213; w. inter, 213, R. 4, (2.); w. abl., 
213, R. 4, (5 ); its place, 279, 7, (*.) 

Mel, genitive of, 70, e. ; 56, n., r. 6; abl., 
82, E. 5, {b.)- 94. 

Melas, genitive of, 72, e. 2. 

Melius fuit and erat instead of subj., 259, 
R. 3; melius est, w. dat., 228, 1; melius 
erit, w. perf. inf., 268, R. 2. 

Melos, nom. plur. of. S3, 1; 94. 

Meme and mepte, intensive, 133, R. 2. 

Memini, 183, 3; constr., 216; w. present 
inf., 268, R. 1; w. acc. and inf., 272, n. 1; 
memento, poet. w. inf., 271, n. 3. 

Me.mor, w. geuit., 213, R. 1, (3.); w. subj., 
213, R. 4. 

Memoro, constr., 272, r. 6. 

-onen, nouns in, gender of, 61, 4, and 6b; 
genitive, 71, 1; -onen or -mentum, verbals 
in, 102, 4. 

Mens; in mentem venit, constr., 216, 
R. 3. 

Mercor, w. abl. of price, 262, R. 1. 

-met, enclitic, 133, r.2; 139, r, 1. 

Met'ilepsLs, 324, 6. 

Metaphor, 324, 1. 

Metapbasm, 322, I. 

Metathesis, 322, 9. 

Meto. 171, K. 2. 

Metonymy, 324, 2. 

Metre, 303; how divided, 303, 3; iLTereni 
kinds, 310—317. 

Metres, compound. 318; Hovatian, 320. 

■anetros, Greek nouns in. 49, 2. 

Metuo, w. ut or ne, 262, R. 7; w. inf., 271, 

y. 1. 

Mens. voc. sing, masc., 105, R. 3; 139, 1 
u.sed refiexivel}', 139, r. 2; Low declined 
139; meum est, 211, R. 8, (3.), (a.) 

Mi, for miki, 133, R. 1. 

Middle voice in Greek, 248, r. 1 , (2 ) 




394 


IND EX 


Mile, Roman. 227. 

Miles^ declined, 67; gender, 30; 61, 2; 
penitive, 73, 2; used collectively, 209, r. 11, 
1.), (c.); ellipsis of, 205, R. 7. 

Military expressions without ciim^ 249, 
tii., R. 

Mditiae^ construed like names of tcwns, 
221, R. 3. 

tMitle. how used, 118, 6; ellipsis of, 327, 
R 5. 

Million, how expressed, 118, 5, (a.); a 
million s^terces, 327. k. 2. 

Min^ for inihint^ 133, R. 1. 

in old imperatives, 162, 5. 

Minor and couipds, w. acc. and dat., 223, 

) 

Mh v. dat., 223, R. 2; and (1.). (^.) 
Minus and mmivimyi. w. genit., 212, r. 3, 
ff. 1; rniniis^ for non, 277, i., r. 14; viinus 
without qua?}}^ 256, r. 6. 

M/ror, conjugated, 161 • w. genit. poet., 
220, 1; constr., 273, n. 6. 

Mmim est iit^ 262, r. 3, n. 3; mirum 
qitnvi, quantum^ etc., 265, R. 4. 

Alisreo. how construed, 245, ii., 2, and r. 
1; 224, R. 3. 

Misf-reor^ miseresco^ miseret^ miseritvm 
tst^ and yniserescit^ w. gen. of the thing, 215; 
miseret^ etc., w. acc. of the person, 215, N. 
3; 229, R. 6; and w. acc. of the thing, 215, 
N. 2; w. acc. of degree, 215, n. 3. 

Mitis^ declined. 109. 

Mitto^ w, ad or in^ 225; w. two data., 227; 
273, 2, (c.): w. participle in dus, 274, r. 7; 
w. inf., 271, N. 3; w. quod^ 273; viissum 
facio^ 274, r. 4. 
il/n, initial, 12, 2, r. 

Mobilis^ pr., 284, e. 5, R. 1. 

Moderor^ constr., 223, (1.), (a.) 

Mndt annexed to pronouns, 134, r. 5; 
its use, 211, R. 6, (5.) 

Modims^ w. genit., 213, R. 5, (1.) 

Modified subjwt, 202, 6^ itself modified, 
202, HI., R. 1;—predicate, 203, 5. 

Modify or limit, in what sense used, 202, 
1, R. 

Modo as abl. of manner, 247, 2. 

Modii^ conditional conj., 198, 5; w. subj., 
*8,2; wodo^ adv., 193, ii., 3; viodo ne, 
268, 2, N. 1; modo — modo^ 277, r. 8. 

Modvs^ w. genit. of gerunds, 275, ill., 

R. 1, (1.) 

Mollioj 229, R. 4, 1. 

Moleste^ cRgre or graviter fero^ w. quod^ 

Hi. N. 6. 

Moneo. conjugated, 157; constr., 218, 
itid R. 1, 2; 273, s >; without 262, r. 4; 
VT. see. and iuf., 273, w. 4, (e.); in pass.. 
234 I 

M,:ney, Tloman, 327, pp. 370—372. 
Monooolon, 319, 2. 

MMicniiter, 304, 2; 313, I. 

Mouop^otes, 94. 

Mcnosji llables, quantity of, 294, (a.); 
294, 1; thvjir place, 279, 8. 

Mans, gender of, 64, 1. 

Months, Roman, 326, 2; names of, 326; 
division of, 326, 1; gender of names of, 28; 
15, 3; abl of names in er and /5, 82, e. 2 


Moods, 143. 

Mora, in prosody, 282, 2. 

Mos or moris est. constr., 26!1, F 3; W 
genit. of gerunds, ^75, in., R. 1, (!•/j 
as abl. of manner without ctmi. 247, m. 

Motion or tendency, verbs of, constr. 
226, IV.; 237, r. 3. 

Mnttnrt. pr., 284. e. 6, r; 1. 

Mountains, gender of inames of, 28, 8. 

Bloveo, constr., 229, r. 4, 1; 251, N. 
motusy w. abl. of cau.^e, 247, R. 2; (6.) 

-7??.^, nouns in, genitive of, 77, 2, (i.) 

Mnltiplicative.s, 121, 1. 

{are), constr., 217, R. 5. 

JMuUifs. compared, 125,5; mxdti et^ hovs 
used, 278, k. 5; viulto^ w. comparativeia, 
etc.. 127, 3; 256, r. 16; so multum., ib., n.; 
rnidtum. w. genitive, 212, r. 3, N. 1; ai 
acc. of degree, 212, (2.); multus instead of an 
adverb, 205, R. 15. 

Mas. gender of, 30; 67, 4; genitive, 76, 

B. 3; genit. plur., 83, ii.. 3. 

Munijicus^ w. genit., 213, R. 5, (1.) 

Mutes, division of. 3. 1; a mute and 
a liquid in prosody, 283. iv., e. 2 

JMutilus. w. abl., 213, R. 5. (5.) 

Muto^ constr., 252, r. 5; 229, r. 4, 1. 

N. 

N. roots of nouns in, 66, n.; nouns in, 
gender of, 58; 61; genitive of, 70; 71; 
final, quantity of, 299, 2 ; dropped in the 
3d root of certain verbs, 171, e. 6. 

•nar.tis. genitive of Greek names in, 78, 

2 ,( 1 .) 

Nayn and e.nim^ 198, 7, R., (a.); place ol^ 
279, 3, (a.) and (c.) 

Names of persons, their order, 279,9,(5 ); 
of nations instead of those of countries 254 
R. 3; 237, R. 5. 

iVc/rro, w. acc. and inf., 272, N. 1, and r. 

6; nnrror, constr., 271, R. 2. 

Nasror. w. abl., 248, R. 1; nascitur^ w. 
subj., 262, R. 3, N. 2. 

Nato. 232, (2.), n, 1; constr. of compds., 
233, (3.), N. 

Natura /ert. constr., 262, r. 3., w. 3. 

Naturale est^ w. ut and the subj., 262, 

R. 3, N. 3. 

Natits. w. abl., 246; natus^ ‘old,’ w a^c., 
236, N. 3; poet. w. inf., 271, N. 3. 

Natn, 94; 250, 1; 126, 4. 

Nauci habere^ 214, r. 1. 

-7?^, enclitic conjunction, 198, 11; quan¬ 
tity of, 295, R.; as an interrogative f arti¬ 
cle, 198. 11, R., {€,); its place, 279, 3, (c.) 

iVc, adv., the primitive negative particle, 
191, Hi., R. 3, p. 158; w. quitinn. ib.; 279, 

3, (^/.); w. subjunctives used as impera¬ 
tives, ib.; in wisliCvS, asseverations and con¬ 
cessions, ib,; 260, R. 6. (6.) with the imptr 
ative, 267, R. 1; yie lyndtn. ne f/htra, etc., 
229, R. 3, 2;—in intentional clauses, 262 
R. 5; ne. 7ma, for vt^ 262, n. 4; ellipsis cf, 
262, R. 6; ne, for yieduffi^ 262, n. 6. 

Nec or yieque. 198, 1; net no?i or neiiu4 
non. ib.; wee—nec, with the singular, 209^ ' 

R. 12, (6.), (a ); neque^ for et ne, after ut 
1 and we, ^2, a. 6, N. 4; —nec ipse^ 207, a. 27, 



INDEX, 


305 


nee ts, 207, R. 26^ (c.); necne or annon, 
■66, B. 2; necdum, 2<7, i., R. 16: its place, 
t79,3, (a.) 

Necesst. defective adj., 115, 5; 7iecesse est 
ut, etc., R. 3, N. 3 ; without uty 2G2, 
N- 4; neet^se this indie, for the subj , 

259, R. 3- w. inf. a,s subject, 269, r. 2j w. 
•redicat*- tl:it..269, R. 5; 273, 4. 

Nectsk? :y, how expres.sed, 162, 15. 

Ne^'^asario, after comparatives, 256, R. 9. 

?icdum, w. subj., 262, n. 5; without a 
verb, ib. 

^'e/ns, gender of, 62, e. 2: 94; w. supine 
in a, 276, iii., r. 2. 

Negativ?s, two, their force, 277, R. 8—5; 
negative joined to the conjunction, as, nec 
necullus, etc.,instead of et nemo, 
ft ntiUus, etc., 278, r. 9. 

ye^ligens, constr., 213, r. 4, (2.) 

AVgo, instead of non dico, 279, 15, (5.); 
w. acc. and inf., 272, N. 1, and a. 6; negor, 
w. inf., 271, N. 1. 

Negotium, ellipsis of, 211, R. 8, N. 

Nemo, 94 and 95; for nullus, 207, R. 81; 
nemo est qui, 264, 7, N. 2; nemo non, 
‘every one,’ 277, r. 5, (c.) 

Nempe, 191, r. 4; 198, 7, R., (a.) 

Neoterism, 325, 3. 

Nequa and neqiur., 138, 2. 

Nequam, indeclinable, 115, 4; compared, 
125, 6. 

Neque, me nee; for et non, 198, 1, (c.); 
neque — neque, or nec — nec, neque — nec, nec 
— neqite, l^S, 1, («.); neque — et, ib.; neqm 
w. general negatives, 279, 15, (5.); neque 
non, 277, R. 3; neque quisquam, ulLus, um- 
q%iam, etc., 278, R.9. 

Nequeo, how conjugated, 182, N.; w. inf., 
271, N. 1. 

i\’e quis or nequis, how declined, 138,2; 
ne quis, instead of ne quisqimm, 207, R. 31; 
278, R. 9. 

Nerio, genitive of, 69, E. 2. 

Nescio an, 198, 11, R., («■); 265, R. 3; 
ntscio quis, 265, R. 4; nescio quomodo, ib.; 
w. acc. and inf., 272, n. 1. 

Nescius, w. genit., 213, R. 1, (3.) 

-neus and -mus, adjs. in. 128, 1, (5.) 

Neuter, nouns, 34; not found in 1st and 
6th decls., 40, 9; of 2d decl., 46; 54; of 3d 
decl., 66; exes, in, 66; 67; adjs. used adverb¬ 
ially, 205, R. 10, adjs. and adj. prons, w. 
genit., 212, r. 3; acc. of denoting degree w. 
iiiother acc. after transitive verbs, 231, R. 5; 
verbs, 141; form cf, 142, 1; neuter passives, 
142, 2; neuter verbs with cognate, etc., 
subjects, 234. iii.; w. cognate acc., 232, (1.); 
w. acc. of degree, etc., 232. (3.); w. abl. of 
agent. 248, r. 2; used impersonally, 184,2; 
in the passive voice, 142, r. 2: participles 
of, 162, 18; neuters of po.sses.sive pronouns 
and adjs. instead of the genitive of their 
personal pronouns, or of a corresponding 
noun, 211, R. 8, (3.), (a.) and {b.) ' 

Neutral pjis.sive verbs, 142, 3. 

Neve tr neu, 198, 8; after ut and ne, 262, 

t. 4. 

Wi or nisi, 198, 5, R., (b.)] nisi, ‘ except,’ 
t61, R. 5; 217, R. 16; nisi quod, ib.; nisi 
uro, &i d nisi forte, ‘ unless perhaps,’ ib. 


Nihil, nihilum, 94; w. gimitive, 212 r 1; 
instead of non, 277, R. 2, (5.); 232 (3.)* 
nihil aliud quam or nisi, 277, r. 16; nihU^ 
acc. w. cestimo and moror, 214, N. 2 ^xihilt 
y/^acio, 214; as acc. of degree, 215, N. *'• 
232, (3.); Jiihil est quod, etc., 264, 7, n.3, 
nihil abest, quin, 262. n. 7; 7tihil nntiquius 
habe.o or duco quam, w. subj., 273, N. i , 
nihildum, 277, i., R. 16. 

Nimius, w. genit. or abl., 213. R. 6, (3 ) 

Nunio, w. comparatives, 256, R. 16; oe 
abl. of price, 252, r. 3. 

-nis, nouns in, gender of, 63, 1. 

Nitor, w. abl., 245, ii.; w. in or ad, 245 
II., R. 2; w. inf. or subj., 273. 1, N. 1. 

Nix, 56, R. 2; genit. sing., 78, (3.); genit 
plur., 83, II., 3. 

No, constr. of compds. of 233, (3.), n. 

Noctu or nocte, 253. n. 1. 

Nolo, conjugated, 178, 2; constr., 273. 4; 

I noli w. inf., paraphrasing the imperative, 

I 267, N. and r. 3; nollem, meaning of, 260, 
II., R. 2. 

Nomen est, constr., 226, r. 1; 211, r. 2, 
N. ; nomine, without a prep, before the 
genitive following verbs of accusing, 217, 
R. 2, {h.)\ its place, 279, 9, (b.) 

Nominative, 37; construction of, 209 
210; ellipsis of, 209, r. land 2; wanting, 
209, R. 3; w. inf., 209, r. 5; after interjec¬ 
tions, 209, R. 13; formation in 3d decl. from 
the root, 56; plural, 3d decl., 83; of adjs. 
of 3d decl., 114. See Subject-nominative 
and Predicate-nominative. 

Nomino, 230; pass., 210, r. 3, (3.) 

Non, 191, r. 3; ellipsis of, afternon modo, 
etc., followed by ne quidem. 277, R. 6; non 
quo, non quod, non quin, 262, r. 9; non est 
quod, cur, quare, or quamobrem, w. subj., 
2f)4, i, N. 3; non before a negative word, 
277, R. 3;—before ne quidem, 277, R. 6; 
position of, 279, 15, (6.); non, rare with the 
imperative, 267, R. 1; difference between 
non and haud^ 191, R. 3; no7i nemo, non 
nulli, non nihil, non numquam, different 
from nemo non, etc., 277, R. 5, (c.); non 
nihil, to some extent, 232, (3.); nonne, 198, 
11, R., (c.); non rnodo- -eed etiam, and non 
modo — sed, equivalent to non dica7n — sed, 
277, R. 10; non dubito, non est dubium, 
non ambigo, non procul, non abest, quin, 
262, 2, N. 7; non quo non, non quod non, 
or non quia non, instead of non quin ; non 
eo quod, non ideo quod, for non quod, 262, 
R. 9; non priusquam, non nisi, w. abl. ab¬ 
solute 257, N. 4; 7iondum,2~il, i., R. 76; 
non ic the second member of adverai;'’'rt» 
sentences without et or vero, 278, R. 11. 
non nisi, separated, 279, 3, (d.) 

Nonce, ‘ the Nones,’ 326, 2. 

Nonnullus, pronominal adj., 139, 6, (1.) 

Nos, for ego, 209, R. 7. (5.) 

Nosco, 171, E. 6. 

Nostee how declined, 139, D. 

Nostras, how declined, 139, 4, {b.) 

Nostrum, how formed, 133, 3; different 
use of 7iostrum and nostri, 212, R. 2, N. 2. 

‘ Not ’ and ‘ nor,’ how expressed with th< 
imperative, 267, R-1; with subj., 260, e. d 
(b.) 





II«fDEX. 


SS6 


?foun8, 26—103; proper, common, ab- 
itract, collective, and material, 26; gender 
»f, 27—34; number of, 35; cases of, 36, 37; 
declension of, 38—40; nouns of 3d decl., 
mode of declining, 55; compound, declen¬ 
sion of, 91; irregular, 92; variable, 92; de¬ 
fective, in case, 94; in number, 95, 96; 
sing, and plur. having different meanings, 
97; redundant, 99; verbal, 102; derivation 
of, 100—102; composition of, 103; how 
modified, 201, iii., r. 1; used as adjs., 205, 
JL. 11; extent given to the term noun, 24, 
a. 

Novum est ut, 262, r. 3, X. 2. 

Nox^ declined, 57; genitive of, 78, 2, (4.); 
gtait. plur., 83, ii., 3. 

Noxius, w. genit. of the crime, 213, R. 1, 
(8.); 217, R. 1, (a.); w. dat., 222, r. 1, (a.) 

-jis, participles in, abl. of, 113, 2; when 
u»?d a.s nouns, 82, e. 4; nouns in, genit. 
plur. of, 83, It., 4; genit. sing, of, 77, 2, (2.) 
and E. 1; participials and participles in, 
construction of, 213, R. 1 and 3. 

Nubilo, soil. ccbIo, 257, r. 9, (2.) 

Nubo, w. dat., 223; quantity of w in 
compds. of, 285, 2, e. 3. 

Nudo, w. abl., 251, x. 

Nudus, w. abl. or genit., 213, r. 5, (4.); 
250, R., (1.); w. acc., 213, r. 4, (3.) 

NulluSy how declined, 107; a pronominal 
adj., 139, 5, (1.); for non, 205, r. 15; refers 
to more than two, 212, b. 2, x., (b.) nullus 
est, qui, w. subj., 264, 7, x. 2; nullus non, 
277, R. 5, (c.); nullius and nullo, instead of 
neminis and nemine, 207, R. 31, (c.); nuU 
lusdum, 277, i., R. 16. 

Num, with its compounds, meaning of, 
198, 11, R., (5.); num —an, used only in 
direct questions, 265, R. 2. 

Number, 26, 7; of nouns, 35; of verbs, 
146; of the verb when belonging to two or 
more subjects, 209, r. 12; when belonging 
to a collective noun, 209, r. 11. 

Numbers, cardinal, 117, 118; ordinal, 
119, 120; distributive, 119, 120; w. genit. 
plur., 212, a. 2, (4.) 

Numerals, adjs., 104, 5 ; classes of, 117; 
placed in the relative clause, 206, (7.), (5.); 
w. genit. plur., 212, r. 2, (4.); letters, 118, 

7; adverbs, 119; 192, 3; multiplicative, 121; 
proportional, temporal, and interrogative, 
121 . 

Nummus, 327, R. 3, (b.) 

Numquam non, and non numquam, 277, 
a 5, (c.) 

Niitnnuis, num qms, or numqm, etc., 
hew do lined, 137, 3; numquis est qui, 264, 
7, n.2^ numqua and numqucR,\Zl, R. 4; 
nurnquid, as an interrogative particle, 198, 
11 . 

Numquisnam, 137, 4. 

Nunc, use of, 277, h. 15; nunc —«wnc, 277, 
a. 8; nunc and etiamnunc, w. imperfect 
and perfect, 259, r. 1, (2) (b.) 

Nunr.upo, w. two aces., 230, x. 1; nuncu- 
or, 210, R. 3, (3.) 

Nundinm, 326, 2, (11.) 

Nuniio, 273, 2, (c.); 272, x. 1; pass. w. 
inf., 271, N. 1; nuntiatur, constr., 271, r. 2. 

Nvz^er, modo and mox, 191, r. 6. 


Nusquam, w. genii 212, r. 4, It 2, ^6.) 
Nux, pr., 284, E. 6, R. 2. 

-nx, nouns in, genitive of, 65, 6, 7. 

0 . 

O, sound of, 7, 8; changed to u la form 
ing certain nominatives from the root, 56. 

1., R. 4, and ii., r. 4; nouns in, gender of^ 
58, 59; genitive of, 69; Greek nouns in, 
gender of, 59, e. 3; genitive of, 69, e. 3; 
amplificatives in, 100, 4, (a.); verbals in, 
102, 6, (c.); adverbs in, 192; incr<3ment in, 
of 3d decl., 287, 3; of plur., 288; of verbs, 
290; final, quantity of, 285, R. 4; 297: 
sometimes used for u after v, 322, 8 ; 68; 
178, 1, X. 

O, interj. w. nom., 209, r. 13 ; w. acc., 
2.38,2; w, voc., 240, r. 1; Osi,-w. subj., 
263, 1. 

Ob, government of, 195, 4; 275, ni., r. 3; 
in composition, 196, i., 9; construction of 
verbs compounded with, 224; of adjs., 222, 
R. 1, (5.) 

Obedio, how formed, 189, x. 3. 

Obequito, constr.. 2^, (3.) 

Obeo, constr., 233, (3.), x.; pass., 234, ni. 
Object, of an active verb, ^9; the dative 
of the remote object, 223, x. 

Objective genitive, 211, r. 2; after adjs., 
213; dat. for objective genitive, 211, r. 5, 
—propositions after what. 273, x. 8. 

Oblique cases, 37; their place, 279, 10 
and 2. 

Obliviscor, w. genitive or acc., 216; w 
acc. and inf., 272, x. 1. 

Obnoxius, w. dat., 222, r. 1, (6.) 

Obruo, w. abl., 249, i., r. 1. 

Obsecro, w. two aces., 231, R. 1. 

Obsequor, obtempero, and obtrecto, w. dat, 
223, R. 2. 

Ohservo, w. ut or ne, 262, n. 3. 

Obses, gender of, 30; genitive of, 73, E. 1 
Obsonor, w. abl. of price, 252, r. 1. 

Obsto, and obsisto, quo minus, etc., 2^ 
R. 11. 

Obtemperatio, w. dat., 222, r. 8. 

Obtrector, constr., 223, (1.), (a.) 

Obvius, w. dat., 222, r. 1, (6.1 
Obviam, w. dat., 228, 1. 

Occasio, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, III. 
R.l, (1.) 

Occumbo, w. dat., 224; w. acc., 224, r. 5 
Occurro, w. dat., 224; w. acc., 233, (8.) 
occurrit ut, 262, r. 3, x. 1. 

Odor, comparison of, 126, 1. 

•ocis, genitive in, 78, (4.); 112. 2. 
Octouarius, 304, 2;—iambic, 314, m. 

Odi, 183, 1. 

-odis, genitives in, 76, E. 5; 75, e, 1, 
~odus, Greek nouns in, ‘j9, 2. 

CE, how pronounced, 9 ; in nom. plur. 2d 
decl., 54, 2. 

(Edipus, genitive of, 76, E. f. 

(Eta, gender of, 42. 

Officio, w. quoniinus, etc., 262, r. 11. 
Oke, pr., 2^, I., E. 5; 295, e. 6. 

Oi, how pronounced, 9, 1. 

-ois, genitives in, 75, ;t 2; words in, pr 

288.1., E. 6, (3 ) 




INDEX, 


397 


Old, how expressed In Latin, 238, n. 8. 
Oleo and redoleo^ w. acc.j 232, (2.) 

OUkx, for ille, whence olli, masc. plur. for 
m, 134, R. 1. 

'Olits, a, tan, diminutiyes in, 100, 3, A. 2. 
-om. for -».//(, £3. 

Omission of a letter or syllable, see syn¬ 
cope—«f a word, see ellipsis. 

uinnfs, w. genitive plur., 212, R. 2, N. 6; 
omnium, w. superlati res, 127, 4, n. 2; 
rntma, acc. of degree, 232, ^S.) 

-on, Greek nouns in. 54. 1, -5n foi -orwm, 
54, 4; -on, root.sin, of3ddecl.. 50, fi., R.l; 
nouns in, of 3d deol., 58 and 61, 5; genit 
piur. in, of Greek nouns, 83, ii., 6; -o» and 
on, nouns in, of 2d decl., changed to -us 
iiid -tan, 54, 1. 

Ihtustus, w. abl. or genit., 213, r. 6, (4.) 
Ojerant dare, w. ut, 273, N. 1; w. dat. of 
g*mud, 275, in., r. 2, (1.); w. acc. id, 232, 
(3 );— opera mea, equivalent to per wie, 247, 
a. 4. 

Opinio est, w. acc. and inf., 272, R. 1; 
after comparatives, 256, r. 9; its 
place, 271k .n. 1. 

Opinor., w. acc. and inf., 272, n. 1. 
O]>oritt, w. inf. a.s its subject, 269, r. 2; 
w. inf., acc. with the inf., or the subj., 273, 

N. 5; without ta, 262, r. 4. 

Oportebat, oportuit, the indie, instead of 
the subj., 259, R. 3, (a.) 

Oppido, w. adjs., 127, 2. 

Ojfpidtan,, in apposition to names of 
towns, 237, R. 2, (6.) 

Oppleo, w. abl., 249, i., B. 1. 

Optahilius erat, the indie, instead of the 
subj.. 259, R. 3. 

Optime, instead of abl. of price, 252, r. 3. 
Opto, 271, R. 4; 273,4; opto, w. subj., 
without ut, 262, r. 4. 

Opulentus w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 6, (3.) 
0/‘US, work, declined, 57: ojnts, need, 
w. genit. and acc., 211, R. 11; w. abl. of 
the thing, 243; as subject or predicate of 
est, 243, R. 2; 210, r. 5; w. perfect par- 
tk-iple, 243, r. 1; w. supine in u, 276, in., 
R. 2; opus est, w. inf. as subject, 269, r. 2. 

-er, nouns in, gender of, 58; 61; genit. 
of, 70; 71; verbals in, 102, 1; 102, 6. 

Orntio oblit/uti, 266, 1, N., and 2; 273, 3; 
tenses in, 266, R. 4. 

Orho, w. aiji., 251, N. 

Orous, w. abl., 250, 2, (1.); or genit., 213, 
5. 5, (4.) 

Order, advs. cf, 191, 1. 

Ordino,* numbers, 119,120; in expressions 
ut’ time, 236, R. 2. 

Origin, participles denoting, w. abl., 246; 
ttom a country expressed by a patrial, 246, 
R 3. 

-fim, genitives in, 76; 112,2; -bris, genit. 
in, 75. 

-orium, verbals in, 102, 8. 

Oriundits, 'on.str., 246. 

Qro, w. twoaccs., 231, R. 1; w. ut, ne, or 
*if., 273, 2, N. 4; without ut, 262, r. 4. 
Orthoepy, 6—23. 

Orthography, 2—5; figures of, 322. 

Ortus, w. abl., 246. 

, nouns in, of 2d decl., 54, 1; of 3d 

84 


decl., gender o.' 68 and 61, 3; genit. pf, 76- 
Greek genitives in, 68, 1; fital in plum 
aces., sound of. e. 3; quantity of, 300. 

Os, (oris), ge cr of, 61, 3; genit. of, 76,' 
wants genit. plur., 94. 

O. S, i,ossis] gender of, 61, 3; genit. of, 76 
E. 1. 

Ossa, gender of, 42, 1. 

Ostendo, w. acc. and inf., 272, N- 1. 

-ostis, adjs. in, 128, 4. 

•Otis, genit. in, 75; 112, 2. 

‘ Ought ’ or ‘should,- expressed by indio. 
o{debeo, 259, a. 4, (2.) 

-OT, nouns in, genit. of, 78, 2, (4.) 

Oxymoron, 324, 28. 

P. 

P, roots of nouns ending in, 56, i.; when 
inserted after ni in 2d and 3d roots of verba, 
171, 3. 

Pace or in pace, 253, N. 1; 257, B. 9, (2.) 

Palatiils, 3. 1. 

Palleo, w. acc , 232, N. 1. 

Pan, acc. of, 80, R. 

Pantlms, voc. of, 54, 5. 

Par. abl. of, S2, e. 1, (b.)\ 113, e. 3; su¬ 
perlative of, 126, 2; w. dat. or genit., 222, 
R. 2, (a.); w. cum and the abl., 222, r. 6; 
par erat, indie, instead of subj., 259, b 8, 
(a.); pr., 284, N. 1; par ac, 198, 3. 

Parabola, 324, 8U. 

Paradigms, of nouns, 1st decl., 41, 2d 
decl., 46; 3d decl.. b7; 4th decl., 87; 5th 
decl., 90;—of adjs. of Ist and 2d decl. 105 
—107; 3d decl., 108—111;—of verbs, sum, 
153; 1st conj., 155, 156 ; 2d conj., 157; 3d 
conj., 158, 159 ; 4th conj., 160; deponent. 
161; periphrastic, conj., 162; defective, 183; 
impersonal, 184. 

Paragoge, 322, 6. 

Paratus, constr., 222, r. 4, (2.) 

Parco, w. dat., 223, R. 2. rs., (a.); pard- 
tur miltt, ib., (c.); w. inf., 271, N 3 

Parens, w. genit. or abl., 213, r. 6, (2.); 
w. in, 21.3, R. 4, (2.) 

Paregmenon, .328,24. 

Parelcon, 32.3, 2, (1.) 

Parenthesis, 324. 4, (6.) 

Pariter ac, 198, 3. 

Pnro, constr., 273, N. 1; w. inf., 271, H 1. 

Paroeuiiac verse, 304, 2. 

Paronomasia, 324, 25. 

Pario, compds. of, 163, K. 

Parsing, 281, in. 

Pars, acc. of, 79, 4; abl. of, 82, e. 5, (d.); 
pllii)sis of, 205, R. 7; its use in fraction^ 

.(■ressions, 121, 6; ma^nam and maxts 
-aim partem, 231, II , R. 3; multis pajttbui^ 
256. R. 16, (3.1 

Part, acc. of. 234, ll. 

Parttcepi, genit. of, 112, 2; genit. plur. 
of 114, E. 2; 115, 1, (a.y—w. genit., 213, 
B. 1, (3.) 

Participial adjs., 130;—of perfect tnnse, 
meaning of. with tenses of sum, 162,12, (2.)j 
w. genit., 218, R. 1, (2.) 

Participles, 25 and 148, 1; in us, how de- 
dined, 105. r. 2; in ns, do.. Ill; abl. sing 
of, 113, 2; participles of active verbs, 148, 




INDUX, 


a^8 


l, (2.); of neuter v«jb«,M8,1, (3.); 162,16; 
cf deponent verbs, 162, 17 ; of neuter pas¬ 
sive verbs, 162, 18; in -rus, gerJt plur. of, 
162. 19; pres and perf compounded with 
in, 162. 21 i when they become adjs or 
nouns. 162, 22; cases of in compd. tenses, 
162, 12. 13; Kouiefiu'es with esse indeclina¬ 
ble, 162. 13. (1 ); in -rus with sutn, fon-e of, 
162. 14; how modified. 202. Ii., (3.); a]^ree- 
ment of. 205; afrreemeiit with a predicate 
nom. instead of the uibject. 205. R. 6; 
gender when n.sed iinpirsonally, 205. R. 18; 
perfect ilenotiiijr origin, with abl., 246; in 
all. absolute 267; — piassiveof naming etc,., 
with predicate aid . 257, R. 11. their gov¬ 
ernment. 274; their time ho^v dctennined, 
271. 2. and 3; perfect in circumlocution, 
for abl. of cause, 247. 1, R. 2. (Ay.); with 
habfOy etc., 274, 2, R. 4; for a verbal nouu, 
274. 2, R. 5; for clauses, 274, 3. 

Partiripo, poetically, w. geuit., 220, 2. 

Particles^ 190, 1. 

Partin, 79, 4; partim, w. genit., 212, 
R. 4; partim — partim, w. genit. or ex, 277, 

R. 8. 

Partitive nouns, 212, R. 1;—adjs., 104, 9; 
—partitives with plur. verbs, 209, r. 11; 

211, R. 1; w. genit. plur., 212; ellipsis of, 

212, E. 2, N. 3; w. acc. or abl., 212, a. 2, 
N. 4; genit. sing, after neuter adjs. and 
pronouns, 212, r. 3. 

Parts of speech, 24, 2 and 3. 

Parum, its meaning, 191, iii.; compared, 
194, 4; w. genit., 212, r. 4. 

Parumper, its meaning, 191, n. 

Parvus, compared, 125, 5; parvi, w. 
verbs of valuing, 214, R. 1, (a.), (1.); 
parvo, with comparatives, 256. r. 16; after 
214, r\ 2, N. 2; as abl. of price, 
252. R. 3. ^ 

Pasco. 171, E. 6- 

Passive voice. 141, 2; construction of. 
23^. passive voice with a reflexive pronoun 
understood as the agent eijuivalent to the 
middle voice in Greek, 248, r. 1, (2.); with 
acc. of the thing 234, i. 

Pateo, w. two dats.,227, R. 1. 

Pater, declined, 57. 

Pater-familias, etc., how declined, 43, 2. 

Pathetic or emotive word, 279, 2, (e.) 

l atior, 273. 4; 262. r. 4; pntinis, w.gen., 

213, R.l, (2 ); w. inf., 271. N. 3. 

Patrial nouns, 160,2: in o, genitive of, 
89, K.;—adjs.. 104. 10; 128, 6. (,«.); ellipsis 
&f their subsftuitive, 205, r. 7 ; pronouns, 
i&l. 4. 

Pnlrocinnr. w. dat.. 223, R. 2. 

Patroiiyinies, loo, 1; in -es, genit. plur. 
I'l um instead of -arinn. 43. 2; in as and is 
Used as adjs . 205. r. 11; quantity of their 
peiiult. 291, 4 and 5. 

p'lur.a, a.'C. of degree. 232. (3.) 

P'JiiliS}>tr, its mealiliig, 101, n. 

Paulo, w eoin para fives, 256, R. 16; pau- 
(uu abest ipiiii. 262, 7- 

i’auptr, abl of, 113, E. 2; defective, 116, 

. 1 ); w. geuit. or abl., 213, r. 6, (2.) 

Pat'idus, w. genit., 213, R. 1. 

Paror est ne, etc., 262, R. 7, N. 3. 

Vccus, {-udis), gender of, 67, e. 3. 


Pecnliaris, 222, B 2. (a.) 

Pedes, gender of, 31, 2; genit. of 73, 2 
for pedites. 209. R. li, (1.), (c.)' 

Pej^ro. pr.. 285. 2, E. 1. 

Pela^ics, gender of, 51; acc. plur of, 64 
6; 94. 

Pello. 171, E. 1, (6.); 251, N. 

Pendo. w. genit. of talue, 214; w. abl. of 
price, 252. r. 1. 

Pensi and j/ili habere. 214, R. 1. 

Pentameter verse. 304, 2; 311; 312, IX., X 

Pen them iuieris. ®>1. 5. 

Penult. 13; quantity of, 291; of propel 
names. 293. 

Pt-r. its uses, 195, R 9; 247. 1, R. 1; w. 
the n)eans wlien a person, 247, 3. R 4; In 
adjurations, 279, 10, (c.); in eouipcsition, 
196 ,1 , 10; y/cr compounded with adjectives 
strengthens their meaning, 127, 2. 

Perceiving, verbs of, their construction, 
272. 

Percipio, w. acc. and inf., 272, N. 1; pet^ 
ceptum habeo, instead of percepi, 274, b. 4. 

Percontor, w. two arcs., 231, R. 1. 

Perennis, abl. of, 113. E. 1. 

Perrio, w. capitis, 217, R. 3; perditum ire 
for perilere, 276, ii., R.2. 

Perduim, for perdam, 162. 1. 

Perfect tense, 145, iv.; definite and in 
definite, 145, iv.. r. ; old form in sim , 162, 
9; quantity of dissyllabic perfects, 284, e. 1 
perfect participles translated actively, 1^2, 
16; both actively and passively, 162, 17, 
(a.);—of neuter verbs, 162, 18; of imper¬ 
sonal verbs, 184, R. 2; the perf. subj., 260, 
II., R. 1, (3.); in the connection of tenses, 
2.58; signification of perf. definite, 259, r 1, 
(2.), (o.); of perf. indefinite, ib., (b.)-^fi.)] 
perf. suhj., signification of. 260. ii., R. 1, 
(3 ), and r. 4 and 6; in the protasis. 261, 2 
and R. 2 and 3; 263, R.; perf. subj. for im¬ 
perative. 267, R. 2: perf inf., how used. 
268, K. 1. («.): perf participle, 274, 2 and 
N.; supplies the place of a pres. pass, par¬ 
ticiple, 274, R. 3, («.); perf. part, of a pre¬ 
ceding verb used to express the completion 
of an action, ib., (b.); w. habeo, 274, R. 4; 
yi. do, reildo, euro, etc., ib.; supplies th« 
place of a verbal noun, 274, R. 5; used in 
circumlocution for abl. of cause, 247, R. 2, 
(b.); neuter perf. pass, participle used ai 
the subject of a verb, 274, r. 6, (b.) 

Perjicio ut, 273. n. 2. 

Pergo, constr., 225, iv.; w. inf., 271, N 1, 

Perhibeo. 230, N. 1; 272, n. 1, and r 6; 
perhibeor. 210, r'TS, (3.); w. inf., 271, M 1 

Periclitnr. capitis or capite, 217, R. 8. 

Period, 280. 

Ptrniile. 191, III.;—*f or aique, 198, 8, B 

Periphntsis, 323, 2, (4.) 

Periphrastic conjugations, 162,Hand 15 

Peritus, 213. R. 1. (3.) an I R. 4- 
270, R. 1; w. ad, 213, R. 4, {2.); ’276, m 
R. 1. (2.) 

Permisceo, 245 n., 2, and R. 1 and 2. 

Per7/iitta.‘17S i ■. w part. fut. pass , 274 
R. 7; w. subj. without ut, 262, a. 4. 

Permuto, 252, K. 6 

Pemox, genit. o' 112, 2. 

Perosus', 183, 1, N. 




INDEX. 


Perpello^ 273, N. 4- 

Ferpes, in genit. sing., 112, 1; 115, 2. 

Persevern^ w. inf., 2(1. N. 1. 

Personal pronouns, 132, 4; ellipsis of as 
Mibject-noininatives, 209, R. 1; expressed 
Wi*^' infinitive, 272. 4personal termi¬ 

nations of verbs, 147, 3. 

Personification, 324. 34. 

Person of a noun or jjronoun, 35, 2; 132, 
J. of a verb, 147; used in the imperative, 
Hi, 1; Ist and 2d persons used indefinitely, 
(ttt), R. 7; of verbs with nominatives of dif- 
tarent persons, 209, r. 12. 

Ptrspfclum kabfOy instead of perspexi, 
2J4, E. 4. 

Frrxiiniieo, w. dat., 223, N., (6.); hor per- 
Sna-ifitir mllii, 223 N., (c.);— persua^mn 

mihi hiiteo, 274, r. 4 

Ptrtjzium est, constr., 229, B. 6; 215, (1.) 
E^d N. 2. 

Pfrthieo, ellip.sis of, 209, R. 4. 

Peta, constr., 230, r. 2; 231, r. 4;y?efo 
wt, 273, N. 4; 262, r. 4. 

Pe.s and compds., genit. of, 73, E. 1; 112, 
1; abl. of, 113, E. 2; pr., 284, n. 1; 300, 

B. 2, (6.) 

PA, in syllabication, j.8, 2; when silent, 
12, R. 

Phalecian verse, 304, 2; pentameter, 
812, X. 

P/V^r, declined, 106; constr., 222, R. 4, (2.) 

Pis;et, w. genit., 215; w. acc., 2^, R. 6; 
participle and gerund of, 184, R. 3. 

Pili habere^ etc., 214, R. 1. 

Place, advs. of, 191, i.; 192, ill.; genit. 
of. 221; acc. of, 237; dat. of, 237, R. 3; 
place where, abl. of, 254;—whence, abl. of, 
i')5; through which, 255, 2; place of a foot 
in ver.se. 304, \. 

Plants, gender of their names, 29. 

P:auUo, change of au in its compfls., 189, 
N. 3. 

Plenty or want, adjs. of, w. abl., 250. 

Plenus.'w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.); 

m 2, (1.) 

Pleonasm, 323, 2. 

-plex, adjs. in, abl. of, 113, e. 3; how de- 
dined, 121, 1. 

Plniqui^.! w. genit. plur., 212, r. 2, (1.) 

Pluperfect tense, 145, v.; old form in 
62,9; for the historical perfect, 259, 
A. 1 (3.) 

Plural number, 35, 1; when wanting, 95; 
nouns only plur., 96; plur. of Greek nouns 
of Ist dec!., 45, 2; do. of 2d decl., 54. 2;— 
nouns u.sed for singular, 98; iins for 
209, R .7, (I).): of verbs with collective Rouns, 
20;), K. 11; the plur. of abstract nouns, 95, 
R. ; plur. nouns in appo.^ition to two or 
moi-e ncuns in the .singular. 204, R. 5. 

pluriininn, w genit.. 212. r. 3; plurimi 
and phtri 7 nc after verbs of buying, etc., 
-14 R. 1. (1. , R'ld R. 3, N. 2; piurti/ic, abl. 
of price. 252. r. 3. 

Pous, declined. 110; w. genit., 212, R. 3. 
|r. 1. (n.'j-, with numerals, etc., with or 
without (luarn, 256, R. 6; plus for mag'j, 
177, R. 12; plure, abl. of price|»252, R. 3. 

PoUma, declined, 57. 

Poems, gender of names of, 29 


S9S 


Panitet, vr. genit., 215; w. snbj , 215, r. 
w. acc 2^, R. 6; participles of, 1&4, r. 3 
w. quo/l, 273. N. 6. 

Porsis, de<'lined. 86. 

Poetical arrangement of words, 2^9, 8^ 
(e.): and 16, n. 4. 

-poliinnus^ adjs. In, 128, 6, ig.) 

Pollens, w. genit. or abl., 213, R 5, (4.). 
cf. R 4, (1.) 

Pollireor. w. acc. and inf., 272, N 1. 

Polyptoton, 324, 23. 

Poly.syndeton, 323, 2, (2.) 

Pon/ln. indeclinable. 94; fondo lihram 01 
libras. 211. R 6, (4.); 236, r. 7. 

Pono. 171, E. 2: 2-30, r. 2; 241, H. 5; pr., 
284, R. 2, (c.); 229. r. 4, 1. 

Posro. w. twoaccs., 231; 230. r. 2; w. ut, 
etc., 273. N. 4; in pa.ss., 2.34, i. 

Position in pro-sody, 283, iv. 

Positive degree, 122, 4. 

Pos.se,ssive, adjs., 104; pronouns, 139; to 
what equivalent, 132, 6; how used, ^7, 
R.36; 211, R. 3; ellipsis of when reflexive, 
207, R. 36; used for subjective and posses* 
sivegenit., 211, r. 3. (A.), and R. 8,(3 ), (a.); 
for objective genit., 211, r. 3, (c.); so pos¬ 
sessive adjectives, 211, R. 4, and R. 8, (3.), 
(6.); mea, tua, etc., &iterre/ert and intertst^ 
219, R. 1. 

Possideo, w. perf. pass, part., 274, R. 4. 

Possu7n, conjugated, 154, r. 7; with su¬ 
perlatives, 127, 4; w. inf., 271, N. 1; pote- 
rat. the indie, for the subj., 259, R. 3; pos- 
sum for possem, 259, r. 4, (2.) 

Post, postquam, etc., how pronounced, 
8, E. 4; post, its ca.se, 195, 4; post in com¬ 
position, 196, 11; 197, 14; constr. of verbs 
com[iounded witli. 224; with concrete oHl- 
cial titlws, 23f, r. 3; w. acc. and abl of 
time, 263, R- 1; ellipsisof, 25", N 3; w. aid 
like a comparative. 256, r. 16, (3.) 

Posted lori. 212. R. 4, x. 4. 

Postern, defia tive, 115, 5; compared, 125, 
4; derivation, 130, v. 

Posterior and pnstretnus, iiistead of pos- 
terins and jiostremuni, 205, r. 15. 

Postqiumi and jiostenquain, w. historical 
perfect instead of pluperfect, 259, r. 1, (2.), 
(d.) 

Pekstulo, w. twoaccs., 231, r. 1; w. acc 
and genit., 217, R. 1; w. de or the simple 
abl., 217, R. 2; w. subj., without ut, 262, 
R. 4. 

Poteiis, w. genit., 213, r. 1, (3.); w. in or 
ad and acc., 213, r. 4, (2.) 

Potior, w. abl., 245, i.; w. acc., 215. i., 
R.; w. genit., 220, (4.); pctmndus,\.<o'Z,2Q\ 
275, ii., R. 1. 

Pntis. defective. 115, 5. 

Potiiis. romi>arcd, 194, 4; used plecua.itt 
cally, 256, R. 13. 

Potiis. translated actively, 162, 

Prrr. in composition w. iilj.s., 127, 2; w 
verbs. 197; hefoi-e adjs., 127, 6; constr ot 
verbs compounded with, 224; pree, witli 
comparatives, 127, 6; 256. R. 13, ^6.) 

Preebeo, w. two aces., 230, N. 1. 

PrcBcedo, constr., 233, (3.), and n 22^ 
R. 5. 

PrcBcello, preeeo, etc., 224, 8, aud R. 5, 






INDEX 


lUU 


Prtrct^s^ abl. of, 113, R. 2, and E. 1. 
PrcFcipio^ constr., 223, (1.)? 

PrfTcipito^ 229, R. 4, 1. 

PrcRripKf^ prrpserti?}!, etc., 193, IE. 2. 
Prarurro. coiistr., 224. 8, and R. 5. 
rTreiimny elli[»sis of. 255, R. 3. 

P/v?7/7//x, w. ahl., 244. 

Prn'}}esU^ gender of. (5f>, E., and 29, K. 
Prrpnomen, it> place, 279. 9. (h.) 

Prtfpfis. genlt. sing, of, 112, 1; geuit. 
plur., 114, E 2. 

P'-^Tsrrito^ w. n\ etc., 273. 2, n. 4. 
PrfSfnSy declined. 111; ahl. of, 113, R.2. 
Pf\?sts^ gender of, 30; 61, 2; genit. of, 
73, E. 1. 

Prrpsto. 233. '3.), and n.; 230, n. 1; 224, 
8, and R. 5; 256, R- 16, (3.);— ]}rf¥$to^ adv., 
w. dat., 228, 1 ;—prmsto sunt^ qui^ w. subj., 

264, 6, N. 1. 

PrtTstolor^ w. dat., 223, R. 2, N.; w. acc., 

223. (1.}, (a.) 

Prater, w. adjs., 127, 6; w. comparatives, 
256. R. 13. (Aa); as an adverb. 191, la. 
Pr'Ptereo^ \v. qumi^ 273. 5, (1 ) 

Pra'ierit, constr. of. 229, R. 7. 

Pra'lerqunni quod, 277, R. 16. 

Praiervtho, 233, (2.) 

PravertoT^ w. dat., 224, 8 and r. 5. 

Pr^cor^ w. twoaccs., 231; w. 273, N. 4; 
ut omitted, 2b’2, r. 4. 

Predicate, 201; 203;—predicate-nomina¬ 
tive, 210; dilfering in number from the 
Bubjeet-nominative, 210, R. 2; instead of 
dat. of the end, 227, R. 4; after what verbs, 
210, R. 3 and 4; pred. adjs., 210, r. 1; after 
esse^ hahe^i^ judicari^ vidert^ etc., 271, 2; 

—predicate-accusative, 210, (b.); dative, 
210. (r.); abl., 210. (//.): 257, r. 11. 

Prepo.^Uions, 195—197; in composition, 
196; with nouns. 103; with adjs., 131, 11— 
13; with verbs, 196; change of in composi¬ 
tion, 11^3, R. 2; 131, R.; 196, (a.); insepara¬ 
ble, 196. (6.); w. acc., 195, 4; 235; w. abl., 
195,6; 241; w. acc. and abl., 195, 6; 2:35, 
(2)—(5.); u.sed as adverbs, 195, R. 4; how 
modified, 202, ii., R. 2; verbs compounded 
with, w. dat., 224; w. acc., 233; w. abl., 
2-42; compds. of ad, co7t, and /n, with acc.. 

224, r. 4; repeated after compds., 224, u. 4; 
233, R. 2; how interchanged, ib.; compds. 
of ad^ anie^ etc., with neuter verbs of mo¬ 
tion, 224, R. 5; 233, r. 1; repetition of 
prepositions, 233, R. 2; 277, ii., 3 and 4; 
prepositions of one syllable, pr., 285, 2, n. 1, 
and E. 5; ellip.sis of, 232, (2.); 235, r. 11.; 
ellipsis of their case, 235, R. 10; their place, 
279, 10; quantity of di, se and w/, 285, R. 
2 an I 3; i>uf after their case, 279, 10, R., 
{/.): repeated. 277, tl., 4. 

Present tense. 145. i,; a principal tense, 

258. A.; indicative j)res. for hi.storical perf., 

259, R 1, a.): for the fnt., 259, r. 1, {//.); 
for iniperf. or perf. w. 7/////, 259, R. 1, (r.); 
Biibj. pies., use of. 26*1, H., R. 1, (1.); used 
to soften an assertion, 260. ii., R. 4; to ex¬ 
press a wish, command, etc., 260, k. 6, 267. 
r.2; imperative pres., how used, 145, R. 3' 
267, (i.); infinitive pres., how u.sed, 26b, 
R. 1, (a.), and R. 3.; 272, a. 4 and 5; par- 
bciple pres., how de»:lined, 111, R. ; what it 


denotes, 274, 2 and N.; denoting someth 
about to be done, 274, R. 1; also a purp 
274, R. 2, (a.); and a state or conditi^m, 
274, R. 2, (6.): present pass, partioiyle, 
how supplied. 274, r. 9. 

I Preterites. 145, n. 2; 258, B.; preteritel 
of the indicative used for the pluperfect 
subjunctive. 259, r. 4. (1.) 

Pveteritive verbs, 1S3. l. 

Prt'tii and pretio^ 214, R. 2, n. 3; eL!jvil 
of, 252. u. 3. 

Ib'iapean verse, 310, it. 

Price, ablative of, 252; genitive cf ianti^ 
etc., 214, R. 1. 

Pridie, w. genit., 212, r. 4, x. G;w. acc,, 
238, 1. 

Pn'ymfs^ viedius^ etc., how translatedj 
205, R. 17 i their place, 279, 7; ]>rtor^ ptt^ 
mu$ for prills^ prhiinm, 205, r . 15- 

Princeps, genit. of, 112,2; abl. of, 118, 
E. 2; 115. 1, (a.); used instead of an adverb 
of time, 205, R. 15. 

Principal parts of a verb, 151, 4;—propo¬ 
sitions. 201, 5;—parts of a proposition, 202, 
5; tenses, 258, a. 

Prinripio^ abl. of time, 253, n . 1, 

PriusqiKDj}, with what mood, 263, 3. 

Privo^ w. abl., 251, n. 

Pro, constr. of verbs compounded with, 
224; w. abl. for predicate noui.,'210, N. 3; 
for predicate acc., 230, *\. 4; in composition, 
quantity of, 285, e. 5, and r. 7; pro nikilo 
(iuco^ etc., 214, R. 2, n. 2; pro eo and pro^ 
inde ac, 198, 3, r. 

Pror.Vms^ 222, R. 4, (2.); 276, in., E. 1. 

Proculy w. abl., 195, R. 3; 241, r. 2. 

Prodigus^ w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (2.) 
w. /;?, 213, R. 4, (2.) 

Prodo^ w. acc- and inf., 272, n. 1, and 

R. 6- 

Proditur, constr., 271, R. 2. 

Prqfirisror, w. two datives, 227, R. 1. 

Prahiheo^ 251, R.2; w. quominus^ 262, R 
11; 273,4 ; w. genit., 220, 2; w. abl., 251, n. 
w. dat. or abl., 224, R. 2; w. acc. and inf. 
272, R. 6. 

Proinde^ adv., 191, in.; proinde ac, 198 
3, R. 

Prolepsis, 323, 1, (^.) and (4.) 

Protnitto^ constr., 272, n. 4; 217, n. 3, (c.) 

Pronouns, 132—139; simple, 132, 2; 
neuter w. genit., 212. r. 3, x. 1. 

Pronominal adjs., 139, 5. 

Pronunciation of hatin, 6 

Pro/UAS, constr., 222, r. 4, (2.) 

Prope est^ w. lU and the subj., 232, 8, 

X. 1. 

Proper nouns, 26. 2; found cniy in 1st, 
2d, and 3d decls., 40. 9. 

Prtfpp'rn, w. inf., 271. n. 1. 

Pnijtiliqao, 225. IV. R. 2. 

Propiiiquus^ w. the dat. or genit-, 222, 
R. 2. (n.) 

Propior, how compaivd, 126, 1; propio) 
and proxiiints w. dat., 222, r. 1; w. acc 
222. r. 5; 238.1; instead of pro]tius,^ pro 7 > 
205, R- 15; proxwuun est^ w. ut am] 
the subj., 262, r. 8, N. 1. 

Propius and proxitM^ oonetr., 238, 1 
and R. 




INDEX, 


401 


Propo/tion.al, adjs , 121, 2. 

PropositiMi, 2U1, 1 analysis of, 281 
Pro/irius, constr., 229, r. 2, (a.) 
Proruivpo^ constr., 22G, R. 4, 1. 

Prosodiac verse, 304, 2. 

Pi jsody. 282—321; figures of, 305- 307. 
Prosonopreia 324, 34. 

Prosiier and pros/ifrus, 105, N.: w. genit. 
«: abl , 213, a. 5. (2.) 

Pros'.hesis 322 1. 

Prosto, w. abl. Df price, 252, R. 1. 

P.’-o.s >///(, 154. K. 6. 

Prpi hIk), constr.. 223, (1.), (n.) 
rrotaei.s and apodosis, 201; import of the 
iViff.iient ten.ses in th^ protasis and apodo- 
lis. 201, 1 and 2. 

P-^viJus, w genit..213, r. 1, (3.) 

Pnirlen^, w genit., 21b, R. 1, (3.) 

P.s-, initial, 12, r. ;— ps, nouns in. genit. 
of, 77, 2. (1.) 

~psey enclitic, 1.35, R. 3. 

Pi, initial, 12, r. 

-pte, enclitic, 133, R. 2; 139. 

Puhes and iiyipiiOes, genit. of, 112, 1; abl. 
of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1, {a.) 

PwJft, w. genit., 215; w. inf., 215,R.; w. 
Ecc., 229, R. 6; w. perf. inf., 208. R. 2; w. 
sup. in u. 270, iii., k. 2; participle in dus, 
and gerund of, 184, R. 3. 

Puer, instead of in pueritia, 253, r. 6. 
Pueritia, how used in the abl., 253, N. 1. 
Pitgnd^ for in pugnd, 253, N. 1; pugnam 
pugnnre, 232, (1.) 

Pugyiatur, conjugated, 184, 2, 

Pulchre, instead of abl. of price, 252, R. 3. 
Punctuation, 5. 

Pnnio, constr., 217, R. 5. 

Punishment, constr. of words denoting, 
217, R. 3. 

Purgo, w. genit., 217, R. 1; 220, 2; w. 
abl., 251, N. 

Purpose, denoted by iit, etc., with the 
Bubj., 202; by participles,’274, 2, r. 2, 6 
and 7; by inf., 271; 273, n. 4, (6.); by 
gerund, 275, in., R. 2, and (1.), (2.); by 
supine in -um, 270, ii. 

Purus, w. genit, or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.); 
ef. 251, N. 

jius, Greek nouns in, genit. of, 76, e. 5. 
PiHo. w. genit. of value, 214; w. abl. of 
price, 25^, R- 1; 'v. two accs., 230, n. 1, 
and \. 4; w. acc. and inf.. 272. n. 1; putn- 
r«;, 200, n., R. 2; ]nUor, 210, r. 3, (3.h(c.); 
'E inj . 271, N. 1. 

Q. 

Qu before .v in verbal roots, 171, 1 
Qua, adverbial correlative, 191, r. 1, 

Qud — f/ud, for et — n , 277, R. 8. 

Q(/<"^ro, constr., 2.31, e. 4; poet. w. inf., 
271. xv. 3. 

Qufpso, 183, 7; constr , 202, r. 4. 

Quatis. 139, 5, (3.j; w. comparatives, 256, 
R. 10. {h.) 

(^iin/isfiunlis or qualiscumque, 139, 5, 
-07, R. 29. I 

(^talis — talis, 206, (16.) ! 

Quam, w. comparatives, 256; w. the sa 
oerlative, with or without possum, 127, 4, 

34 * 


ellipsis of after phis, minus, amplius, etc., 
256, R. 6 and 7; qiiam qut and superlativ 
after tarn, 206, (21.); quam pro, w. compar 
atives, 256, r. 11; quam non, 277, r. 14, 
quoin and a verb after ante and post, 253, 
R. 1. N. 3; '/uoin qui, w. comparatives and 
the subjunctive, 204, 4. 

Qiianiquain, peculiar u.se of, li)8, 4, R. •, 
constr., 203, 2. (1.); u.sed to connect an 
abl. absolute, 257, R. 10 

Quoinvis. const.., 203. 2, and (2.), (3.' 

Qiiunt/o, qiiaii'lo-quiilein, l9.S, 7, R., H-i 

Quantity, adjs. of. 1U4, 4: w. genit . 212, 
R. 3, 1; after sum and verbs of valuing, 

214; adverbs of. w. genit., 212, r. 4. 

Quantity, in prosody, 13, 1; marks of, 
5. 1; general rules of, 13: 2S3; special rules 
of, 284; of peuults, 291; of antepenults, 
292; of penults of proper names, 293; ci 
final syllables, 294—301; of final vowels, 
294—298; of final consonants, 299; of de¬ 
rivative words, 284; of compound words, 
285; of increments, 280— 290; of Greek 
words, 283, E. 6. 

Quuntus, pronom. adj., 139, 5, (3 ); 
qunntus for quam, with ])osse and superla¬ 
tives, 127, 1; constr., 206, (10.); quanto, 

w. comparatives, 250, R. 10; quantum, w. 
genit., 212, r. 3, n. 1; in acc. of degree, 
231, r. 5; 232, (3.); 256, r. 16, n.; quan¬ 
tum possum, w. indicative, 264, 3 Jin. ; 
quantus — tantus, 200, (10.) 

Quantuscumque, quantusquantus, qvan- 
tuluscumque, 1^, 5, (3.); w. indicative, 259, 
R. 4, (3.); quanticumque, 207, R. 29. 

Quasi, w. subj., 203, 2. 

Quntio, constr., 229, R. 4,1; how changed 
in its compds., 189, n. 3. 

-fywe, its mse, 198,1, r., (a.); que — et, et 
— que, que — que, 198, R., (e.); its place, 

279, 3, (c.) 

Queis and quis, for quibus, 136, r. 2. 

Queo, how conjugated. 182, n. ; w. inf., 
271, x\.l. 

Queror, w. acc., 232, N. 1; w. quod, 273, 

N. 6. 

Qui, declined, 136; qui in abl., 136, r. 1; 
137, R. 2; interrogative, 137; difference be¬ 
tween qui iind quis, 137,1; per.son of qui, 
209, R. 6; w. subj., 204; when translated 
like a demonstrative, 206,(17.); witli sum 
instead of pro, 206. (18.); quirum, whsn 
used, 130, R. 1_/7M.; qui I'ero, qui autem, 

280. III., (3.); ex quo, tot postquam, 263, 
N. 4. 

Quin, quod, end quoniam, 198, 7, r., (6.) 

Quicque and quicquam, 138, 3, (a.) 

Quirquid, 130, R. 4; acc. cf degree 
232, (3.) 

Quirumque, how declined, 136, 3; hew 
u.sed, 207, r. 29; w. indie., 259, k. 4, (3.); 
for omiiis, quivis, or quihbet. 207, R. 29. 

Quid, 137; w. genit., 212, r. 3, N. 1 
(a.); acc. of degree, 231, a. 5, (a.); 232, 
(3.); quid? wh} .' 235, r. 11; quid sibivult? 
228, N., (b.)-, quit est quod ? w. subh, 204, 
7, N. 2; quid est cur .^ctc., 204, 7, N. 3; qui/i 
aliud quam? 209, r. 4; quid? quui vero? 
quid igitur? quid ergo ? quid enim? quid 
multa ? quid plura ? 229, r. 3, 2- 





402 


INDEX, 


C^tidam, hew declined, 138,6; how used, 
207, R. 33. 

Quidem, its meaning, 191, R. 4; its place, 
279, 3, (//.) 

Qiiilihft, how declined, 138, 5; how used, 
207, R. 34. 

Qiiifs and compds., gender, 61.1; genit., 
73, 4; 96. 

Quill, 198, 8; w. subj., 262, r. 10; for a 
re'ai.ive with non, ib., 1 ami n. 6; for tit 
non, ib.. 2; after non duhito, etc., quin? 
wb}' nott w. indie., ib., n. 9. 

Quififip., 198. 7, R., (i*.); quippe qui, w. 
3ub,j . 264. 8. (2.) 

Qn-ip/iiatn , 138, 3, («.) 

Quiqiii, 136, R. 4. 

Quirts, geiiit. sing., 74, e .4; genit. plur., 

68, II., 5. 

Quis, declined, 137; difference of gtiis 
and qiii, 137, 1; between f/Mi.saud utfr, 212, 
a 2, N. 1; quij est qiit ? w. subj., 264, 8, (2.); 
betwsen quis and aliqnis, 207, R. 30. (h.) 

Qitisnam, qiiinam, how declined, 137, 2. 

Qitisfiiom, how declinjd, 138, 3; how 
used, 207, a. 30; quippiam, w. genit., 212, 
R. 3. N. 1. 

Quisquam, how declined, 138, 3; how 
used, 207, R. 31; qtitcquam and quidqttam, 
w. genit., 212, r. 3; acc. of degree, 231, 

R 5 ; («.); 212, {3.) 

Quisque, how declined, 138, 3; how used, 
207, R. 36; with plur. verb, 209, r. 11, (4.); 
its place, 279, 14; w. a superlatire, 207, R. 
86. (b.)-, in apposition, 204, r. 10. 

Q«/.sr/j//.s, declined, 136, 4; its use, 207, 
R. 29; difference between qiiisqtiis avtdqiii- 
tuniquf, 207, R. 29; w. indie, 259, r. 4, (3.) 

Quids, how declined, 138,5; how used, 
20 1 , R. 3^. 

Quo, the correlative adv., 191, r. 1; quo, 
w. a comparative, 266, R. 16, (2.); for vt eo, 
w. subj., 262, R. 9; as adv. of place, w. gen¬ 
itive, 212, R. 4, N. 2, (6.); quo ntiki hanc 
rc?n, 209, r. 4; 227, r. 5; quo seciits, 262, 
R. 11. N.; quo ne, 262, r. 5. 

Quoad, w. subj., 263, 4; w. ejus, 212, r. 
4, N. 5. 

Quorum, quactim, etc., instead of cum 
quo. etc., 241, r. 1. 

Quod, cau.sal conj., 198, 7; construction 
of, 273. 5; refers to past time, 273, (6.); 
w. subj. oXdiro, putc etc.. 266. 3. r. ; qtiod 
scinm. etc., 264, 3; quoil, referring to a ! 
pi.'jMteding statement, 206. (14), 273. 6, (n.); 
w genit., 212, r. 3; before si, nisi, ate., 
2lH). 1 14); as acc. of degree. 232, (3.) 

Quo]us and quot, for cujus and ctii, 136, 

R. 2. 

Quoqtte and etinm, difference between, 
198. 1, R., ('/•); place of 71 / 07 //C, 279, 3, (iL) 

Qu.n, indecl., 116. 4; interrogative. 121, 
6 ; 139. 5, (3.); coustr.. 206, (16); quot sunt, 
qui? 204, 7, N. 2; quotquot, w. indie., 259, 
*• 4, (3.) 

Quoirni and quotus, interrogative, 121, 5. 

Quolies. interrog. adv., 121, 5. 

Qunius-qutsqut . its meaning 207, k. 35,(a.) 

Qki««, correlative of iion, 191, r 7; in- 
irtet^ of pestquam, 263, n. 4; — conj., 198, 
10 : oonstr , 263, 5 and r. 1^—4. 


R. 

R, before s in rcots of nouns £6, R. 1 ; 
nouns in r, genitive of, 70, 71; changed Sd 
s before 5 and t, 171, 3; r final, quantitj 
of. 299. 2. 

Rnpio, w. dat. or abl., 224, r. 2. 

Hnrum est, ut, 262, h. 3. N. 3. 

R/tslrtim, plur. rusiri or rastrn, 12, 5. 

Ratio, w. genit. of gerunds. 276, iii , R. 1. 
^l.); ratione, as abl. of manner, without 
cum. 247, 2. 

Raium est, ut, 262, r. 3, N. 3; ratum 
pr., 284, K. 1, (2-.) 

-re in 2d person sing, of passive vebs. 
162, 3. 

Re or red, inseparable prep., 196, (b ) 
197, 18; quantity of, 286, R. 3, (a.) 

Reapse, 135, R. 3. 

Rerens. abl. of, 113, E. 3 and R. 1; alsc 
adverb, 192, 4, {b.) 

Receptio, constr., 233, r. 2, N. 

Reringor, w. acc., 234, R. 1. 

Rerordor, w. genit. or acc., 216; w pr©8 
inf., 208, R. 1; w. acc. and inf.. 272, 1. 

Recte, instead of abl. of price. 252, r. 3. 

lleckoning, Roman mode of, 326, 327. 

Rectum est, ut, 262, 1 ;. 3, N. 3- 

Recuso quin, and quomintts, 262, n. 7and 
R. 11; w. ne, 271, R. 1; w. inf., ib., n., and 
271, N. 1. 

Reddo, w. two aces., 230, n. 1; pass. 210, 
R. 3, (3), (6.); w. perf. pass, part., 274, R. 4. 

Redoleo, w. acc., 232, (2.) 

Redundant nouns, 99; adjs., 116; R(9, n.; 
Ill, .v.; verbs, 185. 

Redttndo, w. abl., 250, 2, (2.) 

Reduplication, 163, r. ; of compound 
verbs, 163, e. 1; of verbs of 1st conj., 165, 
R. 2; of 2d conj., 168, n. 2; of 3d conj., 
171, E. 1, (6.); quantity of, 284, E. 2. 

Refero, w. acc. and inf., 272, x. 1. 

Refert and interest, w. genit., 214; 219; 
w. the adj. pronouns wm, etc., 219, r. 1; 
w. ad, etc., 219, r. 3; refert, pr., 285, R. 3. 

Kefertus, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) 

Reflexive pronouns, 132. 4; 139, r. 2; 
h'w used, 208; for demonstratives, 208, 
(6.1; ellipsis of, 229, r. 4; in oratio obliqua., 
266, R. 3. 

Reformido, w. inf.. 271. N. 1. 

Re^no, w. genit.. 220, 4. 

Rt^itum, declined. 46. 

Reiio. conjugated. 15S 

Relative adjs.. 104, 13; 139, r ; govern¬ 
ment of. 213, r. 1; 222 3; adverbs, w. .«uhj., 
expressing a purpose. 264, 5. R. 2; use 1 in 
definitely, w. subj., 264. r. 3. 

Relative pronouns. 136; agreement of, 
206, R. 19; ellipsis of, 206. (5.); in the caso 
of the antecedent. 206, (6.), («.); referring 
to nouns of different genders. 206. (9.);—to 
a propo.sition, 206, (13.); agreeing with a 
noun implied, 206. (11); number and gen 
der of, when referring to two or nicre 
nouns. 206. (15);—relative clauses us^-d as 
circumlocutions and to e.xpre.ss the Kn^ii.sh 
‘so called,’ 206, (19); relative adverbs for 
relative pronouns, 206, (.20); the relalivs 
adjs. quot, quantus, etc., construction o£ 





INDEX. 


40S 


206, (16); qui with snm^ Inntead of pro, 
206, (18); person of, 209, r. 6; 206, r. 19;— 
w. snbj., 2»)4; their place, 279,13; 280, iii., 
(2.), relatives as connectives, 2^30, in., (1.); 
198, II. 

llcsolving, verbs of. 273, 1, (n.) 

Relinquo, w. two datives, 227, R. 1; w. 
part, in 274, r. rtlniquitar^ w. vt 

hud the fiubj., 2(32. r. 3, N. 1. 

Keliffita acc., 234, ii., R. 3; reliquinn est 
U/, 262, R 3. 

/if n/f/j/.,cor, constr., 216. 

Rtmitto^ 229, k . 4. 1. 

Removing, verbs of, w. abl., 251. 

Rnnumror^ w. abl., 249, i., R. 1. 

R^yiunrio^ w. two accs., 230, n. 1; pass., 
QJO, R. 3, (3.). (/>.) 

Kejieated words, their place, 279, 4. 

Rf^pfnSy abl. of, 113, e.3. 

RffffrtOy w. two aoc.s., 230, N. 1;— repe- 
rtor, 210, R. 3, (3 ), (c.); 271, r. 2;— reperi- 
vnn^r, qui^ w. subj., 2G4, 6. 

Rfpo^ constr. of compds. of, 233, (3.), N. 

Rfpono^ 241, R. 5. 

AVoi^.sro, w. two accs., 231, R. 1. 

Rppugno^ with qitowinuscr 262, R. 11. 

Res^ declined, 90; use of, 205, R. 7, (2.), 

N. 1. 

Resesy genit. sing, of, 112,1; defective, 
115. 2. 

Rfsipio, w. acc., 232, (2.) 

Kesponsives, case of, 204, R. 11. 

RespubUcns declined, 91. 

Restate ut, 262, R. 3, x. 1. 

heu. abl. of, 82, e. 1, (6.) 

RttrartOy constr., 229, R. 4, 1. 

Revs^ w. genit., 213, R. 1.(3.); reum agere 
cr facere^ w. genit., 217. R. 1. 

Rhetoric, figures oi, 324. 

Rhns^ genit. of, 76, E. 3; ace. of. 80, ii. 

Rhythm, 308, (1.) 

RidtOy w. acc., 232, n. 1. 

-riynusy -riliSy quantity of. 290, e., (cOj 5. 

-rijnuSy superlatives in, 125, 1. 

RitUy as abl. of manner without cinriy 

217, 2. 

Rivers, gender of names of, 28. 

-rixy verbals in, 102, 6, (a.) See tor and 
irix. 

Rngo, w. two accs., 231, R. 1; w. vt^ 273, 
N. 4; 274, n. 7; without lUy 2G2. r. 4; 
eonstr. in pass., 234, i. 

Rjinan day, 82*3, 1hour, ib.month, 
Q2f3. 2;—names of tlie months, 326. 2, (1); 
—calendar table of, 326. 2,(6), p. 369:— 
wct*k, 326, 2, (10); names of the days of the 
week, ib.;—year, how designated, 326, 2, 
(11)money, weights and measures, 327;— 
tables of weights, etc., 327, pp. 370—373;— 
toins. 327, p. 371;—interest, how comput- 
^l, ib. 

Roct or crude form of words inflected, 
what and how found, 40, 10; formation of 
DOm ilia live sing, from in 3d decl., 56, i. 
and ir. 

Roofs of verbs, 150; general, 150, 1; 
ipecial, 150, 2; second and third, how 
^rmed, 150, 3 and 4; third, how determin¬ 
ed when there is no supine, 151, N.; first, 
s derivatives, 151, 1; irregularities in 


tenses formed from, 162, 1—6; second, do.^ 
151, 2; irregularities in tenses formed from 
162, 7—10; third, do., 151, 3; second and 
third, formation of, 1st conj., 164—166; 2cl 
conj., 167-—170; 3d conj., 171—174 4th 
conj., 175—177: second and third irregu¬ 
lar, 1st conj., 165; 2d conj., 168; 4th conj , 
176. 

-rs nouns in, genitive sing, of, 77, 2 (2.); 
genit. plur. of, S3, ii., 4. 

Hudisy 213, R. 1, and r. 4. (2.); 275. m. 

R. 1, (2.) 

declined. 57. 

Rus, construed like names of towns, in 
acc., 237, R. 4; in ahl., 254; 255; cf. 

E. 5, (^.); rurey not ruri with an adj., 255, 
R. 1. 

participle in, how declined, 10^^^ 
R. 2; its signification, 162, 14; 274. 2, r. 6; 
with shn and e^ssein serving as future sub¬ 
junctives, 162, R. 3; with essf and /inssey 
1*>2, 14, R. 3; 268, R. 4; genitive plur. of, 
162, 19; denotes intention, 274, r . 6; used 
for an p]nglish clau.se connected by ‘since, 
when,’ etc., ib.; as an apodosis, ib. 

Kutumy pr., 284, e. 1, (2.) 

S. 

5, sound of, 11; added to some roots of 
nouns of 3d decl., 56, i.; added to roots of 
verbs ending in a consonant, 171; used in¬ 
stead of t in the 3d root of some verbs, 171, 
E. 5: inserted in some verbals, 162, 5, (^.)' 

5 preceded by a consonant, nouns in, gen¬ 
der of, 62; 64; genit. of, 77; final, elided, 
305, 2. 

SdceTy w. genit. or dat., 222, R. 2, (a.) 

SarerdoSy gender of, 30; 61, 3. 

Srpjte^ comparison of, 194, 5- 

Sal^ 82, E. 1, (6.), and 66, e.; 95 ; pr., 
284, N- 1. 

SnliOy constr. of compds. of, 233, (3.), n. 

Snlteiriy 193, ii., 3. 

SnhitOy w. two accs., 230, N. 1; salutoty 
w. two nominatives, 210, r. 3, (3.) 

Salvey 183, 9. 

Saninisy genit. sing., 74, E. 4; genit, 
plnr., 83, ii., 5. 

Rnpio. w. acc., 232. (2 ) 

Sapphic verse. 304, 2; 315, ll. 

Sul, inde<*l., 115, 4; w genit., 212 

R. 4; SfUis w. dat. of gerund. 275, iii., 

R. 2, (1); sftlis hnhto^ and sutts tndii psiy 
w perf. infin., 268, r. 2; sotis rrot^ iiiJLic. 
insh^ad of suhj., 259, R. 3; degrees cf cesa- 
parison, 126, 4. 

Sftta^o, w. genit., 215, (2.) 

Satpllps, gender of, 30; 61, 2. 

SfUiatuSy w. ahl. or genit., 213, R. 5, (2 ) 

6V«//.Wo, w. damni inftctiy 217, R- 3, (c.) 
w. dat., 225, r. 

Satisfariny w, dat., 225, I. 

Sntuw, pr., 284, e . 1. 2. 

Snturnalibus, for luflis SaturnnlihvSy 253. 

N. 1 

Siitin, how declined, 105, R. 1; w. genit » 
or abl., 213, r. 5, (3.) 

Saturoy w. abl., 249, I., R. 1; w. genit 
poet., 220, 3- 








404 


INDEX 


Siitits w. abl., 246. 

Sayin?, verbs of, constr.,272; ellipsis of, 
rrO, R. i, (6.) and 3; implied, 273, 3, (6.); 
used in the passive, 272. R. 6. 

Srtin lo coinpds. of, 2.33, (3.), N. 
SraiiniiiK, 3<4, 6. 

S (Hto. w. h1)1.. 250, 2, (2.), R. 1; with 
fenit poet , 220, 3. 

Season. 314. ii. 

Set'll, pr , 2S4. E. 1, (1.) 

SetUrd. lOS, 7. R , (n.) 

^V/o, vv. auc. and iuf., 272, !<. 1: scito. 
162. 4 

S itor and Kcisritor, con.ctr., 231, R. 4. 

-s o. verh.s in, 187, ii., 2; drop sc iu 2d 
an,! 3^1 root iiefore t, 171, e. 6 

Scribe. 273. 2, (r.); w two accs., 2.30, N. 
2; w. ace. and inf., 272, N. 1, and r. 6; in 
pjus. w. predicate nominative, 210, r. 3, 
(3); srribil, w. pres. iuf. instead of perf., 
268, R. 1, (a.) 

Sf, in.separable prep., 19G, (6.) 

<Sr, w. iiiUr. 20S, 5. See sui. 

St-cfTHo, 251, N., and r. 2, n. 

Serus, for sexus^ 88, 1; 04; 211, r. 6, (4.); 
231, R. 6: adv., 101, in.; w. acc., 195, r. 3.* 
iSVd, 198,9, R.,(a.); its place, 279,3, («■); 
sed, set! i/iioif, sed rpiia, 262, r. 9; sed, sed 
tainen^ 278, r. 10; sed et, 198, 1, {d.) 

Sedeo, 210, R. 3, (2.); compde. of, 233, 
'3). N. 

Sedile, declined, 57. 

Sfdo, constr., 229, R. 4, 1. 

-setn, old termination of plup. indie, ac¬ 
tive, 162, 9. 

Semi-deponent verbs, 142, 2. 

Se.tiarius, 3<44, 2; lambic, 314. 

Setter, its degrees of comparison, 126, 4; 
gender of, 65, 2; genitive of, 78, 2, (2); 
abl. of, 113, E. 2; 115, 1; for in senectute, 
253, K. 6. 

Sentences, 200; analysLs of, 281. 
Sentiments of another, in dependent 
clauses, 266, 3. 

Seitiio, w. acc. and inf, 272, N. 1. 
Separating, verbs of, w. abl., 251. 

Se/iitro, w. abl., 251, N. 

Se<iiiitur, constr. 262, R. 3, n. 1 
-Sere, future infin. in, 162. 10. 

Sereiiu, scil rtf lo. 257, R. 9, (2.) 

Sertiio. declined. 57. 

Ser/ieits, gender of. 64. 3. 

Seye, inteli.-ive. 133. R. 2. 

S'' t'ltnUt/l serrire. 232. (1.) 

Se^Urtiiis, its value. 327, R. 8,{h.); how 
denoted, ib.; mode of reckoning, ib.; ses- 
ie.'tiiiin. ib., r. 5—7. 

Sen, or sive. 198, 2. r., (c.) 

Ships, gender of their names, 29. 

Short syllable. 282, 2. 

Showing, verbs of. constr., 272, r. 6. 

St, how pronounced. 11, e. 1. 
si or -sin, (Ir-ek datives in, 84. 

Si, nonj.. 198, 5; si for iintti, 198. 11. R., 
'c.); ji tiiiiti's. sin iiiiiiiis or <//i nliter. 198, 
6. R.. <b.): 277, R. 14; ellipsis of in the 
Jlrotasis, 261, u. 1; st with the imperfect 
Jubj., instead of the pluperfect, 261, R. 5; 
SI nihil aliud, 209, R. 4; si quis</tiam and si 
ullus, 5i07, R. 30, (b .); si non, 262, R. 5. 


Sibi svo, 228, N., (a.) 

Sic, 191, H. 5; 277, R. 12, [a,)] plaODM 
tically, 207, r. 22. 

Siniti, w suhj., 263. 2, (1.) 

Significant word, iu a preposition, 273 

2, (c.) 

Stem, .s?>.s,.etc.j 1.54, R- 4. 

Sihntio jireettnre or facere aliquid, with 
out r/o/i. 247, 2. 

Sileo, w. acc.. 2.32. >. 1; pass., 234, ill. 

Silver age of Roman literature,. 29, .3 

-siI/I. old termination of perfect It-diO- 
active. 162. 9. 

Similar constructions, 278, N. 1 and 2 

Simile, 324, 30. 

Sitnilis, w. genit. or dat.. 222, R. 2, (.1 ), 
w. dat. in imitation of the Greek, 222, r.7j 
sitniles. w. inter., 222, R. 4, (4.); w. ac ana 
atqiie, 222, R. 7, ,fin. 

Simple, .subject, 202,2;—predicate, 2)3, 
2;—sentences, 201, 10. 

Sittiul, w. abl., 195, r. 3; 241, R 2; 
simul — simul. 277, R. 8. 

Sin, 188, 5; its place, 279, 3, (a.); sin 
minus. 277, R. 14. 

Singular number, 35,1; sing, for plur., 
209, R. 11, 1, (6.) 

Sin^idfire est ut, 262, r. 3, N. 3. 

Singuli. 119. 

Sino, 273, 4; 262, r. 4. 

Siquidem, l98, 7, R., (b.) 

Siquis, how declined, 138, 2; siqttis and 
siquid, how used, 138, 2, (a.) and ^6.); 207, 
R. 29; si quis est, qui, w. subj., 264, 6. 

Sis for SI vis, 183. r. 3. 

Sisto, constr., 229, r. 4, 1. 

Sitinn, pr., 2.S4, e. 1, (2.) 

Sive or sen, 198, 2, R. ; 278, R. 8 ; its place, 
279, 3, (rt.); sive — sive, w. verb in the indie., 
259, R. 4, (3.) 

-so, -sini, -sem, old verbal terminations, 
162, 9. 

Sociiis, w. genit. or dat., 222, r. 2, (a.) 

Sodes, for si nudes, 183, R. 3. 

Solecism, 325, 2. 

Soleo, how conjugated, 142, R. 2; w. inf., 
271, -N. 1. 

Solitiis, 274, R. 3; solito, after companv- 
tives. 256, R. 9; its place. 279, n. 1. 

Solum, soluturnodo. 193, il.. 3. 

Solus, how declinetl, 107; w. relative and 
subj., 264, 10; for solum. 205, R. 15. 

Soliiliis.w. genit., 213; w. abl., 251, N.} 
soluiiim. pr.. 284, k. 3. 

Sol VO, w. abl.. 251. n. 

Sons, genit plur. of. 114, E. 3; 115,1, (fl.) 

&>).<//*.s, genit. of 112, 1; abl. of, 113, E 2: 
115, 1. (a.); 126, 5, (6.) 

Sotadic verse. 304 . 2 ; 317, i. 

Sounds of the letters, 7—12; of th* 
vowels, 7 and 8; of 'he diphthongs, 9; cf 
the consonants. 10- 12. 

Space, acc. and abl. of, 236; ellipsis ot 
236. R. 3. 

Simtium, w. genit. of gerund, 275, m., 
R. 1. (1); s/ifitio as ;ih\. of space, 236, R. 4. 

Sperto. constr., 225, IV. R. 1. 

S/iecus, 88, 1. 

Spero, w. acc. and inf, 272, n. 1. 

Spes est, w. acc. and inf, 272, M. 1 






INDEX. 


405 


^e*, w. genlt of gerunds, 275, it., r. 1, 
(1.); 5nf. after comparatives, 256, r. 9; its 
place. 279, n 1. 

S/‘o/io. w ahl.. 2')1, N. 

Spondaic verse, 310; tetnuneter, 312. 
^pvndtc, 103, R. ; w. acc. aud iuf., 272, 

K. 1 

Stanzji, 319, 4. 

l!*3, [I., 1. 

Stiitvo, 241. R. 5; 273, n- 1; 271, n. 1, 
S72, -N 1; Slat Ntinn hnni-a. 274, R. 4. 
iS/iitinn, {)r., 2.S4. e 1, (2.; 

Ster'lis. w. geiiit. or abl., 213, R. 6, (2); 
w. .v't, 213, R 4. (2.) 

and stiti, pr., 2.'^4, e. 1, (1.) 


' Still.' w. t'oniparatives, how expressed in 
Lctin. 256, R S*. {h .) 

i^ti/ntlor, 217, R. 3, (c.) 

Sin. 103. K.; w genit. of price, 214, r. 3; 
w. prcd. iiom., 210. r. 3. (2.); w. ahl., 245, 
C., 5, aud r.2; slat per nif. oonstriictiou 
of, 262, R. 11; compels, of, 233, (3.), N. 

Strophe, 319, 4. 

Stinleo., w. dat.j 223, R. 2; with gerund, 
275, III., r. 2, (1.); with the iuf. with or 
without an accusative, 271, R. 4; w. ut, 
273. 4, (a.); w. acc. id, 232, (3.) 

Studiusus, w. genit., 213, R. 1; 275, lii., 
R. 1, (2.; 

Stud Him, w. genit. of gerunds, 275, m., 
R.1.{1.) 

<SV//.r. gender of. 2S. E. 

Sundm. coiistr., 273, x. 4; 262. r- 4. 

Suh. in composition, force of. 197 ; gov¬ 
ernment of. 235. (2); constr of verbs 
comp, uuded with, 2‘24; of adj.s., 222, r. 
],(/a) 

Subject of a verb, 140; of a proposition, 
201; 202; simple, complex, and compound, 
2.12; it.s place in a sentence.279.(6.)subject 
of a depeudent cbiuse made the object of 
the leading verb, 229, it. 5, (o.) 

Subject-nominative, 209; ellipsis of, 209, 
R. 1 and 2; when wanting, 209, R. 3; w. 
inf., 209, R. 5; 239, n. 1; two or more in 
the singular with a plural verb, 209, r. 12; 
( 2 .) 

Subject-accusative, 239; ellipsis of, 239, 
R. 1—3; considered also as the accusative 
of the object after verbs of saying, showing, 
and believing. 272, r. 6. 

Subjective genitive. 211, R. 2; possessive 
pronoun used insbad of, 211, R. 3. 

Subjeclus. w. dat.. 2‘22, a. 1, (b.) 


Subjunctive. 143. 2; its tenses, 145. R. 2- 
bow u.-^ed. 260—266, and 273; various umv 
of its tenses, 260; how translated, 260. i. 
and It.. R 1; for imperative. 260, r. 6; in 
.mporsunai verbs. 1.'4. R. 2; in conditional 
clauses. 261; .after particles, 262 and 263; 
after (/»n, 264; after relative advs., 264. ii.2; 
Indefinite subj., 264, 12 and .\.; in indirect 
questions. 265; in imserted clauses. 266; in 
oratio obliqua, 266. 1 and 2; after wh.'it 
veil^s used, 273; after adjectives. 213, R. 4 
•.xchanged for acc. w. inf., 273. j, (6.), 
^ubjunctive in doubtful questions, 260, R 5; 
In repeated actions after relative pronouns 
and alv'ocba. 264,12 


Subito, 193, II., 1. 

Subordinate conjunctions, 198, ll.;--p*w 
positions. 2('l, 6 and 7. 

Substantive 26—103; substatdive pro 
nouns, 132, 133, their itender. 132. 8; de¬ 
clined. as subject nnminative. ellipsU 

of, 2l>9. R 1; ilat of. redundant. 2‘2S, 
substantive verb, 153; substantir’e clauses, 
2111. 7and S; 229. k. 5; '231. k. 3,(6.): sub- 
stantive cl.in.se inst('ad of tlieabl. after ofiis 
f'l.'243. K 1; and after d ign us a.iid ntai^ 
itus. ‘244, R 2, (6.) 

Suhur. constr., 2.35. (4.) 

Subtra<‘tive cxpre.s.sioms in numerals, 113, 
4; r2n. 2. 3. aid 5. 

Sillo. 22.3. R., 2; w. r/und. 273, n. 0 

Sii/firio, w. dat. of gerund, 275, III. 
R. 2. (1.) 

Sill, signification of. 1.32.4; decliuerl.. 1^3; 
use of. 208; 266. R. 3; 275, in., r. 1, (4.) 

SiiUis for si vtiUis. 183, R. 3. 

Sum, why called an auxiliary, 153; why 
substantive, ib.; why the copula, 140, 4; 
conjugated, 1.53; compd.s. of, 154, R. 5— r. 7; 
w. a genit. of quality, 211, r. 6, (7); iu 
expressions denoting part, property, duty, 
etc., 211, R. 8, (3); 275, R. 1, (5); denot¬ 
ing degree of estimation, 214; w. dat., 226; 
with two datives, 227; how translated, 227, 
R. 3; w. abl. denoting in regard to. 250, 
R. 3; w. an abl. of place, manner, etc., in 
the predicate, 210, R. 3, (1); w. dat. of ge¬ 
rund. '275. R. 2. (1); w. abl. of price. 252., 
R 1; w genit. of value. 214: sunt i/in, w. 
subj.. 261.6; sunt i/indnm. nonniilli. ei.e., 
264. 6. R. 4; ellipsis of as copula. ‘269, R. 4 
Jin. , ni esitP and 270. k. 3; sinn w 

predicate nom.,ete., 210. r. 3, (1); esse w 
predii-ate nom.. 271, x. 2. and K. 4. 

Sumo. w. two aces., 230, r . 2; poet, w 
inf.. 271. X. 3 

Supelli-x. genitive of, 78, 2, (2); abl. of, 
82. e. 5. (a.) 

Super, constr., 235, (3); of verbs com- 
poundeil with, 224; of adjs., 222, r. 1, (b.) 

Superjiuo. w. abl., 250. 2, (2), k. 1. 

Superjnrin. constr., 233, (1.) 

Superlative degree, 122, 6; particular use 
of. 122 r.4; formation of. 124; by m(i.riine, 
127, 1; superlative with ipiis<}ue.2^)~. r. 35; 
w. partitive genit., 212, R. 2, aud k. 4, N. 7; 
place of. 279, (7). {b.) 

Supero, w. ahl., 256, R. 16, (3 ) 

Superseden. w. abl., 242. 

Supersie.i. genit. of, 112. 2; abl. of, 118 
K. 2; 115. 1, 1‘26, 5, (,(/.); w. genit 0i 

dat., 222. R. 2. [a.) 

Sii/iersiim. w. dat., 224, 11; superest tst 
etc.. 262, R. 3. n 1. 

Su/ieriis. its degrees of com]'ari,''''n, 125 
4; .supremus or summus. 205, R. 17; sunv 
mum used adverbially, 2U5, R. 10; 234, ll. 
R. 3. 

Supines, 25 and 148, 3; few in numb?r, 
162, 11; in um. by what (-a.-ses followed 
276, I ; or what verbs dependent. 276, iI. 
w. eo. 276, II., R. 2 and 3; supines iu u 
after what adjs., 276, m., and R. 1; after 
Jos. nefas, and opus, 276, ill., B. 2; of twe 
; Byllahles, quantity of, 284, e. 1. 



'40o 


INDEX, 


Stipra^ w acc,, 196, ^ w. adjs., 127) 6; 
256. H. 13 ib.) 

iSu/7/^//fra, w. two ^tats., 227) a. 1; 229, 
a. 4. 1; w aM., 250. 2, a. 1 

Stqqdex^ piur of, 114, E. 2; 115, 

1 , (a ); w. dfit., 222, R 1, {h.) 

Supposition or concession denoted by the 
tenses of the 260, r. 3- 

SitrrqnOy \v. d:it. or a!>l., 224, R. 2. 

gender of, 30; 67, E. 4; genit. of, 
76, E. 3; dat. and atd plur., 84. e. 1. 

t>usri}no^ \v. participle in dus^ 274, R. 7- 

Sm} ensmsuspect us ^ w. genit., 213, 
ft 1 

Sims^ use of, 139, r 2; 203; referring to 
fft word in the predicate, 208, (7); for hujiis 
?fhen a noun is omitted, 20,3, (7.); "hen 
t^o nouns are united i»y cum^ 208, (7), 
denoting fit, etc., 208, (8.) 

Syllabic ciesura, 310, n. 1. 

Syllabication, 17—23. 

SyUable,s, number of, in Latin words, 17; 
pui'e and impure, 80; quantity of first and 
nilJdle, 284; of penultimate, 291; of ante¬ 
penultimate, 292; of final, 294. 

Syllepsis, 323, 1, (6.) and (3.) 

Symploce, 324, 15. 

Symeresis, 306, 1, 

Syualoepha, 3l*5, 1 

Synapheia, 3(»7, 3. 

Synchysis. 323 4, (4.) 

Syncope. 322. 4. in genit. plur. of 1st 
deoi., 43. 2; of 2d decl., 53; in cases of bos 
and S//.S, S3, r. I and 84, e. 1; of c in ob¬ 
lique cases of nouns in er of 2d decL, 48; 
of 3d decl., 71, E. 1; in perfect, etc., of 
verbs. li;2, 7; see Omission. 

Synecdoche. 324, 3. 

Synesis or synthesis, 323, 3, (4.) 

Synonymia. 324. 29. 

Synopsis of Horatian metres, 320. 

Syntax, 1; 2U0—281. 

Systole, 307, 1. 

Syzygy, 303, 4. 


T. 

« 

r, sound of, 12; before s in roots of 
nouns, 56, R. 1; in roots of verbs, 171, 3, 
and E. 5; nouns in, gender of, 66; genit. of, 
'iS; final, quantity of, 299 , 2. 

Tnceo^ w. acc., 232. n. 1. 

Tfi'dH^ w. genit., 215; w. acc. 229, r. 6. 

T-tctio w. acc., 233. R. 2, w, 

TalpUy gender of, 42, 2. 

demonstr. adj., 139,5,(3.); tails 
fc^owed by (/ui and the subj., 264, 1, N.; 
►Uip^ns of, 264, 1, (6.); 206, (,3), {a.); and 
(16); toils ttc, 198, 3, r. ; tails—quaLis^ 
806. (16 ) 

Tnm, 191, r.5,: tnm — quam^ 277, R. 11; 
(a'n with an adj. before qui and the subj., 
E6L I, N. 

To men, how used, 198, 4, r. 

Tatn^tsi, 198, 4; constr., 263, 2, (4.) 

Tamquam^ w. subj., 263, 2; used like 
^idani. 207, R. 33, (b,) Jin. i w. abl. abso¬ 
lute, 26<, jf. 4. 

Tsindem^ 191, r. 6. 


Tantum^ adv., 193, n., 3. 

Tout us, demon.strative, 139, 6, (3.), ro. 
lowed by qui H!id the subj., 2<)4, N. 
ellipsis of, 264, 1, Jj.)\ 206, (3.), and 13 

tfuitus — (pfanlns, 2(16. (16j; tanti, qitanii^ 
etc., w. Terl)S of valuing. 214. R. 1, (l.\ 
tautuji}. w. genit. plur and [»lur verb 2(*9. 

H. 11, (3),; tautum, w. genit., 212. R. 3, N. 
1; tanti after rt^/frt and interest. 219, R. 6; 
tan turn. acc. of degree, 231, r. 5; 232 3.\ 
256, R. 16, N.; lanto^ w comparatives, 2f*5, 

K. 16. (2.) 

Tontojtere. 191, r. 5. 

Tardo. 229, K. 4, 1. 

Tautology, 325. 4. 

Taxo. constr., 217, r. 5; w. abl. of pric'® 
252, R. 1. 

de. enclitic, 133, r. 2 

Tt'Vipe, 83, 1, and 94. 

Teinpero^ 223, R. 2, and (1), («•)? tem^e- 
rare viUii non posstim.^ quin., 262, n. 7. 

Temporal adjs., 104, 6; classes of, 121, 3;— 
conjunctions, 198,10. 

TempnSy ellipsis of, 205, R. 7; tempiis est 
w. inf., 270, R. 1; tempus impend ere, 21b ^ in., 
R. 2; te7npus consumere, ib,; temporis 
tmn and tunc, 212, r. 4, n. 4; w. id, hoc, 
OT idem, 234,11., r. 3; tempore or m tern* 
pore, 253, n. 1; w. genit. of gerunds, 275, 
in., R. 1, (1.) 

Tf^nax, w. genitive, 213, R. 1, (1.) 

TendOy constr., 225, iv.; 229, R. 4, 1; w. 
inf., 271, N. 1. 

Trneo, w. perf. pass, participle, 274, r, 4 
Jin. \ teneri. perf pass, part., 26S, R. 1, (fe.) 

Tenses, 144; division of, 144. 2 and 3; of 
the subj., 145, k. 2; of the imperative, 145, 
R. 3; of the infinitive, 145, R. 4; eonuection 
of, 258; principal and historical, 258, A. 
and n.; of indie, mood, used one for another, 
259; future for imperative, 259, r. 1, (4); 
the preterites of the indie, for the plupeifeci 
subj. in the apodoslsof a conditional claa3e, 
259, R. 4; of subj. mood, their use, 260, i., 
R. 1, and II., R. 1; in protasis and apodo* 
sis, 261; of inf. mood, use of, 268; tensed 
used in epistolary style, 145, li., 3; 269, a. 

I, (2.), (c.) 

Tento, constr., 273, n. 1; w. inf., 271, 
N. 1. 

Te7ius,w. genit., 221, iii.; w. abl., 241, 
r. 1; place of, 279, 10; 241, r. 1. 

•ter, nouns in, 48, 1; 71. 

Teres, in genit. sing., 112, 1; defectiv^ft 
115, 2; its degrees, 126, 4. 

Termiuational comparative, and superlsv* 
tive, 124; adjs. without such comparisoa, 
126, 5. 

Terminations of inflected wer is, 40; of 
nouns, table of, 39; of 1st decl , 41 and 44 
of2ddecl., 46; of 3d decl., 55; ff 4th decl., 
87; of 5th decl., 90; uia.scul:ne and feml 
nine affixed to the same root, 32, 3; of de¬ 
grees of compariso]! in, adjs., 124. 125; in 
adverbs, 194, 2; personal, of verbs, 147,3 
Verbal, 150; table of verbal, 152. 

Terrcp, as genit. of place, 221, R. 3. ^4) 
terra rnarit^ue, 254, R. 2; terrarurn^ 212, a'. 

N. 2. 

Terreo, w. ut or ne, 262, R. 7, N. 3 




INDEX, 


40V 


Teruncius,327, p. 871; itruncii habere, 

114, R. 1. ’ 1 

Tne, inteiisivo, 13S, ii. 2. 

Tetrameter, S<)4, 2; a prinre, 312, iv.; 
a jHisttnore, 312, v.; meiurus, 312, xi.: 
oataleotic. 312, xn. 

Tetraptotes, 1)4. 

Tetnistrophon, 319, 3 

Tii. ill t!} llaliicatiou, IS. 2. 

‘ Tliiit.’ si^ii of what mood.s, 273; instead 
of a ret eated subst., how expressed in Latin, 
r: 2(j. (f.) 

Thesi.s, in prosody, 308. 

Thiiikiiifr. ^erhs of. their oonstr , 272. 

Thou.sands. how expre.s.sed in Latin, 113, 
6, (a ) 

T.. how jironounced, 12. 

Tiaras. 45. 3 

Tihi^ its jironunciation, 7, R. 1; 19, E. 

Tigris, genit. of, 74, 2; acc. of, 80, e. 2; 
&bl. of, 82, E. 2, (b.) 

Time, advs. of, 191, it.; conjs., 198, 10; ) 
acc. of, 236; abl. of, 253; with de or 
2C3, n. 4; with intra, ib.; with in. 253, R. 5; 
eii)re.s.sed by id with a genit., 253, R. 3; 
by the abl. absolute, 257; the concrete noun 
Instead of the abstract title, 257, r. 7; mode 
of reckoning, 326; table of, 326, 6. 

Tirneo. 223, r. 2, (1.); w. ut or ne, 262, 

R 7; w. inf., 271, .\. 1. 

Timidus, w. genit.. 213, R. 1. 

Tiryns. genit. of. 77, E. 2. 
genit. in 77.2; 71.2. 

Titles, place of, 279, 9. (a.) 

‘Too’ or ‘rather’ how expressed in 
Latin, 122. r. 3; 256, r. 9. 

-lor and -trix, verbals in, 102, 6; u.sed as 
adjs., 129, 8. 

Tot. indecl., 115, 4; correlative of quot. 
121, 5; 206, (16j; syncope of, before quot. 
206. (16 ) 

Totidem. indecl., 115, 4. 

Tolies, correlative of quolies. 121, 5. 

Tolus. how declined, 107; loto. lola. abl. 
without in. 254, k. 2; lolus. instead of an 
adverb, 205i, R. 15. 

Towns, gender ( f names of, 29, 2; constr.; 
■ee Place. 

•tr. roots of nouns in, 56, ii., R. 3. 

Tradilio. w. dat., 222, r. 8. 

Trade, w. acc. and inf., 272, s. 1, and 
R. G; w. part. fut. pass., 274, r. 7, (a.); 
‘radiiur, constr., 271, R. 2; trader, constr., 
271. R 2. 

Tran / I , ilie, scil. wari. 257, r. 9. (2.) 

Trans, constr. of verbs compounded with, 
B33 1; in pas.-;ive, 234. R. 1. (i.) 

7 njicio, constr., 229, a. 4, 1; 2.33, (1.) 

Transitive verbs, 141; w. acc., 229• ellip- 
«.s of, 229, K . 3. 

Trees, gender of names of, 29 

Tres. how declined. 109. 

Trepidus, w. genit.. 213, R. 1. 

Tribne. w. two datives, 227. R. 1; w. two 
■ccS., 230, R. 2; w. part. perf. pass., 274, 

R. 7, (a.) 

Tricolon, 319, 2; tricolon tristrophon and 
■tetrastrophon, 319, 6. 

Tricorpor. abl. of, 113, e 2; 115,1. 

Triew^ts, abl. of, 113, B. 2- 


Trihemimeris, 304, 6. 

Trimeter. 304. 2, catalectie, v;i. 

Tripes, genit. ol, 112, 1; abi. t., 118 
E. 2. 

Triptote.s. 94. 

Tristrophon. .319. 3. 

Trochaic or feminine errsura, 310, rr. 1;—< 
metre. 315 and 303; tetrameter catalectio, 
315, I.; dimeter ’atalectic, 315, IV.; tr5> 
chaie pentameter or Phalecian, 315, ill. 

Tropes, 324. 

-truni, verbals in, 102. 5. 

Tritnrns. w. abl. or genit., 213, r. 5, (4.) 

7’;^. declined, 133; in nom. with alj in 
voc., 205. R. 15. (r.)-. used indefinitely. 209, 
r.7; when expressed. 209, ii. 1; ini, femi. 
nine, with masc. or neuter gerundive, 276 
III.. R. 1. (4.) 

_pim and quum, 191, r. 7: tnm — turn. 
277, R. 8; tnm and tunc, difference bo- 
tween, 191, R. 7; turn maxime. ib.; turn 
ternporis. 212, B. 4, n. 4. 

TiimuUu; as abl. of time, 253, N. 1. 

Tunc ami nunc, 191, r. 7; tunc ternporis. 
212. r. 4, N. 4. 

Tuinidus and turgidus. w. abl., 213, r 
5, (5.) 

Turris. declined, 57. 

-tus. adjs. in, 128, 7; nouns in, of Sd 
decl., 76. E. 2; i02. 7. 

Tuus. liow declined, 139; used reflexive- 
ly, 1.39 R. 2 ; tua after refert aud interest. 
219, R. 1. 

U. 

U. sound of. 7 and 8: v and r, 2. 3; u in 
genit. and voc. of (ireek nouns, 54; roots 
of nouns of 3d decl. ending in, 56, i.; dat. 
in. 89; neuters of 4th deci. in, 87; dat. in 
of 4th decl., 89. 3; in 2d root of verbs, 167, 
and 171, e. 2; increment in, 3d decl., 287, 
3; plur., 288; of verbs, 290; final, quanti¬ 
ty of. 2|/8; 28o, E. 4; m and it in 3d roots 
of verbs, 167. 

Ua. lie, etc., pronunciation of, 9, 4 and 
5; quantity of, 283, ir., e . 3. 

Uber. w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) 

-vbits, in dat. and abl.'plur., 89, 5. 

Ubi, genit., 212, r. 4, n. 2; w. indlo. 
perf. instead of pluperf., 259, r. 1, (d.)\ 
ubiubi, 191, R. 1. 

-ucis, genitives in, 78, (5); 112, 2. 

-udis. genitives in. 76, e . 1. 

-ui.<. genitives in. 76, E. 3. 

-uleus, a, uni. diminutives in, 100, 8, 

c. 1. 

Ullus. pronom. adj., 1.39, 5,_fl', 
how declined, 107; how used. 207 r. 31. 

Ulterior, its degrees, 126. 1; ultiniu^ fJt 
idli/num, 205, R. 15; how translated, 200, 
R. 17. 

Ultrix. gender of, 115,1. (h.) 

Ultra, prep.. 195, 4; adv., 191, i. 

Ultuni ire for ulcisci, 276, ii., R 2. 

-Ilium, verbals in, 102, 5. 

-ulus. a. uj7i. diminutives in, 100. 8 
128, 5. 

-um. genit. plur in instead of arum. ^ 
instead of orum. 58 nouns ending in, 40 





408 


INDEX, 


In genlt. plur. 3d decl., 83; 114;—adrs. in, 
182, T- 4. ('■ ) 

Unr^'i . 32*. p. 372. 

-urtfius, participles in, 162, 20- 

Lhi'le 'Innin. 2o5, a. 1. 

U7nt/unm, 191^ ii.; lonquam, usquam, us- 
fut, usfitayn, 19i, r. 6. 

-untis, in p;enit. of Greek nouns, 76, E. 6. 

Uniiy, declined, 107; when used in plur., 
118, R. 2; added to superlatives, 127, N. 2; 
U7UCS et alter, with verbs siiijiular, 200, 
R. 12; w. relative and subj., 264,'10; for 
iolitm, tnntu>n, etc.. 205, R- 15, (6.); u;iw7/2, 
M dcc. of degree, 232, (3.) 

JJAusqiiixijne, how declined, 138. 4. 

-vr, nouns in, gender of, 66, 67; genit. 
C-f, 70, 71. 

-wr-j, verbals in, 102, 7, R. 2. 

Urbs, in apposition to names of towns, 
237, a. 2, [b.) 

-wrio, v .'rbs in, 187, n., 3. 

‘7iris, genitives in, 76, E. 3. 

-7is. nouns in, of 2d decl., 46; exceptions 
In, 49—51; voc. sing, of, 46, n. and 62; 
of 3d decl., gender of, 66; 67; genitive of, 
76; Greek genit. in, 69, e . 3; nouns in of 
4th deed., 87—89; participles in, how de¬ 
clined, 105, R. 2; verbals in, 102, 7; final, 
quantity of, 301. 

Usitatii7n est, wt, 262, R. 3, n. 3. 

Uspiam, us(/ua7n, usque, 191, r. 6; vs- 
quaiti, w. genit., 212, r. 4, N. 2; usque, w. 
acc., 195, R. 3; 235. R. 9. 

(Jsiis, w. abl., 243; usti venit, ut, 262, 
R. 3, .\. 1; w. genit. of gerunds, 275, in., 
R. 1. (1.) 

Ut or uti, a conj.. 198, 8; itt non and 7it 
ne, ib.; w. subj., 262; its correlatives, 262, 
R. 1; ellipsis of, 262, R. 4; its meaning 
after 7netuo, etc., 262, R. 7; ut non, 262, 
R. 5, and R. 6, 2; ut—ita or sic, 277. R. 12, 
(6.); ut, ‘as,’ ellipsis of, 277, R. 17; ut, 
‘even if,' and ut 7ion, w. subj., 262, r. 2; 
ut with certain impersonal verbs a^d subj., 
262, r. 3; in questions expre.ssing indigna¬ 
tion, 270, R. 2, (a.); ut, ut prn/tin/i, etc., 
with the historical perf., indie., instead of 
the pluperf., 259, r. 1. its place, 279, 
8, (6.); ut after est with a predicate adj., 
262, R. 3, N. 4; wt credo, ut puto, etc., in 
Interposed clauses, 277, i., r. 17; ut, ‘be¬ 
cause,’ 277, 1., R. 12, (6.); ut qui, 264, 8, 2; 
ut SI. w. subj., 263, 2; ut ita dicam , 207, 
R. 33, (6.) Jin .; ut, ‘ as if,’ w. abl. absolute, 
257, N. 4; utiit. w. indie., 259, r. 4, (3); 
ellipsi.s of ut when ne precedes and et, etc., 
follow, 278, R. 6, (c.) 

Utcumque, w. indie., 259, R. 4, (3.) 

Ute), hosv declined, 107; w. dual genit., 
212, R. 2, IS. 1. 

Utercunique, how declined, 107. 

Vterhbet, uterque,ti.\\A utervis, their mean¬ 
ing and declension, 107; 139, 5, (1), (fc.); 
« trqne, use of, 207, R. 32; uterque, w. plur. 
Verb, 209, R. 11, (4.) 

Utilis, w. dat., 222, r. 1; 275, III., R. 2; 
«■ ad, 222, R. 4, (1.); utile est ut, 262, r. 3, 
N. 3; utilis, w. inf. poeticaLy, 270, R. 1, (5.); 
E76, r.2; Mliltw.s/ui/, indie, instead of subj., 
te9. R. 3‘. w. supine in u, 276, iii., b. 1. 


UtinaTTi and uti, w. subj., 263,1. 

•nitis, genitives in, 76, e. 2; 112, 2. 

Utor, w. abl., 245; w. acc., 245, I , R- 
w. two ablatives, 245, N.; utor,fruor, etc 
their gerundives, 275. n.. r. 1. 

Utjiote qui, w. subj. 264, S, (2.) 

Utrique, how used, 20 r. 32, (c.) 

Utru77i and utrumne, 198, 11. 

-utus, adjectives in. 128, 7. 

~uus, adjectives in, 129, 3. 

-ux, nouns in, genit. of, 78, 2, (6.) 

Uxor, ellipsis of, 211, R. 7. 

V. 

V, changed to 7i, 163, 2; sometimes drop* 
ped in forming the 2d root of verbs of th* 
3d conj., 171, E. 4. 

Vaco, 250, 2, r. 1. 

Vacuus, w. genit. or abl., 213, R. 5, (3.) 
cf. 251, N. 

Vado, constr., 225, rv.; 232, n. 1; 233 
(3l, N.l. 

Vfp,, w. dat., 228, 3; w. acc., 238, 2. 

Valde, 127, 2. 

Valeo, w. abl., 250, 2, r. 1; 252; w. acc., 
252, R. 4; valere or vale dico, w. dat., 225 
I., N.; w. inf., 271, n. 1. 

Vnlidus, 213, r. 5, (4.) 

Valuing, verbs of, 214, R. 2; w. genit., 
214; w. abl., 252, r. 1. 

Vaputh, 142. R. 3. 

Variable nouns, 92; adjs., 122. 

Va,v, genit. of. 72, e. 1; gender of, 62, 
E. 1, and E. 2; !^3, 2. 

-ve, 198, 2, and n. 1, p. 176; place of, 279 
3, (c.) 

Vehor, compds of, 233, (3.), N. 

Vel, 198, 2; difference between vel and 
nut, ib., K.; vel w. superlative degree, 127, 
4; w. comparatives, 256, R. 9, (6.) 

Velhn, w. subj. without ut, 260, B. 4: 
262. R. 4. 

Velleni, how used, 260, R. 2. 

Velox, constr., 222. R. 4, (2.) 

Velut, velut si, veluti, w. subj., 263, 8; 
velut, ‘as if,’ w. abl. absolute, 257, N. 4. 
Vetialis, w. abl. of price, 252. 

Ve7ido, w. abl., 252; w. genit., 214, r 8, 
N. 1. 

Veneo, 142, r. 3; 252 ; 214, r. 3, n. 1, 
Venio, w. two datives, 227, R. 1; w, ai 
or in, 225, iv.; w. dat., 225. r. 2: titiif 
7iii/ii in 7nt7ite7ii, constr., 211, r. 8, (5) 
216. R. 3. ’ ^ 

Venitur, conjugated, 184, 2, (c.) 

Verbal terminations, 152; nouns, 102 
w. acc., 233. r. 2, n.; of place, 237, R 1; 
w. dat., 222, R. 8; w. abl. of place, 255 
w. genit. of personal pronouns, 211, r. 3 
(a.); verbal adjs., 129. 

Verbs, 140—189; subject of, 140, 1 
active or transitive, 141, i.; neuter or in 
transitive, 141, ii.; neuter passive, 142, 2: 
neutral pa.ssive, 142, 3; deponent, 142, 4 
common, 142, 4, (6.); principal parts ol 
151, 4; neuter, participles of, 162, 16; in 
ceptive, 173; desiderative, 187, ii., 3: 176 
N.; irregular, 178—182; defective, 183; r© 



INDEX. 


409 


danclant, 186; verba aj^elled alike, or 
b»Tini; the same perfect or supine, 186; 
le^vation of, 187; imitative, 187, 3: fre- 

J uentative, 187, ii., 1; inceptive, 187, ii., 
; deslderative, 187, ii., 3; diminutive, 
187, n-, 4; intensive, 187, ii., 6; 187, ii., 
1, («.); composition of, 188; changes in 
composition, 189; compounds ftom simples 
not in use, 189, n. 6; agreement o^ 209, 
(6.); ellipsis of, 209, h. 4; person of with 
qui, 209, E. 6; agreeing with predicate 
nominative, 209, a. 9; with collective 
nouns, 209, n. 11; plural with two or more 
nominatives, 209, r. 12; after uterque^ etc., 
209, E. 11, (4); after a nominative with 
cum and the abl., 209, r, 12, ; after nomi¬ 

natives connected by atrf, 209, r. 12, (6); 
their place in a sentence, 279, (b.) in a 
period, 280. 

Vere and r«ro, 192, 4, n. 1. 

Vereor, w. genit. poet., 220, 1; w. ut or 
•«, 2©2, R. 7; w. inf., 271, n. 1. 

Verisimile est ut, 262, R. 3, n. 8; w. inf. 
«■ subject, 269, R. 2. 

Veritum est, w. acc., 229, r. 6. 

Vero, use of in answers, 192, 4, ». 1; 198, 
9, R., (a.); ellipsis of, 278, R. 11; its place, 
^9, 8, (c.) 

Verses, 304; combinations of in poems, 
S19. 

Versification, 802. 

Verstis, w. acc., 196, R. 8; 285, r. 9; place 
of, 279,10, (f-) 

Verto, corxBtr., 226, rv.; w. two datives, 
227, R. 1; 229, R. ^1. 

Verum est, ut, 262, r. 8, If. 8; w. inf. as 
subject, 269, r. 2; verum, conj., 198, 9; its 
place, 279, 3; verum and verunv-tamen, 
‘ I say,’ 278, R. 10; verum enimvero, 198, 
9, R., (a.); vero after comparatives, 266, 
B. 9. 

Yeseor, with abl., 246, i.; with acc., 246, 


I., R. 


Vespere, or -n, 263, N. 1. 

Yester, how declined, 189, 1; vestriim, 
183,8; used after partitives, 212, r. 2, w. 2. 

Vestio, 2^, R. 4,1. 

Yeto, 273, 2, (rf.); 262, r. 4; w. acc. and 
inf., 272, R. 6. 

Yetus, declension of, 112, 2; its superla¬ 
tive, 126,1; 126,3. 

Yid,, aol. of place without in, 264, R. 8. 

Yicem for vice, 247,1, n. 8. 

Yicinios, genit. of place, 221, R. 3, (4.); 
212, R. 4, N. 2, (d.) 

Yicinus, w. dat. or genit., 222, R. 2, (a.) 

Yietrix, 116,1, (&.); how declined as an 
129, 8. 

videlicet and scilicet, 198, 7, R., (a.); 
pr., 286, R. 4, N. 2. 

Video, w. acc. and Inf., 272, N. 1; w. ut 
or ne, 262, N. 8; vtrfsres, 260, a. 2; video 
for euro, w, ut, 278, if. 1; vtdeor, constr., 
271, R. 2; 272, r. 6. 

Viduus, constr, 218, R. 6, (4); 260, 
2 , (1 ) 

Yigeo, w. abl., 260, 2, R. 1. 

F^, abl. of, 118, ■. 8; genit. plur, of, 
114, R. 2; 116,1, (a.) 

826 , 1 , ( 2 .) 

85 


Yigilias, vtgilare, 282 

Yilis, w. abl. of price, 262. 

Yir, how declined, 48, 2. 

Yirgilius, voc. of, 62; accent of, 14 , k 

Yirgo, declined, 67. 

Virus, gender of, 61. 

Vis, declined, 86; acc. sing, ofi 79, 2, 
abl. sing., 82, e. 2; genit. plur., 88, n., 8 
94; vi and per vim, difierence between, 
247, 3, R. 4; w. genit. of gerunds, 276, m. 
R. 1, (1.) 

Yitabundus, w. acc., 233, R. 2, w. 

Vitam vivere, 232, (1.) 

Vitio creati magistratus, 247, 2. 

Vivo, w. abl., 2i5, n.j 4; w. pred. nora., 
210, R. 3, (2); tertia vivitur 234, ill. 

Fix, with part. fut. pass., 274, r. 12, 
vixdum, 277, i., R. 16. 

Vocative, 37; sing., its form. 40, 8; plur., 
40, 4; ellipsis of, 240, r. 2. 

Voco, constr., 226, r. 1 ; 230, N. 1; pass., 
210, R. 8, (8.) 

Voices, 141. 

Volucer, in genit. plur., 108, R. 2. 

Yolo, {are), compds. of, 233, (8), if. 

Yolo, conjugated, 178, 1; w. perf. inf., 
268, R. 2; w. perf. part., and ellipsis of 
esse, 270, R. 3; its construction, 271, R. 4, 
and If. 4; 273, 4 ; 262, r. 4; volens, w. dat. 
of persom 226, r. 3, volo bene and male 
alicui, 226, i., n. ; volo, w. reflexive pron., 
228, «., (6.) 

Voluntary agent of pass, verbs, 248, i.; 
ellipsis of, 141, R. 2; 248, i., r. 1; when 
expressed by per and acc.^ 247, r. 4; of 
neuter verbs, 248, R. 2; dative of voluntary 
agent, 226, ii. and iii. 

Volutum, pr., 284, R. 3. 

Fo.f, see tu, 133. 

Yoti and votorum damnatx, 217, R. 8. 

Vowels, 3, 1; sounds «f, 7 and 8; vowel, 
before a mute and liquid, its quantity, 13, 
6, and 283, iv., e. 2; before another vowel, 
quantity of, 18, 3, and 283, i.; in Greek 
words, 283, e. 6; before two consonants, 
18, 6, and 283, iv.; ending first part of a 
compound, quantity of, 286, R. 4. 

Vulgus, gender of, 61; 96. 

Vultur, gender of, 67. 


W 


IF, not used in Latin, 2, 4. 

Weight, acc. of, 236, r. 7; weights, Ro 
man, 827. 

Willingness, verbs of, consti^ 278. 4 . 
Winds, gender of names of, 28. 

Wishing, verbs of, constr., 271, r. 4. 
Words, division of, 17 -23; arrangement 
of,279; gender of as mere words, 84, 8 . 
Writers in different ages, 829. 


X, sound of, 12; its equivalents, 8, 2; 65, 
R. 2; 171,1; in syllabication, 18, 4; nouns 
in, gender of, ^ and 66; genitive o£ 
78, 2. 



410 


mDEX. 


Y, found onl; In dfeiMk wordu, 2, 6; 
Bound of, 7, R. 2; 8, *. 6; nouns in, gender 
of, 62; genitive of, 69; increment in, 8d 
decl., 287, 3; final, quantity of, 298 ; 286, 
R. 4. 

-ycAw, in genitive, 78, 2, (6.) 

-yci«, genitives in, 7^ 2, (6.) 

^disj genitives in, 77, 1. 

Yi, how pronounced, 9, 1; abl. in, 82, 
H A 


■ygw, genitives in, 78, 2, (8.) 

-ynos, Greek genitive in, 71, 2. 

-ys, nouns in, gender of, 62, 68, gww 
tive of, 77; acc. of, 80, ii.; abl. of, 82. a. o 
final, quantity of, 301. 

-ya:, nouns in, gender of, 65, 6. 

Z. 

Z, found only in words derived >>in th< 
Greek, 2, 6; its equivalents, 8, SI 
Zeufpna 823,1 (b.) and (2.) 




*>^.* •* o ^!.,.«, V - - o ^ ■ 




LI « . "'O ^ X*^ ^O 


; ; 
* ^ 



O^ % 



V 

■ <x^V a\W- % 

^ V I 




/- 

fl * '^^ono'’ 


C^ T^ rr ^ y-^ 

>d 



v<<^ 


4. Vi 

^ .Cy ^O- ^ 




.r 

s5^ Vo. ^ < V >v 





o <?i> ^ 

I <r 

O 

•>< -O' - .o> -4»v ^ v> 


c?' 







Jl- 

o 




N O 


o 95*^ 



.'?> »!>N0^ 








°2 ^ V 

S . V " - 

O o. 


14-B224 













^ R ^ ■^^■’ lUf ■S'^ ^ . 

\ s^ ^ .N 

' :: “ ^iriP^ r- v-v 

% %W/ Iw/ % 

'ov^ •^»; "^d* W 








ft A^ O -Ci>{yu-^ V « 





-z »<rV 

o^>r^^yo: ^ ^ >vr;^^V° ’ 


o 

V 





.\ V.'iXr^.V" “°I<^>*’.4” 

cT ^ 1 ^ * " 


r 4-4 i 

^ ^V A-j 

I c*’ /\ ^tf 

O. .-^^4.^ "' 





I ^ 95 ^ 

^ <t 


O . 

^ ^oA 



>n 


/ S' '\ ^ 

>0 »X* s % ^yri'^ o ,, • 


4r O 

-'^4‘ " SS-S- 
O .VA s 

o 


































































